JP7676039B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Conventional gaming machines include those that can award gaming value to players depending on the results of their games.

Some of these gaming machines enhance the enjoyment of the game by using a rainbow effect to make the light-emitting means glow in rainbow colors (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2022-075900 A

However, there was still room for further improvement in terms of increasing the entertainment value of the rainbow effects.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest of players in gaming.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine capable of acquiring judgment information (special symbol judgment information) based on the establishment of a start condition (a gaming ball has won (entered) a first start hole 45 or a second start hole 47) and awarding a gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) based on the judgment information, the gaming machine is provided with a special game execution means (main control board 110) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of variably displaying a plurality of rows of performance symbols according to the judgment information , a light-emitting means capable of emitting light (frame performance lamp 10c, board surface LED 5b, image display devices 70 to 73, LED of movable performance device 77, LED of performance button 17), and an operation means (performance button 17 , launch handle 15 ) that can be operated by a player, the operation means being a first operation means and a second operation means (launch handle 15 ) different from the first operation means (performance button 17). The performance control means can execute the performance mode for executing the variable display by a first performance mode (performance mode A) and a second performance mode (performance mode B), and can execute a customer waiting performance ( customer waiting demo performance A) that can display predetermined information (addiction warning) in a customer waiting state where the variable display is not executed, and can cause the light-emitting means to emit rainbow light (rainbow light) during execution of the variable display or during execution of the customer waiting performance, and can restrict the light-emitting means from emitting rainbow light during the display of the predetermined information, and the variable display includes a first variable display in which the path of the variation of the performance pattern of the specific column is a first path in the first performance mode, and a second variable display in which the path of the variation of the performance pattern of the specific column is a second path different from the first path in the second performance mode, and the light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting means (frame performance lamp 10c, image display device 70-73) and a second light-emitting means (board surface LED 5b, image display device 70-73) different from the first light-emitting means. In the customer waiting performance, the start of rainbow light emission in the second light emitting means can be restricted based on the operation of the first operating means (rainbow light does not occur even if the performance button 17 is pressed during the execution of the customer waiting demo performance A), but the rainbow light emission in the second light emitting means can be terminated when a start condition based on the operation of the second operating means is satisfied (rainbow light emission ends when a start winning occurs based on the operation of the launch handle 15), and in the variable display , the start of rainbow light emission in the first light emitting means can be executed based on the operation of the first operating means (rainbow light emission occurs when the performance button 17 is pressed when the variable performance decision performance is successful, a rainbow icon is displayed when the performance button 17 is pressed in the hold button performance, rainbow light emission occurs when the performance button 17 is pressed during the development to SP reach, and rainbow light emission occurs when the back button is pressed and held during SP reach), but the termination of rainbow light emission in the first light emitting means is restricted based on the operation of the first operating means (rainbow light emission in the variable performance does not end when the performance button 17 is pressed). When the variable display is started, a start performance (e.g., a pre-variation action such as a floating display, a reduced display, an enlarged display, a look-ahead effect performance, a look-ahead vibration performance) can be executed, and the start performance has a first mode (e.g., a pre-variation action such as a floating display, a reduced display, an enlarged display, a look-ahead effect performance) and a second mode different from the first mode (e.g., a look-ahead vibration performance), and the start performance can be made different between the first variable display and the second variable display (e.g., a floating display in performance mode A, a reduced display in performance mode B, and an enlarged display in performance mode C), and in the first variable display, a predetermined performance (e.g., an SP reach, an SPSP reach, an SPSP "7" reach) that anticipates the execution of the special game is more likely to be executed when the start performance of the second mode is executed (e.g., when a look-ahead vibration performance is executed rather than when a pre-variation action is executed, or when a look-ahead vibration performance is executed rather than when a look-ahead effect performance is executed) than when the start performance of the first mode is executed .

The present invention makes it possible to increase interest in gaming.

FIG. 2 is an oblique view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine. This is an oblique view of the gaming machine without the glass frame. FIG. 1 is a rear view of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of the gaming machine and peripheral devices. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of the gaming machine and peripheral devices. 4A and 4B are diagrams illustrating memory maps of a main control unit and a frame control unit. A diagram showing the relationship between the game area and the information area. FIG. 2 is a system configuration diagram of the gaming machine and peripheral devices. FIG. 2 is a diagram specifically explaining the flow of information transmission and reception. A figure showing a big win determination table for special symbols. A figure showing a special pattern determination table. A figure showing a special chart variation pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a pre-determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing modified examples of the specifications of the gaming machine. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing modified examples of the specifications of the gaming machine. A diagram showing a list of messages related to communication between the main control board and the frame control board. A diagram showing gaming machine installation information transmitted from the main control board to the frame control board. A diagram showing hall control and fraud monitoring information transmitted from the main control board to the frame control board. A diagram showing details of the hall control and fraud monitoring information transmitted from the main control board to the frame control board. A diagram showing details of the hall control and fraud monitoring information transmitted from the main control board to the frame control board. A diagram showing details of the hall control and fraud monitoring information transmitted from the main control board to the frame control board. A diagram showing a list of functions and implementation areas of the gaming machine. A diagram showing a list of functions and implementation areas of the gaming machine. A diagram showing the communication procedures between the main control board and the frame control board that enable play after the gaming machine is started. A diagram showing the communication procedures between the main control board and the frame control board that are not playable after the gaming machine is started. A diagram showing the communication procedures between the main control board and the frame control board that enter a setting change/setting confirmation state after the gaming machine is started. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a communication procedure in which the main control board determines that the communication line is disconnected. A diagram showing a communication procedure in which the frame control board determines that the communication line is disconnected. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing of a main control board. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing of a main control board. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing of a main control board. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting change process of a main control board. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting change process of a main control board. 13 is a flowchart showing the RWM clear process of the main control board. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process of a main control board. 13 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing of the main control board. 13 is a flowchart showing an input control process of a main control board. A flowchart showing the first start hole detection switch input processing of the main control board. 13 is a flowchart showing the special diagram special voltage control processing of the main control board. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern memory determination process of the main control board. 13 is a flowchart showing the acquisition upper limit management process of the main control board. 13 is a flowchart showing an increment counter update process of a main control board. 13 is a flowchart showing the acquisition upper limit device operation determination process of the main control board. 13 is a flowchart showing an error control process of the main control board. 13 is a flowchart showing the HC/fraud monitoring information management processing of the main control board. A diagram showing a list of messages related to communication between the frame control board and the dedicated unit. A diagram showing a gaming machine information notification transmitted from the frame control board to a dedicated unit. A diagram showing gaming machine performance information transmitted from the frame control board to the dedicated unit. A diagram showing gaming machine installation information transmitted from the frame control board to the dedicated unit. A diagram showing hole control and fraud monitoring information transmitted from the frame control board to the dedicated unit. A diagram showing fraud detection states 2 and 3 of hole control and fraud monitoring information. A diagram showing game information such as hall control and fraud monitoring information. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing counting notifications transmitted from the frame control board to the dedicated unit. A figure showing a loan notification sent from the dedicated unit to the frame control board. A figure showing a loan acceptance result response sent from the frame control board to the dedicated unit. A diagram showing a basic communication sequence between the frame control board and the dedicated unit. A diagram showing the startup sequence 1 of the frame control board and dedicated unit. A diagram showing the startup sequence 2 of the frame control board and dedicated unit. A diagram showing the gaming machine information notification sequence 1 of the frame control board and dedicated unit. A diagram showing the gaming machine information notification sequence 2 of the frame control board and dedicated unit. A diagram showing counting notification sequence 1 of the frame control board and dedicated unit. A diagram showing counting notification sequence 2 of the frame control board and dedicated unit. A diagram showing the frame control board and dedicated unit lending notification sequence 1. A diagram showing the frame control board and dedicated unit lending notification sequence 2. A diagram showing a recovery sequence when a dedicated PIF that connects the frame control board and the dedicated unit is disconnected. A diagram showing the notification sequence of hole control and fraud monitoring information for the frame control board and dedicated unit. 13 is a flowchart showing a main process of the frame control board. 13 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing of the frame control board. 13 is a flowchart showing the ball removal operation processing of the frame control board. 13 is a flowchart showing the gaming machine installation information receiving process of the frame control board. 13 is a flowchart showing the gaming machine information receiving process of the frame control board. 13 is a flowchart showing the number of game balls update process of the frame control board. 13 is a flowchart showing an error control process of the frame control board. 13 is a flowchart showing a severe error notification control process of the frame control board. 13 is a flowchart showing a hardware error notification control process of the frame control board. 13 is a flowchart showing a minor error notification control process of the frame control board. A figure showing the display contents and display priority order of the frame control display when various alarm events occur. 13 is a flowchart showing a display performance information calculation process for a frame control board. 13 is a flowchart showing the gaming machine performance information calculation process of the frame control board. 13 is a flowchart showing the gaming machine information notification processing of the frame control board. 13 is a flowchart showing the game ball counting process of the frame control board. 13 is a flowchart showing the game ball lending process of the frame control board. A diagram showing the processing sequence when launch is permitted after settings are changed or the RWM is cleared on the main control board. A diagram showing the processing sequence when launch is permitted or not permitted after power is restored on the main control board. A diagram showing the processing sequence when launch is permitted or not permitted after setting confirmation is performed on the main control board. A diagram showing the processing sequence when an unrecoverable error occurs in the main control board and game progress control is not possible. A diagram showing the processing sequence when the main control board controls the progress of a game or when the control of the progress of a game is restricted. A diagram showing the processing sequence when the acquisition limit device is activated on the main control board. A diagram showing the processing sequence when error control processing is performed on the main control board. A diagram showing the processing sequence when the number of game balls is not cleared or is cleared after the frame control board receives game machine installation information. A diagram showing the processing sequence when gaming machine information is received by the frame control board. A diagram showing the processing sequence when the number of game balls is updated and displayed on the frame control board. A diagram showing the processing sequence when error control processing is performed in the frame control board, resulting in launch being prohibited or permitted. 13 is a diagram showing a processing sequence when display performance information is calculated and displayed on a frame control board. FIG. A diagram showing the processing sequence when gaming machine performance information is calculated on a frame control board. A diagram showing the processing sequence when gaming machine information notification processing is performed on a frame control board. A diagram showing the processing sequence when the number of gaming balls owned by a player is counted on the frame control board or when counting is completed. A diagram showing the processing sequence when a lending process is performed upon receiving a lending notification on the frame control board, or when a lending process is not performed. 13 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the performance control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing of the performance control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing the input control processing of the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an overview of custom effect settings. 13 is a flowchart showing the predictive performance processing of the performance control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing an icon change performance determination process performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table. A diagram showing the continuous preview performance decision process of the performance control unit. A figure showing an example of a continuous preview type determination table for presentation modes A to C (normal game play state). This figure shows an example of a continuous preview type determination table for presentation modes D to F (specific game play states). A figure showing an example of a continuous preview presentation scenario determination table for presentation modes A to C (normal game play state). A figure showing an example of a continuous preview presentation scenario determination table for presentation modes D to F (specific game play states). A figure showing a variable presentation pattern determination table for presentation modes A to C. A figure showing a variable presentation pattern determination table for presentation modes D to F. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot preview performance determination process performed by the performance control unit. A figure showing an example of a pre-reach notice determination table for presentation modes A to C (normal game play state). A figure showing an example of a pre-reach notice determination table for presentation modes D to F (specific game states). FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a dialogue preview pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a step-up notice pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table. A figure showing an example of a development effect pattern determination table. A figure showing an example of a cut-in presentation pattern determination table for presentation modes A to C (normal game play state). A figure showing an example of a cut-in presentation pattern determination table for presentation modes D to F (specific game states). FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a deciding effect pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a re-lottery effect pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a confirmed effect pattern determination table. A diagram showing a presentation mode update process. 11A to 11C are diagrams showing examples of display presentations for each presentation mode. A figure showing an example of the change mode for each presentation mode. 11 is a diagram showing a type of notifiable event, a priority order of notifiable events, and a notifiable manner of notifiable events. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a type of notifiable event, a priority order of notifiable events, and a notifiable manner of notifiable events. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a type of notifiable event, a priority order of notifiable events, and a notifiable manner of notifiable events. FIG. A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event when the power is turned on. A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event when the power is turned on. 13 is a time chart showing the relationship between the initial operation of the movable presentation device when the number of game balls is cleared and when the power is restored. A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event (abnormality). A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event (abnormality). A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event (abnormality). A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event (abnormality). A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event (abnormality). A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event (abnormality). A diagram showing the relationship between a glass frame (inner frame) opening error and the ball removal operation. A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event (abnormality, etc.). A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event (abnormality, etc.). A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event (abnormality, etc.). A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event (abnormality, etc.). A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event (abnormality, etc.). 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating information output and notification modes of various events. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating information output and notification modes of various events. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the effects that are produced when various events occur. A diagram showing the relationship between the value of the increment counter and pre-reading type performance. 13 is a diagram showing a manner in which the value of an increment counter is notified. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the effects that are produced when various events occur. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the customer waiting presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram (1/3) showing advance notification. FIG. 2/3 shows advance notification. FIG. 3/3 shows advance notification. A figure showing an example of a case where the winning limit device is activated during a customer waiting performance. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of an operation notification mode of the acquisition upper limit device for each situation. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of an operation notification mode of the acquisition upper limit device for each situation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a case where power is restored during information output. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of information output timing for each situation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an occurrence of an abnormality after the acquisition upper limit device is activated. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an occurrence of an abnormality after the acquisition upper limit device is activated. A diagram showing an example of a presentation in which the number of game balls owned by a player is counted while waiting for customers. A figure showing an example of a presentation in which the number of game balls owned by a player is counted during a variable presentation. A diagram showing an example of a presentation in which the number of game balls owned by a player is counted after the acquisition limit device is activated. This is a timing chart showing the start of variable performance pattern 5. This is a timing chart showing the end of variable performance pattern 5. This is a timing chart showing the case where the winning limit device is activated while variable performance pattern 5 is being executed. This is a timing chart showing the case where the winning limit device is activated while variable performance pattern 5 is being executed. This is a timing chart showing the end of variable performance pattern 8. A figure showing an example of a performance (pseudo pattern derivation sound) during a variable performance. A figure showing an example of a performance (temporary stop sound) during a variable performance. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an operation notification mode of the acquisition upper limit device. This is a timing chart showing the end of variable performance pattern 1. A figure showing an example of a presentation during a variable presentation (temporary stop sound for each presentation mode). This is a timing chart showing the case where the winning limit device is activated while variable presentation pattern 1 is being executed. This is a timing chart showing the end of variable performance pattern 6. A figure showing an example of a presentation during a variable presentation (variable presentation pattern 6). This is a timing chart showing the case where the winning limit device is activated while variable performance pattern 6 is being executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an operation notification mode of the acquisition upper limit device. A diagram showing an example of a presentation during a variable presentation (reach line presentation). A diagram showing an example of a presentation during a variable presentation (reach line presentation). 13 is a timing chart showing the process from the customer waiting performance to the demonstration performance. This is a timing chart showing the beginning of a jackpot game from the stopped display of the SPSP reach fluctuation (jackpot). 11 is a timing chart showing the beginning and end of a jackpot game. 13 is a timing chart showing the timing from when power is restored until the customer waiting standby effect and customer waiting demo effect are executed. 13 is a timing chart showing a case where the acquisition limit device is activated during rainbow light emission. 13 is a timing chart showing a case where the acquisition limit device is activated during an abnormality notification. A figure showing an example of a presentation when the presentation mode changes after a pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device is given. A figure showing an example of a presentation when the presentation mode changes after a pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device is given. A figure showing an example of a presentation when the presentation mode changes after a pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device is given. A figure showing an example of a presentation when a pre-activation notification of the winning limit device is started during a continuous preview presentation. A figure showing an example of a presentation in which a pre-notification image related to the operation of the winning limit device is updated during a continuous preview presentation. A figure showing an example of a presentation in which a pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device is started during the effective operation period of the dialogue preview presentation. A figure showing an example of a presentation in which a pre-notification image related to the operation of the acquisition limit device is updated during a dialogue preview presentation. A figure showing an example of a presentation in which a pre-notification image related to the operation of the winning limit device is updated during the development of the variable presentation of the SP reach. A figure showing an example of a presentation in which a pre-notification image related to the operation of the winning limit device is updated during the development of the variable presentation of the SP reach. A figure showing an example of a presentation in which a pre-notification image related to the operation of the winning limit device is updated during the development of the variable presentation of the SP reach. A figure showing an example of a presentation in which a pre-notification image related to the operation of the winning limit device is updated during the effective operation period of the cut-in presentation of the SP reach variable presentation. A figure showing an example of a presentation in which a pre-notification image related to the operation of the winning limit device is updated during the effective operation period of the cut-in presentation of the SP reach variable presentation. A figure showing an example of a presentation in which a pre-notification image related to the operation of the winning limit device is updated during the effective operation period of the cut-in presentation of the SP reach variable presentation. A figure showing an example of a presentation in which the pre-activation notification of the winning limit device ends during the effective operation period of the cut-in presentation of the SP reach variable presentation. A figure showing an example of a performance when the winning limit device is activated during a continuous preview performance. A diagram showing an example of a presentation in which an acquisition limit device is activated during a dialogue preview presentation. A figure showing an example of a presentation in which an acquisition limit device is activated during the effective operation period of a cut-in presentation. A diagram showing the length of various periods of variable presentation for each presentation mode. FIG. 2 illustrates a rainbow light emitting implementation device. 11 is a timing chart showing a comparison of rainbow emission. 11 is a timing chart showing a comparison of rainbow emission. A diagram showing details of rainbow illumination during the changing performance. A diagram showing details of rainbow light emission during a jackpot game. A diagram showing details of rainbow light emission during a jackpot game. This is an example of information related to game media that is displayed in a rainbow pattern and information that is not displayed in a rainbow pattern. A figure showing an example of an advance notification being displayed during a jackpot game. FIG. 2 is a simplified diagram showing the light emitting areas of each light emitting means. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating the luminous colors of each region in rainbow emission. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of rainbow light emission (moving light emission 1). FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of rainbow light emission (moving light emission 2). FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of rainbow emission (radiative emission). 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating rainbow light emission patterns in different situations.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 1 to 4. Figure 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1, Figure 2 is a perspective view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine 1, Figure 3 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 1 without the glass frame 4, and Figure 4 is a rear view of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine 1 is provided with an outer frame 2, an inner frame 3 rotatably supported on the front side of the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported on the front side of the inner frame 3, and a gaming board 5 on which a gaming area 5a is formed where gaming balls (gaming media) flow down. The gaming board 5 is made of transparent resin.

The outer frame 2 is made up of a rectangular base frame 2a with a central opening in the front-rear direction, to which a decorative plate 2b is attached at the lower front. The outer frame 2 is fixed to the island equipment of the amusement arcade via fastening members (e.g., nails, fasteners, etc.).

The inner frame 3 has a recessed game board mounting section 25 with an open front for mounting the game board 5 from the front, and is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via a first hinge mechanism section 6 at one horizontal end (left side in FIG. 3 ), and is supported rotatably with the first hinge mechanism section 6 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the inner frame 3 is rotated like a door relative to the outer frame 2, the back side of the inner frame 3 is exposed to the front, making it possible to perform maintenance on various devices provided on the back side of the inner frame 3.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the front side of the inner frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism 7 at one horizontal end (left side in FIG. 3) so as to cover the front of the game board mounting portion 25 of the inner frame 3, and is supported rotatably with the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated like a door relative to the inner frame 3, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front portion of the inner frame 3 can be opened or closed.

In the approximate center near the top of the glass frame 4, an opening 8 (window) that opens in the front-to-back direction is formed, and a transparent member 8a (such as a glass plate or acrylic plate) is attached to cover the opening 8 from the rear, making it possible to see the opening 8 and the play area 5a of the play board 5 attached to the play board attachment part 25 of the inner frame 3 through the transparent member 8a. In addition, multiple board surface LEDs 5b are provided on the front and back sides of the play area 5a as board lighting devices 76, making it possible to decorate the play area 5a during variable performances, jackpot play, and customer waiting performances (standby, demo).

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, there are provided an audio output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having multiple decorative LEDs, an operation unit section 11 in which various operation devices (such as the performance button device 16 and selection button device 18 described below) are provided, a launch operation device 13 that can be operated to launch the game balls, and a third image display device 72 (left side sub-display device) and a fourth image display device 73 (right side sub-display device) consisting of liquid crystal displays.

The sound output devices 9 are provided at two locations on the top and two locations on the bottom of the glass frame 4, spaced apart from each other, and output background music (BGM), sound effects (SE), etc. to create a sound (music, voice) effect. A plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and create a lighting effect by changing the direction of light irradiation and the color of light emitted by each lamp (LED). The frame lighting devices 10 are also equipped with an alarm LED 10a that is controlled to light when the inner frame 3 or glass frame 4 is opened, a top lamp 10b that is controlled to light when a specific effect is executed, and a frame effect lamp 10c that is controlled to light during variable effects, jackpot play, and customer waiting effects (standby, demo).

The operation unit 11 has a shape that bulges forward, and in the center of the top surface is a presentation button device 16 that can be operated by the player, and on the left side of the top surface is a selection button device 18 that can be operated by the player, and between the presentation button device 16 and the selection button device 18 and behind the selection button device 18 is a counting button 20 that can be operated by the player, and behind the counting button 20 is a game ball number display 13a for displaying the number of game balls (game value amount) owned by the player.

In addition, an item storage area (receiving section) for placing items (such as a mobile phone, drinks, cigarettes, etc.) that the player will need to use to secure (play) the gaming machine 1 may be provided in a position on the operation unit 11 that does not overlap the game ball count display 135 (for example, a position toward the right of the top surface of the operation unit).

The effect button device 16 is provided with an effect button 17 that can be pressed by the player, an effect button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 5) that detects the pressing of the effect button 17, and a button drive device 17b (see FIG. 5) for driving the effect button 17, allowing the player to input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

The performance button 17 can perform light-emitting performance by lighting the performance button LED (full color), which is part of the frame lighting device 10 (see Figure 5), in a predetermined light-emitting state (e.g., white, red, rainbow). In addition, the driving force of the button drive motor, which is part of the button drive device 17b, can move vertically between a standby position (origin position) located below and a performance position located above, and the button position detection sensor (not shown) detects that it is in the origin position. Furthermore, the driving force of the button vibration motor, which is part of the button drive device 17b, can vibrate in a predetermined vibration state to perform a performance action.

The selection button device 18 is equipped with a joystick 19 that the player can operate in the up, down, left and right directions, and a joystick detection switch 19a (see Figure 5) for detecting operations on the joystick 19, allowing the player to input specific information into the gaming machine 1.

The counting button 20 is provided with a counting button switch 20a for detecting pressing of the counting button 20, and when operated by the player, the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, which is displayed on the game ball count display 135, can be counted (linked to identification information stored in a storage medium such as a member card or visitor card inserted into the dedicated unit 170 described later, and stored and settled on the card itself or in the hall computer described later).

The launch operation device 13 is equipped with a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a launch handle 15 rotatably attached to the base 14, a touch sensor 15a (see Figure 5) that detects when the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15, and a launch volume 15b (see Figure 5) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the launch handle 15.The launch handle light-emitting device (not shown), which is part of the frame lighting device 10 (see Figure 5), lights up in a specified light-emitting mode to create a light-emitting effect.

When a launch permission signal is input from both the main control device 110A and the frame control device 120A described later, when the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15, and when the launch volume 15b detects that the launch handle 15 is being rotated, the ball feed unit 91 described later is driven to send game balls one by one to the launch pad of the launch device 92 described later, and the game balls are launched into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the launch device 92. Note that in this embodiment, the sending of the game balls to the launch pad and the subsequent launch of the game balls are operated as a set, so that even if the hand is released from the launch handle 15 at the time when the game ball is sent to the launch pad (before the game ball is launched), the game ball is launched from the launch pad.

The third image display device 72 and the fourth image display device 73 display various effects and various game-related information according to the progress of the game. Specifically, a volume adjustment image for adjusting the volume of the game sounds output from the sound output device 9, a light intensity adjustment image for adjusting the light intensity of various lighting devices and various image displays, a customization image for customizing the game effects, etc. are displayed.

The inner frame 3 is provided with a recessed game board mounting section 25 for mounting the game board 5 from the front opening, a ball circulation mechanism 90 for collecting game balls launched from the launcher 92 into the game area 5a and supplying them back to the launcher 92 in order to circulate the game balls within the gaming machine 1, a locking mechanism 27 for locking the glass frame 4 in a closed state, a glass frame open detection switch 31a (see Figure 5) for detecting the opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4, an inner frame open detection switch 31b (see Figure 5) for detecting the opening (opening/closing) of the inner frame 3, and a radio wave detection sensor 54a (see Figure 5) for detecting abnormal radio waves.

The ball circulation mechanism 90 includes a launching device 92 for launching game balls toward the play area 5a, a ball feeding unit 91 for sending game balls one by one to the launch pad of the launching device 92, a lifting and polishing device 95 for lifting the supplied game balls while polishing them, a ball passage unit 94 for allowing game balls that have flowed down the play area 5a to flow down to the entrance of the lifting and polishing device 95 and allowing game balls lifted by the lifting and polishing device 95 to flow down to the entrance of the ball feeding unit 91, and a foul ball passage unit 93 for allowing game balls (foul balls) that have been launched by the launching device 92 but have returned without flying into the play area 5a to join the ball passage unit 94.

The ball delivery unit 91 is provided with a subtraction inlet switch 91b (see FIG. 5) for detecting game balls flowing down the ball passage unit 94, a subtraction solenoid 91a (see FIG. 5) for sending the game balls detected by the subtraction inlet switch 91b to the launching device 92, and a subtraction outlet switch 91c (see FIG. 5) for detecting game balls sent to the launching device 92 by the operation of the subtraction solenoid 91a.

The launch device 92 is provided with a launch pad (not shown) on which the game balls sent out from the ball feeding unit 91 are parked, a launch pad switch 92a (see FIG. 5) for detecting the game balls parked on the launch pad, and a launch solenoid 92b (see FIG. 5) for operating a launch hammer (not shown) for launching the game balls parked on the launch pad.

The foul ball passage unit 93 is provided with a foul ball passage (not shown) for allowing game balls (foul balls) that do not fly into the game area 5a and return to join the ball passage unit 94, and a foul ball switch 93a (see Figure 5) for detecting game balls flowing down the foul ball passage.

The rear part of the ball passage unit 94 is provided with a winning ball passage (not shown) that collects and allows the game balls that have won the various winning holes provided in the game area 5a to flow down, a winning passage count switch 94a (see FIG. 5) for detecting the game balls (winning balls) flowing down the winning ball passage, a non-winning ball passage (not shown) that collects and allows the game balls that have flowed into the out hole without winning the various winning holes to flow down, a non-winning passage count switch 94b (see FIG. 5) for detecting the game balls (out balls) flowing down the non-winning ball passage, a merging passage (not shown) that merges the game balls that have flowed down the winning passage, the game balls that have flowed down the non-winning ball passage, and the game balls that have flowed down the foul ball passage and supplies them to the lifting and polishing device 95, and a lift down switch 94d (see FIG. 5) for detecting the game balls supplied to the lifting and polishing device 95 at the downstream end of the merging passage.

In addition, the front portion of the ball passage unit 94 is provided with a lifted ball passage (not shown) for supplying game balls lifted by the lifting and polishing device 95 to the ball feeding unit 91, a lift up switch 94c (see Figure 5) for detecting game balls lifted by the lifting and polishing device 95 at the upstream end of the lifted ball passage, an excess sensor 94e (see Figure 5) provided in the midstream portion of the lifted ball passage (downstream of the lift up switch 94c) for detecting an excess (surplus) of game balls (circulating game balls) waiting in the lifted ball passage, a deficiency sensor 94f (see Figure 5) provided in the downstream portion of the lifted ball passage (downstream of the excess sensor 94e) for detecting a deficiency (shortage) of game balls (circulating game balls) waiting in the lifted ball passage, and a ball removal lever (not shown) for removing game balls from the gaming machine through a ball removal port (not shown) provided at the downstream end of the lifted ball passage (downstream of the deficiency sensor 94f).

The lifting and polishing device 95 is provided with a lift section (not shown) for lifting game balls using the driving force of a motor, a lift origin switch 95b (not shown) for checking the origin position of the lift section, an abrasive (not shown) for polishing the game balls lifted by the lift section, and an abrasive confirmation switch 95a (not shown) for detecting that the abrasive is attached.

The locking mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board attachment portion 25, and the front end of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed on the front side of the glass frame 4. When a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock on the inner frame 3 is released, allowing the inner frame 3 to be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the lock on the glass frame 4 is released, allowing the glass frame 4 to be opened and closed.

Curved inner and outer rails 35 and 36 are provided near the outer edge of the game board 5, and the area surrounded by the inner and outer rails 35 and 36 forms a game area 5a into which game balls can flow. A launched ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner and outer rails 35 and 36, which guides game balls launched by the launching device 92 to the upstream part of the game area 5a. An outlet 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the game area 5a to guide the game balls that have flowed down outside the game area (ball passage unit 94).

A decorative frame 40 is provided in the approximate center of the play area 5a, which is a frame-shaped area known as a center case that restricts the entry of game balls into the interior. This decorative frame 40 divides the play area 5a into a left play area where game balls launched with a first launch force flow down, and a right play area where game balls launched with a second launch force that is stronger than the first launch force flow down, and the left play area and the right play area are connected below the decorative frame 40.

A warp device 41 is provided on the left side of the decorative frame 40 to guide the game balls flowing down the left side game area into the interior of the decorative frame 40, and a stage section 42 is provided at the bottom of the decorative frame 40 to roll the game balls introduced into the decorative frame 40 by the warp device 41 and cause them to flow down below the decorative frame 40.

Three general winning openings 43 through which game balls can always win are provided at intervals at the lower left side of the decorative frame 40, and one general winning opening 43 through which game balls can always win is provided at the lower right side of the decorative frame 40. When a game ball that has won (entered) this general winning opening 43 is detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a (see FIG. 6), a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., five) are added as prize balls (awarded a game bonus) to the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, and the number of game balls displayed on the game ball number display 135 and the frame control display 125 described later is updated.

One of the three general winning openings 43 located at the bottom left of the decorative frame 40 (the one on the far left) also serves as the starting area for the normal symbol, and when a game ball that has entered this general winning opening 43 is detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the right to make a winning judgment to determine whether or not to play the auxiliary game described below (opening of the second starting opening 47 described below) is granted (normal symbol judgment information described below is stored).

Below the stage section 42 is a first start hole 45 (first special symbol start winning area) where game balls can always win (enter), and when a game ball that has won (entered) this first start hole 45 is detected by the first start hole detection switch 45a (see FIG. 6), a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., three) are added as prize balls (a game bonus is awarded) to the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, and the number of game balls displayed on the game ball number display 135 and the frame control display 125 described later are updated. In addition, the right to make a jackpot determination as to whether or not to play a special game (jackpot game) is granted (special symbol determination information described later is stored).

Below the decorative frame 40 and diagonally below and to the right of the first starting hole 45, there is a variable starting section 46 that can be changed from a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter (enter the hole) to an open state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a winning result is obtained in the winning determination described below).

The variable starting section 46 has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. 1) to form a flow path for the game ball, and is provided with a second starting hole opening/closing member 48 that can move in the front-back direction, a second starting hole 47 (starting winning area of the second special pattern) that opens upward directly below the second starting hole opening/closing member 48, a second starting hole detection switch 47a (see FIG. 6) that detects a game ball that has won (entered) the second starting hole 47, and a second starting hole opening/closing solenoid 48b (see FIG. 6) that converts the second starting hole 47 to a closed state by moving the second starting hole opening/closing member 48 forward (winning restriction position) and converts the second starting hole 47 to an open state by moving the second starting hole opening/closing member 48 backward (winning permission position).

When a game ball enters the second start hole 47 that has been opened during the auxiliary game described below and is detected by the second start hole detection switch 47a (see FIG. 6), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, two balls) are added as prize balls (a game bonus is awarded) to the number of game balls owned by the player, and the number of game balls displayed on the game ball count display 135 and the frame control display 125 described below is updated. In addition, the right to make a jackpot determination as to whether or not to play a special game (jackpot game) is granted (special chart determination information described below is stored).

In the right game area to the right of the decorative frame 40, there is a normal gate 44 (starting area for normal symbols) through which game balls can always pass. When a game ball that has passed through the normal gate 44 is detected by the gate detection switch 44a (see FIG. 6), no prize balls (game bonus) are awarded, but the player is given the right to make a winning judgment as to whether or not to play the auxiliary game (opening of the second starting hole 47 described below) (normal symbol judgment information described below is stored). Note that game balls are easier to win (pass) through the normal gate 44 than through the general winning hole 43, which also serves as the starting area for the normal symbols described above.

Below the normal gate 44, there is a variable winning section 49 (variable winning device) that can be changed from a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win (enter the prize) to an open state in which it is possible or easy to win based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination).

The variable prize winning section 49 (variable prize winning device) has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (right side in Figure 1) to form a flow path for game balls, and is provided with a large prize winning opening opening/closing member 51 that can move forward and backward, a large prize winning opening 50 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the large prize winning opening opening/closing member 51, a large prize winning opening detection switch 50a (see Figure 6) that detects game balls that have won (entered) the large prize winning opening 50, and a large prize winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b (see Figure 6) that converts the large prize winning opening 50 to a closed state by moving the large prize winning opening opening/closing member 51 forward (winning restriction position) and converts the large prize winning opening 50 to an open state by moving the large prize winning opening opening/closing member 51 backward (winning permitted position).

Then, when the large prize opening opening member 51 moves backwards and the large prize opening 50 is converted from a closed state to an open state during a jackpot game described later, and a game ball that has flowed down the top surface of the large prize opening opening member 51 or that has reached the large prize opening 50 enters the large prize opening 50 and is detected by the large prize opening detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are added as prize balls (a game bonus) to the number of game balls owned by the player, and the number of game balls displayed on the game ball number display 135 and the frame control display 125 described later are updated.

The game balls launched into the left-hand game area will either flow directly down along the outer edge of the decorative frame 40, or flow into the warp device 41 and then flow down through the stage section 42, and will enter one of the three general winning openings 43 or the first starting opening 45 located below the decorative frame 40, or will flow into the out opening 39. Therefore, they will not enter (pass through) the general winning gate 44, general winning opening 43, or variable winning section 49 (large winning opening 50) located in the right-hand game area.

In addition, game balls launched into the right-side play area flow down through the flow path on the right side of the decorative frame 40, and after almost all of them pass through the normal gate 44, they will win one of the general winning openings 43, the variable starting section 46 (second starting opening 47), and the variable winning section 49 (large winning opening 50) provided in the right-side play area, or flow into the outlet 39. Therefore, they will not win in the general winning opening 43 or the first starting opening 45 provided in the left-side play area.

On the back side of the game board 5, there are provided a safe ball flow path that accepts safe balls (winning balls) that have won the general winning port 43, the first starting port 45, the second starting port 47, and the large winning port 50, and allows them to flow down and then into the winning ball passage of the ball passage unit 94, and an out ball flow path that accepts out balls (non-winning balls) that have flowed into the out port 39, and allows them to flow down and then into the non-winning ball passage of the ball passage unit 94, and an out ball detection switch 39a (see Figure 6) is provided at the most downstream part of the out ball flow path to detect out balls.

Outside the play area 5a, there is provided a main information display device 59 consisting of a first special symbol display device 60, a second special symbol display device 61, a normal symbol display device 62, a first special symbol reserved indicator 63, a second special symbol reserved indicator 64, a normal symbol reserved indicator 65, a round count indicator 66, a right hit indicator 67, a status confirmation indicator 68, and a game status indicator (not shown). This main information display device 59 is composed of multiple LEDs.

The first special symbol display 60 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of a jackpot determination for a first special symbol, which is made based on the entry (entry) of a game ball into the first starting hole 45, the second special symbol display 61 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of a jackpot determination for a second special symbol, which is made based on the entry (entry) of a game ball into the second starting hole 47, and the normal symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of a hit determination for a normal symbol, which is made based on the entry (passage, entry) of a game ball into the general winning hole 43 or the normal gate 44, which also serve as the starting area for the normal symbol.

The jackpot determination corresponds to obtaining special symbol determination information (random number value for jackpot determination, random number value for special symbol determination, random number value for reach determination, random number value for special symbol fluctuation pattern determination, etc.) when the game ball enters (enters) the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47, and determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game based on the obtained special symbol determination information.

When a jackpot is determined based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 45, the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a varying manner, and after a predetermined time has passed, the first special symbol is displayed stationarily to notify the result of the determination. When a jackpot is determined based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 47, the second special symbol is displayed stationarily to notify the result of the determination, and after a predetermined time has passed, the second special symbol is displayed stationarily to notify the result of the determination.

The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are each composed of eight LEDs, and the lighting state of the LEDs changes (moving lighting) at a predetermined cycle (32 ms) when each special symbol changes. When a special symbol is displayed in a static state, the LEDs light up in a manner that notifies the result of the jackpot determination (jackpot state, miss state).

In this embodiment, a "jackpot" refers to a state in which it has been determined in the jackpot determination that a jackpot game (special game) will be played. A "jackpot game" refers to a game state that is advantageous to a player who plays a round game in which the big prize opening 50 is converted from a closed state to an open state in a predetermined manner a predetermined number of times (e.g., 4 times, 10 times, etc.) with intervals in between, and in which the player is likely to win prize balls.

The maximum number of times the big prize opening 50 can be opened and the maximum opening time for each round of play are preset, but if a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) enter the big prize opening, one round of play ends even before the maximum number of times or maximum opening time is reached. In this embodiment, it is possible to play one of several types of big prize games (special games) that differ in the degree of advantage given to the player.

A hit determination corresponds to obtaining normal symbol determination information (random number value for hit determination, random number value for normal symbol determination, random number value for normal symbol variation pattern determination, etc.) based on the winning (passing through, entering) of a game ball into the normal winning opening 43 or normal symbol gate 44, which also serve as the starting area for the normal symbol, and determining whether or not to execute an auxiliary game based on the obtained normal symbol determination information. When a hit determination is made, the normal symbol display 62 displays the variation of the normal symbol, and after a predetermined time has passed, a stationary normal symbol display is made to notify the judgment result.

The normal symbol display 62 is composed of three LEDs, and the LEDs flash at a predetermined interval or sequence when displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner. When displaying a normal symbol in a static manner, the LEDs light up in a manner that notifies the result of the auxiliary game judgment (win or miss).

In this embodiment, "win" refers to a state in which it has been determined in the auxiliary game judgment that an auxiliary game (a winning game) will be executed. "Auxiliary game" refers to a game state in which the second starting hole 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

The maximum number of times the second start hole 47 can be opened and the maximum opening time during the auxiliary game (winning game) are preset, but the auxiliary game (winning game) ends when a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) enter the second start hole 47 even before the maximum number of times the balls can be opened and the maximum opening time are reached. In other words, the "auxiliary game" is a game state in which the conditions for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are likely to be met. In this embodiment, multiple types of auxiliary games (winning games) are provided, each with a different degree of advantage to the player.

The first special symbol reserved indicator 63 is composed of two LEDs, and is intended to display the first reserved number (U1), which is the number of special symbol determination information (first reserved) stored when a gaming ball enters (enters) the first starting hole 45, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of first reserved items. Note that up to four first reserved items can be stored, but the number may be more or less than four.

The second special symbol reserve indicator 64 is composed of two LEDs, and is intended to display the second reserve number (U2), which is the number of special symbol determination information (second reserve) stored when a game ball enters (enters) the second starting hole 47, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of second reserves. Note that, although a maximum of four second reserves can be stored, the number may be less or more than four, or no second reserves may be stored.

The normal symbol reserve indicator 65 is composed of two LEDs, and is intended to display the number of reserved normal symbols, which is the number of normal symbol judgment information (reserved normal symbols) stored when a game ball enters (passes) the normal symbol gate 44, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of reserved normal symbols. Note that up to four reserved normal symbols can be stored, but the number may be less or more than four, or no reserved normal symbols may be stored.

The first special symbol display 60 and/or the second special symbol display 61 can be configured with a seven-segment LED. For example, if the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot, numbers such as "3" or "7" can be displayed as static numbers, and if a jackpot is determined to be a miss, a static "-" can be displayed, and during the varying display, the light can be turned off and the "-" can be displayed alternately.

The round number indicator 66 is made up of six LEDs and is intended to display the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game) occurs. When a jackpot game starts, the LEDs start to light up in a predetermined manner indicating the number of rounds, the LEDs continue to light up during the jackpot game, and when the jackpot game ends, the LEDs are turned off. For example, if the jackpot game has four rounds, only the leftmost LED lights up, and if the jackpot game has ten rounds, all LEDs light up.

The right-hit indicator 67 is composed of one LED and is used to issue a right-hit notification that prompts the player to fire the game ball toward the right-side game area (a so-called right hit). Basically, the LED does not light up during normal game play, but lights up during a jackpot state (special game), during a special probability game state (described later), and during a specific time-saving game state.

The status confirmation indicator 68 is composed of one LED and is used to notify the player that the time-saving mode is in effect. When the time-saving mode begins, the LED lights up, and when the time-saving mode ends, the LED goes out.

The game status indicator (not shown) is composed of one LED and is used to notify the player that the game is in a special probability game state or a time-limited game state. When the game machine 1 is powered on and the game is in a special probability game state or a time-limited game state, the LED lights up, and when the special probability game state or the time-limited game state ends (the game status changes), the LED goes out.

Inside the play area 5a, a sub information display device 80 is provided, which is made up of a sub first change indicator, a sub second change indicator, a sub first hold indicator, a sub second hold indicator, a sub regular map change indicator, a sub regular map hold indicator, and a sub right-hit indicator. This sub information display device 80 is basically composed of LEDs.

The sub-first variable indicator is for displaying (informing) whether or not the first special symbol is being displayed, and the sub-second variable indicator is for displaying (informing) whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed, and each is composed of one LED. Then, when the display of the corresponding special symbol begins to change, the LED flashes (on for 0.5 seconds → off for 0.5 seconds) at a predetermined cycle (1 second) to display the first lamp symbol LZ1 or the second lamp symbol LZ2, and goes out when the corresponding special symbol is displayed stationary.

The result of the special symbol jackpot determination may be announced on the sub-first variation indicator or the sub-second variation indicator. In this case, the LED may be lit in the case of a jackpot and turned off in the case of a miss.

The sub-first hold indicator is for displaying the number of first hold information items (first hold number) described below, and the sub-second hold indicator is for displaying the number of second hold information items (second hold number) described below, and each is composed of two LEDs. When the hold number is "0", the left and right LEDs are off, when the hold number is "1", the left LED is on and the right LED is off, when the hold number is "2", the left and right LEDs are on, when the hold number is "3", the left LED flashes and the right LED is on, and when the hold number is "4", the left and right LEDs flash.

The sub-regular symbol variation display is used to display (announce) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variation display of the regular symbol starts, the LED blinks (varies) at a specified interval. Then, when the regular symbol is displayed in a static state, the mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights up in the case of a win, and goes out in the case of a loss) is displayed in a static state.

In addition, the sub-regular pattern change indicator may be configured to flash while displaying a regular pattern change and to light up or go out when the regular pattern stops, so that it is possible to know whether or not the regular pattern change is being displayed.

The sub-regular map reserve indicator is used to display the number of reserved regular map memories (regular map reserve number) and is composed of two LEDs. When the regular map reserve number is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the regular map reserve number is "1", the left LED is lit and the right LED is turned off, when the regular map reserve number is "2", the left and right LEDs are lit, when the regular map reserve number is "3", the left LED flashes and the right LED is lit, and when the regular map reserve number is "4", the left and right LEDs flash.

The sub right-hit indicator is intended to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the right-hand area of the game area 5a (so-called right hit), and is composed of one LED. The LED lights up during the jackpot state (special game) and the time-saving state, and is turned off in other game states.

A first image display device 70 (main display device) consisting of a liquid crystal display is provided at the back of the performance space 40a defined inside the decorative frame 40, a second image display device 71 (central sub-display device) consisting of a liquid crystal display smaller in size and display area than the first image display device 70 is provided at the bottom of the performance space 40a and in front of the first image display device 70, and a movable performance device 77 for executing action performances is provided at the top of the performance space 40a.

The first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 display various effects according to the progress of the game. The effects include a customer waiting demo effect that is performed when the variable display of the special symbol is not being executed, a variable effect involving the variable display of multiple performance symbols 70a that is performed when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, a variable display (update variable) of the special symbol TZ (the so-called fourth symbol) that is performed when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and a jackpot effect that is performed during the execution of a jackpot game.

The second image display device 71 can also perform a moving effect by moving using a liquid crystal movable device (not shown) composed of a solenoid, motor, etc. while the first image display device 70 is performing a moving effect.

Specifically, the movement effect is achieved by vertical movement (rising and descending) between a standby position (lower position) located near the end of the first image display device 70 and a performance position (upper position) located near the center of the first image display device 70. Note that the movement direction of the second image display device 71 may be left-right or front-back, or the movement effect may be achieved by operating the performance button 17.

The display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 includes a variable display area for displaying three performance patterns 70a (left pattern, center pattern, right pattern) and a display area for executing a display performance (such as displaying a background image) according to the performance mode related to the execution of the variable performance.

The performance pattern 70a is composed of patterns showing the numbers from "1" to "9", for example, and starts to change in response to the start of the changing display of the special pattern executed by the first special pattern display device 60 and the second special pattern display device 61, and stops in response to the stop of the changing display of the special pattern. For example, the numbers "3" and "7" of the performance pattern 70a are decorated in red, the numbers "1", "5", and "9" are decorated in green, and the numbers "2", "4", "6", and "8" are decorated in blue. The performance pattern 70a may also use patterns showing the alphabet such as "A" to "F".

The performance symbols 70a are displayed stationary for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) in a state that notifies the result of the jackpot determination (miss state, jackpot state). A jackpot state is a combination of the same performance symbols 70a, such as "777" or "555," and a miss state is any other state.

The display of the effect pattern 70a changes in a vertical scroll mode, but it may also scroll horizontally, or it may switch on the spot or rotate (spin).

In addition, during the changing display (changing performance) of the performance pattern 70a, various performance images such as background images and characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 depending on the result of the jackpot determination, thereby increasing the player's anticipation for the execution of the jackpot game (special game).

The first image display device 70 is provided with a first hold icon display area 70B for displaying a number of first hold icons (first hold information) corresponding to the first hold number (U1) in normal play mode, a second hold icon display area 70D for displaying a number of second hold icons (second hold information) corresponding to the second hold number (U2) in time-saving play mode, an icon display area 70C for displaying the icon (execution information) indicating that a variable presentation is being executed, a first hold number display area 70E for displaying the first hold number (U1) numerically, and a second hold number display area 70F for displaying the second hold number (U2) numerically.

The first hold icon display area 70B is divided into a first display section (first area), a second display section (second area), a third display section (third area), and a fourth display section (fourth area) from the side closest to the icon display area 70C, and the first display section to the fourth display section display a number of first hold icons corresponding to the first hold number (U1).

Specifically, in the first hold icon display area, the first display section of 70B displays the first hold icon indicating the first hold information in which the first special symbol variable display is executed first, the second display section displays the first hold icon indicating the first hold information in which the first special symbol variable display is executed second, the third display section displays the first hold icon indicating the first hold information in which the first special symbol variable display is executed third, and the fourth display section displays the first hold icon indicating the first hold information in which the first special symbol variable display is executed fourth.

The second hold icon display area 70D is divided into a first display section (first area), a second display section (second area), a third display section (third area), and a fourth display section (fourth area) from the left, and the first to fourth display sections display a number of second hold icons corresponding to the second hold number (U2).

Specifically, in the second hold icon display area 70D, the first display section displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special pattern is executed first, the second display section displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special pattern is executed second, the third display section displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special pattern is executed third, and the fourth display section displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special pattern is executed fourth.

The icon display area 70C is formed directly above a pedestal image to clearly distinguish it from the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D, and the icon is displayed as if it is sitting or floating on top of this pedestal image.

Specifically, as the variable display of the first special pattern (performance pattern 70a) begins, the first reserved icons displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B move (shift) one by one toward the icon display area 70C, and the first reserved icon displayed in the first display section of the first reserved icon display area 70B moves (shifts) to the icon display area 70C, becoming the icon, and the icon disappears (is erased) when the variable display of the first special pattern (performance pattern 70a) ends. In other words, a disappearance (erasing) performance of the icon is performed.

In addition, as the display of the second special pattern (performance pattern 70a) begins, the second reserved icons displayed in the second reserved icon display area 70D move (shift) one by one toward the icon display area 70C, and the second reserved icon displayed in the first display section of the second reserved icon display area 70D moves (shifts) to the icon display area 70C, becoming the icon, and the icon disappears (is erased) when the display of the second special pattern (performance pattern 70a) ends. Note that the icon may be made to disappear during the display of the special pattern (performance pattern 70a).

The movable performance device 77 has a first movable member 77a and a second movable member 77b that can be operated, and can perform a motion performance by making the first movable member 77a and the second movable member 77b perform a predetermined motion during a variable performance or a big win game performance executed by the first image display device 70. In addition, the first movable member 77a and the second movable member 77b are provided with a board lighting device 76 having multiple decorative LEDs, and can emit light in a predetermined manner while the motion performance is being executed.

Specifically, the first movable member 77a moves (rising and descending) between a standby position located toward the end (upper) of the first image display device 70 and a performance position located toward the center (lower) of the first image display device 70. The second movable member 77b moves between a standby position that covers a portion of the front of the first movable member 77a and a performance position where it retreats from the front of the first movable member 77a.

On the back side of the game board 5, there is a main control device 110A that incorporates a main control board 110 that controls the progress of the game, a presentation control device 130A that incorporates a presentation control board 130 that controls the presentation of the game, and an upper cover member 23 made of transparent resin that covers the rear of the main control device 110A and the presentation control device 130A, and the main control device 110A and the presentation control device 130A are arranged so that they are lined up one above the other.

At the rear of the performance control device 130A, a changeover switch 22 is provided for switching to one of a number of adjustment modes in which the volume of the performance sound output from the audio output device 9 and the reference value of the light intensity of the various light sources (various lighting devices, various display devices) are set, and in the normal state, the rear is covered by an upper cover member 23.

On the back side of the inner frame 3, there is a frame control device 120A (value control device) incorporating a frame control board 120 that controls the number of game balls (game value amount) owned by the player and controls information communication with the dedicated unit 170, a power supply device 160A incorporating a power supply board 160, a lending device connection terminal board 100 provided with a lending device connection terminal 101 for connecting dedicated wiring for communication with the dedicated unit 170 installed alongside the gaming machine 1, and a lower cover member 120B made of transparent resin that covers the upper rear of the frame control device 120A.

The power supply unit 160A is located near one of the left and right ends of the lower part of the inner frame 3 (the right side in Figure 4), and on one of the left and right sides (the part near the rotation axis of the inner frame 3 on the right side in Figure 4), there is provided an outlet for the power cord with a power plug 161 at the end, as well as a power switch 164 that can be turned ON and OFF.

The frame control device 120A is positioned so that it overlaps the rear of the power supply device 160A, toward the other left or right side of the inner frame 3 (near the free rotation end of the inner frame 3, which is the left side in Figure 4), so that the power cord outlet and power switch of the power supply device 160A are exposed at the rear.

A rental device connection terminal board 100 for communicating with the dedicated unit 170 is provided on the back side of the inner frame 3 above the power switch 164, and the rental device connection terminal board 100 is provided with a rental device connection terminal 101 into which a connector provided at the end of a dedicated cable for communicating with the dedicated unit 170 is inserted.

The frame control board 120 built into the frame control device 120A is provided with a frame control display 125 for displaying the number of game balls (game value amount) owned by the player, similar to the game ball count display 135 provided in the glass frame 4, but the game ball count display 135 and the frame control display 125 are offset in the vertical and horizontal directions of the gaming machine 1. Specifically, the game ball count display 135 is disposed closer to the rotation axis of the glass frame 4, and the frame control display 125 is disposed lower than the game ball count display 135 and closer to the free rotation end of the inner frame 3.

In this way, by arranging the game ball count display 135 on the front side of the gaming machine closer to the rotation axis of the glass frame 4, even when the gaming store clerk opens the inner frame 3 or the glass frame 4, the movement range of the game ball count display 135 is small and the visibility of the game ball count display 135 is not extremely reduced, making it possible to improve the convenience of the gaming store clerk and the player when checking the display contents of the game ball count display 135.

In addition, because the frame control display 125 on the back side of the gaming machine is located near the free rotation end of the inner frame 3, when the gaming store clerk opens the inner frame 3 to check the frame control display 125, the frame control display 125 is easier to see than if the frame control display 125 was located closer to the rotation axis of the inner frame 3, making it possible to improve the convenience of the gaming store clerk when checking the display content of the frame control display 125.

The lower cover member 120B covers only the upper side of the frame control device 120A (such as the various female connectors 127a to 127f exposed from the frame control board case 300 described later), and does not cover the various buttons provided on the lower side of the frame control device 120A (the game ball count clear button 121b related to the game ball count clear switch 121 described later, the ball removal button 122b related to the ball removal switch 122, and the error reset button 123b related to the error reset switch 123 described later). This makes it easier to operate the various buttons provided on the lower side of the frame control device 120A (the game ball count clear button 121b related to the game ball count clear switch 121 described later, the ball removal button 122b related to the ball removal switch 122, and the error reset button 123b related to the error reset switch 123 described later), which improves the convenience of the game store staff.

The lower cover member 120B is also designed not to cover the various stickers (the frame control number sticker 308 and the operation guide sticker 309 described below) attached to the frame control device 120A, or the frame control indicator 125 mounted on the frame control board 120. Therefore, the lower cover member 120B does not obstruct the visibility of the various stickers and the frame control indicator 125, which improves convenience for game store staff.

In addition, a winning limit device operation indicator for displaying the operation status of the winning limit device described later may be provided on the front side of the glass frame 4. The winning limit device operation indicator may be configured with an LED or 7-segment display that lights up when the winning limit device is operating, or the winning limit device operation indicator may be configured with a sliding panel that can be operated by game store staff (it cannot be operated when the glass frame 4 is closed, but can be operated when the glass frame 4 is open), and the panel section may slide to display the inactive state when the winning limit device is not operating, and slide to display the active state when it is operating.

(Block diagram of the entire gaming machine)
Next, block diagrams of the gaming machine 1 and peripheral devices according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 5 and FIG.

First, the gaming machine 1 uses gaming balls (gaming media) that are used in conventional pachinko gaming machines, but the gaming balls are not discharged outside the gaming machine 1 (to the player's hand) but circulate within the gaming machine, so the player cannot touch the gaming balls. Therefore, the total number of gaming balls displayed on the "gaming ball count display 135" and the "frame control display 125" is information recorded by electromagnetic means (for example, addition by ball lending or prize balls, subtraction by firing). In this embodiment, for convenience, the term "payout" of gaming balls is used, but this does not mean that gaming balls are paid out outside the gaming machine as in conventional pachinko gaming machines, but rather means the above-mentioned addition.

This makes it possible to prevent people from bringing game balls into game establishments and playing games there. It also makes it possible to prevent people from tampering with game balls (for example, tying string to game balls, applying oil to game balls, using game balls of a different size than the standard size, etc.) in order to obtain game balls illegally.

The game balls used in the game machine 1 may be the same as those used in conventional pachinko game machines (game balls that react to magnets), or they may be non-magnetic (for example, stainless steel). The former reduces the cost of manufacturing new game balls, while the latter makes it possible to create a game machine that is more resistant to fraud. When using game balls that do not react to magnets, a magnet detector may be placed on the ball path to monitor the game balls that react to magnets in order to prevent them from being mixed in with the game balls that react to magnets.

The main control board 110 controls the overall progress of the game (basic operations). The main control board 110 is equipped with a main control unit 110m as a one-chip microcomputer equipped with a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs, and a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, as well as input and output ports for main control. The main CPU 110a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the programs stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while using the main RAM 110c as a work area to control controlled devices (various solenoids and various displays) and transmits predetermined commands based on the results of the arithmetic processing to the performance control board 130, etc. It also transmits predetermined information (described later) to the frame control board 120.

In this embodiment, the term "RAM" and the term "RWM" are sometimes used, but they are synonymous.

Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 is configured to allow information to be communicated in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130 is configured to allow information to be communicated in only one direction, from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130.

The input port of the main control board 110 is connected to various switches, various sensors, and the frame control board 120, and when detection signals from the various switches and various sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, control processing is performed according to the detection signals.

The various switches are a general winning port detection switch 43a for detecting game balls that have won (entered) the general winning port 43, a gate detection switch 44a for detecting game balls that have passed through the general gate 44, a first starting port detection switch 45a for detecting game balls that have won (entered) the first starting port 45, a second starting port detection switch 47a for detecting game balls that have won (entered) the second starting port 47, a special winning port detection switch 50a for detecting game balls that have won (entered) the special winning port 50, and a switch for detecting game balls that flow down the most downstream part of the out ball flow path. the out ball detection switch 39a for detecting the out ball, the RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal to clear the memory contents of the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m or to update the setting value which is the stage of the game's advantage degree (differentiating the game's advantage degree), and the setting key switch 112a for inputting a signal to move to a state in which the setting value can be changed or confirmed by operating the setting key, and the various sensors are a first magnetic detection sensor 53a and a second magnetic detection sensor 53b for detecting magnets.

In this embodiment, the number of game balls launched by the player is counted by the out ball detection switch 39a, but the number of launched balls may be counted by providing a detection switch at the position where the game ball flies into the game area 5a (a position where it will not become a foul ball after the launched ball is detected), or the number of launched balls may be counted by providing a detection switch on the launched ball guide path 38 (a position where it may become a foul ball after the launched ball is detected). Note that in the case where a detection switch is provided on the launched ball guide path 38, if a foul ball is detected after the launch ball is detected, the number of launched balls is incremented by 1 and then decremented by 1.

The main information display device 59, various solenoids, information display 115, frame control board 120, and performance control board 130 are connected to the output ports of the main control board 110, and drive control signals for controlling the various solenoids, display control signals for controlling the various displays, and specified information are sent to the frame control board 120 via the output ports.

The various solenoids are the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b and the big prize port opening/closing solenoid 51b, the main information display device 59 is the special pattern display 60, the special pattern display 61, the normal pattern display 62, the special pattern reserved display 63, the special pattern reserved display 64, the normal pattern reserved display 65, the number of rounds display 66, the right hit display 67, and the status confirmation display 68, and the information display 115 is a display (a 4-digit 7-segment display) for displaying setting values, etc.

The frame control board 120 is equipped with a frame control CPU 120a that performs calculation processing, a frame control ROM 120b that stores the operation program of the frame control CPU 120a, a frame control unit 120m that is a one-chip microcomputer equipped with a frame control RAM 120c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input and output ports for frame control. The frame control CPU 120a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the program stored in the frame control ROM 120b, and performs calculation processing related to the game while using the frame control RAM 120c as a work area to control controlled devices (various solenoids and various displays), communicate with the main control board 110 through telegram communication (described below), and transmits specified information (described below) to the dedicated unit 170.

The input port of the frame control board 120 includes a touch sensor 15a that detects when the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15, a launch volume 15b consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the launch handle 15, a ball removal switch 122 that detects when the ball removal button 122b has been operated, an error release button 123b that detects when the error release button 123b has been operated, a lending device connection terminal board 100 for communicating with a dedicated unit 170 that is arranged in parallel with the gaming machine 1, a launch pad switch 92a for detecting game balls parked on the launch pad, a subtraction entrance switch 91b for detecting game balls that have flowed down the ball passage unit 94, a subtraction solenoid 91a for detecting game balls sent to the launch device 95 by the operation of the subtraction solenoid 91a, and a ball removal switch 92b for detecting when the ball is being removed from the launch pad. A subtraction port switch 91c for detecting the number of balls, a counting button switch 20a for detecting that the counting button 20 has been operated, a glass frame open detection switch 31a for detecting the opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4, an inner frame open detection switch 31b for detecting the opening (opening/closing) of the inner frame 3 (indicated as various open detection switches 31a, 31b in the drawing), a radio wave detection sensor 54a for detecting abnormal radio waves, a lifting and polishing device 95 for lifting the game balls while polishing them, a game ball count clear switch 121 for detecting that the game ball count clear button 121b has been operated, various passage units 93, 94, etc. are connected, and when detection signals from the various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the frame control board 120 via the input port, control processing is performed according to the detection signals.

The glass frame open detection switch 31a, which detects whether the glass frame 4 is open (opened or closed), may be ON when the glass frame 4 is open (in this case, it is determined to be open when there is an ON input), or it may be ON when the glass frame 4 is closed (in this case, it is determined to be open when there is no ON input). The same applies to the inner frame open detection switch 31b.

The various passage units 93, 94 include a foul ball switch 93a for detecting game balls flowing down the foul ball passage to allow game balls (foul balls) that have returned without entering the play area 5a to join the ball passage unit 94, a winning passage count switch 94a for detecting game balls (winning balls) flowing down the winning ball passage (not shown) which collects and allows game balls that have won the various winning ports provided in the play area 5a to flow down, a non-winning passage count switch 94b for detecting game balls (out balls) flowing down the non-winning ball passage (not shown) which collects and allows game balls that have flowed into the outlet 39 without winning the various winning ports to flow down, and a non-winning passage count switch 94c for detecting game balls (out balls) flowing down the non-winning ball passage (not shown) which collects and allows game balls that have flowed into the outlet 39 without winning the various winning ports to flow down, and a lifting polishing device 95 for detecting game balls lifted up by the lifting polishing device 95 at the upstream end of the lifting ball passage. A lift up switch 94c, a lift down switch 94d for detecting game balls supplied to the lifting and polishing device 95 at the downstream end of a junction passage (not shown) that joins game balls flowing down the winning passage, game balls flowing down the non-winning ball passage, and game balls flowing down the foul ball passage and supplies them to the lifting and polishing device 95, an excess sensor 94e installed in the midstream part of the lifting ball passage (downstream of the lift up switch 94c) for detecting an excess (surplus) of game balls (circulating game balls) waiting in the lifting ball passage, and a shortage sensor 94f installed in the downstream part of the lifting ball flow path (downstream of the excess sensor 94e) for detecting a shortage (shortage) of game balls (circulating game balls) waiting in the lifting ball passage.

The output port of the frame control board 120 is connected to the performance control board 130, the lending device connection terminal board 100, the launch solenoid 92b for operating the launch hammer (not shown) for launching the game balls parked on the launch pad, the subtraction solenoid 91a for sending game balls to the launch device 95, the lifting and polishing device 95, the game ball count display 135, the frame control display 125, etc., and drive control signals for controlling the various solenoids and display control signals for controlling the various displays are output via the output port.

The communication between the frame control board 120 and the performance control board 130 is configured so that information can be communicated in only one direction, from the frame control board 120 to the performance control board 130. This allows, for example, if an error is detected in the frame control board 120, the performance control board 130 can notify the user of the error. Note that communication between the frame control board 120 and the performance control board 130 may be performed via the main control board 110. In other words, the frame control board 120 and the performance control board 130 do not need to be directly connected.

The "game ball count display 135" is a display for displaying the total number of game balls that the player can fire (hereinafter simply referred to as the "total number of game balls"), and is configured, for example, as a six-digit seven-segment display. It may also be used as a display for displaying an error code indicating the type of error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1. In this case, when no error has occurred, only the total number of game balls is displayed, and when an error has occurred, the total number of game balls and the error code are displayed alternately. The display of the error code will be described in detail later.

The "frame control display 125" is a display for displaying the total number of game balls, and is, for example, a 6-digit 7-segment display. For example, if the "game ball count display 135" displays "100" as the total number of game balls, the total number of game balls displayed on the "frame control display 125" will also be "100". If the "game ball count display 135" malfunctions and is unable to display the total number of game balls, the player can check the total number of game balls displayed on the "frame control display 125" to determine the total number of game balls he or she owns (this display serves as insurance in case of malfunction).

It may also be used as a display that displays an error code indicating the type of error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1, or as a display that displays the "display performance information (normal base value)" (see "Frame control board display performance information calculation process" described below). In this case, when no error has occurred, the total number of gaming balls and the "display performance information (normal base value)" are displayed alternately, and when an error has occurred, the total number of gaming balls, the "display performance information (normal base value)", and the error code are displayed alternately.

The "counting button 20" is a button for transmitting data on the total number of game balls to the dedicated unit 170. The frame control CPU 120a judges whether the "counting button 20" is pressed for a "short press" or a "long press" depending on the time the button is pressed. Specifically, if the button is pressed for less than 0.5 seconds, it is judged to be a "short press," and if the button is pressed for 0.5 seconds or more, it is judged to be a "long press."

If the frame control CPU 120a judges it to be a "short press", it counts one game ball, and if it judges it to be a "long press", it counts 250 game balls at the count notification timing every 0.3 seconds. If the total number of game balls is less than 250 (for example, 200), it judges it to be a "long press" and counts all 200. A count possible lamp may be provided that lights up when counting is possible and goes out when counting is not possible.

The "game ball count clear button 121b" is a button for clearing the number of game balls recorded by electromagnetic means. For example, it is conceivable that game balls may be recorded on the game machine 1 when it is shipped from the manufacturing factory to the game arcade, or that after it is installed in the game arcade, a player may stop playing when only a few game balls (for example, one ball) are recorded. In such cases, a problem occurs in which it is difficult for a new player to play (the player may mistakenly think that the previous player is still playing). To solve this problem, the game balls recorded above can be cleared by pressing and holding down the game ball count clear button 121b while turning on the power switch 164.

In addition, the game ball count clearing process may be performed in a situation where no game balls are recorded (0 balls), or the game ball count clearing process may not be performed (even if the game ball count clear button 121b is pressed) if the game ball count clearing process is performed in a situation where no game balls are recorded (0 balls). In addition, if the game ball count clearing process is performed in a situation where no game balls are recorded (0 balls), the "HC/fraud monitoring information" indicating that the game balls have been cleared may be transmitted from the gaming machine 1 to the gaming machine information center in the end, or if the game ball count clearing process is not performed in a situation where no game balls are recorded (0 balls), the "HC/fraud monitoring information" indicating that the game balls have been cleared may not be transmitted from the gaming machine 1. In the case where the game ball count clearing process is performed in a situation where no game balls are recorded (0 balls), the control related to the game ball count clearing can be uniform regardless of the game ball recording status, and the control load can be reduced. On the other hand, if the game ball count clear process is not performed when no game balls have been recorded (0 balls) (even if the game ball count clear button 121b has been pressed), it is possible to prevent the game ball count clear process (meaningless process) from being performed when there are no game balls to be cleared.

When the recorded game balls are cleared, a notification that the number of game balls has been cleared is given by audio output under the control of the audio control unit 148, display control under the control of the image control unit 145, and light emission control under the control of the lamp control unit 150. This notification will be described in detail later.

In addition, "HC/fraud monitoring information" indicating that the game balls have been cleared is ultimately transmitted from the game machine 1 to the game machine information center. This allows the game machine information center to also know that the game ball count has been cleared on the game machine 1.

The number of game balls is cleared only when the power switch 164 is turned ON while pressing the number of game balls clear button 121b. In other words, even if the "number of game balls clear button 121b" is pressed while power is being supplied to the gaming machine 1, the number of game balls is not cleared. In this case, the state of the gaming machine 1 does not change, and no notification is made by sound, display, or light emission. For example, even if the "number of game balls clear button 121b" is pressed while a variable display is being executed, the variable display continues, and sound output, display control, and light emission control corresponding to the variable display continue. This prevents the player from suffering any disadvantages, for example, even if an amusement store employee accidentally presses the "number of game balls clear button 121b" while a variable display is being executed.

The "game ball count clear button 121b" is a button used to clear the game ball count, and has no other functions. For example, operating this button cannot clear an error, cannot eject game balls from the gaming machine 1 (remove balls), and cannot initialize the main RAM 110c and the frame control RAM 120c.

The "ball removal button 122b" is a button for ejecting game balls from the gaming machine 1. The game balls are not touched by the player's hands, but regular inspection, cleaning, and replacement are recommended. In such cases, the game balls can be ejected from the gaming machine 1 by turning on the power switch 164 while pressing the ball removal button 122b.

When the game balls are being ejected from the game machine 1, the player is notified that the ball ejection mode is in progress by a voice notification under the control of the sound control unit 148 and a visual notification under the control of the image control unit 145. This notification will be described in more detail later.

Note that game balls are ejected from the gaming machine 1 only when the power switch 164 is turned ON while the ball ejection button 122b is being pressed. In other words, even if the "ball ejection button 122b" is pressed while power is being supplied to the gaming machine 1, game balls will not be ejected from the gaming machine 1. In this case, the state of the gaming machine 1 does not change, and no notification is made by sound or display. For example, even if the "ball ejection button 122b" is pressed while a variable display is being executed, the variable display continues, and sound output, display control, and light emission control corresponding to the variable display continue. This prevents players from suffering any disadvantages, for example, even if an amusement store employee accidentally presses the "ball ejection button 122b" while a variable display is being executed.

The "ball removal button 122b" is a button used to eject game balls from the gaming machine 1, and has no other functions. For example, operating this button cannot clear an error, cannot clear the number of game balls, and cannot initialize the main RAM 110c and the frame control RAM 120c.

When the glass frame open detection switch 31a detects that the glass frame 4 is open, it becomes impossible to launch game balls by operating the launch handle 15. Similarly, when the inner frame open detection switch 31b detects that the inner frame 3 is open, it becomes impossible to launch game balls by operating the launch handle 15. This prevents game balls circulating inside the gaming machine from flying out of the gaming machine, preventing the player from being disadvantaged by being unable to secure the (circulating) game balls necessary for play. Note that the gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, 45 game balls.

In addition, to make it easier to win a prize in each prize slot, a small ball detection switch (or sensor) may be provided to prevent fraud using game balls smaller than the specified size.

The dedicated unit 170 includes a U (unit) board 171, a U (unit) control unit 172, a hall control output unit 173, and a display unit (touch panel) 174.

The U board 171 and the lending device connection terminal board 100 of the frame control board 120 are electrically connected by a dedicated PIF wiring, and the U board 171 and the frame control board 120 are capable of communicating "predetermined information" (described later). The lending device connection terminal board 100 can be used in common for a pachinko game machine that uses game balls (the game machine 1 of this embodiment) and a medal-less reel type game machine. For example, when used for a pachinko game machine, the switch SW is operated to select the pachinko game machine, and when used for a medal-less reel type game machine, the switch SW is operated to select the medal-less reel type game machine.

The U board 171 has a function (security function) of encrypting and transmitting the specified information received from the frame control board 120 before finally transmitting it to the gaming machine information center (described below). It also has a function (security function) of decrypting and transmitting the specified information received from the gaming machine information center before finally transmitting it to the frame control board 120.

The U control unit 172 has a CPU (not shown), a ROM (not shown) that stores programs and control data for the CPU to operate, and a RAM (not shown) that functions as a work area.

The U control unit 172 has a function to read and store the card ID of the inserted member card or visitor card, and a function to transmit the stored card ID to a management computer. When the management computer receives the card ID, it transmits the card ID to the card company data center (described below) and the gaming machine information center.

The U control unit 172 has a function of storing the game balls (held balls) held by the player while the player is playing and displaying the held balls on the display unit (touch panel) 174, and if a bill is inserted, a function of displaying the remaining balance on the display unit (touch panel) 174.

The display unit (touch panel) 174, in addition to displaying the number of balls held and the remaining balance, can display a ball lending button image for lending game balls and a return button image for returning a membership card or visitor card, and the U control unit 172 can input an operation signal when the ball lending button image is operated by the player, and can input an operation signal when the return button image is operated by the player. When these operation signals are input, the U control unit 172 performs the process (ball lending, return) corresponding to the operation signal. The display unit (touch panel) 174 can also display error codes, which will be described later. This will be described later.

Note that the display unit (touch panel) 174 is configured to display a ball lending button image and a return button image so that the player can operate them, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the ball lending button and the return button may be provided on the dedicated unit 170, or the ball lending button and the return button may be provided on the gaming machine 1.

The U control unit 172 is capable of counting and storing the playing time and number of times played (e.g., number of visits to the gaming establishment) while the membership card is inserted, and is also capable of storing the number of gaming media stored on the membership card, the amount used for playing, and the number of gaming media used for playing. This stored information is then ultimately sent to the gaming machine information center and stored in the addiction countermeasure server of the gaming machine information center (to be used to counteract players' gaming addiction).

The U control unit 172 includes a hall computer output unit 173, which outputs hall computer information (e.g., information indicating that a jackpot game is in progress, information indicating that a high probability game state is in progress, information indicating that the variable time reduction function is in operation, information indicating the number of winning balls in each winning slot, etc.) to the hall computer. The hall computer output unit 173 includes an external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 1, an external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 2, an external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 3, and an external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 4.

The hall computer is a dedicated computer installed in an amusement facility, is communicatively connected to the gaming machine 1 via a relay device or the like, and is a device capable of collecting hall computer information.

The performance control board 130 is a slave control board (slave control means) that controls the performance related to the game (performed in the gaming machine 1) based on the reception of the performance command from the main control board 110. The performance control board 130 is equipped with a sub-CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub-ROM 130b that stores the performance control program, and a performance control unit 130m that has a sub-RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an image control unit 145 that controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the third image display device 72 (left image display device), the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device), and the sound output device 9 (speaker), a lamp control unit 150 that controls the frame lighting device 10, the button drive device 17b, the board drive device 75, the board lighting device 76, and input and output ports for performance control.

The sub-CPU 130a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the game program stored in the sub-ROM 130b, and performs calculation processing related to the presentation while using the sub-RAM 130c as a work area, thereby controlling (outputting data and commands) the various control units (image control unit 145, lamp control unit 150) to execute various presentations in response to commands received from the main control board 110 and input signals from the presentation button detection switch 17a and joystick detection switch 19a.

The input port of the performance control board 130 is connected to the performance button detection switch 17a, the joystick detection switch 19a, and a button position detection sensor (not shown). When the performance button detection switch 17a inputs a performance button detection signal indicating that the performance button 17 has been operated, or when the joystick detection switch 19a inputs a joystick detection signal (up button detection signal, left button detection signal, down button detection signal, right button detection signal) indicating that the joystick 19 has been operated, the performance control board 130 performs processing to execute a performance according to the detection signal.

The image control unit 145 receives commands from the performance control unit 130m and controls the first image display device 70 (main LCD), the second image display device 71 (sub LCD), the third image display device 72 (left image display device), and the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device) to display a specified image.

The audio control unit 148 is connected to the audio output device 9, and controls the audio output device 9 to output audio data, music data (BGM, SE), etc. in accordance with the display of the first image display device 70 (main LCD), the second image display device 71 (sub LCD), the third image display device 72 (left image display device), and the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device) based on various performance data (including commands) sent from the performance control unit 130m.

Between the performance control unit 130m, the image control unit 145, and the audio control unit 148, there is provided a general control unit (not shown) that performs general control of image display and audio output based on reception of performance control commands from the performance control unit 130m. Based on reception of a display control command (display list) from the general control unit, the image control unit 145 reads out a CGROM (not shown) in which image data and the like are stored, and controls the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, the third image display device 72 (left image display device), and the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device). Based on reception of an audio control command from the general control unit, the audio control unit 148 reads out an audio ROM in which audio data and the like are stored, and controls the audio output device 9.

The VRAM (not shown) provided in the image control unit 145 has a display list storage area for temporarily storing the display list output from the overall control unit (overall CPU), a frame buffer area corresponding to the first image display device 70 (main LCD), the second image display device 71 (sub LCD), the third image display device 72 (left image display device), and the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device), etc.

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying images, and further includes a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area alternate between being a "drawing frame buffer" and a "display frame buffer" each time drawing begins.

Therefore, based on instructions (display list) from the general control unit, the image control unit 145 draws the drawing data stored in the CGROM in the "drawing frame buffer" in the frame buffer area of the VRAM, reads the drawing data from the "display frame buffer" in the frame buffer area, generates video signals (RGB signals, etc.) based on the read drawing data, and outputs them to the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), the third image display device 72 (left image display device), and the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device) to display various images.

The image control unit 145 receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, and divides the operating clock to generate a synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal/vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the third image display device 72 (left image display device), and the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device), and outputs the synchronization signal to the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the third image display device 72 (left image display device), and the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device). In this embodiment, the frame rate of the VDP is 30 fps (1/30 seconds = about 33 ms) so that 30 drawings (image displays) are performed per second, but it may be 60 fps (1/60 seconds = about 16.6 ms) so that 60 drawings (image displays) are performed per second.

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU (not shown) that performs calculation processing, a lamp ROM (not shown) that stores the lamp control program, a lamp RAM (not shown) that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports, etc.

The lamp CPU receives an operating clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM, and performs calculations related to the performance while using the lamp RAM as a work area, thereby controlling (outputting data and commands) the controlled devices such as various lighting devices and various driving devices to perform a specified performance in accordance with the performance instruction commands received from the performance control unit 130m.

The input/output ports of the lamp control unit are connected to the frame lighting device 10, the button drive device 17b, the board drive device 75, the board lighting device 76, and the sub-information display device 80, and based on various performance data (including commands) sent from the performance control unit 130m (sub-CPU 130a), it controls the lighting of various LEDs in the frame lighting device 10, the board drive device 75, the board lighting device 76, and the sub-information display device 80, and controls the drive of drive sources such as the motors and solenoids of the button drive device 17b and the board drive device 75.

The power supply board 160 generates the main power supply (operating power supply) required for the operation of the gaming machine 1 from a power supply supplied from outside the gaming machine 1, and supplies it to the gaming machine 1 (the main control board 110, the frame control board 120, the performance control board 130, and various electronic components). The power supply board 160 is equipped with a power interruption detection circuit 162 that detects whether a power interruption (power outage) has occurred and outputs a power interruption detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of a power interruption (power outage), and a backup power supply circuit 163 that supplies backup power to the main control board 110 in the event of a power interruption (power outage).

The power supply board 160 also has a power switch 164 that can be operated by an arcade staff member to switch between an ON state that supplies main power to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, frame control board 120, presentation control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state that stops the supply. When the power switch 164 is turned ON, the supply of main power begins and the gaming machine 1 starts operating. Note that the supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained even when the power switch 164 is turned OFF.

The power interruption detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, outputs a power interruption detection signal to the main control board 110. More specifically, when the power interruption detection signal becomes high level, the main CPU 110a becomes operable, and when the power interruption detection signal becomes low level, the main CPU 110a becomes inoperative.

The backup power circuit 163 is equipped with a capacitor that stores electricity when the gaming machine is energized, and in the event of a power outage (blackout), the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is supplied to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110 and the frame control RAM 120c of the frame control board 120. This allows the memory contents of the main RAM 110c and the frame control RAM 120c to be retained even in the event of a power outage (blackout), and after recovery from the power outage (blackout), the game control state and the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player can be restored to the state before the power outage (blackout). In addition, a backup power source may be supplied to the performance control board 130.

(Explanation of game state)
Next, the game states when the game progresses will be described. In this embodiment, there are a "low probability game state" and a "high probability game state" as states related to the special game judgment (jackpot judgment), and there are a "non-time-saving game state" and a "time-saving game state" as states related to the movable member 48 of the second starting hole 47. Therefore, in this embodiment,
(1) A "low probability non-time-saving gaming state" which is a low probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state;
(2) A "low probability time-saving game state" which is a low probability game state and a time-saving game state;
(3) A "high probability time-saving gaming state" is provided, which is both a high probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state.

The initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is set to a "low probability non-time-saving gaming state", and this gaming state will be referred to as the "normal gaming state" in this embodiment. The gaming state during a jackpot game will also be set to a "low probability non-time-saving gaming state", but this is a different gaming state from the normal gaming state.

Here, a "low probability gaming state" refers to a gaming state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is set low at approximately 1/300 in a special gaming judgment (jackpot judgment) that is made on the condition that a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47, for example, when the set value (of the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery), which is the stage of the advantageous degree of the game, is "1."

In contrast, a "high probability game state" refers to a game state that is more advantageous to the player than a low probability game state, in which the probability of winning a jackpot is set high at approximately 1/60 when the setting value is "1." The transition from the low probability game state to the high probability game state occurs after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, the "non-time-saving game state" refers to a game state in which the probability of winning is set low at 1/16 in the auxiliary game judgment (win judgment) that is performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 44, the average time for the normal symbol fluctuation display is set to about 30 seconds, and the opening time of the second start hole 47 in the event of a win is set to 0.2 seconds.

In contrast, the "time-saving game state" (variable time-saving function activated state) is a game state that is advantageous to the player in that it reduces the consumption of game balls compared to the non-time-saving game state, by setting the probability of winning high at 15/16, setting the average time for the variable display of normal symbols to about 3 seconds, and setting the opening time of the second starting hole 47 in the event of a winning combination to 5 seconds. The transition from the non-time-saving game state to the time-saving game state takes place after the big win game has ended.

The "time-saving game state" is set to be more favorable than the "non-time-saving game state" in terms of the average change time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the second start port 47, and the winning probability of the winning lottery, but it may be set to be more favorable in terms of only one of the average change time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the second start port 47, and the winning probability of the winning lottery.

In addition, the probability of winning in the auxiliary game judgment in the non-time-saving game state is the same and does not change depending on the setting value, but the larger the setting value, the more favorable the winning probability may be varied depending on the setting value. In addition, the probability of winning in the auxiliary game judgment in the time-saving game state is the same and does not change depending on the setting value, but the larger the setting value, the more favorable the winning probability may be varied depending on the setting value.

(Memory map of main control unit and frame control unit)
FIG. 7 shows a memory map of a memory area consisting of the main ROM 110b and main RAM 110c in the main control unit 110m, and a memory map of a memory area consisting of the frame control ROM 120b and frame control RAM 120c in the frame control unit 120m.

The memory area of the main control unit 110m includes a memory area (8000H to FFFFH) allocated to the main ROM 110b and a memory area (0000H to 7FFFH) allocated to the main RAM 110c.

The memory areas of the main ROM 110b are, in order, a game ROM area (8000H-9FFFH) in which programs and data related to game progress are stored, an information ROM area (A000H-A52EH) in which programs and data related to the gaming machine's winning limit device (described below) are stored, an unused area of 16 bytes or more (A52FH-A6FFH) in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, a ROM comment area (A700H-A77FH) in which data such as program titles and versions are stored, a vector table area (A780H-A7A7H) in which the start address of the timer interrupt process (described below) and other information are set, and a HW parameter area (A7A8H-A7FFFH) in which parameters such as the start address and end address of the access prohibited area are set.

The game ROM area is arranged in the following order: a game program area (8000H-8BDCH) in which programs related to game progress are stored, a first unused area (8BDDH-8FFFH) in which access is prohibited and in which "0" is stored, a game data area (9000H-9976H) in which data related to game progress is stored, and a second unused area (9977H-9FFFH) in which access is prohibited and in which "0" is stored.

The information ROM area is arranged in the following order: an information program area (A000H-A437H) in which programs related to the gaming machine's win limit device are stored, an unused area (A438H-A47FH) in which access is prohibited and in which "0" is stored, and an information data area (A480H-A52EH) in which data related to the gaming machine's win limit device is stored.

The memory area of the main RAM 110c is arranged in the following order: a game RWM area (0000H to 018FH) that is used as a work area when executing game programs, and an information RWM area (0190H to 01FFH) that is used as a work area when executing information programs.

The game RWM area is arranged in the following order: a game work area (0000H-0128H) used by the game program as a work area, a first unused area (0129H-0171H) that is prohibited from being accessed and in which "0" is stored, a game stack area (0172H-017FH) for temporarily saving data being processed by the game program, and a second unused area (0180H-018FH) that is prohibited from being accessed and in which "0" is stored.

The game work area is arranged in the following order: a setting value area for storing setting values, a judgment information area for storing judgment information (checksum, described below) for determining abnormalities in the RWM area, and a game data area for storing game data that changes as the game progresses.

The information RWM area is arranged in the following order: an information work area (0190H-01E8H) used by information programs as work, an unused area (01E9H-01EAH) where access is prohibited and where "0" is stored, and an information stack area (01EBH-01FFH) where information programs temporarily save data being processed.

The information work area is arranged, in order, with a gaming media acquisition information area for storing information related to the upper limit of gaming media that can be acquired by the gaming machine 1, and an error information area for storing information related to various error judgments.

The memory map of the memory area consisting of the frame control ROM 120b and frame control RAM 120c of the frame control unit 120m is configured in a similar manner, so a description thereof will be omitted. The main control unit 110m, main ROM 110b, and main RAM 110c can be read as frame control unit 120m, frame control ROM 120b, and frame control RAM 120c, respectively.

(Relationship between game area and information area)
Fig. 8 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game area (game ROM area, game RWM area) that performs processing based on the game program and the information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) that performs processing based on the information program. Note that Fig. 8 is common to the main control unit 110m and the frame control unit 120m.

As shown in FIG. 8(a), when the main CPU 110a performs processing based on a game program, it basically refers to the game data area, and also refers to and updates the contents of the game RWM area while using the game RWM area as work. Also, when the main CPU 110a performs processing based on an information program, it basically refers to the information data area, and also refers to and updates the contents of the information RWM area while using the information RWM area as work.

However, in processing based on the game program, the contents of the information RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referenced. Also, in processing based on the information program, the contents of the game RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referenced.

As shown in FIG. 8(b), when processing based on the information program is performed, the flag register is saved to the game RWM area during processing based on the game program, and then the information program is called to execute processing based on the information program, and the flag register is restored from the game RWM area immediately after processing based on the information program ends and returns to the game program.

In addition, immediately after the information program starts, the stack pointer of the game stack area is saved to the information RWM area, and then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set, all registers used in the game program are saved to the information RWM area, and immediately before the information program ends, all registers used in the game program are restored from the information RWM area and the stack pointer of the game stack area is restored.

By doing this, data used by the game program can be protected when performing processing based on the information program, and no inconvenience occurs when returning from the information program to the game program.

(system configuration diagram)
FIG. 9 is a system configuration diagram (overall schematic diagram) of the gaming machine 1 and peripheral devices.

A combination of a gaming machine 1 and a dedicated unit 170 installed next to the gaming machine 1 is installed in the gaming establishment, and playing becomes possible by connecting the gaming machine 1 and the dedicated unit 170. In addition, a hall computer and a management computer are installed in the office of the gaming establishment.

If the gaming machine 1 and the dedicated unit 170 are not connected, or if the gaming machine 1 and the dedicated unit 170 are connected but the power of the dedicated unit 170 is turned off, it is not possible to count the gaming balls by operating the counting button 20, or to launch the gaming balls by operating the launch handle 15.

The management computer is communicatively connected to the card company data center, which is communicatively connected to the gaming machine information center.

The gaming machine information center is equipped with a machine history server, a fraud monitoring server, a performance information server, and an addiction countermeasure server. It is also communicatively connected to an association (the Japan Machinery Association) to which multiple gaming machine manufacturers related to pachinko machines belong, an addiction countermeasure organization, and a card company organization. The gaming machine information center is also capable of collecting (centrally managing) the information described below from all gaming facilities where gaming machines 1 are installed.

Next, details and flow of information (the above-mentioned "predetermined information") and flow of materials will be described.
Among the information transmitted from the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, frame control board 120), the information to be transmitted to the gaming machine information center is encrypted by the U board 171. The encrypted and transmitted information can be decrypted only by the gaming machine information center. This makes the "main control chip ID number" and "frame control chip ID number" included in the information transmitted from the gaming machine 1 unknown to third parties, and makes it difficult to obtain the information of the "main control chip ID number" and the "frame control chip ID number" during the process of transmitting the information to the gaming machine information center, for example. As a result, it is possible to prevent the information of the "main control chip ID number" and the "frame control chip ID number" from being illegally obtained and the information obtained being loaded on an illegal main control board 110 or frame control board 120 and then installed in an amusement facility.

When the game medium lending button on the dedicated unit 170 is operated, a "ball lending signal" is sent from the dedicated unit 170 → lending device connection terminal board 100 → frame control board 120 ((1) in the figure). When the frame control board 120 receives the "ball lending signal", it updates the number of game balls (game value amount) owned by the player, which is displayed on the game ball count display 135 and the frame control display 125.

When the count button 20 is operated by a player, "counting information" is sent from the frame control board 120 → lending device connection terminal board 100 → dedicated unit 170 in order to store the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, which is displayed on the game ball count display 135, in a storage medium such as a member card or visitor card inserted into the dedicated unit 170 ((2) in the figure). When the dedicated unit 170 inputs the "counting information", it stores the number of game balls (game value) in a storage medium such as a member card or visitor card (prepaid card). The number of game balls (game value) may also be stored in the hall computer in association with the identification information of the member card or visitor card.

When power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 from the power supply board 160, the gaming machine installation information is sent in the following order: main control board 110 → frame control board 120 → lending device connection terminal board 100 → dedicated unit 170 → management computer → card company data center → gaming machine information center ((2) (4) (7) in the figure).

The "gaming machine installation information" refers to six pieces of information: the "main control chip manufacturer code," "main control chip product code," and "main control chip ID number" (serial number) attached to the main control unit 110m, and the "frame control chip manufacturer code," "frame control chip product code," and "frame control chip ID number" (serial number) attached to the frame control unit 120m. The "gaming machine installation information" will be explained in more detail later.

After power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 from the power supply board 160, when it is ready to play (all interrupts are permitted in step S33 of the main process described below), the "HC/fraud monitoring information" is periodically sent from the main control board 110 → frame control board 120 → lending device connection terminal board 100 → dedicated unit 170 → management computer → card company data center → gaming machine information center ((2) (4) (7) in the figure).

"HC/fraud monitoring information (hall control/fraud monitoring information)" is information that mainly indicates the state of the gaming machine 1, such as information indicating that a jackpot game is in progress, information indicating that a high probability game state is in progress, information indicating an error occurring in the gaming machine 1, information indicating fraud occurring in the gaming machine 1, and information indicating that a gaming ball has entered one of the various winning holes (first starting hole 45, second starting hole 47, general winning hole 43, large winning hole 50). The "HC/fraud monitoring information" will be explained in more detail later.

After power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 from the power supply board 160, when it is in a state where play is possible (all interrupts are permitted in step S33 of the main processing described below), "gaming machine performance information" is periodically sent from the frame control board 120 → lending device connection terminal board 100 → dedicated unit 170 → management computer → card company data center → gaming machine information center ((2) (4) (7) in the figure).

"Gaming machine performance information" is information mainly related to the balls dispensed by the gaming machine 1, and examples of this include information indicating the total number of gaming balls fired, information indicating the total number of gaming balls acquired, information indicating the ratio of special features, information indicating the ratio of consecutive special features, and information indicating the maximum number of balls dispensed. The "gaming machine performance information" will be explained in more detail later.

When a player inserts a membership card, "player information related to addiction countermeasures" is sent from the dedicated unit 170 → management computer → card company data center → gaming machine information center (addiction countermeasure server) ((4) and (7) in the diagram).

"Player information related to addiction countermeasures" includes player information stored on a membership card, gaming medium information stored on a membership card, information indicating playing time, information indicating the number of times played (e.g., the number of visits to an amusement facility), information indicating the amount used for playing, and information on the gaming media used for playing. When the gaming machine information center (addiction countermeasure server) receives this information, it updates the player information corresponding to that information. In this way, acquiring and managing "player information related to addiction countermeasures" can help prevent players from becoming too addicted to gaming.

The dedicated unit 170 has an output terminal (not shown) for outputting to the hall computer, and outputs "hall computer information" based on the "HC/fraud monitoring information" from the output terminal ((3) in the figure). Examples of "hall computer information" include information indicating that a jackpot game is in progress, information indicating that a high probability game state is in progress, information indicating that the variable time reduction function is in operation, information indicating the number of winning balls at each winning slot, etc.

When a visitor card (prepaid card) is inserted into the dedicated unit 170, "prepaid card information" is sent from the dedicated unit 170 → management computer → card company data center ((4) (6) in the figure). The card company data center collects the received "prepaid card information" and can check, for example, whether unregistered visitor cards (prepaid cards) are in circulation.

The gaming machine information center stores the received "gaming machine installation information," "HC/fraud monitoring information," and "gaming machine performance information" in the server, determines whether there are any abnormalities, and transmits the "verification and security results" from the gaming machine information center to the management computer to the dedicated unit 170 ((8) (5) in the diagram).

The gaming machine information center has a "machine history server," a "fraud monitoring server," a "performance information server," and an "addiction countermeasure server." When a "main control chip" and a "frame control chip" are supplied to each gaming machine manufacturer by a gaming machine management control chip supplier ((12) in the diagram), and each gaming machine manufacturer manufactures a gaming machine (and it becomes ready to ship), the "machine history server" registers the installation information of the above-mentioned "main control chip manufacturer code," "main control chip product code," "main control chip ID number" (serial number), "frame control chip manufacturer code," "frame control chip product code," and "frame control chip ID number" (serial number), as well as shipping information such as the shipping date and time ((11) in the diagram), and when the registration is complete, each gaming machine manufacturer ships the gaming machine to the gaming facility.

Similarly, when a U-board is manufactured by a U-board manufacturer (when it is ready to be shipped), the gaming machine information center registers the manufacturing information of the U-board (e.g., registering the serial number) and the installation information in the "fraud monitoring server" ((10) in the figure), and when this registration is complete, the U-board is shipped by the U-board manufacturer to the dedicated unit manufacturer ((9) in the figure).

As a result, after a gaming machine is installed in an amusement facility, when the "gaming machine installation information" is received, it is compared with the shipping information registered in the "machine history server" to determine whether the "main control chip" and "frame control chip" of the gaming machine installed in the amusement facility are genuine (determining whether there are any abnormalities).

If the "verification and security result" is normal, the U board 171 makes the gaming machine 1 playable, but if the "verification and security result" is abnormal, it can make the gaming machine 1 unplayable. This makes it possible to prevent attempts to illegally obtain winning balls by replacing the main control board 110 or the frame control board 120 with illegal ones.

In addition to registering the installation and shipping information mentioned above, the "machine history server" also stores information on the movement of used machines between gaming establishments, and disposal information when gaming machines are discarded, making it possible to track gaming machines in detail from the time they are installed at a gaming establishment until they are discarded. This can help prevent illegal dumping of gaming machines.

In addition to registering the above-mentioned U-board manufacturing information and installation information, the "fraud monitoring server" generates "security result information" that indicates the above-mentioned "verification and security results," and generates "encryption keys and communication keys" to prevent the "security result information" from being tampered with. This makes it possible to prevent the "security result information" from being tampered with during the process of (8) in the diagram.

The "fraud monitoring server" also stores fraud/error information that occurs in the gaming machine 1. For example, if a magnet detection error occurs in the gaming machine 1, the server receives an error code corresponding to the magnet detection error and "HC/fraud monitoring information" indicating a fraud detection signal, thereby storing the fact that a magnet error has been detected in the gaming machine 1.

The "performance information server" stores "display performance information (normal base value)" that is calculated by the frame control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 and displayed on the frame control display 125, as well as gaming machine performance information that is calculated by the frame control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 and not displayed on the frame control display 125.

In addition, the information stored in the "machine history server," "fraud monitoring server," and "performance information server" is sent to an association (the Japan Machinery Manufacturers' Union) to which multiple gaming machine manufacturers belong. As a result, gaming machine 1 is placed under the management of the gaming machine information center and the Japan Machinery Manufacturers' Union, and for this reason it is also called a "managed gaming machine."

The "addiction countermeasure server" stores the membership number, playing time, amount of money spent, and number of times played for each registered player, and transmits the stored information to the "addiction countermeasure agency." Note that the system may be configured so that if any of the playing time, amount of money spent, or number of times played exceeds a specified value, the player will be unable to play.

In addition, in transmitting and receiving each of the above-mentioned information, it is preferable that the transmitting side records the transmission date and time, and the receiving side is configured to be able to record the reception date and time. With this configuration, for example, when the gaming machine information center receives a "setting change signal" or an "RWM clear signal" (HC/fraud monitoring information), it can check whether the reception time is during or outside the business hours of the gaming facility, and it can be monitored to see whether "setting changes" or "RWM clears" are being made during business hours.

(Information transmission flow)
FIG. 10 is a diagram specifically explaining the flow of information transmission and reception described in FIG.

First, when power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 from the power supply board 160, it enters the "matching phase." In the "matching phase," the "main control chip ID number" is sent from the main control board 110 to the frame control board 120, and the "main control chip ID number" and "frame control chip ID number" are sent from the frame control board 120 to the U board 171, and the U board 171 encrypts information related to the "main control chip ID number" and "frame control chip ID number."

Then, the encrypted information relating to the "main control chip ID number" and "frame control chip ID number" is transmitted to the gaming machine information center via the U control unit 172, the management computer, and the card company data center.

When the gaming machine information center receives the encrypted information related to the "main control chip ID number" and "frame control chip ID number," it decrypts it and compares it with the installation information stored in the machine history server to determine whether or not there is an abnormality as described above.

Then, it generates "security result information" indicating the "matching and security result", encrypts it, and transmits it to the U board 171 via the card company data center, management computer, and U control unit 172.

When the U board 171 receives the "security result information", it decrypts it and checks for the presence or absence of the above-mentioned abnormalities. If no abnormalities are found, it ends the "verification phase" and moves to the "status communication phase", but if an abnormality is found, it does not move to the "status communication phase" and makes the gaming machine 1 unplayable.

In the "status communication phase", first, when a player sits down to play gaming machine 1, inserts valuables (banknotes or a membership card with gaming media stored on it) and operates the loan button, the number of loaned balls (e.g., 125 balls) corresponding to one press of the loan button is transmitted from U control unit 172 to U board 171, and the number of loaned balls (e.g., 125 balls) is then transmitted from U board 171 to frame control board 120.

When the frame control board 120 receives the number of loaned balls (e.g., 125 balls), it displays the number of loaned balls (e.g., 125 balls) on the game ball count display 135. This makes it possible to launch game balls into the game area 5a when the launch handle 15 is rotated.

When the count button 20 is operated while the number of game balls is displayed on the game ball count display 135 as a result of playing the game, the counted number of balls is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the U board 171. For example, when the count button 20 is operated while the number of game balls displayed on the game ball count display 135 is 1000, the counted number of balls is transmitted as "1000."

Similarly, the number of counted balls is transmitted from the U board 171 to the U control unit 172. Upon receiving the number of counted balls, the U control unit 172 stores the number of counted balls on the member card or visitor card.

The U control unit 172 allows the member card or visitor card to be returned to the player once the number of counted balls has been stored on the member card or visitor card. In other words, when the return button image on the display unit 174 is operated when the number of counted balls has been stored, the member card or visitor card can be returned to the player. On the other hand, when the number of counted balls has not been stored (in the middle of being stored, or not stored at all), even if the return button image on the display unit 174 is operated, the member card or visitor card will not be returned to the player. This makes it possible to prevent a player from leaving their seat (or leaving the facility) with game balls remaining in the gaming machine 1.

When the return button image on the display unit 174 is operated while the number of counted balls has not been stored, the U control unit 172 displays a notification on the display unit 174 prompting the player to count, such as a message saying "Press the count button 20 to count." This makes it easier for players who are unfamiliar with the game to understand the operation method.

The notification prompting the player to count is not limited to a display, but may be a sound, a lamp, or a combination of these. The notification may also be made by the gaming machine 1. This makes it easier to understand the operation method.

The number of game balls (game value amount) owned by the player, displayed on the game ball count display 135, is sent as "HC/fraud monitoring information" every 300 ms from the frame control board 120 to the U board 171, and is further sent from the U board 171 to the U control unit 172. This allows the dedicated unit 170 to know the number of game balls owned by the player.

The number of game balls released in the gaming machine 1 (for example, game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a) is transmitted as "HC/fraud monitoring information" from the frame control board 120 to the U board 171 every 300 ms, and is further transmitted from the U board 171 to the U control unit 172. This allows the dedicated unit 170 to know the number of game balls released by the player.

The number of winning balls obtained by having game balls enter each winning slot (general winning slot 43, start slots 45 and 47, large winning slot 50) in the gaming machine 1 is transmitted as "gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information)" from the main control board 110 to the frame control board 120 every 108 ms, and is further transmitted as "HC/fraud monitoring information" from the frame control board 120 to the U board 171 every 300 ms, and is further transmitted from the U board 171 to the U control unit 172. This allows the dedicated unit 170 to know the number of winning balls generated in the gaming machine 1.

The dedicated unit 170 obtains the number of game balls displayed on the game ball count display 135, the number of game balls fired on the game machine 1, and the number of prize balls obtained by having game balls enter each winning slot on the game machine 1, and can determine that the number of game balls displayed on the game ball count display 135 is not legitimate, based on the separately obtained information on the number of game balls fired and the number of prize balls, even if fraud has occurred with the numerical value of the number of game balls displayed on the game ball count display 135.

The frame control board 120 periodically transmits "game machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information)," while the dedicated unit 170 transmits "hall computer information" based on the "HC/fraud monitoring information." This allows the hall computer to grasp the state of the game machine 1 (during jackpot play, during high probability play, during variable time reduction function operation, number of winning balls at each winning slot).

The frame control board 120 transmits "gaming machine performance information" to the U board 171, and when the U board 171 receives the "gaming machine performance information", it encrypts it and transmits it to the gaming machine information center via the U control unit 172, the management computer, and the card company data center. This allows the gaming machine information center to grasp, for example, information indicating the total number of gaming balls fired, information indicating the total number of gaming balls acquired, information indicating the ratio of special features, information indicating the ratio of consecutive special features, information indicating the maximum number of balls dispensed, etc.

When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main control board 110 transmits "gaming machine installation information" to the frame control board 120 (installation information notification), and the frame control board 120 transmits "gaming machine installation information" to the U board 171 every 300 ms (installation information). The U board 171 then encrypts the "gaming machine installation information" and finally transmits it to the gaming machine information center. This allows the gaming machine information center to periodically receive the "gaming machine installation information", and constantly monitor whether the genuine main control board 110 and frame control board 120 are installed.

The main control board 110 transmits "HC/fraud monitoring information" to the frame control board 120 every 108 ms. As described later, the "HC/fraud monitoring information" includes "main control state 1", "main control state 2", "game machine error state", "fraud detection state 1", etc., so for example, information related to errors detected by the main control board 110 and errors detected by the frame control board 120 is also periodically transmitted in the "game machine error state" (error notification). The U board 171 encrypts the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (error notification) received from the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 and finally transmits it to the gaming machine information center. It also transmits information related to the error to the management computer of the gaming store. This allows the gaming machine information center to periodically receive information related to errors that have occurred in the gaming machine, and allows errors that have occurred in the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 to be constantly monitored. In addition, the management computer can also receive information about errors that have occurred in the gaming machines, so the gaming establishment can quickly grasp the information about the error and quickly resolve the error. The same process applies to the "fraud information" sent in "fraud detection state 1."

In addition, in "Main Control State 1" and "Main Control State 2", for example, the status of the gaming machine (during jackpot, in high probability gaming state) is periodically transmitted. Then, the "HC/fraud monitoring information" is encrypted by the U board 171 and ultimately transmitted to the gaming machine information center. This allows the gaming machine information center to periodically receive the status of the gaming machine, and for example, if information indicating a jackpot is frequently received, it can be determined that there is a possibility of fraud.

Next, we will explain the details of the various tables stored in main ROM 110b with reference to Figures 11 to 14.

(Big hit determination table)
Figure 11 (a) is a jackpot determination table for the first special pattern for determining (jackpot determination) special pattern determination information obtained based on the entry (scoring) of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 45, and Figure 11 (b) is a jackpot determination table for the second special pattern for determining (jackpot determination) special pattern determination information obtained based on the entry (scoring) of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 47.

As shown in Figures 11(a)-(b), the jackpot determination table associates the current setting value, the current probability state, the random number value for jackpot determination, and the jackpot determination result (jackpot, miss), and for reference, the rightmost column lists the approximate probability of winning in the case of a "jackpot."

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 11(a) or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 11(b), and determines whether it is a "jackpot" or a "miss" based on the current setting value, the probability state, and the random number value for jackpot determination.

For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 11(a), when the set value is "1" and normal play is in progress, 200 random numbers for jackpot determination from "100" to "299" are determined to be "jackpots." Any random number other than those determined to be jackpots is determined to be a "miss."

In the present embodiment, the jackpot determination table uses four levels of setting values, but this is not limited to this, and six levels of setting values may be used, two levels of setting values may be used, or one level of setting values may be used, or the setting function may not be installed.

The special symbol determination information obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 45 is stored in the first special symbol determination information reserve memory area of the main RAM 110c, and the special symbol determination information obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 47 is stored in the second special symbol determination information reserve memory area of the main RAM 110c. When a jackpot determination is made, the special symbol determination information stored in the first special symbol determination information reserve memory area or the second special symbol determination information reserve memory area is shifted to the special symbol determination information storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the shifted special symbol determination information is used to make a jackpot determination.

The first special pattern determination information reservation memory area is divided into a first storage section to a fourth storage section, and reservation icons corresponding to the special pattern determination information stored in the first storage section to the fourth storage section are displayed in the first display section 70B1 to the fourth display section 70B4 of the first reservation icon display area 70B, respectively. The second special pattern determination information reservation memory area is divided into a first storage section to a fourth storage section, and reservation icons corresponding to the special pattern determination information stored in the first storage section to the fourth storage section are displayed in the first display section 70D1 to the fourth display section 70D4 of the second reservation icon display area 70D, respectively.

(Special symbol determination table)
FIG. 12(a) is a special pattern determination table for a jackpot for determining the type of special pattern when a jackpot is determined, and FIG. 12(b) is a special pattern determination table for a miss for determining the type of special pattern when a miss is determined.

As shown in Figures 12(a)-(b), the special symbol determination table associates the type of special symbol to be stopped, a random number value for special symbol determination, the special symbol determination result, the stop special symbol data corresponding to the determination result, and the special symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result.

The special symbols "00" and "10" are loss symbols that do not trigger a jackpot game. The special symbols "01" and "04" are jackpot special symbols that trigger a first jackpot game, the special symbols "02" and "05" are jackpot special symbols that trigger a second jackpot game, and the special symbols "03" and "06" are jackpot special symbols that trigger a third jackpot game.

In the "first jackpot game", the large prize winning hole 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, and then the large prize winning hole 50 is closed for two seconds in a round game that is executed up to six times. Note that in the round game, if a specified number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) enter the large prize winning hole 50 even before the opening time has elapsed, one round game ends. In addition, after the first jackpot game ends, the game is set to a low probability non-time-saving game state (time-saving game state) until the special pattern variation display is performed 100 times.

In the "second jackpot game", the big prize opening 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, and then the big prize opening is closed for 2 seconds. This round game is played up to 10 times. After the second jackpot game ends, the machine is set to a high probability time-saving game state (probability change game state) until the special pattern variation display is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, based on the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability game state, the next jackpot is almost guaranteed.

In the "third jackpot game", the second jackpot opening 56 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, and then the opening is closed for two seconds in a round game that is played up to four times. After the third jackpot game ends, the game is set to a high probability time-saving game state (probability change game state) until the special symbol variation display is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, based on the probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability game state, the next jackpot is almost guaranteed.

Note that one losing special symbol is associated with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but multiple losing special symbols may be associated with at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in any one of Figures 12(a) to (b), and determines the type of special symbol, the stopped special symbol data, and the special symbol designation command based on the type of special symbol to be stopped and the random number value for special symbol determination, and transmits the special symbol designation command to the performance control board 130.

The first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 12 is that the type of the big win special symbol and the type of the losing special symbol are the same and do not change depending on the setting value. This allows the player to play with confidence without complicating the gameplay.

The second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 12 is that the selection ratio of various special jackpot symbols and the selection ratio of various losing symbols are constant and do not change depending on the setting value. By doing this, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the setting value, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

(Special chart fluctuation pattern determination table)
FIG. 13(a) is a special pattern change pattern determination table for the non-time-saving state for determining the change pattern of the special pattern in the non-time-saving state, and FIG. 13(b) is a special pattern change pattern determination table for the time-saving state for determining the change pattern of the special pattern in the time-saving state.

As shown in FIG. 13, the special pattern change pattern determination table associates the type of special pattern (starting hole) that performs the change display, the jackpot determination result, the special pattern determination result (stop special pattern data), a random number value for reach determination, the first special pattern reserved number (U1) or the second special pattern reserved number (U2), a random number value for special pattern change pattern determination, the special pattern change pattern as the determination result, the special pattern change time, and a special pattern change pattern designation command that indicates the special pattern change pattern.

Therefore, a "special pattern change pattern" can be said to be something that can specify the type of special pattern, the result of the jackpot determination, the type of special pattern, and the change time of the special pattern.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13, and determines the special symbol variation pattern based on the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result (stop special symbol data), the random number value for reach determination, the first special symbol reserved number (U1) or the second special symbol reserved number (U2), and the random number value for special symbol variation pattern determination, and transmits a special symbol variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern to the performance control board 130.

In addition, as described below, the performance control board 130 determines the content (performance mode) of the variable performance accompanied by the variable display of the performance pattern 70a according to the variable pattern designation command (jackpot determination result, special pattern determination result, etc.), so that the rightmost column of the special pattern variable pattern determination table shown in Figure 13 lists the performance content that can be executed in the variable performance for reference.

The effect contents shown in the fluctuation pattern determination table in FIG. 13, "normal fluctuation," "shortened fluctuation," "ultra-shortened fluctuation," and "long fluctuation," mean that the three effect patterns 70a fluctuate independently at high speed and stop without reaching a reach.

"Reach" refers to a variation mode that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be played, such as when some of the combinations of performance symbols 70a that indicate a jackpot temporarily stop and other performance symbols 70a change. For example, when the combination of three performance symbols 70a, "777," is set as the combination of performance symbols 70a that indicate a jackpot, the same performance symbol 70a temporarily stops at "7" in the left and right areas, and the remaining performance symbols 70a change in the center area.

Note that a "temporary stop" refers to a state in which the performance pattern 70a slightly shakes or deforms, making it appear to the player that the performance pattern 70a is stopped (but is not completely stopped).

"Normal reach" refers to a reach effect in which the same effect symbol 70a temporarily stops in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect symbol 70a fluctuates in the central area, and is the reach effect with the lowest expectation of a jackpot.

In addition, "SP reach" and "special SP reach" are super reach effects that have a higher chance of winning than a normal reach, and are executed after an advanced effect is executed from the normal reach effect. For example, the two effect patterns 70a shrink and move to the corners of the first image display device 70, and a special reach effect is executed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. Note that a "special SP reach" executes a more special effect than an "SP reach".

In addition, the "SPSP Reach" and "SPSP "7" Reach" are special reach effects that have a higher chance of winning than the Super Reach, and are executed after the Normal Reach effect or the Super Reach effect. For example, an extension effect is executed from the Normal Reach effect, and then the three effect symbols 70a shrink and move to the corners of the first image display device 70, and a more special reach effect than the "SP Reach" is executed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. In the "SPSP Reach", the reach effect is executed with the effect symbols 70a other than "7", and in the "SPSP "7" Reach", the reach effect is executed with the "7" symbol.

The "full rotation reach" is a reach that guarantees a jackpot, and is executed after a normal reach performance. For example, an advanced performance is executed from a normal reach performance, and then the three performance patterns 70a all move slowly while being identical, and a more special reach performance (a reach performance that guarantees a jackpot) than the "SPSP reach" or "SPSP "7" reach" is performed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70.

The first feature of the special chart variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that the type of special chart variation pattern that is determined is the same and does not change depending on the setting value. This makes it difficult to determine the setting value from the special chart variation pattern, making it possible to provide fair play.

The second feature of the special chart variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that the selection ratio of each special chart variation pattern is the same and does not change depending on the setting value. This makes it difficult to determine the setting value from the special chart variation pattern, making it possible to provide fair play.

The third feature of the special symbol change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that when the number of reserved first special symbols increases to 2 or 3 during non-time-saving mode, shortened change is more likely to be determined as the change pattern of the first special symbol, whereas shortened change is not determined as the change pattern of the second special symbol even if the number of reserved second special symbols increases to 2 or 3 during non-time-saving mode. By doing this, it is possible to increase the time efficiency (execution efficiency) of the special symbol change display when hitting left compared to hitting right during non-time-saving mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the special symbol change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that even if the number of reserved first special symbols increases from 1 to 3 during the time-saving state, the (super) shortened change is not determined as the change pattern of the first special symbol, whereas if the number of reserved second special symbols increases from 1 to 3 during the time-saving state, the (long) shortened change is more likely to be determined as the change pattern of the second special symbol. By doing this, it is possible to increase the time efficiency (execution efficiency) of the special symbol change display when hitting from the right compared to when hitting from the left during the time-saving state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

(Pre-judgment table)
Figure 14 (a) is a pre-judgment table for the non-time-saving state for pre-judging (reading ahead) special chart judgment information obtained based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 during the non-time-saving state, and Figure 14 (b) is a pre-judgment table for the time-saving state for pre-judging (reading ahead) special chart judgment information obtained based on the winning of a game ball into the second starting hole 47 during the time-saving state.

As shown in FIG. 14, the advance judgment table associates the type of special symbol (starting hole), the jackpot judgment result, the special symbol judgment result, the random number value for reach judgment, the random number value for special symbol fluctuation pattern judgment, the special symbol planned fluctuation pattern as the judgment result, and the look-ahead specification command indicating the special symbol planned fluctuation pattern.

Therefore, the "special symbol planned change pattern" can be said to be something that can identify the type of special symbol, the result of the jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the special symbol change pattern that is planned to be executed.

The main CPU 110a refers to the advance determination table shown in FIG. 14, and determines the planned special symbol variation pattern based on the random number value for determining a jackpot, the random number value for determining a special symbol, the random number value for determining a reach, and the random number value for determining a special symbol variation pattern, and transmits a look-ahead command corresponding to the planned special symbol variation pattern to the performance control board 130.

Next, modified examples of the specifications of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Figs. 15 and 16. In this embodiment, as described in Figs. 11 and 12 and in the description of the game states, the so-called "probability loop type" is used. The "probability loop type" refers to a type in which, for example, when a "jackpot" is determined in a "normal game state (low probability non-time-saving game state)" and a special symbol "02" or "03" is determined, the game enters a "high probability game state (high probability time-saving game state)" after the jackpot game ends, but thereafter, if the special symbol "04" (or "01") is not determined in the "high probability game state" and the special symbol "05" or special symbol "06" is determined, the "high probability game state" continues.

Figure 15 shows the so-called "Type 1, Type 2". The "Type 1, Type 2" has two game states: "Normal game state (low probability non-time-saving game state)" and "Time-saving game state (low probability time-saving game state)". When a "jackpot" is determined in the "normal game state" (for example, the probability of a jackpot is "1/199"), as shown in (1), the game transitions to "jackpot game 1 (4 rounds)" or "jackpot game 2 (8 rounds)" at a predetermined rate.

When "Big Win Game 1 (4 rounds)" ends, the game moves to "Time-saving Game State 1". The maximum number of times that this "Time-saving Game State 1" can be played is "1". However, during "Time-saving Game State 1", it is possible to have a game ball enter the second start hole 47 and store special game determination information in the first to fourth memory sections of the second special game determination information reserve memory area, and a maximum of "5" "Big Win Determinations" and "Small Win Determinations" can be performed using the special game determination information obtained by having a game ball enter the second start hole 47.

On the other hand, when "Big Win Game 2 (8 rounds)" ends, the game moves to "Time-saving Game State 2". The maximum number of times that this "Time-saving Game State 2" can be played is "7". However, during "Time-saving Game State 2", it is possible to have the game ball enter the second start hole 47 and store the special game determination information in the first to fourth memory sections of the second special game determination information reserve memory area, and a maximum of "Big Win Determination" and "Small Win Determination" can be performed "11" times using the special game determination information obtained by having the game ball enter the second start hole 47.

We will not go into the detailed control flow, but if the result of the "big hit determination" is that it is a "big hit," then the "small hit determination" is not performed; if the result of the "big hit determination" is that it is not a "big hit," then the "small hit determination" is performed; and if the "small hit determination" does not determine that it is a "small hit," then it is a "miss."

The special chart determination information obtained by having the game ball enter the second starting hole 47 is determined to be a "big win" with a probability of, for example, "1/199", and if it is not determined to be a "big win", it is determined to be a "small win" with a probability of, for example, "1/8". Note that the special chart determination information obtained by having the game ball enter the first starting hole 45 may be such that a "small win" is not won, or may be such that it is difficult to win.

Between "time-saving game state 1" and "time-saving game state 2," "time-saving game state 2" has a higher upper limit on the number of times the time-saving game state can be played, and is therefore more advantageous to the player. Therefore, on the image display device 70, etc., "time-saving game state 1" is displayed as "RUSH acquisition challenge mode," and "time-saving game state 2" is displayed as "RUSH mode," so that the player can identify the advantage or disadvantage from the display mode.

The game state during the "RUSH Acquisition Challenge Mode" is "Time-saving Game State 1" until the first variable display ends, and is the "Normal Game State" from the start of the second variable display. The game state during the "RUSH Mode" is "Time-saving Game State 2" until the seventh variable display ends, and is the "Normal Game State" from the start of the eighth variable display.

If a "small win" is determined during the "RUSH acquisition challenge mode", as shown in (2), the game moves to "jackpot game 3 (4 rounds)". However, the first round of "jackpot game 3 (4 rounds)" is a small win game, and if the game ball can be placed in the "special area" provided in the large prize opening during the small win game, the jackpot game (2nd to 4th rounds) will be executed. On the other hand, if the game ball cannot be placed in the "special area" during the small win game, the jackpot game (2nd to 4th rounds) will not be executed.

If a "jackpot" is determined during the "RUSH acquisition challenge mode", the game will transition to "jackpot game 4 (8 rounds)" as shown in (1). Then, when "jackpot game 3 (4 rounds)" and "jackpot game 4 (8 rounds)" are completed, the game will transition to "RUSH mode".

On the other hand, if neither a "big win" nor a "small win" is determined during the "RUSH acquisition challenge mode", the "RUSH acquisition challenge mode" ends and transitions to "normal mode".

If a "small win" is determined during "RUSH mode", as shown in (2), the mode will transition to "jackpot game 3 (4 rounds)", and if a "jackpot" is determined, as shown in (1), the mode will transition to "jackpot game 4 (8 rounds)". Then, when "jackpot game 3 (4 rounds)" or "jackpot game 4 (8 rounds)" ends, the mode will transition to "RUSH mode".

On the other hand, if neither a "big win" nor a "small win" is determined during "RUSH mode", "RUSH mode" ends and transitions to "normal mode".

The gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is not limited to the "probable loop type" described above, but may be such a "type 1/type 2 type."

Figure 16 shows the so-called "small win rush type." The "small win rush type" has game states of "normal game state (low probability non-time-saving game state)," "time-saving game state (low probability time-saving game state)," and "high probability game state (high probability time-saving game state)." When a "jackpot" is determined in the "normal game state" (for example, the jackpot probability is "1/319"), as shown in (1), it transitions to "jackpot game 1 (4 rounds)" or "jackpot game 2 (16 rounds)" at a predetermined rate.

When "jackpot game 1 (4 rounds)" is completed, the game transitions to a "time-saving game state." The maximum number of times that the game can be played in this "time-saving game state" is, for example, "50." When "jackpot game 2 (16 rounds)" is completed, the game transitions to a "high probability game state."

When a "jackpot" is determined in the "time-saving game state" (for example, the probability of a jackpot is "1/319"), as shown in (1), a transition to "jackpot game 4 (2 rounds)" or "jackpot game 3 (16 rounds)" occurs at a predetermined rate. When "jackpot game 4 (2 rounds)" ends, a transition to the "time-saving game state" occurs, and when "jackpot game 3 (16 rounds)" ends, a transition to the "high probability game state" occurs. In addition, if the variable display is executed "50" times without a "jackpot" being determined, the "time-saving game state" ends and a transition to the "normal game state" occurs.

When a "jackpot" is determined in the "high probability game state" (for example, the jackpot probability is "1/77"), as shown in (2), a transition to "jackpot game 4 (2 rounds)" or "jackpot game 3 (16 rounds)" will occur at a predetermined rate.

Furthermore, when a "small win" is determined in the "high probability game state" (for example, the probability of a small win is "1/2.5"), the game transitions to the "small win game" as shown in (3), in which the small win large prize opening is opened for a predetermined period of time, and for example, in "one" "small win game", it is possible to win approximately three game balls in the small win large prize opening. After the "small win game" ends, the game transitions to the "high probability game state."

For example, the probability of a small win is 1/2.5, making it very easy to win. After the small win game ends, the game enters a high probability game state again, so in the high probability game state, it is more advantageous for the player to continue winning the small win probability of 1/2.5 without winning the big win probability of 1/77, for example, since this allows the player to increase the number of game balls they have through the small win game.

The gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is not limited to the above-mentioned "high probability loop type," but may be such a "small win rush type."

In addition, the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is not limited to the "probability loop type", "type 1/2 type", or "small win rush type", but may be a so-called "ST probability type" in which the upper limit number of times in the "high probability game state (high probability time-saving game state)" is set to, for example, "100", or may be a so-called "probability type" in which the "high probability game state (high probability time-saving game state)" falls to the "normal game state (low probability non-time-saving game state)" or the "time-saving game state (low probability time-saving game state)" with a predetermined probability.

Next, we will explain the details of the "gaming machine installation information" and "HC/fraud monitoring information" using Figures 17 to 22.

Figure 17 shows a list of messages related to communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120. No. 1 has the message name "Game machine installation information notification", the transmission direction "Main control board 110 → Frame control board 120", the command "0x01", and the message summary "Notify game machine installation information". No. 2 has the message name "Game machine installation information response", the transmission direction "Frame control board 120 → Main control board 110", the command "0x11", and the message summary "Respond game machine installation information receipt result". No. 3 has the message name "Game machine information notification", the transmission direction "Main control board 110 → Frame control board 120", the command "0x02", and the message summary "Notify game machine information". Note that "game machine information" here refers to "HC/fraud monitoring information". No. 4, the message name is "Amusement machine information response", the transmission direction is "Frame control board 120 → Main control board 110", the command is "0x12", and the message summary is "Respond with the gaming machine information reception result and frame control status".

The "gaming machine installation information" is configured as shown in FIG. 18. No. 1 has the data name "Message length" and the content "0x19". No. 2 has the data name "Command" and the content "0x01". No. 3 has the data name "Communication serial number" and the content "Fixed at 0". No. 4 has the data name "Gaming machine type" related to the gaming machine installation information, the content of which will be described later. No. 5 has the data name "Main control chip ID number" related to the gaming machine installation information, the content of which will be described later. No. 6 has the data name "Main control chip manufacturer code" related to the gaming machine installation information, the content of which will be described later. No. 7 has the data name "Main control chip product code" related to the gaming machine installation information, the content of which will be described later. 8 has the data name "Checksum" and the contents "-".

As shown in Figure 18, the data name of No. 4, "Machine type", is composed of 1 byte, with Bit 3 to Bit 0 indicating the type of machine. If Bit 3 to Bit 0 are "0001", it indicates a "pachinko machine", if Bit 3 to Bit 0 are "0010", it indicates a "slot machine", if Bit 3 to Bit 0 are "0011", it indicates an "arrange ball machine", if Bit 3 to Bit 0 are "0100", it indicates a "janball machine", and the rest are unused.

Bits 6 to 4 indicate the organization classification of the union. If Bits 6 to 4 are "000", it indicates the "Nikkoso" (an organization mainly related to pachinko machines), if Bits 6 to 4 are "001", it indicates the "Nichidenkyo" (an organization mainly related to slot machines), and the rest are unused.

Bit 7 indicates the management medium, and if Bit 7 is "0", it indicates a gaming ball, and if Bit 7 is "1", it indicates a gaming medal. For example, if gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine, Bit 7 will be "0", Bit 6 to Bit 4 will be "000", and Bit 3 to Bit 0 will be "0001", which will be 1 byte of data.

The "main control chip ID number" is omitted from the drawing, but the ID of each main control chip manufacturer is transmitted via telegram. For example, if the main control chip is from manufacturer A, a total of 9 bytes of data consisting of the chip individual number "23456789" + identification code is transmitted via telegram, and if the main control chip is from manufacturer B, a total of 9 bytes of data consisting of the chip individual number "45678912" + identification code is transmitted via telegram.

The "gaming machine installation information response" is a response from the frame control board 120 to the main control board 110 after the main control board 110 transmits the "gaming machine installation information" to the frame control board 120. No. 1 has the data name "message length" and the content "0x05". No. 2 has the data name "command" and the content "0x11". No. 3 has the data name "communication number" and the content "fixed at 0". No. 4 has the data name "gaming machine installation information receipt result", and if the content is "0x00", it means "received OK", and if the content is "0x01", it means "ball removal state" indicating that the frame control board 120 is in a ball removal state. No. 5 has the data name "checksum" and the content "addition result from message length to data section". In addition, the main control board 110 will not enter a playable state unless it receives the content "0x00" (reception OK) as the "gaming machine installation information receipt result" from the frame control board 120. This will be explained in more detail later using a flowchart.

The "HC/fraud monitoring information" is configured as shown in FIG. 19. No. 1 has the data name "Message length" and the contents "0x0B-0x15". No. 2 has the data name "Command" and the contents "0x02". No. 3 has the data name "Communication serial number" and the contents "Sequence number (0-255)". No. 4 has the data name "Main control status 1" and the contents are Bit 0 "Jackpot 1", Bit 1 "Jackpot 2", Bit 2 "Jackpot 3", Bit 3 "Machine status signal 1", Bit 4 "Machine status signal 2", Bit 5 "Machine status signal 3", Bit 6 "Machine status signal 4", and Bit 7 "Unused". For example, during the execution of a jackpot game corresponding to "jackpot 1," Bit 0 and Bit 1 are ON ("1"), and the fact that Bit 0 and Bit 1 of main control state 1 are ON ("1") is ultimately transmitted to the gaming machine information center.

No. 5 has the data name "Main Control State 2" and the contents are Bit 0 "During big win + time-saving or advantageous state", Bit 1 "High probability", Bit 2 "Time-saving or advantageous state", and Bits 3 to 7 "Unused". For example, during a high probability game state, Bit 1 is ON ("1"), and the fact that Bit 1 of Main Control State 2 is ON ("1") is ultimately transmitted to the gaming machine information center.

No. 6 has the data name "Game Machine Error Status", and the contents are Bit 0 to Bit 5 are "Error Code", Bit 6 is "0 = Frame Control, 1 = Main Control" (0 is an error detected by the frame control board 120, 1 is an error detected by the main control board 110), and Bit 7 is "0 = Alert only, 1 = Alert + Output to Hall Controller" (0 is an error alert only, 1 is an error alert and output to the hall controller). For example, if an error corresponding to Bit 0 occurs, Bit 0 becomes ON ("1"), and the fact that Bit 0 of the game machine error status is ON ("1") is finally transmitted to the game machine information center.

No. 7 has the data name "Fraud Detection Status 1" and the contents are Bit 0 "Settings Change Signal", Bit 1 "Settings Check Signal", Bit 2 "RWM Clear Signal", Bit 3 "Fraud Detection Signal 1", Bit 4 "Fraud Detection Signal 2", Bit 5 "Fraud Detection Signal 3", Bit 6 "Winning Limit Device Activated Signal", and Bit 7 "Unused". For example, if the settings are being changed as described below, Bit 0 will be ON ("1"), and the fact that Bit 0 of Fraud Detection Status 1 is ON ("1") will ultimately be transmitted to the gaming machine information center.

No. 8 has the data name "Number of prize balls when the device is activated" and the content "Number of prize balls when the device is activated" (for example, the number of prize balls when the game ball enters the second start opening 47). No. 9 has the data name "Number of prize balls when the continuous device is activated" and the content "Number of prize balls when the continuous device activation device is activated" (for example, the number of prize balls when the game ball enters the large winning opening 50).

No. 10 has the name of the data related to the game information "Number of game information" and the content "Number of type information and count information (n) (n) = 0 to 5 (variable length)". No. 11 has the name of the data related to the game information "Type information 1" and the content "Type information 1". No. 12 has the name of the data related to the game information "Count information 1" and the content "Count information 1".

In the first example, when one game ball enters the first start opening 45, the count information is "data indicating the first start opening 45," "data indicating the number of winning balls (1)," and "data indicating the number of prize balls (3)." In the second example, when one game ball enters the large prize opening 50, the count information is "data indicating the large prize opening 50," "data indicating the number of winning balls (1)," and "data indicating the number of prize balls (15)." In the third example, when one game ball passes through the out ball detection switch 39a, the count information is "data indicating the out ball detection switch 39a" and "data indicating the number of passing balls (1)." These data are finally transmitted to the gaming machine information center as a telegram.

No. 13 has the data name "Type information n" related to the game information and the content "Type information n". No. 14 has the data name "Count information n" related to the game information and the content "Count information n". No. 15 has the data name "Checksum" and the content "Addition result from message length to data section".

Figure 20 is a diagram explaining the details of the above-mentioned "main control state 1," "main control state 2," and "fraud detection state 1."

"Main control state 1" is Bit 0's name "Jackpot 1", with details "Jackpot 1 information: set to 1 during the jackpot to be notified", Bit 1's name "Jackpot 2", with details "Jackpot 2 information: set to 1 during all jackpots", Bit 2's name "Jackpot 3", with details "Jackpot 3 information: set to 1 during states such as small jackpot rush and special time-saving", Bit 3's name "Gaming machine status signal 1", with details "Gaming machine status signal: set to 1 while gaming machine status signal 1 is ON", Bit 4's name "Gaming machine status signal 2", with details "Gaming machine status signal: set to 1 while gaming machine status signal 2 is ON", Bit 5's name "Gaming machine status signal 3", with details "Gaming machine status signal: set to 1 while gaming machine status signal 3 is ON", and Bit 6's name "Gaming machine status signal 4", with details "Gaming machine status signal "Set to 1 while gaming machine status signal 4 is ON," and the name of Bit 7 is "Unused," with details "Fixed to 0."

"Game machine status signal 1" corresponds to external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 1 of the hall control output unit 173, "game machine status signal 2" corresponds to external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 2 of the hall control output unit 173, "game machine status signal 3" corresponds to external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 3 of the hall control output unit 173, and "game machine status signal 4" corresponds to external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 4 of the hall control output unit 173.

The small win rush is as described in FIG. 16. The special time-saving mode corresponds to, for example, a time-saving game mode (so-called ceiling time-saving mode) that operates as a rescue when a low-probability game mode has been played a specified number of times (for example, 1000 variable displays) since the end of a big win game, or a time-saving game mode (so-called pattern time-saving mode) that operates with a specified probability when a big win is judged to be a miss.

In "Main Control State 2", Bit 0 is named "Jackpot + Time-saving or Advantageous State", with details "Game Status Information: Set to 1 during jackpot and time-saving or advantageous state", Bit 1 is named "High Probability", with details "Game Status Information: Set to 1 during high probability", Bit 2 is named "Time-saving or Advantageous State", with details "Game Status Information: Set to 1 during time-saving or advantageous state", and Bits 3 to 7 are named "Unused" and details "Fixed to 0".

"Fraud detection status 1" is bit 0's name "settings changing signal", details "0 = normal, 1 = settings changing", bit 1's name "settings checking signal", details "0 = normal, 1 = settings checking", bit 2's name "RWM clear signal", details "0 = normal, 1 = RWM clear (RWM initialization) occurred", bit 3's name "Fraud detection signal 1", details "urgency: weak 0 = normal, 1 = abnormality occurred", bit 4's name "Fraud detection signal 2", details "urgency: medium 0 = normal, 1 = abnormality occurred", bit 5's name "Fraud detection signal 3", details "urgency: strong 0 = normal, 1 = abnormality occurred", bit 6's name "acquisition limit device operating signal", details "0 = not operating, 1 = operating", and bit 7's name "unused", details "fixed at 0".

Figure 21 is a diagram explaining the details of the "game information" mentioned above.

The "game information" is made up of two bytes, "type information (1 byte)" and "count information (1 byte)". Furthermore, the "type information (1 byte)" is made up of "data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" and "data number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)".

For example, "Data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is Bit 4 to Bit 7 "0000" with the type name "Unused" and the content "-", Bit 4 to Bit 7 "0001" with the type name "Winning at the starting gate" and the content "Notification that a win has been made at the starting gate", Bit 4 to Bit 7 "0010" with the type name "Winning at the large winning gate due to the operation of a special electric device" and the content "Notification that a win has been made at the large winning gate", Bit 4 to Bit 7 "0011" with the type name "Winning at the winning gate" and the content "Winning Bit 4 to Bit 7 “0100” are the type name “All start gate winnings” and the content “Notification of passing through the start gate or normal gate related to the game”. Bit 4 to Bit 7 “0101”, “0110”, “0111”, and “1000” are the type name “Unused” and the content “-”. Bit 4 to Bit 7 “1001” are the type name “Number of times the pattern has been determined” and the content “Notification of the number of times the pattern related to the game has changed”. Bit 4 to Bit 7 “1010” are the type name “ The number of times of big wins" and the content "notification that the consecutive operation device of the accessory has been operated" are set for Bit 4 to Bit 7 "1011" as the type name "unused" and the content "-", and the number of times of big wins (number of times of opening of the big win opening)" and the content "notification of opening of the big win opening when the consecutive operation device of the accessory has not been operated, in case the number of times of opening of the big win opening at the time of a small win is to be set as the start number" (see the small win game for the first round of "Big Win Game 3 (4 rounds)" in FIG. 15). Bits 4 to 7 "1101" are type name "Passing through a specific area" and content "Notification of passing through a specific area" (see "Specific area" in Figure 15), Bits 4 to 7 "1110" are type name "External terminal board pulse output" and content "Instruction to output a pulse from the dedicated unit (Hall control output section 173)", and Bits 4 to 7 "1111" are type name "Performance information status notification" and content "Notification of the status required to calculate performance information".

If the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Winning at Start Gate", then the "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" transmits the content (start gate number) of Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001" (winning at start gate 1), "0010" (winning at start gate 2), or "0011" (winning at start gate 3) (other than the above are unused). For example, if a game ball wins at the first start gate 45, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "0001" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001" is transmitted.

If the "Data Type (Bits 4 to 7)" is "Winning at the large prize slot due to the operation of a special electric device," then either Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001" (winning at large prize slot 1) or "0010" (winning at large prize slot 2) is transmitted as the content (large prize slot number) (other than the above are unused). For example, if a game ball wins at large prize slot 50, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bits 4 to 7)" as "0010" and "Data Number (Bits 0 to 3)" as "0001" is transmitted.

If the "Data Type (Bits 4 to 7)" is "Winning at a Winning Gate", then the content (winning gate number) is transmitted as one of the following bits 0 to 3: "0001" (winning at winning gate 1), "0010" (winning at winning gate 2), ... "1111" (winning at winning gate 15) ("0000" is unused). For example, if a game ball wins at the general winning gate 43 located at the bottom right of the decorative frame 40, type information (1 byte) is transmitted with "Data Type (Bits 4 to 7)" set to "0011" and "Data Number (Bits 0 to 3)" set to "0001".

If the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Winning at all start gates", then the contents of Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001" (winning or passing) are transmitted (others are unused). For example, if the game ball wins at the first start gate 45, type information (1 byte) with "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "0100" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001" is transmitted, and if the game ball passes through the normal gate 44, type information (1 byte) with "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "0100" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001" is transmitted.

If "Data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Number of times a pattern has been confirmed," then Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001" (the number of times the patterns related to the game (special patterns, normal patterns) have been confirmed) is transmitted as the content (the rest are unused). For example, if the first special pattern is displayed in a stopped state, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "1001" and "Data number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001" is transmitted, and similar type information is transmitted when the second special pattern is displayed in a stopped state. Similarly, similar type information is transmitted when a normal pattern is displayed in a stopped state.

If the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Number of jackpots", Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001" (the continuous operation device for the special feature is activated) is transmitted as the content (others are unused). For example, when the first jackpot (see Figure 12) is executed, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "1010" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001" is transmitted.

If the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is the "Number of Features (Number of Times the Big Win Gate is Opened)", then Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001" (Feature 1) is transmitted as the content (the rest are unused). For example, if the "Big Win Game 3" described in FIG. 15 is executed, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "1100" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001" is transmitted.

If the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Passing through a specific area", then Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001" (specific area 1) is transmitted as the content (the rest are unused). For example, when the "Big Win Game 3" described in FIG. 15 is executed and the game ball passes through the specific area, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "1101" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001" is transmitted.

In addition, to touch upon the count information in the case of "passing through a specific area," as shown in FIG. 22, if Bit 4 to Bit 7 are "unused" and "fixed to 0," and Bit 0 to Bit 3 are "0001," it is transmitted that "the number of times the specific area has been passed is 1" (the rest are unused). In other words, as shown in Example 1 of FIG. 22, when the game ball passes through specific area 1 once, game information "0xD101" is transmitted, which is broken down into type information (1 byte) with "data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "1101" and "data number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001," and count information (1 byte) with "unused (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "0000" and "number of passes (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001" (1 time).

If the "data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "external terminal board pulse output", the contents indicate that a pulse is output from the dedicated unit (hall control output section 173).
If the "data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is a "performance information status notification", the state (fixed at 1) required to calculate the performance information is transmitted as the content (the others are unused).

Note that in the case of "performance information status notification," as shown in FIG. 22, Bit 4 to Bit 7 are "fixed to 0," Bit 0 indicates "base," and Bit 0 indicates "low base" when it is "0" (e.g., low probability non-time-saving game state), and Bit 0 indicates "high base" when it is "1" (e.g., low probability time-saving game state, high probability time-saving game state). Bit 1 indicates "jackpot," and Bit 0 indicates "normal" when it is "0" (e.g., low probability non-time-saving game state), and Bit 1 indicates "jackpot." Bit 2 indicates "high probability," and Bit 0 indicates "low probability" when it is "0" (e.g., low probability non-time-saving game state, low probability time-saving game state), and Bit 1 indicates "high probability" when it is "1" (e.g., high probability time-saving game state). Bit 3 is unused.

As shown in Example 2 of Figure 22, when the status changes to high base, game information "0xF101" is sent, which is broken down into type information (1 byte) with "Data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "1111" and "Data number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001", and count information (1 byte) with "Unused (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "0000" and "Status flag" Bit 0 being "1" (Bits 1 to 3 are "0").

The "HC/fraud monitoring information response" in Figure 22 is a response from the frame control board 120 to the main control board 110 after the main control board 110 sends "HC/fraud monitoring information" to the frame control board 120. No. 1 has the data name "Message length" and the content "0x05". No. 2 has the data name "Command" and the content "0x12". No. 3 has the data name "Communication number" and the content "Communication sequence number (0-255)". No. 4 has the data name "HC/fraud monitoring information receipt result" and the content "0x00" indicates that "receipt OK". No. 5 has the data name "Checksum" and the content "Addition result from message length to data section". In addition, the main control board 110 will not enter a playable state unless it receives the content "0x00" (received OK) as the "HC/fraud monitoring information receipt result" from the frame control board 120. This will be explained in more detail later using a flowchart.

Next, a list of functions and implementation areas of the gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 23 and 24. The "usage area" corresponds to the "game area" described in Figures 7 and 8, and the "outside the use area" corresponds to the "information area" described in Figures 7 and 8.
In the figure, "◎" indicates a mounting area, "◯" indicates a mountable area, and "×" indicates that mounting is not possible.

For No. 1 "Function to control game execution", the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" is "◎", and the "Outside use area" of the "Main control unit 110m", "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m", and "Outside use area" are "X". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m", and the "Function to control game execution" corresponds to, for example, the process executed in the "Main control board timer interrupt process" described below.

For No. 2 "control the game state", the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m" is "◎", and the "outside the use area" of the "main control unit 110m", the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and "outside the use area" are "×". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m", and "control the game state" corresponds to the function of controlling the above-mentioned "normal game state", "time-saving game state", and "high probability game state".

For No. 3 "Control related to launch", the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" is "◎", and the "Outside the use area" of the "Main control unit 110m", "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m", and "Outside the use area" are "X". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m", and "Control related to launch" corresponds to the control for launching the game ball into the game area 5a.

For No. 4 "Generation of random numbers for internal lottery", the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m" is "◎", and the "outside the use area" of the "main control unit 110m", "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and "outside the use area" are "×". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m", and "generation of random numbers for internal lottery" corresponds to the generation of random numbers used in each process executed in the "main control board timer interrupt process" described below.

For No. 5 "Detection of winning game balls and payout of prize balls", the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" is "◎", and the "Outside use area" of the "Main control unit 110m", "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m", and "Outside use area" are "X". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m", and "Detection of winning game balls and payout of prize balls" corresponds to steps S200 and S500 of the "Main control board timer interrupt processing" described below.

Regarding No. 6 "Control related to special symbol display device", the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" is "◎", and the "Outside use area" of the "Main control unit 110m", "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m", and "Outside use area" are "X". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m", and "Control related to special symbol display device" corresponds to steps S700 and S750 of the "Main control board timer interrupt processing" described below.

For No. 7 "Control related to special electric props," the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" is "◎," and the "Outside the use area" of the "Main control unit 110m," "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m," and "Outside the use area" are "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m," and "Control related to special electric props" corresponds to step S340 of the "Special chart special electric control process" described below.

For No. 8 "Control related to normal pattern display device", the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" is "◎", and the "Outside use area" of the "Main control unit 110m", "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m", and "Outside use area" are "X". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m", and "Control related to normal pattern display device" corresponds to steps S700 and S750 of the "Main control board timer interrupt processing" described below.

For No. 9 "Control related to normal electric props," the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" is "◎," and the "Outside use area" of the "Main control unit 110m," "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m," and "Outside use area" are "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m," and "Control related to normal electric props" corresponds to step S250 of the "Input control process" described below.

Regarding No. 10 "Other control related to game execution," the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" is "◎," and the "Outside use area" of the "Main control unit 110m," the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m," and "Outside use area" are "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m."

For No. 11 "Function to control the game ball count display device," the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" is "◎," and the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m," "Outside the use area," and "Outside the use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are "X." In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m," and the "Function to control the game ball count display device" corresponds to steps W650 and W700 of the "Frame control board timer interrupt processing" described below.

For No. 12 "electromagnetically record the number of game balls," the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎," and the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m," "outside the use area," and "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "x." In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m," and "electromagnetically record the number of game balls" corresponds to the "frame control board game ball number update process" described below.

For No. 13 "Display the number of game balls", the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m", "Outside the use area", and "Outside the use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are "X". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m", and "Display the number of game balls" corresponds to steps W650 and W700 of the "Frame control board timer interrupt processing" described below.

For No. 14 "Add the number of loaned game balls", the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m", "Outside the use area", and "Outside the use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are "×". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m", and "Add the number of loaned game balls" corresponds to the "Frame control board game ball loan process" described below.

For No. 15 "Subtract the number of counted game balls", the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m", "Outside the use area", and "Outside the use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are "X". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m", and "Subtract the number of counted game balls" corresponds to the "Frame control board game ball counting process" described below.

For No. 16 "Subtract the number of game balls launched", the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m", "Outside the use area", and "Outside the use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are "×". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m", and "Subtract the number of game balls launched" corresponds to steps W301 and W302 of the "Frame control board game ball number update process" described below.

For No. 17 "Add the number of game balls (foul balls) that were not shot onto the board and returned," the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" is "◎," and the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m," "Outside the use area," and "Outside the use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m," and "Add the number of game balls (foul balls) that were not shot onto the board and returned" corresponds to steps W303 and W304 of the "Frame control board game ball count update process" described below.

For No. 18 "Add the number of paid-out game balls", the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m", "Outside the use area", and "Outside the use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are "×". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m", and "Add the number of paid-out game balls" corresponds to steps W305 to W311 of the "Frame control board game ball number update process" described below.

Regarding No. 19 "Initialize the number of game balls with the game ball count clear button", the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m", "outside the use area", and "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "x". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and "initialize the number of game balls with the game ball count clear button" corresponds to the process in which the frame control unit 120m clears the number of game balls when an input is made from the game ball count clear switch 121 when power is supplied.

For No. 20 "Function to control communication with game ball etc. lending devices," the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎," and the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m," "outside the use area," and "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "x." In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m," and the "function to control communication with game ball etc. lending devices" corresponds to control related to communication with the dedicated unit 170.

For No. 21 "VL power supply monitoring," the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "○," and the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m," "outside the use area," and "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m," and "VL power supply monitoring" corresponds to the power supply for connection confirmation input from the dedicated unit 170.

For No. 22 "Communication control, communication timer management", the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m", "outside the use area", and "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "x". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and "communication control, communication timer management" corresponds to time management related to communication with the dedicated unit 170.

No. 23 For the generation and transmission of the "gaming machine information notification (gaming machine performance information)" message, the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m", "outside the use area", and "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "x". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and the generation and transmission of the "gaming machine information notification (gaming machine performance information)" message corresponds to the processing of step W507 of the "frame control board gaming machine information notification processing" described below.

No. 24 For the generation and transmission of the "gaming machine information notification (gaming machine installation information)" message, the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m", "outside the use area", and "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "x". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and the generation and transmission of the "gaming machine information notification (gaming machine installation information)" message corresponds to the processing of steps W505 and W509 of the "frame control board gaming machine information notification processing" described below.

No. 25 For the generation and transmission of the "Game Machine Information Notification (HC/Fraud Monitoring Information)" message, the "Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" is "◎", and the "Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m", "Outside the Use Area", and "Outside the Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are "X". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m", and the generation and transmission of the "Game Machine Information Notification (HC/Fraud Monitoring Information)" message corresponds to the processing of step W513 of the "Frame Control Board Game Machine Information Notification Processing" described below.

For No. 26 "Counting notification message generation and transmission", the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m", "Outside the use area", and "Outside the use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are "×". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m", and "Counting notification message generation and transmission" corresponds to step W567 of the "Frame control board game ball counting process" described below.

For No. 27 "Receive loan notification", the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m", "Outside the use area", and "Outside the use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are "×". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m", and "Receive loan notification" corresponds to step W601 of the "Frame control board game ball loan processing" described below.

For No. 28 "Generating and sending a response message of loan receipt result", the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m", "outside the use area", and "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "×". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and "generating and sending a response message of loan receipt result" corresponds to steps W609 and W610 of the "frame control board game ball loan processing" described below.

For No. 29 "Main control unit-frame control unit communication control", the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m" and the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are marked with "◎", while the "outside of the use area" of the "main control unit 110m" and the "outside of the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are marked with "x". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m" and the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and corresponds to all processing related to communication between the main control unit 110m and the frame control unit 120m (for example, "game machine installation information notification" and "game machine installation information response" in "main control board main processing").

For No. 30 "Compilation of gaming machine performance information," the "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎," and the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m," "outside the use area," and "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "x." In this embodiment, the function is executed outside the use area of the "frame control unit 120m," and "compilation of gaming machine performance information" corresponds to the "frame control board gaming machine performance information calculation process" described below.

In addition, No. 30 to No. 38 are data for one day from when the gaming machine 1 is turned on to when it is turned off, and the data is collected when the gaming machine 1 is turned on and cleared when it is turned off. In other words, the data is different from the values calculated in the "frame control board display performance information calculation process" described later.
Furthermore, the aggregated data is not displayed on a display device (e.g., the frame control display device 125) or the like, but is transmitted to the gaming machine information center and shared and managed with the Nikkoso.

For No. 31 "Total number of balls fired," the "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎," and the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m," "outside the use area," and "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "x." In this embodiment, the function is executed outside the use area of the "frame control unit 120m," and the "total number of balls fired" corresponds to step W451 of the "frame control board gaming machine performance information calculation process" described below.

For No. 32 "Total number of acquired game balls", the "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m", "outside the use area", and "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "×". In this embodiment, the function is executed outside the use area of the "frame control unit 120m", and the "total number of acquired game balls" corresponds to step W452 of the "frame control board gaming machine performance information calculation process" described below.

For No. 33 "Ball payout rate", the "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m", "outside the use area", and "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "x". In this embodiment, the function is executed outside the use area of the "frame control unit 120m", and the "ball payout rate" corresponds to step W453 of the "frame control board gaming machine performance information calculation process" described below.

For No. 34 "Number of game balls acquired per minute (low base)", the "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m", "outside the use area", and "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "x". In this embodiment, the function is executed outside the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and the "number of game balls acquired per minute (low base)" corresponds to step W454 of the "frame control board gaming machine performance information calculation process" described below.

For No. 35 "Gem Ratio", the "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m", "outside the use area", and "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "x". In this embodiment, the function is executed outside the use area of the "frame control unit 120m", and the "gem ratio" corresponds to step W455 of the "frame control board gaming machine performance information calculation process" described below.

For No. 36 "Continuous feature ratio", the "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m", "outside the use area", and "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "x". In this embodiment, the function is executed outside the use area of the "frame control unit 120m", and the "continuous feature ratio" corresponds to step W456 of the "frame control board gaming machine performance information calculation process" described below.

For No. 37 "Number of times the continuous operation device of the gadget has been operated," the "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎," and the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m," "outside the use area," and "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "x." In this embodiment, the function is executed outside the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m," and the "number of times the continuous operation device of the gadget has been operated" corresponds to step W457 of the "frame control board gaming machine performance information calculation process" described below.

For No. 38 "Maximum ball output", the "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m", "outside the use area", and "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "x". In this embodiment, the function is executed outside the use area of the "frame control unit 120m", and "maximum ball output" corresponds to step W458 of the "frame control board gaming machine performance information calculation process" described below.

For No. 39 "Generation of gaming machine installation information," the "Use area" and "Outside the use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" and the "Use area" and "Outside the use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are all marked with "○." In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" and the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m." Specifically, the following information No. 40 to No. 42 is generated in the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m," and the following information No. 43 to No. 45 is generated in the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m," and the "Frame control unit 120m" transmits a total of six pieces of information, including the information No. 40 to No. 42 received from the "Main control unit 110m" and the information No. 43 to No. 45 generated by itself, to the U board 171 (ultimately to the gaming machine information center). In other words, "generation of gaming machine installation information" corresponds to step S5 of the "main control board main processing" described below, and steps W505 and W509 of the "frame control board gaming machine information notification processing" described below.

For No. 40 "Main control chip ID number", the "Use area" and "Outside use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" are marked with "○", and the "Use area" and "Outside use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are marked with "X (excluded)". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m". The "Main control chip ID number" will be described later in FIG. 18.

For No. 41 "Main control chip manufacturer code", the "Use area" and "Outside use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" are marked with "○", and the "Use area" and "Outside use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are marked with "X (excluded)". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m". The "Main control chip manufacturer code" will be described later in FIG. 18.

For No. 42 "Main control chip product code", the "Use area" and "Outside use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" are marked with "○", and the "Use area" and "Outside use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are marked with "X (excluded)". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m". The "Main control chip product code" will be described later in FIG. 18.

For No. 43 "Frame control chip ID number", the "Use area" and "Outside use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are marked with "○", while the "Use area" and "Outside use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" are marked with "X (excluded)". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m". The "Frame control chip ID number" will be described later in FIG. 50.

For No. 44 "Frame control chip manufacturer code", the "area of use" and "outside area of use" of the "frame control unit 120m" are marked with "○", while the "area of use" and "outside area of use" of the "main control unit 110m" are marked with "× (excluded)". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "area of use" of the "frame control unit 120m". The "frame control chip manufacturer code" will be described later in FIG. 50.

For No. 45 "Frame control chip product code", the "Use area" and "Outside use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are marked with "○", while the "Use area" and "Outside use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" are marked with "X (excluded)". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m". The "Frame control chip product code" will be described later in FIG. 50.

For No. 46 "Generation of HC/fraud monitoring information," the "Use area" and "Outside use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" and the "Use area" and "Outside use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are all marked "○." In this embodiment, the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" and the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are used. This will be explained in detail below.

No. 47 "Number of game balls": "Use area" of "Main control unit 110m" and "Use area" of "Frame control unit 120m" are "○", and "Outside of use area" of "Main control unit 110m" and "Outside of use area" of "Frame control unit 120m" are "×". "Number of game balls" refers to the "balls in possession" held by the player, and in this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of "Frame control unit 120m". For example, this corresponds to the "Frame control board game ball number update process" described later.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, the function is not executed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m" that can be implemented. Of course, the function may be executed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m", but since this is realized by transmitting information related to the "number of game balls" from the "frame control unit 120m" to the "main control unit 110m", in consideration of the control load, it can be said that it is more efficient to execute the function in the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m".

No. 48 "Number of shot balls": "Use area" of "Main control unit 110m" and "Use area" of "Frame control unit 120m" are "○", and "Outside use area" of "Main control unit 110m" and "Outside use area" of "Frame control unit 120m" are "×". "Number of shot balls" refers to the number of game balls shot by the player, and in this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of "Frame control unit 120m". For example, this corresponds to the "Frame control board game ball number update process" described later.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, the function is not executed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m" that can be implemented. Of course, the function may be executed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m", but since this is realized by transmitting information related to the "number of shot balls" from the "frame control unit 120m" to the "main control unit 110m", in consideration of the control load, it can be said that it is more efficient to execute the function in the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m".

No. 49 "Total number of winning balls": "Use area" of "Main control unit 110m" and "Use area" of "Frame control unit 120m" are "○", and "Outside of use area" of "Main control unit 110m" and "Outside of use area" of "Frame control unit 120m" are "×". "Total number of winning balls" refers to the total number of winning balls paid out to the player, and in this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use area" of "Frame control unit 120m". For example, this corresponds to the "Frame control board game ball number update process" described later.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, the function is not executed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m" that can be implemented. Of course, the function may be executed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m", but since this is realized by sending information related to the "total number of winning balls" from the "frame control unit 120m" to the "main control unit 110m", in consideration of the control load, it can be said that it is more efficient to execute the function in the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m".

For No. 50 "Main control state 1" (see FIG. 19), the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" is "○", and the "Outside use area" of the "Main control unit 110m", "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m", and "Outside use area" are "X". In this embodiment, the relevant function (the process of turning each bit of the main control state 1 ON/OFF, and the process related to the message generation/transmission of the main control state 1) is executed in the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m".

For No. 51 "Main control state 2", the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" is "○", and the "Outside the use area" of the "Main control unit 110m", "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m", and "Outside the use area" are "X". In this embodiment, the relevant function (the process of turning each bit of the main control state 2 ON/OFF, the process related to the message generation/transmission of the main control state 2) is executed in the "Use area" of the "Main control unit 110m".

For No. 52 "Game Machine Error State", the "Use Area" and "Outside the Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" and the "Use Area" and "Outside the Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are all marked with "○". The "Game Machine Error State" corresponds to, for example, a communication abnormality between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, and a communication abnormality between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170. In this embodiment, the above-mentioned communication abnormality is monitored in the "Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" and the "Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m", and the above-mentioned communication abnormality is not monitored in the "Outside the Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" and the "Outside the Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m", but the above-mentioned communication abnormality may be monitored in the "Outside the Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" and the "Outside the Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m".

For No. 53 "Fraud Detection State 1", the "Use Area" and "Outside the Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" are marked with "○", and the "Use Area" and "Outside the Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with "X". In this embodiment, for example, in the "Fraud Detection State 1" (FIG. 19), the "Change Settings", "Check Settings", and "RWM Clear" processes of Bit 0 to Bit 2 are executed in the "Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m", and the "Fraud Detection" processes of Bit 3 to Bit 5 and the "Acquisition Limit Device" of Bit 6 (counting game balls, etc.) are executed in the "Outside the Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m". In addition, the 8-bit telegram generation of "Fraud Detection State 1" is executed in the "Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m". This allows the "Use Area" and "Outside the Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" to be used efficiently, preventing processing from concentrating on one area.

Note that the use of the "use area" and "outside the use area" for "fraud detection state 1" is merely an example and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the process executed in the "use area" may be executed "outside the use area", and the process executed "outside the use area" may be executed in the "use area". In addition, all may be executed in the "use area", or all may be executed "outside the use area". Also, execution may be performed in the "use area" and "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m". For example, the process of the "acquisition limit device" (counting game balls, etc.) may be executed in the "use area" and "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m".

For No. 54 "Fraud Detection State 2 (Frame Control)", the "Use Area" and "Outside the Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with "○", and the "Use Area" and "Outside the Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" are marked with "X". In this embodiment, for example, in the "Fraud Detection State 2" (see FIG. 51), the processing of "Glass Frame Open", "Inner Frame Open", and "Fraud Radio Wave Detection" of Bit 0 to Bit 2, and the processing of "Winning Ball Count Abnormal Notification" and "Fired Ball Count Abnormal Notification" of Bit 4 to Bit 5 are executed in the "Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m", and the processing of "Game Ball Count Clear Detection" of Bit 3 is executed in the "Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m". In addition, the generation of the 8-bit telegram of "Fraud Detection State 2" is executed in the "Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m". In addition, message generation outside the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is realized, for example, by a program in the "outside the use area" referencing the RWM of the "usage area" and generating message outside the use area. This allows the "usage area" and "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" to be used efficiently, preventing processing from concentrating on just one area.

Note that the use of "area of use" and "outside area of use" for "fraud detection status 2" is merely an example and may be changed as appropriate. For example, a process executed in the "area of use" may be executed "outside area of use", and a process executed "outside area of use" may be executed in the "area of use". In addition, all processes may be executed in the "area of use", or all processes may be executed "outside area of use".

For No. 55 "Fraud Detection State 3 (Frame Control)", the "Use Area" and "Outside the Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with "○", and the "Use Area" and "Outside the Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" are marked with "X". In this embodiment, for example, in "Fraud Detection State 3" (see FIG. 51), the "Small Ball Detection" and "Iron Ball Detection" functions of Bit 0 to Bit 1 are executed outside the use area of the "Frame Control Unit 120m", and the generation of the 8-bit telegram of "Fraud Detection State 3" is executed outside the use area of the "Frame Control Unit 120m". This allows the "Use Area" and "Outside the Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" to be used efficiently, preventing processing from concentrating on just one area.

Note that the use of "area of use" and "outside area of use" for "fraud detection state 3" is merely an example and may be changed as appropriate. For example, a process executed in the "area of use" may be executed "outside area of use", and a process executed "outside area of use" may be executed in the "area of use". In addition, all processes may be executed in the "area of use", or all processes may be executed "outside area of use".

For No. 56 "Function to control the setting change device", the "Usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m" is "○", and the "Outside the usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m", "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m", and "Outside the usage area" are "X". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m", and the "Function to control the setting change device" corresponds to the "Setting change process" and "Setting confirmation process" described below.

Regarding No. 57 "Function of transmitting information related to the performance to the peripheral board", the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m" and the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "○", and the "outside the use area" of the "main control unit 110m" and the "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "×". In this embodiment, the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m" executes the function of transmitting information to the performance control board 130, and the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" executes the function of transmitting information to the performance control board 130. For example, a "special chart variation pattern designation command" is sent from the "main control unit 110m" to the performance control board 130, and the performance control board 130 determines the variation performance pattern (game performance) based on the received "special chart variation pattern designation command". In addition, information regarding the "error" detected by the "main control unit 110m" is sent from the "main control unit 110m" to the performance control board 130, and the performance control board 130 issues a notification corresponding to the received information regarding the "error". Similarly, information regarding the "error" detected by the "frame control unit 120m" is sent from the "frame control unit 120m" to the performance control board 130, and the performance control board 130 issues a notification corresponding to the received information regarding the "error".

For No. 58 "Function of transmitting gaming machine information to peripheral boards," the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m" and the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are marked with "○," while the "outside of the use area" of the "main control unit 110m" and the "outside of the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are marked with "×." Note that No. 58 is similar to No. 57 described above, so a description will be omitted.

For No. 59 "Fraud monitoring (excluding No. 60, 61)," the "usage area" and "outside the use area" of the "main control unit 110m" are marked with "○," while the "usage area" and "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are marked with "×." "Fraud monitoring (excluding No. 60, 61)" corresponds to monitoring so-called "hanging" fraud, for example, where counterfeit wiring or illegal parts are attached to illegally obtain jackpot random numbers, etc. In this embodiment, the monitoring is performed outside the use area of the "main control unit 110m." Note that the monitoring may also be performed in the use area of the "main control unit 110m."

For No. 60 "Monitoring of fraudulent payout of game balls," the "use area" and "outside the use area" of the "main control unit 110m" and the "use area" and "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are all marked "○." In this embodiment, the monitoring is performed in the "use area" and "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m." Note that instead of the two-chip configuration of the "main control unit 110m" and the "frame control unit 120m" as in this embodiment, it is also possible to configure the gaming machine 1 with, for example, a one-chip configuration of only the "main control unit 110m." In this case, the monitoring can be performed in the "use area" and "outside the use area" of the "main control unit 110m."

For No. 61 "Monitoring of fraudulent activity related to the lending of game balls," the "Use area" and "Outside the use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" and the "Use area" and "Outside the use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are all marked "○." Note that No. 61 is similar to No. 60 described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

For No. 62 "Error processing (stop playing)", the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m" is "○", and the "outside the use area" of the "main control unit 110m", "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and "outside the use area" are "×". In this embodiment, the processing is executed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m". For example, "error processing (stop playing)" corresponds to the process after step S9 in FIG. 30 is completed, the process after step S10 in FIG. 30 is completed, the process of the unrecoverable error in step S17 in FIG. 31 is completed, the process of step S27 in FIG. 31 is completed, or the process of step S600-6 in FIG. 46 is completed.

For No. 63 "Error handling (notification only)," "Use area" and "Outside use area" for the "Main control unit 110m" and "Use area" and "Outside use area" for the "Frame control unit 120m" are all marked "○." Details of "Error handling (notification only)" will be described later in "Error code display priority order" (Figure 78).

For No. 64 "Function to control the display of the performance display monitor," the "Use area," "Outside the use area" of the "Main control unit 110m," and the "Outside the use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are marked "○," while the "Use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" is marked "X." The "Function to control the display of the performance display monitor" corresponds to the "Frame control board display performance information calculation process" (FIG. 79) described below, and in this embodiment, both the process itself and the process to display on the frame control display 125 are executed "Outside the use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m."

For No. 65 "Function of generating signals necessary for testing the gaming machine," the "usage area" and "outside the use area" of the "main control unit 110m" and the "usage area" and "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are all marked "○." In this embodiment, the "main control unit 110m" executes the function in the "outside the use area," and the "frame control unit 120m" executes the function using both the "usage area" and the "outside the use area."

Note that for No. 1 to No. 65 above, the areas marked with an "x" cannot be implemented, but the areas marked with an "x" may be implemented (various processes are executed in the areas marked with an "x"). In addition, the process executed in the "usage area" or "outside the use area" of the main control unit 110m may be executed in the "frame control unit 120m," and the process executed in the "usage area" or "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" may be executed in the "usage area" or "outside the use area" of the main control unit 110m.

(Communication procedure between the main control board and the frame control board that enables play after the gaming machine is started)
Using Fig. 25, the communication procedure between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 that becomes playable after the game machine is started (when the frame control board 120 is not in the ball removal state) will be described. Note that the "game machine information" in Fig. 25 corresponds to the "HC/fraud monitoring information" described in Figs. 19 to 22.

First, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 start to start up, and the frame control board 120 completes its startup before the main control board 110. After that, when the main control board 110 completes its startup within a maximum of 3 minutes, the main control board 110 sends a gaming machine installation information notification (communication number = 0) to the frame control board 120 as the first telegram. Within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 sends a gaming machine installation information response (communication number = 0, receipt result = receipt OK) to the main control board 110 as the second telegram, and the main control board 110 checks the gaming machine installation information receipt result. In this case, since the receipt result = receipt OK, the main control board 110 allows the launch of gaming balls and the game becomes playable.

Then, 108 ms after the transmission of the first gaming machine installation information notification, the main control board 110 transmits a gaming machine information notification (communication number = 1) to the frame control board 120 as the third telegram. Within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 transmits a gaming machine information response (communication number = 1, receipt result = receipt OK) to the main control board 110 as the fourth telegram, and the main control board 110 confirms the gaming machine installation information receipt result. After that, the communication sequence of transmitting and receiving telegrams in the order of gaming machine information notification and gaming machine information response is repeated at a cycle of 108 ms.

If the frame control board 120 is unable to receive gaming machine installation information within three minutes of startup, it will notify the user of the error by displaying an error code on the frame control display 125 to indicate a communication line abnormality and/or sending an error designation command to the performance control board 130. If the gaming machine installation information notification is successfully received after the communication line abnormality occurs, the error notification will end.

(Communication procedure between the main control board and the frame control board when the gaming machine is not playable after startup)
Using Figure 26, we will explain the communication procedure between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 when play is not possible after the gaming machine is started (when the frame control board 120 is in a ball-removing state).

First, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 start to start up, and the frame control board 120 completes its startup before the main control board 110, and the ball removal operation starts and the ball removal state is entered. After that, when the main control board 110 completes its startup within a maximum of 3 minutes, the main control board 110 sends a gaming machine installation information notification (communication number = 0) to the frame control board 120 as the first telegram. Within 10 ms from that, the frame control board 120 sends a gaming machine installation information response (communication number = 0, reception result = ball removal state) to the main control board 110 as the second telegram, and the main control board 110 checks the gaming machine installation information reception result. Here, since the reception result = ball removal state, the main control board 110 allows the launch of gaming balls, but performs an infinite loop process without making the game available for play.

In addition, after the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 send and receive the gaming machine installation information response indicating the reception result = ball removal state, they do not communicate, and the frame control board 120 continues the ball removal operation until the gaming machine 1 is powered off.

(Communication procedure between the main control board and the frame control board when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed after the gaming machine is started)
Using Figure 27, we will explain the communication procedure between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, which enters a setting change/setting confirmation state after the gaming machine is started (when the frame control board 120 is not in a ball removal state).

First, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 begin to start up, and the frame control board 120 completes its startup before the main control board 110. After that, when the main control board 110 completes its startup within a maximum of 3 minutes, the main control board 110 sends a gaming machine installation information notification (communication number = 0) to the frame control board 120 as the first telegram. Within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 sends a gaming machine installation information response (communication number = 0, receipt result = receipt OK) to the main control board 110 as the second telegram, and the main control board 110 checks the gaming machine installation information receipt result.

Here, when the main control board 110 detects that both the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a have been operated, or that only the setting key switch 112a has been operated, it transitions to a setting change state (setting change mode) or a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode), and the setting value is displayed on the information display 115 implemented on the main control board 110.

After the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is entered and 108 ms has elapsed since the transmission of the first gaming machine installation information notification, the main control board 110 transmits a gaming machine information notification (communication number = 1) as the third telegram to the frame control board 120. Within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 transmits a gaming machine information response (communication number = 1) as the fourth telegram to the main control board 110, and the main control board 110 confirms the result of receipt of the gaming machine installation information. After that, regardless of whether the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is entered, the communication sequence of transmitting and receiving telegrams in the order of gaming machine information notification and gaming machine information response is repeated at 108 ms intervals.

When the setting key switch 112a is operated to end the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the reception result of the gaming machine installation information response already received is OK, so the main control board 110 allows the launch of gaming balls and the game becomes playable. After that, the communication sequence of sending and receiving messages in the order of gaming machine information notification and gaming machine information response is repeated at a cycle of 108 ms.

(Communication procedure by which the main control board determines that the communication line is disconnected)
The communication procedure in which the main control board 110 determines that the communication line has been disconnected will be described with reference to FIG.

First, when the main control board 110 sends a notification message (gaming machine installation information notification, gaming machine information notification) to the frame control board 120, the frame control board 120 should send a response message (gaming machine installation information response, gaming machine information response) within 10 ms, but a situation occurs in which the main control board 110 is unable to receive the response message.

This is the first time that a notification message is sent from the main control board 110 to the frame control board 120 at 108m intervals, but if the main control board 110 fails to receive a response message from the frame control board 120 10 times in a row, it will assume that a communication line disconnection has occurred and will send an error designation command to the performance control board 130 to notify the error. After that, the game machine 1 will be powered off/on to recover from the communication line disconnection.

(Communication procedure by which the frame control board determines that the communication line is disconnected)
The communication procedure in which the frame control board 120 determines that the communication line has been disconnected will be described with reference to FIG.

First, the main control board 110 sends a notification message (gaming machine installation information notification, gaming machine information notification) to the frame control board 120, and within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 sends a response message (gaming machine installation information response, gaming machine information response). After that, when the timing for sending the notification message arrives, which arrives every 108 ms, the main control board 110 sends the notification message to the frame control board 120, but a state occurs in which the frame control board 120 cannot receive the notification message.

After that, notification messages are sent from the main control board 110 to the frame control board 120 at intervals of 108 ms, but if the frame control board 120 is unable to receive notification messages for 1000 ms from the time it received the last notification message, the frame control board 120 will notify the error by displaying an error code on the frame control display 125 or sending an error specification command to the performance control board 130, assuming that a communication line disconnection has occurred. After that, if the notification message from the main control board 110 is successfully received, the error notification will end.

In addition, when the gaming machine 1 is in a ball removal state, information indicating that the gaming machine 1 is in a ball removal state may be transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center.

(Main processing of the main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 30. Fig. 30 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board 110. This main processing is performed when a system reset, which occurs when a power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, is input to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S1, performs initial CPU settings such as setting built-in registers in step S2, and performs processing to wait for other boards to start up in step S3. Specifically, it waits for one second for the frame control board 120 and performance control board 130 to start up so that no commands from the main control board 110 are missed. In addition, in step S4, access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is permitted.

In step S5, the main CPU 110a notifies the game machine installation information. Specifically, it transmits "game machine installation information" (see FIG. 18) to the frame control board 120. That is, when power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, the main control board 110 transmits "game machine installation information" to the frame control board 120.

In step S6, the main CPU 110a increments the "notification counter" provided in the main RAM 110c by "+1". Then, in step S7, it is determined whether or not the reception result of the gaming machine installation information notification has been responded to. If the reception result of the gaming machine installation information notification has been responded to, processing proceeds to step S10, and if the reception result of the gaming machine installation information notification has not been responded to, processing proceeds to step S8. In other words, it is determined whether or not the reception result has been responded (received) from the frame control board 120 as a result of sending "gaming machine installation information" to the frame control board 120.

In step S8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the value of the "notification counter" is "10". If it determines that the value of the "notification counter" is "10", the process proceeds to step S9, and if it determines that the value of the "notification counter" is not "10" (is less than 10), the process proceeds to step S5.

In step S9, the main CPU 110a performs processing to notify the error. Specifically, it determines that there is an abnormality (e.g., a disconnection) in the communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, sends a "game machine communication abnormality start command" to the performance control board 130, and notifies the "game machine communication abnormality error" under the control of the performance control board 130 (see FIG. 131). Then, it waits until the supply of power voltage is completely cut off. In other words, if the frame control board 120 is notified of "game machine installation information" "10" times but is unable to respond with the reception result of the game machine installation information notification, it notifies the error and does not enter a playable state, assuming that there may be a disconnection or the like (communication abnormality) between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120. This makes it possible to prevent the game from being played despite the occurrence of a disconnection or the like (communication abnormality) between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

As in this process, a process may be performed to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (e.g., a broken wire) in the communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, but the control program (main control program) that determines that a response could not be received from the frame control board 120 can also be said to be a detection means that detects whether or not there is an abnormality (e.g., a broken wire) in the communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

In step S10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the machine is in a ball-removed state. Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the reception result of the gaming machine installation information notification, and if the result is "0x00", it determines that the notification is "received OK", and if the result is "0x01", it determines that the notification is in a "ball-removed state" (see FIG. 18). If the notification is in a "ball-removed state", the main CPU 110a waits until the supply of power supply voltage is completely cut off.

If the ball is being removed, after completing the processing of step S10, the system will wait until the supply of power voltage is completely cut off, so the processing from step S11 onwards will not be executed (processing related to power restoration will not be executed and the control state before the power cut will not be restored). In other words, the "power restoration designation command" will not be sent to the performance control board 130 in step S24, so the audio, visual and electric light notifications of "power restoration" (described below) will not be executed. In this case, the audio and visual notifications of "ball removal operation in progress" (described below) will be executed. This prevents the various notifications of "power restoration" being executed during the ball removal state, or the initial operations described below from being executed, which can cause the player to lose focus on the ball removal work. On the other hand, if the processing of step S10 is denied (if the ball is not being removed), the system will move to step S24 and the "power restoration designation command" will be sent to the performance control board 130, so the audio, visual and electric light notifications of "power restoration" (described below) will be executed.

Similarly, when in the ball removal state, even if the RWM clear switch 111a is pressed and the power switch 164 is turned ON, the process does not proceed to the "RWM clear process" of step S19, so the "RWM clear process" is not executed and the "RWM clear designation command" is not sent to the performance control board 130. As a result, the audio, visual and electric light notifications of "power on (RWM clear)" (described below) are not executed. In this case, the audio and visual notifications of "ball removal operation in progress" (described below) are executed. This prevents the "power on (RWM clear)" notifications from being executed during the ball removal state, which could result in the player being unable to concentrate on the ball removal task. On the other hand, if the processing of step S10 is denied (if the ball is not removed), the process proceeds to step S19, where the "RWM clear processing" is executed, and an "RWM clear command" is sent to the performance control board 130, resulting in the audio, visual, and illumination notification of "power on (RWM clear)" (described below).

Similarly, when the ball is removed, even if the power switch 164 is turned on with the setting change operation described below, the process does not proceed to the "setting change process" of step S14, so the "setting change process" is not executed and the "setting change designation command" is not sent to the performance control board 130. As a result, the audio, visual, and electric notification of the "setting change" (described below) is not executed. In this case, the audio and visual notifications of the "ball removal operation in progress" (described below) are executed. This prevents the various notifications of the "setting change" from being executed during the ball removal state, which can prevent the player from being unable to concentrate on the ball removal work. On the other hand, if the process of step S10 is denied (if the ball is not removed), the process proceeds to the "setting change process" of step S14, the "setting change process" is executed, and the "setting change designation command" is sent to the performance control board 130, so that the audio, visual, and electric notification of the "setting change" (described below) is executed.

Similarly, when the ball is removed, even if the power switch 164 is turned on with the setting confirmation operation described below, the process does not proceed to the "setting confirmation process" of step S22, so the "setting confirmation process" is not executed and the "setting confirmation designation command" is not sent to the performance control board 130. As a result, the audio, visual, and electric notification of "setting confirmation" (described below) is not executed. In this case, the audio and visual notifications of "ball removal operation in progress" (described below) are executed. This prevents the various notifications of "setting confirmation" from being executed during the ball removal state, which can prevent the player from being unable to concentrate on the ball removal work. On the other hand, if the process of step S10 is denied (if the ball is not removed), the process proceeds to the "setting confirmation process" of step S22, the "setting confirmation process" is executed, and the "setting confirmation designation command" is sent to the performance control board 130, so that the audio, visual, and electric notification of "setting confirmation" (described below) is executed.

Similarly, if the machine is in the ball removal state, the process does not transition to "all interrupts allowed" in step S33, and the machine is not ready to play. This prevents the machine from becoming ready to play despite the ball removal state, which would result in delays in the ball removal process. For example, if the machine becomes ready to play while a game ball is being discharged outside the machine during the ball removal state, the game ball may be launched into the game area 5a, and the ball removal process may not be completed until the game ball returns to a position where it can be discharged again (a position where the ball can be removed), but this process can be prevented. On the other hand, if the process in step S10 is denied (if the machine is not in the ball removal state), "all interrupts allowed" is executed in step S33, and the machine is ready to play.

Similarly, if the ball is being removed, the process does not proceed to "All interrupts allowed" in step S33, and does not proceed to "Error control process" in the main interrupt process, so that "Error control process" is not executed, and for example "Magnet detection" or "Abnormal winning detection" is not executed. As a result, the audio, visual, and electric notifications of "Fraud detection 1 (Magnet detection error)" and "Fraud detection 2 (Abnormal winning error)" (both described below) are not executed. In this case, the audio and visual notifications of "Ball removal operation in progress" (described below) are executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the notifications of "Fraud detection 1 (Magnet detection error)" and "Fraud detection 2 (Abnormal winning error)" from being executed during the ball removal state, which makes it possible to prevent the player from being unable to concentrate on the ball removal work. On the other hand, if the process of step S10 is denied (if the ball is not being removed), "All interrupts allowed" is executed in step S33, and the "Error control process" in the main interrupt process can be executed, so that "Magnet detection" and "Abnormal winning detection" can also be executed.

Note that even if the ball is removed, the process may proceed to step S11 and subsequent steps. In other words, since "power restoration", "power on (RWM clear)", "setting change", "setting check", and "all interrupts allowed" are processes executed by the main control board 110, and control related to the "ball removed state" is a process executed by the frame control board 120, "power restoration", "power on (RWM clear)", "setting change", "setting check", and "all interrupts allowed" may be performed during the ball removed state.
Furthermore, when these are performed simultaneously, the performance control board 130 may report the event with the higher priority according to the priority order described in Figures 129 and 130, or may report both events regardless of priority, or may always give priority to the ball-removed state.

In step S11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating that power has been restored has been saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag has been saved, the process proceeds to step S12 assuming that power has been restored, and if the backup flag has not been saved, the process proceeds to step S13 assuming that power has been turned on for the first time.

In step S12, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) for the game RWM area (excluding the setting value area) of the main RAM 110c.

In step S13, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are ON. If a setting change operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S14 to transition to setting change mode, and if a setting change operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S15.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process in step S14. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process to change (update) the setting value (of the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery), which is the stage of the advantageous degree of the game, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a. Details of the setting change process will be described later using FIG. 33. When this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S19.

In step S15, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it determines whether the checksum saved in the gaming RWM area matches the checksum calculated in step S12. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the gaming RWM area), processing proceeds to step S16. If the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the gaming RWM area), processing proceeds to step S17. Note that if the backup flag has not been saved, that is, when the power is turned on for the first time, the checksum is determined to be abnormal.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether the setting value in the setting value (during play) area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the setting value in the setting value (during play) area is within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S18, and if it is determined that the setting value in the setting value (during play) area is not within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S17.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a processes the irrecoverable error as an RWM abnormality. Specifically, it sets Bit 5 of "Fraud Detection Status 1" (see FIG. 19) to "1" and performs processing to send "HC/Fraud Monitoring Information" in which Bit 5 of "Fraud Detection Status 1" is "1" to the frame control board 120. It also displays error information "E" indicating an irrecoverable error on the information display 115, sends an irrecoverable error designation command to the performance control board 130 indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred, and then sets interrupt inhibition to inhibit timer interrupts and waits until the power supply is completely cut off. This causes the performance control board 130 to perform processing to notify the irrecoverable error.

An "irrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is not performed (the game control is not transferred), and the error cannot be released unless a setting change process is performed. Therefore, when an irrecoverable error occurs, the error cannot be released even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 is turned OFF and then turned ON without changing the settings, and the power switch must be turned ON with the setting change operation. During an irrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.
Incidentally, the "irrecoverable error" is not cleared unless a setting change process is executed, but it may also be cleared when an RWM clear is executed without a setting change process.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If an RWM clear operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S19 to execute RWM clear, and if an RWM clear operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S21.

The main CPU 110a performs an RWM clear process in step S19. Specifically, the process is performed to initialize the game control state (initialize everything other than the set value area of the game RWM area). Details of the RWM clear process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35. When this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S20.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on command to the presentation control board 130, indicating that the RWM clear process has been performed (power-on is performed to initialize the game control state). This causes the presentation control board 130 to carry out processing to execute a power-on notification.

The "power-on notification" is a notification to make the player aware that the game control state has been initialized, and involves displaying the initial screen (background image and initial performance pattern "123") when power is turned on on the first image display device 70, lighting the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 in a predetermined light color (e.g. red) for a predetermined period of time (e.g. 60 seconds), and outputting a power-on notification sound ("RWM has been cleared" + buzzer sound) from the audio output device 9 for a predetermined period of time (e.g. 30 seconds) indicating that the RWM area has been initialized.
In addition, in the power-on notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the first image display device 70, a display notifying that the RWM has been cleared may be displayed on the first image display device 70.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a setting confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the setting key switch 112a is ON. If a setting confirmation operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S22 to transition to setting confirmation mode, and if a setting confirmation operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S23 to return the game control state to the state before the power was turned off.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S22. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process to display the setting values saved in the setting value (during play) area of the game RWM area on the information display 115. The setting confirmation process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 36.

In step S23, the main CPU 110a clears (clears to 0) the backup flag and checksum saved in the game RWM area, and sets the game RWM area when power is restored. This returns (restores) the game progress state (control state) to the state before the power was cut off, making it possible to resume play from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a sends a power restoration command to the presentation control board 130, indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power outage (the RWM clear process has not been executed). This causes the presentation control board 130 to perform processing to end the setting confirmation notification, etc., described below, and execute the power restoration notification.

A "power restoration notification" is a notification to make the player aware that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off, and involves displaying the initial screen at the time of power restoration (background image and initial performance pattern "123") on the first image display device 70, lighting up the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 in a predetermined light color (e.g. blue) for a predetermined period of time (e.g. 60 seconds), and outputting a power restoration notification sound ("Power has been restored" + buzzer sound) from the audio output device 9 for a predetermined period of time (e.g. 30 seconds) indicating that power has been restored (from a power outage).
In addition, when notifying the restoration of power, instead of displaying the initial screen on the first image display device 70, a display notifying that the power has been restored may be displayed on the first image display device 70.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a sends other commands (such as a special symbol storage command and a normal symbol storage command, which will be described later) to the performance control board 130. This allows the performance control board 130 to grasp the number of special symbols on hold, and also performs processing to display the first hold icon and the second hold icon on the first image display device 70.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the performance control board 130. This allows the performance control board 130 to grasp the current setting value. Note that this setting value designation command may be transmitted not only at the timing of this step S26, but also each time the variable display of the special pattern starts, or each time a jackpot game starts.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a determines whether the acquisition limit device activation flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the main RAM 110c to determine whether the acquisition limit device activation flag is ON (e.g., 0=OFF, 1=ON). If the acquisition limit device activation flag is OFF (e.g., 0), the process proceeds to step S28, and if the acquisition limit device activation flag is ON (e.g., 1), the process proceeds to step S29.

The "capture limit device activation flag" is a flag that is turned ON when it is determined in the "capture limit activation determination process" described below that the maximum increase (also called "Max MY") has reached a predetermined value (for example, 95,000). In other words, the "capture limit device" is a device that is activated when it is determined that the maximum increase has reached a predetermined value (for example, 95,000) (when in a jackpot, it is activated after the jackpot ends), and when the device is activated, play on the gaming machine becomes impossible (play stops), and the main RAM 110c of the gaming machine is initialized after the gaming facility closes, making it practically impossible to play on the gaming machine until the opening time of the next day. Note that "the maximum increase has reached a predetermined value (for example, 95,000)" means that, for example, it has reached 95,000 or more, and depending on the situation, it may be determined that the predetermined value (for example, 95,000) has been reached at exactly "95,000", or that the predetermined value (for example, 95,000) has been reached at "95,005".

In step S28, the main CPU 110a causes the main control board 110 to turn ON (output) a launch permission signal that allows the launching device to launch game balls. This allows the launching device to launch game balls when the launch permission signal from the frame control board 120 is ON (output). Note that the frame control board 120 may not output a launch permission signal, but the main control board 110 may output a launch permission signal, and the launching device may be able to launch game balls when the launch permission signal is output from the main control board 110.

In step S29, the main CPU 110a sends an acquisition limit device operation command to the performance control board 130, indicating that the "acquisition limit device" has been activated. This causes the performance control board 130 to carry out processing to notify the user that the acquisition limit device has been activated. Then, once the acquisition limit device operation command has been sent to the performance control board 130, processing proceeds to step S30.

"Notification that the acquisition limit device has been activated" refers to a notification to make the user aware that it is no longer possible to continue playing, and is to display on the first image display device 70, for example, a message in white letters on a black background such as "Acquisition limit device activated, today's play has ended."

As an example of the operation of the "capture limit device", as described above, if the maximum increase in the number of prize balls (also called "Max MY") generated by game balls entering the jackpot entry port 50 or the general entry port 43 during a jackpot reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 95,000), the capture limit device will be activated after the jackpot ends. For example, in a jackpot that awards 10 rounds, if the maximum increase in the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 95,000) in the fifth round, the jackpot can be played up to the tenth round, but the capture limit device will be activated after the tenth round and the jackpot ending have finished. This prevents the jackpot from ending midway, causing discomfort to the player, while still providing a healthy gameplay experience.

As another example of the operation of the "winning limit device," regardless of the game state, if the maximum increase in the number of winning balls generated by having game balls enter the first start hole 45, the second start hole 47, or the general winning hole 43 during the variable display or customer waiting state (or during the customer waiting demo performance) reaches a predetermined value (for example, 95,000), the winning limit device will immediately operate.

As another example of the operation of the "capture limit device", in the case of the above-mentioned "small prize rush type", if the maximum increase in the number of winning balls generated by placing a game ball in the small prize large prize opening during the "small prize game" (see Figure 16) reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 95,000), the capture limit device will be activated after the "small prize game" ends. This allows for a healthy game experience while preventing the small prize game from ending midway, causing discomfort to the player.

As another example of the operation of the "capture limit device", in the case of the above-mentioned "Type 1/Type 2" type, for example, in the small prize game of the first round of "Big Win Game 3 (4 rounds)", if the maximum increase in the number of prize balls generated by the entry of a game ball into the "specific area" provided in the big prize opening reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 95,000), the capture limit device will be activated after the end of the big prize game (rounds 2 to 4) that was activated by the entry into the "specific area". On the other hand, in the small prize game of the first round of "Big Win Game 3 (4 rounds)", if the game ball cannot be placed into the "specific area" provided in the big prize opening and the game ball enters the "non-specific area", and if the maximum increase in the number of prize balls generated by the entry of a game ball into the "non-specific area" reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 95,000), the capture limit device will be activated after the end of the small prize game of the first round (it will not be activated in the big win games of rounds 2 to 4). This means that if the ball is won in a "specific area," the winning limit device will activate after the big win game ends, and if the ball is won in a "non-specific area," the winning limit device will activate after the small win game ends, preventing players from feeling uncomfortable in either case.

In addition, if a player who is not familiar with gaming machines plays without knowing about the existence of the "winning limit device" and the "winning limit device" is activated, this may confuse or dissatisfy the player. For this reason, it is preferable to actively notify the player that the gaming machine 1 is equipped with an "winning limit device." For example, on the customer waiting demo screen during the customer waiting demo performance, "Equipped with winning limit device" may be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), or may be constantly displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device) or the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device). It may also be displayed at the end of a big win game.

In addition, if the acquisition limit device is activated when judgment information is reserved and stored in the first special symbol judgment information reserved memory area or the second special symbol judgment information reserved memory area, it is preferable not to erase the reserved and stored judgment information by the operation of the acquisition limit device. Similarly, if the acquisition limit device is activated when judgment information for a normal symbol is reserved and stored, it is preferable not to erase the reserved and stored judgment information by the operation of the acquisition limit device. In such a case, it is preferable to erase the reserved and stored judgment information by turning on the power switch 164, which involves operating the RWM clear switch 111a. This simplifies the control process by not executing a process to erase the reserved memory areas for special symbols and normal symbols when the acquisition limit device is activated.

In step S30, the main CPU 110a clears (initializes) the increment counter (also called the "MY counter"); the increment counter will be described later. After the increment counter is cleared, the process proceeds to step S31. Although the increment counter is cleared when power is supplied (restored) to the gaming machine 1, this is not limiting. For example, the increment counter may not be cleared when power is supplied (restored), but may be cleared when a setting change operation is performed, or when an RWM clear operation is performed, or a dedicated button for clearing the increment counter value may be provided, and the increment counter may be cleared when power is supplied while the dedicated button is pressed. On the other hand, a dedicated button for not clearing the increment counter value may be provided, and the increment counter may not be cleared when power is supplied while the dedicated button is pressed (in this case, the increment counter is cleared when power is supplied (restored)).

In step S31, the main CPU 110a starts the CTC (counter timer circuit) to generate a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), and in step S32, it allows all interrupts and proceeds to step S34.

In step S34, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for special pattern determination, which are used to determine the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the special pattern, and in step S35, performs an initial value random number update process to update the initial value random number value for jackpot determination, the initial value random number value for special pattern determination, the initial value random number value for hit determination, and the initial value random number value for normal pattern determination.

In step S36, the main CPU 110a determines whether a power interruption (blackout) has occurred. Specifically, it determines whether a power interruption detection signal has been input from the power interruption detection circuit of the power supply board 160, and if the power interruption detection signal has not been input, it proceeds to step S34, and if the power interruption detection signal has been input, it proceeds to step S37.

In step S37, the main CPU 110a sets an interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, in step S38, it clears the output port, in step S39, it calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c and saves it in the game RWM area, in step S40, it saves a backup flag in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, in step S41, it prohibits RAM access, and waits until the power supply voltage is completely cut off.

(Main control board setting change processing)
The setting change processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 33. Fig. 33 is a flow chart showing the setting change processing of the main control board 110.

First, in step S14-1, the main CPU 110a issues a HC/fraud monitoring information notification. Specifically, it sets bit 0 of "fraud detection status 1" (see FIG. 19) to "1" and performs processing to transmit "HC/fraud monitoring information" in which bit 0 of "fraud detection status 1" is "1" to the frame control board 120.

In step S14-2, the main CPU 110a increments the "notification counter" provided in the main RAM 110c by "+1". Then, in step S14-3, it is determined whether or not the receipt result of the HC/fraud monitoring information notification has been responded to. If the receipt result of the HC/fraud monitoring information notification has been responded to, processing proceeds to step S14-6, and if the receipt result of the HC/fraud monitoring information notification has not been responded to, processing proceeds to step S14-4. In other words, it is determined whether or not the receipt result has been responded (received) from the frame control board 120 as a result of sending "HC/fraud monitoring information" to the frame control board 120.

In step S14-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the value of the "notification counter" is "10". If it determines that the value of the "notification counter" is "10", the process proceeds to step S14-5, and if it determines that the value of the "notification counter" is not "10" (is less than 10), the process proceeds to step S14-1.

The main CPU 110a performs processing to issue an error notification in step S14-5. Note that the processing to issue an error notification is the same as in step S9, so a description thereof will be omitted here. The main CPU 110a then waits until the supply of power supply voltage is completely cut off. In other words, if the frame control board 120 is notified of "HC/fraud monitoring information" 10 times but is unable to respond with a result of receipt of the HC/fraud monitoring information notification, an error notification is issued and the game is not made playable, as there is a possibility that a disconnection or the like (communication abnormality) has occurred between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120. This makes it possible to prevent gameplay from being played despite the existence of a disconnection or the like (communication abnormality) between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

In step S14-6, the main CPU 110a sends a setting change command to the performance control board 130. This causes the performance control board 130 to carry out processing to execute a setting change notification to notify the user that the setting value is being changed.

A "setting change notification" refers to displaying a setting change screen on the first image display device 70 indicating that the setting value is being changed, or lighting the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 in a specified light color (e.g., white) throughout the setting change. In addition, a setting change notification sound indicating that the setting is being changed ("setting is being changed") may be output from the audio output device 9. This allows game staff to know that the setting is being changed by checking the first image display device 70, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76, and audio output device 9.

In step S14-7, the main CPU 110a decrements the setting value in the setting value (during play) area by 1 and saves it in the setting value (changing) area, and in step S14-8, initializes (clears to 0) the setting value (during play) area in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S14-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether the setting value in the setting value (changing) area is within the appropriate range (here, 0 to 3). If it is determined that the setting value in the setting value (changing) area is within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S14-11, and if it is determined that the setting value in the setting value (changing) area is not within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S14-10.

In step S14-10, the main CPU 110a sets the setting value in the setting value (changing) area to an initial value of "0". Then, in step S14-11, the main CPU 110a displays the current setting value on the information display 113. Specifically, by referencing the setting value in the setting value (changing) area, the value obtained by adding +1 (here, 1 to 4) is displayed on one of the 7-segment LEDs of the information display 115. This allows the gaming store staff to know the setting value before the change by checking the information display 115.

In step S14-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting value update operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether the RWM clear switch 111a has changed from an OFF state to an ON state. If a setting value update operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S14-13; if a setting value update operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S14-16.

In step S14-13, the main CPU 110a updates the setting value in the setting value (changing) area by +1, and in step S14-14 performs a setting value correction process. Specifically, if the updated setting value is "4" which exceeds the appropriate range (here, 0 to 3), the main CPU 110a performs a process to correct the setting value to "0".

In step S14-15, the main CPU 110a displays the current setting value on the information display 115. Specifically, it references the setting value in the setting value (changing) area, and displays the value +1 added (here, 1 to 4) on one of the 7-segment LEDs on the information display 115. This allows the gaming store staff to know the setting value before it is confirmed by checking the information display 115.

In step S14-16, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting value confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether the setting key switch 112a has changed from an ON state to an OFF state. If a setting value confirmation operation has been performed, the setting value is considered to have been confirmed (setting change mode is terminated) and processing proceeds to step S14-17. If a setting value confirmation operation has not been performed, the setting value is considered to be updated and processing proceeds to step S14-12.

In step S14-17, the main CPU 110a increments the setting value in the setting value (changing) area by +1 and saves it in the setting value (playing) area, and in step S14-18, initializes (clears to 0) the setting value in the setting value (changing) area.

In step S14-18, the main CPU 110a ends the display of the setting value on the information display 115 and ends the current setting change process. Note that the LED of the status confirmation display 68 is turned on when the setting change process starts, and the LED of the status confirmation display 68 is turned off when the setting change process ends. This allows the gaming store staff to know that the setting is being changed by checking the status confirmation display 68.

(Modification of the main control board setting change process)
A modification of the setting change process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 34. Fig. 34 is a flow chart showing the setting change process of the main control board 110. Note that only the differences from Fig. 33 will be described in Fig. 34.

In step S14-5, the main CPU 110a sets an error notification flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. Then, when the error notification flag is set, processing proceeds to step S14-6. That is, in FIG. 33, error notification processing is performed and gameplay is stopped in step S14-5, but in FIG. 34, the difference is that only the error notification flag is set, error notification processing is not performed, and gameplay is not stopped, and processing proceeds to step S14-6.

Then, in step S14-20, the main CPU 110a refers to a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c to determine whether or not the error notification flag is set. For example, if the bit indicating the error notification flag is ON, it is determined that the error notification flag is set, and if the bit indicating the error notification flag is OFF, it is determined that the error notification flag is not set. If it is determined that the error notification flag is set, the process proceeds to step S14-21, and if it is determined that the error notification flag is not set, the current setting change process is terminated. That is, in FIG. 33, the current setting change process is terminated in step S14-19, but in FIG. 34, the process is not terminated in step S14-19, but rather, in step S14-20 it is determined whether or not the error notification flag is set, and if it is set, a "game machine communication abnormality start designation command" is set and transmitted to the performance control board 130 to notify an "game machine communication abnormality error".

In other words, in the modified example of FIG. 34, if HC/fraud monitoring information (here, fraud detection status 1 Bit 0 is "1") is sent to the frame control board 120 a predetermined number of times, but a receipt result cannot be received from the frame control board 120 (for example, if there is a high probability that a disconnection has occurred between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120), an "internal gaming machine communication abnormality error" is notified in steps S14-20 and S14-21 after the main processing in the setting change processing is completed. This prevents the "internal gaming machine communication abnormality error" from being confusing because the notifications are made at the same time, since the "internal gaming machine communication abnormality error" can be dealt with after the setting change processing is completed.

The setting change process is performed after the main control board main process in FIG. 30 is completed, so in step S7, the reception result of the gaming machine installation information notification was received normally, that is, at this point, the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 were in a state where they could communicate normally (a state where there was no disconnection, etc.). On the other hand, in FIG. 33 or FIG. 34, the reception result of the HC/fraud monitoring information cannot be received normally, which means that the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 were in a state where they could not communicate normally (a state where there was a disconnection, etc.) before the setting change process was performed after the processing in step S7 was confirmed. In this way, by periodically monitoring whether the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 are in a state where they can communicate normally even after the end of step S7, it is possible to prevent a situation where the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 cannot communicate with each other and cause a disadvantage to the player.

(Main control board RWM clear processing)
The RWM clear processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 35. Fig. 35 is a flowchart showing the RWM clear processing of the main control board 110.

First, in step S19-1, the main CPU 110a performs HC/fraud monitoring information notification. Specifically, it sets Bit 2 of "Fraud Detection Status 1" (see FIG. 19) to "1" and performs processing to transmit "HC/fraud monitoring information" in which Bit 2 of "Fraud Detection Status 1" is "1" to the frame control board 120.

In step S19-2, the main CPU 110a increments the "notification counter" provided in the main RAM 110c by "+1". Then, in step S19-3, it is determined whether or not the receipt result of the HC/fraud monitoring information notification has been responded to. If the receipt result of the HC/fraud monitoring information notification has been responded to, processing proceeds to step S19-6, and if the receipt result of the HC/fraud monitoring information notification has not been responded to, processing proceeds to step S19-4. In other words, it is determined whether or not the receipt result has been responded (received) from the frame control board 120 as a result of sending "HC/fraud monitoring information" to the frame control board 120.

In step S19-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the value of the "notification counter" is "10." If it determines that the value of the "notification counter" is "10," the process proceeds to step S19-5. If it determines that the value of the "notification counter" is not "10" (is less than 10), the process proceeds to step S19-1.

The main CPU 110a performs processing to issue an error notification in step S19-5. Note that the processing to issue an error notification is the same as in step S9, so a description thereof will be omitted here. The main CPU 110a then waits until the supply of power supply voltage is completely cut off. In other words, if the frame control board 120 is notified of "HC/fraud monitoring information" 10 times but is unable to respond with a result of receipt of the HC/fraud monitoring information notification, an error notification is issued and the game is not made playable, as there is a possibility that a disconnection or the like (communication abnormality) has occurred between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120. This makes it possible to prevent gameplay from being played despite the existence of a disconnection or the like (communication abnormality) between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

In step S19-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether the setting value saved in the setting value (during play) area of the gaming RWM area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If the setting value is within the appropriate range (setting change processing has been performed in the past), the process proceeds to step S19-7, and if the setting value is not within the appropriate range (setting change processing has not been performed in the past), the process proceeds to step S19-9.

In step S19-7, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears to 0) everything except the setting value area of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. This initializes the game progress state to the initial state (the state when the gaming machine 1 was shipped), and the data (other than the setting values) in the game RWM area before the RWM was cleared is not carried over.

In step S19-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the acquisition upper limit activation device flag is ON. Specifically, the main RAM 110c is referenced to determine whether the acquisition upper limit activation device flag is ON (e.g., 1). If the acquisition upper limit activation device flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S19-9, and if the acquisition upper limit activation device flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S19-10.

In step S19-9, the main CPU 110a turns the acquisition limit activation device flag OFF. Specifically, in the main RAM 110c, the acquisition limit activation device flag is turned OFF (for example, set to 0). In this way, if the acquisition limit device is activated, the acquisition limit device will be deactivated by performing the RWM clear process on the main control board, and play will be possible. Therefore, if the acquisition limit device is activated, the player cannot deactivate it, and it will always be deactivated by the gaming facility manager by performing the RWM clear process on the main control board, so that actions such as continuing to play even when the maximum increase number reaches a predetermined value (for example, 95,000) can be prevented, and healthy play can be achieved.

In step S19-10, the main CPU 110a sends an RWM clear command to the frame control board 120 and the performance control board 130, and ends this RWM clear process.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the RWM clear process (initialization of the main RAM 110c) is performed on the main control board 110, an RWM clear command is sent to the frame control board 120, and the frame control RAM 120c is also initialized on the frame control board 120. As a result, if the power switch 164 is pressed while pressing the RWM clear switch 111a (performing an RWM clear operation), both the main RAM 110c and the frame control RAM 120c are initialized, eliminating the need to perform an RWM clear operation on both the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, improving work efficiency.

The areas (information) that are initialized in the frame control RAM 120c by the RWM clear operation are the various pieces of information in the "data type" (see Figure 21) in the HC/fraud monitoring information received from the main control board 110, and if the received information is temporarily stored in a buffer before being processed, the information stored in the buffer is cleared. The various pieces of information in the "data type" (see Figure 21) are "starting gate winning", "large winning gate winning when special electric role is activated", "winning gate winning", "all starting gate winning", "number of times the pattern is determined", "number of jackpots", "number of roles (number of times the large winning gate is opened)", "passing through a specific area", "external terminal board pulse output", and "performance information status notification".

On the other hand, the areas (information) in the frame control RAM 120c that are not initialized by the RWM clear operation are the game ball count memory area, the memory area related to "display performance information (normal base value)," and the buffer in which information to be sent from the frame control board 120 to the U board 171 is temporarily stored. This makes it possible to prevent even necessary information from being initialized.

In addition, by sending the RWM clear command to the performance control board 130, the performance control board 130 controls the device to notify the user that the RWM has been cleared (a "power-on (RWM clear)" error notification, which will be described later). In this notification, the audio notification "RWM has been cleared" and the "power-on BGM" background music are repeatedly output. In other words, the RWM clear operation initializes both the main RAM 110c and the frame control RAM 120c, but the notification by the performance control board 130 simply outputs the audio "RWM has been cleared," and does not notify the user of, for example, "The main RWM has been cleared" or "The frame control RWM has been cleared." This allows the device to use only one piece of audio data, and there is no need to create new audio data for the frame control RAM 120c, making it possible to efficiently notify the user that the RWM has been cleared.

In addition, audio such as "The main RWM has been cleared" and "The frame control RWM has been cleared" may be output. By configuring it in this way, it becomes easy for employees to understand that both RWMs have been initialized, making it possible to provide an gaming machine that is easy for employees to understand.

The main CPU 110a performs irrecoverable error processing in step S19-11. Specifically, it displays the setting value error information "E" on the information display 115, transmits an irrecoverable error designation command to the performance control board 130 indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred, sets an interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, and waits until the power supply is completely cut off.

(Main control board setting confirmation process)
The process for checking the settings of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 36. Fig. 36 is a flowchart showing the process for checking the settings of the main control board 110.

First, in step S22-1, the main CPU 110a performs HC/fraud monitoring information notification. Specifically, it sets Bit 1 of "Fraud Detection Status 1" (see FIG. 19) to "1" and performs processing to transmit "HC/fraud monitoring information" in which Bit 1 of "Fraud Detection Status 1" is "1" to the frame control board 120.

In step S22-2, the main CPU 110a increments the "notification counter" provided in the main RAM 110c by "+1". Then, in step S22-3, it is determined whether or not the receipt result of the HC/fraud monitoring information notification has been responded to. If the receipt result of the HC/fraud monitoring information notification has been responded to, processing proceeds to step S22-6, and if the receipt result of the HC/fraud monitoring information notification has not been responded to, processing proceeds to step S22-4. In other words, it is determined whether or not the receipt result has been responded (received) from the frame control board 120 as a result of sending "HC/fraud monitoring information" to the frame control board 120.

In step S22-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the value of the "notification counter" is "10". If it determines that the value of the "notification counter" is "10", the process proceeds to step S22-5, and if it determines that the value of the "notification counter" is not "10" (is less than 10), the process proceeds to step S22-1.

The main CPU 110a performs processing to issue an error notification in step S22-5. Note that the processing to issue an error notification is the same as in step S9, so a description thereof will be omitted here. The main CPU 110a then waits until the supply of power supply voltage is completely cut off. In other words, if the frame control board 120 is notified of "HC/fraud monitoring information" 10 times but is unable to respond with a result of receipt of the HC/fraud monitoring information notification, an error notification is issued and the game is not made playable, as there is a possibility that a disconnection or the like (communication abnormality) has occurred between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120. This makes it possible to prevent gameplay from being played despite the existence of a disconnection or the like (communication abnormality) between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

In step S22-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether the setting value saved in the setting value (during play) area of the gaming RWM area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If the setting value is within the appropriate range (setting change processing has been performed in the past), processing proceeds to step S22-7, and if the setting value is not within the appropriate range (setting change processing has not been performed in the past), processing proceeds to step S22-11.

In step S22-7, the main CPU 110a sends a setting confirmation command to the performance control board 130. This causes the performance control board 130 to perform processing to execute a setting confirmation notification to notify the user that a setting confirmation is being performed.

A "setting confirmation notification" refers to displaying a setting confirmation screen on the first image display device 70 indicating that the settings are being confirmed, or lighting the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 in a specified light color (e.g., white) throughout the setting confirmation period. A setting confirmation notification sound indicating that the settings are being confirmed ("Confirming setting values") may be output from the audio output device 9. This allows game staff to know that the settings are being confirmed by checking the first image display device 70, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76, and audio output device 9.

In step S22-8, the main CPU 110a displays the current setting value on the information display 115. Specifically, it references the setting value in the setting value (during play) area and displays a number (here, 1 to 4) indicating the setting value on one of the 7-segment LEDs on the information display 115. This allows game store staff to know the current setting value by checking the information display 113.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S22-9 whether or not a confirmation end operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the setting key switch 112a has changed from an ON state to an OFF state. If a confirmation end operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S27-7, and if a confirmation end operation has not been performed, the process of step S22-9 is repeated.

In step S22-10, the main CPU 110a ends the display of the setting value on the information display 115 and ends the current setting change process. Note that the LED of the status confirmation display 68 is turned on when the setting confirmation process starts, and the LED of the status confirmation display 68 is turned off when the setting confirmation process ends. This allows the gaming store staff to know that the setting confirmation is being performed by checking the status confirmation display 68.

The main CPU 110a performs irrecoverable error processing in step S22-11. Specifically, it displays the setting value error information "E" on the information display 115, transmits an irrecoverable error designation command to the performance control board 130 indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred, and then performs processing to inhibit timer interrupts and wait until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, if a "setting change operation" is performed, "HC/fraud monitoring information" indicating that Bit 0 of "fraud detection status 1" is "1" is transmitted in step S14-1, if an "RWM clear operation" is performed, "HC/fraud monitoring information" indicating that Bit 2 of "fraud detection status 1" is "1" is transmitted in step S19-1, and if a "setting check operation" is performed, "HC/fraud monitoring information" indicating that Bit 1 of "fraud detection status 1" is "1" is transmitted in step S22-1. This allows the gaming machine information center to know that each operation that affects the game has been performed, and allows monitoring to be performed, for example, to see whether each operation is being performed more than necessary, whether each operation is being performed during the business hours of the gaming establishment, whether the RWM clear operation was performed outside business hours after the winning limit device was activated, etc.

In addition, even when the power switch 164 is turned ON while the game ball count clear button 121b is pressed (when the process of clearing the game ball count is performed), information indicating that Bit 3 of the fraud detection status 2 of the frame control board 120 is "1" is transmitted to the game machine information center.
On the other hand, when the power switch 164 is turned ON while the ball removal button 122b is pressed (when the ball removal operation processing is performed), no information is sent to the gaming machine information center from either the main control board 110 or the frame control board 120.
In other words, the ball removal operation for ejecting game balls from the game machine is mainly intended for the maintenance of game balls, and is unlikely to be a fraudulent act, so it can be said to have a lower impact on the game and a lower level of security than the above-mentioned "setting change operation", etc. Therefore, no problems will arise even if the ball removal operation is excluded from the management of the game machine information center, and a line can be drawn between information necessary for the proper management of the game machine 1 and unnecessary information, and it is possible to prevent the game machine information center from receiving all information (receiving everything) and having to manage too much information, which can lead to neglected management.

In summary, when the power switch 164 is turned ON and a first operation (e.g., a "setting change operation," an "RWM clear operation," an "setting confirmation operation," or an "operation to clear the number of game balls") is performed, information indicating that each operation has been performed is sent to the gaming machine information center, but when the power switch 164 is turned ON and a second operation (e.g., a "ball removal operation") is performed, information indicating that the operation has been performed is not sent to the gaming machine information center.
In addition, when a second operation (e.g., a "ball removal operation") is performed when the power switch 164 is turned ON, there is no problem in transmitting information indicating that the operation has been performed to the gaming machine information center.

Although the modified example of the setting confirmation process is omitted, the setting confirmation process may also be configured as in the modified example of the setting change process (Fig. 34). Specifically, in step S22-5, only the error notification flag is set, and the process proceeds to step S22-6. After completing the process of step S22-10, it is determined in step S22-11 whether the error notification flag is set or not. If the error notification flag is set, a "game machine communication abnormality start command" is set in step S22-12 and transmitted to the performance control board 130 to notify an "game machine communication abnormality error." This can provide the same effect as described in the explanation of the modified example of the setting change process (Fig. 34).

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 37. Fig. 37 is a flow chart showing the timer interrupt process in the main control board 110.

This timer interrupt process is executed by inputting a clock pulse at a predetermined period (4 milliseconds) from the reset clock pulse generating circuit provided on the main control board 110 after all interrupts are permitted in step S33 of FIG. 31.

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the registers to the stack area, and in step S105, performs time control processing. Specifically, it performs processing to update various timer counters, such as the stop time of special symbols and the opening time of special electric roles.

In step S110, the main CPU 110a refers to the main RAM 110c to determine whether the acquisition limit device activation flag is OFF. If the acquisition limit device activation flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S120 as game progress control (specific control processing) is to be performed, and if the acquisition limit device activation flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S500 as game progress control (specific control processing) is not to be performed. The acquisition limit device and the acquisition limit device activation flag will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs a specific random number value update process in step S120. Specifically, the random number value for determining a big win, the random number value for determining a special symbol, the random number value for determining a special symbol variation pattern, the random number value for determining a win, the random number value for determining a normal symbol, and the random number value for determining a normal symbol variation pattern are updated. Specifically, the process is performed to update each random number value and the random number counter by adding +1. Note that if the incremented random number counter value exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (if the random number counter has completed one revolution), the random number counter is reset to 0, and if the random number counter has returned to the initial value for the revolution, the corresponding initial random number value is set as the new initial value for the revolution, and the random number value is updated.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a performs an initial random number value update process. Specifically, similar to step S35 in FIG. 32, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the initial random number value for determining the big win, the initial random number value for determining the special symbol, the initial random number value for determining the win, and the initial random number value for determining the normal symbol.

The main CPU 110a performs input control processing in step S200. Specifically, it determines whether or not there has been input to various switches such as the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the special winning hole detection switch 50a, the first starting hole detection switch 45a, the second starting hole detection switch 47a, and the gate detection switch 44a, and performs processing to set predetermined data if there has been input. Details of the input control processing will be described later.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol special electricity control processing. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs processing such as judging the special symbol determination information obtained based on the winning of the game ball into the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47, displaying the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, opening and closing the big prize hole 50, and setting the game state. Details of the special symbol special electricity control processing will be described later.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs normal symbol and normal power control processing. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs processing such as judging the normal symbol judgment information acquired based on the passage of the game ball through the normal symbol gate 44, displaying the normal symbol fluctuation, and opening and closing the second start hole 47 (auxiliary play).

The main CPU 110a performs the winning limit management process in step S450. Specifically, when there is an input to the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the large winning hole detection switch 50a, the first starting hole detection switch 45a, the second starting hole detection switch 47a, or the out detection switch 39a, the counters corresponding to each switch are updated. The winning limit management process will be described in detail later.

The main CPU 110a performs payout control processing in step S500. Specifically, it references various prize ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c, and performs processing to send payout number designation commands corresponding to the various winning ports (general winning port 43, first starting port 45, second starting port 47, large winning port 50) to the frame control board 120. This causes the frame control board 120 to execute processing to pay out prize balls (processing to add up the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player).

The main CPU 110a performs error control processing in step S550. For example, if a magnet is detected, it performs processing to set Bit 3 of fraud detection state 1 (FIG. 19) to "1" and processing to send a command indicating magnet detection to the performance control board 130 to notify that a magnet has been detected. This causes the performance control board 130 to execute processing to notify of magnet detection. Details of the error control processing will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs HC/fraud monitoring information management processing in step S600. Specifically, it performs processing to transmit HC/fraud monitoring information to the frame control board 120 every 108 ms. For example, if bit 3 of fraud detection state 1 (FIG. 19) is set to "1" in step S550, HC/fraud monitoring information indicating that bit 3 of fraud detection state 1 (FIG. 19) has been set to "1" is transmitted to the frame control board 120, and ultimately to the gaming machine information center. The HC/fraud monitoring information management processing will be described in detail later.

The main CPU 110a performs data creation processing in step S700. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs processing to create data such as start port opening/closing data to be output to the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b, large prize port opening/closing data to be output to the large prize port opening/closing solenoid 51b, special pattern display data to be output to the first special pattern display 60 and the second special pattern display 61, normal pattern display data to be output to the normal pattern display 62, special pattern reserved display data to be output to the first special pattern reserved display 63 and the second special pattern reserved display 64, and normal pattern reserved display data to be output to the normal pattern reserved display 65.

The main CPU 110a performs output control processing in step S750. Specifically, it performs processing for executing port output processing for outputting signals such as the start gate opening/closing data and the big prize gate opening/closing data created in step S600 above, display output processing for outputting signals such as special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol reserved display data, and normal symbol reserved display data to various displays, payout command transmission processing for transmitting commands set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the frame control board 120, and performance command transmission processing for transmitting commands set in the performance transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 110c to the frame control board 120 and the performance control board 130.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a and ends this timer interrupt process.

(Input control processing of main control board)
The input control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 38. Fig. 38 is a flowchart showing the input control process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S210, the main CPU 110a performs general winning hole detection switch input processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the general winning hole 43, and then performs processing to pay out prize balls.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a large prize opening detection switch input process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the large prize opening detection switch 50a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the large prize opening 50, and then performs a process to pay out prize balls.

The main CPU 110a performs a first start hole detection switch input process in step S230. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the first start hole 45, and performs a process to pay out prize balls and a process to obtain and store special chart determination information. The details of the first start hole detection switch input process will be described later.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs second start hole detection switch input processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been input from the second start hole detection switch 47a, i.e., whether the game ball has entered the second start hole 47, and performs processing to pay out the prize ball and processing to obtain and store special chart determination information.

In step S250, the main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been input from the gate detection switch 44a, i.e., whether the game ball has passed through the normal gate 44, and performs processing to obtain and store normal gate determination information.

In step S260, the main CPU 110a performs out detection switch input processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been input from the out detection switch 39a, i.e., whether the game ball has entered the out hole 39, and ends the current input control processing.

(First start port detection switch input processing of the main control board)
The first start hole detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 39. Fig. 39 is a flowchart showing the first start hole detection switch input processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a. If a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a, the process proceeds to step S230-2. If a detection signal has not been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a, the current first start hole detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 3 prize ball counter used for the 3 prize balls by adding data indicating 3 prize balls, and in step S230-3, obtains special symbol determination information (random number value for determining a jackpot, random number value for determining special symbols, random number value for determining reach, random number value for determining special symbol fluctuation pattern).

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) is less than 4. If the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) is less than 4, the process proceeds to step S230-5. If the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) is not less than 4, the process ends the current first start hole detection switch input process.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the first special symbol reservation number (U1) by adding "1" (U1←U1+1), and in step S230-6, sets a first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the first special symbol storage designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and the first image display device 70 displays a number of first reservation icons corresponding to the first special symbol reservation number (U1).

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a searches for available storage units in the first special pattern determination information storage area, starting from the first storage unit, and stores the special pattern determination information acquired in step S230-3 in the available storage unit.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently in a non-time-saving game state. If the game is in a non-time-saving game state, the process proceeds to step S230-9. If the game is not in a non-time-saving game state, the process ends the current first start hole detection switch input process.

The main CPU 110a performs a first pre-determination process in step S230-9. In this first pre-determination process, the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 14 is referenced, and the currently acquired special symbol determination information is pre-determined before the first special symbol variation display is performed, and a first start port winning designation command is generated to notify the performance control board 130 of the result of the pre-determination (special symbol planned variation pattern).

In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the first start port winning designation command generated in step S230-9 above in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

This allows the first start winning information to be sent to the presentation control board 130 as a first start opening winning designation command, and the sub-CPU 130a of the presentation control board 130 that receives the first start opening winning designation command can execute a pre-reading notice (e.g., a continuous notice presentation, an icon change presentation) that gives the player the expectation that a jackpot game will be played over one or more variable displays before the variable display of the first special pattern corresponding to the first start opening winning designation command begins.

The second start hole detection switch input process is also processed in the same way as the first start hole detection switch input process, so the first start hole detection switch 45a, 3 prize ball counter, first special symbol reserved number (U1), first special symbol determination information reserved memory area, non-time-saving play state, first advance determination process, and first start hole winning designation command can be read as second start hole detection switch 47a, 2 prize ball counter, second special symbol reserved number (U2), second special symbol determination information reserved memory area, time-saving play state, second advance determination process, and second start hole winning designation command.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the second special chart reservation number (U2) is "4", but it may be more or less than this. Also, the upper limit of the second special chart reservation number may be lower than the upper limit of the first special chart reservation number. Furthermore, the second reservation memory itself may be eliminated by storing the special chart determination information only in the 0th memory section of the second special chart determination information storage area.

(Special diagram special electric control processing of the main control board)
The special pattern special electric control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 40. Fig. 40 is a flowchart showing the special pattern special electric control process of the main control board 110.

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special chart special power processing data, and in step S302, references the branch destination address from the loaded special chart special power processing data, executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address, and ends the current special chart special power control process.

Specifically, if the special symbol special signal processing data = 0, a special symbol memory determination process (step S310) is executed to start the variable display of the special symbol based on the reserved memory, if the special symbol special signal processing data = 1, a special symbol variable process (step S320) is executed to stop the display of the special symbol as the variable time elapses, if the special symbol special signal processing data = 2, a special symbol stop process (step S330) is executed to transition to the jackpot game depending on the elapse of the stop time and the type of special symbol that has been stopped, if the special symbol special signal processing data = 3, a jackpot game process (step S340) is executed to execute the jackpot game, and if the special symbol special signal processing data = 4, a jackpot game end process (step S350) is executed to end the jackpot game. Details of the special symbol memory determination process will be described later.

This "special chart special electricity processing data" is set as necessary within each subroutine of the special chart special electricity control processing, as described below, so that the subroutines required for that game are processed appropriately.

(Special pattern memory determination process of the main control board)
The special symbol storage determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 41. Fig. 41 is a flow chart showing the special symbol storage determination process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a changing state. If the special symbol is being displayed in a changing state, the main CPU 110a ends the current special symbol memory determination process, and if the special symbol is not being displayed in a changing state, the process proceeds to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of reserved second special drawings (U2) is 1 or greater. If the number of reserved second special drawings (U2) is 1 or greater, the process proceeds to step S310-3. If the number of reserved second special drawings (U2) is not 1 or greater, the process proceeds to step S310-4.

In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a updates the second special symbol reserved number (U2) by subtracting "1", and in step S310-6, sets a special symbol storage command corresponding to the second special symbol reserved number (U2) after subtraction in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to update the reserved icon displayed on the first image display device 70 and the display of the icon.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, shifts the data stored in the second special pattern determination information storage area, shifting the special pattern determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special pattern determination information stored in the fourth memory section of the second special pattern determination information holding memory area is shifted to the third memory section of the second special pattern determination information holding memory area. In addition, the special pattern determination information stored in the first memory section of the second special pattern determination information holding memory area is shifted to the zeroth memory section, which is the special pattern determination information execution memory area, and the special pattern determination information used in the previous game that was stored in the zeroth memory section is erased.

On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of reserved first special drawings (U1) is 1 or more. If the number of reserved first special drawings (U1) is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-5, and if the number of reserved first special drawings (U1) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S319-1.

The main CPU 110a updates the first special symbol reserved number (U1) by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and sets a special symbol storage command corresponding to the first special symbol reserved number (U1) after subtraction in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S310-6. This causes the special symbol storage command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to update the reserved icon and the display of the icon displayed on the first image display device 70.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, shifts the data stored in the first special symbol reserve memory area, shifting the special symbol determination information stored in the first memory unit to the fourth memory unit to the previous memory unit.

For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth memory section of the first special symbol reserve memory area is shifted to the third memory section of the first special symbol reserve memory area. In addition, the special symbol determination information stored in the first memory section of the first special symbol reserve memory area is shifted to the zeroth memory section, which is the special symbol determination information execution memory area, and the special symbol determination information used in the previous game that was stored in the zeroth memory section is erased.

In addition, in conjunction with the shifting process of the special symbol determination information in step S310-8, special symbol reserved display data indicating the first special symbol reserved number (U1) and the second special symbol reserved number (U2) after subtraction is set in a specified area of the main RAM 110c. This updates the display contents of the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 and the second special symbol reserved indicator 64.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second special chart determination information reserve memory area is shifted with priority over the first special chart determination information reserve memory area in steps S310-2 to S310-8 (the second special chart reserved number is subtracted with priority over the first special chart reserved number), but the first special chart determination information reserve memory area or the second special chart determination information reserve memory area may be shifted in the order in which the game ball enters the starting hole (the first special chart reserved number and the second special chart reserved number are subtracted in the order of winning), or the first special chart determination information reserve memory area may be shifted with priority over the second special chart determination information reserve memory area (the first special chart reserved number is subtracted with priority over the second special chart reserved number).

In step S311, the main CPU 110a executes a jackpot determination process to determine whether or not a jackpot has been reached and the special symbol stop data for the special symbol based on the special symbol determination information stored in the 0th memory unit, which is the special symbol determination information execution memory area.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the big win determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the special symbol designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to determine the performance symbol 70a that will be displayed in a stopped state as a result of the variable performance.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a performs a special pattern change pattern determination process to determine the change pattern (change time) of the special pattern based on the special pattern determination information stored in the 0th memory unit, which is the special pattern determination information execution memory area. The details of the special pattern change pattern determination process will be described later.

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special pattern change pattern designation command corresponding to the type of special pattern change pattern determined in the special pattern change pattern determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the special pattern change pattern designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to determine the change performance pattern, which is the performance mode of the change performance performed during the special pattern change display.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol fluctuation time (counter value) corresponding to the type of special symbol fluctuation pattern determined in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316 starts displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol. As a result, the data creation process in step S700 creates LED lighting data for displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process in step S750, thereby displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag to end the customer waiting state, and in step S318, sets the special symbol special signal processing data to "1" and ends this special symbol memory determination process.

(Main control board acquisition upper limit management process)
The earned upper limit management process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 42. Fig. 42 is a flowchart showing the earned upper limit management process of the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a performs an increment counter update process in step S450-1. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process to update the increment counter according to the number of payouts (number of acquired balls) to be paid out as a result of game balls entering various winning ports, the number of outs (number of shot balls) discharged from the game area 5a (shot into the game area), etc. Details of the increment counter update process will be described later using FIG. 43.

In step S450-2, the main CPU 110a performs a maximum increase update process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to an increase counter (also called an "MY counter") provided in the main RAM 110c, and updates the maximum increase (information relating to the maximum increase stored in the main RAM 110c) if the value of the increase counter is greater than the (current) maximum increase (also called "maximum MY").

The main CPU 110a performs output control processing in step S450-3. Specifically, in order to transmit information related to the maximum increase to the performance control board 130, a maximum increase command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

The maximum increase command may be sent periodically to the performance control board 130, or it may not be sent before the maximum increase reaches a specified value (e.g., 90,000), but may be sent periodically after the specified value is reached.

The main CPU 110a performs an acquisition upper limit device activation determination process in step S450-4. Specifically, it determines whether the maximum increase number meets a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000), and if the maximum increase number meets the predetermined value (e.g., 95,000), it performs a process to activate the acquisition upper limit device. Details of the acquisition upper limit device activation determination process will be described later using FIG. 44. Then, the current acquisition upper limit device activation determination process ends.

(Main control board increment counter update process)
The increment counter update process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 43. Fig. 43 is a flowchart showing the increment counter update process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S450-1-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether there is general prize opening winning information indicating that a game ball has won the general prize opening 43. Specifically, it determines whether the 5 prize ball counter updated in the general prize opening detection switch input process in step S210 described above is greater than 0. If there is no general prize opening winning information, the process proceeds to step S450-1-3. If there is general prize opening winning information, in step S450-1-2, the increment counter (MY counter) is added with "5", which is the number of prize balls in the general prize opening 43.

In step S450-1-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether there is any special prize opening winning information indicating that a game ball has won the special prize opening 50. Specifically, it determines whether the 15-ball counter updated in the special prize opening detection switch input process in step S220 described above is greater than 0. If there is no special prize opening winning information, the process proceeds to step S450-1-5. If there is special prize opening winning information, in step S450-1-4, the increment counter (MY counter) is incremented by "15", which is the number of prize balls in the special prize opening 50.

In step S450-1-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether there is first start hole winning information indicating that a game ball has won in the first start hole 45. Specifically, it determines whether the 3 prize ball counter updated in the first start hole detection switch input process in step S230 described above is greater than 0. If there is no first start hole winning information, the process proceeds to step S450-1-7. If there is first start hole winning information, in step S450-1-6, the increment counter (MY counter) is added with "3", which is the number of prize balls in the first start hole 45.

In step S450-1-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether there is second start hole winning information indicating that a game ball has won in the second start hole 47. Specifically, it determines whether the 2 prize ball counter updated in the second start hole detection switch input process in step S240 described above is greater than 0. If there is no second start hole winning information, the process proceeds to step S450-1-9. If there is second start hole winning information, in step S450-1-8, the increment counter (MY counter) is added with "2", which is the number of prize balls in the second start hole 47.

In step S450-1-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether there is out ball detection information indicating that a game ball has entered the out hole 39. Specifically, it determines whether the out ball detection counter updated in the out detection switch input process in step S260 described above is greater than 0. If there is no out ball detection information, the current increment counter update process is terminated, and if there is out ball detection information, in step S450-1-10 it determines whether the increment counter (MY counter) is greater than "0". If the increment counter is not greater than "0", that is, if it is "0", the current increment counter update process is terminated, and if the increment counter is greater than "0", in step S450-1-11, "1" is subtracted from the increment counter and the current increment counter update process is terminated.

The "increase counter" is a counter for calculating the maximum increase (also called "maximum MY"). When the game establishment is opened (when the game machine 1 is turned on), the value of the increase counter is "0" and the value of the maximum increase is also "0". For example, when a game is started after the game establishment is opened and a game ball shot into the game area 5a wins in various winning holes (general winning hole 43, first start hole 45, second start hole 47, large winning hole 50), the increase counter is incremented by the number of winning balls. On the other hand, when a game ball shot into the game area 5a flows into the outlet 39, if the increase counter is a value greater than "0", the increase counter is decremented by 1, and if the increase counter is "0", the increase counter remains at "0" without being decremented. Therefore, when a big win game is executed in which a game ball can win in the large winning hole 50, the value of the increase counter changes significantly. For example, if 1500 prize balls are awarded as a result of firing 100 game balls during a jackpot game that is started with the increment counter at "0", 1400 game balls will have been acquired, and the increment counter value will be "1400". In the maximum increment update process (step S450-2) executed at this time, if the stored maximum increment is smaller than "1400", the maximum increment is updated to "1400". After that, if multiple jackpot games are executed before the increment counter value is subtracted to "0", the increment counter value will gradually increase and reach "95000" or more, and the maximum increment will also reach "95000" or more, and the acquisition upper limit device will be activated. Note that the increment counter value becoming "0" when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, or the increment counter value becoming "0" as a result of subtraction of the increment counter, corresponds to the establishment of a predetermined condition (MY=0).

The increment counter is set in the information RWM area, and the upper limit of the count that can be stored is "95013". For example, when one game ball is shot when the increment counter value is "94999", the increment counter value is updated to "94998", and when one game ball enters the large prize opening 50 (10 prize balls) at this time, the increment counter value becomes "95008". Thus, according to the gaming machine of this embodiment, the condition for the winning upper limit device to operate is that the increment counter value reaches "95000", but due to differences in the number of prize balls for each prize opening and the winning situation, it is rare for the increment counter to actually end counting at exactly "95000", and there are cases where the increment counter exceeds "95000". Therefore, for example, the increment counter can be counted up to "95013" (a margin is provided), and counting and storing beyond "95013" is not performed. The reason for the number being "95013" is that the increment counter is designed to be compatible with gaming machines equipped with specifications that can award the maximum number of prize balls "15" for one winning as stipulated by the rules of the gaming machine after one game ball is shot and the increment counter value is updated to "94998" when the increment counter value is "94999". Since the maximum number of prize balls for the gaming machine in this embodiment is "10" (the prize balls for the large prize opening 50), the upper limit value that can be counted and stored by the increment counter should be "95008". However, if a gaming machine equipped with a specification that can award the maximum number of prize balls "15" is to be developed and designed in the future, the upper limit value that can be counted and stored by the increment counter should be set to "95013" from the beginning, which can reduce the effort required for design changes. However, the upper limit value that can be counted and stored by the increment counter may be set to a value that takes into account the maximum number of prize balls for each gaming machine.

Although it has been stated that counts exceeding "95013" will not be stored (an upper limit has been set for the values that can be stored), it is not necessary to set an upper limit. For example, if a jackpot game is started when the increment counter is "94990", the increment counter may be increased by "1400" in the above example, so that the increment counter becomes "96390". In other words, even after the increment counter reaches "95000" during a jackpot game, the increment counter may continue to be updated until the jackpot game ends (until the win limit device is activated).

When the increment counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 90,000), for example, as shown in FIG. 151, the value of the increment counter is displayed on the third image display device 72 (e.g., 90,000/95,000 is displayed) (advance warning is given). As an example, the display of the value of this increment counter is displayed in real time in conjunction with the value of the increment counter.

The display of the value of the increment counter (advance notification) is not limited to the third image display device 72, but may be displayed on any of the second image display device 71 (sub LCD), the first image display device 70 (main LCD), or the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device). When the display starts, a sound (for example, "5000 remaining") may also be output.

In addition, after the advance notification is displayed when the increment counter reaches a specified value (e.g., 90,000), it may continue to be displayed until the power supply SW is turned off, regardless of how the value changes thereafter. For example, if an unfavorable situation continues for the player after the increment counter value is displayed, the increment counter may continue to be displayed even if it reaches 80,000. This allows the player to recognize that the player has reached the point where the winning limit device will be activated.

On the other hand, if the player is put in an unfavorable state after the value of the increment counter is displayed, the display of the value of the increment counter may be erased. For example, if the player is put in an unfavorable state after the value of the increment counter is displayed, for example, if the increment counter reaches 89,000, the display of the value of the increment counter may be erased. This prevents the player from misunderstanding that the winning limit device will soon be activated (compared to when the value is displayed once and then continues to be displayed until the power is turned off).

The advance notification may be configured to continue displaying even when a notification event type (e.g., an error) described below is being notified. The advance notification may also be configured to continue displaying during variable display, jackpot play, or demo performance. This increases the opportunities for the player to see the advance notification, making it easier to predict when the win limit device will be activated. This prevents the player from being surprised by the sudden activation of the win limit device. Note that while the variable display, jackpot play, or demo performance are in progress, the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 may emit rainbow light (described below), but it is also possible to perform rainbow light emission while the advance notification is being displayed.

On the other hand, it is preferable to suspend the display during an SP reach or SPSP reach. This allows the player to concentrate on the SP reach or SPSP reach. Also, depending on the type of notification event (e.g., an error) described below, the display may be continued or suspended. For example, if a magnet detection error, unauthorized radio wave detection error, or RWM abnormality error occurs, the display may be suspended, and if a glass frame opening error or inner frame opening error occurs, the display may be continued. This allows proper advance notification.

In addition, the display of the increment counter value (advance notification) does not change depending on the presentation mode, and the sound, design, or display position of the advance notification when it is displayed does not change, but it is possible to make them different depending on the presentation mode.

To go into further detail about the display of the value of the increment counter, the display of the value of the increment counter is "90000/95000", but is not limited to this. For example, when the value of the increment counter is "85000/95000", the increment counter may be displayed in the form of "10000 more". Also, a range may be provided, such as "5001 to 10000 more". Also, instead of a numerical display, a meter image may be displayed and the value of the increment counter may be displayed as the remaining amount of the meter image. Also, the value of the increment counter may be displayed by combining a meter image and a numerical display. Also, the value of the increment counter may be displayed by the type of character, the color of the character, etc. For example, the type of character may be changed from A to B to C as the value of the increment counter approaches "95000", or the color of the character may be changed from blue to yellow to red as the value of the increment counter approaches "95000".

The display of the increment counter value may also be linked to the increment counter value in real time (updated one at a time). This allows the player to be notified of a more accurate value until the winning limit device is activated.

On the other hand, the display of the increment counter value does not have to be linked to the increment counter value in real time. For example, it may be updated when the currently displayed value increases or decreases by 100. Also, instead of in increments of 100, it may be in increments of 500 or 1000. This makes it possible to suppress dizzying display changes and make the display of the increment counter value easier to see, compared to when it is linked to the increment counter value in real time (updated in increments of 1).

In addition, if the value of the increment counter is not linked in real time (updated in units of one), but is updated in units of 100, 500, or 1000, it is preferable to display the number with the word "about" added, for example, "about 10,000 more" or "about 5,001 to 10,000 more". This prevents players from feeling distrustful due to a discrepancy between the displayed content and the timing of the activation of the winning limit device.

A sound effect may be output in one shot when the value of the increment counter is displayed, or the BGM (BGM output during the change display) may be changed (dedicated BGM) after the value of the increment counter is displayed. Also, the tempo of the BGM (BGM output during the change display) may be made faster as the value of the increment counter approaches "95,000". This makes it easier to recognize from the sound change that the operation of the acquisition limit device is approaching, and prevents the player from being surprised by the sudden operation of the acquisition limit device.

On the other hand, sound effects may not be output when the value of the increment counter is displayed. Also, background music changes and background music tempo may be maintained as they are. In other words, no sound notification may be made when the value of the increment counter is displayed. This prevents a player from being disappointed when they are notified that the value of the increment counter has started to be displayed, mistaking it for a jackpot preview and not winning the jackpot.

In addition, when displaying the value of the increment counter, the frame lighting device 10 and/or the board lighting device 76 may be illuminated in a predetermined manner (flashing in a predetermined color) for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 60 seconds). This makes it easier to recognize from the change in illumination that the win limit device is approaching activation, preventing the player from being surprised by the sudden activation of the win limit device.

On the other hand, when the value of the increment counter is displayed, the light emission state of the frame lighting device 10 and/or the board lighting device 76 may be maintained as is. In other words, when the value of the increment counter is displayed, no notification of the lamp lighting system may be performed. This prevents the player from being disappointed by mistaking the notification of the start of the display of the increment counter value for a jackpot preview performance and not winning the jackpot.

In addition, gaming machine information (e.g., HC/fraud monitoring information) based on the start of displaying the value of the increment counter is not output. This prevents the control processing of the frame control board 120 from increasing.

The value of the increment counter may be displayed within the operating range of the movable performance device 77 (a position that becomes temporarily difficult to see due to the operation of the movable performance device 77). This allows the operating range of the movable performance device 77 to be determined with consideration given to the display position of the value of the increment counter, thereby preventing restrictions such as a narrowing of the operating range of the movable performance device 77.

It may also be made temporarily difficult to see in scenes where a normal reach develops into an SP reach, where an SP reach develops into an SPSP reach, and when an SP reach or SPSP reach ends and the normal background returns (eye-catcher). It may also be made to be displayed in scenes of normal fluctuations and normal reach fluctuations, but not displayed in scenes of SP reach or SPSP reach. This allows attention to be drawn to the SP reach or SPSP reach without being distracted.

On the other hand, it may be possible to make it always visible. This increases convenience by allowing users to know at any time the approximate time until the acquisition limit device is activated.

The display position and size may also be changed depending on the situation of the fluctuation presentation. For example, the SP reach and SPSP reach scenes may be displayed smaller than the normal fluctuation scenes and normal reach fluctuation scenes, or the display position of the normal fluctuation scenes and normal reach fluctuation scenes may be made different (moved) from the display position of the SP reach and SPSP reach scenes. This allows the player to be aware of the approximate time until the acquisition limit device is activated, while still drawing attention to the SP reach and SPSP reach.

(Main control board acquisition upper limit device operation determination process)
The process of determining whether or not the acquisition upper limit device is activated by the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 44. Fig. 44 is a flow chart showing the process of determining whether or not the acquisition upper limit device is activated by the main control board 110.

First, in step S450-4-1, the main CPU 110a references the value of the maximum increase number stored in the main RAM 110c. Then, once the maximum increase number value has been referenced, the process proceeds to step S450-4-2.

In step S450-4-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the maximum increase has reached a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000). If it determines that the maximum increase has reached the predetermined value (e.g., 95,000), it proceeds to step S450-4-3. If it determines that the maximum increase has not reached the predetermined value (e.g., 95,000), it proceeds to step S450-4-9.

In addition, as in this process, the control program (main control program) in which the main CPU 110a determines whether the maximum increase has reached a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000) can also be considered a detection means for detecting specific information that is counted when a counting condition is met.

In step S450-4-3, the main CPU 110a refers to the value of the special symbol special electric processing data and determines whether the value of the special symbol special electric processing data is "3" (during jackpot play). If the value of the special symbol special electric processing data is "3" (during jackpot play), the process proceeds to step S450-4-4. If the value of the special symbol special electric processing data is not "3" (during jackpot play), the process proceeds to step S450-4-5. Note that in the case of the above-mentioned 1 type 2 type or small jackpot rush type, the process may determine whether a small jackpot play or a jackpot play is in progress.

In step S450-4-4, the main CPU 110a turns on the operation recognition flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. It is expected that the process will be performed multiple times during a jackpot game, but after the operation recognition flag has been turned on once, it is not necessary to turn it on each time the process is performed (nothing needs to be done in this process). Then, once the operation recognition flag is turned on, the current win limit device operation determination process is terminated.

In step S450-4-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether the activation recognition flag is ON. If the activation recognition flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S450-4-3. If the activation recognition flag is not ON, the process ends for this upper limit acquisition device activation determination.

The "operation recognition flag" is a flag that is turned ON when the maximum increase reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000) but the acquisition upper limit device cannot be activated immediately (e.g., during a jackpot game). By setting this flag, for example, it is possible to adjust the value of the increase counter when the jackpot game ends (e.g., by making the value of the increase counter less than "95,000"), thereby preventing a situation in which the acquisition upper limit activation device does not activate because the value of the increase counter at the end of the jackpot game is "94,900". In other words, once the maximum increase reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000), the acquisition upper limit device will activate even if the value of the increase counter at the end of the jackpot game thereafter becomes less than "95,000". This leads to healthy play.

In step S450-4-5, the main CPU 110a turns on the acquisition limit device activation flag in the main RAM 110c. As described above, the flag will not be turned off unless the main RAM 110c is initialized (RWM clear process), so the flag will remain even if the control state before the power outage is restored (power is restored).

In step S450-4-5, the main CPU 110a causes the main control board 110 to turn OFF (output) the launch permission signal that permits the launching device to launch game balls. This makes it impossible for the launching device to launch game balls.

In step S450-4-7, the main CPU 110a sets an acquisition limit device activation command. Specifically, in order to send information that the acquisition limit device has been activated to the performance control board 130, the acquisition limit device activation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. When the performance control board 130 receives this command, it will display, for example, on the first image display device 70, "Acquisition limit device activated, play ends today" in white text on a black background. This allows the player to recognize that he or she is in a situation where he or she cannot continue playing any further.

In step S450-4-8, the main CPU 110a generates HC/fraud monitoring information indicating that the win limit device has been activated. Specifically, it sets Bit 6 of "Fraud Detection Status 1" (see FIG. 19) to "1" to prepare for sending "HC/fraud monitoring information" in which Bit 6 of "Fraud Detection Status 1" is "1" to the frame control board 120. The HC/fraud monitoring information generated here will be sent to the frame control board 120 in the HC/fraud monitoring information management process described above. This ultimately enables the gaming machine information center to know that the win limit device has been activated.

After the processing of step S450-4-6 is completed, the game progress control (specific control processing) is not performed until the supply of power voltage is completely cut off, and it is impossible to launch the game ball. However, the processing of detecting errors in the main control board 110, the processing of detecting errors in the frame control board 120, and the processing of notifying errors in the performance control board 130 can be executed. For example, if the main control board 110 detects a magnet after the processing of step S450-4-6 is completed, it is possible to notify "Fraud Detection 1 (Magnet Detection Error)" (described later) by audio, image, or illumination. Also, if the frame control board 120 detects unauthorized radio waves after the processing of step S450-4-6 is completed, it is possible to notify "Unauthorized Radio Wave Detection Error" (described later) by audio, image, or illumination. This allows the security level to be maintained even after the "capture limit device" is activated.

After the processing of step S450-4-6 is completed, any processing related to errors may also be stopped. In other words, after the processing of step S450-4-6 is completed, for example, since no prize balls are generated even if game balls enter each winning slot, there is little (or nothing) to be gained even if cheating is attempted with magnets or the like, so the processing for detecting errors in the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 and the processing for receiving and reporting commands related to errors in the performance control board 130 may be stopped. This reduces the control load on each control board.

In addition, after the processing of step S450-4-6 is completed, the progress of the game is not controlled (specific control processing) and it is impossible to launch the game ball, but the function of adjusting the volume and light intensity on the performance control board 130 (volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment by the player) can be executed. This allows for greater freedom in adjusting the volume and light intensity.

After the acquisition limit device is activated, if the power switch 164 is turned off and then only the power switch 164 is turned on without pressing the RWM clear switch 111a, a notification that "acquisition limit device is activated, please clear RWM" is executed. However, if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in step S15 of the main process executed by turning on the power switch 164, for example, an unrecoverable error occurs in step S17, and the process of step S29 to send the acquisition limit device activation command (a command to execute the above notification) is not executed. In other words, if there is an abnormality in the main RAM 110c, even if the power is turned on after the acquisition limit device is activated, the above notification (acquisition limit device activation notification) is not executed, and an RWM abnormality error is notified. In this case, the process of step S29 is not executed, so that the acquisition limit device activation notification is not executed by voice notification, screen notification, or illumination notification. This allows the RWM abnormal error to be reported first, even in situations where the RWM needs to be cleared after the earning limit device has been activated, allowing employees to respond quickly.

(Main control board error control processing)
The error control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 45. Fig. 45 is a flowchart showing the error control processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S550-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether the magnet detection flag is not set and whether the first magnetic detection sensor 53a or the second magnetic detection sensor 53b has detected an abnormal magnetic field for a predetermined period of time. If it is determined that an abnormal magnetic field has been detected for the predetermined period of time, the process proceeds to step S550-2. If it is determined that an abnormal magnetic field has not been detected for the predetermined period of time, the process proceeds to step S550-4.

In step S550-2, the main CPU 110a sets a magnet detection flag in the main RAM 110c, and sets a magnet detection designation command in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in order to transmit information about the magnet detection to the performance control board 130. When the performance control board 130 receives this command, it notifies the user of a magnet detection error. Details of the magnet detection error will be described later.

In step S550-3, the main CPU 110a generates HC/fraud monitoring information indicating that a magnet detection error has occurred. Specifically, it sets Bit 3 of "Fraud Detection Status 1" (see FIG. 19) to "1" to prepare for sending "HC/fraud monitoring information" in which Bit 3 of "Fraud Detection Status 1" is "1" to the frame control board 120. The HC/fraud monitoring information generated here will be sent to the frame control board 120 in the HC/fraud monitoring information management process described above. This allows the gaming machine information center to finally understand that magnet detection has occurred.

In step S550-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a mismatch has occurred between the number of winning balls and the number of balls discharged. Specifically, it determines whether or not a mismatch has occurred between the number of game balls that have won in the various winning ports (general winning port 43, first starting port 45, second starting port 47, large winning port 50) and the number of game balls discharged from the winning ball flow path through which the winning balls flow (game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a). If a mismatch has occurred, the process proceeds to step S550-5; if no mismatch has occurred, the current error control process is terminated.

In step S550-5, the main CPU 110a sets an abnormal winning detection flag in the main RAM 110c, and sets an abnormal winning designation command in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in order to transmit information on the abnormal winning detection to the performance control board 130. When the performance control board 130 receives this command, it notifies the abnormal winning error. Details of the abnormal winning error will be described later.

In step S550-6, the main CPU 110a generates HC/fraud monitoring information indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred. Specifically, it sets Bit 4 of "fraud detection state 1" (see FIG. 19) to "1" to prepare for sending "HC/fraud monitoring information" in which Bit 4 of "fraud detection state 1" is "1" to the frame control board 120. The HC/fraud monitoring information generated here will be sent to the frame control board 120 in the HC/fraud monitoring information management process described above. This allows the gaming machine information center to finally understand that magnet detection has been performed. Then, the current error control process ends.

(Main control board HC/fraud monitoring information management processing)
The HC/fraud monitoring information management process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 46. Fig. 46 is a flowchart showing the HC/fraud monitoring information management process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S600-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether 108 ms have elapsed. For example, the counter is updated in the time control process of step S110 of the main control board timer interrupt process (every 4 milliseconds), and it is determined that 108 ms have elapsed when it has counted 27 (4 milliseconds x 27 = 108 milliseconds). Note that the counter starts updating in the first time control process after the interrupt is permitted, and thereafter, when it has counted 27, it is cleared (set to 0) and counted again. If it is determined that 108 ms have elapsed, the process proceeds to step S650-2, and if it is determined that 108 ms have not elapsed, the current HC/fraud monitoring information management process is terminated.

The main CPU 110a notifies the gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information) in step S600-2. In other words, the "gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information)" is sent to the frame control board 120 every 108 ms. Note that although the HC/fraud monitoring information management process is executed within the main control board timer interrupt process, it may also be executed within the main control board main process.

In step S600-3, the main CPU 110a increments the "notification counter" provided in the main RAM 110c by "+1". Then, in step S600-4, it is determined whether or not the reception result of the gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information) has been responded to. If the reception result of the gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information) has been responded to, the current HC/fraud monitoring information management process is terminated, and if the reception result of the gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information) has not been responded to, the process proceeds to step S600-5. In other words, it is determined whether or not the reception result has been responded (received) from the frame control board 120 as a result of transmitting "gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information)" to the frame control board 120.

In step S600-6, the main CPU 110a sets a communication line disconnection error designation command, indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the communication line with the frame control board 120, in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends this HC/fraud monitoring information management process. When the performance control board 130 receives this command, it notifies the user of a communication line disconnection error.

If there is a possibility that a disconnection or the like (communication abnormality) has occurred between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, the game progress control (specific control processing) may not be executed, or the launch permission signal may be turned OFF to prevent the launch of game balls. In this way, it is possible to prevent the game from being played despite the occurrence of a disconnection or the like (communication abnormality) between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

(Message related to communication between the frame control board and the dedicated unit)
47, a description will be given of messages related to communication between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a list of messages related to communication between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170.

As shown in FIG. 47, No. 1 has the message name "Game Machine Information Notification", the transmission direction "Frame Control Board 120 → Dedicated Unit 170", the command "0x01", and the message summary "Notify Game Machine Information". No. 2 has the message name "Counting Notification", the transmission direction "Frame Control Board 120 → Dedicated Unit 170", the command "0x02", and the message summary "Notify Counting Information". No. 3 has the message name "Lending Notification", the transmission direction "Dedicated Unit 170 → Frame Control Board 120", the command "0x13", and the message summary "Notify Lending Information". No. 4 has the message name "Lending Receipt Result Response", the transmission direction "Frame Control Board 120 → Dedicated Unit 170", the command "0x03", and the message summary "Respond to Lending Information Receipt Result". In this case, "gaming machine information" refers to "HC/fraud monitoring information" and "gaming machine performance information."

(Game machine information notification transmitted from the frame control board to the dedicated unit)
A gaming machine information notification transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 will be described with reference to Fig. 48. Fig. 48 is a diagram showing the gaming machine information notification.

The "gaming machine information notification" is configured as shown in FIG. 48. No. 1 has the data name "message length" and the contents are "0x12-0x39". No. 2 has the data name "command" and the contents are "0x01". No. 3 has the data name "communication serial number" and the contents are "sequence number: 0x00-0xFF (0-255)". No. 4 has the data name "gaming machine type" related to the gaming machine information and the contents are "type of gaming machine". The gaming machine type is the same as that explained in the gaming machine installation information above. No. 5 has the data name "gaming machine information type" and the contents are "0x00: gaming machine performance information, 0x01: gaming machine installation information, 0x02: hall control/fraud monitoring information". No. 6. are data names related to gaming machine installation information: "Gaming Machine Performance Information," "Gaming Machine Installation Information," and "Hall Control/Fraud Monitoring Information." The contents of gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, and hall control/fraud monitoring information will be described later. No. 7 has the data name "Checksum" and the contents "-".

(Machine performance information transmitted from the frame control board to the dedicated unit)
The gaming machine information transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 will be described with reference to Fig. 49. Fig. 49 is a diagram showing gaming machine performance information.

The gaming machine performance information is made up of 10 pieces of data. The first piece is named "Total number of game balls fired" and has the content "0x000000-0xFFFFFF (0-16777215 balls)". The second piece is named "Total number of game balls acquired (total number of winning balls)" and has the content "0x000000-0xFFFFFF (0-16777215 balls)". The third piece is named "Ball payout rate" and has the content "0x0000-0xFFFF (0%-65535%)". The fourth piece is named "Number of game balls acquired per minute (low base: non-time-saving state)" and has the content "0x00-0xFFFF (0 balls-65535 balls)". The fifth piece is named "Ratio of game devices" and has the content "0x00-0x64 (0%-100%)". The sixth has the data name "Continuous feature ratio" and the content "0x00-0x64 (0%-100%)". The seventh has the data name "Number of jackpots" and the content "0x0000-0xFFFF (0-65535 times)". The eighth has the data name "Maximum ball payout" and the content "0x00000-0xFFFFFF (0 balls-16777215 balls)". The ninth has the data name "Reserve" and the content "Reserve (fixed at 0x00)". The tenth has the data name "Reserved" and the content "Used on SC board (fixed at 0x00)".

The "ball payout rate" is a value calculated by: total number of game balls acquired ÷ total number of game balls fired × 100; the "number of game balls acquired per minute" is the number of game balls acquired in any one minute in a low base (non-time-saving) state; the "role ratio" is a value calculated by: number of game balls acquired that are not the result of winning at a general winning port (number of game balls acquired in auxiliary games, small win games, and jackpot games) ÷ total number of game balls acquired × 100; the "consecutive role ratio" is a value calculated by: number of game balls acquired in jackpot games ÷ total number of game balls acquired × 100; and the "maximum ball payout" is the largest positive value (difference in number of balls) while the counter, which adds the number of prize balls (number of game balls acquired) each time a prize ball is awarded based on winning at a winning port and subtracts one each time a game ball is fired into the game area, with "0" as the lower limit, is a positive value ("1" or more) (until it reaches "0"). In other words, if we think of it as a slump graph that rises to the right as prize balls are awarded and falls to the right as game balls are released, it is the value of the number of game balls won (the difference in number of balls) when the slump graph reaches its peak from the point when the right-sloping graph begins to rise as prize balls are awarded until the slump graph returns to the starting point again.

(Machine installation information transmitted from the frame control board to the dedicated unit)
The gaming machine installation information transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 will be described with reference to Fig. 50. Fig. 50 is a diagram showing the gaming machine installation information.

The gaming machine installation information is made up of six pieces of data. The first is the data name "Main control chip ID number" and the content is "Main control chip ID number of gaming machine". The second is the data name "Main control chip manufacturer code" and the content is "Manufacturer code written in the management area of the main control chip". The third is the data name "Main control chip product code" and the content is "Product code written in the management area of the main control chip". Although the main control chip ID number is omitted in the drawing, it is the ID number for each manufacturer of the main control chip. For example, if the main control chip is from manufacturer A, a total of 9 bytes of data consisting of the chip individual number "23456789" + identification code is transmitted via telegram, and if the main control chip is from manufacturer B, a total of 9 bytes of data consisting of the chip individual number "45678912" + identification code is transmitted via telegram.

The fourth has the data name "Frame control chip ID number" and the content "Frame control chip ID number of the gaming machine." The fifth has the data name "Frame control chip manufacturer code" and the content "Manufacturer code written in the management area of the frame control chip." The sixth has the data name "Frame control chip product code" and the content "Product code written in the management area of the frame control chip." Although the frame control chip ID number is omitted in the drawing, it is the ID number for each manufacturer of the frame control chip. For example, for a frame control chip from manufacturer A, a total of 9 bytes of data consisting of the chip individual number "34567891" + identification code is transmitted via telegram, and for a frame control chip from manufacturer B, a total of 9 bytes of data consisting of the chip individual number "56789123" + identification code is transmitted via telegram.

(Hole control and fraud monitoring information sent from the frame control board to the dedicated unit)
The hole control/irregularity monitoring information transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 will be described with reference to Fig. 51. Fig. 51 is a diagram showing the hole control/irregularity monitoring information.

The hall control/fraud monitoring information is made up of 10 pieces of data. The first is named "Number of game balls" and has the content "Current number of game balls (owned by the player): 0x000000-0x301B0F (0-990000 balls)." The second is named "Number of fired balls" and has the content "Number of fired balls: 0x80-0x7F (-128-127 balls)." The third is named "Total number of winning balls" and has the content "Total number of winning balls in count information 1-n x number of winning balls: 0x00-0xFF (0-255 balls)."

The fourth has the data name "Main control state 1" and the contents are "Bit 0: jackpot 1, Bit 1: jackpot 2, Bit 2: jackpot 3, Bit 3: gaming machine status signal 1, Bit 4: gaming machine status signal 2, Bit 5: gaming machine status signal 3, Bit 6: gaming machine status signal 4, Bit 7: unused. Specifically, the ON "1" and OFF "0" of Bit 0 to Bit 2 are used to notify whether a jackpot game is not being played or which of the seven types of jackpot games is being played, and the ON and OFF of Bit 3 to Bit 6 are used to notify which of the 16 types of game states is being played. The details of Main control state 1 have been explained above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

The fifth has the data name "Main Control State 2" and the contents "Bit 0: during jackpot play + time-saving or advantageous state, Bit 1: high probability, Bit 2: time-saving or advantageous state, Bits 3-7: unused." For example, during jackpot play, Bit 0 is ON "1" and Bit 1 and Bit 2 are OFF "0", and during time-saving play, Bit 0 and Bit 2 are ON "1" and Bit 1 is OFF "0." Details of Main Control State 2 have been explained above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

The sixth has the data name "Game machine error status" and the contents "Bit 0 to Bit 5: Error code, Bit 6: Frame control/Main control, Bit 7: Alarm only/Alarm + Hall control output." For example, if an error is detected by the frame control board 120, Bit 6 will be OFF "0", and if the error is an alarm + Hall control output, Bit 7 will be ON "1".

The seventh has the data name "Fraud detection status 1 (main control)" and the contents "Bit 0: setting change signal, Bit 2: setting confirmation signal, Bit 2: RWM clear signal, Bit 3: fraud detection signal 1, Bit 4: fraud detection signal 2, Bit 5: fraud detection signal 3, Bit 6: acquisition limit device operating signal, Bit 7: unused." Specifically, it indicates whether an event controlled or detected by the main control board 110 has occurred; for example, if a setting change is being made, Bit 0 is ON "1," and if an error corresponding to fraud detection signal 1 has occurred, Bit 3 is ON "1." Details of fraud detection status 1 have been explained above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

The eighth has the data name "Fraud detection state 2 (frame control)" and the contents "Bit 0: glass frame open, Bit 1: inner frame open, Bit 2: illegal radio wave detected, Bit 3: number of game balls cleared detected, Bit 4: abnormal number of winning balls detected, Bit 5: abnormal number of shot balls detected, Bit 6 to Bit 7: unused." Specifically, it indicates the occurrence or non-occurrence of an event detected by the frame control board 120; for example, when the glass frame 4 is open, Bit 0 is ON "1," and when the number of game balls has been cleared, Bit 3 is ON "1." Details of fraud detection state 2 will be described later.

The ninth item has the data name "Fraud detection state 3 (frame control)" and the contents "Bit 0: small ball detected, Bit 1: iron ball detected, Bit 2 to Bit 7: unused." For example, if a small ball, which is a gaming ball smaller than a normal size gaming ball, is detected, Bit 0 will be ON "1." Details of fraud detection state 2 will be given later.

The tenth item has the data name "Game Information". Specifically, the data name is "Number of Game Information", the content is "Number of Type Information/Count Information (n): n = 0x00-0x0F (0-15)", the data name is "Type Information 1", the content is "Type Information 1", the data name is "Count Information 1", the content is "Count Information 1", the data name is "Type Information n", the content is "Type Information n", the data name is "Count Information n", the content is "Count Information n".

Specifically, in the first example, when one game ball enters the first start opening 45, the "count information" refers to "data indicating the first start opening 45," "data indicating the number of winning balls (1)," and "data indicating the number of prize balls (3)." In the second example, when one game ball enters the large prize opening 50, the "count information" refers to "data indicating the large prize opening 50," "data indicating the number of winning balls (1)," and "data indicating the number of prize balls (15)." In the third example, when one game ball passes through the out ball detection switch 39a, the "count information" refers to "data indicating the out ball detection switch 39a" and "data indicating the number of passing balls (1)." The details of the game information have been described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

(Hall control/fraud monitoring information fraud detection status)
The fraud detection state of the hole control and fraud monitoring information will be described with reference to Fig. 52. Fig. 52(a) is a diagram showing a fraud detection state 2, and Fig. 52(b) is a diagram showing a fraud detection state 3.

"Fraud detection state 2" is Bit 0's name "Glass frame open" with details "0 = normal, 1 = glass frame open detected", Bit 1's name "Inner frame open" with details "0 = normal, 1 = inner frame open detected", Bit 2's name "Illegal radio wave detected" with details "0 = normal, 1 = illegal radio wave detected", Bit 3's name "Number of game balls cleared detected" with details "0 = normal, 1 = number of game balls cleared detected", Bit 4's name "Abnormal number of winning balls detected" with details "0 = normal, 1 = abnormal number of winning balls detected", Bit 5's name "Abnormal number of fired balls detected" with details "0 = normal, 1 = abnormal number of fired balls detected", and Bits 6 to 7's names "Unused" with details "Fixed at 0".

In "fraud detection status 3," the name of Bit 0 is "small ball detected" and the details are "0 = normal, 1 = small ball detected," the name of Bit 1 is "iron ball detected" and the details are "0 = normal, 1 = iron ball detected," and the names of Bits 2 to 7 are "unused" and the details are "fixed at 0."

(Hall control and fraud monitoring information)
The gaming information of the hole control and fraud monitoring information will be described with reference to Fig. 53. Fig. 53 is a diagram showing the gaming information.

The "game information" is made up of two bytes, "type information (1 byte)" and "count information (1 byte)". Furthermore, the "type information (1 byte)" is made up of "data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" and "data number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)".

For example, Bit 4 to Bit 7 "0000 (=0)" are the type name "unused" and the content "-", Bit 4 to Bit 7 "0001 (=1)" are the type name "winning at the starting gate" and the content "notification that a prize has been won at the starting gate", Bit 4 to Bit 7 "0010 (=2)" are the type name "winning at the large prize gate" and the content "notification that a prize has been won at the large prize gate", and Bit 4 to Bit 7 "0011 (=3)" are the type name "winning at the prize gate" and the content "notification that a prize has been won at the prize gate". Bit 4 to Bit 7 “0100 (= 4)” are the type name “All start gate winnings” and the content “Notification of passing through the start gate or normal gate related to the game”. Bit 4 to Bit 7 “0101 (= 5)”, “0110 (= 6)”, “0111 (= 7)”, and “1000 (= 8)” are the type name “Unused” and the content “-”. Bit 4 to Bit 7 “1001 (= 9)” are the type name “Number of times the pattern is determined” and the content “Notification of the number of times the pattern related to the game changes”. Bit 4 to Bit Bit7 “1010 (=10)” is the type name “number of big wins” and the content is “notification that the consecutive operation device of the accessory has been activated”, Bit4 to Bit7 “1011 (=11)” is the type name “unused” and the content is “-”, Bit4 to Bit7 “1100 (=12)” is the type name “number of times of the accessory (number of times of opening of the large prize opening)” and the content is “notification of the opening of the large prize opening when the consecutive operation device of the accessory has not been activated, in case of wanting to set the number of times of opening of the large prize opening at the time of a small win as the start number” (the “Big Win Game 3 (4th Lau)” in FIG. 15). The first round of the "1st round" is "small win game", Bit 4 to Bit 7 "1101 (=13)" are type name "passing a specific area" and content "notification of passing a specific area" (see "Specific area" in Figure 15), Bit 4 to Bit 7 "1110 (=14)" are type name "reserve" and content "used to notify data other than data types 1 to 4, 9, 10, 12, and 13", and Bit 4 to Bit 7 "1111 (=15)" are type name "unused" and content "-".

If the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Winning at Start Gate", the "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" will notify the content (start gate number) of Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001 (= 1)" (winning at start gate 1), "0010 (= 2)" (winning at start gate 2), or "0011 (= 3)" (winning at start gate 3) (other than the above are unused). For example, if a game ball wins at the first start gate 45, the type information (1 byte) of "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "0001" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001" will be notified.

If the "Data Type (Bits 4 to 7)" is "Winning at the Large Prize Gate", then the content (large prize gate number) is notified as either Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001 (=1)" (winning at large prize gate 1) or "0010 (=1)" (winning at large prize gate 2) (other than the above are unused). For example, if a game ball wins at large prize gate 50, type information (1 byte) is notified with "Data Type (Bits 4 to 7)" as "0010 (=2)" and "Data Number (Bits 0 to 3)" as "0001 (=1)".

If the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Winning at a Winning Gate", the content (winning gate number) is notified as one of the following bits 0 to 3: "0001 (=1)" (winning at winning gate 1), "0010 (=2)" (winning at winning gate 2), ... "1111 (=15)" (winning at winning gate 15) ("0000 (=0)" is unused). For example, if a game ball wins at the general winning gate 43 located at the bottom right of the decorative frame 40, the type information (1 byte) is notified, with "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "0011 (=3)" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001 (=1)".

If the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Winning at all start gates", Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001 (=1)" (winning or passing) is notified as the content (others are unused). For example, if the game ball wins at the first start gate 45, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "0100 (=4)" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001 (=1)" is notified, and if the game ball passes through the normal gate 44, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "0100 (=4)" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001 (=1)" is notified.

If the "Data Type (Bits 4 to 7)" is the "Number of Times a Pattern Has Been Determined," then the contents notify Bits 0 to 3 "0001 (=1)" (the number of times the patterns related to the game (special patterns, normal patterns) have been determined) (the rest are unused). For example, if the first special pattern is stopped and displayed, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bits 4 to 7)" being "1001 (=9)" and "Data Number (Bits 0 to 3)" being "0001 (=1)" is notified, and similar type information is notified when the second special pattern is stopped and displayed. Similarly, similar type information is notified when a normal pattern is stopped and displayed.

If the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is the "Number of jackpots", then the contents notified are Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001 (=1)" (the continuous role-playing device is activated) (the rest are unused). For example, when the first jackpot (see FIG. 12) is executed, the type information (1 byte) is notified, with the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "1010 (=10)" and the "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001 (=1)".

If the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is the "Number of Features (Number of Times the Big Win Gate is Opened)", then Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001 (=1)" (Feature 1) is notified as the content (the rest are unused). For example, if the "Big Win Game 3" described in FIG. 15 is executed, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "1100 (=12)" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001 (=1)" is notified.

If the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Passing through a specific area", Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001 (=1)" (specific area 1) is notified as the content (the rest are unused). For example, when the "Big Win Game 3" described in FIG. 15 is executed and the game ball passes through the specific area, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "1101 (=13)" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001 (=1)" is notified.

Note that in the case of "passing through a specific area," as shown in FIG. 22, if Bit 4 to Bit 7 are "unused" and "fixed to 0," and Bit 0 to Bit 3 are "0001 (=1)," it is notified that "the number of times the specific area has been passed" (the others are unused). In other words, as shown in Example 1 of FIG. 22, when the game ball passes through specific area 1 once, game information "0xD101" is notified, which is broken down into type information (1 byte) with "data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "1101 (=13)" and "data number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001 (=1)," and count information (1 byte) with "unused (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "0000 (=0)" and "number of passes (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001 (=1)" (1 time).

If the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Reserve", the contents will be notified as either "0001 (=1)", "0010 (=2)", "0011 (=3)", or "0100 (=4)" (reserve number) for Bit 0 to Bit 3 (the rest are unused).

(Counting notification sent from the frame control board to the dedicated unit)
A counting notification transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 will be described with reference to Fig. 54. Fig. 54 is a diagram showing the counting notification.

The "Counting Notification" is configured as shown in Figure 54. No. 1 has the data name "Message Length" and the content "0x07". No. 2 has the data name "Command" and the content "0x02". No. 3 has the data name "Counting Serial Number" and the content "Sequence Number: 0x00-0xFF (0-255)". No. 4 has the data name "Counted Balls" and the content "Counted Balls: 0x00-0xFF (0-255)". No. 5 has the data name "Cumulative Counted Balls" and the content "Cumulative Counted Balls: 0x00-0xFFFF (0-65,535 balls)". No. 6 has the data name "Checksum" and the content "-".

(Lending notification sent from the dedicated unit to the frame control board)
A description will be given of the lending notification transmitted from the dedicated unit 170 to the frame control board 120 with reference to Fig. 55. Fig. 55 is a diagram showing the lending notification.

The "loan notification" is configured as shown in Figure 55. No. 1 has the data name "Message length" and the content "0x05". No. 2 has the data name "Command" and the content "0x13". No. 3 has the data name "Loan serial number" and the content "Sequence number: 0x00-0xFF (0-255)". No. 4 has the data name "Number of loaned balls" and the content "Number of loaned balls: 0x00-0xFF (0-255 balls)". No. 5 has the data name "Checksum" and the content "-".

(Lending receipt result response sent from the frame control board to the dedicated unit)
The loan receipt result response transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 will be described with reference to Fig. 56. Fig. 56 is a diagram showing the loan receipt result response.

The "loan receipt result response" is configured as shown in Figure 56. No. 1 has the data name "Message length" and the content "0x05". No. 2 has the data name "Command" and the content "0x03". No. 3 has the "loan serial number" and the content "Sequence number: 0x00 to 0xFF (0 to 255)". No. 4 has the "loan ball count receipt result" and the content "loan ball count receipt result: 0x00 = normal, 0x01 = abnormal (during ball removal operation, when the number of game balls owned by the player is 100,000 or more)". No. 5 has the data name "Checksum" and the content "-".

(Basic communication sequence between the frame control board and the dedicated unit)
Using Figure 57, the basic communication sequence between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 will be described.

First, when it is time to send the gaming machine information notification, which arrives every 300 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the gaming machine information notification (serial number = n) to the dedicated unit 170 as the first telegram, and then 90 to 100 ms later, the frame control board 120 sends the counting notification (counting serial number = m) to the dedicated unit 170 as the second telegram. Then, within 170 ms, the dedicated unit 170 sends the loan notification (serial number = k) to the frame control board 120 as the third telegram, and within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the loan receipt result response (loan serial number = k) to the dedicated unit 170 as the fourth telegram, and the loan ball number receipt result is confirmed by the dedicated unit 170.

After that, after 20 ms or more have elapsed since the transmission of the fourth loan receipt result response and 300 ms have elapsed since the transmission of the first gaming machine information notification, the frame control board 120 transmits a gaming machine information notification (serial number = n + 1) as the fifth telegram to the dedicated unit 170. After that, the first to fourth communication sequences are repeated at 300 ms intervals by transmitting and receiving telegrams in the order of counting notification, loan notification, and loan receipt result response.

(Frame control board and dedicated unit start-up sequence 1)
Using Figure 58, we will explain the startup sequence 1 of the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (the case where the gaming machine 1 starts up first).

First, when the power to the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 is off, the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) of the frame control board 120 is OFF, and the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) and PSI (counting valid signal) of the dedicated unit 170 are OFF. Then, when the power to the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 is turned on at the same time, the gaming machine 1 and the dedicated unit 170 start up.

After that, when the startup of the gaming machine 1 is completed prior to the dedicated unit 170, messages such as gaming machine information notifications and counting notifications are sequentially sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as in the basic communication sequence described above, but since the dedicated unit 170 is starting up, it is unable to receive the sent messages.

When the startup of the dedicated unit 170 is completed, the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) and PSI (counting valid signal) of the dedicated unit 170 are turned ON, and the gaming machine 1 is able to release gaming balls and is able to operate the counting button 20. After that, messages (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, as in the basic communication sequence with a cycle of 300 ms shown in FIG. 57.

(Frame control board and dedicated unit start-up sequence 2)
Using Figure 59, the startup sequence 2 of the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (the case where the dedicated unit 170 starts first) will be described.

First, when the power of the dedicated unit 170 is turned on prior to the gaming machine 1, the dedicated unit 170 starts to start up, and when the startup of the dedicated unit 170 is completed, the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) and PSI (counting valid signal) of the dedicated unit 170 are turned ON, and the dedicated unit 170 enters a state of waiting for connection to the gaming machine 1.

After that, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the gaming machine 1 starts to start up, and when the startup of the gaming machine 1 is completed, the gaming machine 1 is capable of releasing gaming balls and the operation of the counting button 20 becomes valid. After that, messages (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 as in the basic communication sequence with a cycle of 300 ms shown in FIG. 57.

(Frame control board and dedicated unit gaming machine information notification sequence 1)
Using Figure 60, we will explain the gaming machine information notification sequence 1 of the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (a case in which no gaming information related to a game is held at the time of sending the gaming machine information notification).

First, the dedicated unit 170 is in a state of waiting for connection with the gaming machine 1, and then when the startup of the gaming machine is completed, the gaming machine 1 is able to release gaming balls and the operation of the counting button 20 becomes valid. Then, as in the basic communication sequence with a cycle of 300 ms shown in FIG. 57, messages (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170.

Then, when the timing for notifying the gaming machine installation information arrives 60 s after the completion of startup of the gaming machine 1 and 300 ms after the previous transmission of the gaming machine information notification, the frame control board 120 transmits a gaming machine information notification consisting of the gaming machine installation information to the dedicated unit 170 as the tenth telegram shown in the figure. After that, telegrams (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 as in the basic communication sequence with a cycle of 300 ms shown in FIG. 57.

In addition, when the timing of the two notifications of gaming machine installation information and gaming machine performance information overlap 180 s after the completion of the start-up of the gaming machine 1 and 300 ms after the transmission of the previous gaming machine information notification, a gaming machine information notification consisting of the gaming machine installation information with the highest priority is transmitted as the 11th telegram shown in the figure. After that, telegrams are transmitted and received in the order of counting notification, loan notification, and loan receipt result response, and after 300 ms has elapsed since the previous gaming machine information notification, a gaming machine information notification consisting of the gaming machine performance information with the lowest priority is transmitted. After that, telegrams (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly transmitted and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 as in the basic communication sequence with a cycle of 300 ms shown in FIG. 57.

(Frame control board and dedicated unit gaming machine information notification sequence 2)
Using Figure 61, we will explain the gaming machine information notification sequence 2 of the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (the case in which gaming information related to the game is held at the time of sending the gaming machine information notification).

First, the dedicated unit 170 is in a state of waiting for connection with the gaming machine 1, and then when the startup of the gaming machine is completed, the gaming machine 1 is able to release gaming balls and the operation of the counting button 20 becomes valid. Then, as in the basic communication sequence with a cycle of 300 ms shown in FIG. 57, messages (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170.

Then, 60 s after the start-up of the gaming machine 1 is completed and 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification is sent, the timing for notifying the gaming machine installation information comes. However, since gaming information related to the game is held at this point, the frame control board 120 sends a gaming machine information notification consisting of hall control and fraud monitoring information including gaming information, rather than gaming machine installation information, to the dedicated unit 170 as the sixth telegram shown in the figure. After that, telegrams are sent and received in the order of counting notification, loan notification, and loan receipt result response, and 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification, a gaming machine information notification consisting of gaming machine installation information is sent. After that, telegrams (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 as in the basic communication sequence with a cycle of 300 ms shown in FIG. 57.

The timing for notifying the gaming machine performance information is 180 s after the start-up of the gaming machine 1 is complete and 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification is sent. However, since gaming information related to the game is held at this point, the frame control board 120 sends a gaming machine information notification consisting of hall control and fraud monitoring information including gaming information, rather than gaming machine performance information, to the dedicated unit 170 as the 15th telegram shown in the figure. After that, telegrams are sent and received in the order of counting notification, loan notification, and loan receipt result response, and a gaming machine information notification consisting of gaming machine performance information is sent 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification. After that, telegrams (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 as in the basic communication sequence with a cycle of 300 ms shown in FIG. 57.

(Frame control board and dedicated unit counting notification sequence 1)
Using Figure 62, we will explain counting notification sequence 1 between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (a case where no communication abnormality occurs between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170).

First, when the player owns 1000 gaming balls and the number of balls stored by the dedicated unit 170 is 100, the counting button 20 on the gaming machine 1 is pressed. After that, when it is time to send a gaming machine information notification, which arrives every 300 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the gaming machine information notification (serial number = n, number of gaming balls = 1000) to the dedicated unit 170 as the first telegram. After 100 ms has elapsed, 250 balls are subtracted from the number of game balls owned by the player, making it 750, and when a second telegram is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 notifying the dedicated unit 170 that the game balls (game value) have been counted (counting serial number = m, number of counted balls = 250, cumulative counted number of balls = 250), the number of balls owned by the player stored in the dedicated unit 170 is added to the counted number, making it 350.

Then, within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends a third telegram to the frame control board 120 as a loan notification (loan serial number = k, number of loaned balls = 0), and within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 sends a fourth telegram to the dedicated unit 170 as a loan receipt result response (loan serial number = k, loaned ball number receipt result = normal), and the dedicated unit 170 confirms the loaned ball number receipt result.

300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification is sent, the frame control board 120 sends the dedicated unit 170 a gaming machine information notification (serial number = n+1, number of gaming balls = 750) as the fifth telegram. 100 ms after that, 250 balls are subtracted from the number of gaming balls owned by the player to make it 500, and the frame control board 120 sends the dedicated unit 170 a sixth telegram (counting serial number = m+1, number of counted balls = 250, cumulative counted number of balls = 500) to inform the dedicated unit 170 that the gaming balls (gaming value) have been counted, and the number of balls owned by the player stored in the dedicated unit 170 is increased by 250 (the counted number) to make it 600.

Then, within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends a loan notification (loan serial number = k+1, number of loaned balls = 0) to the frame control board 120 as the seventh telegram, and within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 sends an eighth telegram to the dedicated unit 170 as a loan receipt result response (loan serial number k+1, loaned ball number receipt result = normal), and the loaned ball number receipt result is confirmed by the dedicated unit 170.

After that, after the counting button 20 of the gaming machine 1 is released and 300 ms has elapsed since the previous transmission of the gaming machine information notification, the frame control board 120 sends the gaming machine information notification (serial number = n + 2, number of gaming balls = 500) as the ninth telegram to the dedicated unit 170. 100 ms later, the frame control board 120 sends the counting notification (counting serial number = m + 2, number of counted balls = 0, cumulative number of counted balls = 500) as the tenth telegram to the dedicated unit 170.

Then, within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends the 11th telegram, a loan notification (loan serial number = k+2, loaned ball count = 0), to the frame control board 120, and within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the 12th telegram, a loan receipt result response (loan serial number k+2, loaned ball count receipt result = normal), to the dedicated unit 170, and the loaned ball count receipt result is confirmed by the dedicated unit 170. After that, messages (game machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 as in the basic communication sequence with a 300 ms cycle shown in Figure 57.

(Frame control board and dedicated unit counting notification sequence 2)
Using Figure 63, we will explain counting notification sequence 2 between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (a case where a communication abnormality occurs between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170).

First, when the player owns 1000 gaming balls and the number of balls stored by the dedicated unit 170 is 100, the counting button 20 on the gaming machine 1 is pressed. After that, when it is time to send a gaming machine information notification, which arrives every 300 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the gaming machine information notification (serial number = n, number of gaming balls = 1000) to the dedicated unit 170 as the first telegram. After 100 ms has elapsed, 250 balls are subtracted from the number of game balls owned by the player, making it 750, and when a second telegram is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 notifying the dedicated unit 170 that the game balls (game value) have been counted (counting serial number = m, number of counted balls = 250, cumulative counted number of balls = 250), the number of balls owned by the player stored in the dedicated unit 170 is added to the counted number, making it 350.

Then, within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends a third telegram to the frame control board 120 as a loan notification (loan serial number = k, number of loaned balls = 0), and within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 sends a fourth telegram to the dedicated unit 170 as a loan receipt result response (loan serial number = k, loaned ball number receipt result = normal), and the dedicated unit 170 confirms the loaned ball number receipt result.

300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification is sent, the frame control board 120 sends the dedicated unit 170 a gaming machine information notification (serial number = n+1, number of gaming balls = 750) as the fifth electronic message. 100 ms after that, 250 balls are subtracted from the number of gaming balls owned by the player to make it 500, and the frame control board 120 sends the dedicated unit 170 a counting notification (counting serial number = m+1, number of counted balls = 250, cumulative number of counted balls = 500) as the sixth electronic message to inform the dedicated unit 170 that the gaming balls (gaming value) have been counted. However, due to a communication error, the dedicated unit 170 is unable to receive the counting notification, and the number of balls owned by the player stored in the dedicated unit 170 is not updated.

After that, 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, the seventh telegram is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170, which is a gaming machine information notification (serial number = n + 2, number of gaming balls = 500). However, due to a communication error, the dedicated unit 170 is unable to receive the counting notification, and the number of balls held by the player stored in the dedicated unit 170 is not updated.

Then, 300 ms after the dedicated unit 170 detects the communication abnormality in the gaming machine information notification, the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) of the frame control board 120 turns OFF, and the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) and PSI (counting valid signal) of the dedicated unit 170 turn OFF, and the launch of gaming balls in the gaming machine 1 stops and the operation of the counting button 20 becomes invalid.

After that, 100 ms after the transmission of the gaming machine information notification, it is time to send the counting notification, but at this point, the operation of the counting button 20 is invalid (= the counting button 20 is deemed to have been released), so a counting notification with counted balls = 0 (counting serial number m + 2, counted balls = 0, cumulative counted balls = 500) is sent, but due to a communication error, the dedicated unit 170 is unable to receive the counting notification, and the number of balls held by the player stored in the dedicated unit 170 is not updated. At this time, the dedicated unit 170 is waiting for the error in the CU board to be recovered, and waits until the error is recovered by the gaming store clerk, and when the error is recovered, it turns on the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) and PSI (counting valid signal).

(Frame control board and dedicated unit rental notification sequence 1)
Using Figure 64, we will explain the lending notification sequence 1 between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (the case where no communication abnormality occurs between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170).

First, when the player owns 50 gaming balls, he presses the loan button on the dedicated unit 170. After that, when it is time to send the gaming machine information notification, which arrives every 300 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the gaming machine information notification (serial number = n, number of gaming balls = 50) as the first telegram to the dedicated unit 170. 100 ms later, the frame control board 120 sends the counting notification (counting serial number = m, number of counted balls = 0, cumulative number of counted balls = 0) as the second telegram to the dedicated unit 170.

Then, within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends the frame control board 120 a third telegram instructing it to lend game balls (game value) (loan serial number = k, number of loaned balls = 125), and the number of game balls owned by the player stored in the frame control board 120 is added to the number of loaned balls, totaling 175. Within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the dedicated unit 170 a fourth telegram indicating the loan receipt result (loan serial number = k, loaned ball number receipt result = normal), and the dedicated unit 170 confirms the loaned ball number receipt result.

After that, 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, the fifth message is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 (serial number n+1, number of gaming balls 175). After that, messages (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 as in the basic communication sequence with a cycle of 300 ms shown in FIG. 57.

(Frame control board and dedicated unit rental notification sequence 2)
Using Figure 65, we will explain the lending notification sequence 2 between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (a case where a communication abnormality occurs between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170).

First, when the player owns 50 gaming balls, he presses the loan button on the dedicated unit 170. After that, when it is time to send the gaming machine information notification, which arrives every 300 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the gaming machine information notification (serial number = n, number of gaming balls = 50) as the first telegram to the dedicated unit 170. 100 ms later, the frame control board 120 sends the counting notification (counting serial number = m, number of counted balls = 0, cumulative number of counted balls = 0) as the second telegram to the dedicated unit 170.

Then, within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends the frame control board 120 a third telegram instructing it to lend game balls (game value) (loan serial number = k, number of loaned balls = 125), and the number of game balls owned by the player stored in the frame control board 120 is increased by 125 loaned balls, making it 175 balls. Within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the dedicated unit 170 a fourth telegram informing it of the loan receipt result (loan serial number = k, loaned ball number receipt result = normal), but a communication error occurs and the dedicated unit 170 is unable to receive the loan receipt result response, and as it has not received the loan receipt result response 10 ms after the loan notification, it determines that the loan is incomplete.

In addition, 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification is sent, the fifth telegram is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170: gaming machine information notification (serial number = n+1, number of gaming balls = 175). 100 ms after that, the sixth telegram is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170: counting notification (counting serial number = m+1, number of counted balls = 0, cumulative number of counted balls = 0).

Then, within 170 ms from receiving the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 transmits (resends) to the frame control board 120 as the seventh telegram a loan notification (loan serial number = k, number of loaned balls = 125) instructing the loan of the same game balls (game value) as the previously transmitted loan notification. However, since the frame control board 120 has already added the loan amount to the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player based on the loan notification of loan serial number = k, within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 transmits to the dedicated unit 170 as the eighth telegram a loan receipt result response (loan serial number = k, loaned ball number receipt result = abnormal). As a result, the dedicated unit 170 checks the loaned ball number receipt result, and since the serial number matches the previous loan notification, it determines that the previous loan notification has been received by the frame control board 120 and completes the loan that was left incomplete.

After that, 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, the frame control board 120 sends the gaming machine information notification (serial number n+2, number of gaming balls 175) to the dedicated unit 170 as the ninth telegram. After that, messages (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 as in the basic communication sequence with a 300 ms cycle shown in FIG. 57.

(Restoration sequence when the dedicated PIF that connects the frame control board and the dedicated unit is disconnected)
A recovery sequence when a dedicated PIF that connects the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 is disconnected will be described with reference to FIG.

First, when the player owns 1000 gaming balls and it is time to send a gaming machine information notification, which arrives every 300 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the first electronic message to the dedicated unit 170, a gaming machine information notification (serial number = n, number of gaming balls = 1000). 100 ms later, the frame control board 120 sends the second electronic message to the dedicated unit 170, a counting notification (counting serial number = m, number of counted balls = 0, cumulative number of counted balls = 0). Then, within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends a third telegram to the frame control board 120 as a loan notification (loan serial number = k, number of loaned balls = 0), and within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 sends a fourth telegram to the dedicated unit 170 as a loan receipt result response (loan serial number = k, loaned ball number receipt result = normal), and the loaned ball number receipt result is confirmed by the dedicated unit 170.

After that, after 20 ms or more have elapsed since the transmission of the fourth loan receipt result response and 300 ms have elapsed since the transmission of the first gaming machine information notification, the frame control board 120 sends a gaming machine information notification (serial number = n+1, number of gaming balls = 1000) to the dedicated unit 170 as the fifth telegram. Then, when a break in the dedicated PIF is detected, the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) of the frame control board 120 turns OFF, and the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) and PSI (counting enable signal) of the dedicated unit 170 turn OFF, the launch of gaming balls in the gaming machine 1 stops, and the operation of the counting button 20 becomes invalid.

After that, 100 ms after the transmission of the gaming machine information notification, the frame control board 120 sends a counting notification (counting serial number = m + 1, number of counted balls = 0, cumulative number of counted balls = 0) to the dedicated unit 170 as the sixth telegram, but the dedicated unit 170 is unable to receive the counting notification due to the PIF disconnection. Also, 300 ms after the transmission of the previous gaming machine information notification, the frame control board 120 sends a gaming machine information notification (serial number = n + 2, number of gaming balls = 1000) to the dedicated unit 170 as the seventh telegram, but the dedicated unit 170 is unable to receive the gaming machine information notification due to the PIF disconnection. After 100 ms has elapsed, the frame control board 120 sends the eighth telegram, a counting notification (counting serial number = m + 2, number of balls counted = 0, cumulative number of balls counted = 0), to the dedicated unit 170, but the PIF is disconnected, meaning the dedicated unit 170 cannot receive the counting notification.

When the disconnection of the dedicated PIF is restored (the connection is confirmed), the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) of the frame control board 120 turns ON, and the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) and PSI (counting enable signal) of the dedicated unit 170 turn ON, and the launch of game balls is permitted in the gaming machine 1 and operation of the counting button 20 becomes valid.

Then, 300 ms after the previous transmission of the gaming machine information notification, the frame control board 120 transmits the gaming machine information notification (serial number = n + 3, number of gaming balls = 1000) as the ninth telegram to the dedicated unit 170. 100 ms after that, the frame control board 120 transmits the counting notification (counting serial number = m + 3, number of counted balls = 0, cumulative number of counted balls = 0) as the tenth telegram to the dedicated unit 170. Then, within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends an 11th telegram as a loan notification (loan serial number = 0, number of loaned balls = 0) to the frame control board 120, and within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 sends an 11th telegram as a loan receipt result response (loan serial number = k, loaned ball number receipt result = abnormal) to the dedicated unit 170, and the loaned ball number receipt result is confirmed by the dedicated unit 170.

In addition, 300 ms after the previous transmission of the gaming machine information notification, the frame control board 120 transmits a gaming machine information notification (serial number = n + 4, number of gaming balls = 1000) as the 12th telegram to the dedicated unit 170. 100 ms after that, the frame control board 120 transmits a counting notification (counting serial number = m + 4, number of counted balls = 0, cumulative number of counted balls = 0) as the 13th telegram to the dedicated unit 170. Then, within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends a loan notification (loan serial number = k+1, number of loaned balls = 0) to the frame control board 120 as the 14th telegram, and within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 sends a loan receipt result response (loan serial number = k+1, loaned ball number receipt result = normal) to the dedicated unit 170 as the 15th telegram, and the loaned ball number receipt result is confirmed by the dedicated unit 170.

(Frame control board and dedicated unit hole control/false monitoring information notification sequence)
Using Figure 67, the notification sequence of hole control and fraud monitoring information (number of shot balls, returned balls) of the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 will be described.

First, when the player owns 1000 gaming balls and the cumulative number of balls fired stored in the dedicated unit 170 is 100, and the timing for sending a gaming machine information notification arrives every 300 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the gaming machine information notification (serial number = n, number of gaming balls = 1000) as the first telegram to the dedicated unit 170. 90 to 100 ms later, the frame control board 120 sends the counting notification as the second telegram to the dedicated unit 170.

After that, one game ball is released, bringing the number of game balls owned by the player to 999, and within 170 ms of the count notification, a loan notification is sent from the dedicated unit 170 to the frame control board 120 as the third telegram, and within 10 ms thereafter, a loan receipt result response is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as the fourth telegram, and the loan ball receipt result is confirmed by the dedicated unit 170.

Then, when it is time to send the gaming machine information notification, which arrives every 300 ms, the frame control board 120 sends gaming machine installation information reflecting one ball fired (serial number = n+1, number of gaming balls = 999, number of fired balls = 1) to the dedicated unit 170 as the fifth telegram, and the cumulative number of fired balls stored in the dedicated unit 170 becomes 101. 90 to 100 ms later, the frame control board 120 sends a counting notification to the dedicated unit 170 as the sixth telegram.

After that, one returned ball occurs, bringing the number of game balls owned by the player to 1,000, and within 170 ms of the counting notification, a loan notification is sent from the dedicated unit 170 to the frame control board 120 as the seventh telegram, and within 10 ms thereafter, a loan receipt result response is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as the eighth telegram, and the loan ball receipt result is confirmed by the dedicated unit 170.

Then, when it is time to send the gaming machine information notification, which arrives every 300 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the gaming machine installation information (serial number = n+2, number of gaming balls = 1000, number of shot balls = -1) reflecting one returned ball as the ninth telegram to the dedicated unit 170, and the cumulative number of shot balls stored in the dedicated unit 170 becomes 100. 90 to 100 ms later, the frame control board 120 sends the count notification to the dedicated unit 170 as the tenth telegram.

In addition, within 170 ms of the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends a loan notification to the frame control board 120 as the 11th telegram, and within 10 ms thereafter, the frame control board 120 sends a loan receipt result response to the dedicated unit 170 as the 12th telegram, and the dedicated unit 170 confirms the loan ball count receipt result.

After that, when it is time to send the gaming machine information notification, which arrives every 300 ms, the frame control board 120 sends gaming machine installation information (serial number = n + 3, number of gaming balls = 1000) to the dedicated unit 170 as the 13th telegram. After that, one gaming ball is released, bringing the number of gaming balls owned by the player to 999, and 90 to 100 ms after the transmission of the gaming machine installation information, the frame control board 120 sends a counting notification to the dedicated unit 170 as the 14th telegram.

Furthermore, one returned ball occurs, bringing the number of game balls owned by the player to 1,000, and within 170 ms of the counting notification, a loan notification is sent from the dedicated unit 170 to the frame control board 120 as the 15th telegram, and within 10 ms thereafter, a loan receipt result response is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as the 16th telegram, and the loan ball receipt result is confirmed by the dedicated unit 170.

After that, when it is time to send the gaming machine information notification, which arrives every 300 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the gaming machine installation information (serial number = n+4, number of gaming balls = 1000) to the dedicated unit 170 as the 17th telegram. After that, the first to fourth communication sequences are repeated every 300 ms by sending and receiving telegrams in the order of counting notification, loan notification, and loan receipt result response.

(Main processing of the frame control board)
The main processing of the frame control board 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 68. Fig. 68 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the frame control board 120.

First, the frame control CPU 120a prohibits all interrupts in step W1, performs initial CPU settings such as setting internal registers in step W2, and permits access to the RWM area of the frame control RAM 120c in step W3.

In step W4, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a backup flag indicating that power has been restored is saved in the RWM area of the frame control RAM 120c. If the backup flag has not been saved, the process moves to step W8 assuming that this is the first time the power has been turned on. If the backup flag has been saved, the process assumes that power has been restored and calculates the checksum of the RWM area of the frame control RAM 120c in step W5.

The frame control CPU 120a determines in step W6 whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it determines whether the checksum saved in the RWM area of the frame control RAM 120c matches the calculated checksum. If the checksum is not normal (there is an anomaly in the data in the RWM area), the process proceeds to step W9. If the checksum is normal (there is no anomaly in the data in the RWM area), the backup flag and checksum saved in the RWM area are cleared in step W7, and the RWM area is set.

In step W8, the frame control CPU 120a initializes (clears to 0) the game ball count memory area for storing the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, which is set in the RWM area of the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W9, initializes (clears to 0) the areas to be initialized (excluding the game ball count memory area, etc.) in the RWM area of the frame control RAM 120c.

In step W10, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the game ball count clear switch 121 has been operated. If the game ball count clear switch 121 has not been operated, the process moves to step W15 assuming that the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player will not be cleared. If the game ball count clear switch 121 has been operated, the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player stored in the game ball count memory area in the RWM area is cleared.

In step W12, the frame control CPU 120a sets a game ball count clear start command indicating that the game ball count has been cleared in the presentation transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W13, sets a game ball count clear flag indicating that the game ball count has been cleared in the frame control RAM 120c, and generates hole control/fraud monitoring information indicating that the game ball count has been cleared (Bit 3 of "fraud detection state 2" is "1"). This causes the game ball count clear start command to be sent to the presentation control board 130, and processing is performed to execute the game ball count clear notification.

In step W14, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not the game ball count clear flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c. If the game ball count clear flag is not set, the process proceeds to step W16 assuming that an error code corresponding to clearing the game ball count is not to be displayed. If the game ball count clear flag is set, in step W15, the game ball count display 135 displays "0" and the frame control display 125 displays "H67", which is an error code corresponding to clearing the game ball count.

The ball count clear flag set in the frame control RAM 120c will not be cleared until a game ball is shot or the number of game balls is counted, and the error code "H64" will continue to be displayed on the frame control display 125. On the other hand, when a game ball is shot or the number of game balls is counted, the ball count clear flag is cleared and the display of the error code "H64" on the frame control display 125 will cease.

In step W16, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the ball removal switch 122 has been operated. If the ball removal switch 122 has not been operated, the process moves to step W20 assuming that the ball removal operation will not be performed. If the ball removal switch 122 has been operated, in step W17, a ball removal operation in progress designation command indicating that the ball removal operation is in progress is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the ball removal operation in progress designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute the ball removal operation in progress notification.

After step W16, it is not determined whether the ball removal switch 122 is operated or not. In other words, even if the ball removal switch 122 is operated while power is being supplied after the power is turned on, the ball removal operation command is not set to notify the user that the ball removal operation is in progress, the ball removal operation flag is not set to perform the ball removal operation, and the specific information "-" is not displayed.

In step W18, the frame control CPU 120a sets a ball removal operation in progress flag in the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that the ball removal operation is in progress. The ball removal operation in progress flag set here is referenced in the ball removal operation process described below, and the ball removal operation is performed on the condition that the ball removal operation in progress flag is set.

In step W19, the frame control CPU 120a causes the game ball count display 135 and the frame control display 125 to display the specific information "-", indicating that the ball removal operation is in progress. Note that if the frame control display 125 displays the error code "H67", indicating that the game ball count has been cleared, that display takes priority and the specific information "-" is not displayed on the frame control display 125.

In step W20, the frame control CPU 120a starts the CTC (counter timer circuit) to generate a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) and allows all interrupts.

In step W21, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not an RWM clear command has been received from the main control board 110. If an RWM clear command has not been received, the process proceeds to step W25. If an RWM clear command has been received, interrupts are prohibited in step W22. In step W23, the initialization target area (memory area excluding the game ball count memory area and memory area related to display performance information, etc., and mainly memory area related to game machine information (hall control and fraud monitoring information)) in the RWM area of the frame control RAM 120c is initialized (cleared to 0), and in step W24, interrupts are permitted.

The frame control CPU 120a determines in step W25 whether a power outage has occurred. If a power outage has not occurred, the process proceeds to step W21. If a power outage has occurred, interrupts are prohibited in step W26, and in step W27, the output ports are cleared to stop the operation of various drive sources (motors, solenoids, etc.) and various displays (frame control display 125, game ball count display 135, etc.) and to stop the output of the launch permission signal.

In step W28, the frame control CPU 120a calculates the checksum of the frame control RAM 120c and saves it in the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W29, it saves a backup flag indicating that the data in the frame control RAM 120c has been backed up (power has been restored) in the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W30, it performs processing to prohibit RWM access and waits until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, it is possible for the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player to be cleared, provided that the ball removal switch 122 is operated when the power is ON. Therefore, if the number of game balls is stored in the gaming machine 1 when it is shipped from the manufacturing factory to the gaming establishment, or if the player stops playing when only a small number of game balls (for example, one ball) is stored in the gaming machine 1, it is possible for a new player to play, which makes it possible to improve the convenience of the gaming establishment.

In addition, when the number of game balls is cleared, clear information (error code "H64") indicating that the number of game balls has been cleared is displayed on the frame control display 125, which is visible to the gaming store clerk. This allows the gaming store clerk to easily understand that the number of game balls has been cleared, making it possible to improve convenience for the gaming store clerk.

In addition, if the power supply is restarted after the number of game balls has been cleared and the game control state is restored without the launching of game balls or the counting of the number of game balls, the clear information (error code "H64") indicating that the number of game balls has been cleared is displayed again on the frame control display 125 visible to the gaming store staff. Therefore, the evidence that the number of game balls has been cleared will not disappear when the power outage is restored, which makes it possible to improve convenience for gaming store staff.

In addition, even if the game ball count clear switch 121 is operated while power is being supplied after the power is turned on, the game ball count will not be cleared, a game ball count clear notification will not be made, and clear information indicating that the game ball count has been cleared (error code "H64") will not be displayed. Therefore, even if the game ball count clear switch 121 is unintentionally operated while inspecting the gaming machine, no inconvenience will occur, and the convenience of the gaming facility will not be improved.

In addition, if the ball removal switch 122 is operated when the power is ON, a ball removal operation is performed to remove (discharge) the game balls circulated within the gaming machine 1 from the machine. This allows the game balls circulated within the gaming machine 1 to be replaced, preventing the game from being played with dirty game balls and improving the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the ball removal operation is in progress, the frame control display 125 visible to the gaming store clerk and the game ball count display 135 visible to the player display the specific information "- " indicating that the ball removal operation is in progress. This allows the gaming store clerk to easily know that the ball removal operation is in progress, which improves the convenience of the gaming store clerk.

In addition, even if the ball removal switch 122 is operated while power is being supplied after the power is turned on, no notification that the ball removal operation is in progress will be given, the ball removal operation will not be performed, and the specific information "-" indicating that the ball removal operation is in progress will not be displayed. Therefore, even if the ball removal switch 122 is unintentionally operated while inspecting the gaming machine, for example, no inconvenience will occur, and the convenience of the gaming facility will not be improved.

In addition, when an RWM clear command is received from the main control board 110, the memory areas excluding the game ball count memory area and the memory area related to display performance information, etc., and mainly the memory areas related to game machine information (hall control and fraud monitoring information) are initialized (cleared to 0). Therefore, by initializing the game machine information (information sent to the dedicated unit 170) stored in the frame control board 120 when the RWM is cleared by the main control board 110, there is no longer any discrepancy between the game machine information of the main control board 110 and the game machine information of the frame control board 120, and it becomes possible to send game machine information corresponding to the RWM clear of the main control board 110 to the dedicated unit 170.

In addition, the RWM area to be initialized differs depending on whether the checksum is normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the RWM area) or whether an RWM clear command is received from the main control board 110. This makes it possible to initialize the appropriate RWM area depending on the type of initialization factor.

Note that if the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the RWM area), the areas to be initialized except for the game ball count storage area and game ball count clear flag storage area of the frame control RAM 120c are initialized (cleared to 0), but if the checksum is not normal, the game ball count storage area and game ball count clear flag storage area may also be initialized (cleared to 0).

In addition, the main processing determines whether an RWM clear command has been received from the main control board 110 and initializes the RWM area, but in the timer interrupt processing described below, the main processing may determine whether an RWM clear command has been received from the main control board 110 and initialize the RWM area.

(Timer interrupt processing of frame control board)
The timer interrupt processing of the frame control board 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 69. Fig. 69 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing of the frame control board 120. This timer interrupt processing is executed by inputting a clock pulse at a predetermined period (4 ms) from a reset clock pulse generating circuit provided in the frame control unit 120m.

First, in step W100, the frame control CPU 120a evacuates the information stored in the register to the stack area of the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W150, performs a ball removal operation process. Specifically, the lifting and polishing device 95 (ball lift) is driven to lift the game balls collected from the game area 5a into the lifted ball passage, and the lifted game balls are discharged from the game machine through a ball removal port provided midway through the lifted ball passage. The ball removal operation process will be described in detail later.

The frame control CPU 120a performs gaming machine installation information reception processing in step W200. Specifically, when gaming machine installation information transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the frame control CPU 120a performs processing such as transmitting a gaming machine installation information response to the main control board 110. The gaming machine installation information reception processing will be described in detail later.

The frame control CPU 120a performs gaming machine information reception processing in step W250. Specifically, when gaming machine information (hall control/fraud monitoring information) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the frame control CPU 120a performs processing such as updating the gaming machine information stored in the frame control RAM 120c and transmitting a gaming machine information response to the main control board 110. The gaming machine information reception processing will be described in detail later.

The frame control CPU 120a performs a game ball count update process in step W300. Specifically, the number of game balls is subtracted in response to the launch of game balls, and the number of game balls is added in response to the occurrence of foul balls or game balls entering various winning slots. The game ball count update process will be described in detail later.

The frame control CPU 120a performs error control processing in step W350. Specifically, the frame control board 120 detects whether various errors that are monitored have occurred, and performs processing to cause the frame control board 120 to issue an error notification according to the type of error that has occurred (setting an error code to be displayed on the frame control display 125, setting an error notification command to be sent to the performance control board 130, etc.). Details of the error control processing will be described later.

The frame control CPU 120a performs a display performance information calculation process in step W400. Specifically, it counts the number of game balls (number of out balls) that have been shot into the game area 5a, the number of game balls (number of prize balls) that have been awarded to the player as a result of the game, and so on, and performs a process to calculate the display performance information to be displayed on the frame control display 125 based on the counted number of game balls. The display performance information calculation process will be described in detail later.

The frame control CPU 120a performs a gaming machine performance information calculation process in step W450. Specifically, based on the gaming machine information received from the main control board 110 and information on gaming balls counted and managed by the frame control board 120, the frame control CPU 120 performs a process to calculate gaming machine performance information to be sent to the dedicated unit 170 without being displayed on the frame control display 125. The gaming machine performance information calculation process will be described in detail later.

The frame control CPU 120a performs gaming machine information notification processing in step W500. Specifically, it performs processing to transmit (data transfer) to the dedicated unit 170 gaming machine installation information related to the gaming machine 1, gaming machine performance information calculated in the gaming machine performance information calculation processing, and hall control/fraud monitoring information generated from the gaming machine information received from the main control board 110. The gaming machine information notification processing will be described in detail later.

The frame control CPU 120a performs game ball counting processing in step W550. Specifically, based on the player's operation of the counting button 20, the frame control CPU 120a performs processing to transmit (transfer data to) some or all of the game balls owned by the player to the dedicated unit 170. Details of the game ball counting processing will be described later.

The frame control CPU 120a performs a game ball lending process in step W600. Specifically, based on a lending notification sent in response to the player's consumption of the player's valuables (the balance of cash inserted into the dedicated unit) through the player's lending operation on the dedicated unit 170, the frame control CPU 120a adds (lends) the number of game balls notified in the lending notification to the number of game balls owned by the player. Details of the game ball lending process will be described later.

The frame control CPU 120a performs output control processing in step W650. Specifically, it performs processing to transmit commands stored in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c to the performance control board 130, and to output drive data for the ball sending unit 91, launching device 92, lifting and polishing device 95, etc. from the output port.

In step W700, the frame control CPU 120a performs display control processing. Specifically, the frame control display 125 displays the number of game balls owned by the player, the error code set in the error control processing described above, and the performance information (normal base value) calculated in the display performance information calculation processing described above, and also performs processing to display the number of game balls owned by the player on the game ball number display 135. If an error code is not set, the number of game balls and performance information are switched and displayed every 5 seconds (number of game balls → performance information of the current game section → number of game balls → performance information of the previous game section → number of game balls → performance information of the second previous game section → number of game balls → performance information of the third previous game section). If an error code is set, the number of game balls, performance information, and error code are switched and displayed every 5 seconds.

In step W750, the frame control CPU 120a restores to the register the information that was saved in the stack area of the frame control RAM 120c in step W100 described above, and ends this timer interrupt process.

In addition, in the display control process, when the acquisition limit device is activated, the frame control display 125 displays an error code corresponding to the acquisition limit device, the number of game balls, and performance information (normal base value). However, when the acquisition limit device is activated, the performance information (normal base value) may not be displayed and an error code corresponding to the acquisition limit device and the number of game balls may be displayed, or the number of game balls and performance information (normal base value) may not be displayed and an error code corresponding to the acquisition limit device may be displayed.

(Ball removal operation processing of frame control board)
The ball removal operation process of the frame control board 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 70. Fig. 70 is a flow chart showing the ball removal operation process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W151, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not there is a ball removal operation in progress flag in the frame control RAM 120c, which indicates that the ball removal operation is in progress. If there is no ball removal operation in progress flag, the current ball removal operation process is terminated, and if there is a ball removal operation in progress flag, in step W152, a lifting and polishing device drive process is performed. Specifically, a lifting and polishing device 95 (ball lift) is driven to lift the game ball to the lifting ball passage in order to discharge the game ball from the ball removal port located in the lifting ball passage, which is part of the circulation path of the game ball and slopes downward toward the ball sending device, outside the game machine.

In step W153, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not a ball removal lever operation error flag, which will be described later, is present (a ball removal lever operation error is occurring). If the ball removal lever operation error flag is not present, it is assumed that a ball removal lever operation error has not occurred, and processing proceeds to step W154. If the ball removal lever operation error flag is present, it is assumed that a ball removal lever operation error has occurred, and processing proceeds to step W157.

In step W154, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the ON state (a state in which a game ball has been detected) of the lift up switch 94c, which is located in the middle of the lifting ball passage and upstream of the ball removal opening, has continued for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds). If the ON state of the lift up switch 94c has not continued for the predetermined period, processing proceeds to step W156, and if the ON state of the lift up switch 94c has continued for the predetermined period, processing proceeds to step W154 assuming that a ball removal lever operation error has occurred, in which the ball removal lever has not been operated despite the ball removal operation being in progress, causing the ball removal opening to be closed (a state in which balls cannot be discharged).

In step W155, the frame control CPU 120a sets a ball removal lever error flag in the frame control RAM 120c, indicating that a ball removal lever operation error is occurring, and in step W156, sets a ball removal lever operation error start command, indicating that a ball removal lever operation error has occurred, in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, and ends this ball removal operation process. As a result, the ball removal lever operation error start command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start the ball removal lever operation error notification.

In step W157, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the lift up switch 94c, which is located in the middle of the lifting ball passage and upstream of the ball removal port, has turned OFF (a state in which no game balls are detected). If the lift up switch 94c is not in the OFF state, the current ball removal operation process is terminated, and if the lift up switch 94c is in the OFF state, in step W158, the ball removal lever operation error flag is cleared, and in step W159, a ball removal lever operation error end command is set, indicating that the ball removal lever operation error has ended, and the current ball removal operation process is terminated. As a result, the ball removal lever operation error end command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to end the ball removal lever operation error notification.

In this way, when the power is ON (pre-loop processing of the main processing), the ball removal operation for discharging circulating game balls outside the gaming machine 1 is executed based on the fact that the ball removal operation in progress flag is set, until the power is turned OFF. This makes it possible to reliably discharge circulating game balls in the gaming machine 1 outside the gaming machine 1. In addition, since no special operation is required to end the ball removal operation, it is possible to improve convenience for gaming store staff.

In addition, if the lift upper switch 94c remains ON for a predetermined period (30 seconds), in other words, even though the ball removal operation has been performed for the time required to remove all of the circulating game balls outside the gaming machine 1, the lift upper switch 94c detects game balls and the removal of game balls has not been completed, a ball removal lever operation error notification is initiated. This makes it possible to inform the gaming store staff that they have forgotten to operate the ball removal lever or that the ball removal operation has not been completed, thereby improving the convenience of the gaming store staff.

In addition, the ball removal lever operation error notification is terminated when the lift upper switch 94c is turned OFF. Therefore, the ball removal error operation error termination can inform the player that the game balls circulated in the game machine 1 have been discharged outside the game machine 1, which can improve convenience for game store staff.

(Gaming machine installation information reception process of frame control board)
The gaming machine installation information reception process of the frame control board 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 71. Fig. 71 is a flow chart showing the gaming machine installation information reception process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W201, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether gaming machine installation information has been received from the main control board 110. If gaming machine installation information has not been received, the process proceeds to step W210. If gaming machine installation information has been received, the process proceeds to step W202, determining whether the communication number included in the gaming machine installation information is "0 (fixed value)." If the communication number is "0," the process proceeds to step W203. If the communication number is not "0," the gaming machine installation information is discarded as abnormal gaming machine installation information has been received, and the current gaming machine installation information reception process is terminated.

In step W203, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not the frame control RAM 120c contains an internal machine communication abnormality flag indicating that an internal machine communication abnormality error has occurred, which is an abnormality in the communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120. If the internal machine communication abnormality flag is not present, the process proceeds to step W206. If the internal machine communication abnormality flag is present, the internal machine communication abnormality flag is cleared in step W204, and in step W205, an internal machine communication abnormality termination command indicating that the internal machine communication abnormality has ended (resolved) is set in the presentation transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the internal machine communication abnormality termination command to be sent to the presentation control board 130, and processing is performed to terminate the internal machine communication abnormality notification.

In step W206, the frame control CPU 120a generates new gaming machine installation information from the main control chip information (main control chip ID number, main control chip manufacturer code, main control chip product code) specified by the received gaming machine installation information and the frame control chip information (frame control chip ID number, frame control chip manufacturer code, frame control chip product code) stored in the frame control unit 120m, and stores it in the frame control RAM 120c. In step W207, it determines whether or not the frame control RAM 120c has a ball removal operation flag indicating that the ball removal operation is in progress. If there is no ball removal operation flag, the process proceeds to step W209. If there is a ball removal operation flag, in step W208, the main control board 110 is sent a gaming machine installation information response (reception result = ball removal state) indicating that the reception result is a ball removal state, and the current gaming machine installation information reception process ends.

In step W209, the frame control CPU 120a sends a gaming machine installation information response (reception result = reception OK) to the main control board 110 indicating that the reception result is OK (the ball removal operation is not in progress, allowing control of the game progress to begin), and in step W210, the frame control board 120 outputs (ON) a launch permission signal to the launching device to permit the launching of gaming balls, terminating this gaming machine installation information reception process.

In step W211, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the period during which the gaming machine installation information has not been received since the start of the frame control board 120 has reached a predetermined period (e.g., 3 minutes). If the period during which the gaming machine installation information has not been received has not reached the predetermined period, the current gaming machine installation information reception process is terminated. If the period during which the gaming machine installation information has not been received reaches the predetermined period, in step W212, the frame control RAM 120c is set to an internal gaming machine communication abnormality flag, and in step W213, a command to start an internal gaming machine communication abnormality indicating that an internal gaming machine communication abnormality has started (occurred) is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, and the current gaming machine installation information reception process is terminated. As a result, the command to start an internal gaming machine communication abnormality is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start an internal gaming machine communication abnormality notification.

As in this process, a process may be performed to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (e.g., a broken wire) in the communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, but the control program (frame control program) that determines that information (e.g., gaming machine installation information) has not been received from the main control board 110 can also be said to be a detection means that detects whether or not there is an abnormality (e.g., a broken wire) in the communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

In this way, even if gaming machine installation information is received from the main control board 110, if the frame control board 120 is processing the ball removal operation, a gaming machine installation information response (received result = ball removal state) is sent that prevents the main control board 110 from controlling the progress of the game. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences that would occur if the progress of the game was controlled during the ball removal operation.

In addition, when gaming machine installation information is received from the main control board 110, if the frame control board 120 is not processing the ball removal operation, a gaming machine installation information response (reception result = reception OK) is sent, which causes the main control board 110 to control the progress of the game. Therefore, it is possible to have the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 control the progress of the game while ensuring communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

In addition, if gaming machine installation information cannot be received even after a predetermined time (three minutes, which is the maximum startup time of the main control board 110) has elapsed since the start of the frame control board 120, an error notification of an abnormality in communication within the gaming machine is initiated. This makes it possible to inform the gaming store staff that an abnormality in communication within the gaming machine has occurred, preventing communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, and to allow them to take appropriate measures.

In addition, even if the gaming machine internal communication abnormality flag is set and communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 is not taking place, if gaming machine installation information is subsequently received from the main control board 110, the gaming machine internal communication abnormality flag is cleared and the gaming machine internal communication abnormality error notification is terminated. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as no game progress control being performed even though communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 is ensured.

(Gaming machine information reception process of frame control board)
The gaming machine information receiving process of the frame control board 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 72. Fig. 72 is a flowchart showing the gaming machine information receiving process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W251, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not it has received gaming machine information (hall control/fraud monitoring information) scheduled to be received from the main control board 110 in 108 ms. If it has not received gaming machine information, it moves processing to step W261. If it has received gaming machine information, it determines in step W252 whether or not there is an internal gaming machine communication abnormality flag in the frame control RAM 120c (whether an internal gaming machine communication abnormality has occurred). If there is no internal gaming machine communication abnormality flag, it moves processing to step W255. If there is an internal gaming machine communication abnormality flag, it clears the internal gaming machine communication abnormality flag in step W253, and in step W254, it sets an internal gaming machine communication abnormality end designation command indicating that the internal gaming machine communication abnormality has ended in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes a command to specify that the communication abnormality within the gaming machine should be terminated to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to terminate the communication abnormality error notification within the gaming machine.

In step W255, the frame control CPU 120a stores the main control state 1 and the main control state 2 generated by the main control unit 110m (usage area) in the frame control RAM 120c, in step W256, the gaming machine error state generated by the main control unit 110m (usage area) in the frame control RAM 120c, in step W257, the fraud detection state 1 generated by the main control unit 110m (usage area) in the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W258 Then, the number of prize balls for the activation of the game device and the number of prize balls for the continuous activation of the game device generated by the main control unit 110m (usage area) are stored in the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W259, the various game information generated by the main control unit 110m (usage area) is stored in the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W260, a game machine information response (reception result = reception OK) indicating that the reception result is OK (received normally) is sent to the main control board 110, and the current game machine information reception process is terminated.

The various types of gaming information contained in the received gaming machine information (hall control/fraud monitoring information) are the number of winnings at the starting port, the number of winnings at the large winning port due to the operation of the special electric device, the number of winnings at the winning ports, the number of winnings at all starting ports, the number of times a pattern has been determined, the number of jackpots, the number of times a device has been activated (the number of times the large winning port has been opened), the number of times a specific area has been passed, the pulse output from the external terminal board, and performance information status notifications, etc.

In step W261, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the setting is currently being changed or confirmed. If the setting is currently being changed or confirmed, it does not determine whether a communication abnormality has occurred within the gaming machine and ends the current gaming machine information reception process. If the setting is not currently being changed or confirmed, the process proceeds to step W262.

In step W262, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the period during which no information has been received since the previous reception of gaming machine information has reached a predetermined period (e.g., 1000 ms). If the period during which no information has been received has not reached the predetermined period, the current gaming machine information reception process is terminated. If the period during which no information has been received has reached the predetermined period, in step W263, an internal gaming machine communication abnormality flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c indicating that an internal gaming machine communication abnormality has occurred, and in step W264, an internal gaming machine communication abnormality start command indicating that an internal gaming machine communication abnormality has occurred is set in the presentation transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, and the current gaming machine information reception process is terminated. As a result, the internal gaming machine communication abnormality start command is sent to the presentation control board 130, and processing is performed to start the internal gaming machine communication abnormality notification.

In this way, when the gaming machine internal communication abnormality flag is set (a gaming machine internal communication abnormality has occurred), when gaming machine information (hall control, fraud monitoring information, etc.) is received from the main control board 110, the gaming machine internal communication abnormality error notification is terminated. This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences such as an internal gaming machine communication abnormality error notification being issued even when communication with the main control board 110 is normal, and makes it possible to issue an appropriate error notification.

In addition, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the previous reception of gaming machine information during which gaming machine information has not been received (a period during which the main control board 110 can transmit gaming machine information multiple times), an error notification of an abnormality in communication within the gaming machine is started. This allows the gaming store staff to be notified that communication with the main control board 110 is not normal, and allows the gaming store staff to take appropriate action.

In addition, various game information that the frame control board 120 has is updated based on the game machine information (hall control and fraud monitoring information) sent from the main control board 110. Therefore, in the game machine performance information calculation process and game machine information notification process described below, it becomes possible to calculate and send detailed game machine performance information that is in line with the actual game.

In addition, when the setting is currently being changed or checked, the execution of the gaming machine communication abnormality error notification by sending a gaming machine communication abnormality start command from the frame control board 120 is restricted (restricted) without determining whether or not a gaming machine communication abnormality has occurred, and after the setting change or setting check is completed, it is possible to determine whether or not a gaming machine communication abnormality has occurred and to execute the gaming machine communication abnormality error notification by sending a gaming machine communication abnormality start command from the frame control board 120. Therefore, by executing the gaming machine communication abnormality error notification while the setting is being changed or checked, it is not disruptive to the setting change or setting check, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the gaming store staff.

Even during a setting change or setting confirmation, it may be possible to determine whether or not a communication abnormality has occurred within the gaming machine, and to issue an error notification of a communication abnormality within the gaming machine by sending a command to start a communication abnormality within the gaming machine from the frame control board 120. When an error notification of a communication abnormality within the gaming machine is issued during a setting change or setting confirmation, an error notification of a communication abnormality within the gaming machine with a lower notification level (for example, one or two of the following: display of an error code by the frame control display 125, output of an error notification sound from the audio output device 9, and/or emission of an error light by the frame lighting device 10) may be issued.

In addition, even if the gaming machine information (hall control/fraud monitoring information) received from the main control board 110 includes information indicating that the winning limit device is operating, the frame control unit 120m continues to output a launch permission signal to the launching device to allow the launching of gaming balls. However, if the gaming machine information includes information indicating that the winning limit device is operating, the frame control unit 120m may stop outputting a launch permission signal to the launching device to allow the launching of gaming balls.

(Ball count update process on frame control board)
The number of game balls update process of the frame control board 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 73. Fig. 73 is a flowchart showing the number of game balls update process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W301, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the subtraction port switch 91c (a ball has been sent to the launch pad). If a detection signal has not been input from the subtraction port switch 91c, it is assumed that a game ball will not be launched and the process moves to step W303. If a detection signal has been input from the subtraction port switch 91c, it is assumed that a game ball will be launched and in step W302, the number of game balls owned by the player is decremented by one.

In step W303, the frame control CPU 120a judges whether a detection signal has been input from the foul ball switch 93a (a foul ball has been shot but returned without entering the play area 5a). If a detection signal has not been input from the foul ball switch 93a, it is assumed that a foul ball has not been thrown and the process proceeds to step W305. If a detection signal has been input from the foul ball switch 93a, it is assumed that a foul ball has been thrown and the number of play balls owned by the player is increased by 1 in step W304.

In step W305, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a gaming ball has entered the general winning opening 43. Specifically, it determines whether the number of winning openings included in the gaming machine information (hall control/fraud monitoring information) sent from the main control board 110 is 1 or more. If a gaming ball has not entered the general winning opening 43, the process proceeds to step W307. If a gaming ball has entered the general winning opening 43, in step W306, the number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning opening and the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of winnings are added to the number of gaming balls owned by the player.

In step W307, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a gaming ball has entered the large prize opening 50. Specifically, it determines whether the number of large prize openings included in the gaming machine information (hall control/fraud monitoring information) sent from the main control board 110 is 1 or more. If a gaming ball has not entered the large prize opening 50, the process proceeds to step W309. If a gaming ball has entered the large prize opening 50, in step W308, the number of prize balls corresponding to the large prize opening and the number of winning balls are added to the number of gaming balls owned by the player.

In step W309, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a game ball has entered the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47. Specifically, it determines whether the total number of winning start holes included in the gaming machine information (hall control/fraud monitoring information) sent from the main control board 110 is 1 or more. If a game ball has not entered the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47, the current game ball count update process is terminated, and if a game ball has entered the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47, the process proceeds to step W310.

In step W310, the frame control CPU 120a calculates the number of winnings for each type of starting port. Specifically, it identifies the number of winnings at the first starting port 45 from the number of winnings at the starting port included in the gaming machine information (hall control/fraud monitoring information) sent from the main control board 110, and calculates the number of winnings at the second starting port 47 from the number of winnings at the starting port and the number of winnings at all starting ports.

In step W311, the frame control CPU 120a adds the number of prize balls according to the type of start port and the number of prize balls according to the number of winning entries to the number of game balls owned by the player, and ends the current game ball number update process. Specifically, it adds the number of prize balls according to the number of prize balls in the first start port 45 and the number of winning entries into the first start port 45 calculated in step W310, and the number of prize balls in the second start port 47 and the number of winning entries into the second start port 47 calculated in step W310 to the number of game balls owned by the player.

In this way, the number of game balls owned by the player is decremented by one in response to the release of a game ball, and the number of game balls owned by the player is increased by one in response to the occurrence of a foul ball. This allows the number of game balls owned by the player to be appropriately updated taking into account foul balls, making it possible to avoid inconveniences that may cause the player disadvantages.

In addition, the frame control board 120 does not monitor the winnings at the various winning ports, but rather adds the number of prize balls that correspond to the number of winnings at each winning port detected by the main control board 110 to the number of game balls owned by the player. This eliminates the need to connect detection switches installed at the various winning ports to both the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, making it possible to prevent complicated wiring.

In this embodiment, when a ball is sent to the launch pad, the game ball is always launched, so the number of game balls owned by the player is decremented by one when a detection signal is input from the subtraction port switch 91c. However, the launch of a game ball can be detected by the change of the launch pad switch 92a from ON to OFF, and the number of game balls owned by the player can be decremented by one based on this detection.

(Error control processing of frame control board)
The error control processing of the frame control board 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 74. Fig. 74 is a flowchart showing the error control processing of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W351, the frame control CPU 120a executes a severe error notification control process. Specifically, when a severe error with a high security alert level occurs, the frame control CPU 120a executes a process to start an error notification according to the type of severe error. Details of the severe error notification control process will be described later.

The frame control CPU 120a executes a hardware error notification control process in step W352. Specifically, when a hardware error caused by hardware occurs, the frame control CPU 120a starts an error notification corresponding to the type of hardware error, and when the hardware error is resolved, the frame control CPU 120a performs a process to end the error notification corresponding to the type of hardware error. Details of the hardware error notification control process will be described later.

The frame control CPU 120a executes minor error notification control processing in step W353. Specifically, when a minor error occurs, which has a lower security alert level than a major error, the frame control CPU 120a starts an error notification according to the type of minor error, and when the minor error is resolved, the frame control CPU 120a performs processing to end the error notification according to the type of minor error. Details of the minor error notification control processing will be described later.

The frame control CPU 120a executes an error code display setting process in step W354. Specifically, if any of the various errors (notification events) detected by the frame control board 120 is occurring, a setting is made to display the error code (notification event code) corresponding to the highest priority error among the errors occurring on the frame control display 125 according to the priority of the various errors, and if no error detected by the frame control board 120 is occurring, a process is performed to not display an error code on the frame control display 125. Details of the error priority for displaying error codes will be described later.

In step W355, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the frame control unit 120m is outputting a launch permission signal to the launching device to allow the launch of game balls, and whether a launch non-permission error that restricts the launch of game balls is occurring. If the launch permission signal is being output but a launch non-permission error is not occurring, the process proceeds to step W357. If the launch permission signal is being output but a launch non-permission error is occurring, in step W356, the frame control unit 120m stops outputting the launch permission signal to the launching device to allow the launch of game balls. This stops the operation of the ball feeding unit 91 and the launching device 92 (ball feeding that sends game balls to the launch pad and/or launching of game balls from the launch pad), restricting the launch of game balls.

Note that "launch not permitted errors" in the frame control unit 120m include, as will be described in detail below, entrance switch disconnection errors, entrance switch abnormality errors, communication line abnormality errors, glass frame opening errors, inner frame opening errors, ball removal operation in progress, ball removal lever operation errors, and counting process notifications indicating that the number of game balls is less than 1,000.

In step W357, the frame control CPU 120a judges whether the frame control unit 120m is outputting a launch permission signal to the launching device to permit the launch of game balls, and whether a launch non-permission error that restricts the launch of game balls has occurred. If the launch permission signal is not stopped or a launch non-permission error is occurring, the current error control process is terminated, and if the launch permission signal is stopped and a launch non-permission error is not occurring, in step W358, the frame control unit 120m resumes outputting a launch permission signal to the launching device to permit the launch of game balls, and the current error control process is terminated. This allows the launching device to be driven (ball delivery to send game balls to the launch pad and/or launch of game balls from the launch pad), making it possible to launch game balls.

When the output of the launch permission signal is stopped and the drive of the ball feeding unit 91 and launching device 92 is stopped, if the unit operation of the ball feeding unit 91 (the operation of feeding one game ball) has ended but the unit operation of the launching device 92 (the operation of firing one game ball) is in progress, the drive of the ball feeding unit 91 and the launching device 92 is stopped after the unit operation of the launching device 92 has ended. Also, if the unit operation of the ball feeding unit 91 (the operation of feeding one game ball) is in progress, the drive of the ball feeding unit 91 and the launching device 92 is stopped after the unit operation of the ball feeding unit 91 and the subsequent unit operation of the launching device 92 (the operation of firing one game ball) have ended.

In this way, error codes (alert event codes) corresponding to various errors (alert events) detected by the frame control board 120 are displayed on the frame control display 125, which is visible to game store staff. This allows game store staff to be notified of the occurrence of various errors, enabling them to take appropriate action.

In addition, among the various errors (alert events) detected by the frame control board 120, the error codes of errors with higher priority are displayed on the frame control display 125, which is visible to the gaming store staff, in preference to errors with lower priority. This allows the gaming store staff to deal with errors in order of higher priority, making it possible to prevent inconvenience to players.

In addition, error codes (alert event codes) corresponding to various errors (alert events) detected by the frame control board 120 are displayed on the frame control display 125 visible to the gaming store staff, while error codes corresponding to errors detected by the main control board 110 are not displayed on the frame control display 125 visible to the gaming store staff. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of confusing the various errors (alert events) detected by the main control board 110 with the various errors (alert events) detected by the frame control board 120 and being unable to take appropriate action, thereby improving convenience for gaming store staff.

In addition, if a launch prohibition error (alert event) occurs that would cause inconvenience if the game ball were to be launched, the frame control unit 120m stops outputting the launch permission signal that permits the launch of the game ball, thereby stopping the launch of the game ball. This makes it possible to prevent inconvenience (disadvantage to the game facility or player) from occurring if the game ball is launched during the occurrence of a launch prohibition error (alert event).

In addition, when a launch disallowance error (alert event) that makes it inconvenient to launch the game ball is resolved, the frame control unit 120m resumes outputting a launch permission signal that permits the launch of the game ball, thereby permitting the launch of the game ball. This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences (disadvantages to the game facility or the player) that arise from being unable to launch the game ball.

In addition, the error control process is executed regardless of whether or not the ball removal operation is being performed by the frame control board 120. In other words, various error notifications (major errors, hardware errors, minor errors) can be issued whether or not the ball removal operation is in progress. This means that various error notifications are no longer restricted by the execution of the ball removal operation, and various error notifications can be issued to game store staff to take appropriate action.

(Frame control board severe error notification control processing)
75, a description will be given of the severe error notification control processing of the frame control board 120. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the severe error notification control processing of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W351-1, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not unauthorized radio waves have been detected by the radio detection sensor 54a when there is no unauthorized radio wave detection flag in the frame control RAM 120c indicating that an unauthorized radio wave detection error has occurred. If there is an unauthorized radio wave detection flag or no unauthorized radio waves have been detected, processing proceeds to step W351-3. If unauthorized radio waves have been detected when there is no unauthorized radio wave detection flag, in step W351-2, the frame control CPU 120a sets the unauthorized radio wave detection flag in the frame control RAM 120c and sets an unauthorized radio wave detection designation command indicating that an unauthorized radio wave detection error has occurred in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the unauthorized radio wave detection designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start an unauthorized radio wave detection error notification.

In step W351-3, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the winning passage count switch 94a has turned from OFF to ON (whether the game ball has passed through). If the winning passage count switch 94a has not turned from OFF to ON, the process proceeds to step W351-5. If the winning passage count switch 94a has turned from OFF to ON, the number of winning passages that have passed through the winning passage stored in the frame control RAM 120c is updated by +1 in step W351-4.

In step W351-5, the frame control CPU 120a judges whether the difference between the number of winning balls notified by the main control board 110 and the number of passing through the winning passage is equal to or greater than a prescribed number (e.g., 100 balls). If it is not equal to or greater than the prescribed number, it is assumed that a winning ball number abnormality error has not occurred, and processing proceeds to step W351-8. If it is equal to or greater than the prescribed number, it is judged in step W351-6 whether or not there is a winning ball number abnormality flag in the frame control RAM 120c indicating that a winning ball number abnormality error has occurred. If there is a winning ball number abnormality flag, processing proceeds to step W351-8. If there is no winning ball number abnormality flag, it is assumed that a winning ball number abnormality error has occurred, and in step W351-7, a winning ball number abnormality flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c, and a winning ball number abnormality designation command indicating that a winning ball number abnormality error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes a winning ball count abnormality designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start notifying the winning ball count abnormality error.

In step W351-8, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the subtraction calculation port switch 91c has changed from OFF to ON (whether a game ball has passed). If the subtraction calculation port switch 91c has not changed from OFF to ON, the process proceeds to step W351-10, and if the subtraction calculation port switch 91c has changed from OFF to ON, in step W351-9, the number of shot balls stored in the frame control RAM 120c is updated by +1.

In step W351-10, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the foul ball switch 93a has turned from OFF to ON (whether the game ball has passed). If the foul ball switch 93a has not turned from OFF to ON, the process proceeds to step W351-12. If the foul ball switch 93a has turned from OFF to ON, the number of shot balls stored in the frame control RAM 120c is updated by -1 in step W351-11.

In step W351-12, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the winning passage count switch 94a or the non-winning passage count switch 94b, which is provided in the collected ball passage (part of the ball passage unit 94) through which the game balls collected from the game area 5a flow, is ON (whether the game ball has passed through). If the winning passage count switch 94a or the non-winning passage count switch 94b is not ON, the process proceeds to step W351-14. If the winning passage count switch 94a or the non-winning passage count switch 94b is ON, in step W351-13, the total number of returned balls stored in the frame control RAM 120c is updated by +1.

In step W351-14, the frame control CPU 120a judges whether the difference between the number of shot balls and the total number of returned balls is equal to or greater than a specified number (for example, 100 balls). If it is not equal to or greater than the specified number, it is determined that a shot ball number abnormality error has not occurred, and the current severe error notification control process is terminated. If it is equal to or greater than the specified number, it is determined in step W351-15 whether the frame control RAM 120c has a shot ball number abnormality flag indicating that a shot ball number abnormality error has occurred. If the shot ball number abnormality flag is present, the current severe error notification control process is terminated. If the shot ball number abnormality flag is not present, it is determined that a shot ball number abnormality error has occurred, and in step W351-16, the frame control RAM 120c is set to a shot ball number abnormality flag, and a shot ball number abnormality designation command indicating that a shot ball number abnormality error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, and the current severe error notification control process is terminated. As a result, the shot ball number abnormality designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start the shot ball number abnormality error notification.

In this way, when a severe error occurs that requires high security alert, an error notification is initiated according to the type of severe error. This ensures the security of the gaming machine and makes it possible to prevent inconveniences such as losses suffered by gaming establishments or players.

(Frame control board hardware error notification control process)
76, a hardware error notification control process of the frame control board 120 will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the hardware error notification control process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W352-1, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not a break has occurred in the subtraction calculation port switch 91c. If a break has not occurred in the subtraction calculation port switch 91c, processing proceeds to step W352-3. If a break has occurred in the subtraction calculation port switch 91c, in step W352-2, an exit switch break flag is set indicating that an exit switch break error has occurred, and an exit switch break designation command indicating that an exit switch break error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the exit switch break designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start an exit switch break error notification.

In step W352-3, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the subtraction port switch 91c is turned on within a specified time from the operation of the subtraction solenoid 91a. If the subtraction port switch 91c is turned on within the specified time, it is assumed that an exit switch abnormality error has not occurred and processing proceeds to step W352-5. If the subtraction port switch 91c is not turned on within the specified time, in step W352-4, an exit switch abnormality flag indicating that an exit switch abnormality error has occurred is set in the frame control RAM 120c, and an exit switch abnormality designation command indicating that an exit switch abnormality error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the exit switch abnormality designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start an exit switch abnormality error notification.

In step W352-5, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not a break has occurred in the subtraction entrance switch 91b. If a break has not occurred in the subtraction entrance switch 91b, processing proceeds to step W352-7. If a break has occurred in the subtraction entrance switch 91b, in step W352-6, an entrance switch break flag indicating that an entrance switch break error has occurred is set in the frame control RAM 120c, and an entrance switch break designation command indicating that an entrance switch break error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the entrance switch break designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start an entrance switch break error notification.

In step W352-7, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the OFF time of the subtraction entrance switch 91b (the time when the game ball is not detected) has continued for a specified time (for example, 10 seconds). If the OFF time of the subtraction entrance switch 91b has not continued for the specified time, it is assumed that an entrance switch abnormality error has not occurred, and the process proceeds to step W352-9. If the OFF time of the subtraction entrance switch 91b has continued for the specified time, in step W352-8, an entrance switch abnormality flag indicating that an entrance switch abnormality error has occurred is set in the frame control RAM 120c, and an entrance switch abnormality designation command indicating that an entrance switch abnormality error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the entrance switch abnormality designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start an entrance switch abnormality error notification.

In step W352-9, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not a break has occurred in the foul ball switch 93a. If a break has not occurred in the foul ball switch 93a, the process proceeds to step W352-11. If a break has occurred in the foul ball switch 93a, in step W352-10, a foul ball switch break flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that a foul ball switch break error has occurred, and a foul ball switch break designation command indicating that a foul ball switch break error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the foul ball switch break designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start a foul ball switch break error notification.

In step W352-11, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether an abrasive confirmation switch for detecting whether abrasive for polishing the game balls lifted by the lifting and polishing device 95 is installed is OFF (abrasive is not installed). If the abrasive confirmation switch is not OFF, it is assumed that an abrasive not-installed error has not occurred (abrasive is installed), and processing proceeds to step W352-14. If the abrasive confirmation switch is OFF, it is determined in step W352-12 whether the frame control RAM 120c has an abrasive not-installed flag indicating that an abrasive not-installed error has occurred. If there is an abrasive not yet installed flag, processing proceeds to step W352-14. If there is no abrasive not yet installed flag, in step W352-13, an abrasive not yet installed flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c indicating that an abrasive not yet installed error has occurred, and an abrasive not yet installed designation command indicating that an abrasive not yet installed error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, the abrasive not yet installed designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start notifying the abrasive not yet installed error.

In step W352-14, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the processing path switches (winning path count switch 94a, non-winning path count switch 94b, radio wave detection sensor 54a) are not connected. If the processing path switch is not not connected, it is assumed that a path switch unconnected error has not occurred and processing proceeds to step W352-16. If the processing path switch is not connected, in step W352-15, a path switch unconnected designation command indicating that a path switch unconnected error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the path switch unconnected designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start an aisle switch unconnected error notification.

In step W352-16, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the abrasive confirmation switch has been turned from OFF to ON (abrasive has been installed). If the abrasive confirmation switch has not been turned from OFF to ON (abrasive has not been installed), the process proceeds to step W352-18. If the abrasive confirmation switch has been turned from OFF to ON (abrasive has been installed), in step W352-17, the frame control RAM 120c clears the abrasive not installed flag and sets an abrasive not installed end command indicating that the abrasive not installed error has been resolved in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the abrasive not installed end command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to end the abrasive not installed error notification.

In step W352-18, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the processing path switches (winning path count switch 94a, non-winning path count switch 94b, radio wave detection sensor 54a) have changed from an unconnected state to a connected state. If the processing path switch has not changed from an unconnected state to a connected state, processing proceeds to step W352-20. If the processing path switch has changed from an unconnected state to a connected state, in step W352-19, a processing path switch unconnected end command indicating that the processing path switch unconnected error has been resolved is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the processing path switch unconnected end command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to end the processing path switch unconnected error notification.

In step W352-20, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the error release switch 123 has been turned from OFF to ON (operated). If the error release switch 123 has not been turned from OFF to ON, the target error state is not released and the current hardware error notification control process is terminated. If the error release switch 123 has been turned from OFF to ON, in step W352-21, it determines whether the frame control RAM 120c has an exit switch disconnection flag. If there is no exit switch disconnection flag, the process moves to step W352-23. If there is an exit switch disconnection flag, in step W352-22, the exit switch disconnection flag is cleared from the frame control RAM 120c and an exit switch disconnection end designation command indicating that the exit switch disconnection error has been resolved is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the exit switch disconnection end designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to end the exit switch disconnection error notification.

In step W352-23, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not there is an exit switch abnormality flag in the frame control RAM 120c. If there is no exit switch abnormality flag, processing proceeds to step W352-25. If there is an exit switch abnormality flag, in step W352-26, the exit switch abnormality flag is cleared from the frame control RAM 120c, and an exit switch abnormality termination command indicating that the exit switch abnormality error has been resolved is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the exit switch abnormality termination command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to terminate the exit switch abnormality error notification.

In step W352-25, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not there is an entrance switch disconnection flag in the frame control RAM 120c. If there is no entrance switch disconnection flag, processing proceeds to step W352-27. If there is an entrance switch disconnection flag, in step W352-26, the entrance switch disconnection flag is cleared from the frame control RAM 120c, and an entrance switch disconnection end command indicating that the entrance switch disconnection error has been resolved is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the entrance switch disconnection end command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to end the entrance switch disconnection error notification.

In step W352-27, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not there is an entrance switch abnormality flag in the frame control RAM 120c. If there is no entrance switch abnormality flag, processing proceeds to step W352-29. If there is an entrance switch abnormality flag, in step W352-28, the entrance switch abnormality flag is cleared from the frame control RAM 120c, and an entrance switch abnormality termination command indicating that the entrance switch abnormality error has been resolved is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the entrance switch abnormality termination command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to terminate the entrance switch abnormality error notification.

In step W352-29, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not there is a foul ball switch disconnection flag in the frame control RAM 120c. If there is no foul ball switch disconnection flag, the current hardware error notification control process is terminated. If there is a foul ball switch disconnection flag, in step W352-30, the frame control CPU 120a clears the foul ball switch disconnection flag from the frame control RAM 120c, sets a foul ball switch disconnection end command indicating that the foul ball switch disconnection error has been resolved in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, and terminates the current hardware error notification control process. This causes the foul ball switch disconnection end command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to end the foul ball switch disconnection error notification.

In this way, when a hardware error occurs due to the hardware of the gaming machine 1, an error notification is initiated according to the type of hardware error. This allows the gaming store staff to take appropriate action, making it possible to prevent inconveniences such as players being unable to play properly and suffering disadvantages.

In addition, when a hardware error caused by the hardware of the gaming machine 1 has been resolved, the error notification corresponding to the type of hardware error that has been resolved is terminated. This makes it possible to prevent the continued notification of the resolved hardware error from interfering with play, and to reduce the occurrence of inconvenience to gaming establishments or players.

In addition, for certain hardware errors (exit switch disconnection error, exit switch abnormality error, entrance switch disconnection error, entrance switch abnormality error, foul ball switch disconnection error, etc.), it is possible to end the error notification by operating the error release switch 123 after removing the cause of the hardware error. Therefore, it is possible to end the error notification and resume play without turning off the power to the gaming machine 1, improving convenience for gaming establishments and players.

(Frame control board minor error notification control process)
77, a minor error notification control process of the frame control board 120 will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the minor error notification control process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W353-1, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not there is a communication line abnormality flag in the frame control RAM 120c indicating that a communication line abnormality error has occurred in the communication line with the dedicated unit 170, and whether or not the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) input from the dedicated unit 170 is OFF. If there is a communication line abnormality flag or the VL is ON, it is assumed that a communication line abnormality error has not occurred, and the process proceeds to step W353-3. If there is no communication line abnormality flag and the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) is OFF, in step W353-2, the frame control RAM 120c is set to a communication line abnormality flag, and a communication line abnormality designation command indicating that a communication line abnormality error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the communication line abnormality designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start a communication line abnormality error notification.

Incidentally, as in this process, a process may be performed to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (e.g., a disconnection) in the communication between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, and such a control program (frame control program) can also be said to be a detection means for detecting whether or not there is an abnormality (e.g., a disconnection) in the communication between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170.

In step W353-3, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not a response has been received within a specified time from the transmission of the specific message to the dedicated unit 170. If a response is received within the specified time, it is assumed that a communication no-response error has not occurred, in which there is no message response from the dedicated unit 170 (there is an abnormality in communication with the dedicated unit 170), and the process proceeds to step W353-5. If there is no response within the specified time, in step W353-4, a communication line abnormality flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c indicating that a communication no-response error has occurred, and a communication no-response designation command indicating that a communication no-response error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the communication no-response designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start a communication no-response error notification.

In step W353-5, the frame control CPU 120a judges whether the excess sensor 94e is ON during the customer waiting state where the special symbol change display and the jackpot game are not being executed, and during the shooting stop where the game balls are not being shot. If the excess sensor 94e is not ON, it is assumed that an excess ball error, in which the number of game balls circulating in the ball circulation mechanism is excessive, has not occurred, and the process proceeds to step W353-7. If the excess sensor 94e is ON, in step W353-6, an excess ball error flag indicating that an excess ball error has occurred is set in the frame control RAM 120c, and an excess ball error designation command indicating that an excess ball error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, the excess ball error designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start the excess ball error notification.

In step W353-7, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the undercount sensor 94f has turned OFF during a customer waiting state in which no special symbol change display or jackpot play is being performed, and during a launch stop in which no game balls are being launched. If the undercount sensor 94f has not turned OFF, it is assumed that a undercount error in which the number of game balls circulating in the ball circulation mechanism is too low has not occurred, and the process proceeds to step W353-9. If the undercount sensor 94f has turned OFF, in step W353-8, a undercount error flag indicating that a undercount error has occurred is set in the frame control RAM 120c, and a undercount error designation command indicating that a undercount error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the undercount error designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start the undercount error notification.

In step W353-9, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the retry operation of the lifting and polishing device 95 (the operation of driving the lifting mechanism to lift the game ball to the lifted ball passage when the lift down switch 94d located at the downstream end of the recovered ball passage near the entrance of the lifting and polishing device 95 is in the ON state) has failed three consecutive times (the retry operation was performed but the lift up switch 94c located at the upstream end of the lifted ball passage near the exit of the lifting and polishing device 95 did not turn ON for the specified time). If the retry operation has not failed three consecutive times, it is assumed that a lifting mechanism error that prevents the lifting and grinding device 95 from lifting the game ball has not occurred, and the process proceeds to step W353-11. If the retry operation has failed three consecutive times, in step W353-10, a lifting mechanism error flag indicating that a lifting mechanism error has occurred is set in the frame control RAM 120c, and a lifting mechanism error designation command indicating that a lifting mechanism error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, the lifting mechanism error designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start a lifting mechanism error notification.

In step W353-11, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the glass frame open detection switch 31a has changed from ON to OFF (the glass frame 4 has opened). If the glass frame open detection switch 31a has not changed from ON to OFF (the glass frame 4 has not been opened), it is assumed that a glass frame open error that would open the glass frame 4 has not occurred, and the process moves to step W353-13. If the glass frame open detection switch 31a has changed from ON to OFF (the glass frame 4 has been opened), in step W353-12, a glass frame open designation command indicating that a glass frame open error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the glass frame open designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is carried out to start a glass frame open error notification.

In step W353-13, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the inner frame open detection switch 31b has changed from ON to OFF (the inner frame 3 has opened). If the inner frame open detection switch 31b has not changed from ON to OFF (the inner frame 3 has not opened), it is assumed that an inner frame open error that would open the inner frame 3 has not occurred, and processing moves to step W353-15. If the inner frame open detection switch 31b has changed from ON to OFF (the inner frame 3 has opened), in step W353-14, an inner frame open designation command indicating that an inner frame open error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the inner frame open designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start an inner frame open error notification.

In step W353-15, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the number of game balls owned by the player stored in the frame control RAM 120c is "0" and whether the launch pad switch 92a is ON (whether there are game balls on the launch pad). If the number of game balls owned by the player is not "0" or the launch pad switch 92a is not ON (there are no game balls on the launch pad), it is assumed that a launch pad remaining ball error has not occurred, in which the game ball to be launched remains on the launch pad even though the number of game balls owned by the player is "0", and processing proceeds to step W353-17. If the number of game balls owned by the player is "0" and the launch pad switch 92a is ON, in step W353-16, a launch pad remaining ball error flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c indicating that a launch pad remaining ball error has occurred, and a launch pad remaining ball error designation command indicating that a launch pad remaining ball error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, the launch pad remaining ball error designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start the launch pad remaining ball error notification.

In step W353-17, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the number of game balls owned by the player stored in the frame control RAM 120c exceeds a specified number (for example, 40,000). If the number of game balls does not exceed the specified number, it is assumed that an over-number of game balls has not occurred, and processing proceeds to step W353-19. If the number of game balls exceeds the specified number, in step W353-18, a game ball over-number flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c indicating that an over-number of game balls has occurred, and an over-number of game balls designation command indicating that an over-number of game balls has occurred is set in the presentation transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the over-number of game balls designation command to be sent to the presentation control board 130.

In step W353-19, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not there is a communication line abnormality flag in the frame control RAM 120c indicating that a communication line abnormality error has occurred, and whether or not the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) input from the dedicated unit 170 is ON. If there is no communication line abnormality flag or the VL is OFF, the communication line abnormality error is assumed not to have been resolved, and processing proceeds to step W353-21. If there is a communication line abnormality flag and the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) is ON, in step W353-20, the communication line abnormality flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c is cleared, and a communication line abnormality termination command indicating that the communication line abnormality error has been resolved is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the communication line abnormality termination command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to terminate the communication line abnormality error notification.

In step W353-21, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not there is a communication line abnormality flag in the frame control RAM 120c indicating that a communication no response error has occurred, and whether or not a message has been received from the dedicated unit 170 (communication with the dedicated unit 170 is normal). If there is no communication no response flag or no message has been received, it is assumed that the communication no response error has not been resolved, and processing proceeds to step W353-23. If there is a communication line abnormality flag and a message has been received from the dedicated unit 170, in step W353-22, the communication no response flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c is cleared, and a communication no response end command indicating that the communication no response error has been resolved is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the communication no response end command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to end the communication no response error notification.

In step W353-23, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether there is an excess ball error flag in the frame control RAM 120c and whether the excess sensor 94e has changed from ON to OFF (the number of game balls in the ball circulation mechanism has decreased to the appropriate number). If there is no excess ball error flag or the excess sensor 94e has not changed from ON to OFF, the excess ball error is deemed not to have been resolved and processing proceeds to step W353-25. If there is an excess ball error flag and the excess sensor 94e has changed from ON to OFF, in step W353-24, the excess ball error flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c is cleared and an excess ball error termination command indicating that the excess ball error has been resolved is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the excess ball error termination command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to terminate the excess ball error notification.

In step W353-25, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether there is a too few balls error flag in the frame control RAM 120c and whether the too few balls sensor 94f has changed from OFF to ON (the number of game balls in the ball circulation mechanism has increased to the appropriate number). If there is no too few balls error flag or the too few balls sensor 94f has not changed from OFF to ON, it is assumed that the too few balls error has not been resolved and processing proceeds to step W353-27. If there is an excess balls error flag and the too few balls sensor 94f has changed from OFF to ON, in step W353-26, the too few balls error flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c is cleared and a too few balls error end command indicating that the too few balls error has been resolved is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the too few balls error end command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to end the too few balls error notification.

In step W353-27, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the glass frame open detection switch 31a has changed from OFF to ON (the glass frame 4 has entered a closed state). If the glass frame open detection switch 31a has not changed from OFF to ON, the process proceeds to step W353-29. If the glass frame open detection switch 31a has changed from OFF to ON, the process assumes that the glass frame 4 has entered a closed state, and in step W353-28, a glass frame open end designation command indicating that the glass frame open error has ended is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the glass frame open end designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to end the glass frame open error notification.

In step W353-29, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the inner frame open detection switch 31b has changed from OFF to ON (the inner frame 3 has become closed). If the inner frame open detection switch 31b has not changed from OFF to ON, processing proceeds to step W353-31. If the inner frame open detection switch 31b has changed from OFF to ON, the inner frame 3 is deemed to have become closed, and in step W353-30, an inner frame open end designation command indicating that the inner frame open error has ended is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the inner frame open end designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to end the inner frame open error notification.

In step W353-31, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not the frame control RAM 120c has a launch pad remaining ball error flag and the launch pad switch 92a is OFF (there are no game balls on the launch pad). If there is no launch pad remaining ball error flag or the launch pad switch 92a is not OFF, the process proceeds to step W353-33. If there is a launch pad remaining ball error flag and the launch pad switch 92a is OFF, in step W353-32, the launch pad remaining ball error flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c is cleared and a launch pad remaining ball error end command indicating that the launch pad remaining ball error has been resolved is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the launch pad remaining ball error end command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to end the launch pad remaining ball error notification.

In step W353-33, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the frame control RAM 120c has an over-number of game balls flag and whether the number of game balls owned by the player stored in the frame control RAM 120c has fallen below the specified number (40,000). If there is no over-number of game balls flag or the number of game balls exceeds the specified number, the minor error notification control process is terminated. If there is an over-number of game balls flag and the number of game balls has fallen below the specified number, the frame control CPU 120a clears the over-number of game balls flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c, sets an over-number of game balls end command indicating that the over-number of game balls has been resolved in the presentation transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, and terminates this minor error notification control process. This causes the over-number of game balls end command to be sent to the presentation control board 130.

In this way, when a minor error occurs that requires a low level of security, an error notification is initiated according to the type of minor error. This allows game store staff to take appropriate action, making it possible to prevent inconvenience to game stores or players.

In addition, when a minor error with a low security level is resolved, the error notification corresponding to the type of minor error that has been resolved is terminated. This makes it possible to prevent the continued notification of a resolved error from interfering with play, and to reduce inconvenience to game establishments and players.

(Display contents and display priority of frame control display when various alarm events occur)
Using Figure 78, the display contents and display priority order of the frame control display 125 when various notification events (notification events such as errors) occur will be described.

The table shown in FIG. 78 includes the priority order for each type of notification event, the type of notification event, the detection board (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that detects the occurrence of a notification event, the main control areas used to perform notifications (area used by main control unit 110m, outside the area used by main control unit 110m, area used by frame control unit 120m, outside the area used by frame control unit 120m), error code display on the game ball count display 135, error code display on the frame control display 125, operation restrictions (action of sending balls to the launch pad, action of launching game balls, control of game progress), and the state of the dedicated unit 170 during the occurrence of a notification event (playback action based on the operation of the loan button of the dedicated unit 170). The following are associated with the system: loan of game balls by the technician within the amount of the deposited balance; replay within the number of game balls owned by the player that is stored in association with the identification information of the member card inserted by the player based on the operation of the replay button on the dedicated unit 170; counting from the number of game balls stored on the frame control board 120 based on the operation of the counting button 20 on the gaming machine 1 (storing the number of game balls associated with the identification information of the member card or visitor card); card operations (insertion of the member card or visitor card into the dedicated unit 170, and return of the member card or visitor card based on the operation of the return button on the dedicated unit 170); and whether or not control is possible regarding deposits into the dedicated unit 170).

For example, "clearing the number of game balls" has the highest priority, and when the frame control board 120 detects the occurrence of a game ball clear, and when detecting or announcing the occurrence of a game ball clear, the area used by the frame control unit 120m is used primarily, with the area outside the area used by the frame control unit 120m used as an auxiliary, the game ball count display 135 does not display a game ball clear error code, and the frame control display 125 displays the error code "H67". When the game ball count is cleared, the operation restrictions include ball feeding operation, firing operation, and game progress control, and the state of the dedicated unit 170 allows control of loan/replay, counting, card operation (insertion/return), and deposit.

In addition, when a notification event occurs that allows ball forwarding operations, firing operations, and game progress control, such as "clearing the game ball count," or when a corresponding notification is being executed, if a notification event occurs simultaneously or in parallel that restricts (restricts) one or more of the ball forwarding operations, firing operations, and game progress control, the corresponding operations among the ball forwarding operations, firing operations, and game progress control are restricted (restricted).

In addition, when a notification event occurs in which loan/replay, counting, card operation, or deposit is permitted, such as "clearing the number of game balls," or even when a corresponding notification is being executed, if a notification event occurs simultaneously or in parallel in which one or more of the controls relating to loan/replay, counting, card operation, or deposit are restricted (regulated), the corresponding controls relating to loan/replay, counting, card operation, or deposit are restricted (regulated).

In this way, the "clear number of game balls" function, which clears the number of game balls owned by the player, has a higher priority than the various notification events detected by the main control board 110. This makes it possible for the frame control display 125 to properly notify (display an error code) the player that the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, which is the most important thing to the player, has been cleared.

In addition, among the various notification events detected by the frame control board 120, the "clear number of game balls" event, which clears the number of game balls owned by the player, has the highest priority. This makes it possible for the frame control display 125 to properly notify (display an error code) the player that the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, which is the most important thing to the player, has been cleared.

In addition, when "game ball count clear" is performed, an error code is displayed on the frame control display 125 that is visible to game store staff, but when a game ball is released or the number of game balls owned by the player is counted, the display of the error code corresponding to "game ball count clear" on the frame control display 125 is terminated. This makes it possible to end the display of the game ball count clear error code by ensuring that the player has performed a loan operation or played a game, making it possible to prevent the game ball count from being cleared unnecessarily.

In addition, when "game ball count clear" is performed, an error code is displayed on the frame control display 125 that is visible to game store staff, but if the power is restored after the power outage without firing or counting having been performed after "game ball count clear" has been performed, the error code is displayed again on the frame control display 125. Therefore, evidence that the game ball count has been cleared is not erased by the power outage being restored, which makes it possible to improve convenience for game store staff.

In addition, when various notification events detected by the main control board 110 occur, an error code is not displayed on the frame control display 125 mounted on the frame control board 120, whereas when various notification events detected by the frame control board 120 occur, an error code is displayed on the frame control display 125 mounted on the frame control board 120. Therefore, various notification events detected by the main control board 110 and various notification events detected by the frame control board 120 can be dealt with separately, which improves convenience for game store staff.

In addition, when the "ball removal operation is in progress," an error code ("-") is displayed not only on the frame control display 125 that is provided on the rear side of the gaming machine 1 and visible to game store staff, but also on the game ball count display 135 that is provided on the front side of the gaming machine 1 and visible to players. Therefore, even if the inner frame is closed during the ball removal operation, it is possible to know that the ball removal operation is in progress, which improves convenience for game store staff.

In addition, even for various notification events (notification events) detected by the frame control board 120, for certain notification events (ball removal lever operation error, launch pad remaining ball error, counting process notification, counting process completion) that do not directly disadvantage the player, the performance control board 130 will issue an event notification, but the frame control display 125 will not display an error code (it is regulated or limited). Therefore, by not issuing excessive event notifications, it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as causing game store staff to panic.

In addition, among the various notification events, when a specific notification event occurs that would cause inconvenience if game balls were to be released (settings change, settings confirmation, RWM abnormal error, acquisition limit device activation, entrance switch disconnection error, entrance switch abnormal error, communication line abnormal error, glass frame opening error, inner frame opening error, ball removal operation in progress, ball removal lever operation error, etc.), the ball feeding operation and/or launching operation is not executed (restricted/restricted). This makes it possible to prevent inconvenience caused by game balls being released when a specific notification event occurs.

In addition, among the various notification events, when a specific notification event (setting change, setting confirmation, RWM abnormal error, acquisition limit device activation, ball removal operation in progress, ball removal lever operation error, etc.) occurs that would cause inconvenience if game progress control is performed, game progress control is not executed (it is restricted or limited). This makes it possible to prevent inconvenience from occurring if game progress control is performed when a specific notification event occurs.

In addition, when a counting process notification occurs, if the player owns 1000 or more game balls, the ball forwarding operation and the firing operation are executed, but if the player owns less than 1000 game balls, the ball forwarding operation and the firing operation are not executed (are restricted or limited). This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as the counting process not being able to end normally due to the ball forwarding operation or the firing operation clashing with the counting process.

In addition, when a notification event that allows ball forwarding or firing operations occurs or is being notified (for example, a notification event such as the number of game balls being cleared), if a notification event that restricts the ball forwarding or firing operations occurs (for example, an acquisition limit device is activated, a communication line abnormality error, a glass frame opening error, or an inner frame opening error notification event), regardless of whether it has a lower or higher priority, the ball forwarding or firing operations are not executed (they are restricted or restricted). This makes it possible to restrict the ball forwarding or firing operations at an appropriate time, making it possible to prevent inconveniences caused by the execution of the ball forwarding or firing operations. In addition, the occurrence of a high-priority notification event (notification event) will not invalidate the restriction on the ball forwarding or firing operations due to a low-priority notification event (notification event).

In addition, when an alarm event (alert event) that permits lending/replay occurs or is being notified, if an alarm event (alert event) that restricts lending/replay occurs, lending/replay is restricted (regulated/restricted). This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences caused by the execution of lending/replay. Furthermore, the occurrence of an alarm event (alert event) with a high priority does not invalidate the restriction on lending/replay due to an alarm event (alert event) with a low priority, making it possible to operate the dedicated unit 170 appropriately.

In addition, when an alarm event (alert event) that permits card operation (insertion/return) occurs or is being notified, if an alarm event (alert event) that restricts card operation (insertion/return) occurs, regardless of whether it has a lower or higher priority, card operation (insertion/return) is restricted. This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences caused by manufacturer operations being performed. Furthermore, the occurrence of an alarm event (alert event) with a higher priority does not invalidate the restriction on card operation (insertion/return) due to an alarm event (alert event) with a lower priority, making it possible to operate the dedicated unit 170 appropriately.

In addition, when an alarm event (alert event) that allows deposits occurs, regardless of whether the alarm event (alert event) has a higher or lower priority than the alarm event (alert event) that allows deposits, the deposits are restricted. This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences caused by deposits being made. In addition, the occurrence of an alarm event (alert event) with a higher priority does not invalidate the deposit restriction due to an alarm event (alert event) with a lower priority, allowing the dedicated unit 170 to operate appropriately.

In addition, the priority of "clear number of game balls" may be placed below "change settings", or below "check settings", or below "power on (clear RWM)", or below "power restoration", or below "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)", or below "fraud detection 2 (abnormal winning error)", or below "fraud detection 1 (magnet detection error)", or below "win limit device activated", or below "unauthorized radio wave detection error", or below "abnormal number of winning balls error", or below "abnormal number of fired balls error", or below "abnormal communication error within game machine", or below "exit switch disconnection error", or below "exit switch abnormal error". Or it could be placed under "Entrance switch disconnected error", or under "Entrance switch abnormal error", or under "Foul ball switch disconnected error", or under "Communication line abnormal error", or under "No response communication error", or under "Too many balls error", or under "Too few balls error", or under "Lifting mechanism error", or under "Abrasive not installed error", or under "Aisle switch not connected error", or under "Glass frame opening error", or under "Inner frame opening error", or under "Ball removal operation in progress", or under "Ball removal lever operation error", or under "Ball remaining on launch pad error".

Also, the frame control display 125 may display error codes for various notification events (notification events) detected by the main control board 110. In this case, the error codes for various notification events (notification events) detected by the main control board 110 may be set to "PXXX" so that they can be distinguished from the error codes ("HXXX") for various notification events (notification events) detected by the frame control board 120. Specifically, "P64" may be displayed for "setting change", "P65" for "setting confirmation", "P66" for "power on (RWM clear)", "P67" for "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)", "P68" for "fraud detection 2 (abnormal winning error)", "P69" for "fraud detection 1 (magnet detection error)", and "P70" for "winning limit device activated".

In addition, when the winning limit device is activated, an error code ("P70") indicating that the winning limit device has been activated may be displayed on the frame control display 125 visible to game store staff and/or the game ball count display 135 visible to the player. When displaying an error code indicating that the winning limit device has been activated on the frame control display 125, the number of game balls → performance information → error code may be displayed repeatedly, and when displayed on the game ball count display 135, the number of game balls → error code may be displayed repeatedly, or the error code may be displayed (the number of game balls → error code may be displayed repeatedly or only the error code) only when the number of game balls owned by the player is "0" (when the number of game balls becomes "0" after the game balls are fired, or when the number of game balls is counted and the number of game balls becomes "0")

In addition, during the ball removal operation, instead of displaying the same error code ("-") on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135, different error codes may be displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135, or an error code may be displayed on only one of the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135.

In addition, when an "entrance switch disconnection error" or an "entrance switch abnormality error" occurs, the game ball launching operation may not be executed, and when an "inner frame opening error" occurs, the ball feeding operation or launching operation may be executed.

In addition, when the "counting process notification" occurs and the number of game balls owned by the player is 1000 or more, rather than allowing the ball feeding or firing operation, the number may be more than 1000 or less than 1000. However, if it is less than 1000, it is recommended to set it to 250 or more, which is the number that can be counted with one counting operation (single press).

In addition, when a "counting process notification" occurs, ball feeding and firing operations may not be performed regardless of the number of game balls the player owns.

(Display performance information calculation process for frame control board)
The display performance information calculation process of the frame control board 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 79. Fig. 79 is a flowchart showing the display performance information calculation process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W401, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not the current game state is normal. If the current game state is not normal, the process proceeds to step W405. If the current game state is normal, the process proceeds to step W402 to determine whether or not the game information has been updated. Specifically, in step W259 of the game machine information reception process described above, the process proceeds to determine whether or not various game information has been updated based on the game machine information (hall control and fraud monitoring information) received from the main control board 110. If the game information has not been updated, the process proceeds to step W405. If the game information has been updated, the process proceeds to step W403.

In step W403, the frame control CPU 120a calculates the current number of prize balls from the game information (the number of prizes won at the various prize ports and the number of prize balls at the various prize ports), and in step W404, adds the current number of prize balls to the normal prize ball counter, which counts the number of prize balls during normal game mode. For example, if there is one prize at the first start port 45 and the number of prize balls at the first start port 45 is three, it calculates that there were 1 x 3 = 3 prize balls, and adds these three to the normal prize ball counter.

The frame control CPU 120a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the winning passage count switch 94a or the non-winning passage count switch 94b (an out ball that has passed through the play area 5a has been detected). If a detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step W409. If a detection signal has been input, in step W406, the total out counter, which counts the number of out balls in all play states in the current play section, is incremented by 1.

The frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not the current game state is normal. If the current game state is not normal, the process proceeds to step W409. If the current game state is normal, the process proceeds to step W408, where the normal out counter, which counts the number of out balls during the normal game state, is incremented by one.

In step W409, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the section counter for counting which game section is currently in is the first game section value (0), indicating that it is the first game section. If it is not the first game section, the process proceeds to step W411 assuming that the current section is a second or subsequent game section for which the display performance information (normal base value) is to be calculated, and if it is the first game section, the process proceeds to step W410 assuming that the current section is a first game section for which the display performance information is not to be calculated.

In step W410, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the total number of outs in the current play section indicated by the total number of outs counter is equal to or greater than the first section update value (300). If the total number of outs is not equal to or greater than the first section update value, the current display performance information calculation process is terminated, and if the total number of outs is equal to or greater than the first section update value, the process proceeds to step W416.

In step W411, the frame control CPU 120a calculates a normal base value, which is the display performance information to be displayed on the frame control display 125, and rounds it off to the first decimal place. The "normal base value" is the ratio (proportion) of the amount of game value that is to be awarded in a game during the normal game state (the number of prize balls that are to be awarded as prize balls) to the amount of game value used in a game during the normal game state (the number of out balls that have passed through the game area 5a), and is calculated by the formula "(the number of prize balls during the normal game state, which is the number of prize balls ÷ the number of out balls during the normal game state, which is the number of out balls) × 100".

In step W412, the frame control CPU 120a saves the calculated normal base value in the first area of the base memory area (first to fourth areas) set in the frame control RAM 120c. The "base memory area" is a memory area for storing normal base values in four play intervals, and is composed of a first area for storing the normal base value in the current play interval, a second area for storing the normal base value in the play interval one interval before, a third area for storing the normal base value in the play interval two intervals before, and a fourth area for storing the normal base value in the play interval three intervals before.

In step W413, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the total number of outs in the current play section indicated by the total out counter is equal to or greater than the second section update value (60,000). If the total number of outs is not equal to or greater than the second section update value, the play section is not updated and the current display performance information calculation process is terminated. If the total number of outs is equal to or greater than the second section update value, the play section is updated and processing proceeds to step W414.

The game zones from the second game zone onwards are divided when the total number of outs reaches 60,000. This number of 60,000 is a number that can guarantee approximately one day's operation of the gaming machine 1, which shoots 100 game balls per minute. Therefore, the game zone is updated when the gaming machine 1 has been operating for approximately one day.

In step W414, the frame control CPU 120a shifts down the contents of the first to third areas of the base memory area by one, and in step W415, it clears the first area of the base memory area to 0. As a result, the normal base values stored in each area are stored as the normal base values for the previous play interval, and the normal base values for the current play interval are reset, preparing to move to the next play interval.

In step W416, the frame control CPU 120a adds "1" to the section counter to update the game section, and in step W417, it clears to 0 the total number of outs indicated by the total number of outs counter, the number of normal prize balls indicated by the normal prize ball count counter, and the number of normal outs indicated by the normal outs counter, and then performs processing to transition to the next game section, and ends the current display performance information calculation processing.

In this way, a normal base value (a type of historical information) is calculated and stored as performance information for each game section from the number of normal outs and the number of normal payouts for each game section. This makes it possible to provide information for appropriately grasping (evaluating) the actual performance of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, the calculation of the normal base value is not performed in the first game section. This means that unreliable information that is influenced by operational checks during pre-shipment inspections of the gaming machine (checks of the operation of the detection switches for various winning ports, the winning passage count switch 94a, and the non-winning passage count switch 94b, which are performed by shooting and handling game balls) will not be provided (displayed on the frame control display 125), making it possible to avoid inconveniences such as misunderstanding the actual performance of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, the normal base value is calculated from the second play section onwards. Therefore, a highly reliable normal base value that is free from the influence of pre-shipment inspection of the gaming machine can be displayed on the frame control display 125, making it possible to provide highly reliable information for accurately grasping the actual performance of the gaming machine 1.

Although the performance information is calculated regardless of whether the acquisition limit device is operating or not, the performance information may not be calculated while the acquisition limit device is operating, or the performance information may be calculated but the calculated performance information may not be displayed on the frame control display 125.

(Frame control board gaming machine performance information calculation process)
The gaming machine performance information calculation process of the frame control board 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 80. Fig. 80 is a flowchart showing the gaming machine performance information calculation process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W451, the frame control CPU 120a performs a process to calculate the total number of shot balls. Specifically, the process calculates the total number of shot balls, which is the total number of game balls that have been shot into the game area 5a since the establishment of the counting start condition to the present, based on the game machine information (game information from the hall control and fraud monitoring information) received from the main control board 110 and information on the game balls counted and managed by the frame control board 120.

In step W452, the frame control CPU 120a performs a process to calculate the total number of acquired game balls. Specifically, the process calculates the total number of acquired game balls, which is the total number of prize balls that have been awarded to the player since the establishment of the counting start condition to the present, based on the gaming machine information (game information from the hall control and fraud monitoring information) received from the main control board 110 and information on the game balls counted and managed by the frame control board 120.

The frame control CPU 120a performs a ball discharge rate calculation process in step W453. Specifically, the frame control CPU 120a performs a process to calculate the ball discharge rate, which is the ratio (proportion) of the total number of acquired game balls calculated in step W452 described above to the total number of shot balls calculated in step W451 described above, using the formula (total number of acquired game balls ÷ total number of shot balls) × 100.

In step W454, the frame control CPU 120a performs a process to calculate the number of game balls acquired per minute. Specifically, the process calculates the number of game balls acquired per minute, which is the total number of prize balls awarded to the player in the most recent minute, based on the game machine information (game information from the hall control and fraud monitoring information) received from the main control board 110 and information on the game balls counted and managed by the frame control board 120.

In step W455, the frame control CPU 120a performs a role ratio calculation process. Specifically, based on the gaming machine information (game information from the hall control and fraud monitoring information) received from the main control board 110 and information on the gaming balls counted and managed by the frame control board 120, the frame control CPU 120a performs a process to calculate the role ratio, which is the ratio of the number of gaming balls acquired based on the operation of various roles (winning the second start hole 47 opened in the auxiliary game, winning the big winning hole 50 opened in the big win game) to the total number of acquired gaming balls described above.

In step W456, the frame control CPU 120a performs a continuous role ratio calculation process. Specifically, based on the gaming machine information (game information from the hall control and fraud monitoring information) received from the main control board 110 and information on the gaming balls counted and managed by the frame control board 120, the frame control CPU 120a performs a process to calculate the continuous role ratio, which is the ratio of the number of gaming balls acquired based on the operation of the continuous role (winning the big winning slot 50 opened in the big win game) to the total number of acquired gaming balls described above.

In step W457, the frame control CPU 120a performs a process for calculating the number of jackpots. Specifically, the frame control CPU 120a performs a process for calculating the number of jackpots, which is the total number of jackpot games that have been played since the establishment of the counting start condition to the present, based on the gaming machine information (game information from the hall control and fraud monitoring information) received from the main control board 110.

In step W458, the frame control CPU 120a performs a maximum ball output calculation process and ends the current game machine performance information calculation process. Specifically, based on the game machine information (game information from the hall control and fraud monitoring information) received from the main control board 110 and information on game balls counted and managed by the frame control board 120, the frame control CPU 120 performs a process to calculate the maximum ball output, which is the largest value among the difference balls where the total number of winning balls exceeds the total number of balls fired from a certain point in time (for example, the start of a jackpot game).

In this way, the frame control board 120 calculates gaming machine performance information that is not displayed on the frame control display 125 but is sent to the dedicated unit 170. This makes it possible to provide highly reliable information that allows the actual performance of the gaming machine 1 to be accurately understood.

(Gaming machine information notification process of frame control board)
The gaming machine information notification process of the frame control board 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 81. Fig. 81 is a flow chart showing the gaming machine information notification process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W501, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the main control state (main control state 1, main control state 2) or the game information stored in the frame control RAM 120c has been updated since the last notification of the game machine information to the dedicated unit 170. If the main control state or the game information has not been updated, the process proceeds to step W508, and if the main control state or the game information has been updated, the process proceeds to step W502.

In step W502, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether 300 ms have elapsed since the start of the frame control board 120 or the timing of the previous transmission of the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification. If 300 ms have not elapsed, it is not the timing to transmit the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification and the process proceeds to step W504. If 300 ms have elapsed, it is the timing to transmit the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification and in step W503, the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification is transmitted to the dedicated unit 170.

In step W504, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether 60 s (60 seconds) have passed since the start of the frame control board 120 or the timing of the previous transmission of the gaming machine installation information notification. If 60 s have not passed, it is not the timing to transmit the gaming machine installation information notification and the process proceeds to step W506. If 60 s have passed, it is the timing to transmit the gaming machine installation information notification and in step W505, the gaming machine installation information notification is transmitted to the dedicated unit 170.

In step W506, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether 180 s (180 seconds) have passed since the start of the frame control board 120 or the timing of the previous transmission of the gaming machine performance information notification. If 180 s have not passed, it is not the timing to transmit the gaming machine performance information notification and the current gaming machine information notification process is terminated. If 180 s have passed, it is the timing to transmit the gaming machine performance information notification and in step W507, the gaming machine performance information notification is transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 and the current gaming machine information notification process is terminated.

In step W508, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether 60 s (60 seconds) have passed since the start of the frame control board 120 or the timing of the previous transmission of the gaming machine installation information notification. If 60 s have not passed, it is not the timing to transmit the gaming machine installation information notification and the process proceeds to step W510. If 60 s have passed, it is the timing to transmit the gaming machine installation information notification and in step W509, the gaming machine installation information is transmitted to the dedicated unit 170.

In step W510, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether 180 s (180 seconds) have passed since the start of the frame control board 120 or the timing of the previous transmission of the gaming machine performance information notification. If 180 s have not passed, it is not the timing to transmit the gaming machine performance information notification and the current gaming machine information notification process is terminated. If 180 s have passed, it is the timing to transmit the gaming machine performance information notification and in step W511, the gaming machine performance information is transmitted to the dedicated unit 170.

In step W512, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether 300 ms have passed since the start of the frame control board 120 or the timing of the previous transmission of the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification. If 300 ms have not passed, it is not the timing to transmit the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification and the process proceeds to step W512. If 300 ms have passed, it is the timing to transmit the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification and in step W513, it transmits the hall control/fraud monitoring information to the dedicated unit 170 and ends the current gaming machine information notification process.

In this way, the order in which the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification, gaming machine installation information notification, and gaming machine performance information notification is sent is switched between cases where the main control state (main control state 1, main control state 2) or gaming information stored in the frame control RAM 120c has been updated since the last gaming machine information notification to the dedicated unit 170, and cases where the main control state (main control state 1, main control state 2) or gaming information stored in the frame control RAM 120c has not been updated since the last gaming machine information notification to the dedicated unit 170. This makes it possible to send various information notifications to the dedicated unit 170 in an appropriate order depending on whether the main control state or gaming information has been updated.

In addition, the gaming machine installation information received from the main control board 110 (main control chip ID number, main control chip manufacturer code, main control chip product code) is sent to the dedicated unit 170 every predetermined time (60 seconds) (periodically), including the installation information of the frame control board 120 (frame control chip ID number, frame control chip manufacturer code, frame control chip product code). This makes it possible for the dedicated unit 170 to determine whether the frame control board 120 is appropriate, making it possible to prevent fraudulent activities such as replacement or modification of the main control board 110 or frame control board 120.

(Game ball counting process of frame control board)
The game ball counting process of the frame control board 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 82. Fig. 82 is a flowchart showing the game ball counting process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W551, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether 100 ms have passed since the timing of the previous transmission of the gaming machine information notification. If 100 ms have not passed, it is not time to send a counting notification and the current gaming ball counting process is terminated. If 100 ms have passed, it is time to send a counting notification and the process proceeds to step W552.

In step W552, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the counting button switch 20a has been turned ON by operating the counting button 20. If the counting button switch 20a is not turned ON (OFF), the process proceeds to step W561. If the counting button switch 20a is turned ON, the process proceeds to step W553 to determine whether the number of game balls owned by the player is greater than "0". If the number of game balls owned by the player is not greater than "0" ("0" meaning there are no game balls to be transferred to the dedicated unit 170 for counting), the process proceeds to step W561. If the number of game balls owned by the player is greater than "0" ("0" meaning there are no game balls to be transferred to the dedicated unit 170 for counting), the process proceeds to step W554.

In step W554, the frame control CPU 120a sets a counting process in progress flag in the frame control RAM 120c, indicating that counting is in progress, and in step W555, sets a counting process notification designation command, indicating that counting is in progress, in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the counting process notification designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to notify the user that counting is in progress.

In step W556, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the number of game balls owned by the player is less than 1000. If the number of game balls owned by the player is not less than 1000 (more than), the process proceeds to step W559. If the number of game balls owned by the player is less than 1000, the process proceeds to step W557. The frame control board 120 determines whether the frame control board 120 is outputting a launch permission signal to the launch device 92 to allow the launch of game balls and a launch permission error (setting change, setting confirmation, fraud detection 3, acquisition limit device operation, entrance switch disconnection error, entrance switch abnormality error, communication line abnormality error, glass frame opening error, inner frame opening error, ball removal operation in progress, ball removal lever operation error, etc.) is occurring. If the launch permission signal is being output and a launch permission error is not occurring, the process proceeds to step W559. If the launch permission signal is being output and a launch permission error is occurring, the process proceeds to step W558. If the launch permission signal is being output and a launch permission error is occurring, the process proceeds to step W559. This stops the operation of the ball delivery unit 91 and launching device 92 (ball delivery to the launch pad and/or launching of the game balls from the launch pad), limiting the launch of the game balls.

In step W559, if the number of game balls owned by the player is 250 or more, the frame control CPU 120a subtracts 250 from the counted number of balls, and if the number of game balls owned by the player is less than 250, it subtracts all of the game balls from the counted number of balls. In step W560, the frame control CPU 120a adds the subtracted counted number of balls to the cumulative counted number stored in the frame control RAM 120c, and proceeds to step W567.

In step W561, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not there is a counting processing in progress flag in the frame control RAM 120c. If there is no counting processing in progress flag, the process proceeds to step W567. If there is a counting processing in progress flag, the counting processing in progress flag is cleared in step W562, and in step W653, a counting processing completion designation command indicating that the counting processing has been completed is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the counting processing completion designation command to be sent to the performance control board, and processing is performed to end the counting processing in progress notification.

In step W564, the frame control CPU 120a clears the cumulative number of counted balls stored in the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W565, determines whether the launch permission signal is stopped and a launch non-permission error is not occurring. If the launch permission signal is being output or a launch non-permission error is occurring, processing proceeds to step W567, and if the launch permission signal is stopped and a launch non-permission error is not occurring, output of the launch permission signal is resumed in step W566. This allows the launch device to be driven (ball delivery to send game balls to the launch pad and/or launch of game balls from the launch pad), making it possible to launch game balls.

In step W567, the frame control CPU 120a sends a counting notification (counting serial number, the number of counted balls corresponding to the subtracted number of counted balls, and the cumulative number of counted balls stored in the frame control RAM 120c) to the dedicated unit 170, and ends the current game ball counting process. This causes the number of game balls owned by the player to be stored in association with the identification information (card number, card ID, etc.) of the storage medium (card, coin, etc.) inserted in the dedicated unit 170.

When the output of the launch permission signal is stopped and the drive of the ball feeding unit 91 and launching device 92 is stopped, if the unit operation of the ball feeding unit 91 (the operation of feeding one game ball) has ended but the unit operation of the launching device 92 (the operation of firing one game ball) is in progress, the drive of the ball feeding unit 91 and the launching device 92 is stopped after the unit operation of the launching device 92 has ended. Also, if the unit operation of the ball feeding unit 91 (the operation of feeding one game ball) is in progress, the drive of the ball feeding unit 91 and the launching device 92 is stopped after the unit operation of the ball feeding unit 91 and the subsequent unit operation of the launching device 92 (the operation of firing one game ball) have ended.

In this way, when the counting process is performed, the driving of the ball feeding unit 91 and the launching device 92 (ball feeding that sends game balls to the launch pad and/or launching game balls from the launch pad) is stopped, and the launch of game balls is restricted. Specifically, when the counting button 20 is operated to perform the counting process, if the number of game balls owned by the player is less than the specified number (1,000 balls), the output of the launch permission signal is stopped and the driving of the ball feeding unit 91 and the launching device 92 is stopped. Therefore, the inconvenience of counting the game balls used for the launch operation is no longer generated, the number of game balls that are counted can be stably guaranteed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

On the other hand, when the counting button 20 is operated to perform the counting process, if the player owns 1000 or more game balls, the output of the launch permission signal is not stopped and the operation of the ball sending unit 91 and launching device 92 is permitted. Therefore, even if the counting process is performed, it is possible to guarantee game balls to be launched, which makes the game more interesting.

In addition, when the counting process is completed, the operation of the launching device (ball delivery to the launch pad and/or launching of the game balls from the launch pad) is permitted, making it possible to launch the game balls. Therefore, the launching operation of the game balls is not restricted indefinitely due to the counting process being completed, which can increase the excitement of the game.

Note that, although the number of game balls required to operate the launching device (sending game balls to the launch pad and/or launching game balls from the launch pad) is set to 1000 or more, it may be less than 1000. In this case, it may be set to 251 or more, which can ensure the counting process and the launching of game balls even if the counting button 20 is pressed for a long time to count 250 game balls, or it may be set to 1 or more, which can ensure the counting process and the launching of game balls even if the counting button 20 is pressed for a short time to count 1 game ball.

(Game ball lending process of frame control board)
The game ball lending process of the frame control board 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 83. Fig. 83 is a flowchart showing the game ball lending process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W601, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not a loan notification has been received, which is sent within 170 ms of the previous counting notification or when the loan button on the dedicated unit 170 is operated. If a loan notification has not been received, the current game ball loan process is terminated. If a loan notification has been received, in step W602, it determines whether or not the loan serial number of the received loan notification is the previous loan serial number stored in the frame control RAM 120c + 1. If it is not the previous loan serial number + 1, the process proceeds to step W610. If it is the previous loan serial number + 1, in step W603, the loan serial number of the received loan notification is stored in the frame control RAM 120c as the previous loan serial number.

In step W604, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not there is a ball removal operation in progress flag in the frame control RAM 120c, which indicates that the ball removal operation is in progress. If there is a ball removal operation in progress flag (ball removal operation is in progress), processing proceeds to step W610. If there is no ball removal operation in progress flag (ball removal operation is not in progress), in step W605, it determines whether or not the number of game balls owned by the player (the number of game balls displayed on the game ball number display 135) is less than 100,000. If it is not less than 100,000, processing proceeds to step W610 as it is assumed that game balls will not be lent out, and if it is less than 100,000, processing proceeds to step W606.

In step W606, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the number of loaned balls in the received loan notification is a normal value (0 to 255). If it is not a normal value, it transfers processing to step W610, assuming that no game balls will be loaned. If it is a normal value, it transfers processing to step W607, determining whether the number of loaned balls in the received loan notification is a value greater than "0". If it is a value greater than "0", it transfers processing to step W608, and if it is not a value greater than "0" ("0"), it terminates the current game ball loan processing.

In step W608, the frame control CPU 120a adds the number of loaned balls included in the loan notification to the number of game balls of the player. As a result, the number of game balls displayed on the game ball number display 135 and the frame control display 125 is updated to the number of game balls after the addition. Then, in step W609, a loan receipt result response (reception result = normal) is sent to the dedicated unit 170 indicating that the game balls have been loaned (the loan notification has been received normally), and the current game ball loan process is terminated. This makes it possible for the dedicated unit 170 to know that the game balls have been loaned.

In step W610, the frame control CPU 120a transmits a loan receipt result response (reception result = abnormal) indicating that a normal loan notification could not be received from the dedicated unit 170 and that a game ball cannot be loaned out (the loan notification could not be received normally), and ends this game ball loan process. This makes it possible to understand that a game ball was not loaned out from the dedicated unit 170.

In this way, even if a loan notification based on the operation of the loan button is received from the dedicated unit 170, if the ball removal operation is in progress, the loan process of the game value (game ball) is not performed. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of the game value (game ball) being loaned out even during the ball removal operation when no game control is being performed, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, each time a lending process of gaming value (gaming balls) is performed, a lending receipt result response (receipt result = normal) is sent to the dedicated unit 170 indicating that the lending process has been performed, and if a lending process of gaming value (gaming balls) is not performed, a lending receipt result response (renting receipt result response = abnormal) is sent to the dedicated unit 170 indicating that the lending process has not been performed. This allows the dedicated unit 170 to determine whether or not the lending process has been performed, making it possible for the gaming establishment to collect necessary information, such as tallying up sales data.

(Relationship between the processing order of various control contents and implementation area)
Next, the relationship between the processing order of various control contents and implementation areas (control areas that perform processing) will be described with reference to the tables shown in FIGS.
The tables shown in Figures 84 to 99 correspond to a processing order, control contents corresponding to the processing order, an implementation area (within the use area, outside the use area) in which the control contents are implemented, associated areas (transmission buffer, reception buffer, input port, output port) used in relation to the control contents, and step numbers in the flowcharts described above.

"Within the use area (ROM, RWM)" in the implementation area column indicates the above-mentioned game ROM area (ROM area within area) and game RWM area (RWM area within area), and the program stored in the game ROM area (program within area) uses the game RWM area as its work area to execute various control contents.
In addition, "outside the area in use (ROM, RWM)" indicates the above-mentioned information ROM area (outside area ROM area) and information RWM area (outside area RWM area), and a program stored in the information ROM area (outside area program) will use the information RWM area as a work area to execute various control contents.

The terms "within the use area" and "outside the use area" that appear in the sections explaining the control contents and processing order of the main control board 110 correspond to the "within the use area" and "outside the use area" that are set in the memory area of the main control unit 110m, and the terms "within the use area" and "outside the use area" that appear in the sections explaining the control contents and processing order of the frame control board 120 correspond to the "within the use area" and "outside the use area" that are set in the memory area of the frame control unit 120m.

(Processing sequence when launch is permitted after a setting change is made on the main control board)
Figure 84 (a) is a diagram showing the processing sequence when launch is permitted after a setting change is made on the main control board 110 immediately after power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started.

As the first process, a main processing program startup process for executing the above-mentioned main processing is executed by control using the area in use (in-area program, in-area RWM area).
As the second process, a process is executed to generate gaming machine installation information (main control chip information: main control chip manufacturer code, main control chip product code, main control chip ID number) to be sent to the frame control board 120 by control using the area in use (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As a third process, a process is executed in which a message of gaming machine installation information is generated and transmitted to the frame control board 120 by control using the usage area (program within area, RWM area within area).

As a fourth process, a process of updating the notification counter of the gaming machine installation information by +1 is executed by control using the use area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the fifth process, a process is executed to determine whether or not a gaming machine installation information response sent from the frame control board 120 has been received by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, this is assumed to be "yes (received)").
As the sixth process, a process is executed to determine the contents of the received gaming machine installation information response by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, "received = OK").

As the seventh process, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is a backup flag indicating that power has been restored in the RWM area within the area by control using the area in use (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, "backup flag present").
As the eighth process, a process is executed to determine whether or not a setting change operation has been performed by control using the area in use (the program in the area, the RWM area in the area) (here, it is assumed that "an operation has been performed").
As a ninth process, a setting change process is executed that enables the setting value to be changed by control using the area in use (the program in the area, the RWM area in the area).

As the tenth process, an RWM clear process is executed in which data (such as the acquisition limit device activation flag) stored in the area to be cleared within the RWM area within the area is cleared by control using the area in use (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the eleventh process, a process is executed to send a power-on command to the performance control board 130, which indicates that the RWM clear process has been executed (power-on to initialize the game control state) by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the twelfth process, a process is executed to send a setting value designation command indicating the current setting value to the performance control board 130 by control using the area of use (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area).

As the 13th process, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is an acquisition upper limit device activation flag in the RWM area within the area by control using the area of use (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, ``no flag (= OFF)'').
As the 14th process, a process is executed to permit the launching device 92 to launch the game ball (including ball feeding) (to start outputting a launch permission signal) by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the 15th process, a process is executed to clear the increment counter (including the maximum increment) related to the operation of the win limit device by control using the outside of the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area). After that, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed without being restricted by the win limit device.

In addition, if the sixth process determines that the gaming machine installation information response indicates that the ball has been removed, the seventh and subsequent processes will not be executed, and the game progress will not be controlled, and the machine will wait for the power to be turned off.

In addition, a launch permission signal that allows the launching device 92 to launch game balls (including ball feeding) can be output from both the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, and the launching device 92 is enabled to launch game balls (including ball feeding) when launch permission signals are input from both the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

(Processing sequence when launch is permitted after RWM clear is performed on the main control board)
Figure 84 (b) is a diagram showing the processing sequence when RWM clear is performed on the main control board 110 immediately after power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started and then launch is permitted.
Note that the first to seventh processes and the thirteenth to seventeenth processes in FIG. 84(b) are the same as the first to seventh processes and the eleventh to fifteenth processes in FIG. 84(a), respectively, and therefore will not be described here.

As the eighth process, a process is executed to determine whether or not a setting change operation has been performed by control using the area in use (the program in the area, the RWM area in the area) (here, it is assumed that "no operation" has been performed).
As the ninth process, a process is executed that uses control within the used area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to determine whether the checksum calculated and stored from the RWM area within the area at the time of a power outage (power cut) matches the checksum calculated from the current RWM area within the area (here, this is assumed to be "normal").
As the tenth process, a process is executed to determine whether the setting value stored in the RWM area within the area is a normal value (1 to 4) or not by control using the area in use (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, it is assumed to be "normal").

As the eleventh process, a process is executed to determine whether or not an RWM clear operation has been performed by control using the area in use (program in area, RWM area in area) (here, it is assumed that "operation has been performed").
As the twelfth process, an RWM clear process is executed in which data (such as the acquisition limit device activation flag) stored in the area to be cleared of the RWM within the area is cleared by control using the area of use (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

In this way, according to Figures 84(a) and 84(b), processes closely related to game progress control (setting change process, RWM clear process, firing permission, etc.) are executed by control using the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m which executes processes related to game progress control (such as special chart special electric control process described below). Therefore, it is possible to separate functions between inside and outside the usage area of the main control unit 110m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Also, according to Figures 84(a) and 84(b), when a setting change or RWM clear is performed on the main control board 110 immediately after the start of power supply to the gaming machine 1, multiple processes from the startup process of the main processing program to the time launch is permitted are executed by control using the usage area of the main control unit 110m (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area). Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the control process compared to a case where control using the usage area of the main control unit 110m is mixed with control using outside the usage area.

Also, according to Figures 84(a) and 84(b), when the main control board 110 sends and receives information (messages, commands) to and from other control boards (frame control board 120, performance control board 130), the processing is performed by control using the area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, which executes processing related to game progress control (such as the special chart special electric control processing described below). This makes it easier to achieve cooperation between multiple control boards, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

In the above, the gaming machine installation information is generated by control using the area within the main control unit 110m (intra-area programs, intra-area RWM area), but the gaming machine installation information may be generated by control using the area outside the main control unit 110m (outside-area programs, outside-area RWM area).

In addition, the increment counter (including the maximum increment) was cleared after the launch permission (output of the launch permission signal), but it may be cleared before the launch permission (output of the launch permission signal).

(Processing sequence when launch is permitted after power is restored to the main control board)
Figure 85 (a) shows the processing sequence (when the acquisition limit device activation flag is not present) when launch is permitted after power is restored on the main control board 110 immediately after power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started.

As the first process, a main processing program startup process for executing the above-mentioned main processing is executed by control using the area in use (in-area program, in-area RWM area).
As the second process, a process is executed to generate gaming machine installation information (main control chip information: main control chip manufacturer code, main control chip product code, main control chip ID number) to be sent to the frame control board 120 by control using the area in use (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As a third process, a process is executed in which a message of gaming machine installation information is generated and transmitted to the frame control board 120 by control using the usage area (program within area, RWM area within area).

As a fourth process, a process of updating the notification counter of the gaming machine installation information by +1 is executed by control using the use area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the fifth process, a process is executed to determine whether or not a gaming machine installation information response sent from the frame control board 120 has been received by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, this is assumed to be "yes (received)").
As the sixth process, a process is executed to determine the contents of the received gaming machine installation information response by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, "received = OK").

As the seventh process, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is a backup flag indicating that power has been restored in the RWM area within the area by control using the area in use (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, "backup flag exists").
As the eighth process, a process is executed to determine whether or not a setting change operation has been performed by control using the area in use (the program in the area, the RWM area in the area) (here, it is assumed that "no operation" has been performed).
As the ninth process, a process is executed that uses control within the used area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to determine whether the checksum calculated and stored from the RWM area within the area at the time of a power outage (power cut) matches the checksum calculated from the current RWM area within the area (here, this is assumed to be "normal").

As the tenth process, a process is executed to determine whether the setting value stored in the RWM area within the area is a normal value (1 to 4) or not by control using the area in use (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, it is assumed to be "normal").
As the eleventh process, a process is executed to determine whether or not an RWM clear operation has been performed by control using the area in use (program in area, RWM area in area) (here, it is assumed that "no operation" has been performed).
As the twelfth process, a process is executed to determine whether or not a setting confirmation operation has been performed by control using the area in use (program in area, RWM area in area) (here, it is assumed that "no operation" has been performed).

As the thirteenth process, an initial setting process is executed to restore the game control state (game progress state) before the power outage by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the 14th process, a process is executed to send a power restoration designation command indicating that power has been restored to the performance control board 130 by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the 15th process, a process is executed to send other commands associated with the restoration of the game progress status (a command to specify the number of special charts on hold, a command to specify the game status, etc.) to the performance control board 130 by control using the area in use (program in the area, RWM area in the area).

As the 16th process, a process is executed to send a setting value designation command indicating the current setting value to the performance control board 130 by control using the area of use (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area).
As the 17th process, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is an acquisition upper limit device activation flag in the RWM area by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, ``no flag (= OFF)'').
As the 18th process, a process is executed to permit the launching device 92 to launch the game ball (including ball feeding) (to start outputting a launch permission signal) by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the 19th process, a process is executed to clear the increment counter (including the maximum increment) related to the operation of the win limit device by control using the outside of the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area). After that, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed without being restricted by the win limit device.

(Processing procedure when launch is not permitted after power is restored to the main control board)
Figure 85 (b) shows the processing sequence when firing is not permitted after power is restored on the main control board 110 immediately after power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started (when the acquisition limit device activation flag is present).
It should be noted that the first to sixteenth processes in FIG. 85(b) are the same as the first to sixteenth processes in FIG. 85(a), respectively, and therefore will not be described here.

As the 17th process, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is an acquisition upper limit device activation flag in the RWM area by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, it is assumed that "flag exists (= ON)").
As the 18th process, a process is executed to send an acquisition limit device operation command, indicating that the acquisition limit device is in operation, to the performance control board 130 by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the 19th process, a process is executed to clear the increment counter (including the maximum increment) related to the operation of the win limit device by control using the outside of the use area (outside area program, outside area RWM area). After that, the process for controlling the progress of the game is limited by the win limit device.

In this way, according to Figures 85(a) and 85(b), processes closely related to game progress control (initial setup process, firing permission, etc.) are executed by control using the area used by the main control unit 110m (intra-area programs, intra-area RWM area) which executes processes related to game progress control (such as the special chart special electric control process described below). This allows functions to be separated between inside and outside the area used by the main control unit 110m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Also, according to Figures 85(a) and 85(b), when power is restored on the main control board 110 immediately after the start of power supply to the gaming machine 1, multiple processes from the startup process of the main processing program to when launch is permitted are executed by control using the usage area of the main control unit 110m (intra-area programs, intra-area RWM area). Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the control process compared to a case where control using the usage area of the main control unit 110m is mixed with control using outside the usage area.

Also, according to Figures 85(a) and 85(b), when the main control board 110 sends and receives information (messages, commands) to and from other control boards (frame control board 120, performance control board 130), the processing is performed by control using the area (intra-area programs, intra-area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, which executes processing related to game progress control (such as the special chart special electric control processing described below). This makes it easier to achieve cooperation between multiple control boards, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

In the above, the gaming machine installation information is generated by control using the area within the main control unit 110m (intra-area programs, intra-area RWM area), but the gaming machine installation information may be generated by control using the area outside the main control unit 110m (outside-area programs, outside-area RWM area).

In addition, the increment counter (including the maximum increment) was cleared after the launch permission (output of the launch permission signal), but it may be executed before the launch permission (output of the launch permission signal), or if the acquisition upper limit device is in operation and launch is not permitted, the increment counter (including the maximum increment) may not be cleared.

(Processing sequence when launch is permitted after the main control board has confirmed the settings)
Figure 86 (a) shows the processing sequence (when the acquisition limit device activation flag is not present) when launch is permitted after the main control board 110 confirms the settings immediately after power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started.

As the first process, a main processing program startup process for executing the above-mentioned main processing is executed by control using the area in use (in-area program, in-area RWM area).
As the second process, a process is executed to generate gaming machine installation information (main control chip information: main control chip manufacturer code, main control chip product code, main control chip ID number) to be sent to the frame control board 120 by control using the area in use (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As a third process, a process is executed in which a message of gaming machine installation information is generated and transmitted to the frame control board 120 by control using the usage area (program within area, RWM area within area).

As a fourth process, a process of updating the notification counter of the gaming machine installation information by +1 is executed by control using the use area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the fifth process, a process is executed to determine whether or not a gaming machine installation information response sent from the frame control board 120 has been received by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, this is assumed to be "yes (received)").
As the sixth process, a process is executed to determine the contents of the received gaming machine installation information response by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, "received = OK").

As the seventh process, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is a backup flag indicating that power has been restored in the RWM area within the area by control using the area in use (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, "backup flag present").
As the eighth process, a process is executed to determine whether or not a setting change operation has been performed by control using the area in use (the program in the area, the RWM area in the area) (here, it is assumed that "no operation" has been performed).
As the ninth process, a process is executed that uses control within the used area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to determine whether the checksum calculated and stored from the RWM area within the area at the time of a power outage (power cut) matches the checksum calculated from the current RWM area within the area (here, this is assumed to be "normal").

As the tenth process, a process is executed to determine whether the setting value stored in the RWM area within the area is a normal value (1 to 4) or not by control using the area in use (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, it is assumed to be "normal").
As the eleventh process, a process is executed to determine whether or not an RWM clear operation has been performed by control using the area in use (program in area, RWM area in area) (here, it is assumed that "no operation" has been performed).
As the twelfth process, a process is executed to determine whether or not a setting confirmation operation has been performed by control using the area in use (program in area, RWM area in area) (here, it is assumed that "operation has been performed").

As a thirteenth process, a setting confirmation process is executed that enables the current setting value to be confirmed by control using the area in use (the program in the area, the RWM area in the area).
As the 14th process, an initial setting process is executed to restore the game control state (game progress state) before the power outage by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the fifteenth process, a process is executed to send a power restoration designation command indicating that power has been restored to the performance control board 130 by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

As the 16th process, a process is executed to send other commands associated with the restoration of the game progress status (a command to specify the number of special charts on hold, a command to specify the game status, etc.) to the performance control board 130 by control using the area in use (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the 17th process, a process is executed to send a setting value designation command indicating the current setting value to the performance control board 130 by control using the area of use (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area).
As the 18th process, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is an acquisition upper limit device activation flag in the RWM area within the area by control using the area of use (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, it is assumed that there is "no flag (= OFF)").

As the 19th process, a process is executed to permit the launching device 92 to launch the game ball (including ball feeding) (to start outputting a launch permission signal) by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the twentieth process, a process is executed to clear the increment counter (including the maximum increment) related to the operation of the win limit device by control using the outside of the use area (outside area program, outside area RWM area). After that, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed without being restricted by the win limit device.

(Processing procedure when launch is not permitted after the main control board has confirmed the settings)
Figure 86 (b) shows the processing sequence when firing is not permitted after the main control board 110 confirms the settings immediately after power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started (when the winning limit device activation flag is present).
It should be noted that the first to seventeenth processes in FIG. 86(b) are the same as the first to seventeenth processes in FIG. 86(a), respectively, and therefore will not be described here.

As the 18th process, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is an acquisition upper limit device activation flag in the RWM area within the area by control using the area of use (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, it is assumed that "flag exists (= ON)").
As the 19th process, a process is executed to send an acquisition limit device operation command, indicating that the acquisition limit device is in operation, to the performance control board 130 by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the 20th process, a process is executed to clear the increment counter (including the maximum increment) related to the operation of the win limit device by control using the outside of the use area (outside area program, outside area RWM area). After that, the process for controlling the progress of the game is limited by the win limit device.

In this way, according to Figures 86(a) and 86(b), processes closely related to game progress control (setting confirmation process, initial setting process, firing permission, etc.) are executed by control using the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, which executes processes related to game progress control (such as the special chart special electric control process described below). Therefore, it is possible to separate functions between inside and outside the usage area of the main control unit 110m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Also, according to Figures 86(a) and 86(b), when the main control board 110 checks the settings immediately after the start of power supply to the gaming machine 1, multiple processes from the startup process of the main processing program to when launch is permitted are executed by control using the usage area of the main control unit 110m (intra-area programs, intra-area RWM area). Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the control process compared to a case where control using the usage area of the main control unit 110m is mixed with control using outside the usage area.

Also, according to Figures 86(a) and 86(b), when the main control board 110 sends and receives information (messages, commands) to and from other control boards (frame control board 120, performance control board 130), the processing is performed by control using the area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, which executes processing related to game progress control (such as the special chart special electric control processing described below). This makes it easier to achieve cooperation between multiple control boards, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

In the above, the gaming machine installation information is generated by control using the area within the main control unit 110m (intra-area programs, intra-area RWM area), but the gaming machine installation information may be generated by control using the area outside the main control unit 110m (outside-area programs, outside-area RWM area).

In addition, the increment counter (including the maximum increment) was cleared after the launch permission (output of the launch permission signal), but it may be cleared before the launch permission (output of the launch permission signal).

(Processing procedure when an unrecoverable error occurs in the main control board and game progress control is not performed)
FIG. 87 is a diagram showing the processing sequence when an unrecoverable error occurs in the main control board 110 immediately after the start of power supply to the gaming machine 1 and control of the progress of the game is not performed.

As the first process, a main processing program startup process for executing the above-mentioned main processing is executed by control using the area in use (in-area program, in-area RWM area).
As the second process, a process is executed to generate gaming machine installation information (main control chip information: main control chip manufacturer code, main control chip product code, main control chip ID number) to be sent to the frame control board 120 by control using the area in use (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As a third process, a process is executed in which a message of gaming machine installation information is generated and transmitted to the frame control board 120 by control using the usage area (program within area, RWM area within area).

As a fourth process, a process of updating the notification counter of the gaming machine installation information by +1 is executed by control using the use area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the fifth process, a process is executed to determine whether or not a gaming machine installation information response sent from the frame control board 120 has been received by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, this is assumed to be "yes (received)").
As the sixth process, a process is executed to determine the contents of the received gaming machine installation information response by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, "received = OK").

As the seventh process, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is a backup flag indicating that power has been restored in the RWM area within the area by control using the area in use (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, "backup flag present").
As the eighth process, a process is executed to determine whether or not a setting change operation has been performed by control using the area in use (the program in the area, the RWM area in the area) (here, it is assumed that "no operation" has been performed).
As the ninth process, a process is executed that uses control within the used area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to determine whether the checksum calculated and stored from the RWM area within the area at the time of a power outage (power cut) matches the checksum calculated from the current RWM area within the area (here, this is assumed to be "normal").

As the tenth process, a process is executed to determine whether the setting value stored in the RWM area within the area is a normal value (1 to 4) or not by control using the area in use (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, it is assumed to be "abnormal").
As the eleventh process, an irrecoverable error process is executed in which the progress of the game is no longer controlled by control using the area in use (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area).

If the checksum is determined to be abnormal in the ninth process, the tenth process executes an irrecoverable error process that continues until the power is turned off, using control within the used area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), and control of the game progress is no longer possible.

In this way, according to FIG. 87, processes closely related to game progress control (such as unrecoverable error processing) are executed by control using the area (in-area programs, in-area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, which executes processes related to game progress control (such as the special chart special power control processing described below). Therefore, it is possible to separate functions between inside and outside the area of use of the main control unit 110m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Also, according to FIG. 87, if an irrecoverable error occurs in the main control board 110 immediately after the start of power supply to the gaming machine 1 and control of game progress is not performed, multiple processes from the startup process of the main processing program to the irrecoverable error process are executed by control using the usage area of the main control unit 110m (intra-area programs, intra-area RWM area). Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the control process compared to a case where control using the intra-area and control using outside the usage area are mixed.

Also, according to FIG. 87, when the main control board 110 sends and receives information (messages, commands) to and from other control boards (frame control board 120, presentation control board 130), the processing is performed by control using the area (in-area programs, in-area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, which executes processing related to game progress control (such as the special chart special electric control processing described below). This makes it easier to achieve cooperation between multiple control boards, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

In the above, the gaming machine installation information is generated by control using the area within the main control unit 110m (intra-area programs, intra-area RWM area), but the gaming machine installation information may be generated by control using the area outside the main control unit 110m (outside-area programs, outside-area RWM area).

(Processing sequence when game progress control is performed by the main control board)
Figure 88 (a) is a diagram showing the processing sequence when the main control board 110 controls the progress of the game while power is being supplied to the gaming machine 1 (when the win limit device activation flag is not present).

As the first process (main loop process), a process is executed to update various random number values (random number values for reach determination, random number values for special pattern determination, initial value random number, etc.) by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the second process (hereinafter referred to as timer interrupt process), a process of saving registers to a stack area is executed by control using the area in use (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area).
As the third process, a time control process is executed using the control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to update various timer counters such as the stop time of special patterns and the opening time of special electric features.

As the fourth process, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is an acquisition limit device activation flag in the RWM area within the area by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, if it is determined that there is no flag (= OFF), the acquisition limit device will not be activated).
As the fifth process, a process is executed to update various random number values (random number values for determining a jackpot, random number values for determining special patterns, random number values for determining special pattern fluctuation patterns, random number values for determining a win, random number values for determining normal patterns, random number values for determining normal pattern fluctuation patterns, etc.) by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the sixth process, an input control process is executed using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to set specified data when there is input to various switches (general prize opening detection switch 43a, large prize opening detection switch 50a, first start opening detection switch 45a, second start opening detection switch 47a, gate detection switch 44a, etc.).

As the seventh process, a special symbol special electric control process is executed, which controls the variable display of special symbols and the jackpot game, etc., by using the control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the eighth process, a normal symbol/normal power control process is executed, which controls the variable display of normal symbols and auxiliary games, etc., by using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the ninth process, an earning limit management process is executed which controls the operation of the earning limit device by controlling the area within the usage area (intra-area programs, intra-area RWM area) and outside the usage area (outside-area programs, outside-area RWM area).

As the tenth process, a payout control process is executed, which controls the awarding of prize balls (game value) by using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the eleventh process, an error control process is executed to control the area in use (intra-area programs, intra-area RWM area) and outside the area in use (out-area programs, extra-area RWM area) to notify errors based on the occurrence of various errors.
As the twelfth process, a hole control/fraud monitoring information management process is executed, which performs processes such as sending hole control/fraud monitoring information to the frame control board 120 by control using the usage area (programs within the area, RWM area within the area).

As the 13th process, a data creation process is executed to generate display data to be output to various display devices, drive data to be output to various electrical drive sources, etc., by control using the area within the use area (intra-area programs, intra-area RWM area) and outside the use area (outside-area programs, outside-area RWM area).
As the 14th process, an output control process is executed by using the control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to output display data to various displays and send commands set in the transmission buffer (various transmission data storage area), etc.
As a fifteenth process, a process is executed to restore the registers that have been saved in the stack area by control using the area in use (the program area, the RWM area).

(Processing sequence when game progress control is restricted by the main control board)
Figure 88 (b) is a diagram showing the processing sequence when the main control board 110 limits control of game progress while power is being supplied to the gaming machine 1 (when the win limit device activation flag is present).
It should be noted that the first to third processes in FIG. 88(b) are the same as the first to third processes in FIG. 88(a), respectively, and therefore a description thereof will be omitted here.

As the fourth process, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is an acquisition limit device activation flag in the RWM area within the area by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, the acquisition limit device is activated when it is determined that the flag is present (= ON)).
As the fifth process, a process for operating the winning limit device is executed by control using the use area (program in area, RWM area in area). Specifically, a control is executed to skip the fifth to ninth processes shown in FIG. 88(a) so that the processes related to the progress control of the fifth to ninth games shown in FIG. 88(a) are not executed.
As the sixth process, a payout control process is executed, which controls the awarding of prize balls (game value) by using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

As the seventh process, an error control process is executed to control the area in use (programs within the area, RWM area within the area) and outside the area in use (programs outside the area, RWM area outside the area) to notify errors based on the occurrence of various errors.
As the eighth process, a hole control/fraud monitoring information management process is executed by control using the usage area (programs within the area, RWM area within the area) to perform processes such as sending hole control/fraud monitoring information to the frame control board 120.
As the ninth process, a data creation process is executed to generate display data to be output to various display devices, drive data to be output to various electrical drive sources, etc., by control using the area within the use area (intra-area programs, intra-area RWM area) and outside the use area (outside-area programs, outside-area RWM area).

As the tenth process, an output control process is executed by using the control within the usage area (programs within the area, RWM area within the area) to output display data to various displays and send commands set in the transmission buffer (various transmission data storage area).
As an eleventh process, a process of restoring the registers that have been saved in the stack area is executed by control using the area in use (the program area, the RWM area in the area).

As such, according to Figures 88(a) and 88(b), multiple processes related to controlling the progress of the game (input control process, special chart special power control process, regular chart regular power control process, payout control process, etc.) are executed by control using the area used by the main control unit 110m (intra-area programs, intra-area RWM area). Therefore, it is possible to separate functions between inside and outside the area used by the main control unit 110m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

Also, according to Figures 88(a) and 88(b), the update process for various random numbers that are closely related to the control of the progress of the game is performed by control using the area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, which executes processes related to the control of the progress of the game (such as the special chart special electric control process described below). Therefore, it is possible to separate functions between the area inside and outside the area of use of the main control unit 110m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

Also, according to Figures 88(a) and 88(b), when the main control board 110 sends and receives information (messages, commands) to and from other control boards (frame control board 120, performance control board 130), the processing is performed by control using the usage area (intra-area programs, intra-area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, which executes processing related to game progress control (such as the special chart special electric control processing described below). This makes it easier to achieve cooperation between multiple control boards, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Also, according to Figures 88(a) and 88(b), multiple complementary controls (upper limit management processing, error control processing, data creation processing, etc.) that are different from game progress control are executed by control using outside the usage area of the main control unit 110m (outside area programs, outside area RWM area). Therefore, it is possible to efficiently use the inside and outside of the usage area, and it is possible to improve the efficiency of the control processing.

Also, according to Figures 88(a) and 88(b), the process of activating the winning limit device, which restricts the execution of multiple processes related to game progress control (input control process, special chart special power control process, normal chart normal power control process, payout control process, etc.), is performed by control using the area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, which executes processes related to game progress control (such as the special chart special power control process described below). Therefore, it is possible to separate functions between inside and outside the area of the main control unit 110m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

In FIG. 88(a) and FIG. 88(b), the process (processing sequence "4") is performed to determine whether or not there is an acquisition upper limit device activation flag in the intra-area RWM area by control using the area used by the main control unit 110m (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area), but the process may be performed to determine whether or not there is an acquisition upper limit device activation flag by control using outside the area used by the main control unit 110m (outside area program, outside area RWM area).

In addition, in Figure 88 (b), when there is an acquisition limit device activation flag in the RWM area within the area, the acquisition limit device is activated, so that the processes in processing order "5" to processing order "9" shown in Figure 88 (a) (various random number update processes, input control processes, special chart special power control processes, regular chart regular power control processes, acquisition limit management processes) are not performed, but it is also possible to perform the processes in processing order "5" to processing order "9" shown in Figure 88 (a). In this case, for example, even if the input control process in processing sequence "6" detects a ball entering the out gate 39, the general gate 44, or the various winning gates (general winning gate 43, first winning gate 45, second winning gate 47, large winning gate 50, etc.), the detection information (information on the detection of the ball, data generated by detecting the ball, etc.) in the input control process in processing sequences "7" to "9" (control based on the detection information is not performed) may be referenced, and the game may be stopped (control of the game progress may be stopped) by activating the winning limit device.

In addition, in FIG. 88(b), when the processes in process sequence "5" to process sequence "9" shown in FIG. 88(a) (various random number update processes, input control process, special chart special power control process, regular chart regular power control process, and winning limit management process) are performed, for example, the input control process in process sequence "6" detects balls entering the out gate 39, regular chart gate 44, and various winning gates (general winning gate 43, first start gate 45, second start gate 47, large winning gate 50, etc.), but by not generating the detection information referenced in process sequences "7" to "9" (information on detecting a ball, data generated by detecting a ball, etc.), the game can be stopped by the activation of the winning limit device (stopping the progress control of the game).

(Processing sequence 1 when the acquisition upper limit device is activated on the main control board)
Figure 89 (a) shows processing order 1 (when not in a jackpot) when the win limit device is activated on the main control board 110.

As the first process, a general prize opening detection switch input process is executed, in which processing such as detecting a prize won at the general prize opening 43 is performed by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the second process, a large prize opening detection switch input process is executed by control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), which performs processes such as detecting a win at the large prize opening 50.
As the third process, a first start hole detection switch input process is executed by control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), which performs processes such as detecting a winning entry into the first start hole 45.

As the fourth process, a second start hole detection switch input process is executed by control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), which performs processes such as detecting a winning entry into the second start hole 47.
As the fifth process, a gate detection switch input process is executed by control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to perform processes such as detecting winning at the general gate 44.
As the sixth process, an out detection switch input process is executed by control using the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) to perform processes such as detecting a ball entering the out hole 39.

As the seventh process, an increment counter update process is executed by control outside the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) to update the increment counter related to the operation of the winning limit device in accordance with the prize balls (game value) awarded based on winning at various winning ports.
As the eighth process, a maximum increment update process is executed in which the maximum increment is updated according to the value of the increment counter by control using the outside of the used area (outside area program, outside area RWM area).
As the ninth process, a process is executed in which a maximum increment command indicating the maximum increment is set in the transmission buffer by control using the outside of the used area (outside area program, outside area RWM area).

As the tenth process, a process of referring to the current maximum increase number is executed by control using the outside of the used area (outside area program, outside area RWM area).
As the eleventh process, a process is executed to determine whether the maximum increase number is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (95,000) by control using the area outside the use area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) (here, this is defined as "greater than or equal to the predetermined number").
As the 12th process, a process is executed to determine whether or not a jackpot game is currently being played by control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, ``No (not playing a jackpot game)'').

As a thirteenth process, a process is executed in which an acquisition upper limit device activation flag is set (ON) to activate the acquisition upper limit device by control using outside the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area).
As the 14th process, a process is executed that prohibits the launch of game balls (including ball feeding) by the launching device 92 (stopping the output of the launch permission signal) by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the fifteenth process, a process is executed in which an acquisition upper limit device operation command indicating that the acquisition upper limit device is in operation is set in the transmission buffer by control using the usage area (program in area, RWM area in area).

As the 16th process, a process is executed to generate hole control/fraud monitoring information (fraud detection status 1 Bit 6 = "1") indicating that the acquisition limit device has been activated by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the 17th process, a process is executed in which, by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), a message is generated and transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 regarding hole control and fraud monitoring information indicating that the acquisition limit device has been activated.
As the 18th process, an output control process is executed in which the commands set in the transmission buffer (maximum increase number command, acquisition upper limit device operation command) are sent to the performance control board 130 by control using the use area (program in the area, RWM area in the area).

In addition, if it is determined in the 11th process that the maximum increase is not equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the acquisition limit device will not be activated and the 12th to 17th processes will not be executed, and the 18th process will be executed instead.

(Processing sequence 2 when the acquisition upper limit device is activated on the main control board)
Figure 89 (b) is a diagram showing processing order 2 (when a jackpot occurs) when the win limit device is activated on the main control board 110.
It should be noted that the first to eleventh processes in FIG. 89(b) are the same as the first to eleventh processes in FIG. 89(a), respectively, and therefore a description thereof will be omitted here.

As the 12th process, a process is executed to determine whether or not a jackpot game is currently being played by control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, this is assumed to be ``yes (a jackpot game is being played)'').
As the 13th process, a process is executed to set (ON) an operation recognition flag, which is reservation information when the acquisition limit device cannot be activated immediately by control using outside the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area).
As the 14th process, an output control process is executed in which the command (maximum increase number command) set in the transmission buffer is sent to the performance control board 130 by control using the area in use (program in area, RWM area in area).
Thereafter, the 1st to 18th processes in FIG. 89(a) are executed as the 15th to 32nd processes, respectively, and therefore a description thereof will be omitted here.

As such, according to Figures 89(a) and 89(b), the increment counter update process related to the operation of the winning limit device, the maximum increment update process, the process of setting the maximum increment command in the transmission buffer, the process of referencing the current maximum increment, and the process of determining whether the maximum increment is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (95,000) are performed by control using the outside of the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m which executes complementary control different from the game progress control. Therefore, it is possible to separate the functions within and outside the usage area of the main control unit 110m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

Also, according to Figures 89(a) and 89(b), the process of setting the acquisition limit device activation flag, which activates the acquisition limit device that limits the control of the progress of the game, is executed by control using the outside of the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, which executes complementary control different from the control of the progress of the game. Therefore, it is possible to separate the functions within the usage area of the main control unit 110m from those outside the usage area, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

Also, according to Figures 89(a) and 89(b), the firing disallowance process, which restricts the execution of the game in response to the operation of the winning limit device, is executed by control using the area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, which executes processes related to the control of the progress of the game (such as the special chart special electric control process described below). Therefore, it is possible to separate the functions inside and outside the area of use of the main control unit 110m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

Also, according to Figures 89(a) and 89(b), when the main control board 110 sends and receives information (messages, commands) to and from other control boards (frame control board 120, performance control board 130), the processing is performed by control using the area (intra-area programs, intra-area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, which executes processing related to game progress control (such as the special chart special electric control processing described below). This makes it easier to achieve cooperation between multiple control boards, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Note that, although the processes in process sequence "7" to process sequence "11" in FIG. 89(a) (increment counter update process, maximum increment update process, process of setting the maximum increment command in the transmission buffer, process of referencing the current maximum increment, process of determining whether the maximum increment is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (95,000)) are executed by control using the area outside the use area of the main control unit 110m (outside area program, outside area RWM area), some or all of the processes in process sequence "7" to process sequence "11" in FIG. 89(a) may be executed by control using the area inside the use area of the main control unit 110m (inside area program, inside area RWM area).

In addition, the process of process sequence "12" in FIG. 89(a) (processing to determine whether or not a jackpot game is currently being played) was executed by control using the area within the use area of the main control unit 110m (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area), but the process of process sequence "12" in FIG. 89(a) may be executed by control using the area outside the use area of the main control unit 110m (outside-area program, outside-area RWM area).

In addition, the process of process sequence "13" in FIG. 89(a) (the process of setting (ON) the acquisition limit device activation flag and activating the acquisition limit device) was executed by control using the outside of the usage area of the main control unit 110m (outside area program, outside area RWM area), but the process of process sequence "13" in FIG. 89(a) may also be executed by control using the inside of the usage area of the main control unit 110m (inside area program, inside area RWM area).

In addition, the processes in steps "15" to "16" in FIG. 89(a) (the process of setting the acquisition limit device activation command in the transmission buffer, and the process of generating hole control/fraud monitoring information (fraud detection status 1 Bit 6 = "1") indicating that the acquisition limit device has been activated) were executed by control using the area used by the main control unit 110m (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area), but the processes in steps "15" to "16" in FIG. 89(a) may be executed by control using the area used by the main control unit 110m outside the area (extra-area program, extra-area RWM area).

In addition, the process of process sequence "13" in FIG. 89(b) (the process of setting (ON) the operation recognition flag) was executed by control using the outside of the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, but the process of process sequence "13" in FIG. 89(b) may be executed by control using the inside of the usage area (inside area program, inside area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m.

(Processing sequence when error control processing is performed on the main control board)
FIG. 90 is a diagram showing the processing sequence when error control processing is performed by the main control board 110.

As the first process, a process is executed to determine whether or not a magnet detection error has occurred by control using the outside of the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) (here, it is assumed that "magnet detection has occurred").
As a second process, a process is executed in which a magnet detection flag indicating that a magnet has been detected in the outside RWM area is set (ON) by control using the outside-use area (outside-area program, outside-area RWM area).
As a third process, a process is executed in which a magnet detection designation command indicating that a magnet detection error has occurred is set in the transmission buffer by control using an area outside the use area (outside area program, outside area RWM area).

As the fourth process, a process is executed to generate hall control/fraud monitoring information (fraud detection status 1 Bit 3 = "1") indicating that a magnet detection error has occurred by control using outside the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area).
As the fifth process, a process is executed to determine whether or not an abnormal winning error has occurred by control outside the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) (here, "abnormal winning detected").
As the sixth process, a process is executed in which an abnormal winning detection flag is set (ON) indicating that an abnormal winning has been detected in the outside area RWM area by control using the outside area (outside area program, outside area RWM area).

As the seventh process, a process is executed in which an abnormal winning designation command indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred is set in the transmission buffer by control using outside the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area).
As the eighth process, a process is executed in which hole control/fraud monitoring information (fraud detection status 1 Bit 4 = "1") indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred is generated by control using outside the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area).
As the ninth process, a process is executed in which, by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), a message is generated and transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 regarding hole control and fraud monitoring information indicating that a magnet detection error or an abnormal winning error has occurred.
As the tenth process, an output control process is executed in which the commands set in the transmission buffer (magnet detection designation command, abnormal winning designation command) are sent to the performance control board 130 by control using the area of use (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

If it is determined in the first step that no magnet has been detected, the second through fourth steps will not be executed and the fifth and subsequent steps will be executed, and if it is determined in the fifth step that no abnormal winning has occurred, the sixth through ninth steps will not be executed and the tenth step will be executed.

As such, according to FIG. 90, the process for detecting a specific error (magnet detection error, abnormal winning error) is executed by control using the outside of the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, which executes complementary control different from the game progress control. Therefore, it is possible to separate the functions within the usage area of the main control unit 110m from those outside the usage area, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

Also, according to FIG. 90, when the main control board 110 sends and receives information (messages, commands) to and from other control boards (frame control board 120, presentation control board 130), the processing is performed by control using the area (in-area programs, in-area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, which executes processing related to game progress control (such as the special chart special electric control processing described below). This makes it easier to achieve cooperation between multiple control boards, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

In the above, the first to eighth processes are executed by control using the area used by the main control unit 110m (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area), but one or more of the first to eighth processes may be executed by control using the area used by the main control unit 110m (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area).

(Processing sequence when the number of game balls is not cleared after receiving gaming machine installation information on the frame control board)
Figure 91 (a) is a diagram showing the processing sequence when the number of game balls is not cleared after the frame control board 120 receives game machine installation information immediately after starting the power supply to the game machine 1 (when there is no game ball number clearing operation or ball removal operation).

As the first process, a main processing program startup process for executing the above-mentioned main processing is executed by control using the area in use (in-area program, in-area RWM area).
As the second process, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is a backup flag indicating that power has been restored in the RWM area within the area by control using the area in use (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, "backup flag present").
As the third process, a process is executed that uses control within the used area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to determine whether the checksum calculated and stored from the RWM area within the area at the time of a power outage (power cut) matches the checksum calculated from the current RWM area within the area (here, this is assumed to be "normal").

As the fourth process, a process is executed to determine whether or not an operation to clear the number of game balls has been performed by control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, it is assumed that there has been no operation).
As the fifth process, a process is executed by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to determine whether or not there is a game ball count clear flag in the RWM area within the area indicating that the game ball count has been cleared (here, it is assumed that there is "no flag").
As the sixth process, a process is executed to determine whether or not a ball removal operation has been performed by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, it is assumed that "no operation" has been performed).

As the seventh process, a process of starting a timer interrupt process is executed by control using the area in use (the program in the area, the RWM area in the area).
As the eighth process (hereinafter, timer interrupt process), a process of saving registers to a stack area is executed by control using the area in use (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area).
As the ninth process, a ball removal operation process is executed by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to remove the gaming balls that are circulated in the gaming machine 1 from the gaming machine (here, the only determination as to whether or not there is a ball removal operation in progress flag is that "no flag").

As the tenth process, a determination is made as to whether or not gaming machine installation information transmitted from the main control board 110 has been received by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, this is assumed to be "yes (received)").
As the 11th process, a determination is made as to whether or not the communication serial number of the received gaming machine installation information is the specified value "0" by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, the serial number is set to "0").
As the 12th process, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is an internal gaming machine communication abnormality flag indicating that an internal gaming machine communication abnormality has occurred in the internal gaming machine RWM area through control using the internal usage area (internal area program, internal area RWM area) (here, it is assumed that there is no flag).

As the 13th process, a process is executed in which, by using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), gaming machine installation information is generated by combining the main control chip information (main control chip ID number, main control chip manufacturer code, main control chip product code) of the gaming machine installation information received from the main control board 110 and the frame control chip information (frame control chip ID number, frame control chip manufacturer code, frame control chip product code) stored in the frame control unit 120m.
As the 14th process, a determination is made as to whether or not there is a ball removal operation in progress flag indicating that the ball removal operation is in progress, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, ``no flag'').
As the fifteenth process, a process is executed in which a message of gaming machine installation information (received OK) is generated and sent to the main control board 110 by control using the usage area (program within area, RWM area within area).
As the 16th process, a process is executed to permit the launching device 92 to launch the game ball (including ball feeding) (to start outputting a launch permission signal) by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

(Processing sequence when the number of game balls is cleared after the frame control board receives gaming machine installation information)
Figure 91 (b) is a diagram showing the processing sequence when the number of game balls is cleared after the frame control board 120 receives game machine installation information immediately after starting the power supply to the game machine 1 (when the game ball number clearing operation and ball removal operation are performed).
It should be noted that the first to third processes in FIG. 91(b) are the same as the first to third processes in FIG. 91(a), respectively, and therefore a description thereof will be omitted here.

As the fourth process, a process is executed to determine whether or not an operation to clear the number of game balls has been performed by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, this is assumed to be "operation has been performed").
As the fifth process, a process is executed by control using the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) to clear the number of game balls owned by the player, which is stored in the intra-area RWM area.
As the sixth process, a process is executed in which a game ball count clear start command indicating that the game ball count has been cleared is set in the transmission buffer by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

As the seventh process, a process is executed in which a game ball count clear flag, indicating that the game ball count has been cleared, is set (ON) by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the eighth process, a process is executed to generate hole control/fraud monitoring information (fraud detection status 2 Bit 3 = "1") indicating that the number of game balls has been cleared by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the ninth process, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is a game ball count clear flag by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, it is assumed that "flag exists").

As the tenth process, a process is executed to display an error code ("H67") corresponding to the clearing of the number of game balls on the frame control display 125 by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the eleventh process, a process is executed to determine whether or not a ball removal operation has been performed by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, this is assumed to be "operation has been performed").
As the twelfth process, a process is executed in which a ball removal operation in progress designation command, indicating that the ball removal operation is in progress, is set in the transmission buffer by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

As the thirteenth process, a process is executed in which a ball removal operation in progress flag is set (ON) to indicate that the ball removal operation is in progress by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the 14th process, a process is executed to display specific information ("-") corresponding to the ball removal operation on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135 by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the fifteenth process, a process of starting a timer interrupt process is executed by control using the area in use (the program in the area, the RWM area in the area).

As the 16th process (hereinafter, timer interrupt process), a process of saving registers to the stack area is executed by control using the area in use (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area).
As the 17th process, a ball removal operation process is executed by control using the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) to remove the gaming balls that are circulated in the gaming machine 1 from the gaming machine.
As the 18th process, a determination is made as to whether or not gaming machine installation information transmitted from the main control board 110 has been received by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, this is assumed to be "yes (received)").

As the 19th process, a determination is made as to whether or not the communication serial number of the received gaming machine installation information is the specified value "0" through control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, the serial number is set to "0").
As the 20th process, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is an internal gaming machine communication abnormality flag indicating that an internal gaming machine communication abnormality has occurred in the internal gaming machine RWM area through control using the internal usage area (internal area program, internal area RWM area) (here, it is assumed that there is no flag).
As the 21st process, a process is executed in which, by using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), gaming machine installation information is generated by combining the main control chip information (main control chip ID number, main control chip manufacturer code, main control chip product code) of the gaming machine installation information received from the main control board 110 and the frame control chip information (frame control chip ID number, frame control chip manufacturer code, frame control chip product code) stored in the frame control unit 120m.

As the 22nd process, a determination is made as to whether or not there is a ball removal operation in progress flag indicating that the ball removal operation is in progress (here, ``flag exists'') by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the 23rd process, a process is executed in which a message is generated and transmitted to the main control board 110 regarding gaming machine installation information (ball removal status) through control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the 24th process, an output control process is executed in which the command set in the transmission buffer (a command to start clearing the number of game balls) is sent to the performance control board 130 by control using the area in use (program in the area, RWM area in the area).

In this way, according to Figures 91(a) and 91(b), the process of clearing the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player is executed by control using the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which executes the process related to updating the number of game balls owned by the player (such as the game ball number update process described below). Therefore, it is possible to separate the functions of the area inside and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

Also, according to Figures 91(a) and 91(b), the process for displaying an error code related to clearing the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player is executed by control using the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which executes the process related to updating the number of game balls owned by the player (such as the game ball number update process described below). Therefore, it is possible to separate the functions of the area inside and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

Also, according to Figures 91(a) and 91(b), the process related to the ball removal operation of the game balls (game media) used in the game is executed by control using the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which executes the process related to updating the number of game balls owned by the player (such as the game ball count update process described below). Therefore, it is possible to separate the functions inside and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

Also, according to Figures 91(a) and 91(b), the process of displaying specific information related to the ball removal action of the game balls (game media) used in the game is performed by control using the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which executes the process related to updating the number of game balls owned by the player (such as the game ball count update process described below). Therefore, it is possible to separate the functions inside and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

Also, according to Figures 91(a) and 91(b), multiple processes from the startup process of the main processing program to the time launch is permitted are executed by control using the area used by the frame control unit 120m (intra-area programs, intra-area RWM area). Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the control process compared to a case where control using the area used by the frame control unit 120m is mixed with control using outside the area used.

Also, according to Figures 91(a) and 91(b), when the frame control board 120 sends and receives information (messages, commands) to and from other control boards (main control board 110, performance control board 130), the processing is performed by control using the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which executes processing related to updating the number of game balls owned by the player (such as the game ball number update processing described below). This makes it easier to achieve cooperation between multiple control boards, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Note that, by using control within the usage area of the frame control unit 120m (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area), the ball removal operation process, the generation of gaming machine installation information (main control chip information + frame control chip information), the setting of the game ball count clear start command and the ball removal operation in progress command in the transmission buffer, the setting of the game ball count clear flag, the generation of hole control/fraud monitoring information, etc., are performed, but one or more of these processes may be performed by control outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m (outside-area program, outside-area RWM area).

(Processing sequence when transmitting gaming machine information response after receiving gaming machine information on the frame control board)
FIG. 92 is a diagram showing the processing sequence when the frame control board 120 transmits a gaming machine information response after receiving gaming machine information (hall control and fraud monitoring information).

As the first process, a determination is made as to whether or not a gaming machine information message sent from the main control board 110 has been received by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, this is assumed to be "yes (received)").
As the second process, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is an internal gaming machine communication abnormality flag indicating that an internal gaming machine communication abnormality has occurred in the internal gaming machine RWM area through control using the internal usage area (internal area program, internal area RWM area) (here, "no flag").
As the third process, a process is executed in which main control status 1 and main control status 2 of the hall control/fraud monitoring information generated using the usage area of the main control unit 110m is stored by control using the usage area (programs within the area, RWM area within the area).

As the fourth process, a process is executed in which the gaming machine error status from the hall control/fraud monitoring information generated using the usage area of the main control unit 110m is stored by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the fifth process, a process is executed to store the fraud detection status 1 from the hall control/fraud monitoring information generated using the usage area of the main control unit 110m by control using the usage area (programs within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the sixth process, a process is executed in which the number of winning balls for gimmick activation and the number of winning balls for consecutive gimmicks are stored from the hole control/fraud monitoring information generated using the usage area of the main control unit 110m through control using the usage area (programs within the area, RWM area within the area).

As the seventh process, a process is executed in which various game information from the hall control and fraud monitoring information generated using the usage area of the main control unit 110m is stored by control using the usage area (programs within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the eighth process, a process is executed in which a message is generated and sent to the main control board 110 to respond to the gaming machine information (received OK) by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

Note that if it is determined in the first process that a gaming machine information message has not been received, the second to eighth processes will not be executed.

As such, according to FIG. 92, the process in which the frame control board 120 sends and receives information (messages) to and from the main control board 110 is performed by control using the area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which executes the process related to updating the number of game balls owned by the player (such as the game ball count update process described below). This makes it easier to achieve cooperation between multiple control boards, and makes it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

Also, according to FIG. 92, the process of storing gaming machine information including information related to game progress control received from the main control board is performed by control using the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which executes the process related to updating the number of gaming balls owned by the player (such as the gaming ball number update process described below). Therefore, it is possible to separate functions between the area inside and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

Also, according to FIG. 92, when the frame control board 120 sends and receives information (messages, commands) to and from another control board (main control board 110), the processing is performed by control using the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which controls updating the number of game balls owned by the player. This makes it easier to achieve cooperation between multiple control boards, and makes it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Note that, by using control within the usage area of the frame control unit 120m (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area), storage of main control state 1 and main control state 2, storage of gaming machine error state, storage of fraud detection state 1, storage of the number of prize balls for device activation and the number of consecutive prize balls for device activation, storage of various game information, etc., is performed, but one or more of these processes may be performed by control outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m (outside-area program, outside-area RWM area).

(Processing sequence when updating and displaying the number of game balls on the frame control board)
Figure 93 is a diagram showing the processing sequence when the number of game balls is updated and displayed on the frame control board 120.

As the first process, a gaming machine information reception process is executed by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to receive gaming machine information (hall control and fraud monitoring information) transmitted from the main control board 110.
As the second process, a determination is made as to whether or not a ball has been sent to the launch pad through control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, this is assumed to be "yes (ball has been sent)").
As the third process, a process is executed by control using the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) to subtract "1" from the number of game balls owned by the player, which is stored in the intra-area RWM area.

As the fourth process, a determination is made by control within the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) as to whether or not a foul ball has been launched by the launch device 92 but has returned without flying into the play area 5a (here, this is assumed to be "yes (foul ball present)").
As the fifth process, a process is executed by control using the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) to add "1" to the number of game balls owned by the player, which is stored in the intra-area RWM area.
As the sixth process, by using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), a determination is made as to whether or not the gaming machine information received from the main control board 110 includes information indicating that a gaming ball has won the general winning port 43 (prize ball schedule information that can identify the number of prize balls to be awarded to the player) (here, this is assumed to be "yes (a prize has been won)").

As the seventh process, a process is executed by control using the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) to add "5", which is the number of prize balls in the general winning port 43, to the number of game balls owned by the player stored in the intra-area RWM area.
As the eighth process, by using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), a determination is made as to whether or not the gaming machine information received from the main control board 110 includes information indicating that a gaming ball has entered the large prize opening 50 (prize ball schedule information that can identify the number of prize balls to be awarded to the player) (here, this is assumed to be "yes (a prize has been entered)").
As the ninth process, a process is executed by control using the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) to add "15", which is the number of prize balls in the large prize slot 50, to the number of game balls owned by the player stored in the intra-area RWM area.

As the tenth process, by using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), a determination is made as to whether or not the gaming machine information received from the main control board 110 includes information indicating that gaming balls have won at various starting ports (prize ball schedule information that can identify the number of prize balls to be awarded to the player) (here, this is assumed to be "Yes (a prize has been won)").
As the eleventh process, a determination is made as to whether the game ball entered the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47 by control using the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area).
As the 12th process, by using control within the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area), a process is executed to add the number of prize balls at the first starting hole 45, which is "3", and/or the number of prize balls at the second starting hole 47, which is "2", to the number of game balls owned by the player, which is stored in the intra-area RWM area.
As the thirteenth process, a display control process is executed by control using the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) to display the number of game balls owned by the player, which is stored in the intra-area RWM area, on the frame control display 125 and the game ball number display 135.

If it is determined in the second process that there is no ball feed, the third process is not executed and the fourth and subsequent processes are executed; if it is determined in the fourth process that there is no foul ball, the fifth process is not executed and the sixth and subsequent processes are executed; if it is determined in the sixth process that there is no winning in the general winning port 43, the seventh process is not executed and the eighth and subsequent processes are executed; if it is determined in the eighth process that there is no winning in the large winning port 50, the ninth process is not executed and the tenth and subsequent processes are executed; if it is determined in the tenth process that there is no winning in the starting port, the eleventh and twelfth processes are not executed and the thirteenth process is executed.

In this way, according to FIG. 93, multiple processes (addition and subtraction of the number of game balls) related to updating the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player are executed by control using the usage area of the frame control unit 120m (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area). Therefore, it is possible to separate functions between inside and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

Also, according to FIG. 93, the process related to displaying the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player (addition/subtraction of the number of game balls) is performed by control using the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which executes the process related to updating the number of game balls owned by the player. Therefore, it is possible to separate the functions inside and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

The number of game balls displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball number display 135 may be updated according to information indicating that a game ball has entered one of the winning slots among the game machine information received from the main control board 110 (prize ball schedule information that can identify the number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded to the player), and then the number of game balls owned by the player stored in the RWM area within the area of the frame control unit 120m may be updated.

(Processing sequence when an error control process is performed on the frame control board and launch is not permitted)
FIG. 94(a) is a diagram showing the processing sequence when error control processing is performed in the frame control board 120 and launch is not permitted.

As a first process, a severe error notification control process is executed by control using the outside of the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) to execute an error notification in response to the occurrence of a severe error with a high security alert level.
As a second process, a hardware error notification control process is executed by control using outside the used area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) to execute an error notification in response to the occurrence of a hardware error caused by hardware.
As a third process, a minor error notification control process is executed by control using the area outside the use area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) to execute an error notification in response to the occurrence of a minor error, which has a lower security alert level than a major error.

As the fourth process, an error code display setting process (here, setting for displaying an error code) is executed to set the display of an error code corresponding to an error occurring on the frame control display 125 according to the priority order of various errors, by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the fifth process, a process is executed in which, through control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), a determination is made as to whether or not to stop the output of the launch permission signal depending on whether or not an error that would be the subject of stopping the launch permission signal has occurred (here, this is assumed to be "yes (occurred)").
As the sixth process, a process is executed that prohibits the launch of game balls (including ball feeding) by the launch device 92 (stopping the output of the launch permission signal) by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

As the seventh process, a process is executed in which, through control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), it is determined whether or not to resume output of the launch permission signal depending on whether the error that is the subject of stopping the launch permission signal has ended (here, this is set to "No (not ended)").
As the eighth process, a display control process is executed to display the error code set in the error code display setting process on the frame control display 125 by control using the area in use (programs in the area, RWM area in the area).

(Processing sequence when an error control process is performed on the frame control board and launch is not permitted)
FIG. 94(b) is a diagram showing the processing sequence when error control processing is performed in the frame control board 120 and launch is permitted.

As a first process, a severe error notification control process is executed by control using the outside of the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) to execute an error notification in response to the occurrence of a severe error with a high security alert level.
As a second process, a hardware error notification control process is executed by control using outside the used area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) to execute an error notification in response to the occurrence of a hardware error caused by hardware.
As a third process, a minor error notification control process is executed by control using the area outside the use area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) to execute an error notification in response to the occurrence of a minor error, which has a lower security alert level than a major error.

As the fourth process, an error code display setting process (here, display setting for not displaying the error code) is executed to set the display of an error code corresponding to an error occurring on the frame control display 125 according to the priority order of various errors, by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the fifth process, a process is executed in which, through control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), a determination is made as to whether or not to stop the output of the launch permission signal depending on whether or not an error that would be the subject of stopping the launch permission signal has occurred (here, this is set to "no (not occurred)").
As the sixth process, a process is executed in which, through control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), a determination is made as to whether or not to resume output of the launch permission signal depending on whether or not the error that is the subject of stopping the launch permission signal has ended (here, this is set to "Yes (ended)").

As the seventh process, a process is executed to permit the launching device 92 to launch the game ball (including ball feeding) (to resume output of the launch permission signal) by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the eighth process, a display control process is executed by using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to make the error code whose display setting has been released by the error code display setting process invisible from the frame control display 125.

As shown in Figures 94(a) and 94(b), the process of detecting and reporting a specific error (magnet detection error, abnormal winning error) is executed by control using the outside of the use area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which executes complementary control other than updating the number of game balls owned by the player. Therefore, it is possible to separate the functions of the inside and outside of the use area of the frame control unit 120m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

Also, according to Figures 94(a) and 94(b), the process of disallowing launch, which restricts play when a certain error occurs (magnet detection error, abnormal winning error), is executed by control using the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which executes the process related to updating the number of game balls owned by the player. Therefore, it is possible to separate the functions of the area inside and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

Also, according to Figures 94(a) and 94(b), the process (error code display setting process, display control process) for displaying an error code in response to the occurrence of a specified error (magnet detection error, abnormal winning error) is executed by control using the use area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which executes the process related to updating the number of game balls owned by the player (such as the game ball number update process described below). Therefore, it is possible to separate the functions inside and outside the use area of the frame control unit 120m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

Note that, while error code display setting processing, determination of whether to stop output of the launch permission signal, determination of whether to resume output of the launch permission signal, display of error codes, etc. were performed by control using the area used by the frame control unit 120m (intra-area programs, intra-area RWM area), one or more of these processes may be performed by control using an area outside the area used by the frame control unit 120m (outside-area programs, outside-area RWM area).

(Processing order when display performance information is calculated and displayed on the frame control board)
FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a processing sequence when the frame control board 120 calculates and displays display performance information (normal base value).

As the first process, a gaming machine information reception process is executed by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to receive gaming machine information (hall control and fraud monitoring information) transmitted from the main control board 110.
As the second process, by using control outside the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area), a determination is made as to whether or not the current state is normal gaming by referring to the gaming machine information received from the main control board 110 (here, this is assumed to be "yes (normal gaming state)").
As the third process, a determination is made as to whether or not there has been an update since the previous game information through control using the outside of the use area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) (here, the result is "Yes (there is an update)").

As the fourth process, a process is executed by control outside the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) to calculate the number of winning balls this time by referring to the gaming machine information received from the main control board 110.
As the fifth process, a process is executed in which a normal prize ball count counter for counting the number of prize balls during normal game play is updated according to the current number of prize balls by control outside the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area).
As the sixth process, by using control outside the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area), a determination is made as to whether or not there is an out ball by referring to the gaming machine information received from the main control board 110 (here, this is assumed to be "yes (out ball present)").

As the seventh process, a process is executed in which "1" is added to the total out counter for counting the number of out balls in all play states in the current play area by control using outside the use area (out-area program, outside-area RWM area).
As the eighth process, by using control outside the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area), a determination is made as to whether or not the current state is normal gaming by referring to the gaming machine information received from the main control board 110 (here, this is assumed to be "yes (normal gaming state)").
As the ninth process, a process is executed in which "1" is added to the normal out count counter for counting the number of out balls during normal game play by control outside the use area (out area program, outside area RWM area).

As the tenth process, a determination is made as to whether or not the current state is the first game zone by control using the outside of the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) (here, no, "second game zone or later").
As an eleventh process, a process is executed to calculate a normal base value, which is display performance information to be displayed on the frame control display 125, by control using the outside of the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area).
As the twelfth process, a process is executed in which the calculated normal base value is stored in the outside-area RWM area as the normal base value in the current play area by control using the outside-area (outside-area program, outside-area RWM area).

As the 13th process, a determination is made as to whether or not to update the game area depending on the value of the total number of outs counter by control using outside the use area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) (here, this is assumed to be "yes (update performed)").
As the 14th process, a process is executed in which the normal prize ball count counter, the total out count counter, and the normal out count counter are cleared to 0 and the game area is updated by control outside the use area (outside area program, outside area RWM area).
As the fifteenth process, a display control process is executed in which the calculated current normal base value is displayed on the frame control display 125 by control using the area in use (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area).

If it is determined in the second process that the game is not in a normal game state, the third to fifth processes are not executed, and the sixth process and onwards are executed; if it is determined in the third process that the game information has not been updated, the fourth and fifth processes are not executed, and the sixth process and onwards are executed; if it is determined in the sixth process that there is no out ball, the seventh to ninth processes are not executed, and the tenth process and onwards are executed; if it is determined in the thirteenth process that the game area is not to be updated, the fourteenth process is not executed, and the fifteenth process is executed.

In this way, according to FIG. 95, the process of calculating display performance information (normal base value) that does not affect the control of the progress of the game is executed by control using the outside of the use area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which executes complementary control different from updating the number of game balls owned by the player. Therefore, it is possible to separate the functions of the inside and outside of the use area of the frame control unit 120m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

Also, according to FIG. 95, the process of displaying the display performance information (normal base value) on the frame control display 125, which displays the number of game balls owned by the player, is executed by control using the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which controls updating the number of game balls owned by the player. Therefore, it is possible to separate the functions of the area inside and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

Note that, while the process for displaying the display performance information (normal base value) was executed by control using the area within the use area of the frame control unit 120m (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area), the process may also be executed by control using the area outside the use area of the frame control unit 120m (outside-area program, outside-area RWM area).

In addition, the calculation of the display performance information (normal base value) (display performance information calculation process) and the process of displaying the display performance information (normal base value) (display control process) may be executed by the main control unit 110m and displayed on the information display unit 115, rather than being executed by the frame control unit 120m. In this case, the calculation may be executed within the use area of the main control unit 110m (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area), or outside the use area of the main control unit 110m (outside area program, outside area RWM area), or one of the calculation and display of the display performance information may be executed within the use area of the main control unit 110m (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) and the other may be executed outside the use area of the main control unit 110m (outside area program, outside area RWM area).

(Processing order when the frame control board 120 calculates gaming machine performance information)
Figure 96 is a diagram showing the processing sequence when the frame control board 120 calculates gaming machine performance information to be transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine 1 (dedicated unit 170).

As the first process, a gaming machine information reception process is executed by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to receive gaming machine information (hall control and fraud monitoring information) transmitted from the main control board 110.
As the second process, a total number of balls fired calculation process is executed by control outside the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) to calculate the total number of balls fired into the game area 5a from the establishment of the counting start condition to the present, by referring to the game machine information received from the main control board 110.
As the third process, by using control outside the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area), a total won game ball calculation process is executed by referring to the game machine information received from the main control board 110 to calculate the total won game balls, which is the number of prize balls from the establishment of the counting start condition to the present.

As the fourth process, a ball discharge rate calculation process is executed by control outside the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) to calculate the ball discharge rate, which is the ratio (proportion) of the total number of game balls acquired to the total number of balls fired.
As the fifth process, a process for calculating the number of game balls acquired per minute is executed by control outside the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) to calculate the number of game balls acquired per minute, which is the total number of prize balls awarded to the player in the most recent minute.
As the sixth process, a device ratio calculation process is executed by control outside the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) to calculate a device ratio, which is the ratio of the number of game balls acquired based on the operation of various devices (execution of auxiliary games and jackpot games) to the total number of game balls acquired.

As the seventh process, a continuous role ratio calculation process is executed by control using outside the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) to calculate a continuous role ratio, which is the ratio of the number of game balls acquired based on the operation of continuous roles (execution of a jackpot game) to the total number of game balls acquired.
As the eighth process, a jackpot count calculation process is executed by control outside the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) to calculate the number of jackpot games that have been played from the establishment of the counting start condition to the present.
As the ninth process, a maximum ball output calculation process is executed by control outside the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) to calculate the maximum ball output, which is the largest difference between the total number of winning balls and the total number of balls fired from a certain point in time (for example, the start of the jackpot game).

In this way, according to FIG. 96, the process of calculating (collecting) gaming machine performance information that does not affect the control of the progress of the game is executed by control using the outside of the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which executes complementary control different from updating the number of gaming balls owned by the player. Therefore, it is possible to separate the functions of the inside and outside of the usage area of the frame control unit 120m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

(Processing sequence 1 when gaming machine information notification processing is performed on the frame control board)
Figure 97 (a) is a diagram showing processing order 1 (when transmission of hall control and fraud monitoring information is given priority) when gaming machine information notification processing is performed by the frame control board 120.

As the first process, a determination is made as to whether or not there has been an update to the main control state or game information since the last game machine information notification by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, this is assumed to be "there has been an update").
As the second process, by using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), a determination is made as to whether or not it is time to transmit hall control and fraud monitoring information to the outside of the gaming machine 1 (dedicated unit 170) (here, ``Yes (transmission timing)'').
As the third process, a process is executed in which a telegram of hole control and fraud monitoring information is generated by referring to the RWM area through control using the area in use (program in area, RWM area in area).

As the fourth process, a process is executed to transmit the generated hole control and fraud monitoring information by control using the use area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the fifth process, a determination is made as to whether or not it is time to transmit gaming machine installation information to the outside of the gaming machine 1 (dedicated unit 170) through control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, "Yes (transmission timing)").
As the sixth process, a process is executed in which a telegram of gaming machine installation information is generated by referring to the RWM area through control using the area in use (program in area, RWM area in area).

As the seventh process, a process is executed in which a message of the generated gaming machine installation information is transmitted by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the eighth process, a determination is made as to whether or not it is time to transmit gaming machine performance information to the outside of the gaming machine 1 (dedicated unit 170) through control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, "Yes (transmission timing)").
As the ninth process, a process is executed in which a telegram of gaming machine performance information is generated by referring to the RWM area through control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the tenth process, a process is executed to transmit the generated gaming machine performance information as a message by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

If it is determined in the second process that it is not the time to transmit hall control/fraud monitoring information, the third and fourth processes will not be executed, if it is determined in the fifth process that it is not the time to transmit gaming machine installation information, the sixth and seventh processes will not be executed, and if it is determined in the eighth process that it is not the time to transmit gaming machine performance information, the ninth and tenth processes will not be executed.

(Processing sequence 2 when gaming machine information notification processing is performed on the frame control board)
Figure 97 (b) is a diagram showing processing order 2 when gaming machine information notification processing is performed by the frame control board 120 (when transmission of hall control/fraud monitoring information is not given priority).

As the first process, a determination is made as to whether or not there has been an update to the main control state or game information since the last game machine information notification by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, "no update").
As the second process, a determination is made as to whether or not it is time to transmit gaming machine installation information to the outside of the gaming machine 1 (dedicated unit 170) through control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, "Yes (transmission timing)").
As a third process, a process is executed in which a telegram of gaming machine installation information is generated by referring to the RWM area through control using the area in use (program in area, RWM area in area).

As a fourth process, a process of transmitting the generated gaming machine installation information by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) is executed.
As the fifth process, a determination is made as to whether or not it is time to transmit gaming machine performance information to the outside of the gaming machine 1 (dedicated unit 170) through control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, "Yes (transmission timing)").
As the sixth process, a process is executed in which a message of gaming machine performance information is generated by referring to the RWM area through control using the area in use (program in area, RWM area in area).

As the seventh process, a process is executed in which a telegram transmission of the generated gaming machine performance information is carried out by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the eighth process, a determination is made as to whether or not it is time to transmit hall control and fraud monitoring information to the outside of the gaming machine 1 (dedicated unit 170) through control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, "yes (transmission timing)").
As the ninth process, a process is executed in which a telegram of hole control and fraud monitoring information is generated by referring to the RWM area through control using the area in use (programs in the area, RWM area in the area).
As the tenth process, a process is executed to transmit the generated hole control and fraud monitoring information by control using the use area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

If it is determined in the second process that it is not the time to transmit gaming machine installation information, the third and fourth processes will not be executed, if it is determined in the fifth process that it is not the time to transmit gaming machine performance information, the sixth and seventh processes will not be executed, and if it is determined in the eighth process that it is not the time to transmit hall control/fraud monitoring information, the ninth and tenth processes will not be executed.

In this way, according to Figures 97(a) and 97(b), the process (message generation, message transmission, etc.) of notifying the dedicated unit 170 of gaming machine information including information related to the number of gaming balls (gaming value) owned by the player is executed by control using the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which controls updating the number of gaming balls owned by the player. Therefore, it is possible to separate functions between inside and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

Note that, while the determination of whether the game status or game information has been updated, the determination of whether it is time to transmit various information, etc. were performed by control using the area used by the frame control unit 120m (intra-area programs, intra-area RWM area), one or more of these processes may be performed by control using outside the area used by the frame control unit 120m (outside-area programs, outside-area RWM area).

(Processing sequence when the number of game balls owned by a player is counted on the frame control board)
Figure 98 (a) is a diagram showing the processing sequence when the frame control board 120 counts the number of gaming balls owned by a player (transfers data to the outside).

As the first process, by using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), a determination is made as to whether or not it is the counting timing (which occurs every 300 ms) 100 ms after the previous notification of gaming machine information (message transmission) (here, this is set to "positive counting timing").
As the second process, a determination is made as to whether or not the count button 20 has been operated (here, this is assumed to be "operated") through control using the area in use (the program in the area, the RWM area in the area).
As the third process, a determination is made as to whether or not there are a countable number of game balls by control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, "countable (number of game balls >0)").

As the fourth process, a process is executed in which a counting process in progress flag, which indicates that counting process is in progress, is set (ON) by control using the use area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area).
As the fifth process, a process is executed in which a counting process notification designation command indicating that counting process is in progress is set in the transmission buffer by control using the area in use (the program in the area, the RWM area in the area).
As the sixth process, by using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), a determination is made as to whether the number of countable game balls is the number of game balls that restricts the launch of game balls (here referred to as the ``number of balls that are restricted from being launched'').

As the seventh process, a determination is made as to whether or not the conditions for stopping the output of the launch permission signal are met through control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, this is assumed to be "yes (condition met)").
As the eighth process, a process is executed that prohibits the launch of game balls (including ball feeding) by the launching device 92 (stopping the output of the launch permission signal) by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the ninth process, by using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), a process is executed to subtract 250 game balls from the number of game balls owned by the player if the number of game balls is 250 or more, or subtract all of the game balls from the number of game balls owned by the player if the number of game balls is less than 250.

As the tenth process, by using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), a process is executed in which the cumulative number of counted balls counted from the start of the counting process is increased by the number of game balls subtracted in the ninth process.
As the eleventh process, a process is executed in which, by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), a counting notification message is generated and sent to the dedicated unit 170, the message including information on the number of game balls subtracted in this counting process.
As the twelfth process, an output control process is executed in which the command (counting process notification designation command) set in the transmission buffer is sent to the performance control board 130 by control using the area in use (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

If it is determined in the sixth process that the number of balls is not within the launch restriction (number of game balls > 1,000), the seventh and eighth processes will not be executed, and the ninth and subsequent processes will be executed. Also, if it is determined in the seventh process that the condition for stopping the output of the launch permission signal is not met, the eighth process will not be executed, and the ninth and subsequent processes will be executed.

(Processing sequence when counting the number of game balls owned by a player is completed on the frame control board)
Figure 98 (b) is a diagram showing the processing sequence when counting the number of gaming balls owned by a player on the frame control board 120 (data transfer to the outside) is completed.

As the first process, by using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), a determination is made as to whether or not it is the counting timing (which occurs every 300 ms) 100 ms after the previous notification of gaming machine information (message transmission) (here, this is set to "positive counting timing").
As the second process, a determination is made as to whether or not the count button 20 has been operated (here, it is assumed that the count button 20 has not been operated) through control using the area in use (the program in the area, the RWM area in the area).
As the third process, by using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), a determination is made as to whether or not counting process is in progress based on whether or not the counting process in progress flag is set (here, "counting process in progress flag is set").

As the fourth process, a process of clearing the counting process in progress flag set in the RWM area is executed by control using the area in use (the program in the area, the RWM area in the area).
As the fifth process, a process is executed in which a counting process completion designation command indicating that the counting process has been completed is set in the transmission buffer by control using the area in use (the program in the area, the RWM area in the area).
As the sixth process, a process is executed by control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to clear the cumulative number of balls counted from the start of the counting process (after the counting process in progress flag is set).

As the seventh process, a determination is made as to whether or not the conditions for resuming the output of the launch permission signal are met through control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, this is assumed to be "yes (condition met)").
As the eighth process, a process is executed to permit the launching device 92 to launch the game ball (including ball feeding) (to resume output of the launch permission signal) by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the ninth process, a process is executed in which, by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), a counting notification message is generated and sent, which includes information that the number of game balls counted for the dedicated unit 170 is "0".
As the tenth process, an output control process is executed in which the command set in the transmission buffer (counting process completion designation command) is sent to the performance control board 130 by control using the area in use (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

If it is determined in the seventh process that the conditions for resuming output of the launch permission signal are not met, the eighth process will not be executed and the ninth and subsequent processes will be executed.

As such, according to Figures 98(a) and 98(b), the process related to counting the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player is executed by control using the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which performs control to update the number of game balls owned by the player. Therefore, it is possible to separate the functions inside and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

Also, according to Figures 98(a) and 98(b), the process of disallowing launch, which restricts play in accordance with the counting of the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, is executed by control using the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which controls updating the number of game balls owned by the player. Therefore, it is possible to separate the functions of the area inside and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

Also, according to Figures 98(a) and 98(b), the process (message generation, message transmission, etc.) of sending a counting notification including information on the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player to the dedicated unit 170 is performed by control using the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which controls updating the number of game balls owned by the player. Therefore, it is possible to separate the functions of the area inside and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

Note that, by using control within the usage area of the frame control unit 120m (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area), the following processes are performed: determining whether it is time to count, determining whether the count button 20 has been operated, setting the counting flag, setting various commands to the transmission buffer, determining the number of game balls, determining whether to stop or resume output of the launch permission signal, and adding up the cumulative number of counted balls. However, one or more of these processes may be performed by control outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m (outside-area program, outside-area RWM area).

(Processing sequence when lending processing is performed by receiving a lending notification on the frame control board)
FIG. 99(a) is a diagram showing the processing sequence when lending processing is performed upon receipt of a lending notification by the frame control board 120.

As the first process, a determination is made as to whether or not a loan notification message sent from the dedicated unit 170 has been received through control using the area in use (program in the area, RWM area in the area) (here, this is assumed to be "yes (received)").
As the second process, a determination is made as to whether or not there is an abnormality in the loan serial number contained in the received loan notification (whether or not it is the previous loan serial number + 1) using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, this is assumed to be "normal").
As the third process, a process is executed in which the lending serial number included in the received lending notification is stored as the previous lending serial number by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

As the fourth process, a determination is made as to whether or not the ball removal operation is currently in progress through control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, the result is "No (ball removal operation not in progress)").
As the fifth process, through control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), a determination is made as to whether the game balls (game value) are available for loan based on whether the number of game balls owned by the player is below a specified value (100,000) (here, this is referred to as "available for loan").
As the sixth process, a determination is made by control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) as to whether the number of loaned balls contained in the received loan notification message is a normal value (0 to 250) (here, it is assumed that the number is "normal" and the game balls (game value) will be loaned out).

As the seventh process, a determination is made by control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) as to whether the number of loaned balls contained in the received loan notification message is greater than "0" (loaned) (here, "yes").
As the eighth process, a process is executed by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to add the number of loaned balls contained in the received loan notification message to the number of game balls owned by the player.
As the ninth process, a process is executed in which a message is generated and sent to the dedicated unit 170 in response to the loan acceptance result (normal) by control using the area in use (program in area, RWM area in area).

(Processing sequence when the frame control board receives a loan notification but does not perform the loan process)
FIG. 99(b) is a diagram showing the processing sequence when the frame control board 120 receives a lending notification but does not perform lending processing.
It should be noted that the first to fifth processes in FIG. 99(b) are the same as the first to fifth processes in FIG. 99(a), respectively, and therefore will not be described here.

As the sixth process, a determination is made by control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) as to whether the number of loaned balls contained in the received loan notification message is a normal value (0 to 250) (here, this is assumed to be "abnormal" and no loan of game balls (game value) will be performed).
As the seventh process, a process is executed in which a message is generated and sent to the dedicated unit 170 as a response to the loan receipt result (abnormal) by control using the area in use (program in area, RWM area in area).

In addition, if it is determined in the fourth process that the ball removal operation is in progress, the seventh process will be executed without carrying out the fifth and sixth processes, as it is assumed that no game balls (game value) will be lent out.

As shown in Figures 99(a) and 99(b), the process related to lending the number of game balls (game value) is executed by control using the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which controls updating the number of game balls owned by the player. Therefore, it is possible to separate the functions inside and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

Also, according to Figures 99(a) and 99(b), the process (message generation, message transmission, etc.) of notifying the dedicated unit 170 of the loan receipt result response including information related to the loan of the number of game balls (game value) is executed by control using the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which controls updating the number of game balls owned by the player. Therefore, it is possible to separate functions between the area inside and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

Note that, by using control within the usage area of the frame control unit 120m (intra-area programs, intra-area RWM area), abnormality determination of the loan serial number, storage of the loan serial number, determination of whether the ball is being removed, determination of whether a loan is possible, determination of the number of loaned balls, etc. are performed, but one or more of these processes may be performed by control outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m (outside-area programs, outside-area RWM area).

(Summary of the relationship between the processing order of various control contents and implementation areas)
84 to 99, the control boards (main control board 110, frame control board 120) related to the progress of the game are provided with an in-area ROM area for storing an in-area program for controlling the progress of the game (first control), an out-area ROM area for storing an out-area program for performing complementary control of the game (second control), an in-area RWM area that is updated and referenced in the first control and not updated in the second control, and an out-area RWM area that is updated and referenced in the second control and not updated in the first control. Therefore, the control for operating the gaming machine 1 can be divided into functions, and the efficiency of the control process can be improved.

Also, according to Figures 84 to 99, the control boards (main control board 110, frame control board 120) related to the progress of the game perform an awarding process (payout control process, game ball number update process) that awards prize balls (game value) based on the winning of game balls into various winning ports (establishment of the awarding condition), a first update process (increase counter update process, maximum increment update process) that updates the first game information (increase counter, maximum increment) using information on the awarded prize balls (game value), and a stop process (stop control) that stops the progress control of the game (first control) based on the first game information. The control unit 100 can execute a stop process (acquired upper limit device operation determination process), a second update process (display performance information calculation process, gaming machine performance information calculation process) that uses information on the awarded prize balls (game value) to update second game information (display performance information, gaming machine performance information), and an output process (display control process, gaming machine information notification process) that outputs the second game information to an output target (frame control display 125, dedicated unit 170). The first update process and the second update process are executed using an out-of-area program (outside the area of use). Therefore, multiple information update functions can be consolidated into the out-of-area program, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control for operating the gaming machine 1.

Also, according to Figures 84 to 99, the main control board 110 has an in-area ROM area that stores an in-area program for performing control related to the progress of the game (first control), an out-area ROM area that stores an out-area program for performing complementary control of the game (second control), an in-area RWM area that is updated and referenced by the first control but not updated by the second control, and an out-area RWM area that is updated and referenced by the second control but not updated by the first control. Therefore, the control for operating the gaming machine 1 can be functionally separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

Also, according to Figures 84 to 99, the main control board 110 has an in-area ROM area that stores an in-area program for performing control (first control) related to the launch of a gaming ball (gaming medium), an out-area ROM area that stores an out-area program for performing complementary control of the game (second control), an in-area RWM area that is updated and referenced in the first control but not updated in the second control, and an out-area RWM area that is updated and referenced in the second control but not updated in the first control. Therefore, the control for operating the gaming machine 1 can be functionally separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

Also, according to Figures 84 to 99, the frame control board 120 has an in-area ROM area that stores an in-area program for performing control (third control) related to updating the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, an outside-area ROM area that stores an outside-area program for performing complementary control of the game (fourth control), an in-area RWM area that is updated and referenced by the third control but not updated by the fourth control, and an outside-area RWM area that is updated and referenced by the fourth control but not updated by the third control. Therefore, the control for operating the gaming machine 1 can be functionally separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

Also, according to Figures 84 to 99, the frame control board 120 has an internal ROM area that stores an internal program for performing control (third control) to output predetermined information (gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, hall control/fraud monitoring information, etc.) to the outside of the gaming machine, an external ROM area that stores an external program for performing complementary control of the game (fourth control), an internal RWM area that is updated and referenced in the third control but not updated in the fourth control, and an external RWM area that is updated and referenced in the fourth control but not updated in the third control. Therefore, the control for operating the gaming machine 1 can be functionally separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

Also, according to Figures 84 to 99, the frame control board 120 has an in-area ROM area that stores an in-area program for performing control (third control) to notify the player of the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player (display on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135), an outside-area ROM area that stores an outside-area program for performing complementary control of the game (fourth control), an in-area RWM area that is updated and referenced in the third control but not updated in the fourth control, and an outside-area RWM area that is updated and referenced in the fourth control but not updated in the third control. Therefore, the control for operating the gaming machine 1 can be functionally separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

Furthermore, according to Figures 84 to 99, communication (information message transmission, response message transmission, etc.) between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 is performed using an internal program stored in the internal ROM area of the main control board 110 or an internal program stored in the internal ROM area of the frame control board 120. This makes it easier to achieve cooperation between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, and makes it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Also, according to FIG. 84 to FIG. 99, the frame control board 120 has an internal ROM area that stores an internal program for performing control (third control) for outputting specific information (gaming machine performance information, hall control/fraud monitoring information, etc.) to the outside of the gaming machine 1, an external ROM area that stores an external program for performing control (fourth control) for generating specific information (gaming machine performance information, hall control/fraud monitoring information, etc.), an internal RWM area that is updated and referenced in the third control and not updated in the fourth control, and an external RWM area that is updated and referenced in the fourth control and not updated in the third control, and the specific information (gaming machine performance information, hall control/fraud monitoring information, etc.) is a predetermined calculation result related to the gaming ball (gaming value). Therefore, the control for operating the gaming machine 1 can be divided into functions, and the efficiency of the control process can be improved. In addition, it is possible to utilize the specific information outside the gaming machine 1.

Also, according to Figures 84 to 99, the main control board 110, which controls the progress of the game, executes a first control for generating first information (gaming machine installation information, hall control/fraud monitoring information, etc.) and a second control for transmitting the first information to the frame control board 120, and the frame control board 120, which controls the awarding of game balls (game value), executes a third control for generating second information (gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, hall control/fraud monitoring information, counting notification, loan receipt result response, etc.), a fourth control for receiving the first information (gaming machine installation information, hall control/fraud monitoring information, etc.), a fifth control for transmitting the first information and the second information (gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, hall control/fraud monitoring information, etc.) to the outside of the gaming machine 1, and a sixth control for transmitting the third information (counting notification, loan receipt result response, etc.) to the outside of the gaming machine 1. This allows the information output function of the gaming machine 1 to be consolidated in the frame control board 120, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Also, according to Figures 84 to 99, the main control board 110, which controls the progress of the game, and the frame control board 120, which controls the awarding of game balls (game value), are capable of permitting the launch of game balls (game media) (outputting a launch permission signal), and the launching device 92 is capable of launching game balls (game media) when launch is permitted by the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 (two launch permission signals are input). Therefore, the launch of game balls can be stopped from either the main control board 110 or the frame control board 120, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

Note that the related areas (send buffer, receive buffer, input port, output port) used in relation to the control contents are used in common within the usage area (intra-area programs, intra-area RWM area) and outside the usage area (outside-area programs, outside-area RWM area), but it is also possible to provide separate related areas (send buffer, receive buffer, input port, output port) within the usage area and outside the usage area, or to provide some common areas within the usage area and outside the usage area and provide others separately within the usage area and outside the usage area.

In addition, the multiple processes from determining whether a power outage has occurred in the main control board 110 to waiting for the power outage may be executed by control using outside the usage area of the main control unit 110m (outside area programs, outside area RWM area), but it is preferable to execute them by control using within the usage area of the main control unit 110m (inside area programs, inside area RWM area).

In addition, the multiple processes from determining whether a power outage has occurred in the frame control board 120 to waiting for the power outage may be executed by control using outside the area used by the frame control unit 120m (outside area programs, outside area RWM area), but it is preferable to execute them by control using inside the area used by the frame control unit 120m (inside area programs, inside area RWM area).

(Main processing of the production control section)
Next, the main processing of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 100. Fig. 100 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the performance control unit 130m.

When power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub-CPU 130a, and the sub-CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

First, in step E10, the sub-CPU 130a sets interrupt inhibition to inhibit timer interrupts, and in step E20, performs initialization processing. Specifically, in response to power-on, the sub-CPU 130a reads the main processing program from the sub-ROM 130b, initializes flags and the like stored in the sub-RAM 130c, and performs processing such as initial settings.

In step E30, the sub-CPU 130a sets an interrupt permission to permit a timer interrupt, and in step E40, performs a sub-random number update process. Specifically, it performs a process to update various random numbers stored in the sub-RAM 130c. Thereafter, the process of step E40 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of the production control unit)
The timer interrupt process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 101. Fig. 101 is a flow chart showing the timer interrupt process executed in the performance control unit 130m at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

First, in step E100, the sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the registers of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area, and in step E120, performs timer update processing. In this timer update processing, the sub CPU 130a performs processing to update various timers.

In step E130, the sub-CPU 130a performs the input control process shown in FIG. 102. Specifically, it determines whether or not there has been an input to various switches such as the performance button detection switch 17a and the joystick detection switch 19a, and if there has been an input, it performs a process to set predetermined data. The details of the input control process will be described later.

In step E150, the sub-CPU 130a performs command analysis processing. Specifically, it determines whether various commands have been sent from the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, and if various commands have been sent, it stores the received commands in the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c.

The sub-CPU 130a performs setting change/confirmation processing in step E170. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a setting change designation command or a setting confirmation designation command has been received, and if a setting change designation command has been received, the sub-CPU 130a performs processing to execute the setting change notification described above, and if a setting confirmation designation command has been received, the sub-CPU 130a performs processing to execute the setting confirmation notification described above.

The sub-CPU 130a performs power-on processing in step E200. Specifically, it refers to the receive buffer in the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a power-on command has been received, and if so, performs processing to execute a power-on notification. More specifically, it sends a power-on notification command to the image control unit 145, causing the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), the third image display device 72, and the fourth image display device 73 to display a power-on screen, and causes the audio output device 9 to output a power-on sound.

In step E250, the sub-CPU 130a performs power outage recovery processing. Specifically, it refers to the receive buffer in the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a power recovery designation command has been received, and if so, performs processing to execute a power outage recovery notification. In more detail, it sends a power recovery notification command to the image control unit 145, causing the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), the third image display device 72, and the fourth image display device 73 to display a power recovery screen, and causes the audio output device 9 to output a power recovery sound.

The sub-CPU 130a transmits a "power-on command" to the lamp control unit 150 during power-on processing and power outage recovery processing. Then, the lamp control unit 150, which receives the "power-on command," drives the panel drive device 75 to execute the initial operation of the first movable member 77a and the second movable member 77b. The initial operation means that when a power-on notification or power outage recovery notification is being made, the first movable member 77a and the second movable member 77b operate in the same or substantially the same operating mode as during the variable performance. This initial operation allows the operation of the first movable member 77a and the second movable member 77b to be checked, and it can be confirmed whether they are operating normally.

In step E300, the sub-CPU 130a performs customer waiting performance processing. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a customer waiting state designation command has been received, and if so, performs processing to perform a customer waiting demo performance after a predetermined time has elapsed. In more detail, it sends a customer waiting performance command to the image control unit 145 to cause the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), the third image display device 72, and the fourth image display device 73 to display a customer waiting demo screen, and to output a customer waiting demo sound from the audio output device 9. The details of the customer waiting demo performance will be described later.

In step E350, the sub-CPU 130a performs a game status update process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a game status designation command has been received, and if so, performs a process to update the game status information stored in the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E400, the sub-CPU 130a performs a reserved information update process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a special reserved number designation command or a regular reserved number designation command has been received, and if so, performs a process to update the first special reserved number, second special reserved number, regular reserved number, etc. stored (knowledged) in the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E500, the sub-CPU 130a performs look-ahead performance processing. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a look-ahead specification command or a special chart change pattern specification command has been received, and if so, performs processing related to the look-ahead performance such as icon change performance, continuous preview performance, lamp change performance, and reserved consecutive win performance. Details of the look-ahead performance processing will be described later.

An "icon change effect" is a type of pre-reading preview effect that changes the reserved icon and the display mode of the icon to give the player hope that a jackpot game will be executed. Note that in this embodiment, an icon change effect for a reserved icon may be referred to as a "reserved icon change effect," and an icon change effect for the icon in question may be referred to as a "respective icon change effect."

The "continuous preview performance" is a type of anticipatory preview performance that makes the player anticipate the execution of a jackpot game by executing a predetermined performance over one or more variable performances.
The "lamp change effect" is a type of anticipatory preview effect that makes the player anticipate hitting a jackpot by changing the lighting state of the winning port lamp over one or more variable effects.

The "reserved consecutive win effect" is a type of pre-reading preview effect that is executed during jackpot play. For example, in a high probability time-saving play state, when a random number value for jackpot determination that is determined to be a jackpot is stored in the second special chart determination information reserved memory area of the main RAM 110c, the movable effect device 77 is operated at a predetermined timing to notify the player that the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory that is executed after the jackpot play ends is a jackpot prior to the execution of the variable display.

In step E600, the sub-CPU 130a performs special symbol special electric effect processing. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a special symbol designation command, a special symbol variation pattern designation command, a special symbol stop designation command, a jackpot opening designation command, a round number designation command, and a jackpot ending designation command have been received, and if so, performs processing to execute the effect corresponding to the received command.

In addition, if the special symbol designation command (first information signal) and the special symbol change pattern designation command (second information signal) as the start command (start signal) accompanying the start of the change display are received normally, a change performance accompanied by a change display of the performance pattern 70a (a first change performance corresponding to the change display of the first special symbol, and a second change performance corresponding to the change display of the second special symbol) will be executed. However, if there is an abnormality in the special symbol designation command or the special symbol change pattern designation command (miss, big win relationship does not match, the type of special symbol indicated by the MODE in the command does not match, the DATA side of the command is damaged and has changed to an impossible content, etc.), the command is considered invalid and the change performance is not executed. In addition, if the special symbol designation command and the special symbol change pattern designation command are not received normally (the special symbol designation command is not received within a specified time after the special symbol designation command is received, the special symbol change pattern designation command is received without receiving the special symbol designation command, etc.), the command is considered invalid and the change performance is not executed. In the following explanation, a "command error" will be referred to as an abnormality in the command or when the command is not received correctly.

In step E700, the sub-CPU 130a performs normal symbol and normal power presentation processing. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a normal symbol designation command, a normal symbol variation pattern designation command, a normal symbol stop designation command, a winning opening designation command, and a winning ending designation command have been received, and if so, performs processing to execute the presentation corresponding to the received command.

In step E800, the sub-CPU 130a performs a presentation mode update process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a presentation mode update condition is satisfied, which specifies the presentation elements (presentation pattern type, background image type, icon type, icon action type, presentation pattern 70a change path type, presentation pattern 70a pre-change action type, presentation pattern 70a pre-stop action type, change BGM type, etc.) in the sound output device 9, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, the third image display device 72, the fourth image display device 73, etc., described later, and performs a process to update the presentation mode to one of a plurality of presentation modes if the update condition is satisfied. The details of the presentation mode update process will be described later.

The "presentation modes" include presentation modes A to C, which are set in the normal game state (low probability non-time-saving game state), presentation modes D to E, which are set in the probability variable game state (high probability time-saving game state), and presentation mode F, which is set in the time-saving game state (low probability time-saving game state). Note that the presentation mode that is first set when the game is controlled to the normal game state when the power is turned on (for example, after changing the settings, clearing the RWM, or confirming the settings) is always presentation mode A, the presentation mode that is first set when the game is controlled to the probability variable game state when the power is turned on is always presentation mode D, and the presentation mode that is first set when the game is controlled to the time-saving game state when the power is turned on is always presentation mode F.

In addition, in presentation modes A to C, the presentation pattern 70a is composed of numbers (identification characters) + characters (decorative part) corresponding to the numbers + a pattern effect image (decorative part) that decorates the background of the numbers and characters, and the designs of the numbers and characters differ between presentation modes. In presentation modes D to F, the presentation pattern 70a is composed of numbers (identification characters) only, and the design of the numbers is the same between presentation modes. In addition, in presentation modes A to F, the background image corresponding to each presentation mode scrolls left and right (reciprocating motion).

The sub-CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E850. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the receiving buffer in the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether an error designation command or an error cancellation designation command has been received from the main control board 110 or the frame control board 120, and if an error designation command or an error cancellation designation command has been received, performs processing to execute an error notification effect corresponding to the received error designation command, or performs processing to end the error notification effect corresponding to the received error cancellation designation command.

In step E900, the sub-CPU 130a performs output control processing. Specifically, it performs processing such as outputting signals of predetermined data and transmitting various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the image control unit 145 and the lamp control unit 150.

In step E950, the sub-CPU 130a restores the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub-CPU 130a and ends this timer interrupt process.

(Input control processing)
The input control process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 102. Fig. 102 is a flowchart showing the input control process in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E130-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a custom performance input has been made. Specifically, it determines whether or not an input (custom performance input) has been made via the joystick detection switch 19a. If a custom performance input has been made, the process proceeds to step E130-2. If a custom performance input has not been made, the process proceeds to step E130-5.

In step E130-2, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not customization is ON. Specifically, when a performance customization input is made, it determines whether the performance customization input specifies ON or OFF. If customization is ON, the process proceeds to step E130-3, and if customization is not ON (customization is OFF), the process proceeds to step E130-4.

In step E130-3, the sub-CPU 130a turns the customization of the corresponding effect ON and ends the current input control process, and in step E130-4, turns the customization of the corresponding effect OFF and ends the current input control process.

Now, using Figure 103, we will explain the custom performance settings. The custom performance settings are displayed on a setting screen on the third image display device 72 (left side sub-display device) during customer waiting performances (customer waiting standby performances A and B and customer waiting demo performances A and B), and can be set by operating the joystick 19 (up, down, left, right, enter button). Note that custom performance settings may also be possible during variable performances, but the settings will not be reflected until the current variable performance has ended (if the next variable performance is being performed, they will be reflected from the next variable performance).

Examples of custom effect settings include "Golden Hot Mode", "Handle Air Flow", and "Extremely Hot Icon Change". The example in FIG. 103 shows that all of these are set to "OFF". For example, to set "Golden Hot Mode" to "ON", in the state shown in FIG. 103, the joystick 19 is moved to the left and the decision button on the joystick 19 is pressed.

When the "gold heat mode" is set to ON, in the jackpot notice performance determination process, in the event of a jackpot, the dialogue notice (gold), the SU notice (gold), and the cut-in notice (gold) are more likely to be selected (displayed) than when the mode is set to OFF. In other words, it is a setting that makes it easier for gold-type notices to appear. On the other hand, when the mode is set to OFF, they are less likely to be selected (displayed) than when the mode is set to ON, or are not selected (displayed) at all. Each notice will be described in detail in the jackpot notice performance determination process, but for example, in the case of dialogue notices, the order of the likelihood of a jackpot is dialogue notice (gold), dialogue notice (red), and dialogue notice (normal), with dialogue notice (gold) having the highest likelihood of a jackpot. In addition, these notices are notices that are determined in the jackpot notice performance determination process, and can be executed in the variable performance that has started to be executed, and are not pre-reading performances.

"Handle Air Blowing" is a setting where, when set to ON, an air blowing effect occurs from the launch handle 15 with a certain probability in the event of a jackpot, compared to when set to OFF. On the other hand, when set to OFF, it is less likely to be selected, or not selected at all, compared to when set to ON. The air blowing effect is an effect where air is blown toward the player (hand) holding the launch handle 15, and only the player holding the launch handle 15 can recognize the occurrence of this effect. In addition, the air blowing effect can only be selected (executed) in the event of a jackpot, and the occurrence of the air blowing effect is considered to be a confirmed jackpot. In addition, the air blowing effect can only be generated for variable effects that are currently being performed (it is not a look-ahead type effect), and is set to occur at the start of the variable effect, while the variable effect is being performed, at the end of the variable effect (when it is temporarily stopped after a miss is notified), etc.

"Icon Change Hot" is a setting that, when set to ON, makes it easier for the icon change effect to be selected (easier to be executed) in the event of a jackpot compared to when it is set to OFF. In other words, it is a setting that makes it easier for a jackpot to occur when an icon change effect occurs. On the other hand, when set to OFF, it is harder to select compared to when it is set to ON, or it is not selected at all. The selection rate of icon change effects when effect customization is set to ON and the selection rate of icon change effects when effect customization is set to OFF will be described later in the icon change effect determination process.

Note that the effect custom settings are not limited to these three examples, and other settings may be possible. The ON and OFF settings may be managed in the management area corresponding to each effect setting, for example, by setting "1" if "Golden Hot Mode" is ON in the area of the sub-RAM 130c that manages the effect custom settings, setting "0" if "Golden Hot Mode" is OFF, setting "1" if "Handle Air Blowing" is ON, setting "0" if "Handle Air Blowing" is OFF, setting "1" if "Icon Change Super Hot" is ON, setting "0" if "Icon Change Super Hot" is OFF, and so on. In other words, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the area that manages the effect custom settings of the sub-RAM 130c, checks whether "1" or "0" is set in each effect setting, and then determines each effect.

As for the OFF setting, it is possible to set each effect setting to OFF individually, but it is also possible to set all the effect settings to OFF at once. This saves a new player from having to set each effect setting to OFF individually, and allows the player to start playing quickly.
In addition, the performance settings may be initialized when the power supply is cut off, or may be initialized by clearing the RWM.

Returning again to the flowchart of FIG. 102, the sub-CPU 130a determines in step E130-5 whether there is (has been) any other input. For example, it determines whether an input has been made from the performance button detection switch 17a. If there is any other input, the process proceeds to step E130-6, and if there is no other input, the current input control process is terminated.

In step E130-6, an effect is executed according to the operation of the effect button detection switch 17a. For example, if a variable effect is in progress, a line preview effect or a deciding effect is executed, and if a customer waiting standby effect or customer waiting demo effect is in progress, a menu screen is displayed. The menu screen is displayed, for example, on the first image display device 70, and within the menu, the history of past jackpots and an introduction to the main preview effects that are likely to result in jackpots can be viewed.

(Preview processing of the performance control unit)
The read-ahead performance processing of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 104. Fig. 104 is a flowchart showing the read-ahead performance processing in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E505, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the value of the increment counter (MY counter). Then, upon referring to the value of the increment counter (MY counter), in step E506 it is determined whether or not it is a period during which a look-ahead performance can be executed. For example, if the value of the increment counter (MY counter) referred to in step E505 is "93,000", it is determined that it is a period during which a look-ahead performance cannot be executed, and the look-ahead performance processing is terminated, and if the value of the increment counter (MY counter) is not "93,000", the processing proceeds to step E510. In other words, if the value of the increment counter (MY counter) is a predetermined number, the execution of the look-ahead performance is restricted.

In step E510, the sub-CPU 130a performs an icon change performance determination process to determine whether or not to execute an icon change performance and the performance mode of the icon change performance. The icon change performance determination process will be described in detail later.

In step E520, the sub-CPU 130a performs an icon change performance execution process to execute the icon change performance determined to be executed in the icon change performance determination process (changing the display mode of the pending icon or the icon that is already displayed).

In step E530, the sub-CPU 130a performs a continuous preview performance determination process to determine whether or not to execute a continuous preview performance and the performance mode of the continuous preview performance, and in step E540, it performs a continuous preview performance execution process to execute the continuous preview performance that was determined to be executed in the continuous preview performance determination process. The details of the continuous preview performance determination process will be described later.

In step E550, the sub-CPU 130a performs a lamp change effect execution process to execute a lamp change effect (to light up the winning port lamp NR so that the light emission mode corresponds to the icon whose display mode has changed).

In step E560, the sub-CPU 130a performs a reserved consecutive wins presentation decision process to determine whether or not to execute a reserved consecutive wins presentation and the presentation mode of the reserved consecutive wins presentation, and in step E570, performs a reserved consecutive wins presentation execution process to execute the reserved consecutive wins presentation that was determined to be executed in the reserved consecutive wins presentation decision process, and ends this look-ahead presentation process.

Note that while the read-ahead effects are permitted to be determined and executed in the situation immediately before the "number of game balls exceeded" described below, their determination and execution is restricted in the situation immediately before the operation of the "capture limit device" as described above. The situation immediately before the "number of game balls exceeded" is, for example, a state in which the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 reaches "38,000". On the other hand, the situation immediately before the operation of the "capture limit device" is, for example, a state in which the maximum increase number reaches "93,000", as described above. In other words, the determination and execution of read-ahead effects is restricted in the period in which the maximum increase number is between "93,000" and "95,000". Note that "38,000" and "93,000" are merely examples, and may be changed as appropriate depending on the specifications of the gaming machine. Restrictions on the determination and execution of read-ahead effects will be described in detail later.

(Icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit)
The icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 105. Fig. 105 is a flowchart showing the icon change effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m.

In step E510-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a look-ahead designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If a look-ahead designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step E510-2, and if a look-ahead designation command has not been received, the current icon change performance determination process is terminated.

In step E510-2, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the received look-ahead command and determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, the type of jackpot game, and the presentation content (planned variation pattern).

In step E510-3, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not the current time is a period during which an icon change performance can be performed. If the current time is a period during which an icon change performance can be performed, the process proceeds to step E510-4. If the current time is not a period during which an icon change performance can be performed, the process proceeds to step E510-7.

The "period during which the icon change effect can be executed" refers to a period when a jackpot game is not being executed, when an icon change effect is not being executed, or when an icon change effect is not scheduled to be executed. Note that it is also possible to set only one or two of the above three conditions. It is also possible to set a normal game state when the received look-ahead designation command is based on winning at the first start port 45, and a specific game state (low-probability time-saving game state, high-probability time-saving game state) when the received look-ahead designation command is based on winning at the second start port 47.

In step E510-4, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the icon change hotness is ON. That is, the sub-CPU 130a refers to an area of the sub-RAM 130c that manages the performance custom settings, and determines whether the icon change hotness is "1" (ON) or "0" (OFF). If the icon change hotness is "1" (ON), the process proceeds to step E510-5, and if the icon change hotness is "0" (OFF), the process proceeds to step E510-6.

In step E510-5, the sub-CPU 130a obtains a random number value for determining whether or not to execute when the super hot option is selected, and determines whether or not to execute. Although the table for determining whether or not to execute is not shown, for example, the table has a ratio of "95/100" for execution and "5/100" for non-execution in the case of a jackpot, and "1/100" for execution and "99/100" for non-execution in the case of a miss, and the execution is determined using the obtained random number value and the table. Note that the ratios are only examples and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the ratios may be "100/100" for execution and "0/100" for non-execution in the case of a jackpot, and "0/100" for execution and "100/100" for non-execution in the case of a miss. Then, when the processing of step E510-5 is completed, the processing proceeds to step E510-7.

In step E510-6, the sub-CPU 130a obtains a random number value for determining whether or not to execute when Super Hot is not selected, and determines whether or not to execute. Note that the table for determining whether or not to execute is not shown in the figure, but for example, in the case of a jackpot, the table has ratios such as "70/100" for execution and "30/100" for non-execution, and in the case of a miss, "40/100" for execution and "60/100" for non-execution, and the obtained random number value and the table are used to determine whether or not to execute. Note that the ratios are only examples, and may be the ratios (0:100) described in step E510-5. Then, when the processing of step E510-6 is completed, the processing proceeds to step E510-7.

In step E510-7, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not to execute an icon change performance. That is, based on the processing of step E510-5 or step E510-6, it determines whether or not to execute an icon change performance. Then, if an icon change performance is to be executed, the process proceeds to step E510-8, and if an icon change performance is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step E510-11.

In step E510-8, the sub-CPU 130a acquires a random number value for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), and in step E510-9, selects an icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 106) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

In step E510-10, the sub-CPU 130a determines the final icon display mode. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 106, and determines one of the multiple final icon display modes based on the expected change pattern indicated by the look-ahead specification command and the selection rate (%) of each final icon display mode.

In step E510-11, the sub-CPU 130a determines the normal icon (white icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E510-12, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the determined final icon display mode is a display mode (special icon) that executes an icon change performance. If it is a display mode that executes an icon change performance, the process proceeds to step E510-13, and if it is not a display mode that executes an icon change performance, the process proceeds to step E510-16.

In step E510-13, the sub-CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (not shown) for determining the change scenario of the icon change presentation. Details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from when the reserved icon appears to when it disappears.

In step E510-14, the sub-CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c corresponding to the reserved number counter. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the change scenario determination table and determines one change scenario from among multiple change scenarios based on the final icon display state, the reserved number of special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario.

In step E510-15, the sub-CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the icon display mode that will be displayed first on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) from the determined change scenario, sets the icon display command for that winning icon in the transmission buffer, and ends this icon change presentation determination process. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the image control unit 145 and lamp control unit 150, and a pending icon in a display mode that corresponds to the icon display command for the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and a specified sound effect is output.

In step E510-16, the sub-CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which no icon change performance is performed, and sets this in the pre-read information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c corresponding to the pending number counter.

In step E510-17, the sub-CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer and ends the icon change presentation decision process. This causes the icon display command to be sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a reserved icon with a display mode corresponding to the icon display command for the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD) and a predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) is output.

(Icon Final Display Mode Determination Table)
FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table which is referred to when determining the icon final display mode.

The icon final display mode determination table associates the expected change pattern indicated by the look-ahead command, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the selected icon final display mode, and for reference, the type of notification sound when each icon type is generated is also listed.

The final icon display mode is set to a white icon as a normal icon, and a blue icon, red icon, or rainbow icon as special icons that indicate the possibility of a jackpot (a jackpot game being played).

The likelihood of winning the jackpot for special icons increases in the following order: (white icon <) blue icon < red icon < rainbow icon, with the rainbow icon being the icon that guarantees a jackpot.

The image display device is configured so that when a white icon is displayed on the image display device, a first occurrence alert sound is output, when a blue icon is displayed, a second occurrence alert sound is output, when a red icon is displayed, a third occurrence alert sound is output, and when a rainbow icon is displayed, a fourth occurrence alert sound is output.

The main feature of the final display mode determination table is that the selection rate of the icon final display mode is varied depending on the scheduled fluctuation pattern. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the scheduled fluctuation pattern is an SP reach or SPSP reach, the special icon is selected at a higher rate than when the scheduled fluctuation pattern is a normal fluctuation, shortened fluctuation, or normal reach that is not a reach.

In the icon final display mode determination table, in the event of a jackpot, the normal icon (white icon) is not selected as the icon final display mode, but it may be selected instead.

In this embodiment, a different alert sound is set for each of the multiple icon display modes (four types), but it is also possible to have two types: an alert sound when a white icon appears and an alert sound when the icon changes to a blue icon, red icon, or rainbow icon. Alternatively, no alert sound may be output when a white icon appears, and an alert sound may be output only when the icon changes to one of the modes. Also, for the rainbow icon, which is confirmed to be a jackpot, a dedicated alert sound may be provided, making it possible to have three types.

(Continuous preview performance decision process of the performance control unit)
The continuous preview performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 107. Fig. 107 is a flow chart showing the continuous preview performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E530-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a look-ahead designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If a look-ahead designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step E530-2, and if a look-ahead designation command has not been received, the process for determining the continuous preview performance is terminated.

In step E530-2, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the received look-ahead command and determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, the type of jackpot game, and the presentation content (planned variation pattern).

In step E530-3, it is determined whether or not the current period is one in which a continuous preview performance can be executed. If the current period is one in which a continuous preview performance (pre-reading action performance, pre-reading effect performance, pre-reading vibration performance, pre-reading zone performance, pre-reading chance eye performance) can be executed, processing proceeds to step E530-4. If the current period is not one in which a continuous preview performance can be executed, processing proceeds to step E530-18, assuming that the continuous preview performance based on the currently received pre-reading designation command will not be executed.

The "anticipatory action effect" is an effect that intermittently indicates the likelihood of a special game being played by executing an action effect (preview effect) that operates the first movable member 77a in a predetermined manner immediately after the start of one or more variable effects.

The "pre-reading effect" is an effect that intermittently suggests the likelihood of a special game being played by executing an effect effect (pre-notice effect) that displays an effect image of a specified color around the effect pattern 70a immediately after the start of one or more variable effects (during the preparation operation, before scrolling).

The "predictive vibration effect" is an effect that intermittently indicates the likelihood of a special game being played by executing a vibration effect (preview effect) that vibrates the effect button 17 in a predetermined manner immediately after the start of one or more variable effects.

The "predictive zone effect" is an effect that continuously suggests the likelihood of a special game being played by executing a zone in-effect (preview effect) that displays a zone image (zone background image) from a specific timing in one or more variable effects.

The "pre-reading chance eye effect" is an effect that intermittently suggests the expectation of a special game being executed by stopping and displaying the performance pattern 70a in an arrangement with a predetermined regularity in one or more variable effects. Examples of the predetermined regularity include a stop display with a combination of numbers that are only red (773, 337, etc.), a stop display with a combination of numbers that are only green (159, 591, etc.), and a stop display with a combination of numbers that are only blue (246, 862, etc.), and the expectation of a jackpot differs according to the relationship of only red > only green > only blue. In addition, when a stop display with a combination of numbers that are only red (773, 337, etc.) is performed, the entire performance pattern 70a or the outer edge of the display area of the first image display device 70 is decorated with a red effect, and the same decoration is applied in the case of green and blue, so as to emphasize the execution of the "pre-reading chance eye effect" (same-color chance eye effect).

The "period during which the consecutive preview performance can be executed" includes the following: there is no item in the advanced reserve that executes the consecutive preview performance; a jackpot game is not in progress; a normal game state is in effect when a look-ahead command based on a win at the first start port 45 is received; a specific game state (low-probability time-saving game state, high-probability time-saving game state) is in effect when a look-ahead command based on a win at the second start port 47 is received; etc.

In step E530-4, the sub-CPU 130a selects a continuous preview type determination table corresponding to the current presentation mode, and in step E530-5, refers to the continuous preview type determination table to determine the continuous preview type (whether or not to execute a continuous preview presentation, and the type of continuous preview presentation to be executed). Details of the continuous preview type determination table will be described later.

In step E530-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the continuous preview type is one that executes a continuous preview performance. If a continuous preview performance is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step E530-18. If a continuous preview performance is to be executed, in step E530-7, a continuous preview scenario determination table corresponding to the current performance mode is selected. Details of the continuous preview scenario determination table will be described later.

In step E530-8, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a continuous preview type for executing a look-ahead action performance has been determined. If a look-ahead action performance is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step E530-10. If a look-ahead action performance is to be executed, in step E530-9, the continuous preview scenario determination table is referenced to determine a preview scenario for the look-ahead action performance and set it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E530-10, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether a continuous preview type for executing a look-ahead effect performance has been determined. If a look-ahead effect performance is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step E530-12. If a look-ahead effect performance is to be executed, in step E530-11, the continuous preview scenario determination table is referenced to determine a preview scenario for the look-ahead effect performance and set it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E530-12, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a continuous preview type for executing a look-ahead vibration performance has been determined. If a look-ahead vibration performance is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step E530-14. If a look-ahead vibration performance is to be executed, in step E530-13, the continuous preview scenario determination table is referenced to determine a preview scenario for the look-ahead vibration performance and set it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E530-14, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a continuous preview type for executing a look-ahead zone performance has been determined. If a look-ahead zone performance is not to be executed, processing proceeds to step E530-16. If a look-ahead zone performance is to be executed, in step E530-15, the continuous preview scenario determination table is referenced to determine a preview scenario for the look-ahead zone performance and set it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E530-16, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a continuous preview type for executing a look-ahead chance eye performance has been determined. If a look-ahead chance eye performance is not to be executed, the current continuous preview performance determination process is terminated. If a look-ahead chance eye performance is to be executed, in step E530-17, the continuous preview scenario determination table is referenced to determine a preview scenario for the look-ahead chance eye performance and set it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c, and the current continuous preview performance determination process is terminated.

In step E530-18, the sub-CPU 130a determines a non-preview scenario for the consecutive preview performance (a preview scenario indicating that the consecutive preview performance will not be executed) and sets it in the pre-reading information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c, terminating this consecutive preview performance determination process.

The preview scenario or non-preview scenario set in the pre-read information storage area of sub-RAM 130c is referenced in the continuous preview performance execution process of step E540 described above, and processing for executing the continuous preview performance or processing for not executing the continuous preview performance is performed.

In this way, according to the process for determining the consecutive preview effects shown in FIG. 107, since the pre-reading action effect is not executed in the variable display (variable effect) of the second special pattern in the normal gaming state, the first movable member 77b is more likely to operate (move) when the variable display (variable effect) of the first special pattern is executed than when the variable display (variable effect) of the second special pattern is executed in the normal gaming state. Therefore, the effect of the effect of the variable display (variable effect) of the first special pattern in the normal gaming state can be enhanced, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the continuous preview performance determination process shown in FIG. 107, a look-ahead effect performance (a performance in which an effect image is displayed around the performance pattern 70a) can be executed in the variable display of the first special pattern (first variable performance) in the normal game state, whereas a look-ahead effect performance is not executed in the variable display of the first special pattern (first variable performance) in the specific game state. Therefore, the rate at which the look-ahead effect performance is executed differs between the case in which the variable display of the first special pattern (first variable performance) is executed during the normal game state and the case in which the variable display of the first special pattern (first variable performance) is executed during the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to make a difference in the performance effect at the start of the first variable performance in the normal game state and the specific game state, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the continuous preview effect determination process shown in FIG. 107, while the look-ahead effect effect (the effect in which an effect image is displayed around the effect pattern 70a) is not executed in the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable display) in the specific game state, the look-ahead effect effect can be executed in the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable display), so the rate at which the look-ahead effect effect is executed differs between the case in which the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable display) is executed during the specific game state and the case in which the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable display) is executed during the specific game state. Therefore, in the specific game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed, the effect of the display related to the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable display) can be enhanced, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, a look-ahead effect may be executed when the first special symbol is displayed (first change effect) in a specific game state, and in this case, the rate may be set to be lower than when the second special symbol is displayed (second change effect).

In addition, according to the process for determining the consecutive preview effects shown in FIG. 107, since the pre-reading vibration effect is not executed in the variable display (variation effect) of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state, in the normal gaming state, the vibration effect is more likely to be executed when the variable display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed than when the variable display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the effect of the effect of the variable display (variation effect) of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state can be enhanced, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the process for determining the consecutive preview effects shown in FIG. 107, since the pre-reading action effect is not executed in the variable display (variation effect) of the first special symbol in the specific game state, the first movable member 77b is more likely to operate (move) when the variable display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed in the specific game state than when the variable display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, the effect of the effect of the variable display (variation effect) of the second special symbol in the specific game state can be enhanced, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the process for determining the consecutive preview effects shown in FIG. 107, since the pre-reading vibration effect is not executed in the variable display (variation effect) of the first special symbol in the specific gaming state, the vibration effect is more likely to be executed when the variable display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed than when the variable display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed in the specific gaming state. Therefore, the effect of the variable display (variation effect) of the second special symbol can be enhanced in the specific gaming state, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the continuous preview performance determination process shown in FIG. 107, while the look-ahead zone performance (background change) can be executed in the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) in the normal game state, the look-ahead zone performance (background change) is not executed in the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) in the specific game state, so that the look-ahead zone performance (background change) is more difficult to execute when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) is executed in the specific game state than when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) is executed in the normal game state. Therefore, in the normal game state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is easily executed, the performance effect related to the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) can be enhanced, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the continuous preview performance determination process shown in FIG. 107, while the look-ahead zone performance (background change) is not executed in the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) in the specific game state, the look-ahead zone performance (background change) can be executed in the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable performance). Therefore, the look-ahead zone performance (background change) is more likely to be executed when the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable performance) is executed in the specific game state than when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, in the specific game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed, the performance effect related to the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable performance) can be enhanced, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the look-ahead zone effect may be executed when the first special symbol changing display (first changing display) is executed in a specific game state, and in this case, the rate may be set to be lower than when the second special symbol changing display (second changing display) is executed.

In addition, according to the continuous preview performance determination process shown in FIG. 107, while the look-ahead chance eye performance can be executed in the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) in the normal game state, the look-ahead chance eye performance is not executed in the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) in the specific game state, so the look-ahead chance eye performance is more likely to be executed when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) is executed in the normal game state than when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, in the normal game state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is more likely to be executed, the performance effect related to the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) can be enhanced, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the continuous preview performance determination process shown in FIG. 107, while the look-ahead chance eye performance is not executed in the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) in the specific game state, the look-ahead chance eye performance can be executed in the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable performance), so the look-ahead chance eye performance is more likely to be executed when the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable performance) is executed during the specific game state than when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) is executed during the specific game state. Therefore, in the specific game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed, the performance effect related to the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable performance) can be enhanced, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, when the first special symbol is displayed in a specific game state (first display), the pre-reading chance eye display may be executed. In this case, the rate may be set to be lower than when the second special symbol is displayed in a specific game state (second display).

(Continuous notice type determination table)
Figure 108 is a diagram showing a successive preview type determination table which is referenced to determine the type of successive preview in presentation modes A to C (normal game playing state), and Figure 109 is a diagram showing a successive preview presentation determination table which is referenced to determine the type of successive preview in presentation modes D to F (specific game playing state).

As shown in Figures 108 and 109, the consecutive preview type determination table associates look-ahead designation commands (planned change patterns), selection rates (%) for each consecutive preview type, and the consecutive preview type to be selected. The consecutive preview types include "not executed," which does not execute a consecutive preview performance; "look-ahead action performance," "look-ahead effect performance," "look-ahead vibration performance," "look-ahead zone performance," "look-ahead chance eye performance," and "look-ahead effect performance & look-ahead vibration performance," which execute two of the multiple types of consecutive preview performances; and "look-ahead action performance & look-ahead zone performance."

For example, if the look-ahead command (scheduled change pattern) in presentation modes A to C (normal gameplay state) is a miss and the SP reach presentation is to be executed, there is a 79% chance that "not executed" will be determined, a 6% chance that "look-ahead effect presentation" will be determined, a 5% chance that "look-ahead chance eye presentation" will be determined, a 4% chance that "look-ahead action presentation" will be determined, a 3% chance that "look-ahead vibration presentation" will be determined, a 2% chance that "look-ahead zone presentation" will be determined, and a 1% chance that "look-ahead effect presentation & look-ahead vibration presentation" will be determined.

(Continuous preview performance scenario decision table)
Figure 110 is a diagram showing a successive preview scenario determination table for presentation modes A to C (normal game play state), and Figure 111 is a diagram showing a successive preview scenario determination table for presentation modes D to F (specific game play state).

The consecutive preview scenario determination table associates the number of reserved special symbols, the look-ahead command (planned change pattern), the selection rate (%) of each preview scenario, and the selected preview scenario, and for reference, lists the pre-changes in each scenario (4 changes before, 3 changes before, 2 changes before, 1 change before) and the presentation style of the consecutive preview performance in that change.

"Pre-change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information that was stored before the special chart determination information that corresponds to the newly received look-ahead command, and "the change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information that corresponds to the newly received look-ahead command.

The "weak notice" has different presentation modes depending on the type of continuous notice. In the case of a look-ahead action presentation, the first movable member 77b performs a weak action by emitting blue light and a weak action sound effect is output. In the case of a look-ahead effect presentation, a blue effect image is displayed around the presentation pattern 70a and a blue effect sound effect is output. In the case of a look-ahead vibration presentation, the vibrator for vibrating the presentation button 17 vibrates weakly for one second and the presentation button 17 flashes white. In the case of a look-ahead zone presentation, a blue zone image (zone background image) is displayed and a zone sound effect is output. In the case of a look-ahead chance eye presentation, the presentation pattern 70a is stopped and displayed in a predetermined arrangement of even numbers (for example, "224" or "668") accompanied by an emphasis action of the presentation pattern 70a with a blue effect image.

The "strong notice" has different presentation modes depending on the type of continuous notice. In the case of a look-ahead action presentation, the first movable member 77b performs a strong action by emitting red light and a strong action sound effect is output. In the case of a look-ahead effect presentation, a red effect image is displayed around the presentation pattern 70a and a red effect sound effect is output. In the case of a look-ahead vibration presentation, the vibrator for vibrating the presentation button 17 vibrates strongly for three seconds and the presentation button 17 flashes red. In the case of a look-ahead zone presentation, a red heat zone image (zone background image) is displayed and a heat zone sound effect is output. In the case of a look-ahead chance eye presentation, the presentation pattern 70a is stopped and displayed in a predetermined arrangement of odd numbers (for example, "335" or "779") accompanied by an emphasis action of the presentation pattern 70a with a red effect image.

The continuous preview performance scenarios include a scenario in which a weak or strong preview is not executed during the pre-change but is executed during the change itself (e.g., scenario 11), and a scenario in which a weak or strong preview is executed both during the pre-change and during the change itself (e.g., scenario 22).

The first feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview performances shown in Figures 108 to 111 is that the expectation of a big win is higher when multiple types of continuous preview performances are executed than when one type of continuous preview performance is executed. This effectively increases the player's sense of expectation, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The second feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview performance shown in Figures 108 to 111 is that the continuous preview performance is more likely to be executed (higher execution rate) in performance modes D to F (specific game state) than in performance modes A to C (normal game state), meaning that the expectation of a big win when the continuous preview performance is executed is lower. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of performance mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of differentiating the execution rate of the consecutive preview performance between presentation modes A to C and presentation modes D to F, the execution rate of the consecutive preview performance may be different between presentation modes A to C, for example, by making the consecutive preview performance easier to execute in presentation mode B than in presentation mode A, or the execution rate of the consecutive preview performance may be different between presentation modes D to F, for example, by making the consecutive preview performance easier to execute in presentation mode E than in presentation mode D. In this way, the expectation of a big win in the consecutive preview performance changes between presentation modes, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview performances shown in Figures 108 to 111 is that the continuous preview performances (here, the look-ahead effect performance, the look-ahead chance eye performance, and the look-ahead action performance) are more likely to be executed when a normal reach performance is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result) in performance modes D to F (specific game states) than when a normal reach performance is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result) in performance modes A to C (normal game states). Therefore, in specific game states where (super) shortened fluctuations are more likely to occur than in performance modes A to C (normal game states), it is possible to prevent the variable performances from becoming monotonous, making the game more interesting.

The fourth feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview effects shown in Figures 108 to 111 is that the continuous preview effects (here, the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead action effect, and look-ahead zone effect) are more likely to be executed when an SP reach effect is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result) in presentation modes D to F (specific game state) than when an SP reach effect is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result) in presentation modes A to C (normal game state). Therefore, in the specific game state where (ultra) shortened fluctuations are more likely to occur than in presentation modes A to C (normal game state), it is possible to prevent the variable effects from becoming monotonous, making the game more interesting.

The fifth feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview effects shown in Figures 108 to 111 is that continuous preview effects (here, pre-reading effect effects, pre-reading chance eye effects, pre-reading action effects, and pre-reading zone effects) are more likely to be executed when an SPSP reach effect is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result) in presentation modes D to F (specific game states) than when an SPSP reach effect is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result) in presentation modes A to C (normal game states). Therefore, in specific game states where super-shortened fluctuations are more likely to occur than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states), it is possible to prevent the fluctuation effects from becoming monotonous, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview effects shown in Figures 108 to 111 is that the continuous preview effects (here, the look-ahead action effect and the look-ahead zone effect) are more likely to be executed in presentation modes D to F (specific game states) when a full rotation reach effect is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result) than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states) when a full rotation reach effect is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result). Therefore, in the specific game states where super-shortened fluctuations are more likely to occur than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states), it is possible to prevent the fluctuation effects from becoming monotonous, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview effects shown in Figures 108 to 111 is that the predictive vibration effect (vibration effect without the effective period of the effect button 17 or the display of the operation prompt image) is more likely to be executed (higher execution rate = different expectation of big win) in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) than in the effect modes D to F (specific game state). Therefore, in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), where the stay period is more likely to be longer than in the effect modes D to F (specific game state), it is possible to make the predictive vibration effect more easily experienced by the player, which makes it possible to increase the interest in the game. Also, in the effect modes D to F (specific game state), where the fluctuation time is more likely to be shorter than in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), it is possible to give the predictive vibration effect a rarity, which makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The look-ahead vibration effect may be executed more easily (at a higher execution rate) in presentation modes D to F than in presentation modes A to C. In addition, in the normal game state, the look-ahead vibration effect may be executed more easily in presentation mode A than in presentation modes B or C, thereby making the execution rate of the look-ahead vibration effect different between presentation modes A to C, and in the specific game state, the look-ahead vibration effect may be executed more easily in presentation mode D than in presentation modes E to G, thereby making the execution rate of the look-ahead vibration effect different between presentation modes D to F. In this way, it is possible to differ the probability of a jackpot when the look-ahead vibration effect is executed between presentation modes, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview effects shown in Figures 108 to 111 is that the look-ahead vibration effect is less likely to be executed (the execution rate is lower) in presentation modes D to F (specific game states) when a specific reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result) than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states) when a specific reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result). Therefore, in presentation modes D to F (specific game states), where the fluctuation time is more likely to be shorter than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states), the look-ahead vibration effect can be made rare, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The ninth feature of the various tables relating to the continuous preview effects shown in Figures 108 to 111 is that the look-ahead action effect is more likely to be executed (higher execution rate) in presentation modes D to F (specific game states) than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states). Therefore, in presentation modes D to F (specific game states), in which the fluctuation time is more likely to be shorter than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states), it is possible to give the look-ahead vibration effect a sense of rarity, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

The tenth feature of the various tables relating to the continuous preview performances shown in Figures 108 to 111 is that when a continuous preview performance that ends with one variable performance is executed in performance modes D to F (specific game state), it is less likely (lower rate of execution) that a reach performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) will be executed in the variable performance that is the subject of the preview of the continuous preview performance, compared to when a continuous preview performance that ends with one variable performance is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of performance mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The eleventh feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview performances shown in Figures 108 to 111 is that when a continuous preview performance that ends with two variable performances is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state), it is more likely that a reach performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) will be executed in the variable performance that is the subject of the preview of the continuous preview performance, than when a continuous preview performance that ends with two variable performances is executed in performance modes D to F (specific game state). Therefore, the playability can be varied depending on the type of performance mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The twelfth feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview performance shown in Figures 108 to 111 is that when the continuous preview performance can be executed over multiple variable performances (number of reserved times is 2 to 4), it is more difficult to execute a reach performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) in the variable performance that is the subject of the preview of the continuous preview performance when the continuous preview performance with only one variable performance is executed in performance modes D to F (specific game state) than when the continuous preview performance with only one variable performance is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state). Therefore, the playability can be varied depending on the type of performance mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The thirteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview performances shown in Figures 108 to 111 is that when a continuous preview performance spanning three variable performances is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state), it is easier for a reach performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) to be executed in the variable performance that is the subject of the preview of the continuous preview performance, compared to when a continuous preview performance spanning three variable performances is executed in performance modes D to F (specific game state). Therefore, the playability can be varied depending on the type of performance mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourteenth feature of the various tables relating to the continuous preview performances shown in Figures 108 to 111 is that when a continuous preview performance spanning three variable performances is executed in performance modes D to F (specific game state), it is more likely that a reach performance with a high probability of winning (for example, an SP reach performance or an SPSP reach performance) will be executed in the variable performance that is the subject of the preview of the continuous preview performance, compared to when a continuous preview performance spanning three variable performances is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of performance mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fifteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview performance shown in Figures 108 to 111 is that although it is possible to execute the look-ahead action performance using the same movable member (first movable member 77b) in performance modes A to C (normal game state) and performance modes D to F (specific game state), the expectation of a big win when the look-ahead action performance is executed differs between performance modes A to C (normal game state) and performance modes D to F (specific game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of performance mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The 16th feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview performance shown in Figures 108 to 111 is that when a look-ahead action performance is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state) and performance modes D to F (special game state), the rate at which the first movable member 77b, which is not used in the deciding performance, is operated (100%) is higher than the rate at which the first movable member 77a, which is used in the deciding performance described below, is operated (0%). This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of mistaking the execution of a look-ahead action performance for a jackpot, and makes the game more interesting.

In addition, instead of operating the first movable member 77b in the strong notice of the pre-reading action presentation, the first movable member 77a may be operated. Even in this case, when executing the pre-reading action presentation in presentation modes A to C (normal game state) and presentation modes D to F (special game state), it is preferable to operate the first movable member 77b more frequently than the first movable member 77a.

The 17th feature of the various tables relating to the continuous preview effects shown in Figures 108 to 111 is that when a look-ahead vibration effect is executed in effect modes A to C (normal gameplay state) and effect modes D to F (specific gameplay state), the percentage of effect button 17 in the normal state (0%) is higher than the percentage of effect button 17 in the protruding state (0%). This ensures the rarity of effect button 17 being in the protruding state (it is only in the deciding effect described below), making the game more interesting.

In addition, in the strong notice of the pre-reading vibration effect, the effect button 17 may be vibrated in a protruding state rather than being vibrated in a normal state. Even in this case, when executing the pre-reading vibration effect in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to F (special game state), it is preferable to make the proportion of the effect button 17 in the normal state higher than the proportion in the protruding state.

The 18th feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview performance shown in Figures 108 to 111 is that during a specified period (from the start of the fluctuation to the first high-speed fluctuation period of the performance pattern 70a) after the start of the fluctuation performance that is the subject of the continuous preview performance, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when a weak notice of a pre-reading vibration performance (weak vibration of the performance button 17 for one second) that is executed without displaying an operation prompting image is executed than when a weak notice of a pre-reading action performance (weak movement of the first movable member 77a + blue light emission) or a weak notice of a pre-reading effect performance (display of a blue effect image around the performance pattern 70a) is executed. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation can be effectively increased using an operating means that the player can operate, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The 19th feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview performance shown in Figures 108 to 111 is that during a specified period (from the start of the fluctuation to the first high-speed fluctuation period of the performance pattern 70a) after the start of the variable performance that is the subject of the continuous preview performance, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when a strong warning of the pre-reading vibration performance (strong vibration of the performance button 17 for 3 seconds) is executed than when a strong warning of the pre-reading action performance (strong movement of the first movable member 77a + red light emission) or a strong warning of the pre-reading effect performance (display of a red effect image around the performance pattern 70a) is executed. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation can be effectively increased using an operating means that the player can operate, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

(Variable performance pattern determination table)
Figure 112 is a diagram showing a variable presentation pattern determination table for presentation modes A to C which is referenced to determine the variable presentation pattern in presentation modes A to C (normal game state), and Figure 113 is a diagram showing a variable presentation pattern determination table for presentation modes D to F (specific game state) which is referenced to determine the variable presentation pattern in presentation modes D to F.

As shown in Figures 112 and 113, the variable presentation pattern determination table associates the special chart variable presentation pattern designation command, the selection rate (%) of each variable presentation pattern, and the selected variable presentation pattern, and for reference, the presentation configuration for each variable presentation pattern is listed.

"Variation" in the performance configuration column indicates that a normal variation display is executed in which no reach state is formed by the performance pattern 70a.
"Shortened variation" indicates that a shortened variation display is executed, which is shorter than the normal variation display and does not result in a reach state.
"L fluctuation" indicates that a long fluctuation display is executed in which a reach state is not formed for longer than in the normal fluctuation display.

"Pseudo failure" refers to a presentation that prompts the player whether or not a pseudo consecutive performance will be executed in which the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped during the display of one changing special pattern and then changed again (as one example, a pseudo pattern is visibly displayed at a slow speed as a middle pattern, prompting the player whether or not it will temporarily stop), and then a pseudo consecutive failure performance is executed in which the pseudo consecutive performance is not executed (as one example, the pseudo pattern does not temporarily stop).
"Pseudo success" refers to the execution of a pseudo consecutive success performance which results in a pseudo consecutive performance (as an example, the pseudo symbol is visibly displayed at a slow speed as the middle symbol, and the player is prompted as to whether it will temporarily stop), followed by the execution of a pseudo consecutive success performance which results in a pseudo consecutive performance (as an example, the pseudo symbol temporarily stops).
"(Variation → Pseudo Success) x 2" indicates that two sets of effects are performed, one of which is a teasing effect to hint at whether or not a pseudo consecutive performance will be executed, followed by a pseudo consecutive success performance that results in a pseudo consecutive performance being executed.
"(Variation → Pseudo Success) x 3" indicates that three sets of effects are performed, each of which involves a teasing effect to hint at whether or not a pseudo consecutive performance will be performed, followed by a pseudo consecutive success effect that results in a pseudo consecutive performance.

"N Reach" indicates that the above-mentioned normal reach presentation is executed.
"N "7"Reach" indicates that the above-mentioned normal reach effect is executed when a reach state is formed by the "7" effect pattern 70a.
"SP Reach" indicates that the above-mentioned SP Reach performance is executed.
"Special SP reach" indicates that the above-mentioned special SP reach performance is executed.
"SPSP reach" indicates that the above-mentioned SPSP reach performance is executed.
The "full rotation reach" indicates that the full rotation reach presentation described above is executed.

"SP Development" indicates that a development effect is executed, which suggests that an SP reach effect will be executed.
"SPSP Development" indicates that a development effect is executed, which suggests that an SPSP reach effect will be executed.
"Full rotation development" indicates that a development effect is executed that suggests that a full rotation reach will be executed.

"CI" indicates that one of a number of cut-in effects with different odds of winning will be executed depending on whether the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period or the valid period has elapsed.
"Decision" indicates that a decision effect indicating whether or not a jackpot game will be executed is executed depending on the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period or the lapse of the valid period.
"Failure" indicates that a failed decision effect is executed as a result of the decision effect, which suggests that a big win game will not be executed.
"Success" indicates that a successful winning effect is executed as a result of the winning effect, which suggests that a big win game will be executed.

"Miss" refers to the formation of a losing result (a losing display pattern such as "358" or "948" that is different from the initial result described below) by the performance pattern 70a consisting of only numbers and no characters, and then temporarily stopping.
"C pattern miss" indicates that the display pattern 70a including a character forms a missing result (a missing display pattern such as "358" or "948" that is different from the initial result described below) and temporarily stops.
"IC" indicates that an eye-catching effect is executed in which an eye-catching image suggesting that the effect pattern 70a will stop being displayed is displayed on the image display device.
The "pattern matching" refers to a temporary stop of a jackpot result (a jackpot display pattern such as "222" or "777") formed by a performance pattern 70a consisting of numbers only and no characters.
The "c symbol alignment" indicates that a jackpot result (a jackpot display pattern such as "222" or "777") is formed and temporarily stopped by the performance pattern 70a in a display pattern including a character.

"Re-draw" refers to the execution of a re-draw effect in which a promotion success effect that results in a favorable jackpot outcome is performed, or a promotion failure effect that does not result in a favorable jackpot outcome is performed, after inducing whether the performance pattern 70a that has been provisionally stopped at the jackpot outcome (jackpot display mode) will be a favorable jackpot outcome for the player (whether it will change from an even-numbered performance pattern 70a that results in a normal jackpot to an odd-numbered performance pattern 70a that results in a guaranteed jackpot outcome, or whether it will become a "7" performance pattern 70a that results in the most favorable jackpot game).

"Strong vibration for 4 seconds" indicates that a strong vibration effect (a vibration effect that confirms a big win) will be executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 4 seconds.
"Strong vibration for 1 second" indicates that a strong vibration effect (a big win confirmation vibration effect) will be executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 will vibrate strongly for one second.

In the variable presentation pattern determination table for presentation modes A to C (normal game state), in the case of special pattern 00 (miss) and variable presentation patterns 4 to 5 (normal reach presentation) and 6 to 7 (SP reach presentation), as an example, the probability that a reach presentation will be performed with an even-numbered presentation pattern 70a is 70%, and the probability that a reach presentation will be performed with an odd-numbered presentation pattern 70a other than "7" is 30%.
In the case of special pattern 00 (miss) and variable performance pattern 8 to 10 (SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance), as an example, the probability that a reach performance will occur with an even-numbered performance pattern 70a is 70%, and the probability that a reach performance will occur with an odd-numbered performance pattern 70a other than "7" is 30%.
In the case of special pattern 00 (miss) and variable presentation pattern 11 to 12 (SPSP reach presentation), the probability of a reach presentation being performed with the presentation pattern 70a of "7" is 100%.

For special symbol 01 (normal jackpot) and variable presentation patterns 13 to 18 (normal reach presentation, SP reach presentation, SPSP reach presentation), as an example, the rate at which a reach presentation occurs with even-numbered presentation symbols 70a is 100%.

In the case of the special symbol 02 (certain jackpot) and the variable presentation pattern 22 to 23 (SPSP reach presentation), the probability that the reach presentation will be performed with the presentation symbol 70a of "7" is 100%.
In the case of special symbol 02 (probable big win) and variable performance pattern 24 (full rotation reach performance), for example, the probability of a reach performance being performed with odd performance symbols 70a other than "7" is 40%, and the probability of a reach performance being performed with the performance symbol 70a of "7" is 60%. After a full rotation reach is performed, the performance symbols 70a of "7" are aligned and temporarily stopped (for example, "777"), and then the fixed stop is "777".
In the case of special symbol 02 (certain jackpot) and variable presentation pattern 25 (full rotation reach presentation), the normal reach presentation or the like is not executed, and after the full rotation reach is executed, the presentation symbols 70a of "7" line up and temporarily stop (for example, "777"), and then the symbols stop definitively at "777".

In the case of special pattern 03 (certain jackpot) and variable presentation pattern 19 to 20 (SP reach presentation), as an example, the probability that the reach presentation will occur with the even presentation pattern 70a is 60%, and the probability that the reach presentation will occur with the odd presentation pattern 70a other than "7" is 40%.
In the case of special pattern 02 (high probability jackpot) and variable presentation pattern 21 (SPSP reach presentation), as an example, the probability that a reach presentation will occur with an even-numbered presentation pattern 70a is 60%, and the probability that a reach presentation will occur with an odd-numbered presentation pattern 70a other than "7" is 40%.

In the case of special symbol 10 (miss) and variable presentation pattern 27 (special SP reach presentation), as an example, the rate at which the reach presentation occurs with even presentation symbols 70a is 100%.
In the case of the special symbols 04 (normal jackpot) & 05 (certain jackpot) and the variable presentation pattern 28 (special SP reach presentation), as an example, the rate at which the reach presentation occurs with the even presentation symbols 70a is 100%.

In the variable presentation pattern determination table for presentation modes D to F (specific game states), in the case of special pattern 00 (miss) and variable presentation pattern 32 (special SP reach presentation), as an example, the rate at which a reach presentation is performed with an even-numbered presentation pattern 70a is 100%.
In the case of the special patterns 01 (normal jackpot), 02 (high probability jackpot), and 03 (high probability jackpot) and variable presentation pattern 33 (special SP reach presentation), as an example, the rate at which the reach presentation occurs with the even-numbered presentation pattern 70a is 100%.

In the case of special pattern 10 (miss) and variable presentation patterns 37 to 38 (normal reach presentation) and 39 to 43 (SP reach presentation, SPSP reach presentation), as an example, the probability that a reach presentation will occur with an even-numbered presentation pattern 70a is 60%, and the probability that a reach presentation will occur with an odd-numbered presentation pattern 70a other than "7" is 40%.
In the case of special pattern 04 (normal jackpot) and variable presentation patterns 44 to 49 (normal reach presentation, SP reach presentation, SPSP reach presentation), as an example, the rate at which a reach presentation occurs with an even-numbered presentation pattern 70a is 100%.

In the case of special pattern 05 and special pattern 06 (high probability jackpot) and variable presentation pattern 50 to 51 (SP reach presentation), as an example, the rate at which the reach presentation is performed with the even presentation pattern 70a is 60%, and the rate at which the reach presentation is performed with the odd presentation pattern 70a other than "7" is 40%.
In the case of special pattern 05 and special pattern 06 (certain jackpot) and variable presentation patterns 51 to 52 (SPSP reach presentation), as an example, the rate at which a reach presentation is performed with an even-numbered presentation pattern 70a is 3%, the rate at which a reach presentation is performed with an odd-numbered presentation pattern 70a other than "7" is 2%, and the rate at which a reach presentation is performed with the "7" presentation pattern 70a is 95%.
In the case of the special symbol 05 or the special symbol 06 (certain special jackpot) and the variable presentation pattern 53 to 54 (SPSP reach presentation), the rate at which the reach presentation is performed with the presentation symbol 70a of "7" is 100%.
In the case of special symbols 05 and 06 (high probability jackpot) and variable performance pattern 55 (full rotation reach performance), for example, the rate at which the even performance symbols 70a perform the reach performance is 20%, the rate at which the odd performance symbols 70a other than "7" perform the reach performance is 30%, and the rate at which the "7" performance symbol 70a performs the reach performance is 50%. After the full rotation reach is executed, the "7" performance symbols 70a are aligned and temporarily stop (for example, "777"), and then the "777" is fixed and stopped.
In the case of special pattern 05 or special pattern 06 (high probability jackpot) and variable presentation pattern 56 (full rotation reach presentation), normal reach presentation or the like is not executed, and after the full rotation reach is executed, the presentation pattern 70a of "7" is aligned and temporarily stops (for example, "777"), and then it is fixed and stops at "777".

Note that the selection ratio of the performance pattern 70a when the above-mentioned reach performance is performed is merely an example and may be changed as appropriate.

The first feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table is that when an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation is executed, an eye-catching presentation is executed that suggests that the presentation pattern 70a will stop, and the presentation pattern 70a returns to a display state including the character (for example, variable presentation pattern 10, variable presentation pattern 17, etc.). This makes it less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable about the change in the display state of the presentation pattern 70a, and it is possible to suggest in advance that the presentation pattern 70a will stop, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The second feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table is that, in the event of a jackpot, there are variable presentation patterns (e.g., variable presentation pattern 16) in which a successful winning presentation is executed and the symbols line up, and variable presentation patterns (e.g., variable presentation pattern 17) in which the successful winning presentation is executed after the symbols line up. This makes it possible to enhance the presentation effect in the event of a jackpot, and to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table is that in a variable presentation pattern that results in a jackpot, when a presentation pattern 70a that does not include a character is aligned, a strong vibration presentation (a jackpot confirmation vibration presentation) is executed in which the presentation button 17 is strongly vibrated for four seconds (for example, variable presentation pattern 16). This makes it possible to effectively present a jackpot, thereby increasing the interest of the player in the game.

The fourth feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table is that when the presentation pattern 70a including the character matches (pattern c), a strong vibration presentation (big win confirmation vibration presentation) is executed in which the presentation button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second (for example, variable presentation pattern 16). This makes it possible to effectively present the big win, which increases the excitement of the game.

The fifth feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table is that the rate at which reach effects (normal reach effects, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects) are produced with even presentation symbols 70a (presentation symbols that result in a normal jackpot when they become a jackpot) is higher than the rate at which reach effects (normal reach effects, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects) are produced with odd presentation symbols 70a other than "7" (presentation symbols that result in a jackpot when they become a jackpot) (for example, the selection rate of the presentation symbols 70a described above). Therefore, it is possible to effectively stir up the joy of the player when a jackpot is produced with an odd presentation symbol 70a other than "7", and to increase the excitement of the game.

The sixth feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table is that the rate at which a reach presentation (normal reach presentation, SP reach presentation, SPSP reach presentation) occurs with the "7" presentation pattern 70a (the presentation pattern that results in the most favorable guaranteed jackpot when it becomes a jackpot) is lower than the rate at which a reach presentation occurs with an even number presentation pattern 70a (the presentation pattern that results in a normal jackpot when it becomes a jackpot) (for example, the selection rate of the presentation pattern 70a described above). Therefore, it is possible to effectively stir up the joy of the player when a jackpot occurs with the "7" presentation pattern 70a, and to increase the excitement of the game.

The seventh feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table is that the rate at which reach effects (normal reach effects, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects) are produced with the "7" presentation pattern 70a (the presentation pattern that results in the most favorable probability jackpot when it becomes a jackpot) is lower than the rate at which reach effects (normal reach effects, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects) are produced with odd presentation patterns 70a other than "7" (the presentation pattern that results in a probability jackpot when it becomes a jackpot) (for example, the selection rate of the presentation pattern 70a described above). Therefore, it is possible to effectively stir up the joy of the player when a jackpot is produced with the "7" presentation pattern 70a, and to increase the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table is that the likelihood of a big win is higher when the reach effect is executed with the "7" presentation pattern 70a than when the reach effect is executed with an even presentation pattern 70a or an odd presentation pattern 70a other than "7" (for example, the selection rate of the presentation pattern 70a described above). This increases the player's sense of expectation as to which type of presentation pattern 70a will result in the reach effect, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

The ninth feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table is that in presentation modes D to F (specific game states), it is easier to execute a reach presentation (SPSP reach presentation) with the presentation pattern 70a of "7" (the presentation pattern that results in the most favorable probability jackpot when it becomes a jackpot result) when the most favorable probability jackpot is obtained in the most favorable probability jackpot in presentation modes D to F (specific game states) than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states) (for example, in presentation modes A to C, as shown in variable presentation pattern 11, after the reach presentation is executed with the presentation pattern 70a of "7", it may result in a miss, but presentation modes D to F do not have such a variable presentation pattern). Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in presentation modes D to F (specific game states) and increase the interest in the game.

The tenth feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table is that in presentation modes A to C (normal game state), even if a reach effect is executed with the presentation pattern 70a of "7", it does not guarantee a jackpot (for example, variable presentation pattern 11), but in presentation modes D to F (specific game state), if a reach effect is executed with the presentation pattern 70a of "7", a jackpot is guaranteed (presentation modes D to F do not have a variable presentation pattern that results in a miss after a reach effect is executed with the presentation pattern 70a of "7"). Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in presentation modes D to F (specific game state), and increase the interest in the game.

Note that, although a reach effect is always executed in a variable performance pattern in which a pseudo consecutive performance is executed, a variable performance pattern in which a reach effect is not executed even if a pseudo consecutive performance is executed may be set.

In addition, if the reel stops provisionally on a losing number after a cut-in or failed-to-win effect, a loss is confirmed, but a revival effect may be executed after a cut-in or failed-to-win effect to confirm a big win.

For example, the variation pattern of the revival performance is as follows: variation → pseudo success → variation → N reach → pseudo success → variation → N "7" reach → SPSP development → SPSP reach → decision → failure → miss → eye catch → miss (temporary stop "767") → revival performance (screen goes dark) → C pattern alignment (temporary stop "777") → C pattern alignment (definite stop "777"). Of these, in the case of a miss (temporary stop "767"), the sound output device 9 does not output a temporary stop sound, whereas in the case of a C pattern alignment (temporary stop "777"), the sound output device 9 outputs a sound effect of "jackpot x 3" (temporary stop sound). This makes it easier to recognize that the symbol combination that will result in a jackpot has temporarily stopped.

Also, there may be a variable performance pattern that changes the performance pattern 70a that forms the reach during the execution of the variable performance (executes a pattern replacement performance). For example, in variable performance pattern 7, it may be configured as follows: N reach (reach with 4 patterns) → SP development → SP reach (replaced with 5 pattern reach) → miss (pattern combination of "565"). Also, while the performance pattern 70a that forms the reach during the execution of the variable performance does not change, the color of the performance pattern 70a that forms the reach may change. For example, in variable performance pattern 7, it may be configured as follows: N reach (reach with 4 patterns (blue)) → SP development → SP reach (replaced with 4 patterns (gold) reach) → miss (pattern combination of "565"). Of course, it may be executed in a variable performance pattern that corresponds to a jackpot, and the more the variable performance pattern corresponds to a jackpot, the more frequently such pattern replacement performance may be executed.

In addition, in a variable performance pattern that can execute a reach (N reach, SP reach, SPSP reach, etc.), a reach prompting performance that prompts whether or not a reach will be formed may be executed. The reach prompting performance is a performance in which the left performance pattern 70a temporarily stops (for example, a 5 pattern) and the right performance pattern 70a is prompted to see whether the same performance pattern as the left performance pattern 70a will temporarily stop (in this case, a performance that prompts whether the 5 pattern will temporarily stop as the right performance pattern 70a). If the same performance pattern as the left performance pattern 70a temporarily stops, the reach prompting is successful and a reach will be reached (for example, "5↓5"); if the same performance pattern as the left performance pattern 70a does not temporarily stop, the reach prompting is unsuccessful and a miss will be made (for example, a pattern combination of "566"). In other words, if a variable presentation pattern that allows a reach to be executed has been determined, the reach stimulation performance success can be selected, and if a variable presentation pattern that does not allow a reach to be executed (variable presentation pattern 1 or variable presentation pattern 3) has been determined, the reach stimulation performance failure can be selected.

The reach stimulation effect may be executable in any of the presentation modes A to C and D to F, or may be executable in the presentation modes A to C but not in the presentation modes D to E, or may be executable in the presentation modes D to F but not in the presentation modes A to C, or may be arbitrarily determined. If it is executable in any of the presentation modes A to C and D to F, it is preferable that the presentation modes D to F have a higher rate of winning when the reach stimulation is successful than the presentation modes A to C. For example, in the case of the presentation modes D to F, when a variable presentation pattern corresponding to a big win is determined, it is easier to execute the reach stimulation success, and when a variable presentation pattern corresponding to a reach miss is determined, it is difficult to execute the reach stimulation failure, so that the success rate of the reach stimulation effect during the execution of the presentation modes D to F is increased. As a result, if the reach stimulation effect is executed during the execution of the presentation modes D to F, the expectation for a big win can be increased, leading to an increase in the interest in the game.

In addition, the reach stimulation effect may be executed in the same manner in presentation modes A to C and D to F, or a reach stimulation effect corresponding to presentation modes A to C or a reach stimulation effect corresponding to presentation modes D to F (a reach stimulation effect different from presentation modes A to C) may be executed.

(Jackpot notice performance determination process of the performance control unit)
The big win notice performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 114. Fig. 114 is a flowchart showing the big win notice performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m, and this process is executed after the variable performance pattern determination process (the process of determining the variable performance pattern based on the special chart variable pattern designation command) in the special chart special electric performance process described above.

In step E650-1, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the variable performance pattern to be executed in the current variable performance, and in step E650-2, selects a pre-reach notice determination table for determining a notice pattern for a pre-reach notice performance that makes the player expect that a jackpot game will be executed in the performance period before the reach (high-speed variable period), and determines the notice pattern. Details of the pre-reach notice determination table will be described later.

In step E650-3, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the pre-reach preview pattern is one that executes a dialogue preview. If it is one that executes a dialogue preview, the process proceeds to step E650-4. If it is not one that executes a dialogue preview, the process proceeds to step E650-6.

The "dialogue preview effect" is a type of jackpot preview effect in which an effective period is generated during the fluctuation effect (high-speed fluctuation period), and depending on whether the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period or the effective time has elapsed, a dialogue image suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot is displayed on the image display device, and sound corresponding to the dialogue image is output from the audio output device 9.

In step E650-4, the sub-CPU 130a selects a dialogue preview pattern determination table for determining the dialogue preview pattern of the dialogue preview performance to determine the dialogue preview pattern, and in step E650-5, sets a dialogue preview performance command corresponding to the dialogue preview pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the dialogue preview performance command is transmitted to the image control unit 145 and the lamp control unit 150, and a dialogue preview performance corresponding to the dialogue preview pattern is executed during the fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation period). Details of the dialogue preview pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the pre-reach preview pattern is one that will execute a step-up preview (SU preview) performance. If it is one that will execute a step-up preview performance, the process proceeds to step E650-7. If it is not one that will execute a step-up preview performance, the process proceeds to step E650-9.

The "step-up preview effect" is a type of jackpot preview effect in which step effects are executed in a predetermined order until one of multiple steps from the first step (first stage) to the fifth step (final stage) is reached, without generating an effective period for the effect button 17 during the fluctuation effect (high-speed fluctuation period).

In step E650-7, the sub-CPU 130a selects a step-up preview pattern determination table for determining the step-up preview pattern of the step-up preview performance to determine the step-up preview pattern, and in step E650-8, sets a step-up preview performance command corresponding to the step-up preview pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the step-up preview performance command is transmitted to the image control unit 145 and the lamp control unit 150, and a step-up preview performance corresponding to the step-up preview pattern is executed during the fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation period). Details of the dialogue preview pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-9, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern that executes a pseudo consecutive presentation. If it is a variable presentation pattern that executes a pseudo consecutive presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-10. If it is not a variable presentation pattern that does not execute a pseudo consecutive presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-12.

In step E650-10, the sub-CPU 130a selects a pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table for determining the pseudo-continuous performance pattern of the pseudo-continuous performance to determine the pseudo-continuous performance pattern, and in step E650-11, sets a pseudo-continuous performance command corresponding to the pseudo-continuous performance pattern in the transmission buffer. This causes the pseudo-continuous performance command to be transmitted to the image control unit 145 and lamp control unit 150, and a pseudo-continuous performance corresponding to the pseudo-continuous performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. The pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table will be described in detail later.

In step E650-12, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern that executes an advanced presentation (SP advanced presentation, SPSP advanced presentation, full rotation advanced presentation). If it is a variable presentation pattern that executes an advanced presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-13, and if it is not a variable presentation pattern that executes an advanced presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-15.

In step E650-13, the sub-CPU 130a selects a development performance pattern determination table for determining the development performance pattern of the development performance to determine the development performance pattern, and in step E650-14, sets a development performance command corresponding to the development performance pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the development performance command is transmitted to the image control unit 145 and the lamp control unit 150, and a development performance corresponding to the development performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. The development performance pattern determination table will be described in detail later.

In step E650-15, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern that executes a reach presentation (post-reach presentation). If it is a variable presentation pattern that executes a reach presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-16, and if it is not a variable presentation pattern that executes a reach presentation, the process for determining the current big win advance notice presentation ends.

In step E650-16, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variation presentation pattern is a variation presentation pattern that executes a cut-in presentation. If it is a variation presentation pattern that executes a cut-in presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-17, and if it is not a variation presentation pattern that executes a cut-in presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-19.

In step E650-17, the sub-CPU 130a selects a cut-in performance pattern determination table for determining the cut-in performance pattern of the cut-in performance to determine the cut-in performance pattern, and in step E650-18 sets a cut-in performance command corresponding to the cut-in performance pattern in the transmission buffer. This causes the cut-in performance command to be transmitted to the image control unit 145 and lamp control unit 150, and a cut-in performance corresponding to the cut-in performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. Details of the cut-in performance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-19, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern that executes a deciding performance. If it is a variable performance pattern that executes a deciding performance, the process proceeds to step E650-20, and if it is not a variable performance pattern that executes a deciding performance, the process proceeds to step E650-22.

In step E650-20, the sub-CPU 130a selects a final performance pattern determination table for determining the final performance pattern of the final performance to determine the final performance pattern, and in step E650-21, sets a final performance command corresponding to the final performance pattern in the transmission buffer. This causes the final performance command to be transmitted to the image control unit 145 and lamp control unit 150, and a final performance corresponding to the final performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. Details of the final performance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-22, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern that executes a re-draw presentation. If it is a variable presentation pattern that executes a re-draw presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-23, and if it is not a variable presentation pattern that executes a re-draw presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-25.

In step E650-23, the sub-CPU 130a selects a re-lottery presentation pattern determination table for determining the re-lottery presentation pattern of the re-lottery presentation to determine the re-lottery presentation pattern, and in step E650-24, sets a re-lottery presentation command corresponding to the re-lottery presentation pattern in the transmission buffer. This causes the re-lottery presentation command to be transmitted to the image control unit 145 and the lamp control unit 150, and a re-lottery presentation corresponding to the re-lottery presentation pattern is executed during the variable presentation. Details of the re-lottery presentation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-25, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern capable of executing a definitive presentation (a presentation that definitively notifies the player that a jackpot has been reached) (resulting in a jackpot). If the variable presentation pattern is capable of executing a definitive presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-26. If the variable presentation pattern is not capable of executing a definitive presentation, the process for determining the current jackpot advance presentation is terminated.

In step E650-26, the sub-CPU 130a selects a confirmed performance pattern determination table for determining the confirmed performance pattern of the confirmed performance to determine the confirmed performance pattern, and in step E650-27, sets a confirmed performance command corresponding to the confirmed performance pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends this big win preview performance determination process. This causes the confirmed performance command to be transmitted to the image control unit 145 and lamp control unit 150, and a confirmed performance corresponding to the confirmed performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. The confirmed performance pattern determination table will be described in detail later.

(Pre-reach notice decision table)
Figure 115 is a diagram showing a pre-reach notice determination table which is referenced when determining the notice pattern of the pre-reach notice performance for presentation modes A to C (normal game playing state), and Figure 116 is a diagram showing a pre-reach notice determination table which is referenced when determining the notice pattern of the pre-reach notice performance for presentation modes D to F (specific game playing state).

As shown in Figures 115 and 116, the pre-reach notice determination table associates the presentation mode, the jackpot determination result, the type of variable presentation pattern, the selection rate (%) of each notice pattern, and the selected notice pattern.

There are three types of pre-reach preview patterns: "No Preview", where the pre-reach preview effect is not executed; "Dialogue Preview Effect", where a dialogue preview effect is executed; and "Step-up Preview Effect", where a step-up preview effect is executed. The expected probability of a jackpot being played (the rate at which the vibration effect associated with the aforementioned pattern matching is executed) is No Preview < Dialogue Preview Effect < Step-up Preview Effect.

The first feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in Figures 115 and 116 is that the pre-reach notice performance is more likely to be executed when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot than when it is a miss, and the pre-reach notice performance is more likely to be executed when a variable presentation pattern with a high jackpot expectation has been determined than when a variable presentation pattern with a low jackpot expectation has been determined. In this way, it is possible to build up the player's anticipation for the execution of a jackpot game, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The second feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in Figures 115 and 116 is that in presentation modes D to F (specific game states), the pre-reach notice effects (both the dialogue notice effects that can execute a vibration effect with the effective period of the presentation button 17, and the step-up notice effects that can execute a vibration effect without the effective period of the presentation button 17) are less likely to be executed (the execution rate is lower) in the event of a miss, compared to presentation modes A to C (normal game states). Therefore, in presentation modes D to F (specific game states), where the fluctuation time is likely to be short, unnecessary pre-reach notice effects are less likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in Figures 115 and 116 is that, even in the case of a jackpot, pre-reach notice effects are less likely to be executed (the execution rate is lower) in presentation modes D to F (specific game states) than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states) when the variable presentation pattern is a pattern that executes a normal reach presentation or a pattern that executes an SP reach presentation. Therefore, in presentation modes D to F (specific game states) where the variable time is likely to be short, unnecessary pre-reach notice effects are less likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in Figures 115 and 116 is that when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the rate at which a step-up notice effect is determined is higher than the rate at which a dialogue notice effect is determined, so that the expectation of a jackpot (the rate at which a vibration effect is executed in conjunction with the aforementioned pattern alignment, the rate at which a vibration effect is executed in the deciding effect described below, etc.) is higher when a step-up notice effect that does not involve a valid period of the effect button 17 is executed than when a dialogue notice effect that involves a valid period of the effect button 17 is executed. This makes it possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the types of pre-reach notice effects, and to improve the enjoyment of the game.

The fifth feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in Figures 115 and 116 is that during normal gameplay, when the second variation effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (long variation effect pattern, special SP reach effect pattern), it is more difficult (lower rate of execution) to execute a line notice effect (operation effect) that involves the effective period (operation) of the effect button 17 than when the first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (other than the long variation effect pattern and special SP reach effect pattern). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal gameplay state, in which the first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is more likely to be executed, and to increase the interest in the game.

The sixth feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in Figures 115 and 116 is that, during normal gameplay, when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (special SP reach presentation pattern), it is more difficult (lower rate of execution) to execute a dialogue notice effect (operation effect) that accompanies the effective period (operation) of the presentation button 17 than when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (reach presentation pattern other than the long variable effect pattern and the special SP reach presentation pattern). Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the normal gameplay state, in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed easily, and to increase the interest in the game.

The seventh feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in Figures 115 and 116 is that the dialogue notice notice effect (operation effect) involving the effective period (operation) of the effect button 17 is less likely to be executed (the rate of execution is lower) when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed during a specific game state (long variation effect pattern, special SP reach effect pattern) than when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed during a normal game state (other than the long variation effect pattern and special SP reach effect pattern). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is more likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The eighth feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in Figures 115 and 116 is that the dialogue notice notice effect (operation effect) involving the effective period (operation) of the effect button 17 is less likely to be executed (the rate of execution is lower) when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed during a specific game state (special SP reach presentation pattern) than when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed during a normal game state (reach presentation pattern other than the special SP reach presentation pattern). Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the normal game state where the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is more likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The ninth feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in Figures 115 and 116 is that during a specific game state, when a second variation effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (other than the long variation effect pattern and the special SP reach effect pattern), the dialogue notice effect (operation effect) that accompanies the effective period (operation) of the effect button 17 is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) than when a first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (long variation effect pattern, special SP reach effect pattern). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the presentation in a specific game state in which the second variation effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is more likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The tenth feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIG. 115 and FIG. 116 is that, during a specific game state, when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (reach presentation patterns other than the long variable effect pattern and the special SP reach presentation pattern), the dialogue notice effect (operation presentation) that accompanies the effective period (operation) of the presentation button 17 is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) than when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (special SP reach presentation pattern). Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in a specific game state in which the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is more likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The eleventh feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in Figures 115 and 116 is that when the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal game state (long variable performance pattern, special SP reach performance pattern), the dialogue notice performance can be executed, but the step-up notice performance is not executed. Therefore, the rate at which the pre-reach performance is executed and the number of types of pre-reach performance that can be executed can be made different between when the first variable performance is executed and when the second variable performance is executed in the normal game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The twelfth feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in Figures 115 and 116 is that when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in a specific game state (long variable performance pattern, special SP reach performance pattern), the dialogue notice performance can be executed, but the step-up notice performance is not executed. Therefore, the rate at which the pre-reach performance is executed and the number of types of pre-reach performance that can be executed can be made different between when the first variable performance is executed and when the second variable performance is executed in a specific game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The expectation of a big win (the rate at which the vibration effect associated with the matching of symbols described above is executed, the rate at which the vibration effect associated with the successful decision effect described below is executed, etc.) may be higher when the dialogue preview effect is executed than when the step-up preview effect is executed. Even in this case, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the type of pre-reach preview effect, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the second variable effect (display of the variable second special symbol) that results in a miss during the normal game state is executed, or when the first variable effect (display of the variable first special symbol) that results in a miss during the specific game state is executed, the dialogue preview effect (operation effect) or step-up preview effect (non-operation effect) may not be executed. Also, when the second variable effect (display of the variable second special symbol) that results in a jackpot during the normal game state is executed, or when the first variable effect (display of the variable first special symbol) that results in a jackpot during the specific game state is executed, the dialogue preview effect (operation effect) or step-up preview effect (non-operation effect) may not be executed.

(Dialogue preview pattern determination table)
FIG. 117 shows a dialogue preview pattern determination table which is referenced when determining the preview pattern for the dialogue preview performance.

As shown in FIG. 117, the dialogue preview pattern determination table associates the presentation mode, jackpot determination result, variable presentation pattern type, selection rate (%) of each dialogue preview pattern, and the selected dialogue preview pattern, and for reference, the presentation configuration of each dialogue preview pattern (valid suggestion presentation, valid period, presentation content) is listed.

The "valid suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests the possibility of a valid period occurring, and specifically, it is an effect in which multiple semi-transparent effect button images modeled after effect button 17 are displayed and moved on the first image display device 70, and the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit, 3 seconds)" indicates that the valid period for the dialogue preview effect ends with one operation of the effect button 17 or the elapse of 3 seconds.

The "promotion effect" in the validity period column is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 during the validity period. Specifically, it is an effect in which an opaque effect button image that resembles the effect button 17 is displayed in a specific position, and a gauge image is displayed that indicates the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that the above-mentioned opaque effect button image is displayed as a button image imitating effect button 17 in its normal, non-protruding state, which emits white light, and that effect button 17 emits white light.
"Button state" indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and "normal" in the button state column indicates that the effect button 17 is in its normal state, not protruding.

"Normal dialogue (black)" in the dialogue presentation mode column indicates that normal dialogue that does not suggest the possibility of a jackpot game being played is displayed in black text and that the normal dialogue is output as audio.
"Chance Line (Black)" indicates that a chance line indicating the possibility of a big win game is displayed in black text and the chance line is output as voice.
"Reach line (black)" indicates that a reach line that confirms the execution of a reach effect is displayed in black text and that the reach line is output as voice.
"Reach line (red)" indicates that a reach line that confirms the execution of a reach effect is displayed in red text and that the reach line is output as voice.

"Hot line (red)" indicates that a hot line that indicates a high possibility of a jackpot game being played is displayed in red text and the hot line is output as audio.
"Super Hot Quote (Gold)" indicates that a super hot quote that indicates a very high possibility of winning a jackpot game is displayed in gold letters and the super hot quote is output as voice.
"Determined lines (rainbow)" indicates that the confirmed lines confirming the execution of a jackpot game are displayed in rainbow-colored letters and the confirmed lines are output as voice.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column indicates that a weak vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for 1 second from the time the dialogue starts to be displayed (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends).
"Strong vibration (1 second)" indicates that a strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 1 second from the time the dialogue starts to be displayed (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends).

The probability of winning for each dialogue effect is: "Normal dialogue" < "Chance dialogue (black)" < "Reach dialogue (black)" < "Reach dialogue (red)" < "Hot dialogue (red)" < "Super hot dialogue (gold)" < "Definite dialogue (rainbow)". Also, the probability of winning for each vibration effect is: "Weak vibration effect" < "Strong vibration effect".

The first feature of the dialogue preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 117 is that it is possible to execute a vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 when a dialogue with a high probability of winning (a hot dialogue or higher) is displayed. This makes it possible to effectively inform the player that a jackpot is highly likely to occur, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The second feature of the line preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 117 is that the vibration effect of the effect button 17 (operation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (higher execution rate) when a line preview effect of a super hot line, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a hot line, is executed than when a line preview effect of a hot line is executed, and the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed than when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is not executed when a line preview effect of a hot line is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's anticipation as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 17 will be executed when the line preview effect is executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the dialogue preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 117 is that the vibration effect that is executed when a dialogue with a high probability of winning (a hot dialogue or higher) is displayed is relatively short in duration. This makes it possible to execute an effect with a high production effect while suppressing the inconvenience of making the player mistakenly believe that a jackpot game has been played, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the line preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 117 is that there are two types of vibration intensity for the vibration effect that is executed when a line with a high probability of a jackpot (a hot line or higher) is displayed, depending on the probability of a jackpot. Therefore, the vibration intensity of the vibration effect can indicate the probability of a jackpot, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the dialogue preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 117 is that in the normal game state, when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (other than the special SP reach performance pattern), vibration (vibration performance) of the performance button 17 can be executed in the dialogue preview performance, whereas when the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (special SP reach performance pattern), vibration (vibration performance) of the performance button 17 is not executed in the dialogue preview performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The sixth feature of the dialogue preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 117 is that in the normal game state, when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (a reach performance pattern other than the special SP reach performance pattern), vibration (vibration performance) of the performance button 17 can be executed in the dialogue preview performance, whereas when the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (a special SP reach performance pattern), vibration (vibration performance) of the performance button 17 is not executed in the dialogue preview performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The seventh feature of the dialogue preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 117 is that in the normal game state, when the first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (other than the special SP reach performance pattern), vibration (vibration effect) of the performance button 17 can be executed in the dialogue preview performance, whereas in the specific game state, when the first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (long variation performance pattern, special SP reach performance pattern), vibration (vibration effect) of the performance button 17 is not executed in the dialogue preview performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the normal game state in which the first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The eighth feature of the dialogue preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 117 is that in the normal game state, when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (a reach performance pattern other than the special SP reach performance pattern), vibration (vibration performance) of the performance button 17 can be executed in the dialogue preview performance, whereas in the specific game state, when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (a special SP reach performance pattern), vibration (vibration performance) of the performance button 17 is not executed in the dialogue preview performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The ninth feature of the dialogue preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 117 is that in a specific game state, when the first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (long variation effect pattern, special SP reach effect pattern), vibration (vibration effect) of the effect button 17 is not executed in the dialogue preview effect, whereas when the second variation effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (other than the long variation effect pattern and special SP reach effect pattern), vibration (vibration effect) of the effect button 17 can be executed in the dialogue preview effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in a specific game state in which the second variation effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The tenth feature of the dialogue preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 117 is that in a specific game state, when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (special SP reach performance pattern), vibration (vibration performance) of the performance button 17 is not executed in the dialogue preview performance, whereas when the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (reach performance pattern other than the long variable performance pattern and the special SP reach performance pattern), vibration (vibration performance) of the performance button 17 can be executed in the dialogue preview performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in a specific game state in which the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Note that, although there are weak and strong vibration effects as vibration effects executed in the dialogue preview effect, it is also possible to have only weak vibration effects or only strong vibration effects, or to make the vibration time of the strong vibration effect longer than that of the weak vibration effect.

In addition, the probability of winning a jackpot when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed during the dialogue preview effect is the same in effect modes A to C (normal game state) and effect modes D to F (specific game state), but the probability of winning a jackpot may be made higher in effect modes A to C (normal game state), or the probability of winning a jackpot may be made higher in effect modes D to F (specific game state). In this way, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of effect mode, and it is also possible to increase the player's expectations in effect modes D to F, which are advantageous to the player, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the effective period ends when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective time has elapsed, and the dialogue preview effect is executed, but if the effective period ends when the effective time has elapsed, the dialogue preview effect may not be executed.

In addition, although the dialogue preview performance is executed by generating a valid period, the dialogue preview performance may be executed without generating a valid period, and in that case, the vibration performance executed may be only a weak vibration performance for 1 second or only a strong vibration performance for 1 second.

In addition, when the second variation effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a miss is executed during normal game play, the effect button may be vibrated (vibration effect) during the dialogue preview effect, but even in this case, it is preferable to set the rate to be lower than when the first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed during normal game play.

In addition, when the second variation effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed during normal game mode, the effect button may be vibrated (vibration effect) during the dialogue preview effect, but even in this case, the rate should be lower than when the first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed during normal game mode, and higher than when the second variation effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a miss is executed during normal game mode.

In addition, when the first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed during the specific game state, the effect button may be vibrated (vibration effect) during the dialogue preview effect, but even in this case, it is preferable to set the rate to be lower than when the second variation effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a miss is executed during the specific game state.

In addition, when a first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot during a specific game state is executed, the effect button may be vibrated (vibration effect) during the dialogue preview effect, but even in this case, the rate should be lower than when a second variation effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot during a specific game state is executed, and higher than when a first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss during a specific game state is executed.

(Step-up notice pattern determination table)
Figure 118 shows a step-up preview pattern determination table which is referenced when determining the preview pattern for the step-up preview performance.

As shown in FIG. 118, the step-up preview pattern determination table associates the presentation mode, jackpot determination result, variable presentation pattern type, selection rate (%) of each step-up preview pattern, and the selected step-up preview pattern, and for reference, the presentation configuration of each step-up preview pattern (step-up (SU) presentation mode, button vibration) is listed.

"1→2" in the step-up performance mode column indicates that the first and second step performances are executed in order.
"1→2→3" indicates that the first to third step performances are executed in order.
"1→2→3→4" indicates that the first to fourth step performances are executed in order.
"1→2→3→4→5" indicates that the first to fifth step performances are executed in order.
"1→2→3→5" indicates that after the first to third step performances are executed in order, the fourth step performance is skipped and the fifth step performance is executed.
In each step-up performance mode, the performance time of the step performance before the final step performance is 1 second, and the performance time of the final step performance is 3 seconds.

In the button vibration column, "Weak vibration at '5' (1 second)" indicates that a weak vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for 1 second from the start of the 5th step effect.

The probability of winning for each step-up performance is "1→2" < "1→2→3" < "1→2→3→4" < "1→2→3→4→5" < "1→2→3→5".

The first feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 118 is that when a step effect (fifth step effect) with a high probability of winning is performed, it is possible to execute a vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 without generating an effective period for the effect button 17. This makes it possible to effectively inform the player that the probability of winning is high, thereby increasing the interest of the player in the game.

The second feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 118 is that the vibration effect that is executed when the step effect (fifth step effect) with a high probability of winning is displayed is relatively short. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect with a high performance while suppressing the inconvenience of making the player mistakenly believe that a winning game has been confirmed, and to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the step-up preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 118 is that the vibration mode (vibration strength, vibration duration) of the vibration effect executed when the step effect (fifth step effect) with a high probability of winning is displayed is only one predetermined type (weak vibration (1 second)). Therefore, in the step-up preview effect where the player does not operate the effect button 17 and therefore it is difficult to understand the type of vibration effect, it is possible to prevent the effect mode from becoming complicated, making the game more interesting.

The fourth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 118 is that in the case of a jackpot, step-up notice effects with a low expectancy are less likely to be executed (the execution rate is lower) in presentation modes D to F (specific game states) than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states). This makes it possible to vary the playability depending on the type of presentation mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the step-up preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 118 is that weak vibration effects are more likely to be executed (higher execution rate) when a jackpot occurs in presentation modes D-F (specific game states) than in presentation modes A-C (normal game states). This allows the gameplay to be varied depending on the type of presentation mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 118 is that the expectation of a big win is higher in presentation modes D to F (specific game state) than in presentation modes A to C (normal game state) when a vibration presentation of the presentation button 17 without an effective period (display of an operation prompting image) is executed in the step-up notice presentation. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of presentation mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the step-up preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 118 is that during normal gameplay, vibration (vibration effect) of the effect button 17 is less likely to be executed (the rate of execution is lower) in the dialogue preview effect when the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (long variation effect pattern, special SP reach effect pattern) than when the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (other than the long variation effect pattern and special SP reach effect pattern). Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the normal gameplay state, where the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is more likely to be executed, and to increase the interest in the game.

It is also possible to set the expectation of a big win when a vibration effect of the effect button 17 that is not accompanied by an effective period (display of an operation prompting image) is executed in the step-up preview effect to be higher in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) than in the effect modes D to F (specific game state). Even in this case, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of effect mode, and it is easier to increase the player's expectations in the effect modes D to F that are advantageous to the player, making it possible to increase the fun of the game.

(Pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 119 shows a pseudo-consecutive effect pattern determination table that is referenced when determining the effect pattern of the pseudo-consecutive effect.

As shown in FIG. 119, the pseudo-consecutive performance pattern determination table associates the performance mode, the jackpot determination result, the type of variable performance pattern, the selection rate (%) of each pseudo-consecutive performance pattern, and the selected pseudo-consecutive performance pattern, and for reference, the performance configuration of each pseudo-consecutive performance pattern (valid suggestion performance, valid period, performance content) is also listed.

The "valid suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests the possibility of a valid period occurring, and specifically, it is an effect in which multiple semi-transparent effect button images modeled after effect button 17 are displayed and moved on the first image display device 70, and the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit, 3 seconds)" indicates that the valid period in the pseudo consecutive performance ends with one operation of the performance button 17 or the passage of 3 seconds.

The "promotion effect" in the validity period column is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 during the validity period. Specifically, it is an effect in which an opaque effect button image that resembles the effect button 17 is displayed in a specific position, and a gauge image is displayed that indicates the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that the above-mentioned opaque effect button image is displayed as a button image imitating effect button 17 in its normal, non-protruding state, which emits white light, and that effect button 17 emits white light.
"White protruding button" indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits white light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above, and that the effect button 17 emits white light.

The "Button Status" in the Validity Period column indicates the status of the effect button 17 during the validity period, and "Normal" in the Button Status column indicates that the effect button 17 is in a normal state where it is not protruding, and "Protruding" indicates that the effect button 17 is in a protruding state where it is protruding.

"Pseudo failure" in the pseudo consecutive performance mode column indicates that a pseudo consecutive failure performance is executed in which the normal performance pattern 70a temporarily stops without the pseudo pattern suggesting the execution of a pseudo consecutive performance as the central performance pattern 70a temporarily stopping, and a failure sound effect is output.
"Pseudo success" indicates that the central performance pattern 70a, which indicates the execution of a pseudo consecutive win, temporarily stops, a success sound effect is output, and the first movable member 77b weakly moves, thereby executing a pseudo consecutive win success performance.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column indicates that a weak vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for 1 second from the time when the pseudo pattern is temporarily stopped (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends).
"Strong vibration (1 second)" indicates that a strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 1 second from the time when the pseudo pattern is temporarily stopped (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends).

The probability of winning for each promotion effect is "normal white button" < "protruding white button." In addition, the probability of winning for each button state is "normal" < "protruding." In addition, the probability of winning for each vibration effect is "weak vibration effect" < "strong vibration effect."

The first feature of the pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 119 is that when a pseudo consecutive success performance is performed in a variable performance pattern with a high probability of winning, a vibration performance may be executed in which the effective period of the performance button 17 is generated and the performance button 17 is vibrated. This makes it possible to effectively inform the player that the probability of winning is high, thereby increasing the interest of the player in the game.

The second feature of the pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 119 is that the vibration performance executed when the pseudo consecutive success performance is executed in a variable performance pattern with a high expectation of a jackpot is relatively short. Therefore, it is possible to execute a performance with a high performance effect while suppressing the inconvenience of mistaking the execution of the jackpot game for a confirmed game, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 119 is that there are two types of vibration intensity of the vibration performance executed when a pseudo consecutive successful performance is performed in a variable performance pattern with a high probability of winning. This means that the vibration intensity of the vibration performance can suggest the probability of winning, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 119 is that, although it is possible to execute a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive success performance) using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, first movable member 77b, etc.) in performance modes A to C (normal game state) and performance modes D to F (specific game state), the expectation of a big win is higher when a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive success performance) using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, first movable member 77b, etc.) is executed in performance modes D to F (specific game state) than in performance modes A to C (normal game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of performance mode, and it is easier to increase the player's expectations in performance modes D to F, which are advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 119 is that there are cases where the pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive success performance) is performed using the first movable member 77b, and cases where the pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive success performance) is performed using the button vibration motor that vibrates the first movable member 77b and the performance button 17. This makes it possible to enhance the performance effect of the pseudo consecutive performance, and to increase the interest of the game.

Note that, in a variable presentation pattern with a high probability of winning, the presentation button 17 may be in a protruding state during the valid period when a pseudo-successful consecutive presentation is performed, but it may be configured not to be in a protruding state.

In addition, the vibration effects executed in the pseudo consecutive success effect include weak vibration effects and strong vibration effects, but it is also possible to have only weak vibration effects or only strong vibration effects.

In addition, although a valid period is generated to execute the pseudo consecutive success or failure effect, it is also possible to execute the pseudo consecutive success or failure effect without generating a valid period, and the vibration effect executed in the pseudo consecutive success effect may be only a weak vibration effect for 3 seconds or only a strong vibration effect for 3 seconds, or only a weak vibration effect for 1 second or only a strong vibration effect for 1 second.

In addition, the expectation of a jackpot may be higher in presentation modes A to C (normal game state) when a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive successful performance) using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, first movable member 77b, etc.) is executed than in presentation modes D to F (specific game state), the expectation of a jackpot may be higher in presentation modes B or C when a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive successful performance) using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, first movable member 77b, etc.) is executed than in presentation mode A, or the expectation of a jackpot may be higher in presentation modes E or F when a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive successful performance) using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, first movable member 77b, etc.) is executed than in presentation mode D.

In addition, in the pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive successful performance), the action performance is performed using the first movable member 77b, but it is also possible to perform the action performance using the first movable member 77a. In this case, it is preferable to perform the action performance using the first movable member 77b more frequently than the action performance using the first movable member 77a.

(Development performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 120 shows a development effect pattern determination table which is referenced when determining the presentation pattern of a development effect.

As shown in FIG. 120, the development performance pattern determination table associates the performance mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable performance pattern type, the development performance type for which the development performance pattern is determined, the selection rate (%) of each development performance pattern, and the selected development performance pattern, and for reference, the performance configuration of each development performance pattern (valid suggestion performance, valid period, performance content) is listed.

The "valid suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests the possibility of a valid period occurring, and specifically, it is an effect in which multiple semi-transparent effect button images modeled after effect button 17 are displayed and moved on the first image display device 70, and the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"None" in the valid suggestion effect column indicates that a valid suggestion effect will not be executed, "Yes (false)" indicates that a valid suggestion effect will be executed but it is a false valid suggestion effect in which no valid period occurs afterwards, and "Yes" indicates that a valid suggestion effect will be executed and then a valid period will occur.

"Valid period (long press for 4 seconds)" indicates that the developing performance progresses gradually by pressing and holding the performance button 17, and that the valid period of the developing performance ends when 4 seconds have elapsed.
The "promotion effect" in the validity period column is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 during the validity period; specifically, as a result of multiple translucent effect button images gathering at a specific position, an opaque effect button image is displayed at the specific position, and a gauge image is displayed that indicates the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that the above-mentioned opaque effect button image is displayed as a button image imitating effect button 17 in its normal, non-protruding state, which emits white light, and that effect button 17 emits white light.
"Normal button red" indicates that the above-mentioned opaque effect button image is displayed as a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal, non-protruding state, emitting red light, and that the effect button 17 emits red light.

The "Button Status" in the Validity Period column indicates the status of the effect button 17 during the validity period, and "Normal" in the Button Status column indicates that the effect button 17 is in a normal state where it is not protruding, and "Protruding" indicates that the effect button 17 is in a protruding state where it is protruding.

"SP notification" in the development performance mode column indicates that an SP development pattern is displayed indicating development to an SP reach performance as a result of the development performance, and an SP development performance is executed in which the first development sound effect is output.
"SPSP notification" indicates that an SPSP development effect is executed in which an SPSP development pattern is derived and displayed, suggesting development to an SPSP reach effect as a result of the development effect, and a second development sound effect is output.
"Full rotation notification" indicates that a full rotation development pattern is derived and displayed, suggesting development to a full rotation reach performance as a result of the development performance, and a full rotation development performance is executed in which a third development sound effect is output.

"Weak action" in the reel action column indicates that when various patterns are derived and displayed (= at the end of the valid period), the first movable member 77b emits blue light and a weak action with a small operating range is performed.
"Strong action" indicates that when various patterns are derived and displayed (= at the end of the valid period), a strong action presentation is executed in which the first movable member 77b emits red light and performs a strong action with a large swing range.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column indicates that a weak vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for 1 second from the time when the various development patterns are derived and displayed (= the end of the valid period).
"Strong vibration (1 second)" indicates that a weak vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 1 second from the time when various patterns are derived and displayed (= the end of the valid period).

The probability of winning for each action effect is "weak action" < "strong action." Also, the probability of winning for each vibration effect is "weak vibration" < "strong vibration."

The first feature of the development presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 120 is that when a variable presentation pattern with a high probability of winning is performed and a development presentation with a high probability of winning (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) is performed, a vibration presentation may be executed in which an effective period of the presentation button 17 is generated and the presentation button 17 is vibrated. This makes it possible to effectively inform the player that the probability of winning is high, thereby increasing the interest of the player in the game.

The second feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 120 is that the vibration effect of the effect button 17 (operation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (higher execution rate) when a full rotation development effect, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than an SPSP development effect, is executed than when an SPSP development effect is executed, and the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed than when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is not executed when an SPSP development effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 17 will be executed when an SPSP development effect is executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the development presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 120 is that the vibration presentation executed when the development presentation (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) with a high expectation of a jackpot is performed in a variable presentation pattern with a high expectation of a jackpot is relatively short in duration. Therefore, it is possible to execute a presentation with a high presentation effect while suppressing the inconvenience of mistaking the execution of a jackpot game for one that has been confirmed, and to increase the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 120 is that there are two types of vibration intensity of the vibration effect that is executed when a development effect (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) is performed, which is a variable effect pattern with a high probability of winning, depending on the probability of winning. Therefore, the vibration intensity of the vibration effect can indicate the probability of winning, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The fifth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 120 is that, although the development effects (SPSP development effects, etc.) can be executed using the same presentation device (presentation button vibration motor, first movable member 77b, etc.) in presentation modes A to C (normal game state) and presentation modes D to F (specific game state), the expectation of a big win is higher when a development effect using a presentation device (presentation button vibration motor, first movable member 77b, etc.) is executed in presentation modes D to F (specific game state) than in presentation modes A to C (normal game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of presentation mode, and it is easier to increase the player's expectations in presentation modes D to F, which are advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the development presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 120 is that during normal gameplay, when the first variation presentation (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (other than the special SP reach presentation), vibration (vibration presentation) of the presentation button 17 can be executed in the development presentation, whereas when the second variation presentation (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (special SP reach presentation pattern), vibration (vibration presentation) of the presentation button 17 is not executed in the development presentation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the normal gameplay state in which the first variation presentation (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The seventh feature of the development presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 120 is that in the normal game state, when the first variable presentation (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (other than the special SP reach presentation pattern), vibration (vibration presentation) of the presentation button 17 can be executed in the development presentation, whereas when the second variable presentation (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (special SP reach presentation pattern), vibration (vibration presentation) of the presentation button 17 is not executed in the development presentation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the normal game state in which the first variable presentation (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the development presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 120 is that when the first variation presentation (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed during normal game play (other than the special SP reach presentation), vibration (vibration presentation) of the presentation button 17 can be executed in the development presentation, whereas when the first variation presentation (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed during the specific game play (special SP reach presentation), vibration (vibration presentation) of the presentation button 17 is not executed in the development presentation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the normal game play state in which the first variation presentation (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The ninth feature of the development presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 120 is that in the normal game state, when the first variable presentation (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (a reach presentation pattern other than the special SP reach presentation pattern), vibration (vibration presentation) of the presentation button 17 can be executed in the development presentation, whereas in the specific game state, when the first variable presentation (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (a special SP reach presentation pattern), vibration (vibration presentation) of the presentation button 17 is not executed in the development presentation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the normal game state in which the first variable presentation (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The ninth feature of the development presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 120 is that in a specific game state, when a first variation presentation (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (special SP reach presentation pattern), vibration (vibration presentation) of the presentation button 17 is not executed in the development presentation, whereas when a second variation presentation (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (other than the special SP reach presentation pattern), vibration (vibration presentation) of the presentation button 17 can be executed in the development presentation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in a specific game state in which the second variation presentation (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The tenth feature of the development presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 120 is that in a specific game state, when the first variable presentation (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (special SP reach presentation pattern), vibration (vibration presentation) of the presentation button 17 is not executed in the development presentation, whereas when the second variable presentation (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (reach presentation pattern other than the special SP reach presentation pattern), vibration (vibration presentation) of the presentation button 17 can be executed in the development presentation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in a specific game state in which the second variable presentation (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

Note that, although there are weak vibration effects and strong vibration effects as vibration effects executed in the development effects, it is also possible to have only weak vibration effects or only strong vibration effects.

In addition, the expectation of a jackpot may be higher in presentation modes A to C (normal game state) when an advanced performance (such as an SPSP advanced performance) using the same performance device (such as the performance button vibration motor, the first movable member 77b, etc.) is executed than in presentation modes D to F (specific game state), the expectation of a jackpot may be higher in presentation modes B or C when an advanced performance using the same performance device (such as the performance button vibration motor, the first movable member 77b, etc.) is executed than in presentation mode A, and the expectation of a jackpot may be higher in presentation modes E or F when an advanced performance using the same performance device (such as the performance button vibration motor, the first movable member 77b, etc.) is executed than in presentation mode D.

In addition, when the second variation effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a miss is executed during normal game play, the effect button may be vibrated (vibration effect) in the advanced effect, but even in this case, it is preferable to set the rate to be lower than when the first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed during normal game play.

In addition, when a second variation effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed during normal gameplay, the effect button may be vibrated (vibration effect) in the advanced effect, but even in this case, the rate should be lower than when a first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed during normal gameplay, and higher than when a second variation effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a miss is executed during normal gameplay.

In addition, when the first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed during the specific game state, the effect button may be vibrated (vibration effect) in the development effect, but even in this case, it is preferable to set the rate to be lower than when the second variation effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a miss is executed during the specific game state.

In addition, when a first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot during a specific game state is executed, the effect button may be vibrated (vibration effect) in the development effect, but even in this case, the rate should be lower than when a second variation effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot during a specific game state is executed, and higher than when a first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss during a specific game state is executed.

(Cut-in performance pattern determination table)
Figure 121 is a diagram showing a cut-in presentation pattern determination table which is referred to when determining the presentation pattern of the cut-in presentation for presentation modes A to C (normal game play state), and Figure 122 is a diagram showing a cut-in presentation pattern determination table which is referred to when determining the presentation pattern of the cut-in presentation for presentation modes D to F (specific game play state).

As shown in Figures 121 and 122, the cut-in performance pattern determination table associates the performance mode, the jackpot determination result, the type of variable performance pattern, the selection rate (%) of each cut-in performance pattern, and the cut-in performance pattern to be selected, and for reference, the performance configuration of each cut-in performance pattern (valid suggestion performance, valid period, performance content) is listed.

The "valid suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests the possibility of a valid period occurring, and specifically, it is an effect in which multiple semi-transparent effect button images modeled after effect button 17 are displayed and moved on the first image display device 70, and the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit, 4 seconds)" indicates that the valid period for the cut-in effect ends with one operation of the effect button 17 or the passage of 4 seconds.

The "promotion effect" in the validity period column is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 during the validity period. Specifically, without executing a validity suggestion effect or as a result of executing a validity suggestion effect, an opaque effect button image is displayed in a specific position, and a gauge image is displayed that indicates the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that the above-mentioned opaque effect button image is displayed as a button image imitating effect button 17 in its normal, non-protruding state, which emits white light, and that effect button 17 emits white light.
"Red protruding button" indicates that the above-mentioned opaque effect button image is displayed as a button image imitating effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits red light, and that effect button 17 emits red light.
"Protruding button rainbow" indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits rainbow light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above, and that the effect button 17 emits rainbow light.

The "Button Status" in the Validity Period column indicates the status of the effect button 17 during the validity period, with "Normal" indicating that the effect button 17 is in its normal state, where it is not protruding. "Protruding" indicating that the effect button 17 is in its protruding state.

"Blue cut-in" in the cut-in performance mode column indicates that a blue cut-in performance is executed in which a blue frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and a first cut-in sound effect is output.
"Green cut-in" indicates that a green frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and a green cut-in performance is executed in which a second cut-in sound effect is output.
"Red cut-in" indicates that a red frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and a red cut-in performance is executed in which a third cut-in sound effect is output.

"Weak vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column indicates that a weak vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for 3 seconds from the time when the cut-in image begins to be displayed (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends).
"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" indicates that a strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 3 seconds from the time when the cut-in image begins to be displayed (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends).

The likelihood of winning for each cut-in is "blue cut-in" < "green cut-in" < "red cut-in." Also, the likelihood of winning for each vibration effect is "weak vibration effect" < "strong vibration effect."

The first feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in Fig. 121 and Fig. 122 is that when a cut-in image with a high probability of winning is displayed (a cut-in effect is executed), a vibration effect may be executed in which an effective period of the effect button 17 is generated and the effect button 17 is vibrated. This makes it possible to effectively inform the player that the probability of winning is high, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The second feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in Figures 121 and 122 is that the vibration effect that is executed when a cut-in image with a high probability of winning is displayed (a cut-in effect is executed) lasts for a relatively long time. This makes it possible to effectively inform the player that the probability of winning is high, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The third feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in Figures 121 and 122 is that there are two types of vibration intensity of the vibration effect that is executed when a cut-in image with a high probability of winning is displayed (a cut-in effect is executed), depending on the probability of winning. Therefore, the vibration intensity of the vibration effect can indicate the probability of winning, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in Figures 121 and 122 is that in the normal game state, when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (other than special SP reach), the vibration (vibration effect) of the effect button 17 is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) in the cut-in effect than when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (special SP reach). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state, in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is more likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The fifth feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in Figures 121 and 122 is that in the normal game state, when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (other than special SP reach), the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) in the cut-in effect than when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (special SP reach). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state, in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is more likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The sixth feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in Figures 121 and 122 is that in the normal game state, when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (other than special SP reach), the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) in the cut-in effect than when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (special SP reach) in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state, in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is more likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The seventh feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in Figures 121 and 122 is that in the normal game state, when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (other than special SP reach), the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) in the cut-in effect than when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (special SP reach) in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state, in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is more likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The eighth feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in Figures 121 and 122 is that in a specific game state, vibration (vibration effect) of the effect button 17 is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) in a cut-in effect when a second variable effect (variable display of second special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (other than special SP reach) than when a first variable effect (variable display of first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed (special SP reach). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in a specific game state in which the second variable effect (variable display of second special symbol) is more likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The ninth feature of the cut-in presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 121 and 122 is that in a specific game state, vibration (vibration presentation) of the presentation button 17 is more likely to be executed (higher rate of execution) in a cut-in presentation when a second variable presentation (variable display of second special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (other than special SP reach) than when a first variable presentation (variable display of first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (special SP reach). Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in a specific game state in which the second variable presentation (variable display of second special symbol) is more likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Note that, although there are weak vibration effects and strong vibration effects as vibration effects executed during cut-in effects, it is also possible to have only weak vibration effects or only strong vibration effects.

Although the cut-in effect is executed by generating a valid period, the cut-in effect may be executed without generating a valid period, and in that case, the vibration effect executed may be only a weak vibration effect for 3 seconds or only a strong vibration effect for 3 seconds, or only a weak vibration effect for 1 second or only a strong vibration effect for 1 second.

In addition, when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a miss during the normal game state is executed, or when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss during the specific game state is executed, the vibration (vibration effect) of the effect button 17 may not be executed in the cut-in effect. Also, when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot during the normal game state is executed, or when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot during the specific game state is executed, the vibration (vibration effect) of the effect button 17 may not be executed in the cut-in effect.

In addition, when the second variation effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed during the normal game state, the cut-in effect including the valid suggestion effect may not be executed, or a cut-in effect without a valid suggestion effect may be executed; and when the first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed during the specific game state, the cut-in effect including the valid suggestion effect may not be executed, or a cut-in effect without a valid suggestion effect may be executed.

(Decisive performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 123 shows a final effect pattern determination table which is referenced when determining the effect pattern of the final effect.

As shown in FIG. 123, the deciding effect pattern determination table associates the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the type of variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each deciding effect pattern, and the deciding effect pattern to be selected, and for reference, the effect configuration of each deciding effect pattern (valid suggestion effect, valid period, effect content) is listed.

The "valid suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests the possibility of a valid period occurring, and specifically, it is an effect in which multiple semi-transparent effect button images modeled after effect button 17 are displayed and moved on the first image display device 70, and the button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit, 5 seconds)" indicates that the valid period for the deciding effect ends with one operation of the effect button 17 or the passage of 5 seconds.

The "promotion effect" in the validity period column is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 during the validity period. Specifically, without executing a validity suggestion effect or as a result of executing a validity suggestion effect, an opaque effect button image is displayed in a specific position, and a gauge image is displayed that indicates the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that the above-mentioned opaque effect button image is displayed as a button image imitating effect button 17 in its normal, non-protruding state, which emits white light, and that effect button 17 emits white light.
"Red protruding button" indicates that a button image imitating the protruding effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits red light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above, and that the effect button 17 emits red light.
"Protruding button rainbow" indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits rainbow light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above, and that the effect button 17 emits rainbow light.

The "Button Status" in the Validity Period column indicates the status of the effect button 17 during the validity period, with "Normal" indicating that the effect button 17 is in its normal state, where it is not protruding. "Protruding" indicating that the effect button 17 is in its protruding state.

"Fail" in the column for the winning performance mode indicates that the first movable member 77a does not move and the screen of the first image display device 70 turns dark, resulting in a winning failure performance that suggests that a jackpot game will not be played.
"Success" indicates that the first movable member 77a moves to its maximum operating position, emits rainbow light, and a success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, thereby executing a decisive success presentation suggesting that a jackpot game will be played.

In the button vibration column, "Strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)" indicates that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 will vibrate strongly for 4 seconds from the start of the successful decision effect (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends), followed by a 1-second interval and then a strong vibration effect (successful decision vibration effect) for 5 seconds.

In the button illumination column, "Rainbow illumination (11 seconds)" indicates that the illumination button LED for illuminating the illumination button 17 will illuminate in a rainbow pattern for 11 seconds (a longer period than the illumination button 17 is vibrating strongly) from the start of the successful selection illumination (= when the illumination button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends).

The probability of winning for each promotion is as follows: "normal white button" < "protruding red button" < "protruding rainbow button." Also, the probability of winning for each button state is "normal" < "protruding."

The first feature of the deciding effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 123 is that when a deciding success effect is executed, a valid period is generated and a vibration effect is executed in which the effect button 17 is vibrated. This makes it possible to effectively notify the player that a big win game is about to be played, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The second feature of the deciding effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 123 is that the effective period of the effect button 17 that occurs during a variable effect occurs for the longest period of time. This makes it possible to prevent the player from forgetting to operate the effect button 17, thereby making the game more interesting.

The third feature of the deciding effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 123 is that the effect button 17 vibrates for the longest period of time as a strong vibration effect that occurs during a variable effect. This effectively heightens the player's sense of elation when a deciding effect is successful, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

The fourth feature of the deciding effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 123 is that the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 lasts for a longer period than the vibration period of the effect button 17. Therefore, the player's sense of elation can be maintained even after the vibration of the effect button 17 has ended, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the deciding performance (successful deciding performance), the action performance is performed using the first movable member 77a, but the action performance may also be performed using the first movable member 77b. In this case, it is preferable to make the execution rate of the action performance using the first movable member 77a higher than that using the first movable member 77b.

(Re-selection performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 124 is a diagram showing a re-lottery effect pattern determination table which is referred to when determining the effect pattern of the re-lottery effect.

As shown in FIG. 124, the re-draw performance pattern determination table associates the performance mode, the presence or absence of promotion (whether promotion is planned), the selection rate (%) of each re-draw performance pattern, and the re-draw performance pattern to be selected, and for reference, the performance configuration of each re-draw performance pattern (valid suggested performance, valid period, performance content) is also listed.

The "valid suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests the possibility of a valid period occurring, and specifically, it is an effect in which multiple semi-transparent effect button images modeled after effect button 17 are displayed and moved on the first image display device 70, and the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit, 3 seconds)" indicates that the valid period for the re-lottery effect ends when the effect button 17 is operated once or when 3 seconds have elapsed.

The "promotion effect" in the validity period column is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 during the validity period. Specifically, it is an effect in which an opaque effect button image is displayed in a specific position without executing a validity suggestion effect, and a gauge image is displayed that indicates the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that the above-mentioned opaque effect button image is displayed as a button image imitating effect button 17 in its normal, non-protruding state, which emits white light, and that effect button 17 emits white light.
"Normal button red" indicates that the above-mentioned opaque effect button image is displayed as a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal, non-protruding state, emitting red light, and that the effect button 17 emits red light.
"Normal button rainbow" indicates that the above-mentioned opaque effect button image is displayed as a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal, non-protruding state, emitting rainbow light, and that the effect button 17 emits rainbow light.

The "Button Status" in the Validity Period column indicates the status of the effect button 17 during the validity period, and "Normal" in the Button Status column indicates that the effect button 17 is in its normal state, not protruding.

The "promotion failure effect" in the re-draw effect mode column indicates that a non-promotion pattern that is not advantageous to the player as a result of the re-draw effect (for example, an even number pattern → an even number pattern, an odd number pattern other than "7" → an odd number pattern other than "7") is derived and displayed (temporarily stopped), and a non-promotion sound effect is output.
A "successful promotion effect" refers to the derivative display (temporarily stopped) of a promoted pattern that is advantageous to the player as a result of a re-draw effect (for example, an even number pattern → odd number pattern, or an odd number pattern other than "7" → "7"), and a promotion sound effect is output.

In the button vibration column, "Strong vibration (3 seconds)" indicates that a strong vibration effect will be executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 will vibrate strongly for 3 seconds from the time when the promotion pattern is derived and displayed (= the end of the valid period).

In the button illumination column, "Rainbow illumination (4 seconds)" indicates that the effect button LED that illuminates the effect button 17 will emit rainbow light for 4 seconds (a longer period than the effect button 17 is vibrating strongly) from the time the promotion symbol is derived and displayed (= the end of the valid period).

The expected promotion probability for each promotion effect is "normal white button" < "normal red button" < "normal rainbow button".

The first feature of the re-draw effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 124 is that when a promotion success effect is executed, a valid period is generated and a vibration effect is executed to vibrate the effect button 17. This makes it possible to effectively notify the player that he or she has been promoted to a favorable effect pattern, thereby making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

The second feature of the re-draw effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 124 is that the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 is performed for a longer period of time than the strong vibration effect. Therefore, the player's sense of elation can be maintained even after the strong vibration effect has ended, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Note that while a valid period is generated to execute a re-draw effect (promotion failure effect, promotion success effect), it is also possible to execute a re-draw effect without generating a valid period.

(Determined performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 125 shows a fixed effect pattern determination table which is referenced when determining the effect pattern of a fixed effect.

As shown in FIG. 125, the confirmed presentation pattern determination table associates the jackpot determination result, the variable presentation pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each confirmed presentation pattern, and the confirmed presentation pattern to be selected, and also lists the presentation configuration (execution timing, presentation content) of each confirmed presentation pattern for reference.

A "-" in the execution timing column indicates that the confirmation effect is not executed at that time, and an "o" indicates that the confirmation effect is executed at that time.
The "confirmation sound" in the sound column indicates that a confirmation sound is output to indicate that a big win game has been executed.
"Handle rainbow illumination" in the illumination column indicates that the handle LED for illuminating the launch handle 15 will illuminate in rainbow colors from the time the confirmation sound is output until the fluctuation stops (for more than four seconds until the performance pattern is displayed as having stopped).

In the button vibration column, "Strong vibration (3 seconds)" indicates that a strong vibration effect will be executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 will vibrate strongly for 3 seconds from the time the confirmation sound is output.

The first feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 125 is that when a fixed effect is executed, a vibration effect is executed in which the effect button 17 vibrates without generating an effective period. This makes it possible to effectively notify the player that a big win game is about to be played, thereby increasing the interest of the player in the game.

The second feature of the confirmed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 125 is that the rainbow light emission of the launch handle 15 occurs for a longer period of time than the strong vibration effect. This makes it possible to maintain the player's sense of elation even after the strong vibration effect has ended, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A third feature of the confirmed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 125 is that in the normal game state, when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed (other than special SP reach), the confirmed effect (vibration effect of the effect button 17) is more likely to be executed (the probability of execution is higher) than when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed (special SP reach). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state, in which the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is more likely to be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The fourth feature of the final effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 125 is that in a specific game state, the final effect (vibration effect of the effect button 17) is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special pattern) is executed (other than special SP reach) than when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special pattern) is executed (special SP reach). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the performance in a specific game state in which the second variable effect (variable display of the second special pattern) is more likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed during the normal game state, or when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed during the specific game state, the confirmation effect (vibration effect of the effect button 17) may not be executed.

(Performance mode update process of the performance control unit)
The presentation mode update process of the presentation control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 126. Fig. 126 is a flow chart showing the big win advance notice presentation decision process in the presentation control unit 130m.

In step E800-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not there has been a change in the game state. If there has been no change in the game state, the process proceeds to step E800-3. If there has been a change in the game state, the process proceeds to step E800-2, where the initial presentation mode corresponding to the game state is set, and the current presentation mode update process is terminated. Specifically, if the game is in a normal game state, presentation mode A is set; if the game is in a special game state, presentation mode D is set; and if the game is in a time-saving game state, presentation mode F is set.

In step E800-3, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not the current state is a continuous preview performance with a look-ahead preview. If the current state is a continuous preview performance with a look-ahead preview, the sub-CPU 130a ends the current presentation mode update process without updating the presentation mode, and if the current state is not a continuous preview performance, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not the current state is a normal game state or a special probability game state, and ends the current presentation mode update process without updating the presentation mode, and if the current state is a normal game state or a special probability game state, the process proceeds to step E800-5.

In step E800-5, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the conditions for updating the presentation mode have been met. Specifically, the conditions for updating the presentation mode are met when either a predetermined number of variable presentations have been executed, or a miss variable presentation has been executed, which executes a reach presentation with a higher expectation than a normal reach presentation. If the conditions for updating the presentation mode have not been met, the current presentation mode update process is terminated. If the conditions for updating the presentation mode have been met, the presentation mode after the update is determined in step E800-6, the determined presentation mode is set in step E800-7, and the current presentation mode update process is terminated.

In this way, when a look-ahead preview is being executed, updates to the presentation mode are restricted. This prevents inconveniences such as a change in presentation mode while a look-ahead preview is being executed, which reduces the presentation effect of the look-ahead preview, and makes the game more interesting.

In addition, when a continuous preview performance in which performances are performed intermittently across multiple variable performances is in progress, the performance mode is not updated (does not change), whereas when an icon change performance in which performances are performed continuously across multiple variable performances and a special icon with a common aspect is displayed in all performance modes is in progress, the performance mode can be updated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the performance effect of the pre-reading preview from decreasing without excessively restricting the updating of the performance mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Note that while the presentation mode can be updated when an icon change presentation is being performed, it is also possible to have the presentation mode not be updated (not change) even while an icon change presentation is being performed. This can prevent the presentation effect of the pre-reading notice from decreasing, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

(Examples of display modes for each rendering mode)
Using Figure 127, examples of display modes for each presentation mode will be described.

In presentation mode A (normal game state), as shown in FIG. 127(a), the mode A background image is always displayed in a horizontally scrolling (dynamic display) state while being displayed on the main display device 70, the presentation pattern 70a is displayed in a first form (rectangular base image BG, character image CG, number image SG surrounded by a hexagonal image), and the special pattern TZ is displayed in a common form (number image) common to all presentation modes.

Then, in the icon display area (first pending icon display area 70B, icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the first form (hexagon). The normal icon in the first form is configured to constantly repeat a swinging motion (performance motion) with one cycle of 2 seconds while being displayed on the main display device 70, going from a first position (initial position) tilted to the left, to a second position tilted to the right, and then back to the first position.

In presentation mode B (normal game state), as shown in FIG. 127(b), the mode B background image is always displayed in a horizontally scrolling (dynamic display) state while being displayed on the main display device 70, the presentation pattern 70a is displayed in the second form (lantern-shaped base image BG, character image CG, number image SG surrounded by a hexagonal image), and the special pattern TZ is displayed in a common form (number image) common to all presentation modes.

Then, in the icon display area (first pending icon display area 70B, icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the second state (shuttle shape). The normal icon in the second state is configured to constantly repeat a swinging motion (performance motion) with one cycle of 2 seconds while being displayed on the main display device 70, going from a first position (initial position) tilted to the left, through a second position tilted to the right, and then back to the first position.

In presentation mode C (normal game state), as shown in FIG. 127(c), the mode C background image is always displayed in a horizontally scrolling (dynamic display) state while being displayed on the main display device 70, the presentation pattern 70a is displayed in the third form (a round-chamfered rectangular base image BG, a character image CG, and a number image SG surrounded by a round-chamfered hexagonal image), and the special pattern TZ is displayed in a common form (number image) common to all presentation modes.

In the icon display area (first pending icon display area 70B, icon display area 70C), normal icons are displayed in the third state (star shape). A normal icon in the third state rotates from a first position (initial position) in which a specific apex is located at the top, passes through a second position in which the specific apex has moved, and then returns to the first position, repeating this rotational movement (performance movement) at a cycle of 3 seconds while displayed on the main display device 70.

In presentation mode D (high probability game state), as shown in FIG. 127(d), the mode D background image is always displayed in a horizontally scrolling (dynamic display) state while being displayed on the main display device 70, the presentation pattern 70a is displayed in the fourth form (rectangular base image, number image), and the special pattern TZ is displayed in a common form (number image) common to all presentation modes.

Then, in the icon display area (second pending icon display area 70D, said icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the fourth state (round). The normal icon in the fourth state rotates from a first position (initial position) in which the internal black dot is located at the top, passes through a second position in which the black dot has moved, and then returns to the first position, repeating this rotational movement (performance movement) at a cycle of 3 seconds while being displayed on the main display device 70.

In presentation mode E (high probability game state), as shown in FIG. 127(e), the mode E background image is always displayed in a horizontally scrolling (dynamic display) state while being displayed on the main display device 70, the presentation pattern 70a is displayed in the fourth form (rectangular base image, number image), and the special pattern TZ is displayed in a common form (number image) common to all presentation modes.

Then, in the icon display area (second pending icon display area 70D, said icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the fourth state (round). The normal icon in the fourth state rotates from a first position (initial position) in which the internal black dot is located at the top, passes through a second position in which the black dot has moved, and then returns to the first position, repeating this rotational movement (performance movement) at a cycle of 3 seconds while being displayed on the main display device 70.

In presentation mode F (time-saving play state), as shown in FIG. 127(f), the mode F background image is always displayed in a horizontally scrolling (dynamic display) state while being displayed on the main display device 70, the presentation pattern 70a is displayed in the fourth form (rectangular base image, number image), and the special pattern TZ is displayed in a common form (numeric image) common to all presentation modes.

Then, in the icon display area (second pending icon display area 70D, icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the fifth form (pentagon). The normal icon in the fifth form rotates from a first position (initial position) in which the specific apex is located at the top, passes through a second position in which the specific apex has moved, and then returns to the first position, repeating this rotational movement (performance movement) at a cycle of 3 seconds while displayed on the main display device 70.

In addition, in performance modes A to F, when a special icon is displayed in the icon display area (second reserved icon display area 70D, icon display area 70C), the special icon is displayed in a common form (round) common to all performance modes. The special icon in the common form rotates from a first position (initial position) in which a specific part is located at the top, passes through a second position in which the specific part has moved, and then returns to the first position, repeating this rotational movement (performance movement) at one cycle of 2.5 seconds while it is displayed on the main display device 70.

In this way, the display mode of the effect pattern 70a (type of effect pattern), the type of background image, and the display mode of the icon (reserved icon, applicable icon) are varied depending on the type of the multiple effect modes A to F. This makes it possible to improve the effect of the effect and increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the reserved icons of the display modes associated with each of the multiple presentation modes A to F perform periodic presentation actions (swinging, rotating, etc.). Therefore, it becomes easier to appeal that there is reserved memory of special chart determination information from the presence of the reserved icon, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.
(Example of variation for each performance mode)
Using Figure 128, examples of the change patterns for each presentation mode will be explained.

In presentation mode A (normal game state), as shown in FIG. 128(a), variable BGM 1 is audibly output as variable BGM when a variable presentation is executed, and in the variable presentation, the presentation pattern 70a performs a variable display (update variable) along the first variable path (a path that scrolls downwards), and the special pattern TZ performs a variable display (update display) along the first variable path (a path that scrolls downwards) that is common to all presentation modes.

Then, as a pre-change action (performance action) before the change display on the first change path starts, the performance pattern 70a performs a floating display in which it rises upward from the pattern stop position for 0.75 seconds, and the performance pattern 70a starts changing display in the order of left → center → right. Also, as a pre-stop action (performance action) when the change display on the first change path is stopped (temporarily stopped), the character image CG of the performance pattern 70a performs a shaking display in which it shakes its head at the pattern stop position for 0.9 seconds.

In presentation mode B (normal game state), as shown in FIG. 128(b), variable BGM 2 is audibly output as variable BGM when a variable presentation is executed, and in the variable presentation, the presentation pattern 70a is displayed (updated) on a second variable path (a path in which the center pattern scrolls downward and the left and right patterns scroll diagonally downward away from the center pattern), and the special pattern TZ is displayed (updated) on a first variable path (a path that scrolls downward) that is common to all presentation modes.

And as a pre-change operation (presentation operation) before starting the change display (update operation) on the second change path, the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size for 0.5 seconds, where it becomes smaller than the normal size at the pattern stop position and then returns to the normal size, and the three performance patterns 70a start changing display at the same time. Also, as a pre-stop operation (presentation operation) when stopping (temporarily stopping) the change display on the second change path, the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size for 0.5 seconds, where it becomes smaller than the normal size at the pattern stop position and then returns to the normal size.

In presentation mode C (normal game state), as shown in FIG. 128(c), variable BGM 3 is audibly output as variable BGM when a variable presentation is executed, and in the variable presentation, the presentation pattern 70a is displayed (updated) along the third variable path (a path in which three presentation patterns scroll diagonally to the lower right), and the special pattern TZ is displayed (updated) along the first variable path (a path that scrolls downward) that is common to all presentation modes.

And as a pre-change action (performance action) before the change display on the third change path starts, the performance pattern 70a is enlarged for 0.5 seconds, becoming larger than the normal size at the pattern stop position and then returning to the normal size, and the performance pattern 70a starts changing display in the order of right → center → left. Also, as a pre-stop action (performance action) when the change display on the third change path is stopped (temporarily stopped), the character image CG of the performance pattern 70a raises its hand at the pattern stop position for 0.7 seconds.

In presentation mode D (probable bonus game state), as shown in FIG. 128(d), variable BGM 4 is audibly output as variable BGM when the variable presentation is executed, and in the variable presentation, the presentation pattern 70a performs a variable display (update variable) along the first variable path (a path that scrolls downwards), and the special pattern TZ performs a variable display (update display) along the first variable path (a path that scrolls downwards) that is common to all presentation modes.

And as a pre-change action (performance action) before starting the change display on the first change path, the performance pattern 70a is displayed as floating upward from the pattern stop position for 0.4 seconds, and the three performance patterns 70a start changing display simultaneously. Also, as a pre-stop action (performance action) when stopping (temporarily stopping) the change display on the first change path, a bounding display in which the performance pattern 70a moves in a bouncing manner is performed for 0.4 seconds.

In presentation mode E (probable bonus game state), as shown in FIG. 128(e), variable BGM 4 is audibly output as variable BGM when a variable presentation is executed, and in the variable presentation, the presentation pattern 70a performs a variable display (update variable) along the first variable path (a path that scrolls downwards), and the special pattern TZ performs a variable display (update display) along the first variable path (a path that scrolls downwards) that is common to all presentation modes.

And as a pre-change action (performance action) before starting the change display on the first change path, the performance pattern 70a is displayed as floating upward from the pattern stop position for 0.4 seconds, and the three performance patterns 70a start changing display simultaneously. Also, as a pre-stop action (performance action) when stopping (temporarily stopping) the change display on the first change path, a bounding display in which the performance pattern 70a moves in a bouncing manner is performed for 0.4 seconds.

In presentation mode F (time-saving play state), as shown in FIG. 128(f), variable BGM 5 is audibly output as variable BGM when a variable presentation is executed, and in the variable presentation, the presentation pattern 70a performs a variable display (update variable) along the first variable path (a path that scrolls downwards), and the special pattern TZ performs a variable display (update display) along the first variable path (a path that scrolls downwards) that is common to all presentation modes.

As a pre-change action (performance action) before the change display on the first change path starts, the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size for 0.4 seconds, where it becomes smaller than the normal size at the pattern stop position and then returns to the normal size, and the three performance patterns 70a start changing display simultaneously. Also, as a pre-stop action (performance action) when the change display on the first change path is stopped (temporarily stopped), a bounding display in which the performance pattern 70a moves in a bouncing manner is performed for 0.4 seconds.

In addition, in performance modes A to F, the three special patterns TZ start to change at the same time without performing any pre-change action, and are stopped at the same time as the performance pattern 70a without performing any pre-stop action.

In this way, the presentation pattern 70a in the variable presentation is displayed (updated) along a different variable path (trajectory) depending on the type of presentation mode A to F. Therefore, the appearance of the variable presentation changes depending on the type of presentation mode, improving the presentation effect of the variable presentation, and making the game more interesting.

In addition, before the performance pattern 70a starts to change (update display) during the change performance, a pre-change action (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) is performed, and different types of pre-change action are performed depending on the type of performance mode A to F. Therefore, the appearance of the change performance changes depending on the type of performance mode, improving the performance effect of the change performance and making the game more interesting.

In addition, depending on which of the multiple pre-change actions (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) the performance pattern 70a performs in the change performance, the time until the change display (update change) may differ. This makes it possible to improve the effect of the change performance and increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the presentation time of the pre-change action of the presentation pattern 70a in the variable presentation during presentation modes D to F (specific game states) is shorter than the presentation time of the pre-change action of the presentation pattern 70a in the variable presentation during presentation modes A to C (normal game states). Therefore, in presentation modes D to F (specific game states), where the variable presentation time is likely to be shorter than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states), it is easier to ensure the change time of the presentation pattern 70a, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when the performance pattern 70a temporarily stops during the variable performance, a pre-stop action (swinging display, shrinking display, hand raising display, bounding display, etc.) is performed, and different types of pre-stop actions are performed depending on the type of performance mode A to F. Therefore, the appearance of the variable performance changes depending on the type of performance mode, improving the performance effect of the variable performance and making the game more interesting.

In addition, the presentation time of the pre-stop motion of the presentation pattern 70a in the variable presentation during presentation modes D to F (specific game states) is shorter than the presentation time of the pre-stop motion of the presentation pattern 70a in the variable presentation during presentation modes A to C (normal game states). Therefore, in presentation modes D to F (specific game states), where the variable presentation time is likely to be shorter than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states), it is easier to ensure the variable time of the presentation pattern 70a, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, during the variable presentation, variable BGM (BGM output before the development presentation) is audibly output, and different types of variable BGM are audibly output depending on the type of presentation mode A to F. This allows the player's mood to change depending on the type of presentation mode, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Note that the change path of the performance pattern 70a, the pre-change action of the performance pattern 70a, the change start order of the performance pattern 70a, the change pre-stop action of the performance pattern 70a, and the change BGM are different depending on the type of multiple performance modes A to F, but at least one of the change path of the performance pattern 70a, the pre-change action of the performance pattern 70a, the change start order of the performance pattern 70a, the change pre-stop action of the performance pattern 70a, and the change BGM may be the same regardless of the type of performance mode.

In addition, the change path of the performance pattern 70a is the same in performance modes D to F, but the change path of the performance pattern 70a may be different between performance modes D to E (high probability game state) and performance mode F (time-saving game state), or the change path of the performance pattern 70a may be different for each of performance modes D to F.

In addition, in each presentation mode (presentation modes A to F), the time of the pre-change action is the same regardless of the type of change presentation pattern (change pattern), but when the change presentation pattern (change pattern) is a shortened change or an ultra-shortened change, the pre-change action may be performed in a time shorter than the time of the normal pre-change action. In this way, the pre-change action time is more likely to be shorter in the first change presentation executed when the first reserved number (U1) is large in the normal game state than in the first change presentation executed when the first reserved number (U1) is small in the normal game state, and the pre-change action time is more likely to be shorter in the second change presentation executed when the second reserved number (U2) is large in the specific game state than in the second change presentation executed when the second reserved number (U2) is small in the specific game state.

In addition, in each presentation mode (presentation modes A to F), the time of the pre-stop action is the same regardless of the type of the change presentation pattern (change pattern), but when the change presentation pattern (change pattern) is a shortened change or an ultra-shortened change, the pre-stop action may be performed in a time shorter than the normal pre-stop action. In this way, the pre-stop action time is more likely to be shorter in the first change presentation executed when the first reserved number (U1) is large in the normal game state than in the first change presentation executed when the first reserved number (U1) is small in the normal game state, and the pre-stop action time is more likely to be shorter in the second change presentation executed when the second reserved number (U2) is large in the specific game state than in the second change presentation executed when the second reserved number (U2) is small in the specific game state.

In addition, in the variable performance in each performance mode (performance modes A to F), when the pre-variation action of the performance pattern 70a is performed, the effect image related to the pre-variation action is not displayed, but it is also possible to display the effect image related to the pre-variation action. In this case, it is preferable to display an effect image (without expectation that the effect image will be displayed) that is different from the pre-read effect image (with expectation that the effect image will be displayed).

In addition, in the variable presentation in each presentation mode (presentation modes A to F), when the pre-stop action of the presentation pattern 70a is performed, the effect image related to the pre-stop action is not displayed, but it may be configured to display the effect image related to the pre-stop action. In this case, it is preferable to display an effect image (without expectation that the effect image will be displayed) that is different from the pre-read effect image (with expectation that the effect image will be displayed).

(Regarding the type of notifiable event, the priority order of notifiable events, and the notification manner of notifiable events)
Using Figures 129 and 130, the notifiable event types, the priorities of the notifiable events, and the notification modes of the notifiable events will be described.

The notification modes are comprised of audio notification, visual notification, and illumination notification, and a combination of these is determined for each notification event type.
The types of notifiable events include events detected by the main control board 110 and events detected by the frame control board 120, and a priority order is set for each type of notifiable event.

Regarding audio notification, when multiple events occur at the same time, the priority order is referenced and the event with the highest priority is notified by audio.
Furthermore, when the audio notification of a high priority event is completed, if it is within the notification time of the low priority event, audio notification of the low priority event is started.
Moreover, if the same event occurs twice (a specific event occurs while another specific event is being notified), a new audio notification is started.
In addition, some events may be alerted simultaneously, and when the audio alert of a high priority event has ended, an audio alert of a low priority event may be made even if the alert time for the low priority event has expired.

In addition, when multiple events occur at the same time, the screen notification is displayed so that the events do not overlap each other (screen notification). In other words, when multiple events occur at the same time, the screen notification is capable of notifying all of the events that have occurred at the same time.
Depending on the event, it may be possible to notify the events individually on the screen without notifying them simultaneously.

In addition, when a plurality of events occur at the same time, the event with the highest priority is notified by illumination based on the priority order.
In addition, when the illumination notification of an event with a high priority is completed, if it is within the notification time of the event with a low priority, a new illumination notification of the event with a low priority is started.
In addition, if the same event occurs twice (a specific event occurs while another specific event is being notified), a new illumination notification is started.
In addition, some events may be notified simultaneously with illuminated warnings, and when the illuminated warning of a high priority event has ended, the illuminated warning of a low priority event may be made even if the warning time for the low priority event has expired.

The player cannot adjust the volume by operating the joystick 19 while a sound alert is being issued, nor can the player adjust the light intensity by operating the joystick 19 while a light alert is being issued. On the other hand, the employee can adjust the volume by operating a specific switch located in a position that can only be operated by the employee (but cannot be operated by the player) while a sound alert is being issued, and the employee can adjust the light intensity by operating the specific switch while a light alert is being issued.

The highest priority notification event type, priority level 1, is "number of game balls cleared."
The notification of "game ball count clear" is started upon receiving the "game ball count clear start command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 outputs a 5-second audio message "The number of game balls has been cleared" once with "audio notification (volume MAX)";
An icon image "H67 Game Ball Count Clear" is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

The voice output of "The number of game balls has been cleared" is output once and ends, and is not output in a loop or terminated due to receipt of an end notification command.
In addition, the display of the icon image "H67 Game Ball Count Cleared" and the red flashing of the frame lighting device 10 will end 30 seconds after either the launch handle 15 is gripped and the game ball is launched, or the counting button switch 20a detects the operation of the counting button 20.

It is expected that the number of game balls will be cleared mainly before the opening of the amusement arcade, so by ending the audio notification after one time, it is possible to prevent people from being put off playing because the audio notification continues after the arcade has opened. On the other hand, by continuing the visual notification and the electric light notification as long as no shots are fired or counted, it is possible to make it easier for employees to recognize that the number of game balls, which is the highest priority, has been cleared.

To notify the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, as shown in FIG. 131, a rectangular icon image "H67 Number of game balls cleared" is displayed in the upper left display area (a position that does not overlap with the three performance symbols 70a) of the first image display device 70 (main LCD). This prevents a situation in which, even if a player starts playing on a gaming machine on which an icon image indicating that the number of game balls has been cleared is displayed, it becomes difficult to see the changing display of the performance symbols 70a (until 30 seconds have passed since the ball was fired).

As shown in "Frame Control Board Main Processing", after the number of game balls stored in the RWM area is cleared, a "game ball count clear start command" is set and sent, so the notification that the number of game balls has been cleared is positioned as a notification after the number of game balls has been cleared (post-clearance notification).

Furthermore, in the past, not only were players who completely stopped playing by discarding all game balls, but some players also stopped playing without realizing that they had a small number of game balls remaining. Clearing the number of game balls is the act of clearing the small number of game balls (for example, one game ball) that such players left in the gaming machine 1, and is an important act in which the gaming establishment clears the player's possessions without the player's consent, so the notification priority is set to be the highest. This allows the gaming establishment to recognize that clearing the number of game balls is an important act.

For example, if an amusement parlor opens with a small number of game balls remaining, a new player may end up playing on another player's property, which could lead to trouble. By setting the highest notification priority for the number of game balls cleared, it is possible to ensure that employees are aware that the number of game balls has been cleared (preventing players from thinking they had cleared the number of game balls when they hadn't), and to prevent such trouble from occurring.

The notification event type with the second priority is "setting change" (see FIG. 33).
Notification of a "setting change" (notification in response to control related to the setting value) is started upon receipt of a "setting change designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Voice notification (volume MAX)" saying "Settings are being changed" and the warning sound of a "siren."
The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) displays "Settings being changed" in red letters on a black background using the entire display area.
The frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are turned on in red (40% brightness).

All of the audio, visual, and illumination notifications for "setting change" are terminated when a power-on command (see FIG. 31) is received. This causes all notification means to immediately end notification when the setting change process is completed, making it easier for the user to recognize that the setting change process has been completed.

The notification event type with the third priority is "setting check" (see FIG. 36).
The notification of "setting check" (notification according to control related to the setting value) is started upon receiving a "setting check designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Checking settings" in "voice notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) displays "Checking settings" in red letters on a black background using the entire display area.
The frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are turned on in red (40% brightness).

All of the audio, visual, and illumination notifications in the "settings check" are terminated when a power restoration command (see FIG. 31) is received. This means that all notification methods will immediately end notification when the settings check process is completed, making it easier for the user to recognize that the settings check process has ended.

The event type with the fourth priority is "power on (RWM clear)" (see FIG. 35).
The notification of "Power On (RWM Clear)" (notification in response to clearing of predetermined information) is started upon receiving an "RWM Clear Designation Command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "RWM has been cleared" in the "audio notification (volume MAX)" and the BGM "input BGM".
The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) does not directly notify the player that the RWM has been cleared, but displays "123" as the initial result (symbol combination) of the performance symbol 70a.
The frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are turned on in white (40% brightness).

The voice saying "RWM has been cleared" and the "Input BGM" BGM output will end 30 seconds after output begins, and the white lighting of the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 will end 60 seconds after lighting begins.

As shown in "RWM Clear Processing", after initializing everything except the set value area of the game RWM area, the "RWM Clear Designation Command" is set and sent, so the RWM Clear error notification is positioned as a notification after the RWM clear is completed (post-notification). In other words, it is positioned in the same way as the "Game Ball Count Clear" described above, but the notification time differs between "Game Ball Count Clear" and "Power On (RWM Clear)".

For example, the above-mentioned "game ball count clear" sound output ends after one 5-second sound output, whereas the "RWM clear" sound output and input BGM output are output repeatedly and end after 30 seconds. As a result, for example, if the power switch 164 is turned ON while the RWM clear switch 111a and the game ball count clear switch 121 are both pressed, the "RWM clear" sound output and input BGM output start after the "game ball count clear" sound output ends, so it is possible to prevent the employee from missing the fact that the "RWM clear" has been performed. In other words, since "game ball count clear" and "RWM clear" can be performed at the same time, if the execution times of these sound notifications are made the same, the "RWM clear" sound notification may not be executed according to the priority order, and the employee may miss it. Therefore, by setting the audio output for "game ball count clear" to 5 seconds, and the audio output for "RWM clear" and the input BGM output to 30 seconds on a repeat basis, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned cases from being missed, so it is preferable to vary the audio notification output times for events that can occur simultaneously (for example, game ball count clear and RWM clear).

In addition, when the power switch 164 is turned ON while both the RWM clear switch 111a and the game ball count clear switch 121 are pressed, the first image display device 70 (main LCD) displays the initial number result of the performance pattern 70a (screen notification of RWM clear), and displays an icon image (screen notification of game ball count clear) notifying "game ball count clear" so as not to overlap with the initial number result display of the performance pattern 70a (see FIG. 131). As a result, since both the screen notification of RWM clear and the screen notification of game ball count clear are performed, it is possible to immediately visually recognize that the RWM has been cleared and that the game ball count has been cleared.

In addition, the on-screen notification of "Number of game balls cleared" can continue to be displayed even after the audio notification of "Number of game balls cleared" has ended, so even if you miss the audio output of "Number of game balls cleared," you can recognize that the "Number of game balls cleared" has been performed by checking the display of the icon image.
On the other hand, in the screen notification of "RWM Clear", no icon image is displayed, but the initial result display of the performance pattern 70a, the audio output output for 30 seconds, and the input BGM output allow the player to recognize that "RWM Clear" has been performed without displaying an icon image. This makes it possible to eliminate the need for an icon image to notify "RWM Clear", which is expected to improve development efficiency and reduce memory space.

Furthermore, when the power switch 164 is turned ON while both the RWM clear switch 111a and the game ball count clear switch 121 are pressed, the frame lighting device 10 flashes red (a game ball count clear illumination notification is executed). On the other hand, when a game ball count clear illumination notification is being executed, an RWM clear illumination notification is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent a player from becoming confused as to which error notification is being executed in the illumination notification. Furthermore, even if an RWM clear illumination notification is not executed, an "RWM clear" screen notification is executed as described above, so that the player can recognize that an "RWM clear" has been executed.
The relationship between the notifications from each notification means when the RWM clear switch 111a and the game ball count clear switch 121 are both pressed and the power switch 164 is turned ON will be explained later in the time chart.

In this embodiment, the audio notification time for "clear game ball count", which has a higher priority, is shorter than that for "power on (RWM clear)", but the audio notification time for "clear game ball count" may be longer than that for "power on (RWM clear)", or the notification times for both may be the same.

The event type with priority level 5 is "power restoration."
The notification of "power restoration" is started upon receiving the "power restoration designation command". The notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 outputs the "input BGM" with "audio notification (volume MAX)".
The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) displays "123" as the initial result (symbol combination) of the performance symbol 70a.
The frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are turned on in white (40% brightness).

When "power is restored," the BGM output of "power-on BGM" ends 30 seconds after the output starts, and the white lighting of the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 ends 60 seconds after the lighting starts. This simplifies the work because no further operations are required after the power switch 164 is turned ON once.

The event type with priority level 6 is "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormality error)."
The notification of "Fraud Detection 3 (RWM Abnormal Error)" is started upon receiving the "Unrecoverable Error Designation Command". The notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please change the settings" in "Voice notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
Using the entire display area of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), the word "ERROR" is displayed in red letters on a black background, and the word "Please change the settings" is displayed in white letters.
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

If the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off and the power switch 164 is turned ON without any setting change operation being performed, the error notification of "Fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)" will start again. In other words, if "Fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)" occurs, it is necessary to turn the power switch 164 OFF, perform the setting change operation, turn the power switch 164 ON, and complete the setting change process.

In the case of "Fraud Detection 3 (RWM Abnormal Error)," the audio, visual, and electric alerts will continue until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (the alert will end when the power is turned off). This will encourage the player to turn off the power to the gaming machine 1 and change the settings. Also, changing the settings will resolve the RWM abnormality, so an employee will need to respond, and it will be possible to prevent the player from continuing to play while the RWM abnormality is still present.

The notification event type for priority level 7 is "Fraud detection 2 (abnormal winning error)."
The notification of "Fraud Detection 2 (Abnormal Winning Error)" is started upon receiving the "Abnormal Winning Designation Command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "An abnormal winning has occurred" in "voice notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image of "Abnormal winning error. Please turn the power back on" is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

The voice saying "An abnormal winning has occurred" and the "siren" warning sound will end 180 seconds after the start of output, and the icon image saying "Abnormal winning error. Please turn the power back on" will be displayed, and the frame lighting device 10 will continue to flash red until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (the warning will end when the power is turned off).

As shown in FIG. 131, the screen notification of an abnormal winning error is a rectangular icon image "Abnormal winning error. Please turn the power back on" displayed in the upper right display area (position that does not overlap with the three performance patterns 70a) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with the performance patterns 70a, and makes it easy to inform employees that an abnormal winning error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority level 8 is "Fraud detection 1 (magnet detection error)."
The notification of "Fraud Detection 1 (Magnet Detection Error)" is started upon receiving a "Magnet Detection Designation Command". The notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "A magnet has been detected" in "voice notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image of "magnet detection" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

In the case of "Fraud Detection 1 (Magnet Detection Error)", the audio, visual and electric alarms will all end 180 seconds after the alarm started.

After audio, visual, and electric alerts have started, alerts will continue for 180 seconds even if the magnet is removed. Also, if a "magnet detection designation command" is received again within 180 seconds, alerts will continue for the next 180 seconds. This provides an additional level of security.

To notify the user of a magnet detection error on screen, as shown in FIG. 131, a rectangular icon image "Magnet Detected" is displayed in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left image display device). This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it easy for employees to understand that a magnet detection error has occurred.

The screen notification of a magnet detection error may be displayed using the entire display area of the first image display device 70 (main LCD) to display "Magnet detection error" in red or white text on a black background.

The notification event type with priority level 9 is "acquisition upper limit device operation."
The notification of the "acquisition upper limit device operation" is started upon receiving the "acquisition upper limit device operation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Voice notification (volume MAX)" saying "Earning limit device in operation."
An icon image stating "Winning limit device in operation. Today's game is over" is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display).
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in white (40% brightness).

The audio output of "Earning limit device in operation" will end 10 seconds after the start of output, and the icon image "Earning limit device in operation, play ends for today" will be displayed, and the white flashing of the frame lighting device 10 will continue to notify the user until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (the notification will end when the power is turned off).

The winning limit device stops operating if the power switch 164 is turned on while pressing the RWM clear switch 111a (if the RWM is cleared) after the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off. If only the power switch 164 is turned on after the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off,
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Voice notification (volume MAX)" saying "Earning limit device in operation."
An icon image stating "Winning limit device in operation. Today's game is over" is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display).
The frame lighting device 10 is made to flash in red (40% brightness). This makes it possible to prevent the game from being made playable simply by turning the power switch 164 OFF and ON after the win limit device has been activated.

As shown in FIG. 131, the screen notification of the operation of the acquisition limit device is a rectangular icon image "Acquisition limit device in operation, play ends for today" displayed in the upper left display area (below the display position of the above-mentioned "H67 Game ball count cleared" icon image) of the first image display device 70 (main LCD). The icon image is displayed so that it overlaps with a part of the left performance pattern 70a (so that the icon image is the front layer). In other words, since play is impossible due to the operation of the acquisition limit device, there is no need to consider the visibility of the performance pattern 70a, and the freedom of display of the icon image (no need to worry about the display position) can be increased.

In addition, the audio notification ends 10 seconds after it starts, the display screen is displayed as an icon image, and the electric light notification is a flashing white light, so that the notifications are not excessive. This helps to avoid encouraging players to gamble more than necessary, and prevents them from becoming addicted to the game.

The screen notification of the operation of the acquisition limit device may be displayed in white text on a black background using the entire display area of the first image display device 70 (main LCD), saying "Acquisition limit device in operation. Today's game ends." This configuration makes it difficult to see other presentation images, making it easier for the player to recognize that they cannot continue playing.

It is also assumed that after the acquisition limit device is activated, the power switch 164 is turned off, and when the power switch 164 is turned on next time, the number of game balls is cleared at the same time (the power switch 164 is turned on while the game ball number clear switch 121 is pressed). In this case, the sound and illumination notification notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the icon image notifying the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and the icon image "Acquisition limit device is activated, please clear RWM" are displayed in the screen notification so that they do not overlap each other. As a result, while the sound and illumination notification notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, the icon image "Acquisition limit device is activated, please clear RWM" can be recognized in the screen notification, so that the player can recognize that the number of game balls has been cleared, but also recognize that the RWM clear operation is required.
The relationship between the notifications from each notification means in this situation will be explained later in the time chart.

The notification event type with priority level 10 is "unauthorized radio wave detection error."
The notification of the "unauthorized radio wave detection error" starts upon receiving the "unauthorized radio wave detection designation command". The notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Radio waves detected" in "Voice notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image "H66 Unauthorized Radio Wave Detection" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

The voice saying "Radio waves detected" and the "siren" warning sound will end 30 seconds after the output started, and the icon image "H66 Unauthorized radio waves detected" will be displayed and the frame lighting device 10 will continue to flash red until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (the warning will end when the power is cut off).

After the audio alert has started, the alert will continue for 30 seconds even if the radio waves are removed. Also, if the "unauthorized radio wave detection designation command" is received again within 30 seconds, the audio alert will continue for the next 30 seconds. This provides an additional level of security.

As shown in FIG. 131, the screen notification of an unauthorized radio wave detection error is a rectangular icon image "H66 Unauthorized radio wave detected" displayed in the upper display area (below the display position of the "Magnet detected" icon image described above) of the third image display device 72 (left image display device). This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it easy for employees to understand that an unauthorized radio wave detection error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority level 11 is an "abnormal number of winning balls error."
The notification of the "winning ball count abnormality error" (notification in response to detection of the gaming medium corresponding to the gaming value) is started upon receiving the "winning ball count abnormality designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call an attendant" in "voice notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image "H68 Winning ball count abnormality" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

In the event of an "abnormal winning ball count error," the audio, visual, and electric alerts will continue until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (the alerts will end when the power is cut off).

As shown in FIG. 131, the screen notification of an abnormal winning ball count error is a rectangular icon image "H68 Abnormal winning ball count" displayed in the upper display area (below the display position of the above-mentioned "H66 Unauthorized radio wave detected" icon image) of the third image display device 72 (left image display device). This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it easy to inform employees that an abnormal winning ball count error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority level 12 is an "abnormal number of balls fired error."
The notification of the "abnormal number of shot balls error" (notification in response to the detection of a game medium shot into the game area) is started upon receiving the "abnormal number of shot balls designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call an attendant" in "voice notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image "H69 Abnormal number of shots" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

In the event of an "abnormal number of balls fired error," the audio, visual, and electric alerts will continue until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (the alerts will end when the power is turned off).

When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off, the notification ends, but if the abnormality in the number of balls fired has not been resolved (for example, if the condition of a large number of gaming balls remaining on the gaming board has not been resolved), after the power switch 164 is turned ON, a "number of balls fired abnormality designation command" is received and the notification of the "number of balls fired abnormality error" is started again.

As shown in FIG. 131, the screen notification of an abnormal number of balls fired error is displayed in the upper display area (below the display position of the above-mentioned "H68 Abnormal number of winning balls" icon image) of the third image display device 72 (left image display device) by displaying a rectangular icon image "H69 Abnormal number of balls fired." This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it possible to clearly inform employees that an abnormal number of balls fired error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority level 13 is an "internal gaming machine communication abnormality error."
The notification of the "gaming machine internal communication abnormality error" is started upon receiving the "gaming machine internal communication abnormality start designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 outputs a voice message saying "Please call a staff member" in "voice notification (volume MAX)" and a warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image of "H06 Board connection error. Check the connection" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device).
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

In the case of an "internal machine communication abnormality error," audio, visual, and illumination notifications will continue until the error is resolved (notifications will end when the error is resolved).

As shown in FIG. 131, the screen notification of a communication abnormality error within the gaming machine is a rectangular icon image "H06 Board connection error Check connection" displayed in the upper display area (below the display position of the above-mentioned "H69 Abnormal number of balls fired" icon image) of the third image display device 72 (left image display device). This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it possible to clearly inform employees that a communication abnormality error has occurred within the gaming machine.

The notification event type with priority level 14 is "exit switch disconnection error."
An "exit switch open circuit error" is an abnormality that occurs when a break in the subtraction exit switch 91c is detected.
The notification of the "exit switch disconnection error" is started upon receiving the "exit switch disconnection designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call a staff member" in "voice notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image of "H14 Abnormality in subtraction port switch. Malfunction in launcher" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device).
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

In the case of an "exit switch disconnection error," the audio, visual, and electric light alerts will continue to be issued until the error is resolved and the error release switch 123 is operated (the alerts will end when the error is resolved and the error release switch 123 is operated).

As shown in FIG. 131, the screen notification of the exit switch disconnection error is a rectangular icon image "H14 Abnormal subtraction port switch Malfunction with launcher" displayed in the upper display area (below the display position of the above-mentioned "H06 Board connection error Check connection" icon image) of the third image display device 72 (left image display device). This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it possible to clearly inform employees that an exit switch disconnection error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority level 15 is "exit switch abnormality error."
An "exit switch abnormality error" is an abnormality that occurs when the subtraction outlet switch 91c does not turn ON within the specified time after the subtraction solenoid 91a is operated (when the subtraction outlet switch 91c cannot detect the passage of the ball even when the subtraction solenoid 91a is operated).
The notification of the "Exit Switch Abnormal Error" is started upon receiving the "Exit Switch Abnormal Designation Command". The notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call an attendant" in "voice notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image of "H14 Abnormality in subtraction port switch. Malfunction in launcher" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device).
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

In the case of an "exit switch abnormal error," the audio, visual, and electric alarms will continue to be issued until the error is resolved and the error release switch 123 is operated (the alarm will end when the error is resolved and the error release switch 123 is operated).

As shown in FIG. 131, the screen notification of the exit switch abnormality error is a rectangular icon image "H14 Abnormal subtraction port switch Malfunction with launcher" displayed in the upper display area (below the display position of the above-mentioned "H06 Board connection error Check connection" icon image) of the third image display device 72 (left image display device). This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it possible to clearly inform employees that an exit switch abnormality error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority level 16 is an "entrance switch disconnection error."
The "entrance switch disconnection error" is an abnormality that occurs when a disconnection of the subtraction entrance switch 91b is detected. Specifically, this is an abnormality that occurs when the subtraction entrance switch 91b cannot be detected as OFF even when the subtraction solenoid 91a is operated (when the game ball is stopped).
The notification of the "entrance switch disconnection error" is started upon receiving the "entrance switch disconnection designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call an attendant" in "voice notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image of "H15 Abnormal subtraction inlet switch. Problem with ball feed section" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device).
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

In the case of an "entrance switch disconnection error," the audio, visual, and electric light alerts will continue to be issued until the error is resolved and the error release switch 123 is operated (the alerts will end when the error is resolved and the error release switch 123 is operated).

As shown in FIG. 131, the entrance switch disconnection error is notified on screen by a rectangular icon image "H15 Abnormal subtraction entrance switch, malfunction with ball delivery unit" being displayed in the upper display area (below the display position of the above-mentioned "H14 Abnormal subtraction entrance switch, malfunction with launcher" icon image) of the third image display device 72 (left image display device). This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it easy to inform employees that an entrance switch disconnection error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority level 17 is "entrance switch abnormality error."
An "entrance switch abnormality error" is an abnormality that occurs when the subtraction entrance switch 91b remains OFF (the time during which no game ball is detected) for a specified period of time (for example, 10 seconds) (the OFF state continues).
The notification of the "entrance switch abnormality error" is started upon receiving the "entrance switch abnormality designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call an attendant" in "voice notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image of "H15 Abnormal subtraction inlet switch. Problem with ball feed section" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device).
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

In the case of an "entrance switch abnormality error," the audio, visual, and electric alarms will continue to be issued until the error is resolved and the error release switch 123 is operated (the alarm will end when the error is resolved and the error release switch 123 is operated).

As shown in FIG. 131, the screen notification of the entrance switch abnormality error is a rectangular icon image "H15 Subtraction entrance SW abnormality Malfunction in ball delivery section" displayed in the upper display area (below the display position of the above-mentioned "H14 Subtraction entrance SW abnormality Malfunction in launcher" icon image) of the third image display device 72 (left image display device). This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it possible to clearly inform employees that an entrance switch abnormality error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority level 18 is a "foul ball switch open circuit error."
The notification of the "Entrance switch abnormal error" is started upon receiving the "Foul ball switch disconnection designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call an attendant" in "voice notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image of "H24 Foul ball switch abnormality Check wiring of foul ball switch" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

In the event of a "foul ball switch disconnection error," the audio, visual, and electric alerts will continue to be issued until the error is resolved and the error release switch 123 is operated (the alerts will end when the error is resolved and the error release switch 123 is operated).

As shown in FIG. 131, the screen notification of the foul ball switch disconnection error is a rectangular icon image "H24 Foul ball switch abnormality Check foul ball switch wiring" displayed in the upper display area (below the display position of the icon image "H15 Subtraction inlet SW abnormality Problem with ball delivery section" described above) of the third image display device 72 (left image display device). This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it possible to clearly inform employees of the occurrence of a foul ball switch disconnection error.

The notification event type with priority level 19 is a "communication line abnormality error."
The notification of the "communication line abnormality error" is started upon receiving the "communication line abnormality designation command". The notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call an attendant" in "voice notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image "H04 Dedicated unit connection error. Check the connection" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device).
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

In the case of a "communication line abnormality error," the audio, visual, and electric light alerts will continue to be displayed until the error is resolved and the error reset switch 123 is operated (the alerts will end when the error is resolved and the error reset switch 123 is operated).

As shown in FIG. 131, the screen notification of the communication line abnormality error is displayed in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left image display device) (below the display position of the above-mentioned "H24 Foul ball SW abnormality Check wiring of foul ball SW" icon image), as a rectangular icon image "H04 Dedicated unit connection error Check connection." This makes it possible to prevent the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it possible to clearly inform employees of the occurrence of a communication line abnormality error.

The notification event type with priority level 20 is a "no response communication error."
The notification of the "no response error" is started upon receiving the "no response command". The notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call a staff member" in "voice notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image "H05 Dedicated unit communication error Restart unit" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

In the case of a "no response communication error," the audio, visual, and electric alerts will continue to sound until the error is resolved (the alerts will end when the error is resolved).

As shown in FIG. 131, the screen notification of a no-response communication error is displayed in the upper display area (below the display position of the above-mentioned "H04 Dedicated unit connection error Check connection" icon image) of the third image display device 72 (left image display device) as a rectangular icon image "H05 Dedicated unit communication error Restart unit." This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it possible to clearly inform employees that a no-response communication error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority level 21 is an "excess ball error."
The notification of the "excess ball error" is started upon receiving the "excess ball error designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
No notification is made by the audio output device 9.
An icon image of "H25 Excessive Game Ball Error Please Set to Proper Number of Balls" is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

In the case of an "excess ball error," both the visual and electric alerts will continue to be displayed until the error is resolved (the alerts will end when the error is resolved).

As shown in FIG. 131, the screen notification of an excess ball error is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD), and a rectangular icon image "H25 Excessive game ball error Please set the correct number of balls" is displayed so as to overlap with part of the right performance pattern 70a. This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it possible to clearly inform employees that an excess ball error has occurred.

In addition, the on-screen notification of the excessive ball error continues until the error is resolved (until the correct number of balls is reached), so the situation in which it is difficult to see the effect pattern 70a on the right will continue unless the error is resolved. Therefore, an employee can be called and urged to quickly resolve the error.

The notification event type with priority level 22 is a "few balls error."
The notification of the "few balls error" is started upon receiving the "few balls error designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs a voice message (volume MAX) saying "Please refill the out hole with balls" and a warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image of "H24 Insufficient Game Balls Error, Refill Balls from Out Hole" is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

In the case of a "few balls error," the audio, visual, and electric alerts will continue to sound until the error is resolved (the alerts will end when the error is resolved).

As shown in FIG. 131, the screen notification of the insufficient balls error is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD) (displayed below the above-mentioned "H25 Too many game balls error Please set the correct number of balls" icon image), and a rectangular icon image "H24 Too few game balls error Refill balls from the out hole" is displayed so as to overlap with part of the right performance pattern 70a. This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it possible to clearly inform employees that a insufficient balls error has occurred.

In addition, the on-screen notification of the insufficient balls error continues until the error is resolved (until balls are replenished), so the situation in which it is difficult to see the right-side performance pattern 70a will continue unless the error is resolved. Therefore, an employee can be called and urged to quickly resolve the error.

Comparing the "too many balls error" and the "too few balls error," the difference is that the "too many balls error" does not trigger an audio alert, while the "too few balls error" does. If the "too few balls error" continues, if a jackpot game is played, there is a risk of inconvenience, such as a shortage of game balls being fired and the ball not being able to enter the jackpot. Therefore, by also triggering an audio alert for the "too few balls error," it is possible to prompt an employee to quickly replenish balls, which can lead to preventing the above-mentioned inconvenience from occurring.

The notification event type with priority level 23 is "lifting mechanism error."
The notification of the "lifting mechanism error" is started upon receiving the "lifting mechanism error designation command". The notification mode is as follows:
No notification is made by the audio output device 9.
An icon image of "H29 Lift mechanism error. Please check the lift" is displayed on the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

In the case of a "lifting mechanism error," both the visual and electric alarms will continue to sound until the error is resolved (the alarm will end once the error is resolved).

To notify the user of a lifting mechanism error on screen, as shown in FIG. 131, a rectangular icon image "H29 Lift mechanism error, please check lift" is displayed in the upper display area of the fourth image display device 73 (right-side image display device). This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it easy for employees to understand that a lifting mechanism error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority level 24 is an "abrasive not attached error."
The notification of the "abrasive not installed error" is started upon receipt of the "abrasive not installed command". The notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call an attendant" in "voice notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image of "H22 Abrasive material attachment error. Abrasive material not set" is displayed on the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

The voice message "Please call an attendant" and the warning sound of the "siren" will end 30 seconds after the output starts, and the icon image "H22 Abrasive loading error Abrasive not set" will be displayed and the frame lighting device 10 will continue to flash red until the error is resolved (the warning will end when the error is resolved).

As shown in FIG. 131, the screen notification of the abrasive not loaded error is a rectangular icon image "H22 Abrasive loaded error Abrasive not loaded" displayed in the upper display area (below the above-mentioned "H29 Lift mechanism error Please check the lift" icon image) of the fourth image display device 73 (right-side image display device). This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other presentation images or icon images, and makes it easy for employees to understand that an abrasive not loaded error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority level 25 is "passage switch unconnected error."
The notification of the "passage switch unconnected error" is started upon receiving the "passage switch unconnected designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call an attendant" in "voice notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image of "H26 Frame out switch error, check the wiring of frame out switch" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

In the case of an "aisle switch unconnected error," the audio, visual, and electric alarms will continue to sound until the error is resolved (the alarms will end when the error is resolved).

As shown in FIG. 131, the screen notification of the aisle switch unconnected error is displayed in the upper display area (below the above-mentioned "H05 Dedicated unit communication error Restart unit" icon image) of the third image display device 72 (left image display device) with a rectangular icon image "H26 Frame out switch error Check frame out switch wiring." This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it easy to inform employees that an aisle switch unconnected error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority level 26 is a "glass frame open error."
The notification of the "glass frame opening error" is started upon receiving the "glass frame opening command". The notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "The door is open" in "Voice notification (volume MAX)".
An icon image "H64 Glass Frame Open Error" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

The audio output of "Door is open" ends when the glass frame 4 is closed or a maximum of 37 seconds after the start of the audio output, the display of the icon image "H64 Glass frame open error" ends when the glass frame 4 is closed, and the frame lighting device 10 stops flashing red 30 seconds after the glass frame 4 is closed.

As shown in FIG. 131, the screen notification of a glass frame opening error is displayed in the upper display area (below the above-mentioned "H26 Frame out SW error Check wiring for frame out SW" icon image) of the third image display device 72 (left image display device) as a rectangular icon image "H64 Glass frame opening error." This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it easy to inform employees that a glass frame opening error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority level 27 is "inner frame opening error."
The notification of the "inner frame opening error" is started upon receiving the "inner frame opening designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "The door is open" in "Voice notification (volume MAX)".
An icon image "H65 Inner Frame Open Error" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

The audio output of "Door is open" ends when the inner frame 3 is closed or a maximum of 37 seconds after the audio output begins, the display of the icon image "H65 Inner frame open error" ends when the inner frame 3 is closed, and the frame lighting device 10 stops flashing red 30 seconds after the inner frame 4 is closed.

As shown in FIG. 131, the screen notification of the inner frame opening error is a rectangular icon image "H65 Inner Frame Opening Error" displayed in the upper display area (below the above-mentioned "H64 Glass Frame Opening Error" icon image) of the third image display device 72 (left image display device). This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it easy to inform employees that an inner frame opening error has occurred.

In addition, the voice notification format of "The door is open" and the conditions for ending the voice notification are the same for glass frame open errors and inner frame open errors. This makes it possible to standardize the control processes related to the voice data and error notifications, thereby improving the efficiency of error notifications.

When a glass frame opening error or an inner frame opening error is being notified, the launch of game balls is not permitted (the launch of game balls into the game area is restricted) to prevent the game balls from flying out of the game machine, but the launch of game balls may be permitted (the launch of game balls into the game area may be permitted).

The notification event type with priority level 28 is "ball removal operation in progress."
The "ball removal operation in progress" notification (notification according to discharge control) is started upon receiving the "ball removal operation in progress command", and the notification mode is as follows:
When the ball removal operation starts, the voice output device 9 outputs a voice message saying "You are in ball removal mode" once for three seconds using the "voice notification (volume MAX)" function, and then, 60 seconds later, a voice message saying "You are in ball removal mode" is output once for five seconds.
An icon image "Ball removal mode in progress" is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display),
No illuminated notification will be provided by the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 76.

As described above, when the ball removal operation is in progress, the audio notification (volume MAX) will output a voice message saying "You are in ball removal mode" once for three seconds at the start of the ball removal operation, and then 60 seconds later, the audio message saying "Ball removal mode has ended" will be output once for five seconds, ending the operation. The icon image saying "In ball removal mode" will cease to be displayed 60 seconds after it started.

As shown in FIG. 131, the screen notification during the ball removal operation is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD) (displayed below the above-mentioned "Winning limit device in operation, play ends for today" icon image), and a rectangular icon image "Ball removal mode in progress" is displayed so as to overlap with part of the left performance pattern 70a. This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it easy to inform employees that the ball removal mode is in progress.

The notification event type with priority level 29 is "ball removal lever operation error."
The notification of the "ball removal lever operation error" is started upon receiving the "ball removal lever operation error start command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please remove the ball" in "voice notification (volume MAX)" mode.
An icon image stating "Please operate the ball removal lever to remove the ball" is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (brightness 40%).

In the event of a "ball removal lever operation error," the audio, visual, and electric light alerts will continue until the error is resolved (alerts will end when the error is resolved).

As shown in FIG. 131, the screen notification of a ball removal lever operation error is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD) (displayed below the above-mentioned "ball removal mode in progress" icon image), and a rectangular icon image "Please operate the ball removal lever to remove the ball" is displayed so as to overlap part of the left performance pattern 70a. This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped by other performance images or icon images, and makes it possible to clearly inform employees that a ball removal lever operation error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority level 30 is a "launch pad remaining ball error."
The notification of the "Launch Pad Remaining Ball Error" is started upon receiving the "Launch Pad Remaining Ball Error Designation Command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "voice notification (volume MAX)" saying "There are balls remaining that can be shot" until the error is resolved.
An icon image stating "There are balls remaining that can be shot" is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display),
No illuminated notification will be provided by the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 76.

Both the audio and visual notifications for the "Launch Pad Remaining Ball Error" will continue until the error is resolved (the notifications will end when the error is resolved).

As shown in Figure 131, the screen notification of the remaining balls on the launch pad error is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD) (displayed below the above-mentioned "Please operate the ball removal lever to remove the balls" icon image), and a rectangular icon image "There are balls remaining that can be launched" is displayed so as to overlap with part of the left performance pattern 70a. This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it possible to clearly inform employees that a remaining balls on the launch pad error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority level 31 is "counting process notification."
The notification of the "counting process notification" is started upon receiving the "counting process notification designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 outputs the voice "Counting processing in progress" repeatedly for 3 seconds in "voice notification (volume MAX)".
An icon image saying "Counting processing in progress" is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) for three seconds.
No illuminated notification is provided by the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 76.

The audio and visual notifications for the "counting process notification" will end when three seconds have elapsed since the start or when counting is complete. If the counting button switch 20a detects the operation of the counting button 20 three seconds after the start, audio and visual notifications will continue for another three seconds, and the same process will be repeated thereafter.

As shown in FIG. 131, the counting process notification screen notification is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD) (displayed below the above-mentioned "balls remaining to be fired" icon image), and a rectangular icon image "Counting process in progress" is displayed so as to overlap with part of the left performance pattern 70a. This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other performance images or icon images, and makes it possible to clearly inform players and employees that a counting process notification has occurred.

The notification event type with priority level 32 is "counting process completed."
The notification of "counting process completion" is started upon receiving a "counting process completion command". The notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 outputs a voice message saying "Counting process completed" once for 5 seconds in "voice notification (volume MAX)".
An icon image stating "Counting process completed" is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display),
No illuminated notification is provided by the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 76.

As mentioned above, the audio output of "Counting process completed" ends after a single output over five seconds, and the display of the icon image "Counting process completed" ends 30 seconds after it started to be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 131, the screen notification of the completion of the counting process is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD) (displayed below the above-mentioned "Counting process in progress" icon image), and a rectangular icon image "Counting process completed" is displayed so as to overlap part of the left performance pattern 70a. This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped by other performance images or icon images, and makes it easy to understand for players and employees that the counting process has been completed.

The notification event type with priority level 33 is "number of game balls exceeded."
When "number of game balls exceeded," the "number of game balls exceeded command" and the "number of game balls exceeded end command" are received, but the audio notification, visual notification, and electric notification all remain "status quo" (no special notification is given).
The main purpose of the "number of game balls over" is to send it to the gaming machine information center when the number of game balls reaches the specified number (40,000), so that the gaming machine 1 does not perform any audio notification, screen notification, or illumination notification. This makes it possible to prevent players who are playing in a good mood because the number of game balls reaches the specified number (40,000) from being upset. On the other hand, since the gaming machine information center can obtain information that the number of game balls reaches the specified number (40,000), it can recognize that a certain number has been reached before the above-mentioned acquisition upper limit device is activated, and the transition of the number of game balls can be grasped in detail in stages. Note that the number of game balls over is information that is sent when the number of game balls reaches the specified number (40,000), so it may be sent as "40000" exactly or as "40005" depending on the number of game balls owned.

The above-mentioned notification mode is merely an example, and the start condition, end condition, notification time, and notification mode can be changed as appropriate. For example, an event whose end condition is a power outage may end with the passage of time, or an event whose end condition is the passage of time may end with a power outage.

In addition, with regard to on-screen notifications, some events are notified by displaying an icon image, but this is not limited to the above. On-screen notifications may be made using the entire display area of the first image display device 70 (main LCD) with red or white text on a black background.

In addition, when multiple events occur, the screen notification can display icon images notifying the occurrence of the events, but it is also possible to display only the events with the highest priority among the events that have occurred. Then, when the end condition for the screen notification of a high priority event is met, if the event with the lower priority is in the notification period, the screen notification of that event can be performed.

The priority order is also merely an example and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the priority order may be higher for "setting change" (notification according to control related to the setting value), "setting confirmation" (notification according to control related to the setting value), "power on (RWM clear)" (notification according to clearing of predetermined information), and "power restoration" than for "game ball clear". For example, the priority order may be higher for "magnet detection error" than for "game ball clear", and the priority order may be higher for "unauthorized radio wave detection error" than for "game ball clear". For example, the priority order may be higher for "number of winning balls abnormal error" than for "game ball clear", and the priority order may be higher for "number of shot balls abnormal error" than for "game ball clear". For example, the priority order may be higher for "glass frame opening error" than for "game ball clear", and the priority order may be higher for "inner frame opening error" than for "game ball clear". For example, the priority order may be higher for "game machine communication abnormal error" than for "game ball clear", and the priority order may be higher for "communication line abnormal error" than for "game ball clear". Also, for example, "ball removal operation in progress" may be given a higher priority than "game ball clear", and "capture limit device activated" may be given a higher priority than "game ball clear". Also, "ball removal operation in progress" may be given a higher priority than "glass frame opening error" and "inner frame opening error", and "capture limit device activated" and "ball removal operation in progress" may be given a higher priority than "setting change" and "setting confirmation".

Here, we will explain with reference to Figure 78 whether control of game progress is possible or impossible when each type of notification event occurs. If the "Game" column of "Game Action" in Figure 78 shows a "○", it indicates that control of game progress is possible, and if it shows an "×", it indicates that control of game progress is impossible.

Event types that indicate a "state in which game progress cannot be controlled" include "setting change," "setting confirmation," "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)," "capture limit device activated (partial control impossible)," "ball removal in progress," and "ball removal lever operation error." On the other hand, other event types indicate a "state in which game progress can be controlled." For example, while "setting change" is being executed, execution of the main control board timer interrupt process is not permitted, and the game progress cannot be controlled. On the other hand, while "game ball count clear" is being executed, if "setting change," "setting confirmation," "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)," or "capture limit device activated" have not occurred in the main control board 110, the game progress can be controlled.

Another feature is that "clearing the number of game balls" is a state in which game progress can be controlled, and takes higher priority than "setting change", "setting confirmation", "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)", "capture limit device activated (partial control impossible)", "ball removal in progress", and "ball removal lever operation error", which are all "states in which game progress cannot be controlled". This allows the notification of "clearing the number of game balls" to be given priority in any case, allowing the player to be sure that the number of game balls has been cleared.

Another feature is that the priorities of the "states in which game progress cannot be controlled", such as "setting change", "setting confirmation", "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)", "capture limit device activated (partial control impossible)", "ball removal in progress", and "ball removal lever operation error", are different. For example, a "setting change" is required to resolve "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)", but if a "setting change" is made after the occurrence of "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)", the "setting change" can be given priority by reporting it (by not reporting "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)"), allowing the employee to recognize that the correct operation is being performed.

Another feature is that priorities differ even for "states in which game progress can be controlled", such as "clearing the number of game balls", "powering on (clearing the RWM)", and "power restoration". For example, between "clearing the number of game balls" and "powering on (clearing the RWM)", "clearing the number of game balls" takes priority, and between "clearing the number of game balls" and "power restoration", "clearing the number of game balls" takes priority. This allows the notification of "clearing the number of game balls" to be executed with priority in any case, so that the player can be sure that the number of game balls has been cleared.

As shown in Figures 129 and 130, the conditions for ending the notification differ depending on the type of notification event. For example, notifications can be divided into "events in which notifications end with a power outage (not resumed after power is restored)" and "events in which notifications do not end with a power outage (not resumed after power is restored)." Examples of "events in which notifications end with a power outage (not resumed after power is restored)" include "winning ball count abnormal error," "fired ball count abnormal error," and "RWM abnormal error," while examples of "events in which notifications do not end with a power outage (not resumed after power is restored)" include "number of game balls cleared," "setting change," and "setting confirmation." For example, "number of game balls cleared" is designed so that the notification will not end simply by turning the power switch 164 OFF and ON, unless a shot or count is performed. Also, when comparing "an event in which the notification ends when the power is turned off (not restarting notification after power is restored)" with "an event in which the notification does not end when the power is turned off (not restarting notification after power is restored)," the priority tends to be set higher for the "event in which the notification does not end when the power is turned off (not restarting notification after power is restored)." This allows the notification to continue until the number of game balls is cleared, until the balls are fired or counted, so that the player can be informed that the number of game balls has been cleared and that play is possible. Also, if the setting is changed, the notification can continue until the setting key SW112a is returned to its initial position (the operation to end the setting change), so that the employee can be informed that the setting change is completed by ending the notification following the operation.

Another feature is that the priorities of "clearing the number of game balls," "changing settings," and "checking settings," which are "events for which notifications do not end due to a power outage (notifications resume after power is restored)," are different. For example, between "clearing the number of game balls" and "changing settings," "clearing the number of game balls" takes priority, while between "clearing the number of game balls" and "checking settings," "clearing the number of game balls" takes priority. This allows the notification of "clearing the number of game balls" to be executed with priority in any case, ensuring that the player is aware that the number of game balls has been cleared.

In addition, the "winning ball count abnormal error", "firing ball count abnormal error", and "RWM abnormal error", which are "events in which the notification ends due to a power outage (not restarting the notification after the power is restored)", have different priorities. For example, the "winning ball count abnormal error" is prioritized over the "firing ball count abnormal error". For example, the "winning ball count abnormal error" is assumed to be a fraudulent act in which only the winning SW is detected using a fraudulent device or a game ball with a string attached, and the out ball detection SW 39a downstream of the winning SW is not detected, whereas the "firing ball count abnormal error" is assumed to be a state in which a large number of game balls are stopped on the game board (a state in which so-called "grapes" have occurred). In other words, since the "winning ball count abnormal error" is more likely to be a fraudulent act, security can be increased by prioritizing the "winning ball count abnormal error" and notifying it. In addition, the "RWM abnormal error" is assumed to be prioritized over the "winning ball count abnormal error". This prevents games from being played when there is an abnormality in the main RAM 110c (more serious than an abnormal winning ball count error), and prevents games from being played improperly.

The "RWM abnormality error" notification is terminated on the assumption that a setting change operation is performed and the setting is changed the next time power is supplied after the power supply is cut off. In other words, if a setting change operation is not performed the next time power is supplied after the power supply is cut off, the "RWM abnormality error" notification continues.
Therefore, if a setting change operation is performed the next time power is supplied after the power supply is cut off, this event can be categorized as "an event in which notification ends due to a power outage (notification does not resume after power is restored)."

Note that "an event in which an alert ends due to a power outage (an alert is not resumed after power is restored)" may mean that all of the audio, visual, and illumination alerts end due to a power outage, or that some of the audio, visual, and illumination alerts end due to a power outage. In other words, some of the audio, visual, and illumination alerts may resume. In other words, it may be possible not to resume alerts after power is restored (some may resume and some may not).
Furthermore, "an event in which the notification does not end due to a power outage (notification is resumed after power is restored)" may mean that all of the audio, visual, and illumination notifications do not end due to a power outage, or that some of the audio, visual, and illumination notifications do not end due to a power outage. In other words, it may be possible to resume notifications after power is restored (some notifications may resume and some may not).

In addition, the error codes displayed on the frame control display 125 shown in FIG. 78 have different display termination conditions (non-display conditions) depending on the type of notification event. For example, they can be divided into "events in which the display is terminated by a power outage (the display does not resume after power is restored)" and "events in which the display is not terminated by a power outage (the display resumes after power is restored)." Examples of "events in which the display is terminated by a power outage (the display does not resume after power is restored)" include "unauthorized radio wave detection error," "won ball count abnormal error," and "fired ball count abnormal error," while examples of "events in which the display is not terminated by a power outage (the display resumes after power is restored)" include "number of game balls cleared." Specifically, the error code "H67" corresponding to "number of game balls cleared" has a display termination condition (non-display condition) met 30 seconds after firing or counting. On the other hand, the error code "H66" corresponding to the "unauthorized radio wave detection error", the error code "H68" corresponding to the "abnormal number of winning balls error", and the error code "H69" corresponding to the "abnormal number of fired balls error" have their display termination conditions (conditions to hide them) met when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. This makes it possible to confirm that the high-priority "number of gaming balls cleared" has been performed even after the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off (after the power is turned back on), and allows the player to know for sure that the number of gaming balls has been cleared even in the event of a sudden power outage.

In addition, with regard to "events where the display does not end due to a power outage (the display resumes after the power is restored)," other than the above-mentioned "clearing the number of game balls," for example, "glass frame open error" and "inner frame open error" can be included in "events where the display does not end due to a power outage (the display resumes after the power is restored)." For example, if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off while the glass frame 4 or inner frame 3 is open (with an error code displayed), and the power is turned on without closing the glass frame 4 or inner frame 3, the condition for ending the display of the error code is not met, and if there is a "glass frame open error," "H64" is redisplayed, and if there is an "inner frame open error," "H65" is redisplayed. On the other hand, if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off while the glass frame 4 or inner frame 3 is open (with an error code displayed), and the power is turned on after closing the glass frame 4 or inner frame 3, the condition for ending the display of the error code is met. In other words, whether or not the condition for ending the display of the error code is met depends on whether or not the action of closing the glass frame 4 or the inner frame 3 is performed (it can be said that it belongs to both events). As a result, if the number of game balls is cleared, the player can be sure that the number of game balls has been cleared even if a power outage occurs unexpectedly. Also, if the error code is displayed when the power is turned back on in the case of a "glass frame open error" or "inner frame open error," the player can be prompted to close the glass frame 4 or the inner frame 3. On the other hand, if the power is turned back on after the action of closing the glass frame 4 or the inner frame 3 has been performed, the display of the error code will end, allowing the player to be aware that appropriate action has been taken.

Note that the "event in which the display ends due to a power outage (the display does not resume after the power is restored)" may be a mode in which no display is performed at all after the power is restored, or a mode in which the display is performed for a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) after the power is restored and the display is hidden after the predetermined time has elapsed. In other words, it may be possible not to resume the display after the power is restored (it may not be displayed at all, or it may be displayed for only a predetermined time).
Furthermore, the "event in which the display does not end due to a power outage (the display is resumed after the power is restored)" may be a mode in which the display continues until the corresponding error is resolved after the power is restored, or a mode in which the display is displayed for a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) after the power is restored and is hidden after the predetermined time has elapsed. In other words, the display may be capable of being resumed after the power is restored (it may continue to be displayed until the error is resolved, or it may be displayed for only a predetermined time).

As described above, in the cases of "setting change", "setting confirmation", "power on (RWM clear)", and "capture limit device operation", the corresponding bit of "fraud detection status 1 (main control)" in "HC/fraud monitoring information" is turned ON and transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center. In the case of "number of game balls clear", bit 3 of "fraud detection status 2 (frame control)" in "HC/fraud monitoring information" is turned ON and the information that has been turned ON is transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center. On the other hand, in the cases of "ball removal operation in progress", "ball removal lever operation error", "communication line abnormality error", "no response communication error", etc., the corresponding bit of "fraud detection status 2 (frame control)" in "HC/fraud monitoring information" is not turned ON and no information is transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center. This allows a distinction to be made between information necessary for proper management of the gaming machine 1 and unnecessary information, and prevents the dedicated unit 170 and gaming machine information center from receiving all information (receiving everything), which can lead to an abundance of information to be managed and poor management.

In addition, in the cases of "setting change", "setting confirmation", and "power on (RWM clear)", the corresponding bit of "fraud detection state 1 (main control)" of "HC/fraud monitoring information" is turned ON and transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center. However, for example, if these events occur outside the business hours of the gaming establishment, the information may not be transmitted, and if these events occur during the business hours of the gaming establishment, the information may be transmitted. In other words, if these events occur during the business hours of the gaming establishment, there is a high probability that fraud has been committed, so that a minimum level of security can be maintained by receiving information only during the business hours of the gaming establishment. In other words, depending on the business hours of the gaming establishment, there may be cases where information related to the event is transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center (during the business hours of the gaming establishment) and cases where information related to the event is not transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center (outside the business hours of the gaming establishment).
On the other hand, in the case of "ball removal operation in progress,""ball removal lever operation error,""communication line abnormality error,""communication no response error," etc., the corresponding bit of "fraud detection status 2 (frame control)" in the "HC/fraud monitoring information" is not turned ON and no information is sent to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center, but information related to these events may be sent to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center, or may be configured so that it is sent during or outside the business hours of the gaming establishment, or not sent.
In other words, it may be possible to transmit information related to the event to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center (basically it is transmitted, but it may not be transmitted depending on business hours), or it may be possible not to transmit information related to the event to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center (basically it is not transmitted, but it may be transmitted depending on business hours).

Here, the display order of the error codes will be explained. As shown in FIG. 78, there are notification events detected by the main control board 110 and notification events detected by the frame control board 120. For notification events detected by the main control board 110, no error code is displayed on the frame control display 125, but for notification events detected by the frame control board 120, an error code is displayed on the frame control display 125. For notification events detected by the main control board 110 and notification events detected by the frame control board 120, an error code is displayed on the frame control display 125 under the control of the performance control board 130, as audio notification, visual notification (display of an error code as an icon image), and illumination notification (except for exceeding the number of game balls). For notification events detected by the frame control board 120, an error code is displayed on the display unit 174 of the dedicated unit 170.

For example, when the frame control board 120 detects that the number of game balls has been cleared, first, the frame control display 125 displays the error code "H67", then the first image display device 70 displays "H67 Number of Game Balls Cleared", and finally, the display unit 174 of the dedicated unit 170 displays "H67". For example, if the order was reversed, an employee performing the game ball clear operation on the back of the gaming machine would have to take the trouble of first viewing the first image display device 70 and the display unit 174, which are visible from the front of the gaming machine, but displaying the error codes in the above order has the advantage of making it easier to confirm the game ball clear notification.

Figures 132 and 133 are diagrams showing the relationship between the number of game balls being cleared and the notification modes for each event when the power is turned on. The "audio notification", "screen notification", and "illumination notification" in the figures correspond to those shown in Figures 129 and 130. Note that Figure 132 assumes the case where the power is turned on after both the number of game balls being cleared and the setting change operation or setting confirmation operation are performed, the case where the number of game balls being cleared and the RWM clear operation are performed, and the case where the number of game balls being cleared and the power is turned on (power restored). The time charts are compared between "number of game balls being cleared" and "setting change or setting confirmation", between "number of game balls being cleared" and "power on (RWM clear)", and between "number of game balls being cleared" and "power restored".

(Comparison between clearing the number of game balls and changing or checking the settings)
(a) is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned on. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, a game ball count clear operation is performed, if the setting is to be changed, a setting change operation is performed, and if the setting is to be confirmed, a setting confirmation operation is performed.

(b) is the timing when the number of game balls is cleared by the frame control board 120 and the performance control board 130 receives a command to start clearing the number of game balls. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 outputs an audio notification saying "The number of game balls has been cleared," displays an on-screen notification saying "H67 Number of game balls cleared," and causes the frame lighting device 10 to flash red with an electric light notification.

(c) is the timing at which the presentation control board 130 receives the setting change command sent from the main control board 110. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, when the power switch 164 is turned ON, the frame control board 120 and the presentation control board 130 start up slightly earlier than the main control board 110. In other words, the main processing in the frame control board 120 and the main processing in the presentation control board 130 start before the main processing in the main control board 110. Therefore, the game ball count clear notification starts at (b), and the setting change notification or setting confirmation notification starts later at (c).

In (c), although a setting change command has been received, the notification of clearing the number of game balls has been executed, and since the priority order shown in FIG. 129 is that of clearing the number of game balls, audio notification and illumination notification related to the setting change are not initiated. On the other hand, as for visual notification, a display such as "Setting change in progress" is initiated on the first image display device 70.

(d) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the electric light notification continue. Also, when the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends, a new audio notification of the setting change starts, "Settings being changed + siren", and this is output repeatedly.

As shown in Fig. 133, setting change and setting confirmation (c) to (d), the notification modes (c) to (d) are as follows: the sound output device 9 and frame lighting device 10 notify that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the first image display device 70 notifies that the number of game balls has been cleared and that the setting is being changed. The first image display device 70 displays "settings being changed" in red letters on a black background, and an icon image of "H67 number of game balls cleared" is displayed in the upper left of the display area so as not to overlap with the display. The icon image displays "H67" in white letters on a red background and "number of game balls cleared" in black letters on a yellow background (the background color is a two-tone red and yellow).

Although the ball count clear notification has a higher priority, the "settings changing" message is displayed in a larger font size than the ball count clear icon image, in red, and in the center of the display area, making it easy for employees to see. This allows employees to be fully aware that the settings are being changed even in a situation where the ball count clear notification is given priority and the audio and electric light notification of the setting change cannot be executed. Also, since both notifications can be identified even if the ball count clear and setting change notifications are executed at the same time, it is possible to prevent situations where employees are unable to recognize that either event is occurring.

(e) is the timing when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on command (or power restoration command if checking settings) sent from the main control board 110. When the performance control board 130 receives this command, it ends the audio and visual notification of the setting change that is being performed.

As shown in FIG. 133, the notification modes (d) to (e) are as follows: the frame lighting device 10 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and that the setting is being changed, and the audio output device 9 notifies the player that the setting is being changed. In this way, if the setting change notification period is still in progress even after the audio notification of the number of game balls has ended, the audio notification of the setting change can be started immediately to make the player aware that the setting is being changed. Although not shown in the figure, after (e), the first image display device 70 displays an icon image of the number of game balls cleared, the initial number (123) of the performance pattern 70a, and a background image.

(g) is the timing when the player operates the counting button 20 to count the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, or when the launch handle 15 is gripped and a game ball is shot out. When either of these operations is performed, the visual and illuminated notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends 30 seconds after the operation. This allows the notification to end without delay after the player takes his seat, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable and avoiding the game due to the visual and illuminated notification that the number of game balls has been cleared continuing for an extended period of time.

As described above, even if the number of game balls is cleared and the settings are changed or confirmed at the same time, both events can be appropriately notified by audio, visual, or illuminated alerts, which also leads to improved work efficiency for employees.

In addition, in (d), a new audio notification of the setting change is started, but the audio notification of the setting change does not have to be started. Also, the visual notification of the setting change is started from (c), but it may start from (d). Also, the illumination notification of the cleared number of game balls may end in (d), and the illumination notification of the setting change may start.

For ease of explanation, we have used a setting change as an example, but if a setting check is to be performed, the above setting change can be appropriately interpreted as a setting check.

(Comparison between clearing the number of game balls and clearing the RWM)
(a) is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned on. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, the game ball number clear operation is performed, and if the RWM is to be cleared, the RWM clear operation is performed.

Since (b) is as described above, the explanation will be omitted.
(c) is the timing when the performance control board 130 receives the RWM clear command transmitted from the main control board 110. Although the RWM clear command is received, the game ball count clear notification is being executed, and the game ball count clear has a higher priority as shown in Fig. 129, so the audio notification and the illumination notification related to the RWM clear are not started. On the other hand, as for the screen notification, the first image display device 70 starts displaying the "combination of the performance pattern 70a of the initial result 123" (including the background image).

(d) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the electric light notification continue. Also, when the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends, a new audio notification that the RWM has been cleared starts: "RAM has been cleared + BGM when the ball is inserted", and this is output repeatedly.

As shown in FIG. 133, power-on (RWM clear) (c) to (d), the notification modes (c) to (d) are as follows: the sound output device 9 and the frame lighting device 10 notify the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the "combination of performance patterns 70a with initial result 123" (including background image). In other words, there is no direct display that the RWM has been cleared, but the display of the "combination of performance patterns 70a with initial result 123" (including background image) indirectly notifies the player that the RWM has been cleared.

(f) is the timing 30 seconds have passed since (d), and the audio notification of RWM clear ends at this timing. Meanwhile, the display of the "combination of the performance pattern 70a of the initial result 123" (including the background image) continues until the player starts playing (it may be interrupted by a demo performance, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 133, power-on (RWM clear) (d) to (f), the notification modes (d) to (f) are as follows: the frame lighting device 10 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the "combination of the performance pattern 70a with the initial result of 123" (including the background image), and the audio output device 9 notifies the player that the RWM has been cleared. In this way, if the audio notification of the number of game balls cleared has ended but the RWM clear notification period is still in progress, the audio notification of the RWM clear can be started immediately, making it easier for the player to recognize that the RWM has been cleared. Note that (g) is as described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, even if both the number of game balls and the RWM are cleared, both events can be appropriately notified by audio, visual, and/or electric light alerts, which also leads to improved work efficiency for employees.

Note that in (d), a new audio notification of RWM clearing is started, but the audio notification of RWM clearing does not have to start. Also, the visual notification of RWM clearing is started from (c), but it may start from (d). Also, the illumination notification of the number of game balls cleared may end in (d) and the illumination notification of RWM clearing may start.

(Comparison between clearing the number of game balls and power being restored)
(a) is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned on. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, the game ball count clear operation is performed, and if the power is to be restored, only the power switch 164 is turned on.

Since (b) is as described above, the explanation will be omitted.
Since (c) is the same as the RWM clear described above, a description thereof will be omitted. However, since this is power restoration, the command received from the main control board 110 here is a power restoration command.

(d) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the audio notification of the game ball count being cleared ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the illumination notification continue. In addition, when the audio notification of the game ball count being cleared ends, a new audio notification of the power being restored, the "power-on background music," starts.
(f) is the same as the RWM clear described above, so the explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 133, power recovery (c) to (d), the notification modes (c) to (d) are as follows: the sound output device 9 and the frame lighting device 10 notify the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the "combination of performance symbols 70a with initial numbers 123" (including the background image). In other words, the player is not directly notified that the power has been restored, but is indirectly notified that the power has been restored by displaying the "combination of performance symbols 70a with initial numbers 123" (including the background image). Note that, when the power is restored, the "combination of performance symbols 70a with initial numbers 123" is displayed, as in the case of RWM clear, but a different combination of performance symbols 70a may be displayed. For example, when the power is restored, the "combination of performance symbols 70a with initial numbers 357" may be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 133, power restoration (d) to (f), the notification modes (d) to (f) are as follows: the frame lighting device 10 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the "combination of the initial result 123 performance pattern 70a" (including the background image), and the audio output device 9 notifies the player that the power has been restored (outputs the BGM played when the player inserts the ball). In this way, if the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared has ended but the power restoration notification period is still in progress, the audio notification of power restoration can be started immediately, making it easier for the player to recognize that the power has been restored. Note that (g) is as described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, even if the number of game balls is cleared and the power is restored at the same time, both events can be appropriately notified by audio, visual, and electric light alerts, which also leads to improved work efficiency for employees.

In addition, in (d), a new audio notification of power restoration is started, but the audio notification of power restoration does not have to start. Also, the visual notification of power restoration is started from (c), but it may start from (d). Also, the electric light notification of the cleared number of game balls may end in (d) and the electric light notification of power restoration may start.

Figure 134 is a time chart showing the relationship between the initial operation of the movable effect device 77 (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b) when the number of game balls is cleared and when the power is restored. Note that Figure 134 is a diagram comparing the notification mode of each effect means when the power is turned on with the game ball count clear operation and when only the power is turned on.

(a) is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned ON. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, the game ball count clear operation is performed, and if the power is to be restored, only the power switch 164 is turned ON.

(b) is the timing when the number of game balls is cleared by the frame control board 120 and the performance control board 130 receives a command to start clearing the number of game balls. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 outputs an audio notification saying "The number of game balls has been cleared," displays an on-screen notification saying "H67 Number of game balls cleared," and causes the frame lighting device 10 to flash red with an electric light notification.

(c) is the timing at which the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration command sent from the main control board 110.
When the power is turned on with the number of game balls cleared, the first image display device 70 starts displaying the "combination of the performance patterns 70a of the initial result 123" (including the background image),
Even when the power is only ON, the first image display device 70 starts displaying the "combination of the performance patterns 70a of the initial results 123" (including the background image). In other words, regardless of whether the number of game balls is cleared or not, the timing at which the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration command is the same, and the timing at which the display of the "combination of the performance patterns 70a of the initial results 123" (including the background image) starts is also the same.

In addition, when the power is turned on with the number of game balls being cleared, the initial operation of the movable effect device 77 (the first movable member 77a and the second movable member 77b) is started,
Even when the power is only ON, the initial operation of the movable performance device 77 (the first movable member 77a and the second movable member 77b) is started. In other words, regardless of whether the number of game balls is cleared or not, the timing at which the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration command is the same, and the timing at which the initial operation is started is also the same.
This makes it unnecessary to change the timing at which the display of the initial result begins, the timing at which the execution of the initial action begins, or the content of the execution of the initial action depending on whether or not the number of game balls is cleared, thereby preventing an increase in the control load.

In each case, the initial operation is (c) to (g), with the first movable member 77a operating in operation mode 1, then the second movable member 77b operating in operation mode 1, and then the first movable member 77a operating in operation mode 2. In other words, the start timing of the initial operation and the initial operation mode are the same in each case. Therefore, there is no need to prepare initial operation modes according to whether or not the number of game balls has been cleared, and commonality can be achieved, preventing an increase in the control load.

In addition, in (c), when the power is ON and the number of game balls is cleared, the power restoration command is received, but the announcement of the clearing of the number of game balls is being executed, and since the priority order shown in FIG. 129 is given to the clearing of the number of game balls, the audio announcement and the illumination announcement regarding the restoration of the power are not started.

In addition, in (c), when the power is only ON, the audio notification of power restoration "Power-on BGM" is output, and the electric notification of power restoration "The frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 light up in white" begins.

(d) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). If the power is turned on while the number of game balls is cleared, the audio notification of the cleared number of game balls ends at this timing. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the electric light notification continue. In addition, when the audio notification of the cleared number of game balls ends, a new audio notification of the power being restored, "Power-on BGM", begins to be output.

(e) is the timing when 30 seconds have passed since (c). In the case of only power ON, the audio notification by the input BGM output ends. Similarly, (f) is the timing when 30 seconds have passed since (d) in the case of power ON accompanied by clearing the number of game balls, and the audio notification by the input BGM output ends at this timing.
Also, (f) when only the power is ON is the timing 60 seconds have elapsed since (c), and the illumination notification ends at this timing.

(g) is the timing at which the initial operation ends in either case. That is, in either case, the initial operation of the movable effect device 77 (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b) that began in (c) ends in (g). This makes it unnecessary to change the timing at which the initial operation ends depending on whether or not the number of game balls has been cleared, thereby preventing an increase in the control load.

(h) is the timing when, in the case of power ON accompanied by the clearing of the number of game balls, the player operates the counting button 20 to count the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, or grips the launch handle 15 to shoot out a game ball. When either of these operations is performed, the on-screen notification and the illuminated notification that the number of game balls has been cleared end 30 seconds after the operation.

Although not specifically shown, in either case, the light emission pattern of the light emitting means of the movable presentation device 77 (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b) during the initial operation may be the same. For example, whether the power is turned on with the number of game balls being cleared or only the power is turned on, the initial operation may be performed while the light emitting means of the movable presentation device 77 (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b) is lit in blue. This simplifies the control process since there is no need to change the light emission pattern depending on whether the number of game balls is being cleared.

In addition, the initial operation of the movable effect device 77 (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b) was compared between the case where the power is turned on with the number of game balls cleared and the case where the power is turned on only. In the case where the power is turned on only, it may be interpreted as the power is turned on with a setting confirmation operation, or the power is turned on with a setting change operation, or the power is turned on with an RWM clear operation. In other words, in any case, the control load can be simplified by standardizing the execution start timing, execution end timing, operation mode, etc. of the initial operation.

Figures 135 and 136 are diagrams showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event (abnormality). Note that a magnet detection error and an illegal radio wave detection error are given as examples of each event (abnormality). Also, Figure 135 assumes the case where a magnet is detected when the number of game balls clear operation is performed and the power is turned on, and the case where a radio wave is detected when the number of game balls clear operation is performed and the power is turned on, and the time chart can be read as "number of game balls cleared" and "magnet detection", and "number of game balls cleared" and "radio wave detection".

First, we will explain "clearing the number of game balls" and "magnet detection."
(a) is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned on. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, the number of game balls is cleared.

(b) is the timing when the number of game balls is cleared by the frame control board 120 and the performance control board 130 receives a command to start clearing the number of game balls. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 outputs an audio notification saying "The number of game balls has been cleared," displays an on-screen notification saying "H67 Number of game balls cleared," and causes the frame lighting device 10 to flash red with an electric light notification.

(c) is the timing when the main processing in the main control board 110 becomes executable, and (d) is the timing when the main control board timer interrupt processing in the main control board 110 becomes executable. In other words, this is the timing when the main control board timer interrupt processing becomes executable and the error control processing executed within the main control board timer interrupt processing becomes executable.

(e) is the timing when magnet detection is performed by the error control process executed within the main control board timer interrupt process, and the performance control board 130 receives a magnet detection designation command. Although the magnet detection designation command is received at this timing, the game ball count clear notification is being executed, and the game ball count clear has a higher priority as shown in FIG. 129, so audio notification and electric light notification related to magnet detection are not initiated. Meanwhile, for the screen notification, the third image display device 72 begins to display an icon image such as "magnet detected."

(f) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the electric light notification continue. Also, when the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends, a new audio notification of magnet detection starts: "Magnet detected + siren", and this is output repeatedly.

As shown in magnet detection (e) to (f) in Figure 136, the notification modes (e) to (f) are as follows: the sound output device 9 and the frame lighting device 10 notify the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the "combination of performance patterns 70a with initial result 123" (including the background image). The third image display device 72 displays an icon image of "magnet detection" (see Figure 131 for the display position). The design (color, etc.) of the icon image is the same as the icon image for the number of game balls cleared described above.

In this way, if magnet detection occurs when the power is turned on with the game ball count clear operation, a notification of the game ball count clear, which has a high priority, is given and an icon image of "magnet detection" is displayed on the third image display device 72. This makes it possible to distinguish between the notifications even if the game ball count clear and magnet detection are performed at the same time, preventing the user from failing to recognize which event is occurring.

(h) is the timing when 180 seconds have passed since (e). At this timing, the audio notification and visual notification of magnet detection end. Meanwhile, the visual notification and electric light notification of the cleared number of game balls continue to be displayed.

As shown in magnet detection (f) to (h) in FIG. 136, the notification modes (f) to (h) are as follows: the frame lighting device 10 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the initial number (123) of the performance pattern 70a and the background image, the third image display device 72 notifies the player of the magnet detection, and the audio output device 9 notifies the player of the magnet detection. In this way, if the audio notification of the number of game balls cleared has ended but the player is still in the magnet detection notification period, the audio notification of the magnet detection can be started immediately, making it easier for the player to recognize that a magnet detection that is highly likely to be fraudulent has been performed.

(i) is the timing when the player operates the counting button 20 to count the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, or when the launch handle 15 is gripped and a game ball is shot out. When either of these operations is performed, the visual and electric light notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends 30 seconds after the operation. This allows the notification to end without delay after the player takes his seat, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable and avoiding the game due to the visual and electric light notification that the number of game balls has been cleared continuing for an extended period of time.

As described above, even if both the game ball count is cleared and a magnet is detected, both events can be appropriately notified by audio, visual, and/or electric light alerts, which also leads to improved work efficiency for employees.

If a magnet is not detected at (e) but is detected between (f) and (i), an audio notification and a visual notification of the magnet detection will be immediately issued. On the other hand, as the visual notification of the clearing of the number of game balls has already been issued, no visual notification corresponding to the magnet detection will be issued.

In addition, in (f), a new audio notification of magnet detection is started, but the audio notification of magnet detection does not have to be started. In addition, the visual notification of magnet detection is started from (e), but it may be started from (f). In addition, the illumination notification of the cleared number of game balls may be ended in (f) and the illumination notification of magnet detection may be started.

Next, the "clear number of game balls" and "radio wave detection" will be explained.
(a) is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned on. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, the number of game balls is cleared.

(b) is the timing when the frame control board 120 clears the number of game balls during the frame control board main processing, and the performance control board 130 receives a command to start clearing the number of game balls. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 outputs an audio notification saying "The number of game balls has been cleared," displays an on-screen notification saying "H67 Number of game balls cleared," and causes the frame lighting device 10 to flash red with an electric light notification.

(e) is the timing when an illegal radio wave is detected during error control processing within the frame control board timer interrupt processing, which is performed after the frame control board main processing, and the performance control board 130 receives an illegal radio wave detection designation command. Although the illegal radio wave detection designation command is received at this timing, the game ball count clear notification is being executed, and the game ball count clear has a higher priority as shown in FIG. 129, so the audio notification and electric light notification related to the radio wave detection are not started. Meanwhile, as for the screen notification, the third image display device 72 starts displaying an icon image such as "H66 illegal radio wave detected". The icon image "H66 illegal radio wave detected" continues to be displayed until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off.

(f) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the electric light notification continue. In addition, when the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends, a new audio notification of the detection of illegal radio waves begins, "Radio waves detected + siren," and this is output repeatedly.

As shown in FIG. 136, radio wave detection (e) to (f), the notification modes (e) to (f) are as follows: the sound output device 9 and the frame lighting device 10 notify the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the "combination of the performance patterns 70a with the initial result of 123" (including the background image). The third image display device 72 displays an icon image of "H66 Unauthorized radio wave detected" (see FIG. 131 for the display position). The design (color, etc.) of the icon image is the same as the icon image for the number of game balls cleared described above.

In this way, if radio wave detection occurs when the power is turned on and the game ball count is cleared, a notification of the game ball count being cleared, which has a high priority, is made while an icon image of "unauthorized radio wave detected" is displayed on the third image display device 72. This makes it possible to distinguish between the notifications even if the game ball count is cleared and radio wave detection is performed at the same time, preventing the user from failing to recognize which event has occurred.

(g) is the timing when 30 seconds have passed since (f). At this timing, the audio notification of the detection of unauthorized radio waves ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification of the cleared number of game balls and the illumination notification continue to be displayed. (i) is the same as that described in the section on magnet detection.

As shown in FIG. 136, the notification modes (f) to (g) are as follows: the frame lighting device 10 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the initial number (123) of the performance pattern 70a and the background image, the third image display device 72 notifies the player that an illegal radio wave has been detected, and the audio output device 9 notifies the player that an illegal radio wave has been detected. In this way, if the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared has ended but the player is still in the radio wave detection notification period, the audio notification of radio wave detection can be started immediately, making it easier for the player to recognize that a radio wave detection that is highly likely to be illegal has been detected.

As described above, even if both the number of game balls cleared and radio wave detection occur, both events can be appropriately notified by audio, visual, and/or electric light alerts, which also leads to improved work efficiency for employees.

If radio wave detection is not performed at (e) but occurs between (f) and (i), audio and visual notifications of radio wave detection are immediately issued. On the other hand, as the illumination notification for clearing the number of game balls has already been issued, no illumination notification corresponding to the radio wave detection is issued.

In addition, at (f), a new audio notification of radio wave detection is started, but the audio notification of radio wave detection does not have to be started. Also, the visual notification of radio wave detection is started from (e), but it may be started from (f). Also, the electric light notification of the cleared number of game balls may be ended at (f), and the electric light notification of radio wave detection may be started.

Figures 137 and 138 are diagrams showing the relationship between the clearing of the number of game balls and the notification mode of each event (abnormality). Note that as examples of each event (abnormality), an internal gaming machine communication abnormality error, a communication line abnormality error, and a communication no response error are given. Also, Figure 137 assumes a case where an internal gaming machine communication abnormality is detected when the number of game balls is cleared and the power is turned on, and a communication line abnormality and communication no response are detected when the number of game balls is cleared and the power is turned on, and the time chart can be read as "clearing the number of game balls" and "internal gaming machine communication abnormality error", and "clearing the number of game balls" and "communication line abnormality error, communication no response error".

First, we will explain about "clearing the number of game balls" and "abnormal communication error within the gaming machine."
(a) is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned on. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, the number of game balls is cleared.

(b) is the timing when the number of game balls is cleared by the frame control board 120 and the performance control board 130 receives a command to start clearing the number of game balls. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 outputs an audio notification saying "The number of game balls has been cleared," displays an on-screen notification saying "H67 Number of game balls cleared," and causes the frame lighting device 10 to flash red with an electric light notification.

(c) is the timing when the main processing in the main control board 110 becomes executable. At this time, the main processing in the main control board 110 issues a "game machine installation information notification", but the wiring connecting the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 is partially inserted or broken, preventing communication, and the receipt result of the "game machine installation information notification" is not received.

(d) is the timing when the frame control board 120 determines that the period after startup when gaming machine installation information has not been received is three minutes, and the performance control board 130 receives a command to start an abnormality in gaming machine communications. Although the command to start an abnormality in gaming machine communications is received at this timing, the game ball count clear notification is being executed, and the priority order shown in FIG. 129 is also higher for the game ball count clear, so audio and illumination notifications related to the abnormality in gaming machine communications are not initiated. Meanwhile, as for the screen notification, the third image display device 72 begins to display an icon image such as "H06 Board connection error, check connection."

(e) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the electric light notification continue. Also, when the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends, a new audio notification of an abnormality in the communication within the gaming machine starts, "Please call an attendant + siren", and this is output repeatedly.

As shown in Fig. 138 for the communication abnormality errors (d) to (e), the notification modes (d) to (e) are as follows: the sound output device 9 and the frame lighting device 10 notify the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the "combination of the performance patterns 70a with the initial result of 123" (including the background image). The third image display device 72 displays an icon image of "H06 board connection error, check the connection" (see Fig. 131 for the display position). The design (color, etc.) of the icon image is the same as the icon image for the number of game balls cleared described above.

In this way, if an internal communication abnormality is detected when the power is turned on to clear the number of game balls, a notification of the clearing of the number of game balls, which has a high priority, is issued, while the third image display device 72 displays an icon image of "H06 Board connection error Check connection." This makes it possible to distinguish between the notifications even if the clearing of the number of game balls and the internal communication abnormality are executed at the same time, preventing a situation where the user is unable to recognize which event has occurred.

(f) is the timing when the wiring connecting the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 is cleared of any partial insertion or disconnection. This ends the audio and visual notification of the abnormal communication error within the gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 138, the notification modes (e) to (f) are as follows: the frame lighting device 10 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the initial number (123) of the performance pattern 70a and the background image, the third image display device 72 notifies the player that the communication error has been abnormal, and the audio output device 9 notifies the player that the communication error has been abnormal. In this way, if the audio notification of the number of game balls cleared has ended but the player is still in the notification period of the communication error in the game machine, the audio notification of the communication error in the game machine can be started immediately to prompt the player to check the connection status between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

(g) is the timing when the player operates the counting button 20 to count the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, or when the launch handle 15 is gripped and a game ball is shot out. When either of these operations is performed, the visual and illuminated notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends 30 seconds after the operation. This allows the notification to end without delay after the player takes his seat, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable and avoiding the game due to the visual and illuminated notification that the number of game balls has been cleared continuing for an extended period of time.

As described above, even if both the number of game balls cleared and an error in the communication within the gaming machine occurs, both events can be appropriately notified by audio, visual, and electric alerts, which also leads to improved work efficiency for employees.

If a communication error within the gaming machine is detected between (e) and (g), an audio notification and a visual notification of the communication error within the gaming machine are immediately issued. On the other hand, as the visual notification of the clearing of the number of game balls has already been issued, no visual notification corresponding to the communication error within the gaming machine is issued.

In addition, in (e), a new audio notification of a communication abnormality error within the gaming machine is started, but the audio notification of the communication abnormality error within the gaming machine does not have to be started. In addition, the visual notification of the communication abnormality error within the gaming machine is started from (d), but it may start from (e). In addition, the electric light notification of the number of game balls cleared may be ended in (e), and the electric light notification of the communication abnormality error within the gaming machine may be started.

Next, we will explain "Number of game balls cleared" and "Communication line abnormality error, communication no response error." Note that since both are connection errors between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, we will use the term "communication line abnormality error" to explain them, and consider "communication no response error" to be interchangeable. In this example, the wiring connecting the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 is half-inserted or broken.

(a) is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned ON. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, the game ball count clear operation is performed. (b) is the same as (b) in the above-mentioned gaming machine internal communication abnormality error. Also, (c) is the timing related to the gaming machine internal communication abnormality error, so the explanation will be omitted.

(d) is the timing when the frame control board 120 detects that the VL signal (connection signal) with the dedicated unit 170 is OFF, and the performance control board 130 receives a communication line abnormality designation command. Although the communication line abnormality designation command is received at this timing, the game ball count clear notification is being executed, and the game ball count clear has a higher priority as shown in FIG. 129, so audio and electric light notifications related to the communication line abnormality are not initiated. Meanwhile, as for the visual notification, the third image display device 72 begins to display an icon image such as "H04 Dedicated unit connection error, check connection".

(e) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the electric light notification continue. Also, when the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends, a new audio notification of a communication line abnormality starts, "Please call an attendant + siren", and this is output repeatedly.

As shown in the communication line abnormality errors (d) to (e) in FIG. 138, the notification modes (d) to (e) are as follows: the sound output device 9 and the frame lighting device 10 notify the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the "combination of the performance patterns 70a with the initial result of 123" (including the background image). The third image display device 72 displays an icon image of "H04 Dedicated unit connection error Check connection" (see FIG. 131 for the display position). The design (color, etc.) of the icon image is the same as the icon image for the number of game balls cleared described above.

In this way, if a communication line abnormality is detected when the power is turned on to clear the number of game balls, a notification of the clearing of the number of game balls, which has high priority, is issued, while the third image display device 72 displays an icon image of "H04 Dedicated unit connection error Check connection." This makes it possible to distinguish between notifications for both, even if the clearing of the number of game balls and the communication line abnormality are executed at the same time, and prevents the user from failing to recognize which event has occurred.

(f) is the timing when the half-insertion or breakage of the wiring connecting the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 is resolved. This ends the audio and visual notification of the communication line abnormality error. (g) is the same as (g) in the above-mentioned game machine internal communication abnormality error.

As shown in FIG. 138, the notification modes (e) to (f) are as follows: the frame lighting device 10 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the initial number (123) of the performance pattern 70a and the background image, the third image display device 72 notifies the player of a communication line abnormality error, and the audio output device 9 notifies the player of a communication line abnormality error. In this way, if the communication line abnormality error notification period continues even after the audio notification of the number of game balls has ended, the audio notification of the communication line abnormality error can be started immediately to prompt the player to check the connection status between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170.

As described above, even if the number of game balls is cleared and a communication line abnormality error or a communication no-response error occurs at the same time, both events can be appropriately notified by audio, visual, and electric light alerts, which also leads to improved work efficiency for employees.

If a communication line abnormality is detected between (e) and (g), an audio notification and a visual notification of the communication line abnormality error will be immediately issued. On the other hand, as the visual notification of the clearing of the number of game balls has already been issued, the visual notification corresponding to the communication line abnormality error will not be issued.

In addition, in (e), a new audio notification of a communication line anomaly error is started, but the audio notification of the communication line anomaly error does not have to be started. In addition, the visual notification of the communication line anomaly error is started from (d), but it may be started from (e). In addition, the electric light notification of the number of game balls cleared may be ended in (e), and the electric light notification of the communication line anomaly error may be started.

Figures 139 and 140 are diagrams showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification modes for each event (abnormality). Note that a glass frame opening error, an inner frame opening error, and a ball removal operation in progress are given as examples of each event (abnormality). Also, Figure 139 assumes the case where the number of game balls clear operation is performed and the power is turned on while the glass frame 4 or the inner frame 3 is left open, and the case where the number of game balls clear operation and the ball removal operation are performed and the power is turned on. In terms of how to read the time chart, it is "number of game balls cleared" and "glass frame opening error, inner frame opening error", and "number of game balls cleared" and "ball removal operation in progress".

First, we will explain "Number of game balls cleared" and "Glass frame opening error, inner frame opening error." Note that since both errors are door opening system errors detected by the frame control board 120, we will use the term "glass frame opening error" to explain them, and consider "inner frame opening error" to be interchangeable.

(a) is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned ON. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, the game ball count clear operation is performed.

(b) is the timing when the number of game balls is cleared by the frame control board 120 and the performance control board 130 receives a command to start clearing the number of game balls. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 outputs an audio notification saying "The number of game balls has been cleared," displays an on-screen notification saying "H67 Number of game balls cleared," and causes the frame lighting device 10 to flash red with an electric light notification.

(d) is the timing when frame control board timer interrupt processing is started in the frame control board 120. When frame control board timer interrupt processing is started, the opening of the glass frame 4 or inner frame 3 can be detected in the error control processing performed within the frame control board timer interrupt processing.

(e) is the timing when the opening of the glass frame 4 is detected in the error control process (frame control board minor error notification control process) and the performance control board 130 receives a glass frame opening command. Although the glass frame opening command is received at this timing, the game ball count clear notification is being executed, and the game ball count clear has a higher priority as shown in FIG. 129, so audio and illumination notifications related to the glass frame opening error are not initiated. Meanwhile, as for the screen notification, the third image display device 72 begins to display an icon image such as "H64 Glass frame opening error."

(f) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the electric light notification continue. Also, when the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends, a new audio notification of a glass frame open error starts, "Door is open + siren", and this is output repeatedly.

As shown in FIG. 140, glass frame (inner frame) opening error (e) to (f), the notification modes (e) to (f) are as follows: the sound output device 9 and frame lighting device 10 notify the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the "combination of performance patterns 70a with initial result 123" (including background image). The third image display device 72 displays an icon image of "H64 glass frame opening error" (see FIG. 131 for the display position). The design (color, etc.) of the icon image is the same as the icon image for the number of game balls cleared described above.

In this way, if the game ball count clear operation is performed while the glass frame 4 or the inner frame 3 is open and the power is turned on, a notification of the game ball count clear, which has the highest priority, is made while the third image display device 72 displays the icon image "H64 Glass frame open error." This makes it possible to distinguish between the notifications even if the game ball count clear and the glass frame open error are performed at the same time, preventing the player from failing to recognize which event has occurred.

(g) is the timing 37 seconds have passed since (e). At this timing, the audio notification of the glass frame opening error ends. Meanwhile, the notification on the screen continues. Also, the notification on the screen and the illumination notification that the number of game balls has been cleared continue to be notified.

As shown in FIG. 140, the notification modes (f) to (g) are as follows: the frame lighting device 10 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the initial number (123) of the performance pattern 70a and the background image, the third image display device 72 notifies the player of a glass frame opening error, and the audio output device 9 notifies the player of a glass frame opening error. In this way, if the audio notification of the number of game balls cleared has ended but the player is still in the glass frame opening error notification period, the audio notification of the glass frame opening error is started immediately, so that the player can be made aware that the glass frame 4 has been opened, and it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game with the glass frame 4 open.

(h) is the timing when the glass frame 4 changes from an open state to a closed state. For example, assume that the glass frame 4 is closed by an employee. When the glass frame 4 is closed, the screen notification of the glass frame open error ends. This prevents employees from becoming confused by the icon image "H64 Glass Frame Open Error" not disappearing even though the glass frame 4 is closed.

(j) is the timing when the player operates the counting button 20 to count the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, or when the launch handle 15 is gripped and a game ball is shot out. When either of these operations is performed, the visual and illuminated notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends 30 seconds after the operation. This allows the notification to end without delay after the player takes his seat, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable and avoiding the game due to the visual and illuminated notification that the number of game balls has been cleared continuing for an extended period of time.

As described above, even if both the number of game balls is cleared and a glass frame opening error occurs, both events can be appropriately notified by audio notification, visual notification, and electric light notification, which also leads to improved work efficiency for employees.
In addition, between (b) and (e), that is, during the period when the notification that the number of game balls has been cleared is being made, the game balls are permitted to be shot into the game area, but between (e) and (h), that is, during the period when the notification that the number of game balls has been cleared and the notification of the glass frame or inner frame opening error are being made, the game balls are restricted from being shot into the game area. This makes it possible to prevent the game balls from being shot out and flying out of the game machine, which would result in the game balls required for play not being secured.

If a glass frame opening error is detected between (f) and (j), an audio notification and a visual notification of the glass frame opening error are immediately executed. On the other hand, as the illumination notification for clearing the number of game balls has been executed, the illumination notification corresponding to the glass frame opening error is not executed.

In addition, at (f), a new audio notification of a glass frame opening error is started, but the audio notification of a glass frame opening error does not have to be started. Also, the visual notification of a glass frame opening error is started from (e), but it may be started from (f). Also, the illumination notification of the cleared number of game balls may be ended at (f), and the illumination notification of a glass frame opening error may be started.

Next, the "clear game ball count" and "ball removal operation in progress" will be explained.
(a) is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned on. At this time, the game ball count clear operation and the ball removal operation are performed. (b) is the same as the case of the glass frame opening error described above.

(c) is the timing when the ball removal operation in progress flag is set by the frame control board 120 and the performance control board 130 receives the ball removal operation in progress command. As described above, in the frame control board main processing, the ball count clearing is executed before the ball removal processing, so the timing chart is in the order of (b) and (c) as described above. And in (c), although the ball removal operation in progress command is received, the ball count clearing notification is executed, and the priority order shown in FIG. 129 is also higher for the ball count clearing, so the audio notification and electric light notification related to the ball removal operation are not started. Meanwhile, as for the visual notification, the first image display device 70 starts to display "ball removal mode in progress".

(f) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the electric light notification continue. Also, when the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends, a new audio notification that the ball removal mode is in progress is output, as at the start of (f), "You are in ball removal mode" (once). At the timing (i) when the ball removal mode ends, the audio notification that was in ball removal mode, "You are in ball removal mode" (once), is output.

As shown in (c) to (f) during the ball removal operation in FIG. 140, the sound output device 9 and the frame lighting device 10 notify the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, displays the "combination of the initial result 123 and the performance pattern 70a" (including the background image), and displays "ball removal mode in progress" so as to be superimposed on the "combination of the initial result 123 and the performance pattern 70a".

The "Ball removal mode in progress" display may be superimposed so that part of the "combination of initial numbers 123 and performance patterns 70a" on the back is not visible, or may be superimposed so that part of the "combination of initial numbers 123 and performance patterns 70a" is visible (through the back side).

(i) is the timing when 60 seconds have passed since (c). At this timing, as described above, the voice notification "Ball removal mode has ended" (once) during the ball removal mode is output. In addition, the display of "Ball removal mode in progress" ends. (j) is the same as (j) for the glass frame opening error.

As shown in (f) to (i) during the ball removal operation in FIG. 140, the frame lighting device 10 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the first image display device 70 displays the notification that the number of game balls has been cleared, the "combination of performance patterns 70a of initial results 123" (including the background image), and the "ball removal mode in progress" message superimposed on the "combination of performance patterns 70a of initial results 123". In this way, if the notification period for the ball removal operation is still in progress even after the audio notification of the number of game balls has ended, the audio notification of the ball removal mode can be started immediately to notify the player that the ball removal mode is in progress, and the ball removal mode can be progressed efficiently.

As described above, even if both the game ball count is cleared and the ball removal operation occurs, both events can be appropriately notified by audio, visual, and electric alerts, which also leads to improved work efficiency for employees.

In (f), the audio notification of the ball removal mode is started, but the audio notification of the ball removal mode does not have to be started. Also, the visual notification of the ball removal mode is started from (c), but it may be started from (f). Also, the illumination notification of the cleared number of game balls may be ended at (f), and the illumination notification of the ball removal mode may be started.

Figure 141 shows the relationship between a glass frame (inner frame) open error and the ball removal operation in progress. The situation is assumed to be one in which the glass frame 4 or inner frame 3 is open and the power switch 164 is turned on while the ball removal operation is being performed. Note that the following explanation uses an example in which the glass frame 4 is opened and closed, but glass frame 4 can be read as inner frame 3.

(a) in Figure 141 is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned ON. At this time, the ball removal operation is performed. (b) is the timing when the ball removal operation process of the frame control board timer interrupt process is executed. In the audio notification, the sound "In ball removal mode" is output once for three seconds, and the display begins to display "In ball removal mode". The display of "In ball removal mode" continues until (f). Note that no illumination notification is specified during the ball removal operation (see Figure 130), so it is not executed.

In addition, the game ball count display 135 (the segment corresponding to the last digit) starts to display "-" (a bar pattern), and the frame control display 125 (the segment corresponding to the last digit) starts to display "-" (a bar pattern), and the display of this "-" (a bar pattern) notifies the user that the ball removal operation is in progress.

(c) is the timing when the frame control board timer interrupt process (the first time after the power is turned on) is executed, and (d) is the timing when the glass frame open command is set in the error control process executed within the frame control board timer interrupt process, and the performance control board 130 receives the glass frame open command.

When the performance control board 130 receives the glass frame opening command, it repeatedly outputs the voice "The door is open" as an audio notification, displays an icon image of "H64 Glass frame opening error" on the third image display device 72 as a visual notification, and flashes the frame lighting device 10 red as an electric light notification.

Note that the glass frame opening error has a higher priority than the ball removal operation (see FIG. 130), so in principle the voice output of "In ball removal mode" output from (b) would be interrupted and the voice output of "Door is open" would be started. However, since the voice output of "In ball removal mode" from (b) is output once every three seconds, if it is interrupted midway through the output, it becomes difficult to understand what the voice notification is about. Therefore, in this example, as an exception, even if a notification event with a higher priority than the notification event being executed occurs during the execution of the voice notification, the voice notification being executed, "In ball removal mode", is output (completed) without interruption. This makes it possible to perform a notification that is easy for employees performing the ball removal operation to understand.

On the other hand, in accordance with the principle of priority, it would be acceptable to interrupt the voice output of "You are in ball removal mode" midway and start outputting the voice "The door is open."

In addition, in (d), the display on the frame control display 125 changes from "-" (bar pattern) to "H64" (segment corresponding to the last 3 digits to the last 1 digit). This notifies the employee who is removing the balls while looking at the back side of the gaming machine that a glass frame opening error has occurred.

On the other hand, the ball count display 135 does not switch to "H64" (the segment corresponding to the last three digits to the last digit), but maintains the "-" (bar pattern) display. The ball count display 135 is located in a position visible from the surface of the gaming machine, and since the first image display device 70 also displays "ball removal mode in progress" on the surface of the gaming machine, it is possible to inform the employee that a glass frame opening error has occurred without switching the ball count display 135 to "H64". This has the advantage of reducing the processing load of the display control on the frame control board 120 (saving the trouble of switching to H64).

In addition, in (d), the display on the game ball count display 135 may be switched to "H64." This prevents, for example, employees from being confused by different information being displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135.

(e) is the timing when the glass frame 4 changes from an open state to a closed state. For example, it is assumed that the glass frame 4 is closed by an employee. When the glass frame 4 is closed, the audio notification, visual notification, and illumination notification of the glass frame open error end. It is assumed that the ball removal operation is still in progress at the timing of (e).

In (e), the game ball count display 135 displays "-" (bar pattern), and the frame control display 125 switches from displaying "H64" to displaying "-" (bar pattern). This allows a notification that the ball removal operation is in progress to be made without delay after the glass frame opening error notification has ended, making it possible to provide a notification that is easy for employees to understand.

(f) is the timing when 60 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the ball removal operation ends. In the audio notification, the sound "Ball removal mode has ended" is output once for 5 seconds, and in the visual notification, the display "Ball removal mode in progress" is no longer displayed.

In addition, in (f), the game ball count display 135 stops displaying the "-" (bar pattern) and goes completely dark, and the frame control display 125 stops displaying the "-" (bar pattern) and goes completely dark. This makes it easier for a player who is staring at the back of the game machine while performing the ball removal operation to recognize that the ball removal operation has ended by visually seeing that the frame control display 125 has gone completely dark (along with the audio notification output in (f)).

Then, when the voice output of "Ball removal mode has ended" ends, the ball removal operation ends at (g).
Although the ball removal operation is not indicated by illumination, it may be indicated by a predetermined light emission mode. Also, the "ball removal mode in progress" display is continued between (d) and (e), but the display may be hidden between (d) and (e).

In addition, the game ball count display 135 is always displaying "-" (a bar symbol) between (b) and (f), and the frame control display 125 is always displaying "-" (a bar symbol) between (b) and (d) and (e) and (f), but this is not limited to the above. The game ball count display 135 is always displaying "-" (a bar symbol) between (b) and (d) and (e) and (f), but the game ball count display 135 is always displaying "-" (a bar symbol) between (b) and (d) and (e) and (f), and the game ball count display 125 is always displaying "-" (a bar symbol) between (b) and (d) and (e) and (f), but this is not limited to the above. The game ball count display 135 may always display "-" (a bar symbol) for several seconds after the start of the ball removal mode, and then not display it thereafter.

Figures 142 to 144 are diagrams showing the relationship between the clearing of the number of game balls and the notification modes for each event (abnormality, etc.). Note that the explanation will be given by taking the acquisition limit device (operation) as an example of each event (abnormality). Figure 142 assumes the power being turned on after the acquisition limit device is activated. In other words, the RWM clear operation is required to stop the operation of the acquisition limit device, and the power is turned on together with the acquisition ball count clear operation. Figure 143 assumes the cases where an RWM abnormality (for example, a checksum abnormality in the main RAM 110c) is detected when the power is turned on after the acquisition limit device is activated, and where it is not detected.

Figure 142 (a) shows the timing when the power switch 164 is turned ON. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, the game ball count clear operation is performed.

(b) is the timing when the number of game balls is cleared by the frame control board 120 and the performance control board 130 receives a command to start clearing the number of game balls. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 outputs an audio notification saying "The number of game balls has been cleared," displays an on-screen notification saying "H67 Number of game balls cleared," and causes the frame lighting device 10 to flash red with an electric light notification.

(c) shows the start of the main control board 110 startup, and is the timing when the presentation control board 130 receives the acquisition limit activation command sent by the main control board main processing. Although the presentation control board 130 receives the acquisition limit activation command, it is executing a ball count clear notification, and since the priority order shown in FIG. 129 is also higher for ball count clear, audio and illumination notifications related to the acquisition limit device activation are not initiated. Meanwhile, as for the visual notification, the first image display device 70 starts to display "acquisition limit device activated, please clear RWM."

As shown in FIG. 144's ball count clear & maximum acquisition limit device (b) to (c), the notification modes (b) to (c) are performed by the audio output device 9 and frame lighting device 10 to notify the player that the number of balls has been cleared, and the first image display device 70 to notify the player that the number of balls has been cleared. Note that it is preferable to use a color (a different color) that does not overlap with the display color used for the icon image for the ball count clear notification as the background color of the first image display device 70. This prevents the icon image for the ball count clear notification from becoming difficult to see.

(d) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the illuminated notification continue. In addition, when the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends, a new audio notification from the acquisition limit device starts, stating "acquisition limit device in operation," and this is output repeatedly.

As shown in FIG. 144, the notification modes (c) to (d) are as follows: the sound output device 9 and the frame lighting device 10 notify the number of game balls being cleared, and the first image display device 70 notifies the number of game balls being cleared and the operation of the acquisition upper limit device. Specifically, the message "Acquisition upper limit device in operation, please clear the RWM" is displayed in the center of the display area, and an icon image of "H67 Number of game balls cleared" is displayed in the upper left of the display area. Note that the background color of the first image display device 70 at this time is preferably a color (different color) that does not overlap with the display color used for the icon image of the game balls being cleared and the display color (text color) used for the acquisition upper limit device operation notification. This prevents the icon image of the game balls being cleared and the acquisition upper limit device operation notification from becoming difficult to see.

(e) is the timing 30 seconds have passed since (c). At this timing, the audio notification from the acquisition limit device ends. Meanwhile, the display notification continues. Note that although the audio notification from the acquisition limit device ends after a predetermined time has passed, it may also end when the power supply is cut off.

As shown in Figure 144, the notification modes of (d) to (e) are as follows: the frame lighting device 10 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, the audio output device 9 notifies the player that the upper limit device is in operation, and the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and that the upper limit device is in operation. The display modes are the same as those of (c) to (d) described above.

Thus, although the ball count clear notification has a higher priority, the message "Maximum acquisition limit device in operation, please clear RWM" is displayed in a larger font size than the ball count clear icon image and in the center of the display area, making it easy for employees to see. This allows employees to fully recognize that the maximum acquisition limit device is in operation even in a situation where the ball count clear notification has priority and the audio and light notifications of the maximum acquisition limit device cannot be executed, making it easier for employees to understand the operations required to stop the operation of the maximum acquisition limit device. Also, since both notifications can be distinguished even if the ball count clear and the notification that the maximum acquisition limit device is in operation are executed at the same time, it is possible to prevent situations where employees are unable to recognize that either event is occurring.

When the earning limit device is in operation and the power switch 164 is turned ON without operating the RWM clear switch 111a (when the power is restored), the message "Earning limit device in operation, please clear RWM" is displayed, but the initial operation of the movable presentation device may be performed in the same way as when the power is restored with the earning limit device not in operation. This simplifies the control process because the processing related to the initial operation of the movable presentation device does not need to be changed depending on whether the earning limit device is in operation or not.

In addition, when the earning limit device is in operation and the power switch 164 is turned ON without operating the RWM clear switch 111a (when the power is restored), a message is displayed saying "Earning limit device in operation, please clear RWM." However, an audio notification regarding power restoration (output of input BGM) may also be given. This simplifies the control process because the processing related to the audio notification regarding power restoration does not need to be changed depending on whether the earning limit device is in operation or not.

(h) is the timing when the player operates the counting button 20 to count the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, or when the launch handle 15 is gripped and a game ball is shot out. When either of these operations is performed, the visual and illuminated notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends 30 seconds after the operation. This allows the notification to end without delay after the player takes his seat, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable and avoiding the game due to the visual and illuminated notification that the number of game balls has been cleared continuing for an extended period of time.

(a) in FIG. 143 is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned on. If there is no RWM abnormality, the notification of the acquisition upper limit device operation is started in (b). Specifically, the audio notification "acquisition upper limit device in operation" is repeatedly output, the screen notification displays "acquisition upper limit device in operation, please clear RWM", and the electric notification "frame lighting device 10 flashes red". As the notification mode, as shown in FIG. 144 "acquisition upper limit device in operation, no RWM abnormality", the audio output device 9, frame lighting device 10, and first image display device 70 will notify the acquisition upper limit device operation. In this way, if no RWM abnormality (for example, a checksum abnormality of the main RAM 110c) is detected when the power is turned on after the acquisition upper limit device is activated, the notification of the acquisition upper limit device operation will be executed, making it easier to understand the operation required to stop the acquisition upper limit device operation.

On the other hand, if an RWM abnormality (e.g., a checksum abnormality in the main RAM 110c) is detected when the power is turned on after the acquisition limit device is activated, the acquisition limit device activation notification is not initiated in (b) but an RWM abnormality notification is initiated. Specifically, the audio notification "Please change the settings + siren" is repeatedly output, the visual notification displays "Error Please change the settings", and the electric notification "Frame lighting device 10 flashes red". Note that (c) is the timing when the power supply is cut off, and the RWM abnormality notification will continue until the power supply is cut off. In other words, the acquisition limit device activation notification will not be executed as long as the RWM abnormality notification is being executed.

For example, even if the power is turned off in (c) and then turned on without changing the settings, the RWM abnormality notification is started in (b), and if the power is turned off in (c) and then turned on with a setting change operation, the RMW clear process is also executed after the setting change process (the main RAM 110c is initialized), so the operation of the acquisition limit device is also stopped by the initialization of the main RAM 110c, and in this case, the acquisition limit device operation notification is not executed. In other words, if an RWM abnormality occurs after the acquisition limit device is activated, the acquisition limit device operation notification is not executed even if the power is turned on with a setting change operation or without a setting change operation. This encourages the main RAM 110c to be in an appropriate state, but since initialization to stop the acquisition limit device is not necessary when the power is turned on with a setting change operation, the operation efficiency can be improved by not notifying the acquisition limit device.

As shown in Figure 144, when the maximum win device is operating and there is an RWM abnormality, the notification of an RWM abnormality is made by the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, and the first image display device 70. The first image display device 70 displays "Error" in red letters on a black background, and below that in white letters "Please change the settings." This makes it possible to promptly change the settings, and prevents play from being played while there is an abnormality in the RWM.

In addition, if priority is given to the notification of the operation of the acquisition limit device when there is an RWM abnormality, there is a concern that the necessary operation that the employee is prompted to perform will be the RWM clear operation, and the RWM abnormality will not be resolved; however, by prioritizing the RWM abnormality notification, such concerns can be eliminated.

Figures 145 and 146 are diagrams showing the relationship between the clearing of the number of game balls and the notification modes for each event (abnormality, etc.). Note that an abnormal number of winning balls error and an abnormal number of shot balls error are given as examples of each event (abnormality). Also, Figure 145 assumes the case where an abnormal number of winning balls is detected when the number of game balls is cleared and the power is turned on, and the case where an abnormal number of shot balls is detected when the number of game balls is cleared and the power is turned on, and the time chart can be read as "clearing the number of game balls" and "abnormal number of winning balls error", and "clearing the number of game balls" and "abnormal number of shot balls error".

Note that an abnormality in the number of winning balls is determined to be an abnormality when the difference between the number of winning balls reported and the number of balls passing through the winning passage is equal to or greater than a specified number (100), as indicated by the frame control board severe error notification control process, and an abnormality in the number of shot balls is determined to be an abnormality when the difference between the number of shot balls and the total number of returned balls is equal to or greater than a specified number (100), as indicated by the frame control board severe error notification control process, so it is difficult to imagine that such an abnormality would occur shortly after power was supplied. Therefore, Figures 145 and 146 assume a situation in which the power supply is cut off when an abnormality in the number of winning balls or the number of shot balls has occurred, and the power is turned on without these abnormalities being resolved.

First, we will explain "clearing the number of game balls" and "winning ball number abnormality error."
(a) is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned on. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, the number of game balls is cleared.

(b) is the timing when the number of game balls is cleared by the frame control board 120 and the performance control board 130 receives a command to start clearing the number of game balls. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 outputs an audio notification saying "The number of game balls has been cleared," displays an on-screen notification saying "H67 Number of game balls cleared," and causes the frame lighting device 10 to flash red with an electric light notification.

(c) is the timing when the frame control board error control process is executed, an abnormality in the number of winning balls is detected, and the presentation control board 130 receives a command to designate an abnormality in the number of winning balls. Although the presentation control board 130 receives the command to designate an abnormality in the number of winning balls, it is executing a game ball count clear notification, and since the priority order shown in FIG. 129 also gives priority to clearing the number of game balls, audio notification and electric light notification related to the abnormality in the number of winning balls are not initiated. Meanwhile, as for the visual notification, the third image display device 72 begins to display "H68 Abnormality in the number of winning balls".

(d) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the electric light notification continue. In addition, when the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends, a new audio notification of an abnormal error in the number of winning balls starts, "Please call an attendant + siren", and this is output repeatedly.

As shown in Figure 146, the notification modes (c) to (d) are as follows: the sound output device 9 and the frame lighting device 10 notify the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the "combination of the performance pattern 70a with the initial result of 123" (including the background image). The third image display device 72 displays an icon image of "H68 Abnormal number of winning balls."

(e) is the timing when the player operates the counting button 20 to count the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, or when the launch handle 15 is gripped and a game ball is shot out. When either of these operations is performed, the visual and illuminated notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends 30 seconds after the operation. This allows the notification to end without delay after the player takes his seat, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable and avoiding the game due to the visual and illuminated notification that the number of game balls has been cleared continuing for an extended period of time.

As shown in Figure 146, the notification modes (d) to (e) are as follows: the sound output device 9 and the frame lighting device 10 notify the player of an abnormal winning ball count error, and the first image display device 70 notifies the player of the cleared number of game balls and displays the "combination of the performance pattern 70a with the initial result of 123" (including the background image). The third image display device 72 displays an icon image of "H68 abnormal winning ball count" (see Figure 131 for the display position). The design (color, etc.) of the icon image is the same as the icon image for the cleared number of game balls described above.

In this way, if an abnormality in the number of winning balls is detected when the game ball count is cleared and the power is turned on, a notification of the game ball count clear, which has the higher priority, is made, while the third image display device 72 displays an icon image of "H68 Abnormal number of winning balls." This makes it possible to distinguish between the notifications even if the game ball count clear and the abnormal number of winning balls error are executed at the same time, preventing the user from failing to recognize which event has occurred.

As described above, even if both the game ball count clear and the winning ball count abnormal error occur, both events can be appropriately notified by audio, visual, and electric light alerts, which also leads to improved work efficiency for employees.

Note that in (d), a new audio notification of an abnormal number of winning balls error is started, but the audio notification of an abnormal number of winning balls error does not have to be started. Also, the visual notification of an abnormal number of winning balls error is started from (c), but it may start from (d). Also, the electric light notification of the cleared number of playing balls may be ended in (d), and the electric light notification of an abnormal number of winning balls error may be started.

Next, we will explain "clearing the number of game balls" and "abnormal number of fired balls error."
(a) is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned on. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, the number of game balls is cleared. (b) is the same as (b) of the winning ball number abnormality error.

(c) is the timing when the frame control board error control process is executed, an abnormality in the number of balls fired is detected, and the performance control board 130 receives a command to designate an abnormality in the number of balls fired. Although the performance control board 130 receives the command to designate an abnormality in the number of balls fired, it is executing a notification of the clearing of the number of game balls, and since the priority order shown in FIG. 129 also gives priority to clearing the number of game balls, audio and electric light notifications related to the abnormality in the number of balls fired error are not initiated. Meanwhile, as for the visual notification, a display such as "H69 Abnormal number of balls fired" is initiated on the third image display device 72.

(d) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the electric light notification continue. Also, when the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends, a new audio notification of an abnormal error in the number of released balls starts, "Please call an attendant + siren", and this is output repeatedly.

As shown in Figure 146, the notification modes (c) to (d) are as follows: the sound output device 9 and the frame lighting device 10 notify the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the "combination of the performance pattern 70a with the initial result of 123" (including the background image). The third image display device 72 displays an icon image of "H69 Abnormal number of game balls fired."

(e) is the same as (e) of an abnormal error in the number of winning balls.
As shown in Fig. 146, the notification modes (d) to (e) are as follows: the sound output device 9 and the frame lighting device 10 notify the user of the abnormal error in the number of shot balls, and the first image display device 70 notifies the user of the cleared number of game balls and displays the "combination of the performance pattern 70a with the initial result of 123" (including the background image). The third image display device 72 displays an icon image of "H69 Abnormal Number of Shot Balls" (see Fig. 131 for the display position). The design (color, etc.) of the icon image is the same as the icon image of the cleared number of game balls described above.

In this way, if an abnormality in the number of balls fired is detected when the game ball count clear operation is performed and the power is turned on, a notification of clearing the number of game balls, which has the higher priority, is made, while the third image display device 72 displays an icon image of "H69 Abnormal number of balls fired." This makes it possible to distinguish between the notifications even if the game ball count clear and the abnormal number of balls fired error are performed at the same time, preventing the user from failing to recognize which event has occurred.

As described above, even if both the number of game balls cleared and an abnormal number of balls fired error occur, both events can be appropriately notified by audio, visual, and electric alerts, which also leads to improved work efficiency for employees.

In addition, in (d), a new audio notification of an abnormal number of balls fired error is started, but the audio notification of an abnormal number of balls fired error does not have to be started. Also, although the visual notification of an abnormal number of balls fired error is decided to start from (c), it may start from (d). Also, the electric light notification of the cleared number of game balls may end in (d) and an electric light notification of an abnormal number of balls fired error may start.

Figure 147 shows the information output and notification of various events. Note that as examples of each event (abnormality), the number of game balls exceeded and the activation of the acquisition limit device will be given.

(a) is the timing (during a jackpot) when the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 reaches "40,000" as a result of the player's play. Note that, although it is said here that the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 reaches "40,000" as a result of the player's play, since this is the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135, the "40,000" may also include the game value obtained by loaning game balls.

In (a), one byte of information is sent from the frame control board 120 to the U board 171, indicating that the number of game balls has exceeded the limit as a gaming machine error state, and is ultimately sent to the gaming machine information center. In addition, the frame control display 125 displays the error code "H23", indicating that the number of game balls has exceeded the limit. This makes it possible to confirm from the back side of the gaming machine that the number of game balls has exceeded the limit. The error code display goes out after a predetermined time has elapsed.

In (a), as an example, the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 during a jackpot reaches "40,000 balls", so that the sound output device 9 outputs BGM during a jackpot, the first image display device 70 displays a jackpot performance, and the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 emit light during a jackpot. Even if the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 during a jackpot reaches "40,000 balls", these performance means do not notify the player that the number of game balls has been exceeded. In other words, from the player's perspective, the player cannot recognize that the number of game balls has been exceeded, and the player can enjoy playing the jackpot. On the other hand, as described above, one byte of information indicating the number of game balls exceeded is transmitted as a gaming machine error state, so that the administrator (game parlor, gaming machine information center) can grasp the necessary information.

In addition, the exceeding of the number of game balls may be notified by using at least one of the sound output device 9, the first image display device 70, the third image display device 72, the fourth image display device 73, the frame lighting device 10, and the board lighting device 76. Also, as an example, a case where the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 during a jackpot reaches "40,000 balls" is given, but this is not limited to this, and a winning may be a winning when a variable display is being performed in each of the low probability non-time-saving game states, low probability time-saving game states, and high probability time-saving game states, or a winning may be a winning when a customer waiting demo performance is being performed.

In addition, it was mentioned that the "40,000" may include game value obtained by lending out game balls, but even if the entire "40,000" is game value obtained by lending out, it may still be considered an excess over the number of game balls.

(b) is the timing when the maximum increase reaches "95,000" (during a jackpot). Note that this "95,000" does not include the gaming value obtained by lending out gaming balls. When the maximum increase reaches "95,000", the acquisition limit device is activated. Note that the timing of the acquisition limit device's activation for each situation when "95,000" is reached (during a jackpot, during a variable display, during a customer waiting demo performance) is as described above (see the explanation of step S28 of the main control board main processing).

When the winning limit device is activated, the audio notification is that the audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the sound "Winning limit device activated" (for 10 seconds), the visual notification is that the first image display device 70 displays "Winning limit device activated, play ends for today" (displayed until power is turned off), and the illuminated notification is that the frame lighting device 10 flashes white (flashes white until power is turned off). On the other hand, the frame control display 125 does not provide any notification corresponding to the activation of the winning limit device, and remains hidden.

The display mode of the first image display device 70 will be described in detail below. The message "Earning limit device in operation, play has ended for today" is displayed above the display area, and below that, a message such as "Please press the count button to count" is displayed to encourage the player to operate the count button 20. This allows the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 to be recorded on the inserted member card or visitor card, reducing the number of situations in which the player ends up losing money by stopping play without operating the count button 20.

In addition, below the display saying "Press the count button to count," caution promotion images saying "Watch out, don't get addicted!" and "Watch out, don't forget to take your card!" are displayed. "Watch out, don't get addicted!" is a display encouraging players to avoid excessive playing, while "Watch out, don't forget to take your card!" is a display encouraging players to avoid forgetting to take their inserted membership card or visitor card. The display of a caution promotion image like "Watch out, don't get addicted!" can calm players down when they have gained a lot of gaming value and are feeling excited. In addition, the display of a caution promotion image like "Watch out, don't forget to take your card!" can reduce the number of situations where a player forgets to take their card and ends up losing money. This helps to prevent a decline in interest in playing.

The message "Please press the count button to count" may remain displayed until the count button 20 is operated (and become hidden once the count button 20 is operated). This makes it easier for the user to notice that the count button 20 has not been operated.
In addition, if the counting button 20 is operated and then not operated, and there are still game balls to be counted in that state, a message such as "Please press the counting button to count" may be displayed again. This makes it easier for the player to notice that there are still game balls to be counted.
In addition, the display such as "Please press the count button to count" may be continued until all counting is completed (the display may not be made invisible even if the count button 20 is operated).

The background color of the first image display device 70 may be black, for example, with the various text images displayed in white, or the background color may be white with the various text images displayed in black (the background color and text color are different colors). However, when the acquisition limit device is activated, the audio notification ends in 10 seconds, the screen notification is displayed in a relatively small size, and the electric notification is only the frame lighting device 10 flashing white, so it is preferable to use a combination of white and black for the background color and text color. Such notifications with a limited amount of presentation can prevent players who are likely to have acquired a lot of game value from standing out too much. They can also prevent the player's motivation to play from being stimulated more than necessary.

The various text images may all be displayed at the same time, or may be displayed at different times. For example, first it may display "Earning limit device in operation, play ends for today" and "Press the counting button to count", followed by "Be careful not to get addicted!" and "Be careful not to forget to take your cards!". Arranging the display in this way makes it more effective, as each piece of information is more easily seen by the player.

Also, first, it is possible to display "Earning limit device in operation, today's game has ended" and "Please press the counting button to count", and when the counting button 20 is operated, "Please press the counting button to count" is hidden and "Be careful not to get addicted!" and "Be careful not to forget to take your cards!" are displayed. This makes it possible to display information in accordance with the player's operation, and makes it more effective as each piece of information is more easily noticeable to the player.

In addition, in (a), a message such as "Please press the counting button to count" may be displayed, or a warning image such as "Be careful not to get addicted!" and a warning image such as "Be careful not to forget to take your card!" may be displayed.
Also, in (b), it is possible to prevent the display of messages such as "Press the count button to count" and caution images such as "Be careful not to get addicted!" and "Be careful not to forget to take your cards!". For example, it is possible that the player may change just before reaching (b). In such a case, the display of caution images and the like may be annoying to a player who started playing just before reaching (b). Therefore, it is possible to provide a detection means for detecting a change in player, etc., and prevent the display of caution images and the like when a change in player is detected.

Although not shown in the figure, when the winning limit device is activated, a message such as "Do not turn off the power" is displayed for a predetermined time (e.g., 5 minutes) after the notification starts (e.g., from timing (b) in FIG. 147). After the predetermined time has elapsed, the message "Do not turn off the power" is ended and a message such as "Please turn off the power" is displayed. This makes it possible to inform players and employees that the winning limit device has been activated before the predetermined time has elapsed, and to have them perform necessary operations such as counting. On the other hand, after the predetermined time has elapsed, it is possible to prompt employees to turn off the power of the gaming machine 1, so that an appropriate message can be issued according to the situation. The predetermined time is the expected time until the player finishes counting and leaves the seat. In addition, the message "Do not turn off the power" or the message "Please turn off the power" may be accompanied by a sound. In this case, the sound may be output repeatedly.

Figure 148 is a diagram showing the information output and notification modes for various events. As with Figure 147, an example of each event (abnormality) will be described as exceeding the number of game balls and activation of the maximum acquisition device. Figure 148 is a diagram explaining an exceptional case in which exceeding the number of game balls and activation of the maximum acquisition device occur at the same time.

In (a), gaming machine 1 is in a playable state (a so-called "empty machine"), and the maximum increase in the number of coins for that gaming machine 1 is "55,000." In (b), a player sits down to play that gaming machine 1. Furthermore, suppose that the player immediately wins a jackpot.

After that, in (c), successive jackpots occur due to the high probability time-saving game state (probability change), and in (d), the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 becomes "40,000 balls" (the player has won 40,000 balls). In such a case, the number of game balls is subject to exceed, and since the maximum increase also reaches "95,000", the acquisition limit device is subject to activation. Therefore, one byte of information indicating the number of game balls exceeded as a game machine error state is transmitted from the frame control board 120 of the game machine 1 to the U board 171, and one byte of information indicating that Bit 6 of the fraud detection state 1 is "1" is transmitted. Then, finally, it is transmitted to the game machine information center.

It should be noted that either the 1-byte information indicating that the gaming machine has exceeded the number of game balls as an error state, or the 1-byte information indicating that Bit 6 of the fraud detection state 1 is "1", can be sent first, but it is rare for the number of game balls to exceed and the acquisition limit device to be activated at the same time. Basically, the number of game balls exceeds the number, and depending on the situation after that, the acquisition limit device will be activated. Therefore, it is preferable to basically follow the flow and send the 1-byte information indicating that the number of game balls exceeds the number as an error state of the gaming machine first, and then send the 1-byte information indicating that Bit 6 of the fraud detection state 1 is "1". This makes it possible to prevent confusion, for example, caused by the gaming machine information center receiving the 1-byte information indicating that Bit 6 of the fraud detection state 1 is "1" first.

Note that in Fig. 148, numbers such as "55,000", "40,000", and "95,000" are used for ease of explanation, but in actual play, due to differences in the number of winning balls for each winning slot, the numbers may slightly exceed the above numbers, and the number of game balls may exceed the limit and the winning limit device may be activated at the same time. Therefore, some error (an error slightly exceeding the above numbers) is included in the example in Fig. 148.

Figure 149 shows the effects that occur when various events occur, and Figure 150 shows the relationship between the value of the increment counter and the look-ahead effects. As with Figures 147 and 148, we will explain the exceeding of the number of game balls and the activation of the acquisition limit device as examples of each event (abnormality), and will particularly explain the relationship with the look-ahead effects. We will omit explanations of parts that are common to Figures 147 and 148.

First, as described above, the gaming machine 1 is assumed to have a state immediately before the "number of game balls exceeded" and a state immediately before the "acquisition limit device" is activated. The state immediately before the "number of game balls exceeded" corresponds to a state in which the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 reaches "39,000," and the state immediately before the "acquisition limit device" is activated corresponds to a state in which the maximum increase reaches "94,000."

More specifically, if the number of game balls is "over," the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 will be "39,000" and the second jackpot game (10 rounds) will be executed; that is, the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 will reach "40,000" as a result of the second jackpot game being executed; or the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 will be "39,990" and a high-probability time-saving game state (low-probability time-saving game state or low-probability non-time-saving game state) in which game balls are more likely to enter each winning slot will start (during the variable display or customer waiting demo performance).

Similarly, in the case of a "capture limit device," cases such as the maximum increase being "94,000" and the second jackpot game (10 rounds) being played, i.e. the second jackpot game being played and the maximum increase reaching "95,000," or the maximum increase being "94,990" and a high-probability time-saving game state (low-probability time-saving game state, low-probability non-time-saving game state) in which game balls are more likely to enter each winning slot can be assumed (during the variable display, during the customer waiting demo performance). Note that the following explanation will be given using as an example a jackpot, when it is expected that the maximum increase is most likely to reach the above value.

(a) shows a jackpot win in a high-probability time-saving game state, and during the jackpot, a right-hit image is displayed to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the right-side game area. This is the timing when the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 becomes "40,000 balls" due to winning the big prize slot 50 or the like during the jackpot. In other words, this is a situation in which the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 becomes "40,000 balls" due to the execution of the second jackpot game. Although not shown in particular, it is assumed that a random number value for jackpot determination, which is determined to be a jackpot, is stored in the second special chart determination information reserve memory area of the main RAM 110c. The high-probability time-saving game state may be read as a low-probability time-saving game state. The high-probability time-saving game state may be read as a low-probability non-time-saving game state. In this case (when interpreted as a low probability non-time-saving game state), a random number value for determining a jackpot that is determined to be a jackpot is stored in the first special chart determination information reserve memory area of the main RAM 110c.

In the case of "over number of game balls", it is possible to execute a reserved consecutive win effect during a jackpot. That is, since a random number value for jackpot determination that is determined to be a jackpot is stored in the second special chart determination information reserved memory area of the main RAM 110c, a lottery is held to determine whether a reserved consecutive win effect will be executed with a predetermined probability, and if it is determined that the reserved consecutive win effect should be executed, the reserved consecutive win effect is executed. Specifically, as shown in (b), the movable effect device 77 (first movable member 77a and second movable member 77b) is operated in front of the first image display device 70, and the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory executed after the jackpot game ends notifies the player that it is a jackpot prior to the execution of the variable display. Then, in (c), the jackpot game ends, and the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory is executed to notify the player that it is a jackpot.

This means that there is no need to restrict the execution of predictive effects just because the number of game balls is about to be exceeded, and interest in the game can be maintained without restricting the freedom of the effects.

Although the execution of the reserved consecutive win effect during a jackpot has been described as an example, the execution of a look-ahead effect when there is no jackpot game may also be permitted. For example, when the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 is "39990", an icon change effect may be executed, or a continuous preview effect or a lamp change effect may be executed. On the other hand, the execution of a look-ahead effect may be restricted in a situation just before the "game ball count exceeds the limit".

(d) is the timing when a jackpot is won in the high-probability time-saving game state, the maximum increase number is "94,000", and the second jackpot game (10 rounds) begins. In other words, the second jackpot game is executed, and the maximum increase number reaches "95,000". Although not shown in the figure, it is assumed that a random number value for jackpot determination that is determined to be a jackpot is stored in the second special pattern determination information reserve memory area of the main RAM 110c. The high-probability time-saving game state may be read as a low-probability time-saving game state. The high-probability time-saving game state may be read as a low-probability non-time-saving game state. In this case (when reading as a low-probability non-time-saving game state), it is assumed that a random number value for jackpot determination that is determined to be a jackpot is stored in the first special pattern determination information reserve memory area of the main RAM 110c.

In the case of "winning limit device operation", the execution of the reserved consecutive win effect during the jackpot is limited. That is, although a random number value for jackpot determination that is determined to be a jackpot is stored in the second special chart determination information reserved memory area of the main RAM 110c, a lottery for the execution of the reserved consecutive win effect is not performed, and naturally the reserved consecutive win effect is not executed. Specifically, as shown between (d) and (e), the jackpot game ends without the movable effect device 77 (first movable member 77a and second movable member 77b) operating. Then, when the jackpot game ends, the winning limit device is activated at (f) and the notification described in FIG. 147 is executed. Also, the progress of the game (specific control processing) is not controlled, and the game cannot be continued any further.

(f) In a situation where it is impossible to play after that, if the reserved consecutive win effect is executed just because the random number value for determining a jackpot is stored in the reserved memory, the player will be disappointed that he or she cannot play even though he or she has won a jackpot. To address this issue, the execution of the reserved consecutive win effect can be restricted if the situation is immediately before the operation of the "winning limit device," thereby preventing the player from feeling disappointed.

Although the execution of the reserved consecutive win effect during a jackpot has been explained as an example, the execution of look-ahead effects when there is no jackpot may also be restricted. For example, when the maximum increase value is "94990", the icon change effect may be restricted, and the continuous preview effect and the lamp change effect may be restricted. On the other hand, the execution of look-ahead effects may be permitted even in a situation just before the "acquisition upper limit device is activated". This eliminates the need to determine whether the situation is just before the "acquisition upper limit device is activated", which is expected to reduce the control load.

The "restrictions" in the above-mentioned restriction on the execution of the reserved consecutive win effect during a jackpot include the following:
For example, the execution of the reserved consecutive performance during the big win is not performed at all (not executed),
For example, it becomes difficult to execute the reserved consecutive win performance during the jackpot (it may be executed with a low probability),
For example, in the case where there are multiple types of reserved consecutive win effects during a big win, reserved consecutive win effect A will not be executed, but reserved consecutive win effect B can be executed.
For example, when realizing the effect of consecutive reserved jackpots during a jackpot by operating the movable effect device 77 and changing the reserved icon, the movable effect device 77 may not be operated but the reserved icon may be allowed to change.

Similarly, the "restriction" in the restriction on the execution of pre-reading effects when a jackpot game is not being played includes the following:
For example, if the icon changes,
For example, icon change effects may not be performed at all (not executed),
For example, it may be difficult to execute an icon change effect (it may be executed with a low probability).
For example, certain icons (red icon, rainbow icon) in the icon change presentation may not be displayed (changed), but certain icons (blue icon, green icon) may be displayed (changed).
The same applies to restrictions on consecutive preview effects and lamp change effects. In a look-ahead type effect (e.g., an icon change effect, consecutive preview effects, lamp change effects), for example, the icon change effect may not be performed (executed) at all, but the consecutive preview effects and lamp change effects may be executed as a "restriction."

Figure 150 is a time chart showing the relationship between the value of the increment counter and the look-ahead type effects, and in particular, is a diagram explaining the relationship between the value of the increment counter and the effect custom setting (icon change super hot). Note that in the figure, the effect custom setting is always "enabled", indicating that the icon change super hot has been set to "ON" or "OFF" by the player. Also, the gaming state is assumed to be a high probability time-saving gaming state. Note that the interpretation of the restrictions is the same as that described in Figure 149.

In (a), the value of the increment counter is less than "93,000." In other words, this indicates that it is a period in which a look-ahead type effect can be executed. It also indicates that the player has set "Icon Change Hot" to "ON" in the effect custom settings.

(b) shows that a game ball has entered the second start hole 47 (start winning), and the preliminary judgment process (e.g., second preliminary judgment process) has determined that a jackpot has been reached. At this time, a red icon (shown by a black circle in the figure) is displayed in the area corresponding to reserve 2 in the second reserve icon display area 70D (the second area from the left in the second reserve icon display area 70D). In other words, because the preliminary judgment process has determined that a jackpot has been reached due to the start winning, and the icon change super hot is set to "ON", the red icon (shown by a black circle in the figure) is displayed, and the player can recognize that the start winning is highly likely to be a jackpot.

After that, the high probability time-saving game state continues, and at timing (c) the value of the increment counter reaches "93000". In other words, this indicates that it is a period during which pre-reading effects cannot be executed. At this timing, "Icon Change Hot" continues to be "ON". It also indicates that "Icon Change Hot" is turned OFF at timing (d) and "Icon Change Hot" is turned "ON" at timing (e). Even if the value of the increment counter reaches "93000" and it becomes a period during which pre-reading effects cannot be executed, it is possible to set "ON" or "OFF" in the effect custom settings.

Then, the "icon change super hot" remains "ON" until timing (f), which indicates that the game ball has entered the second start hole 47 (start entry) and that the pre-determination process (e.g., the second pre-determination process) has determined that the jackpot has been won. At this time, the normal icon (shown by a white circle in the figure) is displayed in the area corresponding to reserve 2 in the second reserve icon display area 70D (the second area from the left in the second reserve icon display area 70D). As explained in the look-ahead performance process, if the look-ahead performance is not executable during the period, the look-ahead performance determination process is not performed, and therefore the normal icon is uniformly determined and displayed in (f). In other words, when the value of the increment counter is equal to "93000", it can be said that there is a restriction on the display of icons other than the normal icon (e.g., a red icon).

When the icon change heat is turned "ON" and, for example, a red icon (high possibility of a jackpot) is displayed, the anticipation of a jackpot rises all at once, but if the win limit device is activated before the variable effect corresponding to the red icon is executed, the player may feel that he or she has lost an entire jackpot, which may cause a decrease in interest in the game. In response to this, by restricting the display of icons other than normal icons (for example, red icons) when the value of the increment counter reaches "93,000," it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing without feeling the emotions described above.

In addition, even if the value of the increment counter reaches "93,000," the custom effect settings are set to "allowed." This prevents players from feeling that their freedom in effect has been restricted, and prevents a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, even if the value of the increment counter reaches "93,000," it is possible to turn on "Extreme Icon Change." However, the reflections that correspond to this "ON" (displaying icons other than normal icons due to the icon change effect) are limited. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game without making the player feel that the freedom of the effects has been restricted. Also, there is no need to change the processing in the effect customization settings depending on the value of the increment counter, which simplifies the control flow and reduces the burden of control processing.

Note that even if the value of the increment counter reaches "93000", the effect custom setting is "allowed (ON)" and the reflection corresponding to this "ON" (displaying icons other than normal icons due to the icon change effect) is restricted. However, the object of the restriction is a look-ahead effect (for example, an icon change that is extremely hot), and the above-mentioned "gold hot mode" and "air blowing effect" may be allowed to be reflected corresponding to the "ON" setting. In other words, even if the value of the increment counter reaches "93000", for example, an SU notice (gold) may occur or an air blowing effect may occur. This makes it possible to prevent a situation where the effect custom setting is not uniformly reflected even if it is set to "ON" (some effects may be reflected), and it is possible to maintain interest in the game without narrowing the range of effects.

Figure 151 is a time chart showing how the value of the increment counter is notified. It is assumed that the gaming machine is vacant (no one is playing) when the value of the increment counter is "89900". The gaming state at this time is a low probability non-time-saving gaming state. It is also assumed that a new player has started playing from timing (a).

When a new player starts playing at timing (a), the game enters a low-probability non-time-saving game state, and the value of the increment counter decreases from "89,900". Then, at timing (b) when the increment counter has decreased to "89,000", it is considered that a jackpot has been won. At this time, the first image display device 70 notifies the player that there has been a jackpot, but the value of the increment counter is not notified on the third image display device 72.

When the number of winning balls increases as a result of playing a jackpot, the value of the increment counter increases from "89000", and at timing (c) the value of the increment counter becomes "90000". At this time, the value of the increment counter is displayed as "90000/95000" on the third image display device 72. A pre-notification such as "5000 remaining until the acquisition upper limit device is activated" is also displayed. The displayed increment counter value and pre-notification are subsequently updated and displayed according to the increment counter value. For example, if the game subsequently transitions to a high probability time-saving game state and a jackpot is won, "90000/95000" is updated by adding "90000" (e.g., "91500/95000"), and "5000 remaining until the acquisition upper limit device is activated" is updated by subtracting "5000" (e.g., "3500 remaining until the acquisition upper limit device is activated").

And, timing (d) indicates the fifth consecutive jackpot (if (b) is considered the first jackpot, then the fifth jackpot) that was won in the high-probability time-saving game state after the jackpot at timing (b) ended and the transition to the high-probability time-saving game state occurred. At timing (d), the value of the increment counter is "94200". The jackpot won at timing (d) is the second jackpot (10 rounds).

At timing (e), the game ball enters the big winning slot 50 during a big win game, and as a result, the value of the increment counter reaches "95000" in the sixth round of the big win game. At this time, the value of the increment counter displayed on the third image display device 72 becomes "MAX/95000" (displayed in a specific manner), and the advance notification is hidden. Then, once the display of the value of the increment counter becomes "MAX/95000" (displayed in a specific manner), it will no longer be updated even if a win or the like occurs, and will maintain the display of "MAX/95000" (displayed in a specific manner). As an example, "MAX" is displayed decorated in "rainbow colors."

When the value of the increment counter reaches "95000", the increment counter is displayed as "MAX/95000" (displayed in a specific manner) because the jackpot game can be played to the end even if the increment counter value reaches "95000". In other words, if the increment counter reaches "95000" during a jackpot game, the jackpot game can be played to the end. However, if this is done, the increment counter value display (numerator value) will also be updated and displayed until the jackpot game ends. In such a case, even though the standard (95000) for activating the winning limit device is set, this will appear ambiguous. Therefore, when the increment counter value reaches "95000", the increment counter value is displayed as "MAX/95000" (displayed in a specific manner) and will not be updated thereafter. In other words, even during a jackpot game, if the win limit device is activated immediately when the increment counter reaches 95,000, such considerations are no longer necessary.

On the other hand, the first image display device 70 displays information necessary for continuing the game, such as "Right Hit", "6R" indicating that the current round is the sixth round of the big win game, "Game Media Acquisition Display (e.g., 800/1500)" which notifies the acquisition status of game media in one big win game, and "Cumulative Game Media Acquisition Display (e.g., 6800)" which notifies the cumulative acquisition status of game media in consecutive big win games (the fifth in this example). The "Game Media Acquisition Display" and "Cumulative Game Media Acquisition Display" can also be updated in real time according to winning (however, unlike the display of the value of the increment counter, the display is not subtracted). For example, if one win is made in the big win slot 50, "15" is added to these displays. These displays can also be updated if there are further wins even after the value of the increment counter reaches "95000". In other words, once the displayed increment counter value reaches "95,000", it will not be updated even if a win occurs, but the "Game Media Acquisition Display" and "Cumulative Game Media Acquisition Display" will be updated if a win occurs even after the increment counter value reaches "95,000".

The above configuration provides the following advantages.
First, when the displayed value of the increment counter reaches "95,000", it will not be updated even if a win or the like occurs thereafter. However, the "Game Media Acquisition Display" and "Cumulative Game Media Acquisition Display" will be updated if a win occurs thereafter, even after the value of the increment counter reaches "95,000". Therefore, by visually checking the "Game Media Acquisition Display" and "Cumulative Game Media Acquisition Display", the player can continue to check the acquisition status of game media, giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, when the value of the increment counter reaches "95000", the increment counter is displayed as "MAX/95000" (displayed in a specific manner), and thereafter, even if a win or the like occurs, the display is not updated. For example, when a player finishes a jackpot game, the winning limit device is activated with a display of "96000/95000", but when a different player finishes a jackpot game, the winning limit device is activated with a display of "95100/95000". This prevents the standard (95000) for activating the winning limit device from appearing ambiguous.

In addition, by displaying the value of the increment counter in a specific format, such as "MAX/95000," it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment and increase their interest in the game.

When displaying the value of the increment counter as "MAX/95000", it is possible to first display "95000/95000" and then "MAX/95000", or to update the display up to "94999/95000" and then display "MAX/95000" without displaying "95000/95000". In the former case, it is easier to recognize that "MAX" has been displayed because "95000" has been reached, and in the latter case, the "MAX" display can be quickly notified to the player.

In addition, instead of displaying "MAX/95000," it may simply be displayed as "95000/95000." This makes it easier to recognize the standard (95000) at which the earning limit device is activated.

In addition, the "game media acquisition display" and "cumulative game media acquisition display" are updated and displayed if a win occurs even after the increment counter value reaches "95,000", but these may also be displayed as "MAX" when the increment counter value reaches "95,000". Also, one may be displayed as "MAX" and the other may continue to be updated. However, when the "game media acquisition display" or "cumulative game media acquisition display" is displayed as "MAX", a condition is that a certain number or more has been acquired. For example, if the gaming machine 1 is an available vacant machine for play at timing (d) (assuming a low probability non-time-saving gaming state), and a jackpot is won at timing (e), and during the jackpot, if the gaming media acquisition display shows "MAX/1500" or the cumulative gaming media acquisition display shows "MAX", this may be an exaggerated display for a player who has not yet acquired many gaming balls, and may actually upset the player. Therefore, for example, if the cumulative gaming media acquisition display shows 10,000 or more balls, the "gaming media acquisition display" or "cumulative gaming media acquisition display" may be displayed as "MAX", and if the cumulative gaming media acquisition display shows less than 10,000 balls, the "gaming media acquisition display" or "cumulative gaming media acquisition display" may not be displayed as "MAX". This prevents the display from being exaggerated and upsets the player.

Note that the "display of the increase counter value," "display of game media acquisition," and "display of cumulative game media acquisition" correspond to the display of "predetermined game information related to the game value acquired by the player."

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 151 again, when the value of the increment counter reaches "95000" at timing (e), a pre-notification message is displayed on the first image display device 70 informing the player that the winning limit device will be activated after the big win ends. Specifically, a message such as "You are in a big win. Please continue playing. After the win, the winning limit device will be activated and your game will end" is displayed. The message is displayed in a rectangular box displayed in front of the background image, and the rectangular box is made up of light black (a color that makes the background image slightly visible), and the entire text of the message is white with the periphery (border) of the text red, making the message a color scheme that is easy for the player to notice.

Once the advance notice message starts to be displayed, it may be continued to be displayed, or it may be displayed intermittently, or it may be hidden after a predetermined time has elapsed (e.g. 10 seconds) from the start of display so that it is not displayed again. Note that if the increment counter value reaches "95000" during a jackpot, there may be cases where there is a grace period before the win limit device is activated after the jackpot ends, depending on the timing (e.g. when the increment counter value reaches "95000" in the first round). In such cases, if the advance notice message is displayed continuously, it may be found annoying by the player. Therefore, during a jackpot, it is desirable to display the message intermittently, or to hide the message after a predetermined time has elapsed (e.g. 10 seconds) from the start of display so that it is not displayed again.

As mentioned above, the rectangular box makes the background image during a jackpot play difficult to see (although it is not completely invisible), but since it is displayed so as not to overlap with the "Right Hit", "6R", "Game Media Acquisition Display", and "Cumulative Game Media Acquisition Display", these images remain easily visible. This prevents the player from being unable to see that they should still make a right hit, that they are currently in the sixth round of a jackpot play, or the acquisition status of game media, which could affect their play.

In addition, by displaying the advance warning message, it is possible to make the player more aware in advance that the winning limit device will be activated, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disappointed by the unexpected activation of the winning limit device. Furthermore, by including a message such as "You are in a jackpot. Please continue playing" in the advance warning message, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping shooting game balls just because the advance warning message has been displayed, which would put the player at a disadvantage by preventing them from winning prize balls.

Timing (f) indicates the seventh round of the jackpot game. The first image display device 70 continues to display the advance notice message, and displays such as "Right Hit", "6R", "Game Media Acquisition Display", and "Cumulative Game Media Acquisition Display" so as not to overlap the advance notice message (including the rectangular box). The third image display device 72 also continues to display the value of the increment counter, "MAX/95000". When the tenth round (final round) is completed with this display, the jackpot game ends and the acquisition limit device is then activated.

Although the advance notification message is displayed from the start of its display until the end of the final round, it may be ended after being displayed for a predetermined time (e.g., 20 seconds) (without being displayed again), or it may be alternately displayed and hidden at predetermined time intervals, or after being displayed for a predetermined time on the first image display device 70, the notification image on the first image display device 70 may be made hidden and continued to be displayed on the third image display device 72, etc., or it may be made hidden by the player operating the performance button 17, etc.
Also, a rectangular box may be displayed superimposed over the entire display area of the first image display device 70. Also, the rectangular box is colored in such a way that the background image is difficult to see, but a color that makes it completely invisible may be used.

Figure 152 shows the presentation when various events occur, and in particular explains the presentation mode when the "number of game balls exceeded" during a jackpot, and the presentation mode when the "capacity limit device activated" during a jackpot.

(a) shows a jackpot win in a high probability time-saving game state, during which a "hit right" message is displayed encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right-side game area. During the jackpot, the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 reaches "40,000 balls" due to winning the jackpot in the jackpot slot 50 or the like. During the jackpot, a character introduction effect (normal effect) that is displayed during the execution of an SP reach or SPSP reach is executed, and the jackpot game ends at (b). Note that the normal effect can also be executed in jackpot games other than those in which the "number of game balls exceeded" or the "acquisition limit device is activated" state; for example, it is an effect that can be executed in the first jackpot win after the opening of the game arcade.

When the jackpot game ends in (b), a jackpot ending performance is executed. In the jackpot ending performance, the "Right Hit" display continues, a text image of "Jackpot End" indicating that the jackpot game has ended, and a caution image such as "Be careful not to get addicted!" and a caution image such as "Be careful not to forget to take your card!" are displayed. In this way, when the jackpot game ends, these caution images are displayed. However, if jackpots occur consecutively (for example, if the game transitions to a probability game state and consecutive jackpot games occur), the display of these caution images may be omitted in the jackpot ending for the second and subsequent jackpots. This prevents excessive playing and encouraging the player to avoid forgetting to take their membership card or visitor card, while preventing excessive playing and causing discomfort to the player.

(c) is the timing when a jackpot is won during high-probability time-saving game mode, the increment counter value is "94,000", and the second jackpot game (10 rounds) begins. In other words, this is a situation in which the increment counter value reaches "95,000" as the second jackpot game is played. Then, in (d), the increment counter value reaches "95,000".

In (d), the above-mentioned advance warning message is displayed, such as "You have won the jackpot. Please continue playing. After you win, the winning limit device will be activated and your game will end."

After timing (d), a warning image may be displayed, stating, "The earning limit device will be activated soon. Please be careful not to forget to take your card." This warning image may be displayed continuously until just before timing (h), for example, or it may be displayed intermittently until just before timing (h), or it may be displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) and then hidden. Additionally, an audio notification may be issued, stating, "The earning limit device will be activated soon. Please be careful not to forget to take your card," or it may be configured to be an audio notification only.

Then, when the jackpot game ends at (e), a completion effect is executed. In other words, only when the acquisition limit device is activated, a completion effect is executed, which notifies the player that no more gameplay is possible and congratulates the player who is likely to have acquired a lot of game value. The completion effect is expected to display, for example, special images that are different from the normal effects described above, or an image that grants a special title (for example, "Master"), and also to display a text image such as "Game will end soon" below the display area.

By executing the completion effect in this way, it is possible to give a sense of satisfaction to the player who activated the winning limit device. Also, by displaying a text image such as "Play will end soon," it is possible to prepare the player mentally compared to when notification (g) is suddenly executed after the end of the jackpot, and it is possible to smoothly lead to the end of the game even if notification (g) is executed after that.

Furthermore, when the completion effect ends (timing (g)), "Completion effect FIN" is displayed to indicate that the completion effect has ended, and a prompting image such as "Please press the count button to count" is displayed at the bottom of the display area, encouraging the player to operate the count button 20 to transfer the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 to the dedicated unit 170. This allows counting to begin gradually from the stage before it becomes impossible to continue playing any further at (h), which will be described later, and allows the counting to be completed more smoothly than if counting were to begin after it has reached (h), allowing the player to finish playing smoothly.

Note that although the promotion image is said to be displayed from timing (g), this is not limited to this. For example, the display may start from timing (d) when the increment counter value reaches "95,000", or from the start of a big win game (timing (c)) when there is a high possibility that the increment counter value will reach "95,000". Note that the promotion image will not be displayed prior to this.

Then, at (h), the maximum winning limit device is activated, and the notification described in FIG. 147 is executed. Furthermore, no progress control of the game (specific control processing) is performed, and the game cannot be continued any further. The execution period of the completion presentation carried out from (e) to (g) is expected to be, for example, three minutes. Furthermore, when the completion presentation ends at (g), the maximum winning limit device is immediately activated, and the game ends promptly.

When the "acquisition limit device is activated" during a jackpot, the jackpot ending performance described in timing (b) is not executed at timings (e) to (g). In other words, in cases where the "acquisition limit device" is not activated during a jackpot, such as timing (b), a jackpot ending performance is executed when the jackpot ends, and a warning image such as "Watch out for getting addicted!" and a warning image such as "Watch out for forgetting to take your card!" are displayed. On the other hand, when the "acquisition limit device is activated" during a jackpot, a warning image such as "Watch out for getting addicted!" and a warning image such as "Watch out for forgetting to take your card!" are displayed in the announcement of the operation of the acquisition limit device performed at timing (h). Therefore, even if the jackpot ending performance is omitted at timing (e), it is possible to prevent excessive playing and forgetting to take the member card or visitor card, while preventing excessive playing and preventing players from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, a big win ending performance may be executed at timing (e), and a warning image such as "Watch out for getting addicted!" and a warning image such as "Watch out for forgetting to take your card!" may be displayed during the big win ending performance. In this way, the warning images are more likely to come into the player's field of vision, and excessive playing or forgetting to take the member card or visitor card can be more effectively prevented.

In addition, for example, if a new player starts playing immediately before timing (c) (if this is the player's first win), the big win ending presentation may be executed at timing (e), and if this is not the case (if a certain number of big wins have occurred in succession and timing (c) has been reached), the big win ending presentation may not be executed at timing (e). This allows for an appropriate attention promotion notification to be executed according to the game situation.

The completion effect is executed after the end of the jackpot game by setting an execution period, but it may be executed from the timing when the increment counter value reaches "95000". In addition, in the above-mentioned 1 type 2 type, when the increment counter value reaches "95000" due to a win in a specific area in the small win game (first round), the completion effect may be executed from the start of the jackpot game (second round onwards) that is executed after that. However, regardless of the specification, it is preferable to set an execution period after the end of the jackpot game, taking into consideration that the execution period of the effect is not determined depending on the winning status of the large winning port 50 during the execution of the jackpot game.

In addition, in (a), a normal presentation is performed, but a special jackpot presentation corresponding to "excessive game balls" may also be performed. In this case, it is preferable that the game value "40,000 balls" does not include the game value obtained by lending game balls. In other words, since the purpose is to congratulate the player for having gained game value through hard work, it is preferable to exclude the game value obtained by lending even if a special jackpot presentation is performed.

In addition, multiple types of completion effects may be provided, and one of them may be selected and executed. In a gaming machine with multiple setting values, the setting value may be suggested depending on the type of completion effect being executed. Since it is not possible to continue playing after the completion effect is executed, the suggestion of the setting value does not suggest useful information, but it can be said that there is merit in executing it, since it is possible to know at what setting value the winning limit device was activated.

Also, like the above-mentioned attention-promoting image, if a change of player is detected just before the acquisition limit device is activated, the completion effect may not be executed. This can prevent players who have just started playing from feeling uneasy (as they may wonder what the effect is for having completed).

Note that the specified attention-promoting notification corresponding to the restriction on executing the specified control is not limited to the one shown in (h) of FIG. 152, but also includes the above-mentioned attention-promoting image such as "The acquisition limit device will be activated soon. Please be careful not to forget to remove your card."

In addition to the above-mentioned display of a promotional image such as "Please press the counting button to count," a sticker attached to the game board or glass frame 4 that reads "If you wish to suspend or end play, please press the counting button to count" may be written on something that is always visible to the player and included in the "notification encouraging operation of the counting operation unit." If the display unit 174 of the dedicated unit 170 displays "If you wish to suspend or end play, please press the counting button to count," this display may be included in the "notification encouraging operation of the counting operation unit."

FIG. 153 is a diagram explaining the customer waiting presentation.
In this embodiment, the customer waiting performances include "customer waiting waiting performance A", "customer waiting waiting performance B", "customer waiting demo performance A", and "customer waiting demo performance B" in the figure.

First, when the definite stop occurs at timing (a) (the special symbol is displayed as stopped, and the performance symbol is displayed as stopped), and no subsequent reserved memory is stored, customer waiting standby performance A starts from there. In customer waiting standby performance A, the first image display device 70 displays the combination "523" of performance symbols 70a that were definite stopped at timing (a), and the third image display device 72 displays a predetermined background image (not shown). Note that the performance symbols 70a are displayed in a form consisting of numbers and characters.

Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the customer waiting standby performance A without any start winning or the like, the customer waiting standby performance B starts at timing (b). In the customer waiting standby performance B, the combination of performance patterns 70a "523" that was confirmed and stopped at timing (a) continues to be displayed on the first image display device 70, and the third image display device 72 displays an image suggesting that a winning limit device is installed, "This machine is equipped with a winning limit device," instead of displaying a predetermined background image. At this time, the performance patterns 70a are displayed in a form consisting of numbers, characters, and character names, and are displayed in a form different from that of the customer waiting standby performance A. In addition, the winning limit device installation suggestion image displayed on the third image display device 72 is a suggestion image for informing the player in advance that the winning limit device has been activated and it will be difficult to continue playing, and is made to be recognized by the player in advance using the customer waiting performance, etc. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being surprised or dissatisfied even if the winning limit device is activated and it becomes difficult to continue playing.

In addition, the indication of the installation of a winning limit device is not limited to an image suggesting the installation of a winning limit device, and a sticker affixed to the game board surface or glass frame 4 stating "This machine is equipped with a winning limit device" may also be included in the indication of the installation of a winning limit device. In this case, it is easier for the player to see than an image, and therefore it can be more appealing.

In addition, the image suggesting the installation of an acquisition limit device is displayed on the third image display device 72, but this is not limited to the above, and it may be displayed on the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, the fourth image display device 74, or the display section 174 of the dedicated unit 170.

Then, when a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the customer waiting standby performance B without any start winning or the like, the customer waiting demo performance A starts at timing (c). In the customer waiting demo performance A, the entire display area of the first image display device 70 has a white background, and on the white background, a "DEMO" display (e.g., blue letters) indicating that a demo performance is in progress and a display such as "Pachinko XX" (e.g., black letters) indicating the model name of the gaming machine are displayed. In addition, the third image display device 72 displays a game promotion image "Let's start playing!" to encourage the player to play, instead of an image suggesting the installation of an acquisition limit device. When the customer waiting demo performance A starts, the performance pattern 70a displayed in the customer waiting standby performances A and B, the icon display area 70C, the first reserved icon display area 70B, the second reserved icon display area 70D, and other images (not shown) such as the background image and the special pattern TZ are hidden.

When a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of customer waiting demo performance A without any initial winnings or the like, customer waiting demo performance B starts at timing (d). In customer waiting demo performance A, the entire display area of the first image display device 70 continues to have a white background, and on this white background, a "DEMO" display (e.g., blue letters) indicating that a demo performance is in progress and a predetermined caution notification display (red letters) are displayed. Also, on the third image display device 72, the image indicating the installation of a winning limit device "This machine is equipped with a winning limit device" displayed in customer waiting standby performance B is still displayed at this timing.

The predetermined caution promotion notification displays, for example, include an image saying "Watch out for addiction!" to prevent players from becoming overly addicted to the game, an image saying "No playing for those under 18" to prohibit players under 18 from playing, an image saying "Watch out for strategy scams!" to prevent players from getting caught up in scams that advertise strategies for winning at gaming machines, and an image saying "No hitting the machine" to prohibit players from hitting the gaming machine. Displaying these displays in customer waiting demo performance B can lead to healthy play. Note that the predetermined caution promotion notification displays may be displayed one by one individually rather than all at the same time.

Note that what is displayed in the customer waiting effects A and B is not limited to the above, and for example, actual reach effect images, images introducing characters displayed as effects on the gaming machine, images introducing preview effects that can be expected in jackpot games (e.g., three key effects, etc.) may be displayed. Also, the "Be careful not to get addicted!" images displayed in the customer waiting effects, the jackpot ending, and the win limit device activation notification may all be the same (same color, shape, size), or they may be different.

Then, if a predetermined time (e.g. 30 seconds) has passed since the start of customer waiting demo performance B without a start winning or the like occurring, the game will return to customer waiting standby performance A. Note that if a start winning occurs, the performance will immediately end regardless of which performance is being performed, and a screen will be displayed showing the changing display of performance pattern 70a, etc.

The customer waiting effects in this embodiment are configured as described above, but they may be equipped with either of the customer waiting waiting effects A and B, or they may be equipped with either of the customer waiting demo effects. Alternatively, in a low-probability non-time-saving play state, all of the customer waiting waiting effects A, customer waiting waiting effects B, customer waiting demo effects A, and customer waiting demo effects B may be executed, and in a high-probability time-saving play state, the customer waiting waiting effects A and customer waiting waiting effects B may be executed, but the customer waiting demo effects A and customer waiting demo effects B may not be executed. Also, the customer waiting waiting effects A and B may be defined as customer waiting effects, or the customer waiting demo effects A and B may be defined as customer waiting effects.

In addition, although the waiting-for-customer effect A, waiting-for-customer effect B, waiting-for-customer demo effect A, and waiting-for-customer demo effect B can be executed before the acquisition limit device is activated, their execution is restricted after the acquisition limit device is activated (for example, after timing (h) in FIG. 152). In other words, it is possible to prevent a player from mistakenly thinking that they are in a state where they can play by executing the waiting-for-customer effects even when there is no progress control of the game (specific control processing). It is also possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable because they are prompted to take a seat by the waiting-for-customer effect and are then unable to play. This helps to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Note that after the winning limit device is activated (for example, after timing (h) in FIG. 152), execution is restricted, which can be interpreted as meaning that execution is not performed at all, that the execution frequency is reduced, or that some of customer waiting waiting performance A, customer waiting waiting performance B, customer waiting demo performance A, and customer waiting demo performance B are not executed, etc.

154 to 156 are time charts 1/3 to 3/3 showing advance notification.
First, at timing (a), a start winning is made in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, and the fluctuation is started. At this time, the value of the increment number counter is less than "90000".

Then, at timing (b), a jackpot is won, and if a prize is won in the jackpot slot 50 or the like during the jackpot game, the value of the increment counter increases, and at timing (c) the value of the increment counter reaches "90,000". At this time, the value of the increment counter is displayed on the third image display device 72 as "90,000/95,000". In addition, a pre-notification such as "5,000 remaining until the winning limit device is activated" is displayed.

When the jackpot game ends at the timing (d) thereafter, the first image display device 70 displays a jackpot game ending image (for example, jackpot end time reduction 100 times) to notify the end of the jackpot game. The third image display device 72 continues to display the value of the increment counter and the advance notification. At this time, the increment counter value is displayed as "90500/95000", and the advance notification is displayed as "4500 remaining until the winning limit device is activated".

The third image display device 72 also displays an image suggesting that a maximum win limit device is installed, saying "This machine is equipped with a maximum win limit device." In other words, the image suggesting that a maximum win limit device is installed is displayed even when the jackpot game ending image is displayed.

At the subsequent timing (e), the time-saving game state (low-probability time-saving game state) begins. At this time, the first image display device 70 starts displaying the fluctuations in the time-saving game state, but the third image display device 72 continues to display the value of the increment counter and the advance notification. At this time, the value of the increment counter is displayed as "90,500/95,000", and the advance notification is displayed as "4,500 remaining until the winning limit device is activated".

When the symbols (special symbols, performance symbols, special symbols) are fixed and stopped at the timing (f), customer waiting standby performance A in the time-saving game state begins. At this time, the first image display device 70 displays the display "Time-saving" indicating that the time-saving game state is in progress, the display "Right hit", and the display of the combination "463" of performance symbols 70a that were fixed and stopped at timing (f). The third image display device 72 continues to display the value of the increment counter and the advance notification. At this time, the display of the value of the increment counter is "90490/95000", and the advance notification is "4510 remaining until the winning limit device is activated".

Then, when a predetermined time (e.g. 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of customer waiting standby performance A without any initial winnings, customer waiting standby performance B starts at timing (g). At this time, the display mode of the first image display device 70 does not change from customer waiting standby performance A, and the third image display device 72 continues to display the value of the increment counter and the advance notification. At this time, the value of the increment counter is displayed as "90490/95000", and the advance notification is displayed as "4510 remaining until the winning limit device is activated".

Then, when a predetermined time (e.g. 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the customer waiting standby performance B without any initial winnings, the customer waiting demo performance B starts at timing (h). At this time, the first image display device 70 displays the customer waiting demo performance A described above, and the third image display device 72 continues to display the value of the increment counter and an advance notice. At this time, the value of the increment counter is displayed as "90490/95000", and the advance notice shows "4510 remaining until the winning limit device is activated".

Then, when a predetermined time (e.g. 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of customer waiting demo performance A without any initial winnings, customer waiting demo performance B starts at timing (i). At this time, the first image display device 70 displays the above-mentioned customer waiting demo performance B, and the third image display device 72 continues to display the value of the increment counter and an advance notice. At this time, the value of the increment counter is displayed as "90490/95000", and the advance notice shows "4510 remaining until the winning limit device is activated".

In other words, the display of the increment counter value and the advance notification are displayed during the jackpot game shown at timing (c), while the variable display is being executed as shown at timing (e), and while the customer waiting performance is being executed as shown at timings (f) to (i). In other words, after the display starts at timing (c), it will be displayed so that it can be seen in any situation, such as during the jackpot game, while the variable display is being executed, or while the customer waiting performance is being executed.

In addition, in Figures 155 and 156, as an example, the customer waiting effect in the time-saving game state (low-probability time-saving game state) is explained, but it may be interpreted as a customer waiting effect in the normal game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state) or in the probability variable game state (high-probability time-saving game state).

The next timing (j) is the end of the time-saving game state. It is assumed that at timing (j), there is no subsequent reserved memory and customer waiting standby presentation A has begun. At this time, on the first image display device 70, "Time-saving" and "Right hit" are not displayed, and the presentation pattern 70a has changed from a number-only presentation to a presentation consisting of numbers and characters. Also, on the third image display device 72, the value of the increment counter and the advance notification are still displayed. At this time, the value of the increment counter is displayed as "90490/95000", and the advance notification is displayed as "4510 remaining until the winning limit device is activated".

Then, when a predetermined time (e.g. 30 seconds) has passed since the start of customer waiting standby performance A without any initial winnings, customer waiting standby performance B starts at timing (k). At this time, the first image display device displays a performance pattern 70a consisting of numbers, characters, and character names, and the third image display device 72 displays an image suggesting the installation of an upper limit winning device, a display of the value of the increment counter, and an advance notification. At this time, the display of the value of the increment counter is "90490/95000", and the advance notification is "4510 remaining until the upper limit winning device is activated".

After that, from timing (l), the player plays in the normal game state (low probability non-time-saving game state) and does not win the jackpot. Then, at timing (m), the customer waiting standby effect A starts when the value of the increment counter is less than "90,000". At this time, the display of the increment counter value and the advance notification are hidden on the third image display device 72. In other words, the display of the increment counter value and the advance notification have ended when the value of the increment counter becomes less than "90,000" (for example, when it becomes "89,000").

According to the above figures 154 to 156, even when the big win game ending image is displayed, the image suggesting the installation of the acquisition limit device is displayed, so the player can be informed in advance that the acquisition limit device will be activated and it will be difficult to continue playing. Even if the acquisition limit device is activated and it becomes difficult to continue playing, it is possible to reduce the player's surprise or dissatisfaction. This consideration helps to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when the value of the increment counter reaches "90,000", the display of the increment counter value and the advance notification begin. The display of the increment counter value and the advance notification are displayed during the jackpot game shown at timing (c), while the variable display is being executed at timing (e), and while the customer waiting performance is being executed at timings (f) to (i). This makes it easier for the player to see the display of the increment counter value and the advance notification regardless of the game situation, and reduces the risk of the player being surprised or dissatisfied by the unexpected activation of the winning limit device. This consideration helps to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Also, as shown in timing (d), (i), and (k), even if the increment counter value and the advance notification are displayed, it is possible to display the image suggesting that the winning limit device is installed. Furthermore, these images are displayed so that they do not interfere with each other. This makes it easy to see all the information, and allows the player to understand that the gaming machine is equipped with a winning limit device and that the winning limit device is about to be activated. This consideration makes it easier to recognize various information, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Also, as shown at timing (h), even if the game promotion image "Let's start playing!" is displayed to encourage the player to play, which is one aspect of customer waiting demo performance A, it is possible to display the value of the increment counter and the advance notification. Also, these images are displayed so that they do not interfere with each other. This makes it easy to see both pieces of information, and allows the player to understand, for example, that when starting play, the situation is immediately before the win limit device is activated. With this kind of consideration, various pieces of information are easy to recognize, preventing a decline in interest in playing.

Also, as shown at timing (m), when the value of the increment counter falls below "90,000" (for example, when it reaches "89,000"), the display of the increment counter value and the advance notification are terminated. This prevents the player from mistakenly thinking that the maximum winning amount device is about to be activated.

In the above description, the image suggesting the installation of a winning limit device, the display of the value of the increment counter, and the advance notification are displayed on the third image display device 72, but they may be displayed on another image display device. For example, they may be displayed on the first image display device 70. Displaying on the first image display device 70 has the disadvantage of reducing the visibility of other displayed objects, but since this is the image display device that the player pays the most attention to, it is more effective in preventing oversight than displaying on the third image display device 72.

FIG. 157 shows an example of the case where the winning limit device is activated during the customer waiting performance.
First, timing (a) is the timing when the variable display in the time-saving game state (low-probability time-saving game state) ends (the pattern stops to be confirmed), and the customer waiting standby performance A starts. At this time, the first image display device 70 displays the combination of the "time-saving" display, the "right hit" display, and the "463" of the performance pattern 70a that has stopped to be confirmed. Also, the third image display device 72 displays the value of the increment counter "94999/95000" and the advance notice "1 remaining until the acquisition upper limit device is activated." That is, the value of the increment counter from timing (a) to timing (b) is "94999".

At timing (b), the player shoots the game ball into the game area (hits it to the right), but it enters the general winning hole 43 before it enters the second starting hole 47. As a result, the value of the increment counter becomes "95003", and the operation notification of the winning limit device begins upon receipt of the winning limit device operation command. Specifically, the first image display device 70 goes dark, and the front layer displays "Winning limit device in operation, today's game ends", "Press the count button to count", "Be careful not to get addicted!", and "Be careful not to forget to take your card!", while the display of the increment counter value and the advance notification are hidden on the third image display device 72.

The messages "Winning limit device in operation, today's play ends", "Press the count button to count", "Be careful not to get addicted", and "Be careful not to forget to take your card!" are displayed on the front layer so as to be superimposed on part of the display screen for customer waiting performance A, while the value of the increment counter and the advance notification are hidden on the third image display device 72.

In this way, even when the waiting-for-customers effect A is being performed, if the value of the increment counter reaches "95,000" and the winning limit device is activated, a notification of the activation of the winning limit device is issued to notify the player that play cannot be continued any further. This makes it possible to quickly restrict the execution of game progress control (specific control processing) even in a situation where no variable display is being performed, such as when the waiting-for-customers effect is being performed, thereby realizing a healthy game. Furthermore, even when the waiting-for-customers effect is being performed, the notification of the activation of the winning limit device makes the player understand that it will be difficult to continue play any further. This consideration helps to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

The explanation was given using the example of the waiting-for-customers standby performance A, but it may be replaced with waiting-for-customers standby performance B. In addition, in the operation notification of the acquisition limit device, the first image display device 70 is immediately turned black, but this is not limited to this. The operation notification of the acquisition limit device may be executed in a state where the background image on the back side (the display screen of the waiting-for-customers standby performance A in the example of FIG. 157) is partially visible. Specifically, it is possible to display "Acquisition limit device in operation, today's game is over" or the like so as to be superimposed on a part of the display screen of the waiting-for-customers standby performance A, and to make the display screen (background image, etc.) of the waiting-for-customers standby performance A visible from the non-superimposed part. This reduces surprise to the player compared to suddenly displaying a black background to notify the operation of the acquisition limit device, and prevents the player from misunderstanding that a malfunction has occurred.

Next, timing (c) shows that customer waiting demo performance A is being performed. At this time, the first image display device 70 displays "Time-saving", "DEMO", "Right hit", and "Pachinko XX", and the third image display device 72 displays the value of the increment counter "94999/95000" and the advance notification "1 remaining until the maximum win device is activated". In other words, the value of the increment counter from timing (a) to timing (b) is "94999".

At timing (d), the player shoots the game ball into the game area (hits it to the right), but it enters the general winning hole 43 before it enters the second starting hole 47. As a result, the value of the increment counter becomes "95003", and the operation notification of the winning limit device begins upon receipt of the winning limit device operation command. Specifically, the first image display device 70 goes dark, and the front layer displays "Winning limit device in operation, today's game is over", "Press the count button to count", "Be careful not to get addicted!", and "Be careful not to forget to take your card!", while the display of the increment counter value and the advance notification are hidden on the third image display device 72.

In this way, even when customer waiting demo performance A is being performed, if the value of the increment counter reaches "95000" and the winning limit device is activated, a notification of the activation of the winning limit device is issued to notify the player that play cannot be continued any further. This makes it possible to quickly restrict the execution of game progress control (specific control processing) even in a situation where no variable display is being performed, such as when a customer waiting performance is being performed, thereby realizing a healthy game. Also, even when a customer waiting performance is being performed, the notification of the activation of the winning limit device makes it clear that it will be difficult to continue play any further. This consideration helps to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

The explanation was given using the example of the customer waiting demo performance A, but it may be replaced with customer waiting demo performance B. In addition, in the operation notification of the acquisition limit device, the first image display device 70 is immediately turned black, but this is not limited to this. The acquisition limit device operation notification may be executed in a state where the background image on the back side (the display screen of the customer waiting demo performance A in the example of FIG. 157) is partially visible. Specifically, it is possible to display "Acquisition limit device in operation, today's game is over" or the like so as to be superimposed on a part of the display screen of the customer waiting demo performance A, and to make the display screen (background image, etc.) of the customer waiting standby performance A visible from the non-superimposed part. This reduces surprise to the player compared to suddenly displaying a black background to notify the acquisition limit device operation, and prevents the player from misunderstanding that a malfunction has occurred.

In addition, in FIG. 157, as an example, a customer waiting effect in a time-saving game state (low-probability time-saving game state) is explained, but it may be interpreted as a customer waiting effect in a normal game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state) or in a probability variable game state (high-probability time-saving game state).

In addition, in FIG. 157, it is assumed that the player shot the game ball into the game area (hit to the right) and it entered the general winning hole 43 before entering the second starting hole 47. However, if the ball enters the second starting hole 47 and the value of the increment counter reaches "95000", the symbols (special symbols, performance symbols, special symbols) may not be displayed in a variable manner, and the operation notification of the acquisition limit device shown in FIG. 157 may be executed. This allows the processing related to the operation of the acquisition limit device to proceed quickly (since processing to stop the symbols is not necessary), and the control processing can be simplified. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from being too concerned about the result of the variable display of the symbols and not being able to see various information such as "Acquisition limit device is operating, today's game is over", "Press the counting button to count", "Be careful not to get addicted!", and "Be careful not to forget to take your card!".

On the other hand, when the second start hole 47 is won and the value of the increment counter reaches "95,000", the symbols (special symbol, performance symbol, special symbol) may be displayed in a variable manner. For example, in the first image display device 70, the performance symbol 70a may be displayed in a variable manner behind the operation notification of the winning limit device, or the special symbol TZ may be displayed in a variable manner. This can eliminate the player's sense of boredom until the screen goes dark (until the background becomes black).

Figure 158 is a diagram showing an example of the operation notification mode of the acquisition limit device for each situation. In Figure 152, the operation notification mode of the acquisition limit device during a jackpot was described, and in Figure 157, the operation notification mode of the acquisition limit device during a customer waiting performance was described, so here we will mainly explain the operation notification mode of the acquisition limit device during non-jackpots (during the fluctuation display and during the inter-fluctuation interval).

In the figure, the case during a jackpot is as described in FIG. 152, so the explanation will be omitted here. When not during a jackpot, timing (a) indicates that a variable display is in progress, and as an example, it is during a variable display in a time-saving game state (low-probability time-saving game state). At this time, the "right hit" display, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, etc. are being performed.

Timing (b) is the timing when the value of the increment counter reaches "95,000" as a result of a game ball entering the second start port 47 or the general winning port 43 during the variable display in the time-saving game state (low-probability time-saving game state). This causes the operation notification of the acquisition limit device to begin upon receipt of the acquisition limit device operation command. Specifically, the first image display device 70 goes dark, and the front layer displays messages such as "Acquisition limit device in operation, today's game is over", "Press the count button to count", "Be careful not to get addicted!", and "Be careful not to forget to take your card!".

After (d) in the case of a jackpot, the operation notification of the earning limit device will continue unless the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off. Similarly, after (b) in the case of a non-jackpot, the operation notification of the earning limit device will continue unless the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off. In other words, once the operation notification of the earning limit device starts, the audio notification, visual notification, and electric notification will not change unless an error with a higher priority than the operation of the earning limit device occurs. As a result, once the operation notification of the earning limit device starts, there will be no transition to the customer waiting standby performance or customer waiting demo performance, and the rainbow light emission in customer waiting demo performance B will not be executed.

Note that, when the operation notification of the acquisition limit device starts, the audio notification, visual notification, and light notification will not change unless an error with a higher priority than the operation of the acquisition limit device occurs, but they may be configured to change. For example, if the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is not cut off for a predetermined time after the operation notification of the acquisition limit device starts, a rainbow light may be emitted as a light notification to prompt the administrator of the gaming machine 1 to turn off the power to the gaming machine 1.

In this way, when the value of the increment counter reaches "95000" during a jackpot, a pre-notification message is displayed first saying "You are in a jackpot. Please continue playing. The post-jackpot acquisition limit device will be activated and your game will end.", and after the jackpot ends, a message is displayed saying "The acquisition limit device is activated. Today's game will end." This allows the pre-notification message to inform the player that they should continue playing and that they will not be able to play after the jackpot ends, and it is possible to reduce the player's surprise or dissatisfaction caused by the sudden activation of the acquisition limit device. This consideration prevents a decrease in interest in the game. On the other hand, when the value of the increment counter reaches "95000" during a non-jackpot period (during the variable display or during the interval between variables), the first image display device 70 is quickly turned to a dark screen to notify the player of the activation of the acquisition limit device. This prevents players from becoming so distracted by the changing pattern display that they lose sight of various pieces of information such as "Winning limit device activated, play ends for today", "Press the counting button to count", "Be careful not to get addicted!" and "Be careful not to forget to remove your card!".

It is also possible that the result of the confirmed stop (symbol stop) may be a jackpot symbol combination. In that case, the activation of the win limit device makes it impossible to play a jackpot game corresponding to the symbols that have been confirmed stopped (symbol stop), which may disappoint the player. In response to this, the first image display device 70 is quickly made to go dark and an announcement of the operation of the win limit device is made, eliminating the risk of the player being disappointed by not being able to grasp what the result of the confirmed stop (symbol stop) is (jackpot or miss).

In regard to FIG. 158(b), if multiple game balls are rolling down in the game area 5a during a non-jackpot period (during the fluctuation display, during the interval between fluctuations), and one of the balls wins at the general winning port 43, causing the increment counter to reach "95,000", then even if a game ball that was rolling down the upstream side subsequently wins at the general winning port 43, etc., no prize balls will be awarded for that winning. On the other hand, during a jackpot period, if a winning ball is won at each winning port before the winning limit device is activated, prize balls will be awarded for that winning ball.

In addition, if the value of the increment counter reaches "95,000" during a non-jackpot period (during the fluctuation display or the interval between fluctuations), the first image display device 70 is quickly made to go dark and a notification of the operation of the win limit device is issued, but the notification of the operation of the win limit device may be issued after the pattern is determined and stopped.

In addition, if the increment counter reaches "95,000" when the jackpot symbol combination (for example, "555") is temporarily stopped (just before it is fixed), the win limit device may be immediately activated to cause the first image display device 70 to go dark, or the win limit device may be activated after the jackpot game is played.

Specifically, if the value of the increment counter reaches "95000" during a non-jackpot period (during the variable display, during the interval between changes), a message such as "After the symbols stop, the winning limit device will be activated and the game will end. Please stop shooting." is displayed. The message is displayed in a rectangular box displayed in front of the performance symbol 70a, and the rectangular box is composed of light black (a color that makes the variable display of the performance symbol 70a slightly visible), and the message is composed of white letters all over with red edges, a color scheme that makes the message easy for the player to notice. This makes the variable display of the performance symbol 70a difficult to see, and can direct the player's gaze toward the message, making it easier to stop shooting game balls.

In addition, on the first image display device 70, the "Right hit" display is hidden, and the changing display of the special symbol TZ remains visible without being covered by a rectangular box. By hiding the "Right hit" display, it is possible to suggest that the situation in which a right hit is no longer required, and by allowing the special symbol TZ to remain visible, it is possible to easily grasp the timing for the confirmation stop (symbol stop) and the activation of the winning limit device. Although not shown in the figure, the right hit indicator 67 also goes out (ending the right hit notification) at the timing when the "Right hit" display goes hidden.

The advance notice message may be displayed continuously after it starts, or may be displayed intermittently, or may be hidden after a predetermined time has elapsed (e.g., 10 seconds) since it started to be displayed so that it is not displayed again. It has been said that it is preferable for the advance notice message to be displayed intermittently or hidden after a predetermined time has elapsed (e.g., 10 seconds) since it started to be displayed so that it is not displayed again during a jackpot, but when it is not a jackpot (during a variable display, during an interval between changes), the grace period until the acquisition limit device is activated tends to be shorter than when it is a jackpot. In that case, if the advance notice message is displayed intermittently or hidden after a predetermined time has elapsed (e.g., 10 seconds) since it started to be displayed so that it is not displayed again, the purpose of stopping the launch of the game balls may be hindered. Therefore, when it is not a jackpot (during a variable display, during an interval between changes), it is preferable for the advance notice message to be displayed continuously after it starts to be displayed.

When the game stops (pattern stops), notifications of the operation of the winning limit device are displayed superimposed on the combination of symbols of the finalized stop effect symbols 70a (for example, "463"), including "Winning limit device in operation, play ends for today", "Press the counting button to count", "Be careful not to get addicted", and "Be careful not to forget to remove your cards!". Note that these images are displayed superimposed on the effect symbols 70a, but not on the special symbols TZ, so that the finalized stop special symbol TZ "463" is visible. This makes it easier to recognize the finalized stop (pattern stop).

This allows the player to be informed in advance by the advance warning message that the balls must be stopped from being shot immediately and that the game will no longer be playable once the symbols have stopped, reducing the risk of the player being surprised or dissatisfied by the unexpected activation of the winning limit device. This consideration helps to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, this prevents the player from being surprised by the forced termination of the variable display and the activation of the win limit device. Also, since the player can prepare to stop playing in advance by operating the counting button 20 in time with the confirmed stop (pattern stop) that will activate the win limit device, this leads to a smooth end to the game.

In addition, if the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (power outage, disconnection, etc.) during the variable display and then the power is restored, a power restoration designation command is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130, and the performance control board 130 that has received the power restoration designation command displays an image during recovery such as "Recovering, please wait a moment" on the first image display device 70. Then, when a stop command (pattern determination command) is received with the end of the variable display, the display of the image during recovery is terminated, and the combination of patterns of the performance pattern 70a, etc. can be viewed.
On the other hand, if the acquisition limit device is activated during the variable display and then the power is restored, even if a power restoration command is received, the image during restoration will not be displayed, and instead an image such as "Acquisition limit device in operation, please clear RWM" as shown in Figure 144 will be displayed.
In this way, even if the same power supply is restored and a power supply restoration command is received, the display mode will be different depending on whether the acquisition limit device is activated. This allows accurate notification according to the presence or absence of the acquisition limit device.

In addition, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (power outage, disconnection, etc.) while the reserved memory of the special chart determination information is being stored and the reserved icon corresponding to the reserved memory is being displayed, and then the power is restored, a power restoration designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130, and the performance control board 130 that has received the power restoration designation command displays an image during restoration such as "Restoring, please wait a moment" on the first image display device 70. On the other hand, while the image during restoration is being displayed, the reserved icon corresponding to the reserved memory (which was displayed before the power outage) is not displayed.
On the other hand, if the acquisition limit device is activated while special chart determination information is reserved and then the power is restored, even if a power restoration command is received, the image during restoration and the reserved icon corresponding to the reserved memory (which was displayed before the power outage) will not be displayed, and instead an image such as "Acquisition limit device is operating, please clear RWM" as shown in Figure 144 will be displayed.
In this way, even if the power restoration designation command is received during the same power restoration, the display mode will be different depending on whether the acquisition limit device is activated or not. This allows for accurate notification depending on whether the acquisition limit device is activated or not. Also, if a hold icon is displayed even though the image during restoration shows "Please wait a moment," there is a risk that the user will mistakenly think that they do not need to wait, but this can be prevented. Also, when the power is restored after the acquisition limit device is activated, by not displaying the hold icon but instead displaying an image such as "Acquisition limit device activated, please clear RWM," the worker can be made to concentrate on performing the RWM clear operation.

Figure 159 is a diagram showing an example of the operation notification mode of the winning limit device for each situation. In Figure 159, an example is described in which the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off after the increment counter value reaches "95000". Specifically, examples of operation notification modes are described for the case in which the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off after the increment counter value reaches "95000" and before the winning limit device is activated (hereinafter "A"), and the case in which the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off after the increment counter value reaches "95000" and after the winning limit device is activated (hereinafter "B").

First, regarding (i), timing (a) is, for example, the timing when the value of the increment counter reaches "95,000" during the fourth round of a jackpot game (when a 10-round jackpot game is being played), and the first image display device 70 displays the above-mentioned advance notification message superimposed on the presentation image of the fourth round of a jackpot game.

After that, at timing (b), the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (power outage, disconnection, etc.). At this time, the first image display device 70 goes dark, and the presentation image during the jackpot game cannot be seen. Then, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored at timing (c) (power outage resolved, disconnection resolved, etc.), the first image display device 70 again displays the above-mentioned advance notification message superimposed on the presentation image of the fourth round during the jackpot game (a 10-round jackpot game is being played).

Then, when the 10th round of the jackpot game ends, the above-mentioned completion effect is executed, and after the completion effect ends, at timing (d), an acquisition limit device operation command is received and the acquisition limit device operation notification is displayed, such as "Acquisition limit device in operation, today's game is over", "Press the count button to count", "Be careful not to get addicted!", and "Be careful not to forget to remove your cards!". Thus, in the case of (i), even if the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored, the acquisition limit device operation notification is not executed immediately, but the acquisition limit device operation notification is executed after the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored and the jackpot game and completion effect are all completed. For example, even if the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off while the completion effect is being executed, after the power supply is restored, the acquisition limit device operation notification is executed after the completion effect is all executed.

At timing (c), the display of the advance notice message is also restored. This allows the player to be reminded that even if the power supply is cut off during a jackpot game (while the advance notice message is being displayed), once power is restored, the player is about to be reminded that the win limit device is about to be activated.

Although not shown in the figure, at timing (c), the display of the increment counter value and the advance notification on the third image display device 72 are hidden. This is because the increment counter is cleared when the power is turned OFF→ON (see FIG. 31), and when the increment counter is cleared, the display of the increment counter value is also cleared. In other words, if the increment counter value is displayed at timing (c), it will be "0/95000", and since an advance notification message is being displayed on the first image display device 70, there is a risk that the player will recognize that a contradiction has occurred. Therefore, by hiding the display of the increment counter value and the advance notification on the third image display device 72 at timing (c), this risk can be eliminated.

Next, in regard to (B), timing (a) is the timing when the operation notification of the acquisition limit device is executed. After that, at timing (b), the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (power outage, disconnection, intentional power off by an employee, etc.). At this time, the first image display device 70 goes dark, and the operation notification of the acquisition limit device, "Acquisition limit device in operation, today's game is over", "Please press the count button to count", "Be careful not to get addicted!", and "Be careful not to forget to take the card!", are not visible. Then, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored at timing (c) after that (power outage is resolved, disconnection is resolved, intentional power on by an employee, etc.), the first image display device 70 displays "Acquisition limit device in operation, please clear RWM", which is one form of the operation notification of the acquisition limit device. In other words, in the case of (B), unlike the case of (A), when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored, an immediate notification of the operation notification of the acquisition limit device is executed.

In this way, the timing between when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off after the increment counter value reaches "95000" and before the win limit device is activated (hereinafter "A") and when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off after the increment counter value reaches "95000" and after the win limit device is activated (hereinafter "B") differs. As a result, in the example of (A), it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by immediately notifying the player that the win limit device has been activated after the power is restored, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. On the other hand, in the example of (B), by executing an immediate notification after the power is restored, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the current situation and the necessary operations, and to allow the employee to take appropriate action.

In addition, the operation notification of the acquisition limit device in (a)(d) informs the player that it is difficult to play any more, and that the player is prompted to operate the counting button 20 to count (a necessary operation), and various other attentions, making it easier for the player to recognize the situation, and preventing a decline in interest in playing. On the other hand, in the immediate notification after recovery in (b)(c), the same message as in (a)(d) is displayed as "acquisition limit device in operation," but the message "please clear the RWM," which is not displayed in (a)(d), is displayed. In other words, the notification mode in (a)(d) is different from the notification mode in (b)(c). This allows for appropriate notification to be given for each situation, preventing a decline in interest in playing for players, and making it easier for employees to understand the necessary operation (the need to clear the RWM).

In addition, in the immediate notification after recovery in (c) of (B), a notification similar to the notification of the operation of the acquisition limit device in (d) of (A) may be made. Specifically, in (c) of (B), notifications such as "Acquisition limit device is operating, today's game is over", "Please press the count button to count", "Be careful not to get addicted!", and "Be careful not to forget to take your cards!" may be made. For example, if the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off as soon as the screen in (a) of (B) is displayed, there is a possibility that a player is still seated in front of the gaming machine. In that case, if the notification in (c) of (B) is made, the player who is still seated may be confused. Therefore, assuming such a scenario, the immediate notification after recovery in (c) of (B) may be made similar to the notification of the operation of the acquisition limit device in (d) of (A).

Also, if the power is restored before a predetermined time (e.g., one hour) has elapsed since the screen display of (a) in (b), the notification may be made immediately after restoration in (c) in (b) in the same manner as the notification of the operation of the winning limit device in (d) in (a) in (b). In this way, even if the power is restored when there is a possibility that a player is seated, a notification similar to the notification of the operation of the winning limit device in (d) in (a) is made, so that the player can be made to recognize that it is difficult to continue playing without being confused. On the other hand, if the power is restored after the predetermined time (e.g., one hour) has elapsed, it is highly likely that the player is not seated, and an employee can be made to take appropriate action (clear the RWM).

(Another example during a jackpot game)
In Fig. 152, Fig. 158, and Fig. 159, the notification mode when the increment counter reaches "95000" during a big win game has been described, but the notification mode is not limited to this and may be configured as follows. For example, when the increment counter reaches "95000" in Fig. 152(d), an image with a closed shutter image (an image that blocks the performance during a big win game) is displayed as a winning limit device operation standby state. Then, an image such as "You are winning big. Please continue playing. After the win, the winning limit device will be activated and the game will end" is displayed on the front side of the shutter image. At this time, "Be careful not to get addicted!", "Be careful not to forget to take the card!", and "Press the count button to count" are displayed on the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device). Then, the display is continued until the final round, and when the final round is ended, the first image display device 70 to the fourth image display device 73 are darkened, and "Winning limit device is operating, today's game is over" (standby information) is displayed on the first image display device 70. In this case, the completion effect is not executed, but may be executed and the first image display device 70 to the fourth image display device 73 may be darkened after the completion effect is finished. Also, information (count number information) related to winning into the big prize winning hole 50 per round may be displayed on the front side of the shutter image. For example, if 10 balls can win per round, 10 count images may be displayed and one count image may be erased each time one ball wins into the big prize winning hole 50. Also, information "Acquired XXX/YYY" (acquired information) indicating the game medium acquired in the big prize game and information "ZZZZ" (total acquired information) indicating the game medium acquired in consecutive big prize games as shown in FIG. 152 may be displayed on the front side of the shutter image. Also, only waiting information may be displayed on the front side of the shutter image, and the count number information, acquisition information, and total acquisition information may be displayed on the third image display device 72 and the fourth image display device 73. By displaying the standby information as the standby state for the win limit device to be activated in this manner, it is possible to make the player more aware that the win limit device will be activated after the big win game ends.

If the normal symbol display 62 is displaying a changing normal symbol and the state transitions to the maximum win device operation standby state, the display of the changing normal symbol may be continued. Also, if the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44 after the state transitions to the maximum win device operation standby state, the display of the changing normal symbol may be started. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the act of passing the game ball through the normal symbol gate 44 from being wasted, even if the state transitions to the maximum win device operation standby state. Furthermore, if the maximum win device is activated while the normal symbol is being displayed, the normal symbol display 62 is turned off even if the display of the changing normal symbol is in the middle of being displayed.

Figure 160 is a diagram showing an example of a case where power is restored during information output. Specifically, suppose that the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off when HC/fraud monitoring information (acquisition limit device operation information) is generated in step S450-6-8 in the "acquisition limit device operation determination process" and this is being sent (output) to the frame control board 120 in step S600-2 of the "HC/fraud monitoring information management process", or when the HC/fraud monitoring information (acquisition limit device operation information) is being sent (output) to the dedicated unit 170 in step W503 in the "frame control board gaming machine information notification process". Therefore, the output control of the "HC/fraud monitoring information" in the figure may be read by the main control board 110 or the frame control board 120. In addition, case (a) is a case where the ball removal operation in progress flag is not determined to be present in step W151 of the "frame control board ball removal operation processing" when power is restored (i.e., the ball removal operation is not in progress), and case (b) is a case where the ball removal operation in progress flag is determined to be present in step W151 of the "frame control board ball removal operation processing" when power is restored (i.e., the ball removal operation is in progress).

First, in case (i), the value of the increment counter reaches "95,000" at timing (a), the acquisition upper limit device activation flag is turned ON at timing (b), and "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information in which Bit 6 of fraud detection status 1 is "1") is turned ON (output) at timing (c). The output period of "HC/fraud monitoring information" is from timing (c) to timing (e), and if it is active from (c) to (e), it is considered to have been output normally.

Then, suppose that the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (due to a power outage, disconnection, etc.) at timing (d) during the output period of the "HC/fraud monitoring information". In this case, since the power supply was cut off before the output period of the "HC/fraud monitoring information" has elapsed, for example, if the main control board 110 is sending "HC/fraud monitoring information" to the frame control board 120, the transmission and reception between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 is not completed normally, and if the frame control board 120 is sending "HC/fraud monitoring information" to the dedicated unit 170, the transmission and reception between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 is not completed normally. Note that the value of the increment counter falls, as it is initialized when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off.

Then, at timing (f), the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored. At this time, if the ball removal is OFF (it is not determined that the ball removal operation in progress flag is present), the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information in which Bit 6 of fraud detection status 1 is "1") is turned ON (output) from that timing. It is then output until timing (g), at which point transmission and reception between the main control board 110 and frame control board 120 is completed normally, or transmission and reception between the frame control board 120 and dedicated unit 170 is completed normally.

Then, at the subsequent timing (h), certain control processes are restricted (steps S120, S130, S200, S300, S400, and S450 of the "main control board timer interrupt process" are not executed), and the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned OFF by an employee at timing (i), and then, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned ON at timing (j) accompanied by an RWM clear operation, the win limit device activation flag is turned OFF.

In this way, if the ball removal is OFF (the ball removal operation in progress flag is not determined to be present) when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored at timing (f), it is possible to turn on (output) the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information that Bit 6 of the fraud detection status 1 is "1") again from timing (f).

On the other hand, in case (b), if the ball removal is ON (the ball removal operation in progress flag is determined to be present) when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored at timing (f), the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information that Bit 6 of the fraud detection state 1 is "1") is not turned ON (not output) from that timing. In this case, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned OFF→ON again after the processing of steps W152 to W159 of the "frame control board ball removal operation processing" is completed, the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information that Bit 6 of the fraud detection state 1 is "1") is turned ON (transmitted) from that timing.

In this way, if the ball removal is ON (the ball removal operation in progress flag is determined to be present) when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored at timing (f), the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information in which Bit 6 of the fraud detection status 1 is "1") is restricted from being turned ON again (output) from timing (f).

As a result, even if the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off while "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information in which Bit 6 of Fraud Detection Status 1 is "1") is being output, the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information in which Bit 6 of Fraud Detection Status 1 is "1") is output again at a specified timing, preventing the inability to send or receive necessary information and improving the accuracy of information transmission.

In addition, whether or not the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information in which Bit 6 of Fraud Detection State 1 is "1") is re-output depends on whether the ball removal is ON or OFF when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored at timing (f). This prevents the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information in which Bit 6 of Fraud Detection State 1 is "1") from being re-output even when the ball removal operation is in progress, which can lead to the player being mistaken into thinking that information indicating that the ball removal operation is in progress has been output.

In addition, the ball removal operation process and the re-output process of "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information in which Bit 6 of fraud detection status 1 is "1") are not mixed, which prevents the control process of the frame control board 120 from becoming complicated.

In case (b), the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information in which Bit 6 of Fraud Detection State 1 is "1") may be re-output at timing (f), or if the ball removal is turned OFF immediately at timing (f), the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information in which Bit 6 of Fraud Detection State 1 is "1") may be re-output at timing (f). This eliminates the need to turn the power of the gaming machine 1 OFF and then ON again after steps W152 to W159 of the "Frame Control Board Ball Removal Operation Processing" are completed, improving work efficiency.

Note that when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored at timing (f), the ball removal is ON (the ball removal operation flag is determined to be present), and the restriction on turning "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information in which Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 is "1") ON again (output) from timing (f) is interpreted as including the interpretation that it should not be turned ON again at timing (f), but on the other hand, if the ball removal is turned OFF immediately at timing (f) as described above, it may be turned ON again (turning it ON again may be permitted at timing (f)).

Figure 161 shows an example of the information output timing for each situation. Specifically, it shows the information output timing when not in a jackpot (during a fluctuation display, during an interval between fluctuations) and the information output timing when in a jackpot.

First, in the case of a non-jackpot (during a fluctuation display, during an interval between fluctuations), the value of the increment counter reaches "95,000" at timing (a), the acquisition limit device activation flag is turned ON at timing (b), "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information that Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 is "1") is turned ON (output) at timing (c), and output is completed normally at timing (d). Then, at the subsequent timing (e), specific control processing is restricted (the processing of steps S120, S130, S200, S300, S400, and S450 of the "main control board timer interrupt processing" is not executed). In other words, in the case of non-jackpot (during fluctuation display, during inter-fluctuation interval), the period from when the increment counter reaches "95000" until the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information in which Bit 6 of the fraud detection state 1 is "1") is turned ON (output) is shorter than in the case of a jackpot described later, and the period from when the increment counter reaches "95000" until the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information in which Bit 6 of the fraud detection state 1 is "1") is turned ON (output) is roughly unchanging and constant. Note that this "roughly unchanging and constant" is because, as described above, when the winning limit device is activated after waiting for the pattern to be determined and stopped, the timing at which the pattern is determined and stopped varies slightly depending on the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) being executed. On the other hand, if the winning limit device is activated without waiting for the pattern to be determined and stopped (it activates as soon as the increment counter reaches 95,000), then it can be said that the period from when the increment counter value reaches "95,000" to when the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information in which Bit 6 of Fraud Detection Status 1 is "1") is turned ON (output) is unchanging and constant.

Next, in the case of a jackpot, the value of the increment counter reaches "95000" at timing (a), the operation recognition flag is turned ON at timing (b) (see the acquisition upper limit device operation determination process in FIG. 44), and when the jackpot game (including the completion performance here) ends at timing (c), the operation recognition flag is turned OFF and the acquisition upper limit device operation flag is turned ON. Then, at timing (d), the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information in which Bit 6 of the fraud detection state 1 is "1") is turned ON (output), and at timing (e), the output is completed normally. Then, at the following timing (f), a specific control process is restricted (the processes of steps S120, S130, S200, S300, S400, and S450 of the "main control board timer interrupt process" are not executed). Note that timing (a) may be the first round of a jackpot game or the tenth round of a jackpot game. In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned "Type 1/Type 2" type, it is also assumed that the "small win game" is in progress. Therefore, depending on the timing when the value of the increment counter reaches "95000", the period until the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information in which Bit 6 of the fraud detection state 1 is "1") is turned ON is variable and indefinite. In other words, in the case of a big win, the period from when the value of the increment counter reaches "95000" until the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information in which Bit 6 of the fraud detection state 1 is "1") is turned ON (output) is longer than in the case of a non-big win described above, and the period from when the value of the increment counter reaches "95000" until the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information in which Bit 6 of the fraud detection state 1 is "1") is turned ON (output) is variable and indefinite.

In this way, the period from when the value of the increment counter reaches "95000" until the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information in which Bit 6 of the fraud detection state 1 is "1") is turned ON (output) is made different between during non-jackpot play and during jackpot play. As a result, during non-jackpot play, the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information in which Bit 6 of the fraud detection state 1 is "1") is output quickly, allowing the state of the gaming machine 1 (such as the gaming machine information center) to grasp in real time, and improving the management performance of the gaming machine 1. On the other hand, during jackpot play, the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information in which Bit 6 of the fraud detection state 1 is "1") is output, even though the jackpot play is in progress, which can prevent confusion for the administrator.
Furthermore, if such confusion were to occur, it would be necessary to check the gaming machine 1, which could cause discomfort to the player. In contrast, this configuration can prevent such a situation. In this way, the accuracy of information transmission can be improved.

In addition, during a jackpot, "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information that Bit 6 of Fraud Detection Status 1 is "1") may be output when the value of the increment counter reaches "95000".

Figure 162 shows a case where an abnormality occurs after the earning limit device is activated. Specifically, it is assumed that an input (magnetic detection) is made to the main control board 110 from the first magnetic detection sensor 53a or the second magnetic detection sensor 53b after the earning limit device is activated.

At timing (a), the earning limit device activation command is received, and notifications of the earning limit device activation are displayed, such as "Earning limit device activated, play ends for today", "Please press the counting button to count", "Be careful not to get addicted", and "Be careful not to forget to remove your cards!", the audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the sound "Earning limit device activated", and the frame lighting device 10 flashes white.

Then, at timing (b), an input (magnetic detection) is made from the first magnetic detection sensor 53a or the second magnetic detection sensor 53b to the main control board 110. It is assumed that timing (b) occurs 5 seconds after timing (a). In this case, according to the priority order of the notification event type described in FIG. 129, a notification of fraud detection 1 (magnet detection error, priority order 8) is executed instead of the acquisition limit device operation (priority order 9) (with the exception of screen notification). Specifically, the audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs a voice message saying "A magnet has been detected" in "audio notification (volume MAX)" and a warning sound of a "siren," displays an icon image of "magnet detection" on the third image display device 72 (left image display device), and causes the frame lighting device 10 to flash in red (40% brightness).

At this time, the first image display device 70 continues to display "Earning limit device in operation, today's game is over" (the exception mentioned above), but does not display "Press the count button to count", "Be careful not to get addicted!", or "Be careful not to forget to take your card!". After that, when the input (magnetic detection) from the first magnetic detection sensor 53a or the second magnetic detection sensor 53b to the main control board 110 stops at timing (c), the notification of the above-mentioned fraud detection 1 (magnet detection error, priority 8) ends, and the operation notification of the earning limit device is executed again. However, since more than 10 seconds have passed since timing (a) at the time of timing (c), the operation notification of the earning limit device by the audio output device 9 has not been executed, and the operation notification is executed by the first image display device 70 and the frame lighting device 10.

In this way, if an input (magnetic detection) is received from the first magnetic detection sensor 53a or the second magnetic detection sensor 53b to the main control board 110 even after the earning limit device has been activated, a notification of fraud detection 1 (magnet detection error) is issued. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in security performance after the earning limit device has been activated.

In addition, if an input (magnetic detection) is received from the first magnetic detection sensor 53a or the second magnetic detection sensor 53b to the main control board 110 even after the earning limit device has been activated, an alert is issued according to the priority order of the alert event type described in FIG. 129. This prevents the alert priority from changing just because the earning limit device has been activated, and allows for accurate alerts.

At timing (b), the first image display device 70 continues to display "Earning limit device activated, play ends for today" but hides "Press the count button to count", "Be careful not to get addicted!" and "Be careful not to forget to take your cards!". This allows the employee to recognize that the earning limit device has been activated, but prevents the employee from noticing the "Magnet detected" icon image displayed on the third image display device 72 due to too much information coming into view.

In addition, at timing (c), when there is no longer any input (magnetic detection) from the first magnetic detection sensor 53a or the second magnetic detection sensor 53b to the main control board 110, the operation notification of the acquisition limit device is executed again. This allows the user to recognize that the acquisition limit device has continued to be in a state after it has been activated. This allows the user to take the appropriate action (RWM clear operation).

At timing (b), the message "Winning limit device in operation, today's game play has ended" may also be hidden on the first image display device 70. This allows the employee to focus on the icon image "Magnet detected" displayed on the third image display device 72.

In addition, at timing (b), the first image display device 70 may continue to display messages such as "Press the count button to count", "Watch out for getting addicted", and "Watch out for forgetting to take your card!". This allows the display content of the first image display device 70 to remain unchanged from timing (a), thereby reducing the burden on display control.

Figure 163 shows a case where an abnormality occurs after the acquisition limit device is activated. Specifically, it is assumed that an input (radio detection) is made from the radio wave detection sensor 54a to the frame control board 120 after the acquisition limit device is activated.

At timing (a), the earning limit device activation command is received, and notifications of the earning limit device activation are displayed, such as "Earning limit device activated, play ends for today", "Please press the counting button to count", "Be careful not to get addicted", and "Be careful not to forget to remove your cards!", the audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the sound "Earning limit device activated", and the frame lighting device 10 flashes white.

After that, at timing (b), an input (radio wave detection) is made from the radio wave detection sensor 54a to the frame control board 120. In this case, according to the priority order of the notification event type described in FIG. 129, the execution of the acquisition limit device operation (priority order 9) is maintained, and the notification of the illegal radio wave detection error (priority order 10) is executed only by the third image display device 72 (left image display device). Specifically, the first image display device 70 continues to display the acquisition limit device operation notification, "Acquisition limit device in operation, today's game is over", but "Press the count button to count", "Be careful not to get addicted!", and "Be careful not to forget to take your card!" are not displayed, and the third image display device 72 (left image display device) displays an icon image of "illegal radio wave detection". In addition, the sound output device 9 repeatedly outputs the sound "acquisition limit device in operation", and the frame lighting device 10 flashes white.

After that, when input (radio wave detection) from the radio wave detection sensor 54a to the frame control board 120 ceases at timing (c), the "Unauthorized radio wave detected" display that was being executed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device) ends, and the operation notification of the acquisition limit device is executed again. However, since more than 10 seconds have passed since timing (a) at the time of timing (c), the operation notification of the acquisition limit device is not executed by the audio output device 9, and the operation notification is executed by the first image display device 70 and the frame lighting device 10.

In this way, if an input (radio wave detection) is received from the radio wave detection sensor 54a to the frame control board 120 even after the acquisition limit device has been activated, an unauthorized radio wave detection error is notified. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in security performance after the acquisition limit device has been activated.

In addition, if an input (radio detection) is received from the radio wave detection sensor 54a to the frame control board 120 after the acquisition limit device has been activated, an alert will be issued according to the priority order of the notification event type described in FIG. 129. This prevents the notification priority from changing just because the acquisition limit device has been activated, and allows for accurate alerts.

At timing (b), the first image display device 70 continues to display "Earning limit device in operation, play ends for today" but hides "Press the count button to count", "Be careful not to get addicted", and "Be careful not to forget to remove your cards!". This allows the employee to recognize that the earning limit device has been activated, but prevents the employee from noticing the icon image "H66 Unauthorized radio wave detected" displayed on the third image display device 72 due to too much information coming into view.

In addition, at timing (c), when the radio wave detection sensor 54a stops inputting (detecting radio waves) to the frame control board 120, the system is set to again notify the operation of the acquisition limit device. This allows the user to recognize that the acquisition limit device has continued to operate. This allows the user to take appropriate action (clear the RWM).

In addition, at timing (b), the display of "Winning limit device in operation, today's game ends" may also be hidden on the first image display device 70. This allows the employee to focus on the icon image "H66 Unauthorized radio wave detected" displayed on the third image display device 72.

In addition, at timing (b), the first image display device 70 may continue to display messages such as "Press the count button to count", "Watch out for getting addicted", and "Watch out for forgetting to take your card!". This allows the display content of the first image display device 70 to remain unchanged from timing (a), thereby reducing the burden on display control.

In addition, the explanation has been given using as examples "Fraud Detection 1 (Magnet Detection Error)," which has a higher priority than the "Earning Limit Device Activated (Priority 9)," and "Unauthorized Radio Wave Detection Error (Priority 10)," which has a lower priority than the "Earning Limit Device Activated (Priority 9)," as shown in FIG. 129, but the same can be done for other notification events. For example, a notification event with a higher priority than the "Earning Limit Device Activated (Priority 9)" shown in FIG. 129 may be configured in the same way as the above-mentioned "Fraud Detection 1 (Magnet Detection Error)," and a notification event with a lower priority than the "Earning Limit Device Activated (Priority 9)" may be configured in the same way as the above-mentioned "Unauthorized Radio Wave Detection Error."

(Example of a presentation in which the number of game balls owned by a player is counted while waiting for customers)
Figure 164 shows an example of a presentation in which the number of game balls owned by a player is counted while the player is waiting for customers.

As shown in FIG. 164(a), in the waiting state where no variable performance is being performed and the player is waiting for a customer, the first image display device 70 displays three performance patterns 70a, and the frame control display 125 and the number of game balls display 135 display "9000," which is the number of game balls owned by the player.

When the count button 20 is operated in this state, counting of the number of game balls owned by the player begins, and a count notification effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 164(b). Specifically, an icon image of "Counting in progress" and a counting quantity gauge image in which the number and color of the colored gauges change according to the counting quantity in units of 1000 (at this point, there is one blue colored gauge) are displayed, and the voice "Counting in progress" is output. At this time, "8750" is displayed on the frame control display 125 and game ball count display 135.

After that, when the counted number of game balls reaches 1000 (the first achievement presentation value), as shown in FIG. 164(c), the number of blue colored gauges in the counted number gauge image increases by one to two, and the achievement presentation is executed. Specifically, the sound "Yay!" corresponding to the first achievement presentation value is output. At this time, "8000" is displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135.

Then, as the counted number of game balls increases by 1000, the number of blue colored gauges in the counting number gauge image increases by one, and when the counted number of game balls reaches 3000, as shown in FIG. 164(d), the number of blue colored gauges in the counting number gauge image increases by one to four, and the sound "Counting process in progress" is output. At this time, "6000" is displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135.

In addition, when the counted number of game balls reaches 5,000 (the second achievement presentation value), as shown in FIG. 164(e), the number of blue colored gauges in the counted number gauge image increases by one to six, and the achievement presentation is executed. Specifically, the sound "Yay! Yay!", which corresponds to the second achievement presentation value, is output. At this time, the frame control display 125 and game ball count display 135 display "4,000."

After that, when the counted number of game balls reaches 9,000 and the number of game balls owned by the player becomes "0," a counting end effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 164 (f). Specifically, an icon image stating "Counting process completed" is displayed, and a voice stating "Counting process completed" is output. At this time, 10 blue colored gauges are displayed as the counting number gauge image, and "0" is displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135.

After 5 seconds have passed, the audio output of "Counting process completed" stops, as shown in FIG. 164(g), and after another 30 seconds have passed, the icon image of "Counting process completed" and the counting quantity gauge image are erased, as shown in FIG. 164(h).

(Example of a performance when the number of game balls owned by a player is counted during a variable performance)
Figure 165 shows an example of a presentation in which the number of game balls owned by a player is counted during a variable presentation.

As shown in FIG. 165(a), in the waiting state where no variable performance is being performed and the player is waiting for a customer, the first image display device 70 displays three performance patterns 70a, and the frame control display 125 and the number of game balls display 135 display "9000," which is the number of game balls owned by the player.

When the count button 20 is operated in this state, counting of the number of game balls owned by the player begins, and a count notification effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 165(b). Specifically, an icon image of "Counting process in progress" and a counting quantity gauge image (at this point, there is one blue colored gauge) are displayed, and the voice "Counting process in progress" is output. At this time, "8750" is displayed on the frame control display 125 and game ball count display 135.

After that, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45 and the variable presentation starts, as shown in FIG. 165(c), the reserved icon displayed for a moment in the first reserved icon display area 70B shifts and is displayed as the icon in the icon display area 70C. In addition, the variable presentation of the presentation pattern 70a starts behind the icon image of "Counting process in progress," and the counting quantity gauge image becomes semi-transparent and is displayed in a non-priority state behind the presentation pattern 70a.

When the counted number of game balls reaches 1000 (the first achievement presentation value), the number of blue colored gauges in the counted number gauge image increases by one to two, and the achievement presentation is executed. Specifically, the sound "Yay!" corresponding to the first achievement presentation value is output. At this time, the number of blue colored gauges in the counted number gauge image increases by one to two, and the frame control display 125 and game ball count display 135 display "8000."

When the left and right performance symbols 70a temporarily stop at the same symbol and a normal reach performance starts, as shown in FIG. 165(d), the voices "Reach!" and "Counting processing in progress" are output. At this time, the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135 display "7250."

After that, when the normal reach effect time has elapsed, the development effect to the SP reach effect begins, as shown in FIG. 165(e). Specifically, the left and right effect patterns 70a are displayed in a reduced size at the top of the screen, and become numbers only, and the development effect image is displayed behind the icon image "Counting process in progress." In addition, a development effect sound and the voice "Counting process in progress" are output. At this time, the number of blue colored gauges in the counting amount gauge image increases by one to three, and the frame control display 125 and game ball count display 135 display "7000."

Then, when the performance time of the development performance has elapsed, the SP Reach performance starts, as shown in FIG. 165(f). Specifically, the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are hidden, and the SP Reach performance image is displayed. In addition, the SP Reach BGM and the sound "Counting processing in progress" are output. At this time, "6750" is displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135.

Furthermore, when the performance time of the SP reach performance has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 165(g), the development performance to the SP reach performance starts. Specifically, the icon display area 70C (including the icon) is hidden, the three performance patterns 70a are displayed in a reduced size in the upper right corner of the screen, and a development performance image is displayed behind the icon image of "Counting processing in progress." In addition, a development performance sound effect and the voice of "Counting processing in progress" are output. At this time, "5500" is displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135.

After that, when the performance time for the development performance has elapsed, the SPSP reach performance starts, as shown in FIG. 165 (h). Specifically, an SPSP reach performance image is displayed. In addition, the SPSP reach BGM and the sound "Counting processing in progress" are output. At this time, "5250" is displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135.

If the SPSP reach effect is a miss and the effect period has elapsed, the first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C (including the icon), and the second hold icon display area 70D are redisplayed, and after the effect pattern 70a is displayed as stopped (after the state becomes one where the player is waiting for a customer), the counting quantity gauge image is displayed in front of the effect pattern 70a.

(Example of a presentation in which the number of game balls owned by a player is counted after the acquisition limit device is activated)
Figure 166 shows an example of a presentation in which the number of game balls owned by a player is counted after the acquisition limit device is activated.

When the maximum win device is activated following the end of a jackpot game, a notification effect for the activation of the maximum win device is executed, as shown in FIG. 166(a). Specifically, the first image display device 70 changes to a black background and the effect pattern 70a is hidden. In addition, text images of "Maximum win device activated. Today's game is over" and "Press the count button to count" are displayed, along with cautionary images of "Be careful not to get addicted!" and "Be careful not to forget to remove your cards!", and a sound of "Maximum win device activated" is output. At this time, "95,000" is displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135.

When the count button 20 is operated in this state, counting of the number of game balls owned by the player begins, and a count notification effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 166(b). Specifically, an icon image of "Counting process in progress" and a counting quantity gauge image (one blue colored gauge at this point) are displayed, and the voice "Counting process in progress" is output. At this time, "94750" is displayed on the frame control display 125 and game ball count display 135. Note that after the acquisition limit device is activated, the effect image is no longer displayed in front of the counting quantity gauge image.

When the counted number of game balls reaches 1000 (the first achievement presentation value), as shown in FIG. 166(c), the number of blue colored gauges in the counted number gauge image increases by one to two, and the achievement presentation is executed. Specifically, the sound "Yay!" corresponding to the first achievement presentation value is output. At this time, the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135 display "94000."

After that, the number of blue colored gauges in the counting number gauge image increases by one as the counting number of game balls increases by 1000, and when the counting number of game balls reaches 10,000 (the third achievement presentation value), as shown in FIG. 166(d), the number of blue colored gauges in the counting number gauge image reaches MAX and an achievement presentation is executed. Specifically, the sound "Amazing" corresponding to the third achievement presentation value is output, and an presentation is executed in which the colored gauge goes up by one rank. At this time, "85,000" is displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135.

When the 10,250th game ball is counted, the colored gauge of the counting number gauge image returns to one and changes to yellow. After that, the number of colored gauges increases every time the number of counted game balls increases by 1,000, and the achievement effect and color change of the colored gauge are executed repeatedly every time the number of counted game balls increases by 10,000 (becoming the achievement effect value).

After that, when the counted number of game balls reaches 90,000 (the 11th achievement presentation value), as shown in FIG. 166(e), the number of the purple colored gauge in the counted number gauge image reaches MAX and the achievement presentation is executed. Specifically, the sound "Amazing! Amazing!" corresponding to the 11th achievement presentation value is output, and the colored gauge goes up one rank. At this time, "5000" is displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135.

After that, when the counted number of game balls reaches 95,000 and the number of game balls owned by the player becomes "0", the counting end effect is executed as shown in FIG. 166 (f). Specifically, an icon image of "Counting process completed" is displayed and a voice of "Counting process completed" is output. At this time, six rainbow colored gauges are displayed as the counting number gauge image, and the text image of "Press the count button to count" is erased. At this time, "0" is displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135.

After 5 seconds have passed, as shown in FIG. 166(g), the audio output of "Counting process completed" stops, and a congratulatory display of "Congratulations!" is displayed to congratulate the player on counting 95,000 game balls, which activates the maximum acquisition device, and the error code "CP" is displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135, indicating that the maximum acquisition device has been activated.

After that, the number of game balls "0" and the error code "CP" are displayed repeatedly every 5 seconds. Then, when 30 seconds have passed since the counting process was completed, as shown in FIG. 166(h), the icon image "Counting process completed" and the counting quantity gauge image are erased, and the counting notification presentation and counting completion presentation end.

In this way, according to Figs. 164 to 166, while the counting process is being carried out to count the number of game balls owned by the player, it is possible to execute a counting effect (counting notification effect, achievement effect) that indicates that the counting process is in progress. This makes it possible to prevent the player from getting bored while counting the number of game balls owned by the player, and also makes it possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, according to Figs. 164 to 166, it is possible to execute an end effect (count end effect, celebration effect) that indicates that the counting process has ended in response to the end of the counting process that counts the number of game balls owned by the player. This allows the player to accurately recognize that the counting process has ended, and makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of the player continuing to operate the count button 20 even though the counting process has ended.

Also, according to Figs. 164 to 166, when a variable presentation is executed while a counting notification presentation is being executed, or when a counting notification presentation is executed during a variable presentation, the counting quantity gauge image is displayed in a restricted state (semi-transparent, in the layer behind presentation pattern 70a). This makes it possible to prevent the variable presentation from being hindered by the counting notification presentation, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Also, according to Figs. 164 to 166, when a specific effect (development effect, SP/SPSP reach effect) that anticipates the execution of a jackpot game is executed during a variable effect, it is possible to hide the various icons (the icon in question, the reserved icon) and the icon display area, while continuing to display the "counting process in progress" icon image and the counting quantity gauge image. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that the counting process is being executed even during a specific effect.

In addition, according to Figures 164 to 166, after the acquisition upper limit device is activated and the counting of the number of game balls owned by the player is completed, it is possible to display an error code indicating that the acquisition upper limit device has been activated on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135. This makes it possible for the player to properly recognize that the acquisition upper limit device has been activated.

In addition, according to Figures 164 to 166, after the acquisition upper limit device is activated and the counting of the number of game balls owned by the player is completed, it is possible to alternately display an error code indicating that the acquisition upper limit device has been activated and the number of game balls "0" on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135. This makes it possible for the player to properly recognize that the counting has ended.

In the counting notification performance, the counting quantity gauge image, which increases in number according to the counting quantity, may not be displayed so as to overlap the performance pattern 70a from the front to the back, but may be displayed in a position where it does not overlap the performance pattern 70a from the front to the back, or may be displayed in a reduced size in a position where it does not overlap the performance pattern 70a from the front to the back, or may be displayed so as to overlap the performance pattern 70a from the front to the back while waiting for customers, but may be displayed in a reduced size in a position where it does not overlap the performance pattern 70a from the front to the back while the variable performance is being performed.

In addition, in the counting notification performance, instead of displaying a counting gauge image in which the number increases according to the counting amount, a gauge image in which the length increases according to the counting amount may be displayed, or a number image in which the number increases according to the counting amount may be displayed, or a meter image in which the indicated value increases according to the counting amount may be displayed.

In addition, after the acquisition limit device has been activated and counting of the number of game balls owned by the player has been completed, rather than displaying an error code indicating that the acquisition limit device has been activated on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135, an error code may be displayed on either the frame control display 125 or the game ball count display 135, and the number of game balls owned by the player may be displayed on the other.

In addition, after the acquisition limit device is activated and counting of the number of game balls owned by the player is completed, the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135 may not display the number of game balls owned by the player, but may instead display an error code indicating that the acquisition limit device has been activated.

In addition, the effects that correspond to the counted amount (count notification effects, achievement effects, congratulatory effects) cannot be customized even by performing operations to customize the game effects, but it may be possible to customize one or more of the count notification effects, achievement effects, and congratulatory effects.

Next, we will use Figures 167 to 174 to explain the output of specific sounds in variable performance patterns.

(Regarding specific sounds)
First, the specific sound refers to a "temporary stop sound" output from the audio output device 9 when the performance pattern 70a temporarily stops, and a "pseudo pattern derivation sound" output from the audio output device 9 when a pseudo pattern suggesting the execution of a pseudo consecutive performance is temporarily stopped as a middle pattern.

(About the temporary stop sound)
The "temporary stop sound" is, for example, a sound that is output when the performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in the order of left, right, and middle patterns in the case of variable presentation pattern 1 (normal variation), and when the last middle pattern temporarily stops; and, in the case of variable presentation pattern 2 (shortened variation) or variable presentation pattern 35 (ultra-shortened variation), the left, middle, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop simultaneously, and the left, middle, and right patterns temporarily stop simultaneously.

For example, in the case of variable presentation pattern 5 (normal reach variation), the sound is output when the final middle pattern temporarily stops after the presentation pattern 70a temporarily stops in the order of the left and right patterns to form a reach, and in the case of variable presentation pattern 6 (SP reach variation), the sound is output when the final middle pattern temporarily stops after the presentation pattern 70a temporarily stops in the order of the left and right patterns to form a reach.

The "temporary stop sound" output in this manner serves the purpose of indicating that the performance pattern 70a will stop being displayed, and by hearing the "temporary stop sound," the player will be able to recognize that the variable performance has ended.

In the normal fluctuation, normal reach fluctuation, and SP reach fluctuation, the temporary stop sound is output when the final center symbol temporarily stops, but it may also be output when the left symbol temporarily stops and when the right symbol temporarily stops (the same or different temporary stop sound is output for all of the left, right, and center temporary stops). It may also be output either when the left symbol temporarily stops or when the right symbol temporarily stops (the same or different temporary stop sound is output for the left or right, and center temporary stops).

In addition, even when the same variable performance pattern is executed, the same "temporary stop sound" may be output depending on the performance mode (e.g., performance modes A to C), or different "temporary stop sounds" may be output.

The "temporary stop sound" may be output in either presentation mode A-C (normal gameplay state) or presentation mode D-E (special gameplay state), or it may be output in one of the modes but not the other.

The "temporary stop sound" output may be different between presentation modes A to C and presentation modes D to E. For example, the temporary stop sound output when the left presentation pattern 70a (right presentation pattern 70a) temporarily stops in presentation mode A may be different from the temporary stop sound output when the left presentation pattern 70a (right presentation pattern 70a) temporarily stops in presentation mode D, or the temporary stop sound output when the middle presentation pattern 70a temporarily stops in presentation mode A may be different from the temporary stop sound output when the middle presentation pattern 70a temporarily stops in presentation mode D. This makes it possible to recognize the game state from the difference in the temporary stop sound.

In addition, even when the same variable performance pattern (variable performance pattern 1) is executed, the "temporary stop sound" may be output, for example, in performance mode A but not in performance mode B.

In addition, even when the same variable performance pattern (variable performance pattern 1) is executed, for example, in performance mode A, the "temporary stop sound" is output only when the center performance pattern 70a temporarily stops, but in performance mode B, the "temporary stop sound" may be output when the left, right, and center performance patterns 70a temporarily stop.

When the same variable performance pattern (variable performance pattern 1) is executed, the "temporary stop sound" outputs a temporary stop sound when the left, right, and center performance patterns 70a temporarily stop, but only the temporary stop sound of the center performance pattern 70a may be different between performance modes A and B. For example, in performance mode A, a temporary stop sound of "bang" may be output when the left and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop, and a temporary stop sound of "peshi" may be output when the center performance pattern 70a temporarily stops, and in performance mode B, a temporary stop sound of "bang" may be output when the left and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop, and a temporary stop sound of "pop" may be output when the center performance pattern 70a temporarily stops. Also, the temporary stop sounds of the left and right performance patterns 70a may be different, and the temporary stop sound of the center performance pattern 70a may be the same.

In addition, in the "predictive chance eye effect", a different temporary stop sound may be output for each arrangement having a predetermined regularity. For example, when a combination of only blue effect patterns 70a temporarily stops as a result of variable effect pattern 1 being executed, when a combination of only green effect patterns 70a temporarily stops, and when a combination of only red effect patterns 70a temporarily stops, different temporary stop sounds (same color temporary stop sounds) may be output. Also, different types of effect images may be displayed depending on the type of effect mode. For example, in effect mode A, one effect image that covers the entire three effect patterns 70a may be displayed, and in effect mode B, three effect images that cover each of the three effect patterns 70a may be displayed.

In addition, although it has been stated that a temporary stop sound is output when the performance pattern 70a temporarily stops, a configuration in which a stop indication sound is output when the performance pattern 70a is displayed as stopped (definite stop) without outputting a temporary stop sound, and a configuration in which a temporary stop sound is output when the performance pattern 70a temporarily stops and a stop indication sound is output when the performance pattern 70a is displayed as stopped (definite stop) are also included in the output of specific sounds in this embodiment.

In addition, in the case of a temporary stop and a stop display (definite stop), the performance pattern 70a is easier to recognize than when high-speed fluctuations are being performed, so the temporary stop and the stop display (definite stop) are equivalent to a "recognizable display."

(About the pseudo-pattern derived sound)
Next, the "pseudo pattern derivation sound" is a sound that is output when, for example, the performance pattern 70a temporarily stops in the order of the left pattern and the right pattern to form a reach in a variable performance pattern in which a pseudo consecutive performance is executed, and then the pseudo pattern temporarily stops as a middle pattern, and a sound that is different from the temporary stop sound is output.

The "pseudo symbol derivation sound" is not limited to being output when the pseudo symbol temporarily stops as a middle symbol after a reach is formed, but can be output according to the pseudo consecutive performance mode. For example, if the pseudo symbol is temporarily stopped before a reach is formed and a pseudo consecutive performance is executed, the "pseudo symbol derivation sound" may be output at the timing when the pseudo symbol temporarily stops.

In addition, for example, in a variable presentation where a "pseudo success" is executed multiple times, such as in variable presentation pattern 10, the same "pseudo pattern derivation sound" may be output each time a pseudo consecutive success presentation is executed, which results in a pseudo consecutive presentation (as an example, the pseudo pattern temporarily stops), or a different "pseudo pattern derivation sound" may be output for the first pseudo consecutive success presentation and the second pseudo consecutive success presentation (for example, "ja-ki-in" the first time and "ka-ka-n" the second time). In addition, the "pseudo pattern derivation sound" may be common to multiple presentation modes, or may be different.

In addition, if there are multiple types of pseudo consecutive performances (pseudo consecutive performance 1, pseudo consecutive performance 2), different "pseudo symbol derivation sounds" may be output for pseudo consecutive performance 1 and pseudo consecutive performance 2. This makes it easier to recognize which pseudo consecutive performance is being performed, increasing interest in the game.

The provisional stop sound and the pseudo-pattern derivation sound will be described in more detail below.
FIG. 167 is a timing chart showing a variable performance pattern 5 (at the start) in which a normal reach is executed. For example, in the performance mode A, when the customer waiting waiting performance A is executed, a game ball enters the first start hole 45, and the variable performance pattern 5 is executed. In order to facilitate understanding of the invention, the description will be given together with the drawing in FIG. 172. In addition, as an example, the description will be given in a manner in which the temporary stop sound is output only when the performance pattern 70a in the middle is temporarily stopped, but as described above, it may be interpreted as a manner in which the temporary stop sound is output when the performance patterns 70a on the left and right are temporarily stopped.

The timing of T1 is when the jackpot is determined and a start command is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. Note that prior to this, winning commands (first special symbol storage command, first look-ahead command) have been sent in response to the game ball entering the first starting hole 45.

At the timing of T1, the display of the special symbol begins to change, and after a predetermined period of time has passed since the winning command was received, the first reserved number display area 70E is updated to "1", and a reserved icon is additionally displayed in the first display section (first area) of the first reserved icon display area 70B. In addition, horizontal scrolling of the normal background is being performed as the background image.

In addition, at the timing of T1, the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped, and the sound effects, variable BGM, and reach BGM are not output.

Next, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the start command, the first hold number display area 70E displays "0", and the hold icon HI displayed in the first display section of the first hold icon display area 70B starts to decrease (shift) to the icon display area 70C. In addition, the performance pattern 70a starts to display floating as a pre-change operation, the special pattern TZ starts to scroll vertically (update change), and the audible output of the changing BGM starts from the audio output device 9 (Fig. 172 (b)).

Next, at the timing of T3, the shift display of the reserved icon HI ends and the icon is displayed as the icon TI, after which the scrolling display (update change) of the performance pattern 70a begins (Figure 172 (c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, the first mode performance pattern 70a of the left pattern starts to temporarily stop (Fig. 172 (d) to (e)), and then the first mode performance pattern 70a of the right pattern starts to temporarily stop. Note that when the left pattern performance pattern 70a temporarily stops and when the right pattern performance pattern 70a temporarily stops, pre-stop operations are being performed.

Then, at the timing of T5, a reach is formed using the same effect pattern 70a (Fig. 172(e)), and a normal reach (N reach) is executed until the timing of T6. During the normal reach execution period, the variable BGM is stopped (muted) and the normal reach BGM is output.

Next, at the timing of T6, the pseudo symbol temporarily stops as the middle symbol performance symbol 70a. At this time, the normal reach BGM stops, and a pseudo symbol derivation sound is output as a sound effect. The pseudo symbol derivation sound is a single sound "ja-ki-n", and the output period is "1 second" (Fig. 172 (f)). Note that the pseudo symbol is a symbol that appears only in the variable performance pattern in which pseudo success and pseudo failure (Fig. 112) are executed. Also, when the pseudo symbol derivation sound is output, the temporary stop sound (for example, "peshi") is not output.

Next, at the timing of T7, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 70a start updating and changing again, and the pseudo 2-change performance of the pseudo consecutive performance starts. In the pseudo 2-change performance, the muted change BGM is audibly output.

In other words, when the pseudo symbol temporarily stops, the update fluctuation starts (again), and it is as if multiple fluctuation effects were being executed, including before the pseudo symbol stopped. On the other hand, after the pseudo symbol temporarily stops, it will not stop without the update fluctuation starting (again); the update fluctuation will always start (again). In other words, the "pseudo symbol derivation sound" that is output when the pseudo symbol temporarily stops plays the role of suggesting the start of the update fluctuation (again), and by hearing the "pseudo symbol derivation sound", the player will be able to recognize that the pseudo consecutive effect is being executed.

It has been mentioned that the reach effect may be more easily executed and the jackpot game may be more easily executed (higher jackpot expectation) when a variable performance with a start sound preview effect is executed than when a variable performance without a start sound preview effect is executed, but this relationship may also include the pseudo pattern derivation sound. For example, in the case of variable performance pattern 17, the pseudo success is executed twice, so the pseudo pattern derivation sound is output twice. In addition, by making the start sound preview effect easier to execute, the variable performance with the start sound preview effect may be configured to output the pseudo pattern derivation sound more easily than a variable performance without a start sound preview effect. In this way, when a start sound preview effect is executed, it is possible to predict the execution of a pseudo consecutive performance in the subsequent variable performance, and the development of the performance is easier to read, thereby improving the interest in the game.

It has also been mentioned that the reach effect may be more easily executed and the jackpot game may be more easily executed (higher jackpot expectation) when a variable performance with a start sound notice effect is executed than when a variable performance without a start sound notice effect is executed, but the variable performance with a start sound notice effect may be less likely to output a temporary stop sound when the middle performance pattern 70a temporarily stops in the first mode than a variable performance without a start sound notice effect. For example, the variable performance with an SP reach or SPSP reach is more likely to execute a start sound notice effect than a variable performance with a normal reach, and the variable performance with a start sound notice effect is more likely to output a temporary stop sound when the middle performance pattern 70a temporarily stops in the first mode than a variable performance without a start sound notice effect. As a result, when a start sound notice effect is executed, it is possible to predict the performance development (such as SP reach development) in the subsequent variable performance, and the performance development can be made easier to read, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in a variable performance in which the start sound notice performance is not performed, when the first variable performance is performed in which a temporary stop sound is output when the middle performance pattern 70a temporarily stops in the first mode, a special game is more likely to be performed when the second variable performance is performed in which a temporary stop sound is not output when the middle performance pattern 70a temporarily stops in the first mode. In other words, the second variable performance in which a temporary stop sound is not output when the middle performance pattern 70a temporarily stops in the first mode includes a variable performance pattern (variable performance pattern 15) in which a jackpot is announced by executing an SP reach, and a variable performance pattern (variable performance pattern 16) in which a jackpot is announced by executing an SPSP reach, but in these variable performance patterns, the temporary stop sound is not output when the middle performance pattern 70a temporarily stops in the first mode. This prevents the performance from becoming difficult to understand by overlapping the temporary stop sound with other sound effects (success sounds).

Figure 168 is a timing chart showing variable performance pattern 5 (at the end) in which a normal reach is executed. Note that in order to facilitate understanding of the invention, the explanation will be given in conjunction with the drawing in Figure 173. Note that, as an example, the explanation will be given in a mode in which the temporary stop sound is output only when the central performance pattern 70a temporarily stops, but as mentioned above, it may be interpreted as a mode in which the temporary stop sound is also output when the left and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop.

Until the time T8 is reached, the update fluctuation of the performance pattern 70a that started at the time T7 is being executed (Fig. 173 (g)-(h)). Then, at the time T8, the performance pattern 70a of the first mode of the left pattern starts to temporarily stop (Fig. 173 (h)), and then the performance pattern 70a of the first mode of the right pattern starts to temporarily stop. When the performance pattern 70a of the left pattern stops temporarily, and when the performance pattern 70a of the right pattern stops temporarily, the pre-stop action is being carried out.

Then, at the timing of T9, a reach is formed using the same effect pattern 70a (Fig. 173(i)), and a normal reach (N reach) is executed until the timing of T10. During the normal reach execution period, the variable BGM is stopped (muted) and the normal reach BGM is output.

Next, at the timing of T10, the first mode of the middle pattern performance pattern 70a temporarily stops. At this time, the normal reach BGM stops, the variable BGM is audibly output, and a temporary stop sound is output as a sound effect. The temporary stop sound in performance mode A is a single sound "peshi" and has an output period of "0.5 seconds" (Figure 173 (j)). In other words, it is possible to output the variable BGM and the temporary stop sound simultaneously. When the middle pattern performance pattern 70a temporarily stops, a pre-stop action is performed.

Next, at the timing of T11, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130, and the special symbol is displayed as stopped.

Next, at the timing of T12, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the stop command, the display of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ is stopped. Also, the disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is started, and at the timing of T13, the disappearance display of the icon TI ends, and at the timing of T14, the display time for the special pattern has elapsed and a standby period begins (Fig. 173 (l)).

Figure 169 is a timing chart showing variable presentation pattern 5 (winning limit device activated) in which a normal reach is executed. Note that to make the invention easier to understand, the explanation will be given in conjunction with the drawing in Figure 174. Also, only the differences from Figure 167 will be explained.

In Figure 169, the value of the increment counter at the time T5 does not reach "95,000" (Figure 174 (e)), and then at the time T5', for example, a game ball enters the general winning port 43, causing the value of the increment counter to be updated to "95,000".

In this case, the operation of the maximum win device causes the operation notification of the maximum win device to be executed, and therefore the pseudo symbol output sound that should be output at timing T6 is not output (Figure 174(e)'). Then, from then on, the operation notification of the maximum win device continues until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (Figure 174(f)).

Note that "no pseudo-pattern derivation sound is output" is intended to make the sound difficult to hear by completely stopping the output, but may also include a mode in which the pseudo-pattern derivation sound is made difficult to hear by lowering its output volume.

In addition, if the operation notification of the acquisition upper limit device is executed while the pseudo-pattern derivation sound is being output (Fig. 167 (f) to (g)), the output of the pseudo-pattern derivation sound may be stopped (e.g., cut off midway) or may be output to the end, even if the output period of the pseudo-pattern derivation sound has not elapsed.

In addition, in FIG. 169(e)', even if the value of the increment counter reaches "95,000", if the operation of the winning limit device is executed after the pattern is determined and stopped, a pseudo pattern derivation sound may be output in FIG. 169(f).

Also, even if the acquisition upper limit device is activated, the pseudo pattern derivation sound may be output at the original output timing depending on the variable performance pattern being executed. For example, if the acquisition upper limit device is activated while variable performance pattern 7 is being executed, the pseudo pattern derivation sound may not be output at the original output timing, and if the acquisition upper limit device is activated while variable performance pattern 10 is being executed, the pseudo pattern derivation sound may be output at the original output timing. In other words, the output may be limited in some cases and not limited in other cases (it may be possible to limit the output).

Figure 170 is a timing chart showing variable presentation pattern 5 (winning limit device activated) in which a normal reach is executed. Note that to make the invention easier to understand, the explanation will be given in conjunction with the drawing in Figure 174. Also, only the points that differ from Figure 168 will be explained.

In FIG. 170, the value of the increment counter at the time T9 does not reach "95,000" (FIG. 174 (i)), and then at the time T9', for example, a game ball enters the general winning slot 43, causing the value of the increment counter to be updated to "95,000".

In this case, the operation of the maximum win device causes a notification of the operation of the maximum win device, and therefore the temporary stop sound that should be output at timing T10 is not output (Figure 174(i)'). From then on, the notification of the operation of the maximum win device continues until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (Figure 174(j)).

Note that not outputting the temporary stop sound means making it difficult to hear by completely stopping the output, but it may also include making it difficult to hear by lowering the output volume of the temporary stop sound (the same applies below).

In addition, if an operation notification of the acquisition limit device is executed while the temporary stop sound is being output (Fig. 168 (j) to (l)), the output of the temporary stop sound may be stopped (e.g., cut off midway) or may be output to the end, even if the output period of the temporary stop sound has not elapsed.

Also, even if the value of the increment counter reaches "95,000" in FIG. 170(i)', if the operation of the winning limit device is executed after the pattern is determined and stopped, a temporary stop sound may be output in FIG. 170(j).

Also, even if the acquisition limit device is activated, the temporary stop sound may be output at the original output timing depending on the variable performance pattern being executed. For example, if the acquisition limit device is activated while variable performance pattern 1 is being executed, the temporary stop sound may not be output at the original output timing, and if the acquisition limit device is activated while variable performance pattern 6 is being executed, the temporary stop sound may be output at the original output timing. In other words, the output may be limited in some cases and not limited in other cases (it may be possible to limit the output).

In the examples of Figures 169 and 170, it was stated that when the pseudo symbol derivation sound is output while the operation notification of the acquisition limit device is executed, or when the temporary stop sound is output while the operation notification of the acquisition limit device is executed, it may be output to the end, but when a pseudo symbol derivation sound or a temporary stop sound is output as a one-shot (for example, a short sound), such as the pseudo symbol derivation sound or the temporary stop sound, it is output to the end (can be heard to the end) even if the operation notification of the acquisition limit device is executed during output, and when a sound that is not output as a one-shot, such as variable BGM, is output, it is preferable to stop the output (cannot be heard to the end). By configuring in this way, it is possible to omit the trouble of executing a process to stop something that is output as a short sound midway, and to simplify the control process. In addition, by executing a process to stop something that is not composed of a short sound, such as variable BGM, midway, it is possible to prompt the player to stop playing immediately.

Figure 171 is a timing chart showing variable presentation pattern 8 (at the end) in which an SPSP reach is executed. Note that an example in which variable presentation pattern 8 is executed in presentation mode A will be described. Note that, as mentioned above, it may also be interpreted as a mode in which a temporary stop sound is output when the left and right presentation patterns 70a temporarily stop.

First, until the timing of T1, the display of the special symbols is changed, and three performance symbols 70a and three special symbols TZ are updated and changed (scrolled display, switched display) in front of the Mode A background image that is scrolling horizontally. Also, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the changing BGM is audibly output.

Next, at the timing of T1, when the normal reach effect starts, in which the left and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped at the same symbol (for example, the 5 symbol in the first mode) and the center effect symbol 70a scrolls at a slow speed, the audible output of the variable BGM is stopped (muted) and the output of the normal reach BGM starts. Note that in Figure 171, the mode of the effect symbol 70a (first mode, numbers only) is shown below the item for the effect symbol. The T1 to T4 period of the normal reach is executed with the effect symbol 70a in the first mode.

Then, at the timing of T2, when a dark background image is displayed on the main display device 70 and a blackout effect starts, the effect pattern 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the screen, and a prompting effect encouraging the operation of the effect button 17 and the valid period of the effect button 17 start. Specifically, an operation prompting image imitating the effect button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, the audible output of the normal reach BGM is stopped (muted), and a prompt sound saying "press" is output from the audio output device 9.

After that, at the timing of T3, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, a successful development effect is executed, indicating that the development to the SP reach effect has been successful and that the SP reach effect will be executed. Specifically, a successful development image is displayed on the main display device 70, and an development sound saying "Good job" is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, at the timing of T4, when the execution period of the blackout effect has elapsed, the display of the SP reach background image and the output of the SP reach BGM begin, and the execution of the SP reach effect begins. At this time, the effect pattern 70a changes to a display mode of numbers only, and the left and right effect patterns are displayed in a smaller size than normal in the left and right corners of the upper left and right corners of the screen. Note that when the effect pattern 70a changes to a display mode of numbers only, and the left and right effect patterns are displayed in a smaller size than normal in the left and right corners of the upper left and right corners of the screen, no sound effects (display sounds, temporary stop sounds, etc.) are output from the audio output device 9, and the effect pattern 70a is displayed silently with the display mode and size changed.

Then, at the timing of T5, when the execution period of the SP reach performance has elapsed, the display of the SPSP reach background image and the output of the SPSP reach BGM begin, and the execution of the SPSP reach performance begins. At this time, the three performance patterns 70a are displayed in the upper left corner of the screen in a smaller size than normal (numbers only), and the first hold icon display area 70B becomes hidden along with the hold icon HI.

After that, at the timing of T6, in the final stage of the SPSP reach performance, the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped and the deciding performance begins. Note that the deciding performance in the SPSP reach may suggest whether or not a jackpot game will be executed by having the player operate the performance button 17, or it may suggest whether or not a jackpot game will be executed without having the player operate the performance button 17.

At the timing of T6, a failure to win effect is executed, indicating that a big win will not be played. Specifically, a failure to win image is displayed on the main display device 70, and a failure sound "ding" is output from the audio output device 9. In addition, when the center effect symbol 70a temporarily stops at, for example, a "6" in the upper left corner of the screen, the three effect symbols 70a temporarily stop at a reach failure result ("565", numbers only). When the center effect symbol 70a temporarily stops, the audio output device 9 is not configured to output a temporary stop sound (for example, "peshi"), and the failure sound "ding" plays the role of the temporary stop sound.

At the timing of T7, when the execution period of the SPSP reach performance has elapsed, a first stop suggestion performance (for example, for 0.5 seconds) is executed to suggest that the performance pattern 70a will stop. Specifically, an eye-catching image is displayed that covers the background image and the performance pattern 70a. Then, when the first stop suggestion performance ends, at the timing of T8, the horizontal scrolling of the Mode A background image is resumed, and the performance pattern 70a returns to the position before the start of the SP reach performance and to the first state, and is displayed as a temporary stop (temporarily stopped at "565"). Even during this temporary stop display, the sound output device 9 does not output a temporary stop sound, and the display of the eye-catching image plays the role of suggesting that the performance pattern 70a will stop (the variable performance will end).

In addition, at timing T8, the first hold icon display area 70B is redisplayed together with the hold icon HI. Note that, if the special chart determination information is not stored as a hold, only the first hold icon display area 70B is redisplayed.

After that, at the timing of T9, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. In addition, the losing special symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the first special symbol display 60.

Next, at the timing of T10, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the stop command, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C starts to disappear in an animated manner, and the performance pattern 70a ("565") and the special pattern TZ ("565") start to stop.

Then, at the timing T11, when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the disappearance display of the icon TI in the animation, the disappearance display of the icon TI in the animation ends. Then, at the timing T12, the stop display time of the special pattern elapses and the standby period begins.

According to Figures 167 to 174, the following features are provided.
(a) It is possible to change the left, center, and right performance symbols 70a, and in the change performance pattern 5, when the center performance symbol 70a temporarily stops, a temporary stop sound can be output from the audio output device 9 (T10 to T12 in FIG. 168), and in the change performance pattern 8, when the center performance symbol 70a temporarily stops, it is possible not to output the temporary stop sound from the audio output device 9 (T6 to T10 in FIG. 171). Also, in the change performance pattern 5, if the acquisition upper limit device is activated before the center performance symbol 70a temporarily stops (T9' in FIG. 170), it is possible to limit the output of the temporary stop sound from the audio output device 9 (T10 in FIG. 170).

(b) It is possible to change the display of the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a, and when the center performance pattern 70a temporarily stops, a temporary stop sound can be output from the audio output device 9 (T10 to T12 in FIG. 168), and when the pseudo pattern temporarily stops, a pseudo pattern derivation sound can be output from the audio output device 9 (T6 to T7 in FIG. 167). In the changing performance where the temporary stop sound is output, if the winning limit device is activated before the center performance pattern 70a temporarily stops (T9' in FIG. 170), it is possible to limit the output of the temporary stop sound from the audio output device 9 (T10 in FIG. 170).

(c) It is possible to change the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a, and when the center performance pattern 70a temporarily stops, a temporary stop sound can be output from the audio output device 9 (T10 to T12 in FIG. 168), and when the pseudo pattern temporarily stops, a pseudo pattern derivation sound can be output from the audio output device 9 (T6 to T7 in FIG. 167). In the changing performance where the pseudo pattern derivation sound is output, if the acquisition limit device is activated before the pseudo pattern temporarily stops (T5' in FIG. 169), it is possible to limit the output of the pseudo pattern derivation sound from the audio output device 9 (T6 in FIG. 169).

These features provide the following advantages.
In a variable performance (normal variation, shortened variation, normal reach variation) in which a temporary stop sound is output, the temporary stop sound is output when the performance pattern 70a temporarily stops, making it easier to recognize that the variable performance is ending.

In addition, in a variation effect (SPSP reach variation) where a temporary stop sound is not output, a sound (success sound, failure sound) corresponding to the judgment result is output in the deciding effect, so by not outputting the temporary stop sound, it is possible to prevent overlapping sounds that make it difficult to hear the sound corresponding to the judgment result (success sound, failure sound).

In addition, in the case of variable effects that can display eye-catching images (SP reach variation, SPSP reach variation), the display of the eye-catching image indicates the end of the variable effect, so if a temporary stop sound is output in addition to this, it is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to recognize the end of the variable effect (leading to a double end indication).

In addition, even though the operation notification of the acquisition limit device has been executed, the temporary stop sound is output at the original temporary stop timing, which can prevent the player from feeling that they have lost out as if a higher expectation performance had been executed, and can prevent a decrease in interest in the game.In addition, it can prevent the execution of the operation notification of the acquisition limit device from being impaired by the output of the temporary stop sound.

In addition, when announcing the operation of the winning limit device, a temporary stop sound is not output at the actual temporary stop timing, and the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a is also made difficult to see, preventing any visual or auditory discomfort.

In addition, in a variable presentation where a pseudo consecutive performance is executed, a pseudo pattern introduction sound is output when the pseudo pattern temporarily stops, making it easier to recognize that a pseudo consecutive performance is being executed, and allowing the player to focus (concentrate on playing) on the pseudo consecutive performance that is executed afterwards.

In addition, it is possible to prevent a player from feeling that they have lost out and losing interest in the game, as if a higher expectation performance had been executed, by outputting a pseudo-pattern derivation sound even though the operation notification of the acquisition limit device has been executed. It is also possible to prevent the output of the pseudo-pattern derivation sound from compromising the execution of the operation notification of the acquisition limit device.

Next, we will use Figures 175 to 181 to explain the output of specific sounds in variable performance patterns.

Figure 175 is a timing chart showing variation performance pattern 1 (at the end) in which normal variation is executed. Note that in order to facilitate understanding of the invention, the explanation will be given in conjunction with the drawing in Figure 176. Note that, as an example, the explanation will be given in a mode in which the temporary stop sound is output only when the central performance pattern 70a temporarily stops, but as mentioned above, it may be interpreted as a mode in which the temporary stop sound is also output when the left and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop.

In addition, in presentation mode A, the variable presentation is performed with the first aspect of presentation pattern 70a, and in presentation mode B, the variable presentation is performed with the second aspect of presentation pattern 70a (see Figures 127 (a) and (b)). Also, the aspect of presentation pattern 70a (design of numbers and characters) is different between presentation mode A and presentation mode B. Although not shown, the end of variable presentation pattern 3 also has the same aspect as Figure 175.

First, from timing T1 to timing T2, the display of the special symbols is changed, and three performance symbols 70a and three special symbols TZ are updated and changed (scrolled display, switched display) in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling. Also, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the changing BGM (changing BGM1 in performance mode A, changing BGM2 in performance mode B) is audibly output.

Next, at the timing of T2, the left performance pattern 70a that was being scrolled (updated) stops temporarily (Fig. 176 (b)), and then the right performance pattern 70a that was being scrolled (updated) stops temporarily (Fig. 176 (b)-(b)'). Note that when the left performance pattern 70a stops temporarily, and when the right performance pattern 70a stops temporarily, pre-stop operations are being carried out.

Next, at the timing of T2', when the scroll display (updated display) of the central performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the sound output device 9 starts to output a temporary stop sound, the character of the central performance pattern 70a performs a pre-stop action, and all of the performance patterns 70a are temporarily stopped (Figure 176 (b)').

As shown in FIG. 176, the temporary stop sound in presentation mode A is a "peshi" temporary stop sound, and as described above, the output period is "0.5 seconds", while the temporary stop sound in presentation mode B is a "poco" temporary stop sound, and the output period is "0.5 seconds". Even when the same variable presentation pattern 1 is executed, presentation mode A and presentation mode B output different temporary stop sounds, along with differences in the appearance of presentation pattern 70a (design of numbers and characters).

After that, at the timing of T3, when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of output of the temporary stop sound, output of the temporary stop sound ends. Also, at the timing of T3, when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130, and the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed.

Then, at the timing of T4, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the stop command, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C starts disappearing in an animation, and the performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ start stopping.

After that, at the timing of T5, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the disappearance display of the icon TI in the animation, the disappearance display of the icon TI in the animation ends. Then, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special pattern has elapsed, the standby period begins.

In addition, in FIG. 176 (variable performance pattern 1), when the left performance pattern 70a temporarily stops and when the right performance pattern 70a temporarily stops, a temporary stop sound is output, and in FIG. 173 (variable performance pattern 5), when the left performance pattern 70a temporarily stops and when the right performance pattern 70a temporarily stops, that is, when the temporary stop sound is output when the left and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in normal fluctuation and normal reach fluctuation, the temporary stop sound may be common. For example, when the left and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in normal fluctuation, a temporary stop sound of "peshi" may be output, and when the left and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in normal reach fluctuation, a temporary stop sound of "peshi" may also be output. Also, in the variable performance in which the SP reach or SPSP reach is executed, a temporary stop sound may be output when the left and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop (when a normal reach is formed). This means that, for example, even if a "pesh" sound is output when the left performance symbol 70a temporarily stops, the execution of a reach is not denied, and the anticipation of a big win is prevented from decreasing.

In addition, in the case of a SPSP missed reach (Fig. 171), even if a strong notice (red effect) of the pre-reading effect performance is executed (scenario 44 in Fig. 110), when a normal reach is formed, a temporary stop sound may be output when the left performance pattern 70a temporarily stops and when the right performance pattern 70a temporarily stops. In other words, just because a temporary stop sound such as "pesh" is output when the left performance pattern 70a temporarily stops, the execution of a highly anticipated performance is not denied, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the sense of expectation for a big win.

In addition, in the case of a SPSP reach miss (Figure 171), when a strong notice (red effect) of the look-ahead effect performance is executed (scenario 44 in Figure 110), the sound effect (the sound effect "ding" that plays the role of the temporary stop sound) that is output when the middle performance pattern 70a temporarily stops with only numbers displayed is more likely to be output than in a change performance where a normal change is executed (change performance pattern 1). This makes it easier to recognize that the change performance in which the strong notice (red effect) of the look-ahead effect performance has been executed is ending.

In addition, the temporary stop sound is more likely to be output when the performance pattern 70a in the first mode is temporarily stopped in a variable performance (variable performance pattern 5 in Figs. 167 and 168) in which a pseudo success is executed once and the performance is a miss than when a strong notice (red effect) of the pre-reading effect performance is executed (scenario 44 in Fig. 110). In other words, the strong notice (red effect) of the pre-reading effect performance can be executed in a variable performance pattern in which an SPSP reach is executed, as shown in Fig. 110, and when the performance pattern 70a in the first mode is temporarily stopped in the SPSP reach, the temporary stop sound is not output, while the variable performance (variable performance pattern 5 in Figs. 167 and 168) in which a pseudo success is executed once and the performance is a miss is executed only in a normal reach, and does not develop into an SP reach or an SPSP reach, so that when the performance pattern 70a in the first mode is temporarily stopped, the temporary stop sound is output. This results in the above-mentioned relationship of "easily outputting the temporary stop sound." This allows the effects that are executed (pseudo success, look-ahead effect effects) to maintain the regularity of the temporary stop sound, providing a gaming machine that is easy for players to understand.

In addition, in the aspects shown in Figures 175 and 176, a temporary stop sound of "peshi" is output in presentation mode A, and a temporary stop sound of "poko" is output in presentation mode B, but the temporary stop sound of "peshi" may be output in either presentation mode. In other words, as shown in Figure 176, the form of presentation pattern 70a (design of numbers and characters) is different in presentation mode A and presentation mode B, but the same temporary stop sound may be output. In this way, the form of presentation pattern 70a visually indicates the presentation mode being executed, while making it easier to audibly recognize the end of the variable presentation (normal variation).

In addition, in the performance modes A to C, it is easier to execute the variable performance pattern 2 (shortened variation) when the number of the first reserved memories is the second number (e.g., 4) than when the number of the first reserved memories is the first number (e.g., 0), and accordingly, it is easier to execute the mode in which the left, center, and right patterns temporarily stop simultaneously and a temporary stop sound is output when the number of the first reserved memories is the second number (e.g., 4) than when the number of the first reserved memories is the first number (e.g., 0). Similarly, in the performance modes D to E, it is easier to execute the variable performance pattern 35 (ultra-shortened variation) when the number of the second reserved memories is the second number (e.g., 4) than when the number of the second reserved memories is the first number (e.g., 0), and accordingly, it is easier to execute the mode in which the left, center, and right patterns temporarily stop simultaneously and a temporary stop sound is output when the number of the second reserved memories is the second number (e.g., 4) than when the number of the second reserved memories is the first number (e.g., 0).

For example, in the case of adopting a mode in which the temporary stop sound is output at all of the left, right, and center temporary stops, when the number of the first reserved memories is the second number (e.g., 4), the output period of the temporary stop sound is likely to be shorter than when the number of the first reserved memories is the first number (e.g., 0). Specifically, when it is the second number (e.g., 4), the shortened variation is likely to be executed, so the temporary stop sound is output once (0.5 seconds) when the left, center, and right patterns are temporarily stopped at the same time, but when it is the first number (e.g., 0), other than the shortened variation (e.g., normal variation, normal reach variation) is likely to be executed, so the temporary stop sound is output once (0.5 seconds) at each of the left, right, and center temporary stops, so the output period of the temporary stop sound is 1.5 seconds in total, 0.5 seconds x 3. The output period of the temporary stop sound can also be interpreted as the pre-stop operation of the performance pattern 70a. In other words, when the number of first reserved memories is the second number (e.g., 4), the execution period of the pre-stop action of the performance pattern 70a is likely to be shorter than when the number of first reserved memories is the first number (e.g., 0). This makes it possible to execute the performance (temporary stop sound, pre-stop action) according to the variable performance executed according to the number of reserved memories, thereby increasing the interest in the game without creating a sense of incongruity in the performance.

When the number of first pending memories is a second number (e.g., 4), the output period of the temporary stop sound may be longer than when the number of first pending memories is the first number (e.g., 0), or it may be the same. Also, when the number of first pending memories is a second number (e.g., 4), the execution period of the pre-stop action may be longer than when the number of first pending memories is the first number (e.g., 0), or it may be the same.

In addition, when in performance modes D to E, the output period of the temporary stop sound and the execution period of the pre-stop action of the performance pattern 70a may be the same when the number of second reserved memories is the second number (e.g., 4) and when the number of second reserved memories is the first number (e.g., 0).

Figure 177 is a timing chart showing variation presentation pattern 1 (acquisition upper limit device activated) in which normal variation is executed. Note that to facilitate understanding of the invention, the explanation will be given in conjunction with the drawing in Figure 181. Also, only the points that differ from Figure 175 will be explained.

In FIG. 177, the value of the increment counter at time T1 does not reach "95,000", and then at time T1', for example, a game ball enters general winning slot 43, causing the value of the increment counter to be updated to "95,000".

In this case, the operation of the maximum win device causes the operation notification of the maximum win device to be executed, and the temporary stop sound that should be output at timing T2 is not output (Figure 181 (b)). Then, from then on, the operation notification of the maximum win device continues until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off.

Figure 178 is a timing chart showing variable presentation pattern 6 (at the end) in which an SP reach is executed. Note that to facilitate understanding of the invention, explanation will be given in conjunction with the drawing in Figure 179. Although not shown, the only difference between variable presentation pattern 6 and variable presentation pattern 7 is whether or not there is a "pseudo success" in the early stages, so the end of variable presentation pattern 7 is also the same as in Figure 178. Also, as mentioned above, it may be interpreted as a temporary stop sound being output when the left and right presentation patterns 70a temporarily stop.

First, until the timing of T1, the display of the special symbols is being changed, and three special symbols TZ are being updated (scrolled display, switched display) in front of the Mode A background image being scrolled horizontally. Also, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the changing BGM is being audibly output. Also, following the temporary stop of the first mode performance symbol 70a on the left, the first mode performance symbol 70a on the right is about to be temporarily stopped.

Next, at the timing of T1, when the normal reach effect starts, in which the left and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped at the same pattern (for example, pattern 5) and the center effect pattern 70a scrolls at a slow speed, the audible output of the variable BGM is stopped (muted) and the output of the normal reach BGM starts.

Then, at the timing of T2, when a dark background image is displayed on the main display device 70 and a blackout effect starts, the effect pattern 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the screen, and a prompting effect encouraging the operation of the effect button 17 and the valid period of the effect button 17 start. Specifically, an operation prompting image imitating the effect button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, the audible output of the normal reach BGM is stopped (muted), and a prompt sound saying "press" is output from the audio output device 9.

After that, at the timing of T3, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, a successful development effect is executed, indicating that the development to the SP reach effect has been successful and that the SP reach effect will be executed. Specifically, a successful development image is displayed on the main display device 70, and an development sound saying "Good job" is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, at the timing of T4, when the execution period of the blackout effect has elapsed, the display of the SP reach background image and the output of the SP reach BGM begin, and the execution of the SP reach effect begins. At this time, the effect pattern 70a changes to a display mode in which only numbers are displayed, and the left and right effect patterns are displayed in a smaller size than normal in the left and right corners at the top of the screen (Figure 179 (d)). Note that in Figure 179 (d), when the left and right effect patterns are displayed in a smaller size than normal in the left and right corners at the top of the screen, no sound effects are output.

The SP reach of variable presentation pattern 6 is a common SP reach that can be executed in presentation modes A to C. Specifically, a "joint battle reach" presentation is executed, which notifies the player whether or not a jackpot has been hit based on the results of multiple friendly characters fighting an enemy character.

Then, at the timing of T5, the result of the SP reach is announced. Specifically, the left and right performance symbols are displayed in the left and right corners of the upper left and right corners of the screen, reduced in size compared to normal size, and the middle performance symbol is displayed temporarily stopped in the center of the screen, enlarged in size compared to normal size (Figure 179 (e)).

At the timing of T5, in conjunction with the temporary stop of the middle performance symbol, the sound output device 9 starts to output a temporary stop sound. Here, a "pop" temporary stop sound is output, and the output period is "0.5 seconds." Note that in an SP reach, the "pop" temporary stop sound output when the performance symbol 70a among the numbers only temporarily stops is a different sound from the temporary stop sound output ("peshi" in performance mode A and "poco" in performance mode B) output when the performance symbol 70a in the first mode temporarily stops in a normal fluctuation (fluctuation performance pattern 1) or a normal reach fluctuation (fluctuation performance pattern 5). This difference in the temporary stop sound suggests that a fluctuation performance different from the normal fluctuation or normal reach fluctuation has been executed.

Also, at the time of T5, no background music is being played, and the only sound that can be heard is the "pop" sound that sounds like a temporary stop. In other words, the end of the SP reach is indicated by the output of only the temporary stop sound.

Then, at the timing of T6, when the execution period of the SP reach performance has elapsed, a first stop suggestion performance (for example, for 0.5 seconds) is executed, which suggests that the performance pattern 70a will stop. Specifically, an eye-catching image is displayed, obscuring the background image and the performance pattern 70a. Then, when the first stop suggestion performance ends, at the timing of T7, the horizontal scrolling of the Mode A background image is resumed, and the performance pattern 70a returns to the position before the start of the SP reach performance and to the first mode, and is displayed as a temporary stop (temporarily stopped at "565") (Figure 179 (g)). Note that when the performance pattern 70a returns to the first mode, the temporary stop sound is not output during the temporary stop display.

After that, at the timing of T8, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. In addition, the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60.

Next, at the timing of T9, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the stop command, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C starts to disappear in an animated manner, and the performance pattern 70a ("565") and the special pattern TZ ("565") start to stop.

Then, at the timing T10, when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the disappearance display of the icon TI in the animation, the disappearance display of the icon TI in the animation ends. Then, at the timing T11, the stop display time of the special pattern has elapsed, and the standby period begins.

As shown in FIG. 179, when variable performance pattern 6 is executed in performance mode A and when variable performance pattern 6 is executed in performance mode B, the temporary stop sound output when the performance pattern 70a of only the numbers in the SP reach is temporarily stopped is a temporary stop sound of "pop". In other words, it has been described that the temporary stop sound output is different when variable performance pattern 1 is executed in performance mode A and when variable performance pattern 1 is executed in performance mode B, but in variable performance pattern 6 in which the SP reach is executed, the same temporary stop sound is output in both cases of execution in performance mode A and execution in performance mode B. On the other hand, in variable performance pattern 1, a temporary stop sound is output when the performance pattern 70a in the first mode is temporarily stopped, but in variable performance pattern 6, a temporary stop sound is output when the performance pattern 70a of only the numbers is temporarily stopped, but the temporary stop sound is not output during the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a in the first mode thereafter (T7 to T9 in FIG. 178). In other words, in variable performance pattern 6, the temporary stop sound is prevented from being output repeatedly.

In the examples of Figures 178 and 179, it was mentioned that in variable presentation pattern 6 in which an SP reach is executed, the same temporary stop sound is output whether it is executed in presentation mode A or in presentation mode B. However, if there is an SP reach that is executed only in presentation mode A (SP reach exclusive to presentation mode A) and an SP reach that is executed only in presentation mode B (SP reach exclusive to presentation mode B), it is preferable to output different temporary stop sounds for the SP reach exclusive to presentation mode A and the SP reach exclusive to presentation mode B. This has the advantage that it becomes easier to understand which presentation mode the SP reach corresponds to based on the difference in the temporary stop sounds.

Figure 180 is a timing chart showing variable presentation pattern 5 (operation of the winning limit device) in which an SP reach is executed. Note that to make it easier to understand the invention, the explanation will be given in conjunction with the drawing in Figure 181. Also, only the points that differ from Figure 179 will be explained.

In FIG. 180, the value of the increment counter at the time T4 does not reach "95,000", and then at the time T4', for example, a game ball enters the general winning slot 43, causing the value of the increment counter to be updated to "95,000".

In this case, the operation of the maximum win device causes the operation notification of the maximum win device to be executed, and therefore the temporary stop sound that should be output at timing T5 is not output (Figure 181 (e)). Then, from then on, the operation notification of the maximum win device continues until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off.

According to Figures 175 to 181, the following features are provided.
(D) The left, center, and right performance patterns 70a can be displayed variably, and in the variable performance pattern 1, when the center performance pattern 70a temporarily stops, a temporary stop sound can be output from the audio output device 9, and when the variable performance pattern 1 is executed in the performance mode A, a temporary stop sound of "peshi" is output (Fig. 176(b)'), and when the variable performance pattern 1 is executed in the performance mode B, a temporary stop sound of "poco" is output (Fig. 176(b)'). Also, in the variable performance pattern 6, when the center performance pattern 70a temporarily stops, a temporary stop sound can be output from the audio output device 9, and when the variable performance pattern 6 is executed in the performance mode A, a temporary stop sound of "pop" is output (Fig. 179(e)), and when the variable performance pattern 6 is executed in the performance mode B, a temporary stop sound of "pop" can be output (Fig. 179(e)). In addition, in variable presentation pattern 1, if the acquisition limit device is activated before the temporary stopping of the middle presentation pattern 70a (T1' in Figure 177), it is possible to limit the output of the temporary stop sound (T2 in Figure 177), and in variable presentation pattern 6, if the acquisition limit device is activated before the temporary stopping of the middle presentation pattern 70a (T4' in Figure 180), it is possible to limit the output of the temporary stop sound (T5 in Figure 180).

(e) It is possible to change the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a, and in the change performance pattern 5 in the performance mode A, when the performance pattern 70a temporarily stops, a temporary stop sound of "peshi" is output (Fig. 173 (j)), and when the pseudo pattern temporarily stops, a pseudo pattern derivation sound of "ja-ki-n" can be output (Fig. 172 (f)). In the change performance pattern 6, when the center performance pattern 70a temporarily stops, a temporary stop sound can be output from the audio output device 9, and when the change performance pattern 6 is executed in the performance mode A, a temporary stop sound of "pop" is output (Fig. 179 (e)), and when the change performance pattern 6 is executed in the performance mode B, a temporary stop sound of "pop" can be output (Fig. 179 (e)). In addition, in variable performance pattern 5, if the acquisition limit device is activated before the temporary stop of the middle performance pattern 70a, it is possible to limit the output of the temporary stop sound (T10 in FIG. 170), and if the acquisition limit device is activated before the temporary stop of the pseudo pattern, it is possible to limit the output of the pseudo pattern derivation sound (T6 in FIG. 169). In addition, in variable performance pattern 6, if the acquisition limit device is activated before the temporary stop of the middle performance pattern 70a (T4' in FIG. 180), it is possible to limit the output of the temporary stop sound (T5 in FIG. 180).

These features provide the following advantages.
Even if the same normal variation is executed in the variation presentation pattern, the temporary stop sound output is different when the variation is executed in the presentation mode A and when the variation is executed in the presentation mode B, so that the currently executed presentation mode can be recognized from the difference in the temporary stop sound. Also, it is possible to prevent players from getting bored of playing the game by repeatedly outputting the same temporary stop sound.

In addition, in variable presentation pattern 6 in which an SP reach is executed, the same temporary stop sound is output whether the variable presentation pattern is executed in presentation mode A or in presentation mode B, preventing the player from thinking that the expectation of an SP reach (expectation of a jackpot being executed) differs depending on the presentation mode. Also, the sound data can be standardized, which contributes to data reduction.

In addition, even if the operation notification of the acquisition limit device is being executed, it is possible to prevent the temporary stop sound from being output at the original temporary stop timing, which would cause the execution of the operation notification of the acquisition limit device to be impaired.

In addition, when announcing the operation of the winning limit device, a temporary stop sound is not output at the actual temporary stop timing, and the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a is also made difficult to see, preventing any visual or auditory discomfort.

In addition, in a variable presentation where a pseudo consecutive performance is executed, a pseudo pattern introduction sound is output when the pseudo pattern temporarily stops, making it easier to recognize that a pseudo consecutive performance is being executed, and allowing the player to focus (concentrate on playing) on the pseudo consecutive performance that is executed afterwards.

In addition, it is possible to prevent a feeling of loss that a higher expectation performance could have been achieved by outputting a pseudo-pattern derivation sound even though the operation notification of the acquisition limit device has been executed. It is also possible to prevent the output of the pseudo-pattern derivation sound from compromising the execution of the operation notification of the acquisition limit device.

Next, application examples of the specific sound output will be listed.
For example, when executing the variable performance pattern 1, a temporary stop sound of "peshi" can be output in the performance mode A, and a temporary stop sound of "poko" can be output in the performance mode B (FIG. 176). In addition, when a pre-notification (see FIG. 151, etc.) related to the operation of the acquisition upper limit device is executed during the execution of the variable performance, the pre-notification with the same sound, design, and display position can be executed in the performance mode A and the performance mode B. This makes it unnecessary to store the display data of the pre-notification for each performance mode, and it is expected that the display data can be reduced. In addition, since the pre-notification can be displayed with the same control regardless of the performance mode, it is expected that the control load can be reduced.

For example, when variable performance pattern 6 is executed, a temporary stop sound of "pop" can be output in performance mode A, and a temporary stop sound of "pop" can also be output in performance mode B (Figure 179). Furthermore, when an advance notification (see Figure 151, etc.) relating to the operation of the acquisition limit device is executed while a variable performance is being executed, an advance notification with the same sound, design, and display position can be executed in both performance mode A and performance mode B. This eliminates the need to store advance notification display data for each performance mode, and a reduction in display data is expected. Furthermore, because advance notifications can be displayed with the same control regardless of the performance mode, a reduction in control load is expected.

For example, the appearance of the performance pattern 70a when a variable performance is executed in performance mode A is different from the appearance of the performance pattern 70a when a variable performance is executed in performance mode B (as shown in FIG. 176, the appearance of the performance pattern 70a is different even for the same "1" pattern). Also, when an advance notification (see FIG. 151, etc.) related to the operation of the acquisition limit device is executed while a variable performance is being executed, it is possible to execute an advance notification with the same sound, design, and display position in both performance mode A and performance mode B. This eliminates the need to store advance notification display data for each performance mode, and is expected to reduce display data. Also, because advance notifications can be displayed with the same control regardless of the performance mode, it is expected to reduce the control load.

For example, the display mode of the performance pattern 70a when a variable performance is executed in performance mode A is the same as the display mode of the performance pattern 70a when a variable performance is executed in performance mode B (as shown in FIG. 179, during SP reach, regardless of the performance mode, the performance pattern 70a only has the number portion). Also, when an advance notification (see FIG. 151, etc.) related to the operation of the winning limit device is executed during the execution of a variable performance, it is possible to execute an advance notification with the same sound, design, and display position in both performance mode A and performance mode B. This eliminates the need to store advance notification display data for each performance mode, and is expected to reduce display data. Also, since advance notifications can be displayed with the same control regardless of the performance mode, it is expected to reduce the control load.

For example, the temporary stop sound of the left performance pattern 70a (the performance pattern 70a that temporarily stops first) when performing a variable performance in performance mode A is different from the temporary stop sound of the left performance pattern 70a (the performance pattern 70a that temporarily stops first) when performing a variable performance in performance mode B, while the temporary stop sound of the middle performance pattern 70a is the same. Also, if the acquisition limit device is activated during the execution of a variable performance that outputs a temporary stop sound, it is possible to limit the output of the temporary stop sound. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the operation notification of the acquisition limit device from being impaired.

For example, the temporary stop sound of the right performance pattern 70a (the performance pattern 70a that temporarily stops second) when performing a variable performance in performance mode A is different from the temporary stop sound of the right performance pattern 70a (the performance pattern 70a that temporarily stops second) when performing a variable performance in performance mode B, while the temporary stop sound of the middle performance pattern 70a is the same. Also, if the acquisition limit device is activated during the execution of a variable performance that outputs a temporary stop sound, it is possible to limit the output of the temporary stop sound. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the acquisition limit device operation notification from being impaired.

Next, application examples of the specific sound output (particularly application examples related to the acquisition upper limit device) will be listed.
For example, when variable performance pattern 6 is executed, a temporary stop sound of "pop" can be output in performance mode A, and a temporary stop sound of "pop" can also be output in performance mode B (FIG. 179). In addition, when a pre-notification (see FIG. 151, etc.) related to the activation of the acquisition upper limit device is executed during execution of the variable performance, a pre-notification in a form different in sound, design, and display position can be executed in performance mode A and performance mode B. As a result, for example, after the pre-notification is executed, if the performance mode is switched, the form of the pre-notification (design and display position) can also change, so that it is possible to easily be aware of the remaining number until the acquisition upper limit device is activated without becoming monotonous.

For example, when variable presentation pattern 1 is executed, a temporary stop sound of "peshi" can be output in presentation mode A, and a temporary stop sound of "poco" can be output in presentation mode B (Fig. 176). Also, when a pre-notification (see Fig. 151, etc.) relating to the activation of the acquisition upper limit device is executed while the variable presentation is being executed, a pre-notification with different sound, design, and display position can be executed between presentation mode A and presentation mode B. As a result, for example, if the presentation mode is switched after a pre-notification is executed, the form of the pre-notification (design and display position) can also change, so it is not monotonous compared to when the same pre-notification continues to be displayed, and it is easier to be aware of the remaining number before the acquisition upper limit device is activated.

For example, the appearance of the performance pattern 70a when a variable performance is executed in performance mode A is different from the appearance of the performance pattern 70a when a variable performance is executed in performance mode B (as shown in FIG. 176, the appearance of the performance pattern 70a is different even for the same "1" pattern). Also, when an advance notification (see FIG. 151, etc.) related to the activation of the acquisition limit device is executed during the execution of a variable performance, it is possible to execute an advance notification with a different sound, design, and display position between performance mode A and performance mode B. As a result, for example, if the performance mode is switched after an advance notification is executed, the appearance of the advance notification (design and display position) can also change, so it is not monotonous compared to when the same advance notification continues to be displayed, and it is easier to be aware of the remaining number until the acquisition limit device is activated.

For example, the appearance of the performance pattern 70a when a variable performance is executed in performance mode A and the appearance of the performance pattern 70a when a variable performance is executed in performance mode B are the same display appearance (as shown in FIG. 179, during SP reach, regardless of the performance mode, the performance pattern 70a only has the number portion). Also, when a pre-notification (see FIG. 151, etc.) related to the activation of the acquisition limit device is executed during the execution of a variable performance, it is possible to execute a pre-notification with a different sound, design, and display position between performance mode A and performance mode B. As a result, for example, if the performance mode is switched after the pre-notification is executed, the appearance of the pre-notification (design and display position) can also change, so it is not monotonous compared to when the same pre-notification continues to be displayed, and it is easier to be aware of the remaining number until the acquisition limit device is activated.

For example, during the variable performance of performance mode A, variable BGM 1 can be output, and during the variable performance of performance mode B, variable BGM 2 can be output (Fig. 176). Also, when an advance notification (see Fig. 151, etc.) relating to the activation of the acquisition upper limit device is executed during the execution of the variable performance, it is possible to execute an advance notification with different sound, design, and display position between performance mode A and performance mode B. As a result, for example, if the performance mode is switched after an advance notification is executed, the form of the advance notification (design and display position) can also change, so it is not monotonous compared to when the same advance notification continues to be displayed, and it is easier to be aware of the remaining number before the acquisition upper limit device is activated.

For example, it is possible to display different background images during the variable performance of performance mode A and during the variable performance of performance mode B (Figure 176). Also, when an advance notification (see Figure 151, etc.) related to the activation of the acquisition limit device is executed during the variable performance, it is possible to execute an advance notification with different sound, design, and display position between performance mode A and performance mode B. As a result, for example, if the performance mode is switched after an advance notification is executed, the form of the advance notification (design and display position) can also change, so it is not monotonous compared to when the same advance notification continues to be displayed, and it is easier to be aware of the number of remaining pieces until the acquisition limit device is activated.

For example, the variable performance includes a first specific variable performance (variable performance pattern 5) in which the first specific performance (normal reach) is performed and the second specific performance (SPSP reach) is not performed, and a second specific variable performance (variable performance pattern 8) in which the second specific performance (SPSP reach) is performed. In the first specific variable performance, when the specific pattern (medium performance pattern 70a) is temporarily stopped, a temporary stop sound different from the variable BGM can be output (T10 in FIG. 168), and in the second specific variable performance, when the specific pattern (medium performance pattern 70a) is temporarily stopped, it is possible not to output the temporary stop sound (T6 to T10 in FIG. 171). As a result, in the first specific variable performance, by outputting the temporary stop sound, it is possible to easily recognize that the variable performance is ending. Also, in the second specific variable performance, by not outputting the temporary stop sound, it is possible to prevent the sound corresponding to the judgment result (success sound, failure sound) from being difficult to hear due to sound overlap. It also prevents the end of the variable effect from becoming difficult to recognize (which can be a double hint when the eye-catching image is displayed).

For example, the variable performances that can be executed when the judgment result is a miss include a first variable performance (variable performance pattern 7) that can execute a specific performance (SP reach) that can change the performance pattern 70a from the first state to a state of numbers only, and a second variable performance (variable performance pattern 1) that does not execute a specific performance. Furthermore, when the second variable performance is executed, it is easier for a temporary stop sound to be output when the specific pattern (medium performance pattern 70a) of the first state temporarily stops than when the first variable performance is executed. As a result, in the second variable performance, the output of the temporary stop sound makes it easier to recognize that the variable performance is ending. Also, in the first variable performance, it is possible to prevent the temporary stop sound from being repeatedly output, making it difficult to recognize that the variable performance is ending. In addition, "the temporary stop sound is likely to be output" may be a so-called "0:100" situation, in which variable presentation pattern 7 is never output and variable presentation pattern 1 is always output, or may include a relationship such as "10:90" in which variable presentation pattern 7 may output the sound and variable presentation pattern 1 may not output the sound.

For example, in the case of adopting a mode in which a temporary stop sound is output for all of the left, right, and center temporary stops, a first temporary stop sound can be output when the first row of performance symbols 70a (e.g., the left performance symbol 70a) temporarily stops, and a second temporary stop sound can be output when the second row of performance symbols 70a (e.g., the center performance symbol 70a) temporarily stops. For example, when variable performance pattern 1 is executed in performance mode A, a temporary stop sound of "bang" can be output when the left performance symbol 70a temporarily stops, and a temporary stop sound of "peshi" can be output when the center performance symbol 70a temporarily stops. Also, when variable performance pattern 1 is executed in performance mode B, a temporary stop sound of "bang" can be output when the left performance symbol 70a temporarily stops, and a temporary stop sound of "poco" can be output when the center performance symbol 70a temporarily stops. This makes it easier to recognize that the performance patterns 70a in each row have temporarily stopped, and if the central performance pattern 70a temporarily stops last, it makes it easier to recognize that all of the performance patterns 70a have temporarily stopped, making it easier to recognize that the variable performance has ended. Also, since the temporary stop sound when the central performance pattern 70a temporarily stops is different between performance mode A and performance mode B, it is also possible to recognize the currently running performance mode from the temporary stop sound, and it is possible to provide diversity in the output of the temporary stop sound.

For example, in the case of adopting a mode in which the temporary stop sound is output at all of the left, right, and center temporary stops, the left, right, and center temporary stops may all be different for each performance mode. Specifically, when variable performance pattern 1 is executed in performance mode A, when the left performance pattern 70a temporarily stops, a temporary stop sound of "bang" can be output, and when the center performance pattern 70a temporarily stops, a temporary stop sound of "peshi" can be output, and when the variable performance pattern 1 is executed in performance mode B, when the left performance pattern 70a temporarily stops, a temporary stop sound of "ton" can be output, and when the center performance pattern 70a temporarily stops, a temporary stop sound of "poco" can be output. This makes it easier to recognize that the performance patterns 70a of each row have temporarily stopped, and if the center performance pattern 70a temporarily stops last, it makes it easier to recognize that all the performance patterns 70a have temporarily stopped, and it makes it easier to recognize that the variable performance has ended. In addition, the temporary stop sound that is played when the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop is different between performance mode A and performance mode B, so it is possible to recognize the currently active performance mode from the temporary stop sound, and it is possible to provide diversity in the output of the temporary stop sound.

For example, in the case of adopting a mode in which a temporary stop sound is output for all of the left, right, and center temporary stops, the variable performance that can be executed when the judgment result is a miss includes a first variable performance (variable performance pattern 6) that can execute a specific performance (SP reach) that can change the performance pattern 70a from the first mode to a mode with only numbers, and a second variable performance (variable performance pattern 1) that does not execute a specific performance. When the first variable performance is executed, the temporary stop sound is more likely to be output when the performance pattern 70a in the second row (for example, the left or right performance pattern 70a) temporarily stops in the first mode (when a normal reach is formed) than when the performance pattern 70a in the first row (for example, the center performance pattern 70a) temporarily stops in the first mode (T7 to T9 in FIG. 178). In addition, when the second variable performance is executed, the likelihood of the temporary stop sound being output is the same when the performance pattern 70a in the first row (e.g., the middle performance pattern 70a) temporarily stops in the first mode and when the performance pattern 70a in the second row (e.g., the left or right performance pattern 70a) temporarily stops in the first mode. As a result, in the second variable performance, the output of the temporary stop sound makes it easier to recognize that the variable performance is ending. In addition, in the first variable performance, it is possible to prevent the temporary stop sound from being repeatedly output, making it difficult to recognize that the variable performance is ending. Note that "the temporary stop sound is easily output" is intended to mean "0:100" and "10:90" as described above.

For example, in the case of adopting a mode in which the temporary stop sound is output for all of the left, right, and center temporary stops, when a specific variable performance (variable performance pattern 6) is executed in performance mode A, the temporary stop sound output when the performance pattern 70a in the first row (e.g., the left performance pattern 70a) temporarily stops in the first mode and the temporary stop sound output when the performance pattern 70a in the second row (e.g., the right performance pattern 70a) temporarily stops in the first mode are common temporary stop sounds. On the other hand, when a specific variable performance (variable performance pattern 6) is executed in performance mode B, the temporary stop sound output when the performance pattern 70a in the first row (e.g., the left performance pattern 70a) temporarily stops in the first mode and the temporary stop sound output when the performance pattern 70a in the second row (e.g., the right performance pattern 70a) temporarily stops in the first mode are common, but are different from the temporary stop sound output in performance mode A. In addition, whether a specific variable performance (variable performance pattern 6) is executed in performance mode A or in performance mode B, a common temporary stop sound can be output when the performance pattern 70a in the third row (for example, the performance pattern 70a on the right) is temporarily stopped (T5 to T6 in FIG. 178) ("pop" in FIG. 179(e)). In this way, when the first and second rows are temporarily stopped, different temporary stop sounds are output depending on the performance mode, suggesting that the performance modes are different, while when the third row is temporarily stopped, a common temporary stop sound can be output regardless of the performance mode, preventing the player from thinking that the expectation level of a specific variable performance (expectation level of a jackpot being executed) differs depending on the performance mode. In addition, the sound data can be made common, which contributes to data reduction.

For example, in the case of adopting a mode in which a temporary stop sound is output for all of the left, right, and center temporary stops, the left performance pattern 70a (right performance pattern 70a) can output a total of six types of temporary stop sounds in performance modes A to F. On the other hand, the center performance pattern 70a can output a temporary stop sound (Fig. 179) that is output when the performance pattern 70a is in a display mode of only numbers in an SP reach, a failure sound (playing the role of a temporary stop sound) that is output when the performance pattern 70a is in a display mode of only numbers in an SPSP reach, and the number of temporary stop sounds is multiple for the left performance pattern 70a (right performance pattern 70a) and the center performance pattern 70a, and the center performance pattern 70a has more temporary stop sounds than the left performance pattern 70a (right performance pattern 70a). In other words, it can be said that the temporary stop sound of the pattern row that temporarily stops last has the most types of temporary stop sounds. In addition, if the final symbol row that temporarily stops is the left performance symbol 70a or the right performance symbol 70a, the number of types of temporary stop sounds for that symbol should be the greatest. By configuring it in this way, it becomes easier to recognize the end of the variable performance.

For example, in the case of adopting a mode in which a temporary stop sound is output for all of the left, right, and center temporary stops, the temporary stop sound is different for the temporary stop sound (e.g., "bang") output when the left and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in the first variable performance (variable performance pattern 1), the temporary stop sound (e.g., "pesh") output when the center performance pattern 70a temporarily stops in the second variable performance (variable performance pattern 5), and the temporary stop sound (e.g., "pop") output when the center performance pattern 70a (numbers only display mode) temporarily stops in the third variable performance (variable performance pattern 6). This allows for a wide variety of temporary stop sounds for each variable performance pattern, improving interest in the game.

For example, in a case where a temporary stop sound is output for all of the left, right, and center temporary stops, the temporary stop sound output when the left performance pattern 70a temporarily stops is different when variable performance pattern 6 is executed in the first performance mode and when it is executed in the second performance mode ("peshi" in performance mode A, "poco" in performance mode B). On the other hand, the temporary stop sound output when the center performance pattern 70a temporarily stops is the same when variable performance pattern 6 is executed in the first performance mode and when it is executed in the second performance mode ("poco" in both performance modes). In other words, when a specific variable performance (variable performance pattern 6) is executed in the first and second performance modes, the percentage of the temporary stop sound output when the left performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped being the same is a first percentage (including 0%), but when a specific variable performance (variable performance pattern 6) is executed in the first and second performance modes, the percentage of the temporary stop sound output when the center performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped being the same is a second percentage (including 100%) higher than the first percentage. This suggests that the performance modes are different, but when the center performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, a common temporary stop sound can be output regardless of the performance mode, which prevents the player from thinking that the expectation level of a specific variable performance (expectation level of a jackpot being executed) differs depending on the performance mode. In addition, the sound data can be made common, which contributes to data reduction.

For example, in the case of adopting a mode in which a temporary stop sound is output at all of the left, right, and center temporary stops, the temporary stop sound output may be different between the case where a change performance pattern in which normal change is executed (change performance pattern 1) is executed and the case where a change performance pattern in which shortened change is executed (change performance pattern 2) is executed in the same performance mode. Specifically, in the change performance pattern in which normal change is executed, a temporary stop sound of "bang" is output when the left performance pattern 70a temporarily stops, a temporary stop sound of "bang" is output when the right performance pattern 70a temporarily stops, and a temporary stop sound of "peshi" (first temporary stop sound) is output when the center performance pattern 70a temporarily stops, whereas in the change performance pattern in which shortened change is executed, a temporary stop sound of "pass" (second temporary stop sound) may be output when the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop. As a result, even though both are miss variation effects in which no reach is executed, it is easy to recognize which variation effect has been executed based on the difference in the temporary stop sound, which can increase interest in the game.

In addition, when configured in this way, the provisional stop sound tends to be different between a miss variation performance in which a reach is not executed when the number of first reserved memories is a first number (e.g., 0) and a miss variation performance in which a reach is not executed when the number of first reserved memories is a second number (e.g., 4). In other words, when the number of first reserved memories is a second number (e.g., 4), a shortened variation is more likely to be executed than a normal variation, and when the number of first reserved memories is a first number (e.g., 0), a normal variation is more likely to be executed than a shortened variation. Therefore, in a miss variation performance in which a reach is not executed when the number of first reserved memories is a first number (e.g., 0), the first provisional stop sound is more likely to be output, and in a miss variation performance in which a reach is not executed when the number of first reserved memories is a second number (e.g., 4), the second provisional stop sound is more likely to be output. This allows the number of reserved memories to be recognized from the output of the provisional stop sound, which can improve the interest in the game.

For example, when performing a miss variation performance in which a reach performance is not performed in performance modes A to C, the second mode in which the left, center, and right patterns temporarily stop at the same time and a temporary stop sound is output is more likely to be executed (the temporary stop sound output corresponding to the shortened variation is more likely to be executed) than the first mode in which the temporary stop sound is output only when the middle performance pattern 70a temporarily stops when the number of first reserved memories is the second number (e.g., 4) than when the number of first reserved memories is the first number (e.g., 0). Similarly, when performing a miss variation performance in which a reach performance is not performed in performance modes D to E, the second mode in which the left, center, and right patterns temporarily stop at the same time and a temporary stop sound is output is more likely to be executed (the temporary stop sound output corresponding to the super shortened variation is more likely to be executed) than the first mode in which the temporary stop sound is output only when the middle performance pattern 70a temporarily stops when the number of second reserved memories is the second number (e.g., 4). This makes it possible to output the temporary stop sound appropriately according to the number of reserved memories.

For example, when the central performance pattern 70a temporarily stops in the first mode, it is possible to execute a first performance in which a temporary stop sound is output (T2' to T3 in FIG. 175 for variable performance pattern 1), and a second performance in which the output of the temporary stop sound is restricted (T8 to T10 in FIG. 171 for variable performance pattern 8). Furthermore, when the second performance is executed, it is easier to execute a change performance in which the specified identification information (the icon, the reserved icon) changes to a specific display mode (red icon) than when the first performance is executed (the difference in the selection rate of the red icon between the normal change and the SPSP reach in FIG. 106). As a result, even when the second performance in which the output of the temporary stop sound is restricted is executed, the execution of the change performance can increase interest in the game.

For example, as the effects when the central effect pattern 70a temporarily stops in the first mode, it is possible to execute a first effect that outputs a temporary stop sound (T2' to T3 in FIG. 175 in variable effect pattern 1) and a second effect that restricts the output of the temporary stop sound (T8 to T10 in FIG. 171 in variable effect pattern 8). Furthermore, when the second effect is executed, it is easier to progress to a specific stage (for example, SU effect modes "3", "4", "5") in the stage effect (step-up notice) in which the expectation of a big win increases as the performance stage progresses compared to when the first effect is executed (difference between the SU performance modes in the normal variation and SPSP reach in FIG. 118). As a result, even when the second effect is executed in which the output of the temporary stop sound is restricted, it is possible to increase interest in the game depending on the degree of progress in the stage effect.

For example, when the center performance pattern 70a temporarily stops in the first mode, it is possible to execute a first performance that outputs a temporary stop sound (T2' to T3 in FIG. 175 for variable performance pattern 1) and a second performance that restricts the output of the temporary stop sound (T7 in FIG. 178 for variable performance pattern 6). When the second performance is executed, it is easier to execute a position change performance that changes the display position of the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a than when the first performance is executed (the display positions of the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a change in FIGS. 179(e) and (g), but do not change in FIG. 176). As a result, even when the second performance that restricts the output of the temporary stop sound is executed, the position change performance can increase interest in the game.

For example, as the effects when the central effect pattern 70a temporarily stops in the first mode, it is possible to execute a first effect (T2' to T3 in FIG. 175 in variable effect pattern 1) that outputs a temporary stop sound, and a second effect (variable effect pattern 7) that restricts the output of the temporary stop sound. Furthermore, when the second effect is executed, it is easier to execute a pattern replacement effect (changing the effect pattern 70a that forms a reach, changing the color of the effect pattern 70a that forms a reach) than when the first effect is executed. As a result, even when the second effect is executed, which restricts the output of the temporary stop sound, the pattern replacement effect can increase interest in the game.

For example, when the central performance pattern 70a temporarily stops in the first mode, it is possible to execute a first performance in which a temporary stop sound is output (T2' to T3 in FIG. 175 for variable performance pattern 1), and a second performance in which the output of the temporary stop sound is restricted (T8 to T10 in FIG. 171 for variable performance pattern 8). Furthermore, when the second performance is executed, it is easier to execute the operation prompting performance in the deciding performance than when the first performance is executed (in the deciding performance pattern determination table in FIG. 123, the operation prompting performance can be executed if there is an SPSP reach, but the operation prompting performance is not executed in normal fluctuation). As a result, even when the second performance in which the output of the temporary stop sound is restricted is executed, it is possible to increase interest in the game by the operation in the deciding performance.

For example, when the central performance pattern 70a temporarily stops in the first mode, it is possible to execute a first performance in which a temporary stop sound is output (T2' to T3 in FIG. 175 in variable performance pattern 1) and a second performance in which the output of the temporary stop sound is restricted (T8 to T10 in FIG. 171 in variable performance pattern 8). When the second performance is executed, it is easier for the first movable member 77b to execute a strong action than when the first performance is executed (in the development performance pattern determination table in FIG. 120, a strong action can be executed in the case of an SPSP reach, but a strong action is not executed in the case of normal fluctuation). As a result, even when the second performance in which the output of the temporary stop sound is restricted is executed, the strong action by the first movable member 77b can increase interest in the game.

For example, as the effects when the central effect pattern 70a temporarily stops in the first mode, a first effect (T2' to T3 in FIG. 175 in variable effect pattern 1) that outputs a temporary stop sound and a second effect (T8 to T10 in FIG. 171 in variable effect pattern 8) that restricts the output of the temporary stop sound can be executed. The temporary stop sound includes a first temporary stop sound ("squeak" in effect mode A) and a second temporary stop sound (same color temporary stop sound), and it is easier to output the second temporary stop sound (same color temporary stop sound) when the first effect is executed than when the second effect is executed. This allows the player to pay attention to whether the first temporary stop sound or the second temporary stop sound is output in the first effect, improving interest in the game.

For example, when the central performance pattern 70a temporarily stops in the first mode, it is possible to execute a first performance in which a temporary stop sound is output (T2' to T3 in FIG. 175 in variable performance pattern 1), and a second performance in which the output of the temporary stop sound is restricted (T8 to T10 in FIG. 171 in variable performance pattern 8). Furthermore, when the first performance is executed, it is easier to execute a predetermined look-ahead performance (look-ahead effect performance in FIG. 108) than when the second performance is executed. This can increase the interest in playing the first performance.

For example, in the variable performance pattern (Fig. 171) in which the SPSP reach miss is executed, when the SP reach develops and the performance pattern 70a changes to a number-only display mode and is displayed in the upper left and right corners of the screen (T4 in Fig. 171), sound effects (display sound, temporary stop sound) etc. are not output, but when the performance pattern 70a in the number-only display mode temporarily stops after that (T6 in Fig. 171), sound effects (display sound, temporary stop sound) etc. can be output (the failure sound "ding" can be output). In other words, it can be said that sound effects (display sound, temporary stop sound) etc. are more likely to be output when the performance pattern 70a in the number-only display mode temporarily stops after that than when it is displayed in the upper left and right corners of the screen. This allows the output of sound effects (display sound, temporary stop sound) to give the feeling that the variable performance has ended, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy to understand even for players who are not familiar with games.

Next, the "reach line effect" will be explained using Figures 182 and 183. A "reach line effect" is an effect that can be executed in variable effects (variable effect patterns 4-23, 27, 28) in which a normal reach is executable in effect modes A to C, and is an effect that can be displayed when a normal reach is formed. Also, in effect modes D to E, it is an effect that can be executed in variable effects (variable effect patterns 32-33, 38-55) in which a normal reach is executable, and is an effect that can be displayed when a normal reach is formed.

Specifically, in a variable presentation pattern where only a normal reach is executed (e.g., variable presentation pattern 4), the word "REACH" is displayed as the reach line presentation, and in a variable presentation pattern where an SP reach or SPSP reach is executed after a normal reach is executed (e.g., variable presentation patterns 6 and 8), the word "CHANCE" is displayed as the reach line presentation.

The reach line effect executed by the variable performance pattern may not be fixed, but may be determined by lottery in the jackpot advance performance determination process. In this case, it is preferable that a variable performance pattern in which only a normal reach is executed is set to "REACH" more easily determined than "CHANCE", and a variable performance pattern in which an SP reach or SPSP reach is executed is set to "CHANCE" more easily determined than "REACH". There may also be cases in which a reach line effect is not executed when a normal reach is formed. Also, a reach line effect of "WIN" (a reach line effect suggesting a guaranteed jackpot) may be determined only in a variable performance pattern in which a full rotation reach is executed (for example, variable performance pattern 24).

The reach line effect is not limited to effects including the characters "REACH" or "CHANCE", but may be composed of only a line image (a linear image displayed from the left end to the right end of the display area) without the characters. In addition, when composed of only a line image (linear image), the line image (blue) and the line image (red) may be configured to have different expectations for a jackpot. Specifically, the line image (red) may be made to be easily selected in a jackpot variation presentation pattern and difficult to select in a loss variation presentation pattern, and the line image (blue) may be made to be difficult to select in a jackpot variation presentation pattern and easy to select in a loss variation presentation pattern, so that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the line image (red) is displayed than when the line image (blue) is displayed. In addition, the expectation of a jackpot may be configured to be different between a thin line image and a thick line image, not limited to differences in color.

Figure 182 shows the execution mode of the reach line effect of variable effect pattern 5. Note that (a1) to (a4) of Figure 182 show the execution mode in effect mode A, and (b1) to (b4) of Figure 182 show the execution mode in effect mode B.

First, (a1) and (b1) are the timings when the left performance pattern 70a temporarily stops. At this time, (a1) displays a background image corresponding to performance mode A, and variable BGM corresponding to performance mode A is output. On the other hand, (b1) displays a background image corresponding to performance mode B, and variable BGM corresponding to performance mode B is output. Different background images are displayed in performance mode A and performance mode B, and different variable BGM is output in performance mode A and performance mode B.

Next, (a2) and (b2) are the timings when the right performance symbol 70a temporarily stops and a reach is formed with the left and right performance symbols 70a (1 symbol). At this time, the output of the variable BGM stops (mutes) and normal reach BGM is output. The normal reach BGM is common to both performance mode A and performance mode B.

Although not shown in the drawings, the following effects are executed between (a2)(b2) and (a3)(b3). Specifically, when "REACH" or "CHANCE" is displayed, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in a reach state (e.g., 1↓1), and then temporarily whited out (the entire display area is displayed in white). This whiteout makes some or all of the effect pattern 70a difficult to see. After that, the whiteout is faded out, while an image such as "REACH" or "CHANCE" is faded in. As a result, "REACH" or "CHANCE" becomes visible in front of the effect pattern 70a that has temporarily stopped and is in a reach state (e.g., 1↓1) with "REACH" or "CHANCE" displayed (e.g., (a3)(b3)). In this way, by displaying "REACH" or "CHANCE" once via a whiteout after the reach state, it is easier to understand that "REACH" or "CHANCE" has been displayed (appeared) than if there was no whiteout, which can increase interest in the game. The same applies when displaying line images.

Next, in (a3) and (b3), the left and right performance patterns 70a (1 pattern) are enlarged in display size from the state of (a2) and (b2), emphasizing that a reach has been formed. At this time, due to the enlargement of the left and right performance patterns 70a (1 pattern), the update fluctuation (scrolling display) of the central performance pattern 70a is more difficult to recognize than in (a2) and (b2). In addition, due to the enlargement of the performance pattern 70a, the display size of the character portion and number portion (1) is also larger in (a3) and (b3) than in (a2) and (b2), making it easier to recognize which performance pattern 70a has formed a reach.

Even when the left and right performance symbols 70a (1 symbol) are enlarged in display size to emphasize that a reach has been formed, the special symbol TZ continues to update and fluctuate without changing its display size or other aspects. Also, no reach line performance is executed for the special symbol TZ.

When the left and right performance patterns 70a are expanded to their maximum position, the background image naturally becomes difficult to see, but it is expanded to a range that does not overlap with the special pattern TZ, the icon display area 70C, the first hold number display area 70E, or the first hold icon display area 70B, ensuring the visibility of each display area and information. Note that when the background image becomes difficult to see, it is assumed that, for example, even if a rainbow effect image (such as Figure 212) is displayed, it is not possible to recognize that a rainbow effect image is displayed.

Then, when the left and right performance patterns 70a (1 pattern) are enlarged to their maximum position, an image labeled "REACH" is displayed. The "REACH" image is displayed on a layer in front of the performance patterns 70a, so the display of the "REACH" image makes it difficult to see parts of the left and right performance patterns 70a (1 pattern) and part of the update fluctuation (scroll display) of the middle performance pattern 70a. The "REACH" image is a common image (same display size, design, color, and shape) displayed in performance mode A and performance mode B. Note that the display of the "REACH" image makes it difficult to see part of the character part of the performance pattern 70a, but the "REACH" image is displayed so as not to overlap with the number part (1) of the performance pattern 70a, so consideration is given to not reducing the visibility of which number has formed a reach.

When the "REACH" image is displayed, the sound output device 9 outputs the normal reach BGM and also outputs the "reach" sound. The "reach" sound is the same sound that is output in both presentation mode A and presentation mode B.

In (a3) and (b3), the "REACH" image is displayed after the performance pattern 70a is enlarged to its maximum position, but the "REACH" image may be displayed first and then the performance pattern 70a may be enlarged to its maximum position, or the timing at which the performance pattern 70a is enlarged to its maximum position and the timing at which the "REACH" image is displayed may be simultaneous.

In addition, when the "REACH" image is displayed, the sound "Reach" is output, but the "REACH" image may be displayed first and the sound "Reach" may be output later, or the display and sound may be simultaneous, or the sound may be output first and the display may be output later.

In addition, different "REACH" images (different display sizes, designs, colors, shapes) may be displayed between presentation modes A and B, different spellings (e.g., katakana and romanized spelling) may be displayed, and different sounds (e.g., male and female voices) may be output as the sound for "reach."

In (a3) and (b3), when the effect pattern 70a expands to its maximum position, an action by the character image of the effect pattern 70a (for example, the action of the character image making a peace sign) is executed (not shown). In other words, when a reach is formed, a "reach formation action" is executed by the expansion of the effect pattern 70a and the action of the character image.

This "reach formation action" has a different action mode from the pre-change action and pre-stop action executed in each presentation mode. Specifically, in presentation mode A, a floating display is executed as the pre-change action, and a shaking display in which the character image of the performance pattern 70a shakes its head at the pattern stop position is executed as the pre-stop action, but a reach formation action different from this action mode is executed. Also, in presentation mode B, a reduced display is executed as the pre-change action, and a reduced display in which the performance pattern 70a becomes smaller than the normal size at the pattern stop position and then returns to the normal size is executed as the pre-stop action, but a reach formation action different from this action mode is executed.

When the enlargement of the effect pattern 70a at its maximum position is performed for a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds), the "REACH" image is hidden and the display size of the effect pattern 70a returns to the display size at the time of (a2) (b2). In addition, by returning the display size of the effect pattern 70a, the update fluctuation (scrolling display) of the effect pattern 70a in the middle is easier to see than in (a3) (b3).

In Figure 183, (a1) to (a4) show the execution mode of the reach line effect of variable performance pattern 5, and (b1) to (b4) show the execution mode of the reach line effect of variable performance pattern 6. Note that, except for (b3), the execution mode is the same as in Figure 182, so the explanation will be omitted.

In (b3), the left and right performance symbols 70a (1 symbol) are enlarged in display size from the state in (b2), emphasizing the formation of a reach. At this time, due to the enlargement of the left and right performance symbols 70a (1 symbol), the update fluctuation (scrolling display) of the central performance symbol 70a is more difficult to recognize than in (a2) and (b2).

Incidentally, even when the left and right performance symbols 70a (1 symbol) are enlarged in display size to emphasize that a reach has been reached, the special symbol TZ continues to update and fluctuate without changing its display size or other aspects.

When the left and right performance patterns 70a are expanded to their maximum position, the background image naturally becomes difficult to see, but they are expanded to a range that does not overlap with the special pattern TZ, the icon display area 70C, the first hold number display area 70E, or the first hold icon display area 70B, ensuring the visibility of each display area and information.

When the left and right performance patterns 70a (1 pattern) are expanded to their maximum display size, an image labeled "CHANCE" is displayed. The "CHANCE" image is displayed in a layer in front of the performance patterns 70a, so the display of the "CHANCE" image makes it difficult to see parts of the left and right performance patterns 70a (1 pattern) and part of the update fluctuation (scroll display) of the middle performance pattern 70a. The "CHANCE" image is a common image (same display size, design, color, and shape) displayed in performance mode A and performance mode B. Note that the display of the "CHANCE" image makes it difficult to see part of the character part of the performance pattern 70a, but the "CHANCE" image is displayed so as not to overlap with the number part (1) of the performance pattern 70a, so consideration is given to not reducing the visibility of which number has formed a reach.

When the "CHANCE" image is displayed, the sound output device 9 outputs the normal reach BGM and also outputs the sound "Chance." The sound "Chance" is output in common between presentation mode A and presentation mode B.

In (b3), the "CHANCE" image is displayed after the performance pattern 70a is enlarged to its maximum position, but the "CHANCE" image may be displayed first and then the performance pattern 70a may be enlarged to its maximum position, or the timing at which the performance pattern 70a is enlarged to its maximum position and the timing at which the "CHANCE" image is displayed may be simultaneous.

In addition, different "CHANCE" images (different display sizes, designs, colors, shapes) may be displayed between presentation modes A and B, different spellings (e.g., katakana and romanized spelling) may be displayed, and different sounds (e.g., male and female voices) may be output as the sound for "CHANCE."

In (b3), when the effect pattern 70a expands to its maximum position, an action by the character image of the effect pattern 70a (for example, the action of the character image making a peace sign) is executed (not shown). In other words, when a reach is formed, a "reach formation action" is executed by the expansion of the effect pattern 70a and the action of the character image.

The "action at the time of reach formation" when the "REACH" image is displayed may be different from the "action at the time of reach formation" when the "CHANCE" image is displayed. For example, when the "CHANCE" image is displayed, the performance pattern 70a may be expanded to its maximum position, and then the action of the character image of the performance pattern 70a may be different (for example, the character image may perform an action of making a peace sign with both hands).

In addition, the "reach formation action" is configured by the enlargement of the performance pattern 70a and the action of the character image, but it may be configured by only one of them, or other elements (e.g., sound, lamps) may be added.

In addition, in Figures 182 and 183, the explanation was given using presentation modes A and B as examples, but one of presentation modes A and B may be interpreted as presentation mode C. Furthermore, both presentation modes A and B may be interpreted as presentation modes D and E.

In addition, the enlargement mode in which the performance pattern 70a is enlarged to the maximum position in (a3) and (b3) of FIG. 182 and (a3) and (b3) of FIG. 183 is the same in (a3) and (b3), but it may be different in (a3) and (b3). For example, in the case of performance mode B, only the number portion of the performance pattern 70a may be enlarged.

In addition, depending on the type of effect pattern 70a, the enlargement manner in which effect pattern 70a is enlarged to the maximum position in (a3) and (b3) of Figure 182 and (a3) and (b3) of Figure 183 may differ. For example, an odd numbered pattern may be enlarged to a greater extent than an even numbered pattern. Also, in the case of a "7" pattern, a different effect manner (for example, an action using the number portion, etc.) may be added compared to other patterns.

In addition, when a reach line effect is executed in a variable performance pattern in which a pseudo consecutive performance is executed, it is assumed to be configured as follows. For example, when a pseudo consecutive performance is executed, it has been described that a normal reach is formed twice in Fig. 167 (e) and Fig. 168 (i). In this case, if the "REACH" image is displayed when the first normal reach is formed (Fig. 167 (e)), the "REACH" image is also displayed when the second normal reach is formed (Fig. 168 (i)), and it is not the case that it is displayed only the first time and not the second time. In addition, in a variable performance pattern in which a SPSP reach is executed (for example, variable performance pattern 12), the "REACH" image is displayed the first time, or the "CHANCE" image is displayed the first time, and only the "CHANCE" image is displayed the second time. In other words, the "CHANCE" image is displayed the first time, and the "REACH" image is not displayed the second time. This prevents the player from thinking that the reach line image has been downgraded from the first time, based on the visual impression that the "CHANCE" image has a higher chance of winning than the "REACH" image.

According to Figures 182 and 183, the following features are present.
(F) A different background image (presentation mode A background, presentation mode B background) can be displayed between the variable presentation in presentation mode A and the variable presentation in presentation mode B, and a reach line presentation can be executed when a normal reach is formed (Fig. 182 (a3) (b3)). A common reach line image ("REACH" in Fig. 182) can be displayed when a normal reach is formed in presentation mode A and when a normal reach is formed in presentation mode B, and when a reach line image is displayed, highlighting by the temporarily stopped left and right presentation patterns 70a ("operation at the time of reach formation") can be executed (Fig. 182 (a3) (b3)).

(G) Different background images (presentation mode A background, presentation mode B background) can be displayed for the variable presentation in presentation mode A and the variable presentation in presentation mode B, and reach line presentation can be executed when a normal reach is formed (Fig. 182 (a3) (b3)). Different reach line images ("REACH" and "CHANCE" in Fig. 183) can be displayed when a normal reach is formed in presentation mode A and when a normal reach is formed in presentation mode B, and when a reach line image is displayed, highlighting by the temporarily stopped left and right presentation patterns 70a ("operation when reach is formed") can be executed (Fig. 183 (a3) (b3)).

Note that "different" in allowing different reach line images to be displayed depending on the presentation mode refers to a case in which, for example, in presentation mode A, variable presentation pattern 4 is executed and the message "REACH" is displayed as the reach line presentation, and in presentation mode B, variable presentation pattern 6 is executed and the message "CHANCE" is displayed as the reach line presentation, and in presentation mode A, variable presentation pattern 6 is executed and the message "CHANCE" is displayed as the reach line presentation, and in presentation mode B, variable presentation pattern 4 is executed and the message "REACH" is displayed as the reach line presentation.

As mentioned above, "different" also includes displaying different "REACH" images (different in display size, design, color, or shape) between presentation mode A and presentation mode B, displaying different spellings (for example, katakana and romanized spelling), and outputting different sounds for "reach" (for example, male voice and female voice).

(h) It is possible to output different BGM (variable BGM1, variable BGM2) for the variable performance in performance mode A and the variable performance in performance mode B, and in either performance mode, it is possible to output a common reach formation sound (reach) when a normal reach is formed (Fig. 182 (a3) (b3)). And when the reach formation sound (reach) is output, it is possible to execute a highlight display ("reach formation operation") using the temporarily stopped left and right performance patterns 70a (Fig. 182 (a3) (b3)).

(R) It is possible to output different BGM (variable BGM1, variable BGM2) for the variable performance in performance mode A and the variable performance in performance mode B, and it is possible to output different reach formation sounds (reach and chance) when a normal reach is formed in performance mode A and performance mode B (Fig. 183 (a3) (b3)). When the reach formation sound is output, it is possible to execute a highlight display ("reach formation operation") using the temporarily stopped left and right performance patterns 70a (Fig. 183 (a3) (b3)).

Note that "different" in allowing different reach formation sounds to be output depending on the presentation mode refers to cases where, for example, in presentation mode A, variable presentation pattern 4 is executed and the word "REACH" is displayed as the reach line presentation, and in presentation mode B, variable presentation pattern 6 is executed and the word "CHANCE" is displayed as the reach line presentation, and in presentation mode A, variable presentation pattern 6 is executed and the word "CHANCE" is displayed as the reach line presentation, and in presentation mode B, variable presentation pattern 4 is executed and the word "REACH" is displayed as the reach line presentation (the sounds are different for reach and chance).

As mentioned above, "different" also includes outputting different voices (e.g., a male voice and a female voice) as the voice for a "reach" and outputting different voices (e.g., a male voice and a female voice) as the voice for a "chance."

These features provide the following advantages.
When a normal reach is formed, a reach line effect (display of a reach line image) is executed, and when the reach line image is displayed, it is possible to execute an emphasis display using the temporarily stopped left and right performance patterns 70a ("operation when a reach is formed"), so that it is easy to recognize that a reach has been formed due to the large amount of change in the performance patterns 70a.

In addition, in the highlighting display ("operation when a reach is formed"), the display size of the character portion and the number portion is enlarged by enlarging the performance pattern 70a, so in addition to being able to see that a reach has been formed, it is also easy to recognize which performance pattern 70a has formed the reach.

In addition to the highlighting ("action when a reach is formed"), it is also possible to output a reach formation sound (reach or chance), making it easier to recognize visually and audibly that a reach has been formed.

In addition, in a variable presentation pattern in which an SPSP reach is executed (for example, variable presentation pattern 6), it is possible to output the sound of "chance," which tends to give the impression of a higher expectation than "reach," so that the player can hope that a normal reach will develop into an SP reach or an SPSP reach.

In addition, the "action at the time of reach formation" is an action mode that is different from the action modes of the pre-change action and pre-stop action executed in each performance mode, so that the formation of a reach can be recognized without the "action at the time of reach formation" being mistaken for a pre-change action or a pre-stop action.

In addition, different reach line images can be displayed depending on the presentation mode, which prevents players from getting bored with the presentation and contributes to increasing interest in the game.In addition, different reach formation sounds can be output depending on the presentation mode, which prevents players from getting bored with the presentation and contributes to increasing interest in the game.

In addition, even when the performance pattern 70a is being expanded by the "reach formation operation," the appearance of the special pattern TZ does not change, so even players who find it difficult to understand the appearance of the performance pattern 70a due to the expansion can recognize from the special pattern TZ that a changing performance is in progress.

In addition, even when the left and right performance patterns 70a are expanded to their maximum position, they are expanded to a range that does not overlap with the special pattern TZ, the icon display area 70C, the first reserved number display area 70E, or the first reserved icon display area 70B, so it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to reduced visibility of each display area.

In addition, the reach line image is displayed so as not to overlap the number portion (1) of the performance pattern 70a, which increases the interest in the game without reducing the visibility of which numbers have formed a reach.

Next, application examples of reach line effects will be listed.
For example, different BGM (variable BGM1, variable BGM2) can be output for the variable performance in the performance mode A and the variable performance in the performance mode B, and different reach line images ("REACH" and "CHANCE") can be displayed when a normal reach is formed in the performance modes A and B (Fig. 183 (a3) (b3)). When the reach line image is displayed, it is possible to execute a highlight display ("reach formation operation") using the temporarily stopped left and right performance patterns 70a (Fig. 183 (a3) (b3)). This makes it easy to recognize that a reach has been formed due to the large amount of change in the performance patterns 70a.

For example, the pre-change action when a change performance is executed in presentation mode A is different from the pre-change action when a change performance is executed in presentation mode B, while a common reach line image ("REACH") can be displayed when a normal reach is formed in presentation mode A and presentation mode B (Fig. 182 (a3) (b3)). When the reach line image is displayed, it is possible to execute a highlight display ("reach formation action") using the temporarily stopped left and right performance patterns 70a (Fig. 182 (a3) (b3)). This makes it easier to recognize that a reach has been formed due to the large amount of change in the performance patterns 70a.

For example, the pre-change action when a change performance is executed in presentation mode A is different from the pre-change action when a change performance is executed in presentation mode B, and different reach line images ("REACH" and "CHANCE") can be displayed when a normal reach is formed in presentation mode A and presentation mode B (Fig. 183 (a3) (b3)). When a reach line image is displayed, it is possible to execute a highlight display ("reach formation action") using the temporarily stopped left and right performance patterns 70a (Fig. 183 (a3) (b3)). This makes it easier to recognize that a reach has been formed due to the large amount of change in the performance patterns 70a.

For example, the pre-change action when a change performance is executed in presentation mode A is different from the pre-change action when a change performance is executed in presentation mode B, while a common reach formation sound (reach) can be output when a normal reach is formed in presentation mode A and presentation mode B (Fig. 182 (a3) (b3)). When the reach formation sound (reach) is output, a highlight display ("reach formation action") can be executed using the temporarily stopped left and right performance patterns 70a (Fig. 182 (a3) (b3)). This makes it easier to recognize that a reach has been formed due to the large amount of change in the presentation patterns 70a.

For example, the pre-change action when a change performance is executed in presentation mode A is different from the pre-change action when a change performance is executed in presentation mode B, and different reach formation sounds (reach and chance) can be output when a normal reach is formed in presentation mode A and presentation mode B (Fig. 183 (a3) (b3)). When the reach formation sound is output, it is possible to execute a highlight display ("reach formation action") using the temporarily stopped left and right performance patterns 70a (Fig. 183 (a3) (b3)). This makes it easier to recognize that a reach has been formed due to the large amount of change in the performance patterns 70a.

For example, the background image in presentation mode A and the background image in presentation mode B can be made different, while a common reach formation sound (reach) can be output in presentation mode A and presentation mode B when a normal reach is formed (Fig. 182 (a3) (b3)). When a reach line image is displayed, it is possible to execute a highlight display ("reach formation operation") using the temporarily stopped left and right performance patterns 70a (Fig. 182 (a3) (b3)). This makes it easy to recognize that a reach has been formed due to the large amount of change in the performance patterns 70a.

For example, the background image in presentation mode A is different from the background image in presentation mode B, and different reach formation sounds (reach and chance) can be output when a normal reach is formed in presentation mode A and presentation mode B (Fig. 183 (a3) (b3)). When the reach formation sound is output, it is possible to execute a highlight display ("reach formation operation") using the temporarily stopped left and right performance patterns 70a (Fig. 183 (a3) (b3)). This makes it easier to recognize that a reach has been formed due to the large amount of change in the performance patterns 70a.

For example, when the central performance pattern 70a temporarily stops in the first mode, it is possible to execute a first performance in which a temporary stop sound is output (T2' to T3 in FIG. 175 in variable performance pattern 1), and a second performance in which the output of the temporary stop sound is restricted (T8 to T10 in FIG. 171 in variable performance pattern 8). Furthermore, when the second performance is executed, it is easier for a special display image (the "CHANCE" image in FIG. 183) to be displayed as a reach line performance than when the first performance is executed (in normal fluctuations, the "REACH" image is displayed, and in SPSP reach fluctuations, the "CHANCE" image is displayed). As a result, even when the second performance in which the output of the temporary stop sound is restricted is executed, the display of the special display image can increase interest in the game.

For example, as the effects when the middle effect pattern 70a temporarily stops in the first mode, a first effect (T2' to T3 in FIG. 175 in variable effect pattern 1) that outputs a temporary stop sound and a second effect (T8 to T10 in FIG. 171 in variable effect pattern 8) that restricts the output of the temporary stop sound can be executed. Furthermore, when the second effect is executed, it is easier to execute a specific action effect (for example, an action in which a character image corresponding to the display of the "CHANCE" image makes a peace sign with both hands) as a reach formation action when compared to when the first effect is executed (in normal fluctuation, a reach formation action is not executed, and in SPSP reach fluctuation, an action in which a character image corresponding to the display of the "CHANCE" image makes a peace sign with both hands is executed). As a result, even when the second effect in which the output of the temporary stop sound is restricted is executed, the specific action effect can increase the interest in the game.

For example, as the effects when the middle effect pattern 70a temporarily stops in the first mode, the first effect (T2' to T3 in FIG. 175 in variable effect pattern 3) that outputs a temporary stop sound and the second effect (T7 to T9 in FIG. 178 in variable effect pattern 7) that restricts the output of the temporary stop sound can be executed. In addition, a specific effect (pseudo consecutive effect) that suggests the possibility of a big win being executed and a provocative effect (provocative effect that provocative effect that provocative effect) that incites whether or not a specific effect will be executed can be executed. In addition, when the second effect and the provocative effect are executed, the specific effect is more likely to be executed than when the first effect and the provocative effect are executed (variable effect pattern 7 is a pseudo success and develops into an SP reach, but variable effect pattern 3 is a pseudo failure and does not develop into an SP reach). As a result, even when the second effect that restricts the output of the temporary stop sound is executed, the provocative effect (success) and the execution of the specific effect can increase the interest in the game.

For example, when the central performance pattern 70a temporarily stops in the first mode, a variable performance (variable performance pattern 1) that does not execute a performance related to a pseudo consecutive performance (teasing performance, pseudo success, pseudo failure) (T2' to T3 in Fig. 175) is made easier to output a temporary stop sound than a variable performance that is a pseudo success and a miss (variable performance pattern 7) (variable performance pattern 7 has the same mode as Figs. 178 and 179). This makes it easier to recognize the end of a variable performance even in a variable performance that does not execute a performance related to a pseudo consecutive performance (variable performance with little change in performance).

Next, we will explain the characteristics of rainbow light emission using Figures 184 to 189.

First, "rainbow light emission" refers to the emission of light that is visible in the colors of the rainbow (for example, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, purple) by adjusting the color combination, mixing ratio, brightness, etc. of the full-color LEDs (red, green, blue) that make up the various light emission means. The execution period of "rainbow light emission" can be broadly divided into three periods: during the customer waiting demo performance, during the variable performance, and during the big win game. In addition, the various light emission means correspond to the frame performance lamp 10c, the board LED 5b, the LED of the performance button 17, the LED of the movable performance device 77, and the first image display device 70 to the fourth image display device 73 (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "image display devices"). Note that "rainbow light emission" in the image display device is sometimes referred to as "rainbow display", but the two are synonymous.

The displays in the main information display device 59 (special symbol display 60, special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, special symbol reserved display 63, special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, round count display 66, right hit display 67, status check display 68) do not emit rainbow light, but light up or flash in a single color. Similarly, the displays in the sub information display device 80 (sub first change display, sub second change display, sub first reserve display, sub second reserve display, sub normal symbol change display, sub normal symbol reserved display, sub right hit display) do not emit rainbow light, but light up or flash in a single color.

The frame effect lamp 10c and the LED of the effect button 17 are both categorized as the frame lighting device 10, and the board LED 5b and the LED of the movable effect device 77 are both categorized as the board lighting device 76. However, even if they are categorized as the same frame lighting device 10, the frame effect lamp 10c and the LED of the effect button 17 can be made to emit light (rainbow light) individually, or can be made to emit light (rainbow light) simultaneously. The same is true for the board lighting device 76. In addition, in the timing charts of Figures 184 to 189, for convenience, the term "frame lighting device" is used, but strictly speaking, this refers to the frame effect lamp 10c and the LED of the effect button 17, and the term "board lighting device" strictly refers to the board LED 5b and the LED of the movable effect device 77. In addition, the light emitting means used in each state (customer waiting demo performance, variable performance, big win game) will be described later in Figure 208.

The light emission modes of the rainbow light emission are determined for each of the waiting-for-customer demo performance, the variable performance, and the big win game. Details of these light emission modes will be described later in FIG. 221. The same color may have different brightness or light emission colors during the waiting-for-customer demo performance, the variable performance, and the big win game. For example, even if the same blue is used, a lighter blue may be used during the waiting-for-customer demo performance and a darker blue during the variable performance to differentiate the decorativeness, or a light emission mode that emits light in seven colors and a light emission mode that emits light in six colors may be provided to differentiate the decorativeness. In addition to the above seven colors (e.g., red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple), rainbow light emission may be performed in eight colors, including "white," for example.

The rainbow light emission in each execution period will be described in detail below.
184 shows how the rainbow light is emitted during the customer waiting performance. Here, the explanation will be given starting from the timing T4 when the customer waiting performance starts.

First, at the timing of T4, when the stop display time of the special symbol has elapsed and the waiting period has begun, the customer waiting standby performance A (see FIG. 153) starts, and the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 start emitting light while waiting for customers. The customer waiting illumination is, for example, a light emission pattern based on white, and the lit areas change over time.

Next, at the timing of T5, if a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed since the start of waiting for customers performance A without any start winning or the like, waiting for customers performance B (see FIG. 153) starts, where the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 continue to emit light while waiting for customers. In addition, with the end of waiting for customers performance A, the audible output of the variable background music is stopped (muted). Although not shown in FIG. 153, in waiting for customers performance A and waiting for customers performance B, the first reserved number display area 70E, the second reserved number display area 70F (both displaying "0"), and the special pattern TZ (displaying "523") are visibly displayed.

Next, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the customer waiting waiting performance B without any start winning, the customer waiting demo performance A (see FIG. 153) starts. When the customer waiting demo performance A starts, the horizontally scrolling image of the normal background displayed on the first image display device 70 becomes invisible, and the "DEMO" display (e.g., blue letters) and the demo movie image (character movie image) are displayed. When the horizontally scrolling image of the normal background becomes invisible, the performance pattern 70a becomes difficult to see in both customer waiting demo performances A and B, but the special pattern TZ, the first reserved number display area 70E, and the second reserved number display area 70F (both display "0") are visible (not shown). In addition, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 start the demo light emission 1. The demo light emission 1 is, for example, a light emission mode based on white and blue, and is a light emission mode in which the lighting location and lighting color change over time. Furthermore, compared to demo light 3, which will be described later, demo light 1 has more light colors, a faster rate of change (movement speed) of the lit up parts, and more directions of change (movement directions), resulting in a lighting pattern that decorates the demo movie image (character movie image) as if it were undergoing a dynamic performance.

Next, at the timing of T7, when a predetermined time (e.g., 20 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the customer waiting demo performance A without a start winning, the display content of the first image display device 70 and the light emission state of the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 change. Specifically, the first image display device 70 displays the "DEMO" display (e.g., blue characters) and the model name and model logo of the gaming machine (all information including characters) (see FIG. 153). In addition, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 start light emission during demonstration 2. Here, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 emit rainbow light at the timing when the model name and model logo of the gaming machine are displayed, so that the model name and model logo of the gaming machine are most gorgeously decorated. Note that the display of rainbow effect images on the image display device is restricted to prevent the misunderstanding that the model name and model logo of the gaming machine include a rainbow design.

Strictly speaking, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 emit rainbow light when the model name and model logo of the gaming machine are displayed in the following manner. Specifically, first, the model name and model logo of the gaming machine fade in on the first image display device 70. Then, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 start emitting rainbow light when the brightness of the model name and model logo of the gaming machine during the fade-in is about 40%, and the rainbow light emission continues even when the brightness of the model name and model logo of the gaming machine ends and the fade-in is 100%. In this case, at the low brightness stage, the rainbow light emission starts in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize as rainbow colors (for example, the color change speed is slow, few colors are used, etc.), and as the brightness increases, it is preferable to emit light in a manner that is easy for the player to recognize as rainbow colors (for example, the color change speed is fast, all seven colors are used, etc.). This allows the machine's model name and logo to be gradually recognized, and the rainbow glow also becomes gradually recognized, allowing the machine's model name and logo to be displayed in a more gorgeous way, creating a highly decorative waiting experience for customers.

In the above description, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 emit rainbow light when the model name or model logo of the gaming machine (both of which contain text) is displayed, but the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 may emit rainbow light when information that does not contain text is displayed, not limited to the model name or model logo of the gaming machine (both of which contain text). For example, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 may emit rainbow light when a character symbolizing the manufacturer of the gaming machine (for example, a character that can appear as a jackpot confirmation effect) is displayed.

In addition, the rainbow light emission when customer waiting demo performance A is being performed is performed by the frame performance lamp 10c in the frame lighting device 10, and is not performed by the LED of the performance button 17 (see Figure 208). In addition, it is performed by the board surface LED 5b in the board lighting device 76, and is not performed by the LED of the movable performance device 77 (see Figure 208). In addition, it is not performed by the first image display device 70 to the fourth image display device 73 (see Figure 208).

In addition, while the rainbow light is being emitted when customer waiting demo performance A is being performed, no background music or sound effects are output from the audio output device 9, and it is silent. This makes it possible to prevent customer waiting demo performance A from becoming an excessive performance (promoting the player to play more than necessary).

Next, at the timing of T8, when a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the customer waiting demo performance A without a start winning, the customer waiting demo performance B (see FIG. 153) is started. When the customer waiting demo performance B is started, the model name and model logo of the gaming machine displayed on the first image display device 70 are hidden, and a predetermined attention promotion notification display (see FIG. 153) is started. In addition, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 start the demonstration light emission 3. The demonstration light emission 3 is, for example, a light emission mode based on white, and is a light emission mode in which the lighting location and lighting color change over time. In addition, during the execution of the demonstration light emission 3, the execution of the demonstration light emission 2 is restricted, and the predetermined attention promotion notification display is not gorgeously decorated with rainbow light emission. In addition, in the image display device (first image display device 70), the rainbow display is not performed because the predetermined attention promotion notification display is executed. In other words, while the specified attention promotion notification display is being executed, the execution of rainbow light emission is restricted in the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 76, and the image display device (first image display device 70). Then, when the execution period of the specified attention promotion notification display has elapsed, the specified attention promotion notification display is made non-display at timing T9. Note that the specified attention promotion notification display is information that includes text such as "Watch out for getting addicted!" as shown in FIG. 153.

When the specified caution prompting notifications are displayed one by one, some of them may overlap with the rainbow light emission period depending on the type of the specified caution prompting notification. For example, the display period of "Watch out for getting addicted!" may be a white light emission period, but the display period of "No hitting the table" may be a rainbow light emission period. Even when the specified caution prompting notifications are displayed simultaneously, some of them may overlap with the rainbow light emission period. In other words, the execution of rainbow light emission is restricted, meaning that in principle, the display period of the specified caution prompting notification notification and the rainbow light emission period do not overlap, but some of them may overlap with the rainbow light emission period.

In addition, in both customer waiting demo performances A and B, the special symbol TZ, the first hold number display area 70E, and the second hold number display area 70F (both displaying "0") are visible, but this is not limited to the above. The special symbol TZ may be difficult to see but the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number display area 70F (both displaying "0") are visible, or the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number display area 70F are difficult to see but the special symbol TZ is visible, or all of the special symbol TZ, the first hold number display area 70E, and the second hold number display area 70F may be difficult to see.

In addition, during the customer waiting demo performance, the "company name" (information including text) of the gaming machine manufacturer may be displayed. In addition, when the "company name" is displayed, it is recommended that the "company name" be made to emit rainbow light while the "company name" is displayed, in the same way as when the gaming machine model name and model logo are displayed. This makes it possible to appeal to the public.

During the customer waiting demo performance, one, two, or all three of the following may be displayed: the model name or model logo of the gaming machine, the company name, or a specified caution notification display. The combinations displayed may also differ depending on the game state. In this case, it is preferable to display a greater number of combinations in the normal game state than in the specific game state (time-saving game state, special probability game state). This allows various information to be displayed in the normal game state, which is more likely to transition to the customer waiting demo performance than the specific game state, thereby increasing the opportunities for the player to see it.

Figure 185 shows the rainbow light emission during the variable performance, and the execution state of the rainbow light emission during a jackpot game. Here, we will explain the variable performance pattern in which an SPSP reach is executed as an example.

First, at the timing of T1, an SPSP reach is in progress. Here, the special symbols are changing, an SPSP reach background is displayed as the background image, and the performance symbols and special symbols are updating and changing. In addition, the sound output device 9 is outputting SPSP reach BGM, and the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 are emitting SPSP reach light. In addition, the icon display area 70C displays the icon TI in the normal display mode.

Next, at timing T2, a prompting effect for operating the effect button 17 and the valid period of the effect button 17 are initiated. Specifically, an operation prompting image resembling the effect button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, the audible output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped (muted), and a prompting sound saying "press" is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, at the timing of T3, when the performance button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, a success sound (e.g., a cue) according to the judgment result is output, and the performance pattern 70a (e.g., "555") in a display mode of only numbers is temporarily stopped. In addition, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 end the SPSP reach light emission and start rainbow light emission. In addition, the button driving device 17b is driven to start vibration of the performance button 17. In other words, during the rainbow light emission of the variable performance, unlike during the rainbow light emission of the customer waiting demo performance A, a sound effect (success sound) is output from the audio output device 9. This can increase the performance interest in the variable performance, and makes it easier to distinguish whether the variable performance is in progress or the customer waiting demo performance A.

Next, at the timing of T4, when the output period of the success sound according to the judgment result has elapsed, the output of the success sound is stopped. Then, at the timing of T4, the performance pattern 70a (for example, "555") that displays only numbers is temporarily stopped, and a new temporary stop sound "clack" corresponding to a jackpot is output until the timing of T5. After that, at the timing of T5, when the variation time of the special pattern has elapsed, a stop command (pattern determination command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. Also, the special pattern corresponding to a jackpot is stopped and displayed on the first special pattern display 60.

Next, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the stop command, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C starts to disappear in an animation, and the performance pattern 70a (e.g., "555") and the special pattern TZ (e.g., "555") that display only numbers start to stop. In addition, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 stop emitting rainbow light and start emitting white light. In addition, the button driving device 17b stops driving, and the vibration of the performance button 17 ends.

Then, at timing T7, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the disappearance display of the icon TI in the animation, the disappearance display of the icon TI in the animation ends.

Next, between T7 and T8, the main control board 110 sends a jackpot opening designation command to the performance control board 130, and at T8, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the jackpot opening designation command was received, a jackpot opening background is displayed as the background image, and the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 begin jackpot opening illumination. The jackpot opening illumination is, for example, a white-based illumination mode in which the lit areas change over time. Also, although not shown in the figure, the audio output device 9 begins outputting jackpot opening BGM.

Next, between T8 and T9, the main control board 110 sends a round number designation command to the performance control board 130, and at T9, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the round number designation command was received, the big win round background is displayed as the background image, and the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 start emitting light for the big win round. The big win round emission is, for example, an emission pattern based on blue and white, and is an emission pattern in which the lit areas change over time. Also, although not shown in the figure, the sound output device 9 stops outputting the big win opening BGM and starts outputting the big win round BGM.

Next, between T8 and T9, the main control board 110 sends an inter-round interval designation command to the performance control board 130, and at T10, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the inter-round interval designation command was received, an inter-round interval background (an image with a rainbow effect added) is displayed as the background image, and the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 begin inter-round interval illumination (rainbow illumination).

The above light emission mode is merely an example, and rainbow light emission and rainbow display may be performed during the jackpot opening or during the jackpot round. In particular, when a performance is performed during a jackpot round to notify the player of whether or not a high probability time-saving game state (probability variable game state) will be entered after the jackpot play ends, and the performance result is to notify the player of a high probability time-saving game state (probability variable game state), it is preferable to make the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 emit rainbow light to dramatically display that a favorable game state has been obtained. In this case, rainbow light emission for the promotion performance during the jackpot may be provided.

In addition, when executing a presentation during a jackpot round to notify whether or not a transition to a high-probability time-saving game state (probability variable game state) will occur after the end of the jackpot play, if the presentation is to notify that a transition to a high-probability time-saving game state (probability variable game state) will occur, the rainbow light for promotion during jackpot play will be emitted, whereas if the presentation is to notify that a transition to a high-probability time-saving game state (probability variable game state) will not occur, the execution of the rainbow light for promotion during jackpot play may be restricted, and the rainbow light may be restricted until the start of the jackpot ending (until T5 in FIG. 186). This prevents the player from feeling upset when rainbow light is emitted after a presentation that a transition to a high-probability time-saving game state (probability variable game state) will not occur.

In the example of FIG. 185, the effect pattern 70a is configured to be stopped while still displaying numbers only, but this is not limited to the above, and the effect pattern 70a may be stopped by returning from the number-only display mode to the first mode. Even in this case, the "clack" sound output at T4 to T5 is output when the effect pattern 70a is in the number-only display mode.

In the example of FIG. 185, rainbow lighting during the variable performance is performed between timings T3 and T6, but only in the case of a jackpot, rainbow lighting may be performed in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 before timing T3 (the timing at which the determination result is notified). For example, rainbow lighting may be performed before the execution of a reach performance, or rainbow lighting may be performed while the reach performance is being executed.

Also, the entirety of the performance symbol 70a that is temporarily displayed to indicate a jackpot, or the surrounding area, may be displayed in a rainbow. This allows the performance symbol 70a that is temporarily displayed to indicate a jackpot to be decorated in a gorgeous way, giving the player a sense of satisfaction. On the other hand, it is preferable not to display the special symbol TZ that is not temporarily displayed in a rainbow. This prevents the trouble of having to set aside a period during which the special symbol TZ that is temporarily displayed is decorated in a rainbow.

Figure 186 is a timing chart showing the start of a jackpot until its end. Note that since Figure 186 shows a continuation of Figure 185, the explanation will start from the timing of T5.

First, the timing of T5 is the timing when the final round ends and a predetermined period of time has passed since the performance control board 130 received the jackpot ending designation command. When a predetermined period of time has passed since the jackpot ending designation command was received, a jackpot ending background is displayed as the background image, and the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 end their round illumination and start jackpot ending illumination (rainbow illumination). In addition, the audio output device 9 stops outputting the jackpot round BGM and starts outputting the jackpot ending BGM. Note that no rainbow effect is added to the jackpot ending background, and rainbow display is restricted on the image display device.

After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed from timing T5, at timing T6, the display of the jackpot ending background ends as the background image, and the name of the company that manufactured the gaming machine is displayed. At this time, the sound output device 9 stops outputting the jackpot ending BGM, and outputs a sound effect (output period is 2 seconds). This emphasizes that the company name of the gaming machine manufacturer has been displayed. In addition, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 end the jackpot ending light emission (rainbow light emission) and start emitting white light.

After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed from timing T6, a predetermined caution notification display is started as a background image at timing T7. Two types of caution notification displays are displayed here: "Watch out for getting addicted!" and "Watch out for forgetting to take your card!", and the display period is also shorter than in customer waiting demo performance B. As with customer waiting demo performance B, rainbow illumination is restricted from being executed in the frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76, and image display device (first image display device 70). Then, when the execution period of the predetermined caution notification display has elapsed, the predetermined caution notification display is made non-display at timing T8.

At the timing of T7, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 continue to emit white light, and rainbow light emission is restricted. The white light emission during the specified attention prompting notification display (T8-T9) in FIG. 184 and the white light emission during the specified attention prompting notification display (T7-T8) in FIG. 186 may be the same or different. For example, both may be the same as white light, one may be white light and the other may be white flashing, or the same white flashing may be different in the flashing cycle or the moving speed of the lit area. During the specified attention prompting notification display, light emission that moves between areas (see FIG. 216) is restricted, and light emission including flashing is restricted, so that a calm light emission mode such as white light or white flashing is executed.

In addition, since the jackpot ending period is time-constrained, unlike the execution period of customer waiting demo performance B, the jackpot ending BGM that started to be output at timing T5 may be output continuously during the display period of the gaming machine manufacturer's company name and the caution warning display period. In other words, the gaming machine manufacturer's company name and the caution warning display may be executed while the BGM is being output. Similarly, the rainbow light emission that started at timing T5 may be continued during the display period of the gaming machine manufacturer's company name and the caution warning display period. In other words, the gaming machine manufacturer's company name and the caution warning display may be executed while the rainbow light is being emitted.

In addition, during the big win ending period, the model name and model logo of the gaming machine may be displayed. When displaying the model name and model logo of the gaming machine, it is recommended that the display period be a rainbow light emission period. This allows the model name and model logo of the gaming machine to be decorated in a gorgeous way.

During the jackpot ending period, one, two, or all three of the following may be displayed: the model name or model logo of the gaming machine, the company name, or a specified warning notification. The combinations displayed may also differ depending on the game state when the jackpot is determined. For example, it is recommended to display more combinations when a jackpot is determined in a "low-probability non-time-saving game state" than when a jackpot is determined in a "high-probability time-saving game state." This prevents the jackpot ending in a jackpot won in a "high-probability time-saving game state" from taking up too much time and disrupting smooth game progress.

The "company name" above constitutes the "first character information," the "model name" and "model logo" constitute the "second character information," and the "prescribed warning notification display" constitutes the "third character information." In addition, the "company name," "model name" and "model logo," and the "prescribed warning notification display" constitute the "prescribed information."

In addition, the predetermined attention promotion notification display may be displayed only in the jackpot ending when the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot in the "low probability non-time-saving game state", and may not be displayed in the jackpot ending when the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot in the "low probability time-saving game state" or the "high probability time-saving game state". In addition, when the predetermined attention promotion notification display is not displayed in the jackpot ending when the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot in the "low probability time-saving game state" or the "high probability time-saving game state", it is preferable to set the execution period of the ending light emission (rainbow) longer than when the predetermined attention promotion notification display is displayed. This prevents discomfort caused by the repeated display of the predetermined attention promotion notification display, and prevents boredom by setting the rainbow light emission period longer instead when the predetermined attention promotion notification display is not displayed.
On the other hand, there is no problem in displaying a predetermined caution notification display at the jackpot ending when a jackpot is determined to have occurred in the "low-probability time-saving game state" or the "high-probability time-saving game state."

The restriction on rainbow light emission during the specified warning notification display in Figures 184 and 186 means that the execution of all rainbow light emission modes, such as moving light emission 1, moving light emission 2, radial light emission, rainbow flash, and high-speed seven-color change, which will be described later, is restricted.

As shown in Figures 185 and 186 above, during the period from the variable display that results in a jackpot to the end of the jackpot game, rainbow light emission is more likely to occur when the specified caution notification display is not displayed than when the specified caution notification display is displayed (the ease of rainbow light emission differs between when the specified caution notification display is displayed and when it is not displayed). This allows attention to be drawn to the specified caution notification display when it is displayed, and when the specified caution notification display is not displayed, the rainbow light emission can increase the interest of the presentation.

In addition, during the period from the variable display indicating a jackpot to the end of the jackpot game, rainbow light emission is enabled when the jackpot symbol is temporarily stopped, and rainbow light emission is restricted when a specified caution notification display is displayed. This allows the player to focus on the specified caution notification display when it is displayed, and increases the excitement of the presentation by emitting rainbow light when the jackpot symbol is temporarily stopped.

In addition, during the period from the variable display indicating a jackpot to the end of the jackpot game, rainbow illumination is enabled when the jackpot symbol is temporarily stopped, and rainbow illumination is restricted when a specified attention-promoting notification display is displayed at the jackpot ending when a jackpot is determined to have occurred in a "low probability non-time-limited game state." This allows the player to focus on the specified attention-promoting notification display when it is displayed, and when the jackpot symbol is temporarily stopped, rainbow illumination can be used to increase the excitement of the presentation.

Figure 187 is a timing chart showing how the customer waiting standby performance and customer waiting demo performance are executed after power is restored (power is turned ON). Here, we will mainly compare the power restoration when the increment counter does not reach "95000" (Figure 187) with the power restoration when the increment counter reaches "95000" (Figure 159). Note that Figure 187 differs from Figure 184 only in that the power is restored or not, and is otherwise similar, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

In the case of FIG. 187, since the increment counter has not reached "95000", after power is restored, unless a start winning occurs, customer waiting standby performance A, customer waiting standby performance B, customer waiting demo performance A, and customer waiting demo performance B are executed in chronological order. In other words, during the period when the model name and model logo of the gaming machine are displayed in customer waiting demo performance A, it is possible to make the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 emit rainbow light.

On the other hand, in the case of FIG. 159, after the power is restored, a notification is issued stating "Winning limit device in operation, please clear the RWM," and this notification continues unless the RWM is cleared. Therefore, customer waiting standby performance A, customer waiting standby performance B, customer waiting demo performance A, and customer waiting demo performance B will not be executed, and as a result, the rainbow illumination in customer waiting demo performance A will not be executed.

Figure 188 is a timing chart showing the operation of the winning limit device during rainbow illumination (customer waiting demo performance A). Note that the value of the increment counter at timing T4 is "94998".

At the timing of T5, the model name and model logo of the gaming machine are displayed in the customer waiting demo performance A, and the demo light 2 (rainbow light) of the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 begins. Then, at the timing of T5' before the light emission period of the demo light 2 (rainbow light) has elapsed, for example, the value of the increment counter is updated to "95000" due to a game ball entering the general winning slot 43. In this case, the demo light 2 (rainbow light) of the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 ends immediately at the timing of T5' without being emitted until the timing of T6, when the light emission period has elapsed. Then, the winning limit device operation notification begins.

In this way, when the earning limit device is activated during the rainbow light emission in customer waiting demo performance A, the light emission immediately ends and an earning limit device activation notification is issued, even if the rainbow light emission is in progress (even if the light emission period has not been met). On the other hand, if the earning limit device is activated during any other rainbow light emission, the following occurs.

For example, if the value of the increment counter reaches "95000" during the variable performance between T3 and T6 in FIG. 185, the winning limit device will be activated and an announcement of the activation of the winning limit device will be made, and the rainbow light will immediately end, just like in customer waiting demo performance A.

For example, if the value of the increment counter reaches "95000" during the jackpot interval between T3 and T4 in Figure 186, the win limit device will be activated after the jackpot ends, and the rainbow light will continue to glow.

For example, if the value of the increment counter reaches "95,000" during the jackpot ending between T5 and T6 in Figure 186, the win limit device will be activated after the jackpot ends, and the rainbow light will continue to glow.

Even if the value of the increment counter reaches "95000" in the first round of a jackpot game, the rainbow light emission during the jackpot interval between the first and second rounds will be executed without any restrictions, but the jackpot ending will be replaced with the completion performance shown in Figure 158, so the rainbow light emission that would have been executed at the jackpot ending will not be executed.

In the above "Another example during jackpot play", when the value of the increment counter reaches "95000" during a jackpot, an image such as "You are in a jackpot. Please continue playing. After the jackpot wins, the winning limit device will be activated and the game will end" is displayed in front of the shutter image. However, it is also possible to restrict the execution of rainbow light emission when this display is made. In this case, it is preferable to emit light in a white-based light emission mode (a modest light emission mode). For example, if rainbow light emission is being executed even though the game will end after a win, it may cause the player a sense of incongruity or discomfort. However, if the light emission mode is white-based, it is possible to emit light appropriate to suggest that the game will end after a win, and the occurrence of incongruity or discomfort can be suppressed.

In addition, even if a method is not adopted in which an image such as "You are in a jackpot. Please continue playing. After you win, the winning limit device will be activated and your game will end" is displayed in front of the shutter image when the value of the increment counter reaches "95,000" during a jackpot, the execution of rainbow illumination may be restricted and illumination may be displayed in a white-based illumination mode (a subdued illumination mode) when the value of the increment counter reaches "95,000".

Figure 189 is a timing chart showing the operation of the earning limit device during an abnormality notification. Note that since this is an example of an abnormality occurring while customer waiting standby performance A is being performed, the explanation will begin with timing T5'. Also, while Figures 162 and 163 show an example of an abnormality occurring after the earning limit device is activated, this time we will show an example of the earning limit device being activated after an abnormality occurs. Also, the priority order is as shown in Figure 129.

At the timing of T5', a magnet detection error occurs, "Magnet detected" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left side sub-display device) (Figure 131), and "Magnet detected + siren (R)" is output from the audio output device 9 (Figure 129). In addition, the frame lighting device 10 flashes red, and the board lighting device 76 goes out (Figure 129).

After that, at timing T6, a game ball enters the general winning slot 43 or the like, and the value of the increment counter is updated to "95000". In this case, the win limit device operation notification is immediately executed, but the magnet detection error notification continues. Also, as shown in FIG. 129, the priority relationship is magnet detection error > win limit device operation, so the audio notification and electric light notification continue with the content corresponding to the magnet detection error.

Note that, although the description of notification events with a lower priority than the operation of the acquisition limit device is omitted, they are basically the same as in FIG. 163. For example, if the abnormality that occurred at T5' in FIG. 189 is interpreted as an unauthorized radio wave detection error, from the timing of T6, the audio notification and the electric light notification will be replaced with the content corresponding to the operation of the acquisition limit device.

Note that all events shown in Figs. 129 and 130 are interchangeable, but some notification events may be interchangeable or not. For example, notification events with a higher priority than the operation of the acquisition limit device are in the form shown in Fig. 189, but for notification events with a lower priority than the operation of the acquisition limit device, audio, visual, and electric notification may all be terminated at timing T6 in Fig. 189. Also, for notification events with priorities 29 to 33 shown in Fig. 130, audio, visual, and electric notification may all be terminated at timing T6 in Fig. 189.

According to Figures 184 to 189, the following features are provided.
(J) The frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 can be made to emit rainbow light in a progress control state in which game progress control is executed (during variable performance, during big win game) and a non-progress control state in which game progress control is not executed (customer waiting demo performance A). If the power supply is restored when the acquisition limit device is not operating, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 can emit rainbow light thereafter (T5 to T6 in FIG. 187), but if the power supply is restored when the acquisition limit device is operating, it is possible to restrict the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 from emitting rainbow light thereafter (FIG. 159).

(k) When the winning limit device is not activated, it is possible for the light emitting means (either the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 76, or both) to emit rainbow light during the execution of a specified performance (during variable performance, during a jackpot game, or during customer waiting demo performance A) (Figs. 184 and 185), and it is possible for the light emitting means (either the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 76, or both) to emit a specified light (abnormal light) during the occurrence of a specified abnormality (T5' in Fig. 189). After the winning limit device is activated, the execution of rainbow light emission is restricted, but special light emission is possible (T6 onwards in Fig. 189).

(L) When the acquisition limit device is not activated, it is possible to make the light emitting means (either the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 76, or both) emit rainbow light while a specific performance (during variable performance, during jackpot play, customer waiting demo performance A) is being performed (Figs. 184, 185), and it is possible to make the light emitting means (either the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 76, or both) emit a specific light (abnormal light) while a specific abnormality occurs (T5' in Fig. 189). When the acquisition limit device is activated while rainbow light is being emitted, it is possible to end the execution of rainbow light emission (T5' in Fig. 188), and when the acquisition limit device is activated while special light is being emitted, it is possible to continue the execution of special light emission (T6 in Fig. 189).

(W) It is possible to execute a warning display (such as a warning against addiction) to alert the player to certain precautions, and in the first period when the warning display is not executed (T7 to T8 in FIG. 184, T3 to T6 in FIG. 185, T3 to T4 and T5 to T6 in FIG. 186), it is possible to make the light-emitting means (either the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 76, or both) emit rainbow light, and in the second period when the warning display is executed (the warning display period from T8 in FIG. 184, and the warning display period from T7 in FIG. 186), it is possible to restrict the light-emitting means (either the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 76, or both) from emitting rainbow light.

(F) It is possible to display a warning message (such as a warning about addiction) to alert the player to certain precautions, and to make the light-emitting means (either the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 76, or both) emit rainbow light, and the warning message can be executed during the first period (the big win ending period in FIG. 186) and the second period (the customer waiting demo performance B period in FIG. 184), and when the warning message is being executed during the first period (the warning message period from T7 in FIG. 186), the execution of the rainbow light emission can be restricted.

These features provide the following advantages.
In the variable presentation, when it is notified that a big win will be executed or during a big win game, rainbow light is emitted, so that the mood of the player who is excited by getting the big win can be further improved and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, during the customer waiting demo performance B, the gaming machine's model name and model logo are illuminated in rainbow light during the display period, allowing the gaming machine's model name and model logo to be decorated in a gorgeous way, making the gaming machine's model name and model logo more easily noticeable to players.

In addition, the rainbow light emitted during customer waiting demo performance B can encourage players to play with gorgeous decorations, which can contribute to improving the operation of gaming machine 1.

In addition, after the winning limit device is activated, even if the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned from OFF to ON, the operation notification of the winning limit device continues and customer waiting demo performance B (rainbow light emission) etc. is not executed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly thinking that they can play when it is actually impossible to play, which would lead to a decrease in motivation to play. Also, it is possible to have the manager of the gaming machine 1 take appropriate action (clearing the RWM).

In addition, after the win limit device is activated, the rainbow light emission is restricted, but the specified light emission (abnormal light emission) is still possible, so it is possible to prevent security from being neglected and the gaming machine from becoming vulnerable to fraudulent activity just because the win limit device has been activated. This prevents players from being discouraged from playing on a gaming machine where fraudulent activity may be occurring, and thus preventing a decline in motivation to play.

In addition, if the win limit device is activated while the rainbow light is being emitted, the rainbow light is stopped, and if the win limit device is activated while the specified light is being emitted (abnormal light), the specified light is continued. This prevents security from being neglected after the win limit device is activated, making the gaming machine vulnerable to fraudulent activity. This prevents players from being discouraged from playing on a gaming machine where fraudulent activity may be occurring, and thus preventing a decline in motivation to play.

In addition, if the earning limit device is activated while a specific light is being emitted (abnormal light is being emitted), for example, if there is a magnet detection error, which has a higher priority than the earning limit device activation, a notification corresponding to the magnet detection error is given priority, and if there is an unauthorized radio wave detection error, which has a higher priority than the earning limit device activation, a notification of the earning limit device activation is given priority, so that an appropriate notification can be given in response to the abnormality that has occurred.

In addition, rainbow light emission is enabled during the first period when the attention warning display is not executed, and rainbow light emission is restricted during the second period when the attention warning display is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the attention warning notification from becoming difficult for the player to notice by enhancing the decorativeness, and can, for example, encourage the player to play appropriately.

In addition, by emitting rainbow light while the caution notification display is being displayed, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the effect of the caution notification display is diminished by encouraging the player to refrain from excessive play, for example, by emitting rainbow light, which may provoke the player. In addition, by not encouraging the player more than necessary, it is possible to prevent a decrease in motivation to play.

In addition, when a caution prompting display is being executed during the jackpot ending period, the execution of rainbow light emission is restricted. In particular, during jackpot play, rainbow light emission is executed frequently, such as interval light emission (T3-T4 in FIG. 186) and ending light emission (T5-T6 in FIG. 186). Therefore, if rainbow light emission is also executed during the execution period of the caution prompting display during the jackpot ending period (T7-T8 in FIG. 186), there is a risk that the player will mistakenly believe that it is part of a presentation celebrating the jackpot. In contrast, the execution of rainbow light emission is restricted during the execution period of the caution prompting display during the jackpot ending period (T7-T8 in FIG. 186), so that the player will not mistakenly believe that it is part of a presentation celebrating the jackpot, and can be made to pay attention to playing appropriately, for example. This also prevents a decrease in motivation to play.

In addition, while the rainbow light emission has been shown to be performed by both the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76, it may be possible to enable one and not the other, or it may be possible to enable both but have a period in which only one is active.

Next, examples of applications of rainbow light emission (particularly those related to an acquisition limit device) will be listed.
For example, if a game ball enters the general winning port 43 or the like during the rainbow light emission at T4 in Fig. 185 and the increment counter reaches "95000", the winning condition device will immediately operate and the rainbow light emission will end, but if a game ball enters the big winning port 50 or the like during the rainbow light emission at T3 to T4 in Fig. 186 and the increment counter reaches "95000", the winning limit device will operate after the big win ends, so the rainbow light emission will continue until the timing of T4 without ending. In this way, if the big win game has not yet been played, the operation of the winning limit device will be promptly notified to let the player know that the game will end, and if the big win game is in progress, the player will know that the game can continue until the big win game ends.

For example, as shown in T5' in FIG. 188, if a game ball enters the general winning port 43 or the like during the rainbow light emission in the customer waiting demo performance B and the increment counter reaches "95000", the winning condition device will immediately operate and the rainbow light emission will end, but if a game ball enters the big winning port 50 or the like during the rainbow light emission from T3 to T4 in FIG. 186 and the increment counter reaches "95000", the winning limit device will operate after the big win ends, so the rainbow light emission will continue until the timing of T4 without ending. In this way, if during the customer waiting demo performance B, the operation of the winning limit device will be promptly notified to let the player know that the game will end, and if during a big win game, the player will be able to know that the game can continue until the end of the big win game.

For example, if a game ball enters the general winning opening 43 or the like during the rainbow light emission at T4 in FIG. 185 and the increment counter reaches "95000", the winning condition device will immediately operate and the rainbow light emission will end, but if a game ball enters the general winning opening 43 or the like during the rainbow light emission at T4 in FIG. 185 and the increment counter reaches "90000" and an advance notification is executed (FIG. 154(c)), the rainbow light emission will not end and will continue until the timing of T6. As a result, if the increment counter value reaches "95000", the operation of the win limit device will be notified immediately, allowing the player to know that the game will end, and if the increment counter value reaches "90000", the player can be made aware in advance that the win limit device is approaching operation.

For example, as shown in T5' in FIG. 188, if a game ball enters the general winning opening 43 or the like during rainbow light emission in customer waiting demo performance B and the increment counter reaches "95000", the winning condition device will immediately operate and the rainbow light emission will end, but if a game ball enters the general winning opening 43 or the like during rainbow light emission in customer waiting demo performance B and the increment counter reaches "90000" and a pre-notification is executed (FIG. 155(g)), the rainbow light emission will not end and will continue until timing T6. As a result, if the increment counter value reaches "95000", the operation of the winning limit device will be notified immediately, allowing the player to know that the game will end, and if the increment counter value reaches "90000", the player can be made aware in advance that the winning limit device is approaching operation.

For example, the reach prompting effect, which prompts the player whether or not a reach will be executed, has a first reach prompting effect that can be executed in the first presentation mode (presentation modes A to C), and a second reach prompting effect that can be executed in the second presentation mode (presentation modes D to E). Furthermore, if a reach is established after the second reach prompting effect is executed, the temporary stop sound "Kachin" corresponding to a jackpot is more likely to be output afterwards than if a reach is established after the first reach prompting effect is executed (presentation modes D to E are more likely to select a successful reach prompting effect when determining the variable presentation pattern corresponding to a jackpot). This prevents a decrease in interest in the game from occurring due to only failed reach prompting effects being executed, or only variable presentations in which the reach is established but results in a miss being executed, even when the player is in an advantageous state (presentation modes D to E correspond to a specific game state).

For example, when the central performance pattern 70a temporarily stops in the first mode, it is possible to execute a first performance in which a temporary stop sound is output (T2' to T3 in FIG. 175 for variable performance pattern 1), and a second performance in which the output of the temporary stop sound is restricted (T3 to T4 in FIG. 185 for variable performance pattern 8). When the second performance is executed, the temporary stop sound "Kachin" corresponding to a jackpot is more likely to be output than when the first performance is executed (a jackpot does not occur in normal fluctuations, but a jackpot can occur with an SPSP reach). As a result, even when the second performance in which the output of the temporary stop sound is restricted is executed, the temporary stop sound corresponding to a jackpot may be output, thereby increasing interest in the game.

For example, in the case of adopting a mode in which a temporary stop sound is output for all of the left, right, and center temporary stops, when the left and right performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped to form a normal reach in the variable presentation pattern in which an SPSP reach miss is executed (Fig. 171) and the variable presentation pattern in which an SPSP reach jackpot is executed (Fig. 185), a common temporary stop sound (for example, "peshi") is output in both cases. However, it is possible to make the temporary stop sound different when the center performance symbol 70a temporarily stops in a display mode of numbers only (miss: "ding", jackpot: "clack") in the variable presentation pattern in which an SPSP reach miss is executed and the variable presentation pattern in which an SPSP reach jackpot is executed. This makes it possible to draw attention to which temporary stop sound is output at the scene of the final temporary stop, while keeping the number of sound data for the temporary stop sound to a minimum.

In addition, in a variable performance pattern in which an SP reach or SPSP reach is executed, when the performance pattern 70a is in the first mode, it is less likely that a temporary stop sound will be output when the center performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped than when the left and right performance patterns 70a are temporarily stopped (the temporary stop sound is not output when the center performance pattern 70a is in the first mode). This prevents the temporary stop sound from being output following the output of the success or failure sound in an SP reach or SPSP reach, making it difficult to recognize that the variable performance is ending.

In addition, when the middle performance pattern 70a temporarily stops in the first mode, it can be said that the temporary stop sound is less likely to be output in a variable performance pattern in which an SP reach or SPSP reach is executed than in a variable performance pattern in which a normal variation is executed (the temporary stop sound is not output when the middle performance pattern 70a is in the first mode). This prevents the temporary stop sound from being output following the output of the success or failure sound in the SP reach or SPSP reach, making it difficult to recognize that the variable performance is ending.

(Example of a presentation in which the presentation mode changes after a pre-operation notification of the winning limit device)
Figures 190 to 192 are diagrams showing examples of presentations when the presentation mode changes after a pre-operation notification of the maximum win amount device is given.

First, as shown in FIG. 190(a), when controlled in performance mode A, the first reserved number (U1) is subtracted from "3" by 1 and the variable display of the first special symbol begins, and the two reserved icons HI and the icon TI are displayed, and the variable performance begins. Specifically, the performance symbol 70a begins to rise as a pre-variation operation, and the variable display of the special symbol TZ begins. At this time, the mode A background image is displayed on the image display device, variable BGM1 is being output, and the light-emitting section of the frame lighting device 10 related to the operation notification of the acquisition upper limit device is turned off.

Then, after the three performance symbols 70a start to move along the first moving path, when the increment counter (MY) reaches "90003", which is equal to or greater than the specified value (90,000) due to a game ball entering the general winning slot 43, a pre-operation notification (advance notification) is initiated to notify the player that the maximum winning limit device may be activated, as shown in FIG. 190(b). Specifically, the first image display device 70 displays a large advance notification image CZ relating to the activation of the maximum winning limit device so as to be superimposed on the front side of the other performance images, and a sound saying "About 5,000 remaining" is output only once, and the light-emitting portion of the frame lighting device 10 relating to the activation notification of the maximum winning limit device is in the advance notification mode (flashing yellow).

At this time, the advance notification image CZ displays the current value of the increment counter and the activation value of the acquisition limit device in the form of "90003/95000", along with a text image stating "Approximately 5000 remaining until the acquisition limit device is activated."

The text image "XXXX remaining until the acquisition limit device is activated" switches between "5000 remaining" and "500 remaining" in increments of 500 depending on the value of the increment counter. For example, when the increment counter value increases to "90000", "Approximately 5000 remaining until the acquisition limit device is activated" is displayed while the increment counter value is between 89900 and 90499 thereafter; when the increment counter value increases to "90500", "Approximately 4500 remaining until the acquisition limit device is activated" is displayed while the increment counter value is between 90400 and 90999 thereafter; and when the increment counter value increases to "91000", "Approximately 4000 remaining until the acquisition limit device is activated" is displayed while the increment counter value is between 90900 and 91499 thereafter.

After that, when a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has passed, as shown in FIG. 190(c), the advance warning image CZ that was displayed large on the first image display device 70 moves to the third image display device 72 and is displayed small. Also, as the left-side performance pattern 70a temporarily stops, a pre-stop operation is performed and the temporary stop sound "pesh" for performance mode A is output. After another predetermined time has passed, as shown in FIG. 190(d), the right-side performance pattern 70a temporarily stops and a pre-stop operation is performed and the temporary stop sound "pesh" for performance mode A is output.

After a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 191(e), the central performance symbol 70a temporarily stops, a pre-stop operation is performed, and the temporary stop sound for performance mode A, "pesh," is output. Then, when the variation time for the first special symbol has elapsed and the losing special symbol is stopped, the three temporarily stopped performance symbols 70a are stopped and the icon TI is erased, as shown in FIG. 191(f).

After that, the stop time has elapsed and the first special symbol starts to change display, and when the change display starts, the display mode update condition is met and the display mode is switched to B, and the special symbol TZ starts to change display and the mode switching display is executed, as shown in FIG. 191(g). Specifically, the mode switching image MC is displayed so as to gradually cover the display image including the display pattern 70a and background image (so that the display image is no longer displayed), and a mode change sound ("swoosh") is output. At this time, the advance notification image CZ continues to be displayed visibly without being covered by the mode switching image MC.

In addition, when the performance time of the mode switching performance has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 191(h), the mode switching image that had completely obscured the performance image becomes invisible, and the performance pattern 70a corresponding to the changed performance mode B and the mode B background image are displayed, the performance pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size as a pre-change operation, and the change BGM2 is output. In addition, the hold icon HI and the icon TI are displayed in a display mode corresponding to the performance mode B. After that, as shown in FIG. 192(i), a change display begins in which the three performance patterns 70a move along the second change path.

After a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 192(j), the left-side performance symbol 70a temporarily stops, a pre-stop action is performed, and the temporary stop sound "poco♪" of performance mode B is output. After a further predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 192(k), the right-side performance symbol 70a temporarily stops, a pre-stop action is performed, and the temporary stop sound "poco♪" of performance mode B is output.

After a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 192(k), the central performance symbol 70a temporarily stops, a pre-stop operation is performed, and the temporary stop sound "Poko♪" for performance mode B is output. After that, when the variation time for the first special symbol has elapsed and the losing special symbol is stopped, the three temporarily stopped performance symbols 70a are stopped and the icon TI is erased.

Here, we have explained the case where presentation mode A switches to presentation mode B during normal gameplay, but when presentation mode A switches to presentation mode C, when presentation mode B switches to presentation mode A or C, or when presentation mode C switches to presentation mode A or B, the same mode switching presentation is basically performed, and the various presentation aspects (presentation pattern 70a, background image, various icon types, the movement path of presentation pattern 70a, etc.) are switched to those appropriate to the presentation mode after the transition.

In addition, when switching from presentation mode D to presentation mode E or from presentation mode E to presentation mode D during a special probability game state, the mode switching presentation is basically the same as when switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B during a normal game state, and various presentation aspects (presentation pattern 70a, background image, various types of icons, change path of presentation pattern 70a, etc.) are switched to one that corresponds to the presentation mode after the transition.

Also, we have explained the pre-operation notification (advance notification) of the acquisition limit device when switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B during normal game play, but regardless of whether the game is in a normal game play state, a specific game play state (high probability game play state, time-limited game play state), or which presentation mode it is, the pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device is executed in the same notification manner (design of the advance notification image CZ, display content, advance notification sound, light emission manner of the light-emitting portion of the frame lighting device 10 related to the operation notification of the acquisition limit device, etc.).

In addition, we have explained the case where a game ball enters the general winning hole 43, causing the increment counter (MY) to exceed a specified value (90,000) and initiating a pre-activation notification (advance notification) of the winning limit device. However, a similar pre-activation notification is also executed when a game ball enters another winning area (first start hole 45, second start hole 47, large winning hole 50) causing the increment counter (MY) to exceed a specified value and initiating a pre-activation notification of the winning limit device.

In this way, according to Figs. 190 to 192, a pre-activation notification (advance notification) can be executed to notify that there is a possibility that the acquisition limit device will be activated (activation of the acquisition limit device is imminent), and the pre-activation notification can be executed in the same manner during the variable performance of the first presentation mode (e.g., presentation mode A) in which the performance pattern 70a can be displayed in a variable manner along the first variable path, and during the variable performance of the second presentation mode (e.g., presentation mode B) in which the performance pattern 70a can be displayed in a variable manner along the second variable path. Therefore, even when the pre-activation notification is executed in a different presentation mode, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the pre-activation notification, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Also, according to Figs. 190 to 192, a pre-warning image CZ can be displayed to notify that the winning limit device may be activated (activation of the winning limit device is imminent), and when the performance pattern 70a switches from the first variable path (e.g., the first variable path of performance mode A) to the second variable path (e.g., the second variable path of performance mode B), a mode switching performance (display of a mode switching image MC) can be executed to restrict visibility of the performance pattern 70a (the performance pattern 70a is hidden), and even when visibility of the performance pattern 70a is restricted by the execution of the mode switching performance, it is possible to continue to display the pre-warning image CZ in a visible manner. Therefore, even when the variable path of the performance pattern 70a switches, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the pre-warning image, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Also, according to Figs. 190 to 192, a pre-activation notification (advance notification) can be executed to notify that the acquisition limit device may be activated (activation of the acquisition limit device is imminent), and different types of variable BGM can be output during the variable performance of the first performance mode (e.g., performance mode A in which variable BGM 1 is output) and during the variable performance of the second performance mode (e.g., performance mode B in which variable BGM 2 is output), and the pre-activation notification can be executed in the same manner (design, character arrangement, display position, sound, etc. of the advance notification image CZ) during the variable performance of the first performance mode (e.g., performance mode A in which variable BGM 1 is output) and during the variable performance of the second performance mode (e.g., performance mode B in which variable BGM 2 is output). Therefore, even if the pre-activation notification is executed in different performance modes, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the pre-activation notification, which can increase the interest of the game.

Also, according to Figs. 190 to 192, a pre-operation notification (advance notification) can be executed to notify that the acquisition limit device may be activated (the activation of the acquisition limit device is imminent), and different types of background images can be displayed during the variable performance of the first presentation mode (e.g., presentation mode A in which a mode A background image is displayed) and during the variable performance of the second presentation mode (e.g., presentation mode B in which a mode B background image is displayed), and the pre-operation notification can be executed in the same manner (design, character arrangement, display position, sound, etc. of the advance notification image CZ) during the variable performance of the first presentation mode (e.g., presentation mode A in which a mode A background image is displayed) and during the variable performance of the second presentation mode (e.g., presentation mode B in which a mode B background image is displayed). Therefore, even when a pre-operation notification is executed in a different presentation mode, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the pre-operation notification, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

Also, according to Figures 190 to 192, a pre-activation notification (advance notification) can be executed to notify that there is a possibility that the acquisition limit device will be activated (activation of the acquisition limit device is imminent), and different types of pre-change actions (performance actions) can be executed during the change performance of the first performance mode (for example, performance mode A in which a floating display is executed as the pre-change operation of the performance pattern 70a) and during the change performance of the second performance mode (for example, performance mode B in which a reduced display is executed as the pre-change operation of the performance pattern 70a), and it is possible to execute a pre-activation notification in the same manner (design, character arrangement, display position, sound, etc. of the advance notification image CZ) during the change performance of the first performance mode (for example, performance mode A in which a floating display is executed as the pre-change operation of the performance pattern 70a) and during the change performance of the second performance mode (for example, performance mode B in which a reduced display is executed as the pre-change operation of the performance pattern 70a). Therefore, even if the pre-activation notification is executed in a different presentation mode, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the pre-activation notification, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to Figures 190 to 192, it is possible to execute a pre-activation notification (advance notification) that notifies that there is a possibility that the acquisition limit device will be activated (activation of the acquisition limit device is imminent), and different types of pre-stop actions can be executed during the changing performance of the first performance mode (for example, presentation mode A in which a swinging display is executed as the pre-stop operation of the performance pattern 70a) and during the changing performance of the second performance mode (for example, presentation mode B in which a reduced display is executed as the pre-stop operation of the performance pattern 70a), and it is possible to execute a pre-activation notification in the same manner (design, text arrangement, display position, sound, etc. of the advance notification image CZ) during the changing performance of the first performance mode (for example, presentation mode A in which a swinging display is executed as the pre-stop operation of the performance pattern 70a) and during the changing performance of the second performance mode (for example, presentation mode B in which a reduced display is executed as the pre-stop operation of the performance pattern 70a). Therefore, even if the pre-activation notification is executed in a different presentation mode, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the pre-activation notification, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

Also, according to Figs. 190 to 192, it is possible to execute a mode switching effect, which is a type of specific effect that changes the mode of the effect while a variable effect is being executed (specific effects other than the mode switching effect that suggests a change in the effect mode include a development effect that suggests that the effect will develop into a reach effect with a high probability of a big win, which will be described later, and an eye-catching effect that suggests that the effect pattern 70a will be displayed stationary, etc.), and while the mode switching effect is being executed, the visibility of the effect pattern 70a is restricted, but the visibility of the advance notification image CZ related to the operation of the win limit device is possible (the visibility of the advance notification image CZ is not restricted). Therefore, it is possible to provide useful information to the player even during the execution of the mode switching effect (specific effect), making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

When the pre-operation notification (advance notification) of the acquisition limit device is initiated, the advance notification image CZ is displayed large on the first image display device 70, but instead of displaying it large on the first image display device 70, it may be displayed small on the third image display device 72.

In addition, in the pre-operation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device, a small pre-notification image CZ is displayed on the third image display device 72, but it is also possible to use only the first image display device 70 and display a small pre-notification image CZ in a corner of the screen of the first image display device 70 (such as a position that does not overlap front to back with the performance pattern 70a displayed at the stop position). In this case, when the pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device begins, the pre-notification image CZ may be displayed large, or the pre-notification image CZ may be displayed small without being displayed large.

In addition, while a winning ball entered into the large prize opening 50 during normal gameplay is considered valid and a prize ball is awarded, a winning ball entered into the large prize opening 50 during normal gameplay may be invalidated, and even if a winning ball is entered into the large prize opening 50 during normal gameplay (presentation modes A to C) and the increment counter (MY) would normally exceed the specified value (90,000), a pre-operational warning (advance warning) of the winning limit device may not be initiated.

In addition, when the presentation mode is switched among presentation modes A to C corresponding to the normal game state, the same mode switching presentation is executed, but it is also possible to execute a mode switching presentation with a different form (color, appearance direction, etc. of the mode switching image MC) when the presentation mode is switched from presentation mode A, when the presentation mode is switched from presentation mode B, and when the presentation mode is switched from presentation mode C.

In addition, when the presentation mode is switched among presentation modes D to E corresponding to the guaranteed bonus game state, the same mode switching presentation is executed, but it is also possible to execute a mode switching presentation of a different type (color of the mode switching image MC, appearance method, etc.) when switching from presentation mode D to presentation mode E and when switching from presentation mode E to presentation mode D.

In addition, the same mode switching effect is executed when the presentation mode is switched among presentation modes A to C corresponding to the normal game state and when the presentation mode is switched among presentation modes D to E corresponding to the special probability game state. However, it is also possible to execute a mode switching effect of a different type (color of the mode switching image MC, appearance method, etc.) when the presentation mode is switched among presentation modes A to C corresponding to the normal game state and when the presentation mode is switched among presentation modes D to E corresponding to the special probability game state.

In addition, the mode switching effect (mode switching image MC) does not have a set expectation of a jackpot game being executed, but a first mode switching effect with a low expectation of a jackpot game being executed and a second mode switching effect with a higher expectation of a jackpot game being executed than the first mode switching effect may be set, and the type of mode switching effect may differ depending on the type of variable effect pattern when the mode switching effect is executed (whether or not there is a jackpot, and whether or not an SP/SPSP reach effect is executed).

(Example of a performance when a pre-activation notification of the winning limit device starts during a continuous preview performance)
Figure 193 shows an example of a presentation in which a pre-activation notification of the upper limit winning device is initiated during a continuous preview presentation.

First, as shown in FIG. 193(a), when the first reserved number (U1) is "1" and the first special pattern is displayed in a stopped state, and the display mode is controlled to B, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 and the execution of a look-ahead action display spanning two variable displays is determined, causing the first reserved number (U1) to become "2", one additional reserved icon HI is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B. At this time, the mode B background image is displayed on the image display device, variable BGM2 is output, and the light-emitting section of the frame lighting device 10 related to the operation notification of the winning limit device is turned off. In addition, as the execution of the look-ahead action display is determined, a display mode switching restriction period has occurred during which switching of the display mode is restricted.

Then, when the stop time of the first special symbol has elapsed and the next change display of the first special symbol has begun, one hold icon HI and the icon TI are displayed as shown in FIG. 193(b), and the change performance and the look-ahead operation performance begin. Specifically, the three performance symbols 70a begin pre-change operation, and the special symbol TZ begins change display, after which the three performance symbols 70a begin change display moving along the second change path. In addition, as a look-ahead operation performance, an operation performance (first operation performance) is executed in which the first movable member 77a descends toward the center of the screen of the first image display device 70 at a width smaller than the maximum descending width.

After that, when the increment counter (MY) reaches "90003" which is equal to or greater than the specified value (90,000) due to a game ball entering the general winning slot 43, a pre-operation notification (advance notification) is initiated to notify the player that the maximum winning limit device may be activated, as shown in FIG. 193(c). Specifically, the advance notification image CZ is displayed large on the first image display device 70 so as to be superimposed on the front side of the other performance images, a voice message stating "Approximately 5000 remaining" is output only once, and the light-emitting portion of the frame lighting device 10 related to the activation notification of the maximum winning limit device is in the advance notification mode (flashing yellow). Note that the advance notification image CZ is partially blocked by the first movable member 77a.

At this time, the advance notification image CZ displays the current value of the increment counter and the activation value of the acquisition limit device in the form of "90003/95000", along with a text image stating "Approximately 5000 remaining until the acquisition limit device is activated."

After that, when a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed, the advance notification image CZ that was displayed large on the first image display device 70 moves to the third image display device 72 and is displayed small, as shown in FIG. 193(d). After that, when the variable performance that is the subject of the advance notice due to the pre-reading operation performance ends, the performance mode switching restriction period ends and it becomes possible to switch the performance mode.

Here, we have explained the case where a look-ahead action performance is executed over two variable performances in performance mode B, but even if a look-ahead action performance is executed over one variable performance, or over three or more variable performances, when the performance mode switching restriction period is reached and the increment counter (MY) reaches or exceeds a specified value (90,000), a pre-operation notification (advance notification) of the acquisition upper limit device is executed in parallel with the look-ahead action performance.

In addition, we have explained the case where the look-ahead action performance is executed in performance mode B, but even when other consecutive preview performances (look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead chance eye performance, look-ahead vibration performance, look-ahead zone performance) are executed, when the performance mode switching restriction period is reached and the increment counter (MY) reaches or exceeds a specified value (90,000), a pre-operation notification (advance notification) of the winning limit device is executed in parallel with the other consecutive preview performances.

In addition, while the case where the look-ahead action effect is executed in the presentation mode B has been explained, in the other presentation modes (presentation modes A, C, D-F), when other consecutive preview effects (look-ahead action effect, look-ahead effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead vibration effect, look-ahead zone effect) are executed, when the presentation mode switching restriction period is reached and the increment counter (MY) reaches or exceeds the specified value (90,000), a pre-operation notification (advance notification) of the winning limit device is executed in parallel with the other consecutive preview effects.

In addition, we have explained the case where a game ball enters the general winning hole 43, causing the increment counter (MY) to exceed a specified value (90,000) and initiating a pre-activation notification (advance notification) of the winning limit device. However, a similar pre-activation notification is also executed when a game ball enters another winning area (first start hole 45, second start hole 47, large winning hole 50) causing the increment counter (MY) to exceed a specified value and initiating a pre-activation notification of the winning limit device.

In addition, even during the period when switching of the presentation mode is restricted, when a reach presentation (normal reach presentation, SP reach presentation, SPSP reach presentation, full rotation reach presentation, etc.) is executed, it is possible to switch the variable BGM to the reach BGM corresponding to the reach presentation, and it is also possible to switch the background image to the reach background image corresponding to the reach presentation.

(Example of a performance when a pre-notification image related to the operation of the winning limit device is updated during a continuous preview performance)
Figure 194 shows an example of a presentation in which a pre-notification image relating to the operation of the winning limit device is updated during a continuous preview presentation.

First, as shown in FIG. 194(a), when the first reserved number (U1) is "1" and the first special pattern is displayed in a stopped state and the display mode is controlled to B, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 and the execution of a pre-reading action display spanning two variable displays is determined, causing the first reserved number (U1) to become "2", an additional reserved icon HI is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B. At this time, the mode B background image is displayed on the image display device, and variable BGM2 is being output. In addition, a pre-operational notification (advance notification) of the winning limit device is being executed, and an advance notification image CZ is displayed on the third image display device 72.

At this time, the advance notification image CZ displays the current value of the increment counter and the activation value of the acquisition limit device in the form of "90996/95000", along with a text image stating "Approximately 4500 remaining until the acquisition limit device is activated."

Then, when the stop time of the first special symbol has elapsed and the next change display of the first special symbol has begun, one hold icon HI and the icon TI are displayed as shown in FIG. 194(b), and the change performance and the look-ahead operation performance begin. Specifically, the three performance symbols 70a begin pre-change operation, and the special symbol TZ begins change display, after which the three performance symbols 70a begin change display moving along the second change path. In addition, as a look-ahead operation performance, an operation performance (first operation performance) is executed in which the first movable member 77a descends toward the center of the screen of the first image display device 70 at a width smaller than the maximum descending width.

After that, when the increment counter (MY) reaches "91001" due to a game ball entering the general winning port 43, which is equal to or greater than the updated value (91000), an emphasis effect is executed for the pre-operation notification (pre-notification) of the winning limit device, and the pre-notification image CZ is updated and displayed, as shown in FIG. 194(c). Specifically, the pre-notification image CZ is displayed large on the first image display device 70 so as to be superimposed on the front side of the other presentation images, and a voice message stating "Approximately 4000 remaining" is output only once. Note that the pre-notification image CZ is partially blocked by the first movable member 77a.

In addition, in the advance notification image CZ, the current value of the increment counter and the activation value of the acquisition limit device are displayed in an updated state of "91001/95000", and the text image "Approximately 4500 remaining until the acquisition limit device is activated" is displayed switched to a text image "Approximately 4000 remaining until the acquisition limit device is activated."

After that, when a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 194(d), the advance notification image CZ that was displayed large on the first image display device 70 moves to the third image display device 72 and is displayed small, thereby ending the emphasis effect. After that, when the variable effect that is the subject of the advance notice due to the pre-reading operation effect ends, the effect mode switching restriction period ends and it becomes possible to switch the effect mode.

Here, we have described the case where a look-ahead action performance is executed over two variable performances in performance mode B, but even if a look-ahead action performance is executed over one variable performance, or over three or more variable performances, when the performance mode switching restriction period is reached and the increment counter (MY) reaches or exceeds the update value (91000), an emphasis performance of the pre-operation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition upper limit device is executed in parallel with the look-ahead action performance, and the pre-notification image CZ is updated and displayed.

Also, we have explained the case where a look-ahead action effect is executed in the variable effect of the effect mode B, but even when other consecutive preview effects (look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead vibration effect, look-ahead zone effect) are executed, when the performance mode switching restriction period is reached and the increment counter (MY) reaches or exceeds the update value (91000), an emphasis effect of the pre-operation notification (pre-notification) of the winning upper limit device is executed in parallel with the other consecutive preview effects, and the update display of the pre-notification image CZ is executed.

Also, while the case where the pre-reading action effect is executed in the presentation mode B has been explained, even when the consecutive preview effects (pre-reading action effect, pre-reading effect effect, pre-reading chance eye effect, pre-reading vibration effect, pre-reading zone effect) are executed in the other presentation modes (presentation modes A, C, D-F), when the presentation mode switching restriction period is reached and the increment counter (MY) reaches or exceeds the update value (91000), an emphasis effect of the pre-operation notification (pre-notification) of the winning upper limit device is executed in parallel with the other consecutive preview effects, and the update display of the pre-notification image CZ is executed.

In addition, we have explained the case where a game ball enters the general winning hole 43, causing the increment counter (MY) to exceed the updated value (91000), emphasizing the pre-activation notification (pre-notification) of the winning limit device, and updating the pre-notification image CZ. However, when a game ball enters another winning area (first starting hole 45, second starting hole 47, large winning hole 50) and the increment counter (MY) exceeds the updated value (91000), the emphasizing pre-activation notification of the winning limit device is similarly executed, and the pre-notification image CZ is updated.

Also, we have explained the case where the increment counter (MY) reaches an update value of 1 (91000) or more, and an emphasis display of the pre-activation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition upper limit device is executed, and the pre-notification image CZ is updated and displayed. However, even if the other update values (90500, 91500, 92000, 92500, 93000, 93500, 94000, 94500) are reached, the emphasis display of the pre-activation notification of the acquisition upper limit device is executed, and the pre-notification image CZ is updated and displayed.

Thus, according to Figures 193 to 194, during the execution of a continuous preview performance (a look-ahead performance such as a look-ahead action performance) spanning multiple variable performances, switching the variable path of the performance pattern 70a from the first variable path to the second variable path (for example, switching from performance mode A which is the first variable path to performance mode B which is the second variable path) is restricted, but it is possible to execute a pre-operation notification (advance notification) of the acquisition upper limit device. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with useful information without the continuous preview performance (look-ahead performance) impeding the execution of the pre-operation notification of the acquisition upper limit device, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Also, according to FIG. 193 to FIG. 194, in the variable performance, the first action performance of the movable member (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b) (a downward movement with a width smaller than the maximum downward movement width during a look-ahead action performance, a pseudo consecutive performance, a development performance, etc.) and the second action performance of the movable member (a downward movement with a maximum downward movement width during a successful decision performance, etc.) can be executed, and while the first action performance of the movable member is being executed, it is restricted to switch the variable path of the performance pattern 70a from the first variable path to the second variable path (for example, switching from the performance mode A which is the first variable path to the performance mode B which is the second variable path), but it is possible to execute a pre-operation notification (advance notification) of the acquisition upper limit device. Therefore, the first action performance (pre-operation performance) of the movable member does not hinder the execution of the pre-operation notification of the acquisition upper limit device, and useful information can be provided to the player, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Also, according to Figures 193 and 194, when the increment counter (MY) increases and reaches or exceeds the updated value (90500, 91000, 91500, 92000, 92500, 93000, 93500, 94000, 94500), an emphasis display of the pre-activation notification (advance notification) of the maximum win device is executed, and the advance notification image CZ is updated and displayed. This makes it easier for the player to know that the maximum win device is approaching activation, making the game more enjoyable.

Also, according to Figures 193 to 194, while a look-ahead action performance (look-ahead performance) spanning multiple performances is being performed, switching the performance pattern 70a's performance path from the first performance path to the second performance path (for example, switching from performance mode A, which is the first performance path, to performance mode B, which is the second performance path) is restricted, but it is possible to execute a performance emphasizing the pre-operation notification (advance notification) of the acquisition upper limit device. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with useful information without interfering with the performance emphasizing the pre-operation notification of the acquisition upper limit device by the continuous advance notice performance, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Also, according to Figs. 193 to 194, during the execution of a continuous preview performance (a look-ahead performance such as a look-ahead action performance) spanning multiple variable performances, the change in the variable path of the performance pattern 70a is restricted from the first variable path to the second variable path (for example, from the performance mode A which is the first variable path to the performance mode B which is the second variable path), but it is possible to change the notification image (advance notification image CZ) related to the operation of the acquisition upper limit device from the first mode display (a mode including "about 4500 remaining") to the second mode display (a mode including "4000 remaining"). Therefore, it is possible to provide useful information to the player without the continuous preview performance hindering the change (update display) of the display mode of the notification image (advance notification image CZ) related to the operation of the acquisition upper limit device, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

Also, according to Figures 193 to 194, in the variable performance, it is possible to execute a first movement performance of the movable members (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b) (a downward movement with a width smaller than the maximum downward movement width during a pre-reading movement performance, a pseudo consecutive performance, a development performance, etc.) and a second movement performance of the movable members (a downward movement with a maximum downward movement width during a successful decision performance, etc.), and while the first movement performance of the movable members is being executed, it is restricted to switch the variable path of the performance pattern 70a from the first variable path to the second variable path (for example, switching from performance mode A which is the first variable path to performance mode B which is the second variable path), but it is possible to switch the notification image (pre-notification image CZ) related to the operation of the acquisition upper limit device from a first mode display (a mode including "approximately 4500 remaining") to a second mode display (a mode including "4000 remaining"). Therefore, the first action of the movable member does not impede the switching (updated display) of the display mode of the notification image (pre-notification image CZ) related to the operation of the winning limit device, and useful information can be provided to the player, making the game more enjoyable.

Also, according to Fig. 193 to Fig. 194, when the variable path of the performance pattern 70a switches from the first variable path to the second variable path (for example, when the variable path switches from the first variable path, which is the performance mode A, to the second variable path, which is the performance mode B), a mode switching performance that changes the mode of the performance (a specific performance that suggests that the performance mode will switch) is executed, but when the notification image (pre-notification image CZ) related to the operation of the acquisition upper limit device switches from the first mode display (a mode including "about 4500 remaining") to the second mode display (a mode including "4000 remaining") during the execution of the first operation performance of the movable member, the mode switching performance that changes the mode of the performance (a specific performance that suggests that the performance mode will switch) is not executed (is limited) (the pre-notification image CZ can be seen). Therefore, it is possible to provide useful information to the player and increase the interest of the game.

In addition, although the advance warning image CZ displayed large on the first image display device 70 is partially blocked by the first movable member 77a, it may be displayed so that it is not partially blocked by the first movable member 77a. In this case, when the pre-operation warning (advance warning) of the winning limit device starts, the advance warning image CZ may not be displayed large on the first image display device 70 but may be displayed small on the third image display device 72, or the advance warning image CZ may be displayed only on the first image display device 70, and the advance warning image CZ may be displayed small in the corner of the screen that is not blocked by the first movable member 77a (a position that does not overlap front to back with the performance pattern 70a displayed at the stop position).

In addition, when the increment counter (MY) increases and reaches or exceeds the update value (90,500, 91,000, 91,500, 92,000, 92,500, 93,000, 93,500, 94,000, 94,500), the update display is performed without changing the design (shape, color, pattern, etc.) of the advance warning image CZ, but the update display may also be performed while changing the design (shape, color, pattern, etc.) of the advance warning image CZ.

In addition, when the increment counter (MY) increases and reaches or exceeds the update value (90,500, 91,000, 91,500, 92,000, 92,500, 93,000, 93,500, 94,000, 94,500), the advance notification image CZ is displayed large on the first image display device 70 as an emphasis effect for the pre-operation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition upper limit device, but it is also possible to leave the small display on the third image display device 72 and output only the sound "Approximately xxxxxx remaining," or to simply display the advance notification image CZ large on the first image display device 70 without outputting the sound "Approximately xxxxxx remaining," or to only update and display the advance notification image CZ related to the operation of the acquisition upper limit device without executing the emphasis effect for the pre-operation notification of the acquisition upper limit device.

In addition, during the continuous preview performance, there is a restriction period for switching the performance mode, but in cases where a transition is made to a look-ahead performance mode (a performance mode in which a look-ahead mode background image and a look-ahead mode image are displayed) that gives the expectation that a jackpot game will be executed as a look-ahead performance, it may be possible to transition to the look-ahead performance mode even during the restriction period for switching the performance mode.

(Example of a performance when a pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device is started during the effective operation period of the dialogue preview performance)
Figure 195 shows an example of a presentation in which a pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device is initiated during the effective operation period of the dialogue preview presentation.

First, as shown in FIG. 195(a), the first reserved number (U1) is "1" and the first special pattern is being displayed in a variable display, and the variable display of display mode B is in progress. At this time, one reserved icon HI and the icon TI are displayed, the mode B background image is displayed on the image display device, and variable BGM2 is being output.

In this state, when the effective operation period of the effect button 17 related to the dialogue preview effect begins, the operation promotion effect begins. Specifically, a dialogue window SW is displayed on the first image display device 70, and an operation promotion image SG consisting of an effect button image imitating the effect button 17 and a gauge image indicating the remaining effective period is displayed within the dialogue window SW. Also, the effect button 17 remains lit in white in its normal state. Note that a predetermined period (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, and a switching restriction period for the effect mode is entered during which switching of the effect mode is restricted.

After that, when the increment counter (MY) reaches "90003" which is equal to or greater than the specified value (90,000) due to a game ball entering the general winning opening 43, a pre-operation notification (advance notification) is initiated to notify the player that the maximum winning limit device may be activated, as shown in FIG. 195(b). Specifically, the advance notification image CZ is displayed large on the first image display device 70 so as to be superimposed on the front side of the other performance images, a voice message stating "Approximately 5000 remaining" is output only once, and the light-emitting portion of the frame lighting device 10 which is related to the activation notification of the maximum winning limit device is switched to the advance notification mode (flashing yellow).

At this time, the advance notification image CZ displays the current value of the increment counter and the activation value of the acquisition limit device in the form of "90003/95000", along with a text image stating "Approximately 5000 remaining until the acquisition limit device is activated."

When the effect button 17 is operated during the effective operation period (display of the operation prompting image SG) while the advance warning image CZ is displayed large, the effective operation period ends and the line preview effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 195(c). Specifically, a text image of the hot line "What's this?! It's hot!!" is displayed in the line window SW displayed on the first image display device 70, and the effect button 17 turns off and vibrates weakly for one second. On the other hand, when a predetermined time (e.g., three seconds) has elapsed since the advance warning image CZ started to be displayed, it is moved to the third image display device 72 and displayed in a small size.

After a predetermined time (e.g., one second) has elapsed, the dialogue preview performance ends and the dialogue window SW is erased, as shown in FIG. 195(d), but the advance warning image CZ continues to be displayed.

Here, we have explained the case where the increment counter (MY) reaches or exceeds the specified value (90,000) during the effective operation period of the dialogue preview performance in the variable performance of performance mode B. However, even if the increment counter (MY) reaches or exceeds the specified value (90,000) during the effective operation period of the dialogue preview performance in the variable performance of other performance modes (performance modes A, C, D-F), a pre-operation notification (advance notification) of the acquisition upper limit device is executed in parallel with the effective operation period of the dialogue preview performance and the dialogue preview performance.

Also, while we have explained the case where the increment counter (MY) reaches or exceeds a specified value (90,000) during the effective operation period of the dialogue preview performance, if the increment counter (MY) reaches or exceeds a specified value (90,000) while the dialogue preview performance is being executed, a pre-activation notification (advance notification) of the acquisition upper limit device is executed in parallel with the dialogue preview performance.

Also, we have explained the case where a dialogue preview performance accompanied by an effective operation period is executed before the reach performance in the variable performance of performance mode B, but even when other preview performances accompanied by an effective operation period (such as pseudo consecutive performances) are executed, when the increment counter (MY) reaches a specified value (90,000) or more, a pre-operation notification (advance notification) of the winning limit device is executed in parallel with the preview performances accompanied by the effective operation period.

In addition, we have explained the case where a game ball enters the general winning hole 43, causing the increment counter (MY) to exceed a specified value (90,000) and initiating a pre-activation notification (advance notification) of the winning limit device. However, a similar pre-activation notification is also executed when a game ball enters another winning area (first start hole 45, second start hole 47, large winning hole 50) causing the increment counter (MY) to exceed a specified value and initiating a pre-activation notification of the winning limit device.

In this way, according to FIG. 195, it is possible to execute a pre-operation notification (advance notification) of the acquisition limit device during the execution of a dialogue preview performance (operation performance) executed in response to the operation of the performance button 17, or during the occurrence of an effective operation period related to the dialogue preview performance. Therefore, it is possible to provide useful information to the player without the execution of the pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device being hindered by the dialogue preview performance or the effective operation period related to the dialogue preview performance, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Also, according to FIG. 195, even if a pre-operation notification (advance notification) of the acquisition limit device is initiated during the effective operation period related to the dialogue preview performance, the dialogue preview performance (display of dialogue image, output of dialogue sound) can be executed if the performance button 17 is operated during the effective operation period. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game without the execution of the dialogue preview performance being hindered by the pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device.

In addition, when the pre-operation notification (pre-notification) of the winning limit device begins, the pre-notification image CZ may not be displayed large on the first image display device 70 but may be displayed small on the third image display device 72, or the pre-notification image CZ may be displayed only on the first image display device 70, and the pre-notification image CZ may be displayed small in a corner of the screen that is not blocked by the first movable member 77a (a position that does not overlap front to back with the performance pattern 70a displayed at the stop position).

(Example of a performance in which a pre-notification image related to the operation of the winning limit device is updated during a dialogue preview performance)
Figure 196 shows an example of a presentation in which a pre-notification image relating to the operation of the maximum winning amount device is updated during a dialogue preview presentation.

First, as shown in FIG. 196(a), the first reserved number (U1) is a "1" and the first special pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, and the variable presentation of presentation mode B is in progress. At this time, one reserved icon HI and the icon TI are displayed, the mode B background image is displayed on the image display device, and the variable BGM2 is being output. In addition, a pre-operation notification (advance notification) of the winning limit device is being executed, and the advance notification image CZ is being displayed on the third image display device 72.

At this time, the advance notification image CZ displays the current value of the increment counter and the activation value of the acquisition limit device in the form of "90996/95000", along with a text image stating "Approximately 4500 remaining until the acquisition limit device is activated."

In this state, when the effective operation period of the effect button 17 related to the dialogue preview effect begins, the operation promotion effect begins. Specifically, a dialogue window SW is displayed on the first image display device 70, and an operation promotion image SG consisting of an effect button image imitating the effect button 17 and a gauge image indicating the remaining effective period is displayed within the dialogue window SW. Also, the effect button 17 remains lit in white in its normal state. Note that a predetermined period (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, and a switching restriction period for the effect mode is entered during which switching of the effect mode is restricted.

When the effect button 17 is operated, the effective operation period ends and the line preview effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 196(b). Specifically, a text image of the hot line "What's this?! It's hot!!" is displayed in the line window SW displayed on the first image display device 70, and the effect button 17 goes off and vibrates weakly for one second.

After that, when the increment counter (MY) reaches "91001" due to a game ball entering the general winning port 43, which is equal to or greater than the updated value (91000), the dialogue preview effect continues, and an emphasis effect is executed on the pre-activation notification (pre-notification) of the winning limit device, and the pre-notification image CZ is updated and displayed, as shown in FIG. 196(c). Specifically, the pre-notification image CZ is displayed large on the first image display device 70 so as to be superimposed on the front side of the other performance images, and the voice "About 4000 remaining" is output only once.

In addition, in the advance notification image CZ, the current value of the increment counter and the activation value of the acquisition limit device are displayed in an updated state of "91001/95000", and the text image "Approximately 4500 remaining until the acquisition limit device is activated" is displayed switched to a text image "Approximately 4000 remaining until the acquisition limit device is activated."

After that, when a predetermined time (e.g., 1 second) has elapsed, the dialogue preview performance ends and the dialogue window SW is erased, and when another predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds) has elapsed, the advance warning image CZ that was displayed large on the first image display device 70 is moved to the third image display device 72 and displayed small, as shown in FIG. 196 (d).

Here, we have explained the case where the increment counter (MY) becomes equal to or greater than the updated value (91000) during the execution of the dialogue preview performance in the variable performance of performance mode B. However, even if the increment counter (MY) becomes equal to or greater than the updated value (91000) during the execution of the dialogue preview performance in the variable performance of other performance modes (performance modes A, C, D-F), an emphasis performance of the pre-activation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition upper limit device is executed in parallel with the dialogue preview performance, and the update display of the pre-notification image CZ is executed.

Also, we have explained the case where the increment counter (MY) becomes equal to or greater than the updated value (91000) after the effective operation period of the dialogue preview performance has ended. However, even if the increment counter (MY) becomes equal to or greater than the updated value (91000) during the effective operation period of the dialogue preview performance, an emphasis performance of the pre-operation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition upper limit device is executed in parallel with the effective operation period of the dialogue preview performance and the dialogue preview performance, and the update display of the pre-notification image CZ is executed.

Also, we have explained the case where a dialogue preview performance accompanied by an effective operation period is executed before the reach performance in the variable performance of performance mode B, but even when a preview performance accompanied by another effective operation period (such as a pseudo consecutive performance) is executed, when the performance mode switching restriction period is reached and the increment counter (MY) reaches or exceeds the update value (91000), an emphasis performance of a pre-operation notification (pre-notification) of the winning limit device is executed in parallel with the preview performance accompanied by the other effective operation period, and an update display of the pre-notification image CZ is executed.

In addition, we have explained the case where a game ball enters the general winning hole 43, causing the increment counter (MY) to exceed the updated value (91000), emphasizing the pre-activation notification (pre-notification) of the winning limit device, and updating the pre-notification image CZ. However, when a game ball enters another winning area (first starting hole 45, second starting hole 47, large winning hole 50) and the increment counter (MY) exceeds the updated value (91000), the emphasizing pre-activation notification of the winning limit device is similarly executed, and the pre-notification image CZ is updated.

Also, we have explained the case where the increment counter (MY) reaches an update value of 1 (91000) or more, and an emphasis display of the pre-activation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition upper limit device is executed, and the pre-notification image CZ is updated and displayed. However, even if the other update values (90500, 91500, 92000, 92500, 93000, 93500, 94000, 94500) are reached, the emphasis display of the pre-activation notification of the acquisition upper limit device is executed, and the pre-notification image CZ is updated and displayed.

Also, we have explained what happens when the increment counter (MY) reaches or exceeds the updated value (91,000) while the dialogue preview performance is in progress, but if the increment counter (MY) reaches or exceeds the specified value (90,000) while the dialogue preview performance is in progress or during the effective operation period of the dialogue preview performance, a pre-operation notification (advance notification) of the acquisition upper limit device will be initiated in parallel with the effective operation period and the dialogue preview performance.

Thus, according to FIG. 196, during the execution of the dialogue preview performance (operation performance) executed in response to the operation of the performance button 17 or during the occurrence of the effective operation period related to the dialogue preview performance, switching the variation path of the performance pattern 70a from the first variation path to the second variation path (for example, switching from presentation mode A which is the first variation path to presentation mode B which is the second variation path) is restricted, but emphasis notification of the pre-operation notification (advance notification) of the acquisition upper limit device is possible. Therefore, it is possible to provide useful information to the player without the emphasis notification of the pre-operation notification of the acquisition upper limit device being hindered by the dialogue preview performance or the effective operation period of the dialogue preview performance, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Also, according to FIG. 196, during the execution of the dialogue preview performance (operation performance) executed in response to the operation of the performance button 17 or during the occurrence of the operation effective period related to the dialogue preview performance, the change path of the performance pattern 70a is restricted from the first change path (for example, the change path of the performance mode A) to the second change path (for example, the change path of the performance mode B) (for example, switching from the performance mode A which is the first change path to the performance mode B which is the second change path), but it is possible to switch the notification image (pre-notification image CZ) related to the operation of the acquisition upper limit device from the first mode display (a mode including "about 4500 remaining") to the second mode display (a mode including "4000 remaining"). Therefore, it is possible to provide useful information to the player without being hindered by the dialogue preview performance or the operation effective period related to the dialogue preview performance from the change of the display mode (update display) of the notification image (pre-notification image CZ) related to the operation of the acquisition upper limit device, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, according to FIG. 196, when the variable path of the performance pattern 70a switches from the first variable path to the second variable path (for example, when the variable path switches from the first variable path, which is the performance mode A, to the second variable path, which is the performance mode B), a mode switching performance (a specific performance suggesting that the performance mode will switch) that changes the mode of the performance is executed, but when the notification image (pre-notification image CZ) related to the operation of the acquisition upper limit device switches from the first mode display (a mode including "about 4500 remaining") to the second mode display (a mode including "4000 remaining") during the execution of the dialogue preview performance (operation performance) or during the occurrence of the operation effective period related to the dialogue preview performance, the mode switching performance (a specific performance suggesting that the performance mode will switch) that changes the mode of the performance is not executed (is limited) (the pre-notification image CZ can be seen). Therefore, it is possible to provide useful information to the player and increase the interest of the game.

Also, according to FIG. 196, even if an emphasis notification of the pre-operation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device is started during the effective operation period of the dialogue preview effect, the dialogue preview effect can be executed if the effect button 17 is operated during the effective operation period. Therefore, the execution of the dialogue preview effect is not hindered by the emphasis notification of the pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Also, according to FIG. 196, even if the notification image (pre-notification image CZ) related to the operation of the acquisition limit device switches from a first mode display (a mode including "about 4500 remaining") to a second mode display (a mode including "4000 remaining") during the effective operation period of the dialogue preview effect, the dialogue preview effect can be executed if the effect button 17 is operated during the effective operation period. Therefore, the execution of the dialogue preview effect is not hindered by the change in the display mode of the notification image (pre-notification image CZ) related to the operation of the acquisition limit device, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Note that when the increment counter (MY) increases and reaches or exceeds the update value (90,500, 91,000, 91,500, 92,000, 92,500, 93,000, 93,500, 94,000, 94,500), the value is updated without changing the design (shape, color, pattern, etc.) of the advance warning image CZ, but the value may be updated while changing the design (shape, color, pattern, etc.) of the advance warning image CZ.

In addition, when the increment counter (MY) increases and reaches or exceeds the update value (90,500, 91,000, 91,500, 92,000, 92,500, 93,000, 93,500, 94,000, 94,500), a large advance notification image CZ is displayed on the first image display device 70 as an emphasized notification before the operation of the acquisition upper limit device (advance notification). However, a small display may be left on the third image display device 72 and only the sound "Approximately xxx remaining" may be output, or the advance notification image CZ may be displayed large on the first image display device 70 without outputting the sound "Approximately xxx remaining", or only the advance notification image CZ related to the operation of the acquisition upper limit device may be updated without executing the emphasized notification before the operation of the acquisition upper limit device.

(Example of a performance when a pre-notification image related to the operation of the winning limit device is updated during the development of the variable performance of the SP reach)
Figures 197 to 199 are figures showing examples of presentations in which a pre-notification image relating to the operation of the winning limit device is updated during the development of the variable presentation of the SP reach.

First, as shown in FIG. 197(a), the first reserved number (U1) is "1" and the first special pattern is being displayed in a variable manner. During the variable manner of the mode B, the left-side performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, followed by the right-side performance pattern 70a temporarily stopping, and a pre-stop action is performed and the temporary stop sound of the mode B "Poko♪" is output. At this time, one reserved icon HI and the icon TI are displayed, the mode B background image is displayed on the image display device, and the variable BGM2 is output. Also, a pre-operation notification (advance notification) of the acquisition limit device is being executed, and a small advance notification image CZ is displayed on the third image display device 72.

At this time, the advance notification image CZ displays the current value of the increment counter and the activation value of the acquisition limit device in the form of "90996/95000", along with a text image saying "Approximately 4500 remaining until the acquisition limit device is activated". In addition, when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, a performance mode switching restriction period is entered during which switching of the performance mode is restricted.

Then, when the pre-stop operation of the right-side performance pattern 70a ends, the normal reach performance begins, as shown in FIG. 197(b). Specifically, a reach line RL is displayed across the left and right performance patterns 70a that are temporarily stopped to form a reach state, a sound effect of "Reach!" is output, and the left and right performance patterns 70a are highlighted and enlarged toward the center of the screen. Also, output of normal reach BGM begins in place of variable BGM 2.

In addition, when a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed after the central performance pattern 70a starts to fluctuate at a slow speed, an evolution performance to an SP reach performance is executed, as shown in FIG. 197(c). Specifically, the reserved icon displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B is erased and the display of the icon TI continues, an evolution performance image that limits the visibility of the performance images such as the performance pattern 70a and background image is displayed, and an evolution sound effect common to each performance mode (performance modes A to F) is output. At this time, the advance notification image CZ continues to be displayed in a visible manner without being obscured by the evolution performance image.

After that, when the increment counter (MY) reaches "91001" (the updated value (91000) or more) due to a game ball entering the general winning port 43, as shown in FIG. 197(d), the advance presentation continues, and an emphasis presentation of the pre-activation notification (pre-notification) of the winning limit device is executed, and the pre-notification image CZ is updated and displayed. Specifically, the pre-notification image CZ is displayed large on the first image display device 70 so as to be superimposed on the front side of the other presentation images, and the voice "About 4000 remaining" is output only once.

In addition, in the advance notification image CZ, the current value of the increment counter and the activation value of the acquisition limit device are displayed in an updated state of "91001/95000", and the text image "Approximately 4500 remaining until the acquisition limit device is activated" is displayed switched to a text image "Approximately 4000 remaining until the acquisition limit device is activated."

Then, after the advance notification image CZ, which was displayed large on the first image display device 70, moves to the third image display device 72 and is displayed small, and the execution time of the development performance (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed, the SP reach performance starts, as shown in FIG. 198(e). Specifically, an SP reach background image is displayed, and the left and right performance patterns 70a are displayed in a reduced size at the top of the screen as numbers only, an SP reach performance image is displayed, and SP reach BGM is output. However, no sound effects are output when the left and right performance patterns 70a are displayed in a reduced size at the top of the screen.

After that, when a predetermined time has passed, as shown in FIG. 198(f), the operation effective period of the cut-in effect begins and the operation promotion effect begins. Specifically, the first image display device 70 displays an operation promotion image SG consisting of an effect button image imitating the effect button 17, a gauge image indicating the remaining effective period, and a text image saying "Press!". In addition, the effect button 17 changes to a protruding state and emits red light.

When the effect button 17 is operated or the effective operation period has elapsed, a cut-in effect is executed as shown in FIG. 198(g). Specifically, a cut-in image is displayed across the first image display device 70 and the third image display device 72, a cut-in sound effect is output, and the effect button 17 goes off and vibrates weakly for three seconds. At this time, the advance warning image CZ continues to be displayed and visible without being obscured by the cut-in image.

In addition, when the execution period of the cut-in effect has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 198(h), the central effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped at a number that is larger than the left and right effect patterns 70a and different from the left and right effect patterns 70a, but without performing any pre-stop action, the temporary stop sound "Pop ♪" for a miss is output to the central effect pattern 70a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 199(i), the three performance patterns 70a are displayed at normal size and temporarily stopped at the stop position. After a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds) has elapsed, an eye-catching performance is executed, suggesting that the performance patterns 70a will stop, as shown in FIG. 199(j). Specifically, an eye-catching image that limits the visibility of the performance patterns 70a and background image is displayed so as to gradually cover the entire screen, and an eye-catching sound effect common to each performance mode (performance modes A to F) is output. At this time, the advance notification image CZ continues to be displayed in a visible manner without being blocked by the eye-catching image.

Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 199(k), the eye-catching image is erased and the three performance symbols 70a are displayed in a temporarily stopped state in a display mode corresponding to the character-present performance mode B, and a sound effect (Schwan♪) is output to indicate the temporary stop is redisplayed. Also, the hold icon HI is redisplayed in the first hold icon display area 70B. After that, when the first special symbol is displayed as stopped, as shown in FIG. 199(l), the three performance symbols 70a and the three special symbols TZ are displayed as stopped, and the icons are erased.

Here, we have explained the case where the increment counter (MY) becomes equal to or exceeds the updated value (91000) during the execution of the development to the SP reach performance in the variable performance of performance mode B, but even if the increment counter (MY) becomes equal to or exceeds the updated value (91000) during the development to the SP reach performance in the variable performance of other performance modes (e.g., performance modes A, C, D to F), an emphasis performance of the pre-activation notification (pre-notification) of the winning upper limit device is executed in parallel with the development performance, and the update display of the pre-notification image CZ is executed.

Also, we have explained the case where the increment counter (MY) becomes equal to or greater than the update value (91000) during the execution of a development performance in which an effective operation period does not occur. However, even if a development performance in which an effective operation period occurs is executed and the increment counter (MY) becomes equal to or greater than the update value (91000) during the effective operation period, an emphasis performance of the pre-operation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition upper limit device is executed in parallel with the effective operation period of the development performance and the development performance, and the update display of the pre-notification image CZ is executed.

In addition, we have explained the case where a game ball enters the general winning hole 43, causing the increment counter (MY) to exceed the updated value (91000), emphasizing the pre-activation notification (pre-notification) of the winning limit device, and updating the pre-notification image CZ. However, when a game ball enters another winning area (first starting hole 45, second starting hole 47, large winning hole 50) and the increment counter (MY) exceeds the updated value (91000), the emphasizing pre-activation notification of the winning limit device is similarly executed, and the pre-notification image CZ is updated.

Also, we have explained the case where the increment counter (MY) reaches an update value of 1 (91000) or more, and an emphasis display of the pre-activation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition upper limit device is executed, and the pre-notification image CZ is updated and displayed. However, even if the other update values (90500, 91500, 92000, 92500, 93000, 93500, 94000, 94500) are reached, the emphasis display of the pre-activation notification of the acquisition upper limit device is executed, and the pre-notification image CZ is updated and displayed.

Also, we have explained the case where the increment counter (MY) reaches or exceeds the updated value (91,000) while the development performance is being performed. However, if the increment counter (MY) reaches or exceeds the specified value (90,000) while the development performance is being performed or during the effective operation period of the development performance, a pre-operation notification (advance notification) of the acquisition upper limit device is started in parallel with the effective operation period and the development performance, and the advance notification image CZ is displayed large on the first image display device 70 so as to be superimposed on the foreground of the development performance image, and a voice message stating "Approximately 5,000 remaining" is output only once, and the light-emitting portion of the frame lighting device 10 related to the operation notification of the acquisition upper limit device is switched to the advance notification mode (flashing yellow).

Thus, according to Figures 197 to 199, while the development presentation is being executed or during the effective operation period of the development presentation, it is restricted to switch the presentation mode (mode-corresponding presentation elements such as the variable path of the presentation pattern 70a, the type of background image, the type of variable BGM, the display mode of the icons, etc.) from the first presentation mode (e.g., presentation mode A which is the first variable path) to the second presentation mode (e.g., presentation mode B which is the second variable path), but it is possible to highlight the pre-operation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition upper limit device. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with useful information without the development presentation hindering the highlighting of the pre-operation notification of the acquisition upper limit device, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Also, according to Figures 197 to 199, while the development performance is being performed or during the effective operation period of the development performance, it is restricted to switch the performance mode (mode-corresponding performance elements such as the variable path of the performance pattern 70a, the type of background image, the type of variable BGM, the display mode of the icons, etc.) from the first performance mode (e.g., performance mode A which is the first variable path) to the second performance mode (e.g., performance mode B which is the second variable path), but it is possible to switch (update) the advance notification image CZ related to the operation of the acquisition upper limit device from the first display mode (e.g., "about 4500 remaining") to the second display mode (e.g., "about 4000 remaining"). Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with useful information without the development performance hindering the update of the advance notification image CZ related to the operation of the acquisition upper limit device, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

Also, according to Fig. 197 to Fig. 199, when the presentation mode (mode-corresponding presentation elements such as the change path of the presentation pattern 70a, the type of background image, the type of change BGM, and the display mode of the icon) is switched from the first presentation mode (for example, presentation mode A which is the first change path) to the second presentation mode (for example, presentation mode B which is the second change path), a switching presentation (mode switching presentation) that restricts the visibility of the presentation image (presentation pattern 70a, background image, etc.) corresponding to the presentation mode is executed, but when the advance notification image CZ related to the operation of the acquisition upper limit device is switched from the first mode (for example, about 4500 remaining) to the second mode (for example, about 4000 remaining) during the execution of the development presentation or during the operation effective period of the development presentation, the switching presentation (display mode switching presentation) that restricts the visibility of the advance notification image CZ is not executed (is limited) (the advance notification image CZ is visible). Therefore, it is possible to provide useful information to the player, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

Also, according to Figs. 197 to 199, it is possible to execute a development effect, which is a type of specific effect that changes the mode of the effect while a variable effect is being executed (specific effects other than a development effect that suggests the development into a reach effect with a high probability of winning include a mode switching effect that suggests a change in the above-mentioned effect mode, and an eye-catching effect that suggests the effect pattern 70a will be displayed stationary, etc.), and while the development effect is being executed, the visibility of the effect pattern 70a is restricted, but the visibility of the advance notification image CZ related to the operation of the win limit device is possible (the visibility of the advance notification image CZ is not restricted). Therefore, it is possible to provide useful information to the player even during the execution of the development effect, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Also, according to Figs. 197 to 199, it is possible to execute an eye-catching effect, which is a type of specific effect that changes the mode of the effect while a variable effect is being executed (specific effects other than the eye-catching effect that suggests the effect pattern 70a will stop being displayed include the mode switching effect that suggests a change in the effect mode described above, and the development effect that suggests the development into a reach effect with a high probability of a jackpot), and while the eye-catching effect is being executed, the visibility of the effect pattern 70a is restricted, but the advance notification image CZ related to the operation of the win limit device is visible (the visibility of the advance notification image CZ is not restricted). Therefore, it is possible to provide useful information to the player even during the execution of the eye-catching effect, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Note that when the increment counter (MY) increases and reaches or exceeds the update value (90,500, 91,000, 91,500, 92,000, 92,500, 93,000, 93,500, 94,000, 94,500), the value is updated without changing the design (shape, color, pattern, etc.) of the advance warning image CZ, but the value may be updated while changing the design (shape, color, pattern, etc.) of the advance warning image CZ.

In addition, when the increment counter (MY) increases and reaches or exceeds the update value (90,500, 91,000, 91,500, 92,000, 92,500, 93,000, 93,500, 94,000, 94,500), a large advance notification image CZ is displayed on the first image display device 70 as an emphasized notification before the operation of the acquisition upper limit device (advance notification). However, a small display may be left on the third image display device 72 and only the sound "Approximately xxx remaining" may be output, or the advance notification image CZ may be displayed large on the first image display device 70 without outputting the sound "Approximately xxx remaining", or only the advance notification image CZ related to the operation of the acquisition upper limit device may be updated without executing the emphasized notification before the operation of the acquisition upper limit device.

(Example of a performance in which a pre-notification image related to the operation of the winning limit device is updated during the effective operation period of the cut-in performance of the SP reach variable performance)
Figures 200 to 201 are figures showing examples of presentations in which a pre-notification image related to the operation of the winning limit device is updated during the effective operation period of the cut-in presentation of the SP reach variable presentation.

First, as shown in FIG. 200(a), the first reserved number (U1) is displaying a variable first special symbol of "1", and during the variable presentation of presentation mode B, an SP reach presentation is being executed. At this time, the reserved icon HI is not displayed and the icon TI is displayed, an SP reach background image is displayed on the image display device, and the SP reach BGM is being output. In addition, a pre-operation notification (advance notification) of the winning limit device is being executed, and a small advance notification image CZ is displayed on the third image display device 72.

At this time, the advance notification image CZ displays the current value of the increment counter and the activation value of the win limit device in the form of "91996/95000", along with a text image saying "Approximately 3500 remaining until the win limit device is activated." In addition, when the SP reach performance is being executed, a performance mode switching restriction period is entered during which switching of the performance mode is restricted.

After that, when a predetermined time has passed, as shown in FIG. 200(b), the operation effective period of the cut-in effect begins and the operation promotion effect begins. Specifically, the first image display device 70 displays an operation promotion image SG consisting of an effect button image that resembles the effect button 17, a gauge image that indicates the remaining effective period, and a text image that reads "Press!". In addition, the effect button 17 changes to a protruding state and emits red light.

When the increment counter (MY) reaches "92001", which is equal to or greater than the updated value (92000) due to a game ball entering the general winning slot 43 during the effective operation period of the cut-in effect, the operation promotion effect continues, and an emphasis effect is executed for the pre-operation notification (pre-notification) of the winning limit device, and the pre-notification image CZ is updated and displayed, as shown in FIG. 200(c). Specifically, the pre-notification image CZ is displayed large on the first image display device 70 so as to be superimposed on other effect images (operation promotion image SG, etc.), and the sound "Approximately 3000 remaining" is output only once.

At this time, the advance notification image CZ displays the current value of the increment counter and the activation value of the acquisition limit device in the form of "92001/95000", along with a text image stating "Approximately 3000 remaining until the acquisition limit device is activated."

Then, after the advance warning image CZ, which was displayed large on the first image display device 70, moves to the third image display device 72 and is displayed small, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective operation period has elapsed, a cut-in effect is executed as shown in FIG. 200(d). Specifically, a cut-in image is displayed across the first image display device 70 and the third image display device 72, a cut-in sound effect is output, and the effect button 17 is turned off and vibrates weakly for three seconds. At this time, the advance warning image CZ continues to be displayed and visible without being obscured by the cut-in image.

In addition, when the execution period of the cut-in effect has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 201(e), the central effect pattern 70a is larger in size than the effect patterns 70a on the left and right and temporarily stops in the same position as the effect patterns 70a on the left and right, indicating a jackpot; however, no pre-stop action is performed and the temporary stop sound "BOOM♪" exclusive to the jackpot, which is common to each effect mode (effect modes A to F), is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 201(f), the three performance symbols 70a are displayed at normal size and temporarily stopped at the stop position, and the performance button 17 vibrates strongly for four seconds and emits rainbow light. After a predetermined time (e.g., two seconds) has passed, as shown in FIG. 201(g), an eye-catching image that limits the visibility of the performance symbols 70a and background image is displayed so as to gradually cover the entire screen, and an eye-catching sound effect common to each performance mode (performance modes A to F) is output. At this time, the advance notification image CZ continues to be displayed in a visible manner without being obscured by the eye-catching image.

After a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 201(h), the three performance symbols 70a are displayed in a temporarily stopped state in a display mode corresponding to the character-present performance mode B, and a sound effect (Schwan♪) is output to indicate the temporary stop is displayed again. In addition, the performance button 17 strongly vibrates for one second and emits rainbow light. Then, the hold icon HI is redisplayed in the first hold icon display area 70B. After that, when the first special symbol is displayed as stopped, the three performance symbols 70a and the three special symbols TZ are displayed as stopped, and the icons are erased.

Here, we have explained the case where the increment counter (MY) becomes equal to or greater than the updated value (92,000) during the effective operation period of the cut-in effect in the variable performance of performance mode B. However, even if the increment counter (MY) becomes equal to or greater than the updated value (92,000) during the effective operation period of the cut-in effect in the variable performance of other performance modes (e.g., performance modes A, C, D to F), an emphasis performance of the pre-operation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition upper limit device is executed in parallel with the operation promotion performance, and the update display of the pre-notification image CZ is executed.

Also, while we have explained the case where the increment counter (MY) becomes equal to or greater than the updated value (92,000) during the effective operation period of the cut-in performance, even if the increment counter (MY) becomes equal to or greater than the updated value (92,000) while the cut-in performance is being executed, an emphasis performance of the pre-operation notification (pre-notification) of the winning limit device is executed in parallel with the cut-in performance, and the update display of the pre-notification image CZ is executed.

In addition, we have explained the case where a game ball enters the general winning hole 43, causing the increment counter (MY) to exceed the updated value (92,000), emphasizing the pre-activation notification (pre-notification) of the winning limit device, and updating the pre-notification image CZ. However, when a game ball enters another winning area (first starting hole 45, second starting hole 47, large winning hole 50) and the increment counter (MY) exceeds the updated value (92,000), the emphasizing effect of the pre-activation notification of the winning limit device is similarly executed, and the pre-notification image CZ is updated.

Also, we have explained the case where the increment counter (MY) reaches an update value of 1 (92000) or more, and an emphasis display of the pre-activation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition upper limit device is executed, and the pre-notification image CZ is updated and displayed. However, even if the other update values (90500, 91000, 91500, 92500, 93000, 93500, 94000, 94500) are reached, the emphasis display of the pre-activation notification of the acquisition upper limit device is executed, and the pre-notification image CZ is updated and displayed.

As described above, according to Figs. 200-201, during the operation effective period (operation promotion performance) of the cut-in performance, which is a type of operation performance executed in response to the operation of the performance button 17, or during the execution of the cut-in performance, switching of the performance mode (mode-corresponding performance elements such as the variable path of the performance pattern 70a, the type of background image, the type of variable BGM, the display mode of the icons, etc.) from the first performance mode (e.g., performance mode A which is the first variable path) to the second performance mode (e.g., performance mode B which is the second variable path) is restricted, but emphasis notification of the pre-operation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition upper limit device is possible. Therefore, useful information can be provided to the player without being hindered by the operation effective period (operation promotion performance) of the cut-in performance, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

Also, according to Figs. 200 to 201, during the operation effective period (operation promotion performance) of the cut-in performance, which is a type of operation performance executed in response to the operation of the performance button 17, or during the execution of the cut-in performance, switching of the performance mode (mode-corresponding performance elements such as the variable path of the performance pattern 70a, the type of background image, the type of variable BGM, the display mode of the icons, etc.) from the first performance mode (e.g., performance mode A which is the first variable path) to the second performance mode (e.g., performance mode B which is the second variable path) is restricted, but switching (updating) of the advance notification image CZ related to the operation of the acquisition upper limit device from the first display mode (e.g., "about 3500 remaining") to the second display mode (e.g., "about 3000 remaining") is possible. Therefore, useful information can be provided to the player without the update of the advance notification image CZ related to the operation of the acquisition upper limit device being hindered by the operation effective period (operation promotion performance) of the cut-in performance, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

Also, according to Fig. 200-Fig. 201, when the presentation mode (mode-corresponding presentation elements such as the change path of the presentation pattern 70a, the type of background image, the type of change BGM, and the display mode of the icon) is switched from the first presentation mode (for example, presentation mode A which is the first change path) to the second presentation mode (for example, presentation mode B which is the second change path), a switching presentation (mode switching presentation) that restricts the visibility of the presentation image (presentation pattern 70a, background image, etc.) corresponding to the presentation mode is executed, but when the advance notification image CZ related to the operation of the acquisition upper limit device is switched from the first display mode (for example, about 3500 remaining) to the second display mode (for example, about 3000 remaining) during the operation effective period of the cut-in presentation, the switching presentation (display mode switching presentation) that restricts the visibility of the advance notification image CZ is not executed (is limited) (the advance notification image CZ is visible). Therefore, it is possible to provide useful information to the player, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

Note that when the increment counter (MY) increases and reaches or exceeds the update value (90,500, 91,000, 91,500, 92,000, 92,500, 93,000, 93,500, 94,000, 94,500), the value is updated without changing the design (shape, color, pattern, etc.) of the advance warning image CZ, but the value may be updated while changing the design (shape, color, pattern, etc.) of the advance warning image CZ.

In addition, when the increment counter (MY) increases and reaches or exceeds the update value (90,500, 91,000, 91,500, 92,000, 92,500, 93,000, 93,500, 94,000, 94,500), a large advance notification image CZ is displayed on the first image display device 70 as an emphasized notification before the operation of the acquisition upper limit device (advance notification). However, a small display may be left on the third image display device 72 and only the sound "Approximately xxx remaining" may be output, or the advance notification image CZ may be displayed large on the first image display device 70 without outputting the sound "Approximately xxx remaining", or only the advance notification image CZ related to the operation of the acquisition upper limit device may be updated without executing the emphasized notification before the operation of the acquisition upper limit device.

In addition, when the three performance symbols 70a are displayed in a temporarily stopped state in a display mode corresponding to the performance mode B with characters after the eye-catching image is erased, the sound effect of the temporary stop being displayed again (Schwan♪) may not be output, or if a losing performance symbol 70a is displayed after the eye-catching image is erased, the sound effect of the temporary stop being displayed again (Schwan♪) may not be output, and if a winning performance symbol 70a is displayed after the eye-catching image is erased, the sound effect of the temporary stop being displayed again (Schwan♪) may be output, or vice versa.

(Example of a performance in which a pre-notification image related to the operation of the winning limit device is updated during the effective operation period of the cut-in performance of the SP reach variable performance)
Figure 202 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation in which the advance notification image related to the operation of the winning limit device is updated (retreated) during the effective operation period of the cut-in presentation of the SP reach variable presentation.

First, as shown in FIG. 202(a), the first reserved number (U1) is displaying a variable first special pattern of "1", and during the variable presentation of presentation mode B, an SP reach presentation is being executed. At this time, the reserved icon HI is not displayed and the icon TI is displayed, an SP reach background image is displayed on the image display device, and the SP reach BGM is being output. In addition, a pre-operation notification (advance notification) of the winning limit device is being executed, and a small advance notification image CZ is displayed on the third image display device 72.

At this time, the advance notification image CZ displays the current value of the increment counter and the activation value of the win limit device in the form of "91000/95000", along with a text image saying "Approximately 4000 remaining until the win limit device is activated." In addition, when the SP reach performance is being executed, a performance mode switching restriction period is entered during which switching of the performance mode is restricted.

After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 202(b), the operation effective period of the cut-in effect begins and the operation promotion effect begins. Specifically, the first image display device 70 displays an operation promotion image SG consisting of an effect button image imitating the effect button 17, a gauge image indicating the remaining effective period, and a text image saying "Press!". In addition, the effect button 17 changes to a protruding state and emits red light.

In addition, when 100 game balls are launched into the game area 5a from the start of the SP reach performance and the increment counter (MY) reaches "90900", the advance notification image CZ displays the current increment counter value and the activation value of the winning limit device in the form of "90900/95000", along with a text image stating "Approximately 4000 remaining until the winning limit device is activated".

When one more game ball is released and the increment counter (MY) reaches "90899" and falls below the update value for retreat (90900), the advance notification image CZ displayed on the third image display device 72 is updated as shown in FIG. 202(c). Specifically, the numerical value indicating the current increment counter value and the activation value of the acquisition upper limit device is displayed in the form of "90899/95000", and a text image stating "Approximately 4500 remaining until the acquisition upper limit device is activated" is displayed.

When the effect button 17 is operated or the effective operation period has elapsed, a cut-in effect is executed as shown in FIG. 202(d). Specifically, a cut-in image is displayed across the first image display device 70 and the third image display device 72, a cut-in sound effect is output, and the effect button 17 goes out and vibrates weakly for three seconds. At this time, the advance warning image CZ continues to be displayed and visible without being obscured by the cut-in image.

Here, we have explained the case where the increment counter (MY) becomes less than the update value for retreat (90900) during the effective operation period of the cut-in effect in the variable performance of performance mode B, but even if the increment counter (MY) becomes less than the update value for retreat (90900) during the effective operation period of the cut-in effect in the variable performance of other performance modes (e.g., performance modes A, C, D to F), the update display of the advance notification image CZ is executed in parallel with the operation promotion performance.

Also, we have explained the case where the increment counter (MY) becomes less than the update value for retreat (90900) during the effective operation period of the cut-in performance, but even if the increment counter (MY) becomes less than the update value for retreat (90900) while the cut-in performance is being executed, the update display of the advance warning image CZ is executed in parallel with the cut-in performance.

In addition, regardless of whether the cut-in effect is in operation or in progress, if the increment counter (MY) falls below the update value for retreat (90900), the advance notification image CZ is updated and displayed in parallel with the effect being performed.

In addition, we have explained the case where the advance warning image CZ is updated and displayed when the increment counter (MY) falls below the retreat update value of 1 (90900), but the advance warning image CZ is also updated and displayed in the same way when it falls below other retreat update values (90400, 91400, 91900, 92400, 92900, 93400, 93900, 94400, 94500).

Thus, according to FIG. 202, during the effective operation period (operation promotion performance) of the cut-in performance, the performance mode (mode-corresponding performance elements such as the variable path of the performance pattern 70a, the type of background image, the type of variable BGM, the display mode of the icons, etc.) can be restricted from switching from the first performance mode (e.g., performance mode A which is the first variable path) to the second performance mode (e.g., performance mode B which is the second variable path), but it is possible to switch (update) the advance notification image CZ related to the operation of the acquisition upper limit device from the second display mode (e.g., "about 4000 remaining") to the first display mode (e.g., "4500 remaining"). Therefore, useful information can be provided to the player without the update of the advance notification image CZ related to the operation of the acquisition upper limit device being hindered by the effective operation period (operation promotion performance) of the cut-in performance, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

Also, according to FIG. 202, when the advance notification image CZ related to the operation of the acquisition upper limit device is switched (updated) from the first display mode (e.g., "4500 remaining") to the second display mode (e.g., "about 4000 remaining"), the value of the increment counter (MY) (updated value: 90500, 91000, 91500, 92000, 92500, 93000, 93500, 94000, 94500) and the acquisition The value of the increment counter (MY) when the advance notification image CZ related to the operation of the upper limit device is switched (updated) from the second display mode (e.g., "about 4000 remaining") to the first display mode (e.g., "4500 remaining") is different from the value (updated value for retreat: 90400, 91400, 91900, 92400, 92900, 93400, 93900, 94400, 94500). Therefore, immediately after the advance notification image CZ related to the operation of the upper limit device is switched from the first display mode (e.g., "4500 remaining") to the second display mode (e.g., "about 4000 remaining"), the advance notification image CZ is less likely to switch from the second display mode (e.g., "about 4000 remaining") to the first display mode (e.g., "4500 remaining"), making it possible to easily view the advance notification image CZ related to the operation of the upper limit device.

Also, according to FIG. 202, when the presentation mode (mode-corresponding presentation elements such as the change path of the presentation pattern 70a, the type of background image, the type of change BGM, and the display mode of the icon) is switched from the first presentation mode (for example, presentation mode A which is the first change path) to the second presentation mode (for example, presentation mode B which is the second change path), a switching presentation (mode switching presentation) that restricts the visibility of the presentation image (presentation pattern 70a, background image, etc.) corresponding to the presentation mode is executed, but when the advance notification image CZ related to the operation of the acquisition upper limit device is switched from the second display mode (for example, "about 4000 remaining") to the first display mode (for example, "4500 remaining") during the effective operation period of the cut-in presentation, the switching presentation (display mode switching presentation) that restricts the visibility of the advance notification image CZ is not executed (is limited) (the advance notification image CZ is visible). Therefore, it is possible to provide useful information to the player and increase the interest in the game.

When the increment counter (MY) decreases and falls below the update value for retreat (90400, 90900, 91400, 91900, 92400, 92900, 93400, 93900, 94400, 94500), the value is updated without changing the design (shape, color, pattern, etc.) of the advance warning image CZ, but the value may be updated while changing the design (shape, color, pattern, etc.) of the advance warning image CZ.

Also, when the increment counter (MY) decreases and falls below the update value for retreat (90400, 90900, 91400, 91900, 92400, 92900, 93400, 93900, 94400, 94500), no emphasis notification was given when updating the advance notification image CZ related to the operation of the acquisition upper limit device, but an emphasis notification may be given. In this case, the advance notification image CZ may be displayed in a large size on the first image display device 70 and a sound such as "Approximately xxx remaining" may be output, or the advance notification image CZ may simply be displayed in a large size on the first image display device 70, or a sound such as "Approximately xxx remaining" may simply be output.

(Example of a performance when the pre-operation notification of the winning limit device ends during the effective operation period of the cut-in performance of the SP reach variable performance)
Figure 203 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation in which the pre-activation notification of the winning limit device ends during the effective operation period of the cut-in presentation of the SP reach variable presentation.

First, as shown in FIG. 203(a), the first reserved number (U1) is displaying a variable first special pattern of "1", and during the variable presentation of presentation mode B, an SP reach presentation is being executed. At this time, the reserved icon HI is not displayed and the icon TI is displayed, an SP reach background image is displayed on the image display device, and the SP reach BGM is being output. In addition, a pre-operation notification (advance notification) of the winning limit device is being executed, and a small advance notification image CZ is displayed on the third image display device 72.

At this time, the advance notification image CZ displays the current value of the increment counter and the activation value of the acquisition limit device in the form of "90000/95000", along with a text image saying "Approximately 5000 remaining until the acquisition limit device is activated". In addition, when the SP reach performance is being executed, a performance mode switching restriction period is entered during which switching of the performance mode is restricted.

After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 203(b), the operation effective period of the cut-in effect begins, and the operation promotion effect begins. Specifically, the first image display device 70 displays an operation promotion image SG consisting of an effect button image that resembles the effect button 17, a gauge image that indicates the remaining effective period, and a text image that reads "Press!". In addition, the effect button 17 changes to a protruding state and emits red light.

In addition, when 100 game balls are launched into the game area 5a from the start of the SP reach performance and the increment counter (MY) reaches "89900", the advance notification image CZ displays the current increment counter value and the activation value of the winning limit device in the form of "89900/95000", along with a text image stating "Approximately 5000 remaining until the winning limit device is activated".

Then, when one more game ball is released and the increment counter (MY) reaches "89899" and falls below the end value (89900), the advance notification image CZ displayed on the third image display device 72 is erased and the advance notification (advance notification) of the winning limit device ends, as shown in FIG. 203(c).

When the effect button 17 is operated or the effective operation period has elapsed, a cut-in effect is executed as shown in FIG. 203(d). Specifically, a cut-in image is displayed across the first image display device 70 and the third image display device 72, a cut-in sound effect is output, and the effect button 17 goes out and vibrates weakly for three seconds.

Here, we have explained the case where the increment counter (MY) falls below the end value (89900) during the effective operation period of the cut-in effect in the variable performance of performance mode B, but even if the increment counter (MY) falls below the end value (89900) during the effective operation period of the cut-in effect in the variable performance of other performance modes (e.g., performance modes A, C, D to F), the advance notification image CZ is erased in parallel with the operation promotion performance, and the advance notification (advance notification) before the operation of the acquisition upper limit device ends.

Also, while we have explained the case where the increment counter (MY) falls below the end value (89900) during the effective operation period of the cut-in performance, even if the increment counter (MY) falls below the end value (89900) while the cut-in performance is being executed, the advance notification image CZ is erased in parallel with the cut-in performance, and the advance notification (advance notification) before the operation of the acquisition upper limit device ends.

In addition, regardless of whether the cut-in effect is in operation or in progress, if the increment counter (MY) falls below the end value (89,900) during a specified effect (including variable effects in which a cut-in effect is executed, as well as effects such as big win effects and customer waiting demo effects in which a cut-in effect is not executed), the advance notification image CZ is erased in parallel with the effect being executed, and the pre-operation notification (advance notification) of the winning limit device is terminated.

As such, according to FIG. 203, when the increment counter (MY) becomes less than the end value (89,900), the advance notification image CZ is erased in parallel with the ongoing performance (customer waiting performance, variable performance, big win performance), and the advance notification (advance notification) for the operation of the maximum winnings device ends. Therefore, it is possible to provide useful information to the player without the end of the advance notification for the operation of the maximum winnings device being hindered by the ongoing performance, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Also, according to FIG. 203, the value of the increment counter (MY) when starting the pre-operation notification (advance notification) of the acquisition upper limit device (default value: 90,000) is different from the value of the increment counter (MY) when ending the pre-operation notification of the acquisition upper limit device (end value: 89,900). Therefore, it becomes difficult for the pre-operation notification of the acquisition upper limit device to end immediately after it has started, making it easier to recognize the pre-operation notification of the acquisition upper limit device.

In addition, when the increment counter (MY) falls below the end value (89,900) and the pre-operation notification (advance notification) of the acquisition limit device is terminated, an emphasis notification was not performed, but an emphasis notification may be performed. In this case, the advance notification image CZ may be displayed in a large size on the first image display device 70 and then erased, or a sound such as "The pre-operation notification is ending" may be output.

(Example of a performance when the maximum win device is activated during a continuous preview performance)
Figure 204 shows an example of a presentation in which the winning limit device is activated during a continuous preview presentation.

First, as shown in FIG. 204(a), when the first reserved number (U1) is "1" and the first special pattern is displayed in a stopped state and the display mode is controlled to B, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 and the execution of a pre-reading action display spanning two variable displays is determined, causing the first reserved number (U1) to become "2", one additional reserved icon HI is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B. At this time, the mode B background image is displayed on the image display device, and variable BGM2 is output. In addition, a pre-operation notification (advance notification) of the winning limit device is being executed, and an advance notification image CZ is displayed on the third image display device 72.

At this time, the advance notification image CZ displays the current value of the increment counter and the activation value of the acquisition limit device in the form of "94998/95000", along with a text image stating "Approximately 500 remaining until the acquisition limit device is activated."

Then, when the stop time of the first special symbol has elapsed and the next change display of the first special symbol has begun, one hold icon HI and the icon TI are displayed as shown in FIG. 204(b), and the change performance and the look-ahead operation performance begin. Specifically, the three performance symbols 70a begin pre-change operation, and the special symbol TZ begins change display, after which the three performance symbols 70a begin change display moving along the second change path. In addition, as a look-ahead operation performance, an operation performance (first operation performance) is executed in which the first movable member 77a descends toward the center of the screen of the first image display device 70 at a width smaller than the maximum descending width.

After that, when the game ball enters the general winning port 43 and the increment counter (MY) reaches "95003", which is equal to or greater than the activation value (95000), the winning limit device is activated and control of the game progress is stopped, as shown in FIG. 204(c), and the main information display device 59 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67, status check display 68, and game status display) is turned off and becomes a non-display state (the special symbol display is in a display mode different from the display mode showing the losing special symbol and the jackpot special symbol).

In addition, the game presentation including the look-ahead operation presentation (variable presentation, presentation light emission of the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76, light display of the sub-information display device 80, etc.) is forcibly terminated, the first movable member 77a starts the return operation to the initial position, and a notification that the acquisition limit device is in operation is started to notify that the acquisition limit device has been activated. Specifically, an operation notification image (operation notification screen) is displayed in which both white text areas of "acquisition limit device in operation, today's game has ended" are formed on a black background image, the sound "acquisition limit device has been activated" is repeatedly output, and the light-emitting part of the frame lighting device 10 related to the acquisition limit device operation notification flashes white.

In addition, the main control board 110 outputs a signal indicating that the acquisition limit device is in operation (hole control and fraud monitoring information) to the frame control board 120, and the frame control board 120 outputs a signal indicating that the acquisition limit device is in operation (hole control and fraud monitoring information) to the dedicated unit 170.

The sequence of events at this time can be either: Activation of the acquisition limit device → Stop of game progress control → Non-display of the main information display device 59 → End of game presentation + Notification that the acquisition limit device is in operation → Output of an acquisition limit device in operation signal from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 → Return of the first movable member 77a to its initial position, or Activation of the acquisition limit device → Stop of game progress control → Non-display of the main information display device 59 → Output of an acquisition limit device in operation signal from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 → End of game presentation + Notification that the acquisition limit device is in operation → Return of the first movable member 77a to its initial position, but the former is more likely to occur.

After a predetermined time has elapsed, the first movable member 77a returns to its initial position as shown in FIG. 204(d), and the notification that the winning limit device is operating continues until the gaming machine 1 is powered off.

Here, we have described the case where a look-ahead action performance is executed over two variable performances in performance mode B, but even if a look-ahead action performance is executed over one variable performance, or a look-ahead action performance is executed over three or more variable performances, when the increment counter (MY) reaches the activation value (95,000) or more and the acquisition upper limit device is activated, the game progress control is stopped, the main information display device 59 is turned off, and the game performance including the look-ahead action performance (variable performance, illumination of the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76, etc.) is forcibly ended, and a notification that the acquisition upper limit device is in operation is started.

Also, while the case where the look-ahead action presentation is executed in presentation mode B has been described, even when other continuous preview presentations (look-ahead effect presentation, look-ahead chance eye presentation, look-ahead vibration presentation, look-ahead zone presentation) are executed, when the increment counter (MY) reaches the activation value (95,000) or more and the acquisition upper limit device is activated, the game progress control is stopped, the main information display device 59 is turned off, and the game presentation including the look-ahead action presentation (variable presentation, illumination of presentations by the frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 76, etc.) is forcibly ended, and a notification that the acquisition upper limit device is in operation is started.

Also, while the case where the look-ahead action effect is executed in the presentation mode B has been described, in the other presentation modes (presentation modes A, C, D-F), when other continuous preview effects (look-ahead action effect, look-ahead effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead vibration effect, look-ahead zone effect) are executed, when the increment counter (MY) reaches the activation value (95,000) or more and the acquisition upper limit device is activated, the game progress control is stopped, the main information display device 59 is turned off, and the game presentation including the look-ahead action effect (variable presentation, illumination of the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76, etc.) is forcibly ended, and a notification that the acquisition upper limit device is in operation is started.

Also, although the case where the increment counter (MY) becomes equal to or greater than the operating value (95,000) when a game ball enters the general winning hole 43 has been described, even if the game ball enters another winning area (first starting hole 45, second starting hole 47, large winning hole 50) and the increment counter (MY) becomes equal to or greater than the operating value (95,000), the winning limit device is activated, game progress control is stopped, the main information display device 59 is turned off, game presentations including look-ahead operation presentations (variable presentations, presentation illumination by the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76, etc.) are forcibly ended, and a notification that the winning limit device is in operation is started.

(Example of a performance when the maximum win device is activated during a dialogue preview performance)
FIG. 205 shows an example of a presentation in which an acquisition limit device is activated during a dialogue preview presentation.

First, as shown in FIG. 205(a), the first reserved number (U1) is a "1" and the first special pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, and the variable presentation of presentation mode B is in progress. At this time, one reserved icon HI and the icon TI are displayed, the mode B background image is displayed on the image display device, and the variable BGM2 is being output. In addition, a pre-operation notification (advance notification) of the winning limit device is being executed, and the advance notification image CZ is being displayed on the third image display device 72.

At this time, the advance notification image CZ displays the current value of the increment counter and the activation value of the acquisition limit device in the form of "94998/95000", along with a text image stating "Approximately 500 remaining until the acquisition limit device is activated."

In this state, when the effective operation period of the effect button 17 related to the dialogue preview effect begins, the operation promotion effect begins. Specifically, a dialogue window SW is displayed on the first image display device 70, and an operation promotion image SG consisting of an effect button image imitating the effect button 17 and a gauge image indicating the remaining effective period is displayed within the dialogue window SW. Also, the effect button 17 remains lit in white in its normal state. Note that a predetermined period (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, and a switching restriction period for the effect mode is entered during which switching of the effect mode is restricted.

When the effect button 17 is operated, the effective operation period ends and the line preview effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 205(b). Specifically, a text image of the hot line "What's this?! It's hot!!" is displayed in the line window SW displayed on the first image display device 70, and the effect button 17 goes off and vibrates weakly for one second.

After that, when the game ball enters the general winning port 43 and the increment counter (MY) reaches "95003", which is equal to or greater than the activation value (95000), the winning limit device is activated and control of the game progress is stopped, as shown in FIG. 205(c), and the main information display device 59 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67, status check display 68, and game status display) goes out and becomes non-displayed (the special symbol display shows a display mode different from the display mode showing the losing special symbol and the jackpot special symbol).

In addition, the game presentation including the dialogue preview presentation (variable presentation, lighting of the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76, etc.) is forcibly ended, and a notification that the acquisition limit device is in operation is started to notify that the acquisition limit device has been activated. Specifically, an operation notification image (operation notification screen) is displayed with a white text area saying "acquisition limit device in operation, today's game has ended" on a black background image, the sound "acquisition limit device has been activated" is repeatedly output, and the light-emitting part of the frame lighting device 10 related to the acquisition limit device operation notification flashes white.

In addition, the main control board 110 outputs a signal indicating that the acquisition limit device is in operation (hole control and fraud monitoring information) to the frame control board 120, and the frame control board 120 outputs a signal indicating that the acquisition limit device is in operation (hole control and fraud monitoring information) to the dedicated unit 170.

The sequence of events at this time can be either: Activation of the acquisition limit device → Stop of game progress control → Non-display of the main information display device 59 → End of game presentation + Notification that the acquisition limit device is in operation → Output of a signal from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 that the acquisition limit device is in operation, or Activation of the acquisition limit device → Stop of game progress control → Non-display of the main information display device 59 → Output of a signal from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 that the acquisition limit device is in operation → End of game presentation + Notification that the acquisition limit device is in operation, but the former is more likely to occur.

After that, the notification that the winning limit device is in operation will continue until the gaming machine 1 is powered off.

Here, we have explained the case where the increment counter (MY) reaches or exceeds the operating value (95,000) during the execution of the dialogue preview performance in the variable performance of performance mode B, and the acquisition upper limit device is activated. However, even if the increment counter (MY) reaches or exceeds the operating value (95,000) during the execution of the dialogue preview performance in the variable performance of other performance modes (performance modes A, C, D to F), and the acquisition upper limit device is activated, the game progress control is stopped, the main information display device 59 is turned off, and the game performance (variable performance, illumination of the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76, etc.) including the dialogue preview performance (operation valid period) is forcibly ended, and a notification that the acquisition upper limit device is in operation is started.

Also, we have explained the case where the increment counter (MY) reaches or exceeds the operating value (95,000) after the effective operation period of the dialogue preview performance has ended, and the acquisition upper limit device is activated. However, even if the increment counter (MY) reaches or exceeds the operating value (95,000) during the effective operation period of the dialogue preview performance, and the acquisition upper limit device is activated, the game progress control is stopped, the main information display device 59 is turned off, and the game performance including the dialogue preview performance (variable performance, illumination of the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 performance, etc.) is forcibly ended, and a notification that the acquisition upper limit device is in operation is started.

Also, we have explained the case where a dialogue preview performance accompanied by an effective operation period is executed before a reach performance in a variable performance. However, even if the increment counter (MY) reaches the operation value (95,000) or more during the execution of other preview performances accompanied by an effective operation period (such as pseudo consecutive performances) and the winning limit device is activated, the game progress control is stopped, the main information display device 59 is turned off, and other game performances including the preview performances (variable performances, lighting of the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76, etc.) are forcibly ended, and a notification that the winning limit device is in operation is started.

Also, although the case where the increment counter (MY) becomes equal to or greater than the operating value (95,000) when a game ball enters the general winning hole 43 has been described, if a game ball enters another winning area (first starting hole 45, second starting hole 47, large winning hole 50) and the increment counter (MY) becomes equal to or greater than the operating value (95,000), the winning limit device is also activated, game progress control is stopped, the main information display device 59 is turned off, game effects including dialogue preview effects (variable effects, effect illumination by the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76, etc.) are forcibly terminated, and a notification that the winning limit device is in operation is started.

(Example of a cut-in effect when the maximum win limit device is activated during the effective operation period)
FIG. 206 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation in which an upper limit winning device is activated during the effective operation period of a cut-in presentation.

First, as shown in FIG. 206(a), the first reserved number (U1) is displaying a variable first special pattern of "1", and during the variable presentation of presentation mode B, the SP reach presentation is being executed. At this time, the reserved icon HI is not displayed and the icon TI is displayed, while the SP reach background image is displayed on the image display device and the SP reach BGM is being output. In addition, a pre-operation notification (advance notification) of the winning limit device is being executed, and a small advance notification image CZ is displayed on the third image display device 72.

At this time, the advance notification image CZ displays the current value of the increment counter and the activation value of the acquisition limit device in the form of "94998/95000", along with a text image saying "Approximately 500 remaining until the acquisition limit device is activated". In addition, when the SP reach performance is being executed, a performance mode switching restriction period is entered during which switching of the performance mode is restricted.

After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 206(b), the operation effective period of the cut-in effect begins, and the operation promotion effect begins. Specifically, the first image display device 70 displays an operation promotion image SG consisting of an effect button image imitating the effect button 17, a gauge image indicating the remaining effective period, and a text image saying "Press!". In addition, the effect button 17 emits white light while remaining in the normal state.

After that, when the game ball enters the general winning port 43 and the increment counter (MY) reaches "95003", which is equal to or greater than the activation value (95000), the winning limit device is activated and control of the game progress is stopped, as shown in FIG. 206(c), and the main information display device 59 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, round number display 66, right hit display 67, status check display 68, and game status display) is turned off and becomes non-displayed (the special symbol display has a display mode different from the display mode showing the losing special symbol and the jackpot special symbol).

In addition, the game effects (variable effects, light emission from the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76, etc.) including the cut-in effect (operation valid period) are forcibly ended, and an operation notification for the acquisition limit device is started to notify that the acquisition limit device has been activated. Specifically, an operation notification image (operation notification screen) is displayed in which a white text area stating "acquisition limit device is activated, today's game has ended" is formed on a black background image, the sound "acquisition limit device has been activated" is repeatedly output, and the light-emitting part of the frame lighting device 10 related to the operation notification for the acquisition limit device flashes white.

In addition, the main control board 110 outputs a signal indicating that the acquisition limit device is in operation (hole control and fraud monitoring information) to the frame control board 120, and the frame control board 120 outputs a signal indicating that the acquisition limit device is in operation (hole control and fraud monitoring information) to the dedicated unit 170.

The sequence of events at this time can be either: Activation of the acquisition limit device → Stop of game progress control → Non-display of the main information display device 59 → End of game presentation + Notification that the acquisition limit device is in operation → Output of a signal from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 that the acquisition limit device is in operation, or Activation of the acquisition limit device → Stop of game progress control → Non-display of the main information display device 59 → Output of a signal from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 that the acquisition limit device is in operation → End of game presentation + Notification that the acquisition limit device is in operation, but the former is more likely to occur.

After that, the notification that the winning limit device is in operation will continue until the gaming machine 1 is powered off.

Here, we have explained the case where the increment counter (MY) reaches or exceeds the operating value (95,000) during the effective operation period of the cut-in effect in the variable effect of the variable effect of the effect mode B, and the acquisition upper limit device is activated. However, even if the increment counter (MY) reaches or exceeds the operating value (95,000) during the effective operation period of the cut-in effect in the variable effect of the other effect modes (effect modes A, C, D to F), and the acquisition upper limit device is activated, the game progress control is stopped, the main information display device 59 is turned off, and the game effect (variable effect, illumination of the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76, etc.) including the cut-in effect (effective operation period) is forcibly ended, and a notification that the acquisition upper limit device is in operation is started.

Also, while the case where the increment counter (MY) reaches or exceeds the operating value (95,000) during the effective operation period of the cut-in effect and the acquisition upper limit device is activated has been described, even if the increment counter (MY) reaches or exceeds the operating value (95,000) after the effective operation period of the cut-in effect has ended and the acquisition upper limit device is activated, control of game progress is stopped, the main information display device 59 is turned off, game effects including the cut-in effect (variable effects, effect illumination by the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76, etc.) are forcibly ended, and a notification that the acquisition upper limit device is in operation is started.

Also, we have explained the case where a cut-in effect accompanied by an effective operation period is executed during a reach effect in a variable effect, but even if the increment counter (MY) reaches or exceeds the operation value (95,000) during the execution of other advance notice effects accompanied by an effective operation period (decisive effects, etc.), and the win limit device is activated, the game progress control is stopped, the main information display device 59 is turned off, and other game effects including advance notice effects (variable effects, light emission of effects by the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76, etc.) are forcibly ended, and a notification that the win limit device is in operation is started.

Also, although the case where the increment counter (MY) becomes equal to or greater than the operating value (95,000) when a game ball enters the general winning hole 43 has been described, if a game ball enters another winning area (first starting hole 45, second starting hole 47, large winning hole 50) and the increment counter (MY) becomes equal to or greater than the operating value (95,000), the winning limit device is also activated, game progress control is stopped, the main information display device 59 is turned off, game effects including cut-in effects (variable effects, effect illumination by the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76, etc.) are forcibly terminated, and a notification that the winning limit device is in operation is started.

Thus, according to Figs. 204 to 206, while a continuous preview performance (a look-ahead performance such as a look-ahead action performance) spanning multiple variation performances is being performed, switching the variation path of the performance pattern 70a from the first variation path to the second variation path (for example, switching from presentation mode A which is the first variation path to presentation mode B which is the second variation path) is restricted, but when the acquisition upper limit device is activated, it is possible to execute a notification that the acquisition upper limit device is in operation (specific notification). Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that the acquisition upper limit device has been activated, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Also, according to Figs. 204 to 206, during the execution of a continuous preview performance (a look-ahead performance such as a look-ahead action performance) spanning multiple variable performances, the change in the variable path of the performance pattern 70a is restricted from the first variable path to the second variable path (for example, from the performance mode A which is the first variable path to the performance mode B which is the second variable path), but it is possible to change the notification image related to the operation of the acquisition upper limit device from the first mode display (advance notification image CZ) to the second mode display (operation notification image of the acquisition upper limit device). Therefore, it is possible to provide useful information to the player without the continuous preview performance hindering the change in the display mode of the notification image related to the operation of the acquisition upper limit device (switching from the advance notification image CZ to the operation notification image), thereby making the game more interesting.

Also, according to Figs. 204 to 206, in the variable performance, it is possible to execute the first movement performance of the movable members (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b) (a downward movement with a width smaller than the maximum downward width during a look-ahead movement performance, a pseudo consecutive performance, a development performance, etc.) and the second movement performance of the movable members (a downward movement with a maximum downward width during a successful decision performance, etc.), and while the first movement performance of the movable members is being executed, it is restricted to switch the variable path of the performance pattern 70a from the first variable path to the second variable path (for example, switching from the performance mode A which is the first variable path to the performance mode B which is the second variable path), but it is possible to execute a notification that the acquisition upper limit device is operating. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that the acquisition upper limit device has been activated, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Also, according to Figures 204 to 206, if the acquisition limit device is activated during the execution of a continuous preview performance (look-ahead performance) that spans multiple variable performances, the execution of the continuous preview performance (look-ahead performance) is restricted (continuous preview performances other than look-ahead action performances end immediately, but look-ahead action performances end by executing the return action of the first movable member 77a). This makes it easier for the player to understand that the acquisition limit device has been activated, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Also, according to Figs. 204 to 206, during the execution of the operation effects (dialogue preview effects, pseudo consecutive effects, development effects, cut-in effects, deciding effects, etc.) executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 or during the effective operation period related to the operation effects, it is restricted to switch the variation path of the effect pattern 70a from the first variation path to the second variation path (for example, switching from the first variation path of the effect mode A to the second variation path of the effect mode B), but when the acquisition upper limit device is activated, it is possible to execute a notification (specific notification) that the acquisition upper limit device is operating. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that the acquisition upper limit device has been activated, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Also, according to Figures 204 to 206, when the winning limit device is activated, the game progress control stops and the main information display device 59 goes into a non-display state, after which the game presentation (variable presentation, big win game presentation, etc.) ends and a notification (specific notification) that the winning limit device is in operation is executed. This makes it easier for the player to understand that the game presentation has ended because the game progress control has stopped.

Also, according to Figures 204 to 206, when the acquisition limit device is activated, it is possible to output an acquisition limit device activation signal from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 after the game progress control stops and the main information display device 59 goes into a non-display state. Therefore, it is possible to know that the acquisition limit device has been activated outside the gaming machine 1.

Also, according to Figs. 204 to 206, when the winning limit device is activated, after the game presentation (variable presentation, big win game presentation, etc.) ends and a notification (specific notification) that the winning limit device is in operation starts, it is possible to output a winning limit device in operation signal from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170. Therefore, it is possible to know that the winning limit device has been activated outside the gaming machine 1.

When the acquisition limit device is activated, various game effects (variable effects, continuous preview effects, dialogue preview effects, cut-in effects, etc.) are terminated and various effect images are hidden, and a notification (specific notification) that the acquisition limit device is in operation is executed. However, for example, a semi-transparent image that allows the various effect images to be seen through may be displayed in front of the various effect images, and in this state, a white text area saying "Acquisition limit device is in operation, today's game is over" may be displayed. Specifically, when the acquisition limit device is activated during a variable effect, the stopped display of the effect pattern 70a may be displayed behind the semi-transparent image, and when the acquisition limit device is activated during a jackpot game effect, a stationary jackpot effect image may be displayed behind the semi-transparent image, and so on, so that the progress of the game effect is stopped.

In addition, when the acquisition limit device is activated, the illumination of the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation indicator, sub second fluctuation indicator, sub first hold indicator, sub second hold indicator, sub general map fluctuation indicator, sub general map hold indicator, sub right hit indicator) is terminated (turned to a non-illuminated state) and a notification that the acquisition limit device is in operation is issued, but the illumination of the sub information display device 80 may be continued, or if the LED is flashing, may be turned on or off to issue a notification that the acquisition limit device is in operation.

In this embodiment, the notification mode before the operation of the acquisition limit device (pre-notification image CZ, sound of "about xxx remaining", light emission mode of the light-emitting part of the frame lighting device 10 related to the operation notification of the acquisition limit device) is the same regardless of the type of presentation mode, but the notification mode (e.g., the shape, color, pattern, etc. design of the pre-notification image CZ) of the acquisition limit device pre-operation notification (pre-notification image CZ, sound of "about xxx remaining", light emission mode of the light-emitting part of the frame lighting device 10 related to the operation notification of the acquisition limit device) may be different depending on the type of presentation mode. In this case, the notification mode of the acquisition limit device pre-operation notification may be different between presentation modes A to C corresponding to the normal game state and presentation modes D to F corresponding to the specific game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of the execution state of the game presentation (customer waiting demo presentation, variable presentation, big win game presentation, etc.), the notification mode of the pre-operation notification of the acquisition upper limit device (design and display position of the advance notification image CZ, sound of "about xxxxxx remaining", light emission mode of the light-emitting part related to the operation notification of the acquisition upper limit device of the frame lighting device 10) was the same, but the notification mode (for example, design such as shape, color, pattern, etc. of the advance notification image CZ and display position) of the pre-operation notification of the acquisition upper limit device (design and display position of the advance notification image CZ, sound of "about xxxxxx remaining", light emission mode of the light-emitting part related to the operation notification of the acquisition upper limit device of the frame lighting device 10) may be different depending on the execution state of the game presentation. In this case, the notification mode of the pre-operation notification of the acquisition upper limit device may be different before and during the reach presentation, or the notification mode of the pre-operation notification of the acquisition upper limit device may be different during the variable presentation and the big win game presentation.

(Length of various periods of variable performance for each performance mode)
FIG. 207 is a diagram showing the length of various periods of variable presentation for each presentation mode.
The various periods of the changing performance include a pre-changing operation period before the performance pattern 70a is displayed changing, a high-speed changing period during which the performance pattern 70a is displayed changing so that the pattern type is difficult to see, a low-speed changing period during which the performance pattern 70a is displayed changing while the pattern type can be seen, a temporary stop period during which the performance pattern 70a sways and changes while the pattern type can be seen, and a stop period during which the performance pattern 70a is displayed stopped.

During the pre-change operation period, the performance pattern 70a is in an opaque state where the background image is difficult to see, during the high-speed change period, the performance pattern 70a is in a transparent state where the background image is visible, during the low-speed change period, the performance pattern 70a is in an opaque state where the background image is difficult to see, during the temporary stop period, the performance pattern 70a is in an opaque state where the background image is difficult to see, and during the stop period, the performance pattern 70a is in an opaque state where the background image is difficult to see.

As shown in FIG. 207(a), when the change performance of change performance pattern 1 (normal change) is executed in performance mode A, at timing T0, the three performance patterns 70a begin to float as a pre-change action, at timing T1, the left performance pattern 70a begins to change (scroll) at high speed, at timing T2, the central performance pattern 70a begins to change (scroll) at high speed, and at timing T3, the right performance pattern 70a begins to change (scroll) at high speed.

Then, at time T4, the left side performance pattern 70a starts slow fluctuation a, at time T5, the left side performance pattern 70a starts temporary stop a, at time T6, the right side performance pattern 70a starts slow fluctuation b, at time T7, the right side performance pattern 70a starts temporary stop b, at time T8, the center performance pattern 70a starts slow fluctuation c, at time T9, the center performance pattern 70a starts temporary stop c, at time T10, the three performance patterns 70a start a stopped display, and at time T11, the stopped display of the three performance patterns 70a ends.

In addition, for the three special symbols TZ, high-speed fluctuation (scrolling) begins at timing T0, the static display begins at timing T10, and the static display ends at timing T11.

In this case, the lengths of the slow fluctuation periods of the three performance patterns 70a are slow fluctuation a < slow fluctuation c < slow fluctuation b, and the lengths of the temporary stop periods of the three performance patterns 70a are temporary stop c < temporary stop b < temporary stop a, and the lengths of the stop periods of the three performance patterns 70a are all the same.

As shown in FIG. 207(b), when the variable performance of variable performance pattern 1 (normal variation) is executed in performance mode B, at timing T0, a reduced display of the three performance patterns 70a is started as a pre-variation operation, at timing T1, high-speed variation (scrolling) of the three performance patterns 70a is started, and at timing T2, low-speed variation a of the left-side performance pattern 70a is started.

Then, at the timing of T3, a temporary stop a of the left performance pattern 70a is initiated and a slow fluctuation b of the right performance pattern 70a is initiated, at the timing of T4, a temporary stop b of the central performance pattern 70a is initiated and a slow fluctuation c of the central performance pattern 70a is initiated, at the timing of T5, a temporary stop c of the central performance pattern 70a is initiated, at the timing of T6, the stopped display of the three performance patterns 70a is initiated, and at the timing of T7, the stopped display of the three performance patterns 70a is completed.

In addition, for the three special symbols TZ, high-speed fluctuation (scrolling) begins at timing T0, the static display begins at timing T6, and the static display ends at timing T7.

In this case, the lengths of the slow fluctuation periods of the three performance patterns 70a are slow fluctuation a < slow fluctuation c < slow fluctuation b, and the lengths of the temporary stop periods of the three performance patterns 70a are temporary stop c < temporary stop b < temporary stop a, and the lengths of the stop periods of the three performance patterns 70a are all the same.

As shown in FIG. 207(c), when the change performance of change performance pattern 1 (normal change) is executed in performance mode B, at timing T0, the enlarged display of the three performance patterns 70a is started as a pre-change operation, at timing T1, the right-side performance pattern 70a starts to change (scroll) at high speed, at timing T2, the central performance pattern 70a starts to change (scroll) at high speed, and at timing T3, the left-side performance pattern 70a starts to change (scroll) at high speed.

Then, at the timing of T4, the slow fluctuation a of the left side performance pattern 70a begins, at the timing of T5, the slow fluctuation b of the right side performance pattern 70a begins, at the timing of T6, the temporary stop a of the left side performance pattern 70a begins, at the timing of T7, the slow fluctuation c of the central performance pattern 70a begins, at the timing of T8, the temporary stop b of the right side performance pattern 70a begins, at the timing of T9, the temporary stop c of the central performance pattern 70a begins, at the timing of T10, the stopped display of the three performance patterns 70a begins, and at the timing of T11, the stopped display of the three performance patterns 70a ends.

In addition, for the three special symbols TZ, high-speed fluctuation (scrolling) begins at timing T0, the static display begins at timing T10, and the static display ends at timing T11.

In this case, the lengths of the slow fluctuation periods of the three performance patterns 70a are slow fluctuation b < slow fluctuation c < slow fluctuation a, and the lengths of the temporary stop periods of the three performance patterns 70a are temporary stop c < temporary stop b < temporary stop a, and the lengths of the stop periods of the three performance patterns 70a are all the same.

As shown in FIG. 207(d), when the variable performance of variable performance pattern 2 (shortened variation) is executed in performance modes A to C, at timing T0, high-speed variation of the three performance patterns 70a is started without performing pre-variation actions, at timing T1, low-speed variation d-f of the three performance patterns 70a is started, at timing T2, temporary stop d-f of the three performance patterns 70a is started, at timing T3, the stopped display of the three performance patterns 70a is started, and at timing T4, the stopped display of the three performance patterns 70a ends.

In addition, for the three special symbols TZ, high-speed fluctuation (scrolling) begins at timing T0, the static display begins at timing T3, and the static display ends at timing T4.

In this case, the lengths of the slow fluctuation periods of the three performance patterns 70a are all the same (slow fluctuation d = slow fluctuation e = slow fluctuation f), with slow fluctuation a > slow fluctuation d in fluctuation performance pattern 1 (normal fluctuation), and the lengths of the temporary stop periods of the three performance patterns 70a are all the same (temporary stop d < temporary stop e < temporary stop f), with the lengths of the stop periods of the three performance patterns 70a all being the same.

In addition, rather than making the lengths of the slow fluctuation periods of the three performance patterns 70a and the lengths of the temporary stop periods of the three performance patterns 70a all the same, the lengths of the slow fluctuation periods of the three performance patterns 70a and/or the lengths of the temporary stop periods of the three performance patterns 70a may be made slightly different (approximately the same), or no slow fluctuation periods may be provided for the three performance patterns 70a.

As shown in FIG. 207(e), when the change presentation of change presentation pattern 3 (pseudo failure change) or change presentation pattern 4 (normal reach change) of presentation mode A is executed, at timing T0, the three presentation patterns 70a begin to float as a pre-change action, at timing T1, the left presentation pattern 70a begins to change (scroll) at high speed, at timing T2, the central presentation pattern 70a begins to change (scroll) at high speed, and at timing T3, the right presentation pattern 70a begins to change (scroll) at high speed.

Then, at the time T4, the left side performance pattern 70a starts a slow fluctuation g, at the time T5, the left side performance pattern 70a starts a temporary stop g, at the time T6, the right side performance pattern 70a starts a slow fluctuation h, at the time T7, the right side performance pattern 70a starts a temporary stop h, at the time T8, the central performance pattern 70a starts a slow fluctuation i, at the time T9, the central performance pattern 70a starts a temporary stop i, at the time T10, the three performance patterns 70a start a stopped display, and at the time T11, the stopped display of the three performance patterns 70a ends.

In addition, for the three special symbols TZ, high-speed fluctuation (scrolling) begins at timing T0, the static display begins at timing T10, and the static display ends at timing T11.

In this case, the lengths of the slow fluctuation periods of the three performance patterns 70a are slow fluctuation g < slow fluctuation h < slow fluctuation i, and slow fluctuation c < slow fluctuation i in fluctuation performance pattern 1 (normal fluctuation), and the lengths of the temporary stop periods of the three performance patterns 70a are temporary stop g < temporary stop h < temporary stop i, and the lengths of the stop periods of the three performance patterns 70a are all the same.

When the variable presentation pattern 3 (pseudo consecutive failure) or variable presentation pattern 4 (normal reach variation) of presentation mode B is executed, the timing is the same as in FIG. 207(b) up to T4, but differs in that the slow variation period is slow variation of the left presentation pattern 70a < slow variation of the right presentation pattern 70a < slow variation period of the central presentation pattern 70a.

In addition, when the variable performance of the variable performance pattern 3 (pseudo consecutive failure) or the variable performance pattern 4 (normal reach fluctuation) of the performance mode C is executed, the timing is the same as that of FIG. 207(c) up to the timing of T8, but differs in that the slow fluctuation period is slow fluctuation of the performance pattern 70a on the right side < slow fluctuation of the performance pattern 70a on the left side < slow fluctuation period of the performance pattern 70a in the center.

Thus, according to FIG. 207, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a in the variable performance has a high-speed variable period, a low-speed variable period after the high-speed variable period, and a pattern derivation period (temporary stop period, or temporary stop period + stop period) after the low-speed variable period. In a predetermined variable performance pattern (variable performance pattern 1, variable performance pattern 3, variable performance pattern 4, etc.), it is possible to make the length of the low-speed variable period of the performance pattern 70a in the first display area (left area) which is the first pattern derivation period (temporary stop period) different from the length of the low-speed variable period of the performance pattern 70a in the second display area (right area) which is the second pattern derivation period (temporary stop period). Therefore, by creating a difference between the first display area (left area) and the second display area (right area), the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Also, according to FIG. 207, in a given variable presentation pattern (variable presentation pattern 1, variable presentation pattern 3, variable presentation pattern 4, etc.), it is possible to make the length of the slow-speed variable period of the presentation pattern 70a in the first display area (left area), which is the first pattern derivation period (temporary stop period), different from the length of the slow-speed variable period of the presentation pattern 70a in the third display area (center area), which is the last pattern derivation period (temporary stop period). Therefore, by creating a difference between the first display area (left area) and the third display area (center area), it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the variable presentation and increase the interest in the game.

Also, according to FIG. 207, in a given variable presentation pattern (variable presentation pattern 1, variable presentation pattern 3, variable presentation pattern 4, etc.), it is possible to make the length of the slow-changing period of the presentation pattern 70a in the second display area (right-hand area), which is the second pattern derivation period (temporary stop period), different from the length of the slow-changing period of the presentation pattern 70a in the third display area (center area), which is the last pattern derivation period (temporary stop period). Therefore, by creating a difference between the second display area (right-hand area) and the third display area (center area), it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the variable presentation and increase the interest in the game.

Also, according to FIG. 207, in the variable performance of the first variable performance pattern (variable performance pattern 1, variable performance pattern 3, variable performance pattern 4, etc.), the length of the slow-changing period of the performance pattern 70a in the first display area (left area) can be made different from the length of the slow-changing period of the performance pattern 70a in the second display area (right area), and in the variable performance of the second variable performance pattern (variable performance pattern 2, etc.) whose performance period is shorter than that of the first variable performance pattern, the length of the slow-changing period of the performance pattern 70a in the first display area (left area) can be made the same or approximately the same as the length of the slow-changing period of the performance pattern 70a in the second display area (right area). Therefore, by varying the slow-changing period in the first display area (left area) and the second display area (right area) depending on the type of variable performance pattern, the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, according to FIG. 207, in the variable performance of the first variable performance pattern (variable performance pattern 1, variable performance pattern 3, variable performance pattern 4, etc.), the length of the slow-changing period of the performance pattern 70a in the first display area (left area) can be made different from the length of the slow-changing period of the performance pattern 70a in the third display area (center area), and in the variable performance of the second variable performance pattern (variable performance pattern 2, etc.) whose performance period is shorter than that of the first variable performance pattern, the length of the slow-changing period of the performance pattern 70a in the first display area (left area) can be made the same or approximately the same as the length of the slow-changing period of the performance pattern 70a in the third display area (center area). Therefore, by varying the slow-changing period in the first display area (left area) and the third display area (center area) depending on the type of variable performance pattern, the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, according to FIG. 207, in the variable performance of the first variable performance pattern (variable performance pattern 1, variable performance pattern 3, variable performance pattern 4, etc.), the length of the slow-changing period of the performance pattern 70a in the second display area (right area) can be made different from the length of the slow-changing period of the performance pattern 70a in the third display area (center area), and in the variable performance of the second variable performance pattern (variable performance pattern 2, etc.) which has a shorter performance period than the first variable performance pattern, the length of the slow-changing period of the performance pattern 70a in the second display area (right area) can be made the same or approximately the same as the length of the slow-changing period of the performance pattern 70a in the third display area (center area). Therefore, by varying the slow-changing period in the second display area (left area) and the third display area (center area) depending on the type of variable performance pattern, the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, according to FIG. 207, in the variable presentation of the first variable presentation pattern (variable presentation pattern 1, variable presentation pattern 3, variable presentation pattern 4, etc.) in presentation mode A, the slow-speed variable period of the presentation pattern 70a in the first display area (left area) does not overlap with the slow-speed variable period of the presentation pattern 70a in the second display area (right area), and the slow-speed variable period of the presentation pattern 70a in the second display area (right area) does not overlap with the slow-speed variable period of the presentation pattern 70a in the third display area (center area). Therefore, the player can visually recognize the start of the slow-speed variable period of the presentation pattern 70a in each display area, which can increase the interest of the game.

Also, according to FIG. 207, in the variable presentation of the first variable presentation pattern (variable presentation pattern 1, variable presentation pattern 3, variable presentation pattern 4, etc.) in presentation mode B, the end timing of the slow-changing period of the presentation pattern 70a in the first display area (left area) coincides with the start timing of the slow-changing period of the presentation pattern 70a in the second display area (right area), and the end timing of the slow-changing period of the presentation pattern 70a in the second display area (right area) coincides with the start timing of the slow-changing period of the presentation pattern 70a in the third display area (center area). Therefore, the slow fluctuations of the presentation pattern 70a in each display area can be made to appear connected, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Also, according to FIG. 207, in the variable presentation of the first variable presentation pattern (variable presentation pattern 1, variable presentation pattern 3, variable presentation pattern 4, etc.) in presentation mode C, the slow-speed fluctuation period of the presentation pattern 70a in the first display area (left area) overlaps with the slow-speed fluctuation period of the presentation pattern 70a in the second display area (right area), and the slow-speed fluctuation period of the presentation pattern 70a in the second display area (right area) overlaps with the slow-speed fluctuation period of the presentation pattern 70a in the third display area (center area). Therefore, it is possible to shorten the slow-speed fluctuation period in the variable presentation and lengthen the other presentation periods, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In the variable performance of the first variable performance pattern (variable performance pattern 1, variable performance pattern 3, variable performance pattern 4, etc.) in performance mode A, the slow-changing periods of the three performance patterns 70a do not overlap, but the slow-changing periods of the performance patterns 70a in the first display area (left area) and the second display area (right area), or the slow-changing periods of the performance patterns 70a in the second display area (right area) and the third display area (center area) may overlap.

In addition, in the variable performance of the first variable performance pattern (variable performance pattern 1, variable performance pattern 3, variable performance pattern 4, etc.) in performance mode B, the end timing of the slow-speed fluctuation period of the three performance patterns 70a coincides with the start timing of the slow-speed fluctuation period, but the end timing of the slow-speed fluctuation period of the first display area (left area) and the start timing of the slow-speed fluctuation period of the second display area (right area), or the end timing of the slow-speed fluctuation period of the second display area (right area) and the start timing of the slow-speed fluctuation period of the third display area (center area) may not coincide (each slow-speed fluctuation period may overlap or not overlap).

In addition, in the variable performance of the first variable performance pattern (variable performance pattern 1, variable performance pattern 3, variable performance pattern 4, etc.) in performance mode C, the slow-changing periods of the three performance patterns 70a overlap, but it is also possible to prevent the slow-changing periods of the performance patterns 70a in the first display area (left area) and the second display area (right area), or the slow-changing periods of the performance patterns 70a in the second display area (right area) and the third display area (center area) from overlapping.

In addition, the slow-speed fluctuation behavior of the central performance pattern 70a when variable performance pattern 1 (normal fluctuation) is executed (the moving speed of performance pattern 70a, the ease of viewing of performance pattern 70a, etc.) may be different from the slow-speed fluctuation behavior of the central performance pattern 70a when variable performance pattern 2 (shortened fluctuation) is executed (the moving speed of performance pattern 70a, the ease of viewing of performance pattern 70a, etc.) when variable performance pattern 3 (pseudo-failure fluctuation) is executed, and the slow-speed fluctuation behavior of the central performance pattern 70a when variable performance pattern 4 (normal reach fluctuation) is executed (the moving speed of performance pattern 70a, the ease of viewing of performance pattern 70a, etc.) may be different.

In addition, it may be arranged so that the slow-speed fluctuation period of the central performance pattern 70a is more likely to be executed (the slow-speed fluctuation period is not generated or is generated at a low rate in performance modes D to F) or the slow-speed fluctuation period of the central performance pattern 70a is more likely to be longer (the time until the development performance is executed is longer) when a fluctuation performance in which a SP reach performance is executed is executed in performance modes A to C than when a fluctuation performance in which a SP reach performance is executed is executed in performance modes D to F.

In addition, when an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect is executed in effect modes A to F, the central effect pattern 70a may be scrolled vertically during the slow-changing period of the central effect pattern 70a up until the normal reach effect, and during the slow-changing period after the development effect, the central effect pattern 70a may be scrolled horizontally or diagonally instead of vertically.

In addition, the slow-speed fluctuation period of at least one or more of the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a may be made shorter in presentation modes D to F (specific game states) when the second fluctuation performance with no reach and a miss is executed when the second reserved number (U2) is a specific number (e.g., "4") than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states) when the first fluctuation performance with no reach and a miss is executed when the first reserved number (U1) is a specific number (e.g., "4").

In addition, the slow-speed fluctuation period of at least one or more of the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a may be made shorter in presentation modes D to F (specific game states) when the second fluctuation performance with no reach and a miss is executed when the second reserved number (U2) is a predetermined number (e.g., "1") than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states) when the first fluctuation performance with no reach and a miss is executed when the first reserved number (U1) is a predetermined number (e.g., "1").

In addition, it may be arranged so that the time from the slow-fluctuation period to the stop period of at least one or more of the left, middle, and right presentation patterns 70a is more likely to be shorter when the second variable presentation with no reach and a miss is executed when the second reserved number (U2) is a predetermined number (e.g., "1") in presentation modes D to F (specific game state) than when the first variable presentation with no reach and a miss is executed when the first reserved number (U1) is a predetermined number (e.g., "1") in presentation modes A to C (normal game state). For example, in presentation modes A to C (normal game state), when the first pending number (U1) is a predetermined number (e.g., "1") and the first variable presentation of a no-reach miss is executed, the time from the slow variable period to the stop period may be approximately 0.5 seconds, whereas in presentation modes D to F (specific game state), when the second pending number (U2) is a predetermined number (e.g., "1") and the second variable presentation of a no-reach miss is executed, the time from the slow variable period to the stop period may be approximately 0.2 seconds.

In addition, when a variable presentation of variable presentation pattern 2 (shortened variation) is executed in presentation modes A to C (normal game state), and/or when a variable presentation of variable presentation pattern 35 (ultra-shortened variation) is executed in presentation modes D to F (specific game state), the high-speed variation period may be followed by a temporary stop period without going through a low-speed variation period.

In addition, in this embodiment, a dialogue preview performance or a step-up preview performance is executed as a pre-reach preview performance, but in addition to the dialogue preview performance or the step-up preview performance, a start sound preview performance (which starts before the dialogue preview performance or the step-up preview performance and ends before the dialogue preview performance or the step-up preview performance) in which a variable start sound (such as "Cheap♪") different from the variable BGM is output at the start of the variable performance by a separate lottery can be executed, so that a reach performance is more likely to be executed and a jackpot game is more likely to be executed (higher jackpot expectation) when a variable performance in which a start sound preview performance is executed is executed than when a variable performance in which a start sound preview performance is not executed is executed. In this way, the player's sense of expectation can be increased at the start of the variable performance, making it possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the case of a SPSP reach miss (Figure 171), when a strong notice (red effect) of the look-ahead effect performance is executed (scenario 44 in Figure 110), the start sound notice performance may be made easier to execute compared to a fluctuation performance in which a normal fluctuation is executed (fluctuation performance pattern 1). In this way, the execution of the strong notice (red effect) of the look-ahead effect performance and the start sound notice performance can instantly increase the player's sense of anticipation at the start of the fluctuation.

In addition, when the above-mentioned start sound preview effect is executed as a pre-reach preview effect, the start sound preview effect may be made less likely to be executed (the execution rate is lower) when the first variable effect that results in a miss is executed during a specific game state (high probability game state, time-limited game state) than when the first variable effect that results in a miss is executed during a normal game state. In this way, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect in the normal game state, in which the duration of play is more likely to be longer than in the specific game state, and to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, when the above-mentioned start sound preview effect is executed as a pre-reach preview effect, the start sound preview effect may be made less likely to be executed (the execution rate is lower) when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a miss is executed during a specific game state (high probability game state, time-limited game state) than when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a miss is executed during a specific game state. In this way, the effect of the second variable effect, which is more likely to be executed than the first variable effect in a specific game state, can be enhanced, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute vibration effects (vibration effects related to pre-reading vibration effects, dialogue preview effects, step-up preview effects, pseudo consecutive effects, development effects, cut-in effects, and deciding effects, etc.) that indicate the expectation of a jackpot game being executed by vibrating the effect button 17, but it is also possible to make it easier to execute a jackpot game (higher expectation of a jackpot) when an operation prompting effect (operation prompting effect related to dialogue preview effects, pseudo consecutive effects, development effects, and cut-in effects, etc.) is executed before the start of a specific effect (first temporary stop of effect pattern 70a, pseudo consecutive effects, normal reach effects, development effects, SP reach effects, and SPSP reach effects) and a variable effect in which an operation prompting effect is executed before the start of a specific effect and an operation prompting effect is executed after the start of a specific effect is executed, compared to a case in which an operation prompting effect is executed after the start of a specific effect and an operation prompting effect is executed. In this way, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the operation prompting effect and improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, after the start of a specific effect (first temporary stop of effect pattern 70a, pseudo consecutive effect, normal reach effect, development effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect), it may be possible to make it easier to execute a jackpot game (higher chance of winning) when a variable effect in which a specified operation prompting effect (development effect, cut-in effect, deciding effect, etc.) is executed without a vibration effect on the effect button 17, or when a specified operation prompting effect (development effect, cut-in effect, deciding effect, etc.) is executed with a vibration effect on the effect button 17. In this way, it is possible to increase the player's interest in whether or not a vibration effect will be executed, and to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, it may be arranged so that a jackpot game is more likely to be played (the expectation of a jackpot is higher and the effect button 17 is more likely to emit rainbow light) when a variable effect is executed in which a vibration effect without an operation prompt effect (pre-reading vibration effect, step 5 of a step-up notice effect, etc.) is executed before the start of a specific effect, compared to when a variable effect is executed in which an operation effect (development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, etc.) without a vibration effect is executed from the start of a specific effect (first temporary stop of effect pattern 70a, pseudo consecutive effect, normal reach effect, development effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) until the result notification effect (pattern alignment, C pattern alignment) is executed. This can increase the player's interest in the presence or absence of a vibration effect, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, in this embodiment, no sound effect is output when the operation prompting image (button image, etc.) is displayed in the operation prompting effect, but sound effects may be output when the operation prompting image is displayed. In this case, a first sound effect and a second sound effect may be prepared, and a jackpot game is more likely to be executed (the jackpot expectation is high, the effect button 17 is more likely to vibrate, and the effect button 17 is more likely to emit rainbow light) when a variable effect is executed in which a predetermined operation prompting effect (any of a dialogue preview effect, pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, cut-in effect, and deciding effect) in which the second sound effect is output is executed than when a variable effect is executed in which a predetermined operation prompting effect (any of a dialogue preview effect, pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, cut-in effect, and deciding effect) in which the first sound effect is output is executed. In this way, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, it may be arranged so that a jackpot game is more likely to be played (the expectation of a jackpot is higher, the effect button 17 is more likely to vibrate, and the effect button 17 is more likely to emit rainbow light) when a variable effect is executed in which a predetermined operation prompting effect (any of a dialogue preview effect, pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, cut-in effect, or deciding effect) is executed in which the effect button 17 emits red light and a second sound effect is output, than when a variable effect is executed in which a predetermined operation prompting effect (any of a dialogue preview effect, pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, cut-in effect, or deciding effect) is executed in which the effect button 17 emits white light and a first sound effect is output. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

Also, it may be arranged so that a jackpot game is more likely to be played (the expectation of a jackpot is higher, the effect button 17 is more likely to vibrate, and the effect button 17 is more likely to emit rainbow light) when a variable effect is played in which a predetermined operation prompting effect (any of a dialogue preview effect, pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, cut-in effect, and deciding effect) is played and a vibration effect of the effect button 17 (any of a dialogue preview effect, pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, cut-in effect, and deciding effect) is played, than when a variable effect is played in which a predetermined operation prompting effect (any of a dialogue preview effect, pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, cut-in effect, and deciding effect) is played and a second sound effect is output (any of a dialogue preview effect, pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, cut-in effect, and deciding effect). In this way, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, it may be arranged so that a jackpot game is more likely to be played (the expectation of a jackpot is higher and the effect button 17 is more likely to emit rainbow light) when a variable effect is executed in which a vibration effect of the effect button 17 (any of a dialogue preview effect, pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, cut-in effect, or deciding effect) is executed without a movable part movement effect before the start of a specific effect, compared to when a variable effect is executed in which a vibration effect is executed after the start of a specific effect (the first temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a, pseudo consecutive effect, normal reach effect, development effect, SP reach effect, or SPSP reach effect) and a movement effect of the movable part is executed. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, it may be arranged so that a jackpot game is more likely to be played (the expectation of a jackpot is higher and the effect button 17 is more likely to emit rainbow light) when a variable effect is executed in which the effect button 17 vibrates (pre-reading vibration effect, step 5 of the step-up notice effect, pattern alignment, C pattern alignment) without performing an operation prompting effect, than when a variable effect is executed in which the first effect (dialogue preview effect, pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, cut-in effect) that performs an operation prompting effect without performing a vibration effect of the effect button 17 is performed. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, when a predetermined operation effect (dialogue preview effect, pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, cut-in effect, deciding effect, etc.) is executed, the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is more likely to be executed when a variable effect in which the second mode of operation promotion effect (protruding state, red light emission) is executed is executed than when a variable effect in which the first mode of operation promotion effect (normal state, white light emission) is executed, and it may be possible to make the time from the start of the second mode of operation promotion effect to the start of the vibration effect of the effect button 17 when a predetermined condition is met (effect button 17 is operated) different from the time from the start of the second mode of operation promotion effect to the start of the vibration effect when the predetermined condition is not met (effect button 17 is not operated). In this way, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, when a specific operation effect (dialogue preview effect, pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, cut-in effect, deciding effect, etc.) is executed, there are cases where the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is started immediately after the operation of the effect button 17, and cases where the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is started 6 seconds after the operation of the effect button 17, and in the big win variation effect, it is possible to execute a revival effect that derives and displays the big win result after deriving and displaying the miss result, and if the revival effect is not executed in the deciding effect, the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed immediately after the operation of the effect button 17, and if the revival effect is executed in the deciding effect, the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed 6 seconds after the operation of the effect button 17 (at the same time as the start of the revival effect). In this way, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the time from the start of the operation prompting effect to the start of the vibration effect of the effect button 17 when the effect button 17 is operated during the operation prompting effect in the deciding effect and a revival effect is performed (6 seconds) may be longer than the time from the start of the operation prompting effect to the start of the vibration effect of the effect button 17 (5 seconds) when the effect button 17 is not operated during the effective operation period in the deciding effect. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the manner of the sound effects (type of operation sound effects, sound effects of the effects executed in response to operation or the passage of the valid period) output according to the effect executed may be different between when the effect button 17 is operated during an operation prompting effect in an operation effect (dialogue preview effect, pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, cut-in effect, etc.) before the start of a specific effect (first temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a, pseudo consecutive effect, normal reach effect, development effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) and when the effect button 17 is not operated, and the manner of the sound effects (type of operation sound effects, sound effects of the effects executed in response to operation or the passage of the valid period) output according to the effect executed may be the same between when the effect button 17 is operated during an operation prompting effect in an operation effect (pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, cut-in effect, deciding effect, etc.) after the start of a specific effect and when the effect button 17 is not operated. In this way, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the operation effects (dialogue preview effects, pseudo consecutive effects, development effects, cut-in effects, etc.) before the start of specific effects (first temporary stop of effect pattern 70a, pseudo consecutive effects, normal reach effects, development effects, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects), the manner of the sound effects output according to the effect being executed (type of operation sound effect, sound effects of effects executed according to operation or the passage of the valid period) may be made more likely to differ between when effect button 17 is operated during the operation prompt effect and when effect button 17 is not operated, when a miss variation effect is executed than when a jackpot variation effect is executed. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the manner of the sound effect output according to the effect being executed may be the same when the effect button 17 is operated during the deciding effect in the miss variation effect and when the effect button 17 is not operated, and the manner of the sound effect output according to the effect being executed may be the same when the effect button 17 is operated during the deciding effect in the jackpot variation effect and when the effect button 17 is not operated. In this way, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, it may be possible to make it easier for the sound effects output according to the executed performance to be the same when the performance button 17 is operated during the operation prompt performance and when the performance button 17 is not operated, in a jackpot fluctuation performance in which a specified operation performance (a dialogue preview performance, a pseudo consecutive performance, an development performance, a cut-in performance, etc.) is performed, compared to a loss fluctuation performance in which a specified operation performance (a dialogue preview performance, a pseudo consecutive performance, an development performance, a cut-in performance, etc.) is performed. In this way, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, sound effects may be allowed to be output when the operation prompting effect starts (the operation prompting image is displayed), but the output of sound effects may be restricted when the operation prompting effect ends (the operation prompting image is erased). In this case, if the effect button 17 is operated during the operation prompting effect, a sound effect may be output when the operation prompting effect ends, and if the effect button 17 is not operated, no sound effect may be output when the operation prompting effect ends. In this way, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a development effect is executed (a development effect image is displayed), a development sound effect common to each presentation mode (presentation modes A to F) is output, but different development sound effects may be output depending on the presentation mode. In this case, different development sound effects may be output for all presentation modes A to F, or different development sound effects may be output for presentation modes A to C in the normal game state and presentation modes D to F in the specific game state, different development sound effects may be output only for presentation modes A to C in the normal game state, or different development sound effects may be output only for presentation modes D to F in the specific game state. In this way, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when an eye-catching effect is executed (an eye-catching image is displayed) in an SP reach-changing effect or an SPSP reach-changing effect, an eye-catching sound effect common to each effect mode (effect modes A to F) is output, but different eye-catching sound effects may be output depending on the effect mode. In this case, different eye-catching sound effects may be output for all effect modes A to F, or the eye-catching sound effects may be different for effect modes A to C in the normal game state and for effect modes D to F in the specific game state, or different eye-catching sound effects may be output only for effect modes A to C in the normal game state, or different eye-catching sound effects may be output only for effect modes D to F in the specific game state. In this way, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the SP reach fluctuation presentation and the SPSP reach fluctuation presentation, a common eye-catching image is displayed for each presentation mode (presentation modes A to F), but different eye-catching images may be displayed depending on the presentation mode. In this case, different eye-catching images may be displayed for all presentation modes A to F, or different eye-catching images may be displayed for presentation modes A to C in the normal game state and presentation modes D to F in the specific game state, or different eye-catching images may be displayed only for presentation modes A to C in the normal game state, or different eye-catching images may be displayed only for presentation modes D to F in the specific game state. In this way, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the temporary stopping mode (shaking pattern, swaying speed, etc.) of the left and right performance patterns 70a during a normal reach performance is the same as the temporary stopping mode of the left and right performance patterns 70a during an SP reach performance or an SPSP reach performance, but the temporary stopping mode (shaking pattern, swaying speed, etc.) of the left and right performance patterns 70a during a normal reach performance may be different from the temporary stopping mode (shaking pattern, swaying speed, etc.) of the left and right performance patterns 70a during an SP reach performance or an SPSP reach performance. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the execution time of the pre-stop action when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped is the same regardless of the reserved number or the type of variable performance pattern. However, the execution time of the pre-stop action when at least one or more of the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a are temporarily stopped may be made different (shorter for shortened variation) between the case where the first variable performance of no reach is executed when the first reserved number (U1) is a predetermined number (e.g., "1") in the normal game state and a miss is executed (e.g., in the case of normal variation) and the case where the first variable performance of a miss is executed when the first reserved number (U1) is a specific number (e.g., "4") greater than the predetermined number in the normal game state (e.g., in the case of shortened variation). In this way, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the temporary stop sound when the performance pattern 70a temporarily stops is the same regardless of the reserved number or the type of variable performance pattern. However, the temporary stop sound when at least one or more of the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stops may be made different between the case where the first variable performance of no reach and a miss is executed when the first reserved number (U1) is a predetermined number (e.g., "1") in the normal game state (e.g., in the case of normal variation) and the case where the first variable performance of a reach miss is executed when the first reserved number (U1) is a specific number (e.g., "4") greater than the predetermined number in the normal game state (e.g., in the case of shortened variation). In this way, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the left and right performance symbols 70a temporarily stop, the roulette performance using the central performance symbol 70a is not executed, but after the left and right performance symbols 70a temporarily stop and the central performance symbol 70a enters a slow fluctuation period, a roulette performance (fast fluctuation period → slow fluctuation period → temporary stop period) using the central performance symbol 70a may be executed in conjunction with a special performance. In this case, a special symbol (a miss symbol resulting in a miss, a pseudo consecutive symbol resulting in a pseudo consecutive performance being executed, an SP development suggestion symbol suggesting development into an SP reach performance, an SPSP development suggestion symbol suggesting development into an SPSP reach performance, a winning symbol suggesting a big win, etc.) different from the normal performance symbol (numbers 1 to 9) as the central performance symbol 70a may be displayed in a left-right rotating and varying manner like a roulette, and the special symbol according to the subsequent development may be temporarily stopped.

In addition, in this embodiment, an eye-catching effect is executed in the second variable effect executed by referring to the variable effect pattern determination table for the presentation modes D to F (specific game state), but the eye-catching effect may not be executed in the second variable effect executed by referring to the variable effect pattern determination table for the presentation modes D to F (specific game state). In this case, the effect after the eye-catching effect in the presentation configuration column of the variable effect pattern determination table for the presentation modes D to F (specific game state) may not be executed.

Next, using Figures 208 to 213, we will explain other examples of rainbow luminescence mentioned in Figures 184 to 189.

First, FIG. 208 is a diagram showing an execution device for rainbow light emission. As mentioned in the explanations of FIG. 184 to FIG. 189, the pachinko game machine 1 uses different devices in each state (customer waiting demo performance, variable performance, big win game). For example, in the customer waiting demo performance, rainbow light emission is performed using the frame performance lamp 10c and the board LED 5b, and the image display device (first image display device 70 to fourth image display device 73, hereinafter simply "image display device"), the LED of the movable performance device 77, and the LED of the performance button 17 are not used (restricted). On the other hand, in the variable performance and big win games, rainbow light emission is possible using the frame performance lamp 10c, the board LED 5b, the image display device, the LED of the movable performance device 77, and the LED of the performance button 17. In addition, with regard to the performance button 17, in addition to rainbow light emission by the LED of the performance button, vibration performance of the performance button 17 is possible (of course, vibration performance during non-rainbow light emission is also possible).

In addition, in the variable performance and big win games, the frame performance lamp 10c, the board LED 5b, the image display device, the LED of the movable performance device 77, and the LED of the performance button 17 are used, and there may be periods when each device is executed overlapping with each other and periods when it is executed independently. In addition, in the variable performance, the number of devices used may be more or less between the final performance and the final stop than between the start of the variable performance and the final performance. Also, the number of devices used may be more or less between the reach performance and the final stop than between the start of the variable performance and the reach performance. However, since the period between the final performance and the final stop and the period between the reach performance and the final stop are closer to the start of the big win game, it is preferable to use more devices during that period in order to lift the player's spirits.

The devices used in each state are merely examples, and the contents of FIG. 208 may be modified as appropriate. For example, in a customer waiting demo performance, the LED of the movable performance device 77 may be made to emit rainbow light, or the image display device may be made to display a rainbow, or during a jackpot game, the LED of the movable performance device 77 may not emit rainbow light. Furthermore, the execution device is merely an example, and further execution devices may be provided. For example, an LED provided on the launch handle 15 may be included. Furthermore, if a light guide plate (a performance means that allows characters, etc. to be viewed by shining LED light from the left and right) is provided in front of the first image display device 70, a light guide plate may be included.

Furthermore, the variable performance includes (A) the period from the final performance to the final stop, and (B) the period from the start of the variable performance to the final performance. The execution devices may be different between (A) and (B). For example, (A) may have more or fewer execution devices than (B).

In addition, in the explanation of FIG. 184, when the model name or model logo of the gaming machine is displayed in the customer waiting demo performance, it was stated that the display of the rainbow effect image is restricted in the first image display device 70, but the rainbow effect image may be displayed during the display period of either the gaming machine model name or the model logo. Also, in one of the predetermined number of times (e.g., five times) that the customer waiting demo performance is executed, the rainbow effect image may be displayed together with the display period of the gaming machine model name and model logo. In any case, the period during which rainbow light is emitted using the frame performance lamps 10c and the board LEDs 5b in the customer waiting demo performance is longer than the period during which rainbow light is emitted using the first image display device 70.

In addition, it is preferable that the number of types of rainbow displays (including the display of rainbow effect images) that can be executed on the first image display device 70 be greater during a variable performance or jackpot play than during a customer waiting demo performance. For example, during a customer waiting demo performance, a "0" is displayed, or a "1" is displayed during the display period of the gaming machine model name and model logo, but during a variable performance or jackpot play, more rainbow displays should be displayed. This can increase the excitement of the performance during the variable performance or jackpot play when the player is actually playing, and can prevent excessive customer waiting during the customer waiting demo performance.

In addition, during the variable performance, the devices used may be different depending on the variable performance pattern being executed. For example, variable performance pattern 13 and variable performance pattern 14 have different performance configurations, and since an SP reach is executed in variable performance pattern 14 (see FIG. 112), variable performance pattern 14 may use more light-emitting devices than variable performance pattern 13.

The number of light-emitting devices used may also be different depending on the type of special symbol that has been determined. For example, more light-emitting devices may be used when special symbol 02 (high probability jackpot) has been determined than when special symbol 01 (normal jackpot) has been determined.

Next, a comparison of rainbow emission will be described with reference to FIGS.
Fig. 209(a) is a timing chart showing the customer waiting demo performance, which is an excerpt from Fig. 184. As described above, when a predetermined time (e.g., 80 seconds) has passed from the timing of T4, rainbow light emission starts from the timing of T7. In other words, the condition for starting rainbow light emission in the customer waiting demo performance is that a predetermined time has passed since the start of customer waiting standby performance A at the timing of T4.

In addition, in Figures 209 to 213, unlike Figure 184 etc., in order to provide a more specific explanation, the frame lighting device 10 is described as a frame performance lamp 10c and a performance button LED, and the board lighting device 76 is described as a board surface LED 5b and a movable performance device LED.

Figure 209(b) is a timing chart showing the customer waiting demo performance, and is a diagram excerpted from Figure 184. Unlike Figure 209(a), it is assumed that the player operates the performance button 17 at timing T6', which is after timing T6 and before timing T7. In this case, the first image display device 70 hides the ongoing demo performance (character movie) and displays the above-mentioned menu screen. Also, for the frame performance lamp 10c and the board surface LED 5b, demo light emission 1 (blue-white) ends and menu screen light emission (white) begins.

In other words, when the effect button 17 is operated at timing T6', illumination (white) is started on the menu screen, but rainbow illumination is not started. Also, because the menu screen is displayed by operating the effect button 17 at timing T6' and illumination (white) is executed on the menu screen, illumination during demonstration 2 (rainbow), which would have originally been scheduled to start at timing T7 if there had been no operation, does not start either. When the menu screen is closed, customer waiting standby effect A starts, so even if the menu screen is closed before timing T7, illumination during demonstration 2 (rainbow) is not started at timing T7.

In other words, in the customer waiting demo performance, limiting the start of rainbow light emission by the player's operation of the performance button 17 has two meanings: rainbow light emission will not start by simply operating the performance button 17, and rainbow light emission that was scheduled to start will not start by launching the menu screen.

As explained above, when the effect button 17 is operated at the timing of T6', a menu screen is displayed, and demo light 2 (rainbow), which would have started at the timing of T7 if no operation had been performed, does not start. However, when the joystick 19 (an operating means different from the effect button 17) is operated at the timing of T6', the demo effect (character movie) is displayed, demo light 1 (blue and white) continues, and when the timing of T7 is reached, the model name and model logo of the gaming machine are displayed, and demo light 2 (rainbow light) is executed. For example, even if the joystick 19 is operated to adjust the volume, the demo effect (character movie) is displayed, demo light 1 (blue and white) continues, and when the timing of T7 is reached, the model name and model logo of the gaming machine are displayed, and demo light 2 (rainbow light) is executed.

In addition, if the acquisition limit device is activated at the timing of T6', an acquisition limit device activation notification (see FIG. 129, etc.) is executed, so that demonstration light emission 1 (blue-white) ends and demonstration light emission 2 (rainbow) that was scheduled to start at the timing of T7 does not start. In other words, the activation of the acquisition limit device is also one of the conditions that prevents the rainbow light emission that was scheduled to start from starting.

On the other hand, if an advance notification (see FIG. 154, etc.) is executed in the first image display device 70 at the timing of T6', it is possible to not end the light emission during demo 1 (blue-white) and to start the light emission during demo 2 (rainbow) when the timing of T7 is reached. In other words, the advance notification of the win limit device operation does not affect the start of the rainbow light emission. In this way, in the operation of the win limit device, the win condition device operation notification is given top priority, and by not starting the rainbow light emission, it is possible to make it clear that it is difficult to continue playing. On the other hand, the advance notification of the win limit device operation allows the start of the rainbow light emission, so that the necessary information (advance notification) can be notified to the player without drastically reducing the decorativeness of the gaming machine 1.

Figure 209 (c) is a timing chart showing the variable effects, and is a diagram excerpted from Figure 185. First, at timing T2, a prompting effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 and the valid period of the effect button 17 begin. Specifically, an operation prompting image that resembles the effect button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, the audible output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped (muted), and a prompt sound saying "press" is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, at the timing of T3, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed (here, it is assumed that the effect button 17 is operated), a success sound (e.g., a cue) according to the judgment result is output, and the effect pattern 70a (e.g., "555") that displays only numbers is temporarily stopped. In addition, the frame effect lamp 10c and the board surface LED 5b end the SPSP reach light emission and start to emit rainbow light. In addition, the button drive device 17b is driven to start vibrating the effect button 17.

In other words, in the variable performance, the rainbow light emission of the frame performance lamps 10c and the board LEDs 5b can be started by the player operating the performance button 17, and in the deciding performance executed at the timing of T3, the operation of the performance button 17 by the player can be said to be the start condition for the rainbow light emission in the variable performance.

The execution period of the rainbow light emission changes depending on whether the effect button 17 is operated at a first timing after the start of the valid period (for example, timing T2 in FIG. 185), whether the effect button 17 is operated at a second timing after the first timing, or whether the effect button 17 is not operated. For example, the execution period of the rainbow light emission is the longest when the effect button 17 is operated at the first timing, and the execution period of the rainbow light emission is the shortest when the effect button 17 is not operated. This allows the player who presses the effect button 17 to feel satisfied with the long rainbow light emission.

Next, at the timing of T4, when the output period of the success sound according to the judgment result has elapsed, the output of the success sound is stopped. Then, at the timing of T4, the performance pattern 70a (e.g., "555") in a display mode of only numbers is temporarily stopped, and a "clack" sound, which is a temporary stop sound corresponding to a new jackpot, is output until the timing of T5.

Even if the effect button 17 is operated at the timing T5a when the frame effect lamp 10c and the board LED 5b are emitting rainbow light, the menu screen etc. will not be displayed and the rainbow light will not end. In other words, the player can start the rainbow light emission by operating the effect button 17 at the timing T3, but is restricted from ending it by operating the effect button 17.

In addition, even if a start win occurs based on the operation of the launch handle 15 at the timing T5b when the frame effect lamp 10c and the board LED 5b are emitting rainbow light, the rainbow light will not end. In other words, it is possible for the player to start the rainbow light by operating the effect button 17 at the timing T3, but there is a restriction on ending it with a start win based on the player's operation of the launch handle 15.

On the other hand, if the player operates the joystick 19 at the timing T5' when the frame effect lamps 10c and the board LEDs 5b are emitting rainbow light, it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity. In other words, the rainbow light will not end even if the effect button 17 is operated at the timing T5', but the brightness of the rainbow light can be adjusted by adjusting the light intensity, so that, for example, even if some players do not like rainbow light, they can be given a certain level of satisfaction (suppressing discomfort). Also, if some players like rainbow light, the brightness can be increased to give them an even greater sense of satisfaction.

In the example of FIG. 209(c), it was mentioned that rainbow light emission can be started by operating the effect button 17 in the scene of the deciding effect, but the scene in which rainbow light emission can be started by operating the effect button 17 is not limited to this. For example, in an icon change effect (see FIG. 105, etc.), when an image imitating the effect button 17 is displayed instead of a reserved icon and a color icon (rainbow icon) is displayed when the effect button 17 is operated, it can be said that the rainbow display can be started by operating the effect button 17 by the player. Also, when a specific operation (repeated tap, long press) of the effect button 17 is performed as one of the effects of SP reach to change the color of the LED of the movable effect device 77 and to suggest the expectation of a jackpot (blue < green < red < rainbow), it can be said that rainbow light emission can be started by operating the effect button 17 by the player. Also, when progressing from a normal reach to a SP reach, if the frame effect lamp 10c and the board LED 5b are operated to change color to indicate the likelihood of a jackpot (blue < green < red < rainbow) by operating the effect button 17, it can be said that the player can start the rainbow light emission by operating the effect button 17. In this way, by making it possible for the player to start the rainbow light emission in multiple situations, the player can feel as if they have won a jackpot through their own operation, which can lead to increased interest in the game.

Note that in cases where the earning limit device is activated or where advance notification of the earning limit device activation is given at T5a or T5b in Figure 209(c), the same applies as described in Figure 209(b).

In addition, at T3 in FIG. 209(c), rainbow light emission begins when the effect button 17 is operated or when the effective period for operating the effect button 17 has elapsed, but it is also possible to have rainbow light emission begin when the effect button 17 is operated and not have rainbow light emission begin when the effective period for operation has elapsed. In other words, rainbow light emission may be performed as compensation for operating the effect button 17. This can increase the significance of operating the effect button 17 and encourage players to actively participate in the game.

Figure 210 (a) is a timing chart showing the customer waiting demo performance, and is a diagram excerpted from Figure 184. As described above, from timing T7 to timing T8, the model name and model logo of the gaming machine are displayed on the first image display device 70, and the frame performance lamp 10c and the board LED 5b perform demo light emission 2 (rainbow light emission). Then, from timing T8 to timing T9, a specified attention promotion notification is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the frame performance lamp 10c and the board LED 5b perform demo light emission 3 (white light emission).

Figure 210(b) is a timing chart showing the customer waiting demo effect, and is an excerpt from Figure 184. Unlike Figure 210(a), it is assumed that the player operates the effect button 17 at timing T7' which is after timing T7 and before timing T8. In this case, the first image display device 70 displays the above-mentioned menu screen, with the gaming machine model name and model logo hidden. Also, for the frame effect lamp 10c and the board LED 5b, demo light emission 2 (rainbow light emission) ends, and menu screen light emission (white) begins.

In other words, when the effect button 17 is operated at timing T7', illumination (white) begins on the menu screen and the rainbow illumination ends. In this case, the rainbow illumination ends without being executed until timing T8, when it was originally scheduled to be executed.

When the menu screen ends at the timing of T8', customer waiting standby performance A is executed, and an effect corresponding to customer waiting standby performance A is executed. Note that even if the menu screen ends after the timing of T7' but before the timing of T8, customer waiting standby performance A is executed after the menu screen ends, so rainbow light emission is not executed until the timing of T8, and demo light emission 3 (white) is not executed from the timing of T8 as shown in FIG. 210(a).

Note that if the earning limit device is activated at T7' in Figure 210(b) or if advance notification of the earning limit device activation is given, the same applies as described in Figure 209(b).

Figure 210(c) is a timing chart showing the customer waiting demo performance, and is a diagram excerpted from Figure 184. Unlike Figure 210(a), it is assumed that the player operates the launch handle 15 (the game ball is shot into the game area 5a) at timing T7a after the timing T7 and before the timing T8. Depending on the operation, the customer waiting demo performance does not end, and the rainbow light emission continues. Then, at timing T7b after the launch handle 15 is operated, a start winning (for example, a game ball enters the first starting hole 45) occurs. In this case, the first image display device 70 does not display the model name or model logo of the gaming machine, and displays the changing display of the performance pattern 70a and the scrolling image of the normal background. In addition, the frame performance lamp 10c and the board LED 5b end the demo light emission 2 (rainbow light emission) and start the changing light emission (blue-white).

In other words, when the launch handle 15 is operated at timing T7a and the start win occurs at timing T7b, the light during fluctuation (blue-white) starts and the rainbow light ends. In this case, the rainbow light ends without being emitted until timing T8, which was originally scheduled to be emitted.

Note that in cases where the earning limit device is activated or where advance notification of the earning limit device activation is given at T7a or T7b in Figure 210(c), the same applies as described in Figure 209(b).

To summarise Figures 209 and 210, the rainbow light emission in the customer waiting demo performance is restricted from being started by the player operating the performance button 17, but can be ended by the occurrence of a start winning result based on the player operating the performance button 17 or the launch handle 15. On the other hand, the rainbow light emission in the variable performance can be started by the player operating the performance button 17, but can be ended by the occurrence of a start winning result based on the player operating the performance button 17 or the launch handle 15.

Note that although the description of the jackpot game is omitted, it is basically the same as the variable presentation, so the variable presentation can be read as the jackpot game. For example, when a promotion presentation is executed during a jackpot, it is assumed that the presentation button 17 is operated to notify whether or not the promotion will occur, and if the promotion will occur, it is assumed that after the presentation button 17 is operated, the frame presentation lamp 10c and the board surface LED 5b will be made to emit rainbow light. In other words, even during a jackpot game, the player can start the rainbow light emission by operating the presentation button 17, but since the menu screen is not displayed by operating the presentation button 17, it is restricted from ending the presentation by operating the presentation button 17 by the player. Also, even during a jackpot game, a start winning based on the operation of the launch handle 15 can occur, but when this event occurs, it is restricted from ending the rainbow light emission.

In the above example, the rainbow light emission is not initiated by the player's operation of the effect button 17 during the customer waiting demo effect, but it may be initiated. For example, when the RWM clear process is being executed, the rainbow light emission may be initiated with a predetermined probability by the player's operation of the effect button 17 during the customer waiting demo effect, and if the RWM clear process is not being executed, the effect may not be executed, thereby indicating whether or not the RWM clear process is being executed.

In addition, when a so-called latent probability change is adopted, the player may operate the effect button 17 during the customer waiting demo effect to cause rainbow light to be emitted with a predetermined probability, thereby indicating that the latent probability change state is in effect.

In addition, during the customer waiting demo performance when the player is in a special probability game state, the player may operate the performance button 17 to cause the machine to emit rainbow light, to more spectacularly decorate the machine so that it is in a special probability game state.

In addition, in the above example, the rainbow light emission is not terminated by the player operating the effect button 17 during the variable effect, but it may be terminated. For example, the rainbow light emission may be terminated by the player operating the effect button 17, and then an effect suggesting the expected degree of promotion may be executed using the LED of the effect button 17, the frame effect lamp 10c, the board LED 5b, etc.

According to Figures 208 to 210, the following features are provided.
(Y) The rainbow light emitted in the customer waiting performance is restricted to being started based on the operation of the operating means (rainbow light will not be emitted even if performance button 17 is pressed while customer waiting demo performance A is being executed), but rainbow light emitted in the variable performance can be started based on the operation of the operating means (rainbow light is emitted when performance button 17 is pressed in the successful decision performance of the variable performance, a rainbow icon is displayed when performance button 17 is pressed in the hold button performance, rainbow light is emitted when performance button 17 is pressed during the development to an SP reach, rainbow light is emitted by pressing the back button for a long time during an SP reach).

(T) The rainbow light emitted during the customer waiting performance can be ended when the starting condition based on the operation of the second operating means is met (the rainbow light emitted ends when the starting winning occurs based on the operation of the launch handle 15), and the rainbow light emitted during the variable performance is restricted from being ended based on the operation of the first operating means (the rainbow light emitted during the variable performance does not end when the performance button 17 is pressed).

(R) The rainbow light emission in the customer waiting performance is restricted from being started based on the operation of the first operating means (rainbow light emission does not occur even if the performance button 17 is pressed during the customer waiting demo performance A), but can be ended by the establishment of a starting condition based on the operation of the second operating means (rainbow light emission ends when a starting winning occurs based on the operation of the launch handle 15), and the rainbow light emission in the variable performance can be started based on the operation of the first operating means (rainbow light emission occurs when the performance button 17 is pressed in the successful decision performance of the variable performance, a rainbow icon is displayed when the performance button 17 is pressed in the hold button performance, rainbow light emission occurs when the performance button 17 is pressed when progressing to SP reach, rainbow light emission occurs when the back button is pressed and held during SP reach), but is restricted from being ended based on the operation of the first operating means (rainbow light emission in the variable performance does not end when the performance button 17 is pressed).

(S) The rainbow light emission has a first rainbow light emission (rainbow light emission during a variable performance) that can be started based on the operation of the operating means, and a second rainbow light emission (rainbow light emission during customer waiting demo performance A) that has different starting conditions from the first rainbow light emission, and the first rainbow light emission has a greater number of light emission means capable of performing rainbow light emission than the second rainbow light emission (rainbow light emission during customer waiting demo performance A does not use the image display devices 70-73, the LEDs of the movable performance device 77, or the LEDs of the performance button 17, but rainbow light emission during a variable performance uses the image display devices 70-73, the LEDs of the movable performance device 77, the LEDs of the performance button 17, and the LEDs of the launch handle 15).

(tsu) The rainbow light emission has a first rainbow light emission (rainbow light emission during a variable performance) in which a specific performance (vibration performance of the performance button 17) is executed using the operating means, and a second rainbow light emission (rainbow light emission during customer waiting demo performance A) in which a specific performance (vibration performance of the performance button 17) is not executed using the operating means, and the first rainbow light emission has a greater number of light emission means capable of executing the rainbow light emission than the second rainbow light emission (rainbow light emission during customer waiting demo performance A does not use the image display devices 70-73, the LEDs of the movable performance device 77, or the LEDs of the performance button 17, but rainbow light emission during a variable performance uses the image display devices 70-73, the LEDs of the movable performance device 77, the LEDs of the performance button 17, and the LEDs of the launch handle 15).

These features provide the following advantages.
Since there are more devices that emit rainbow light during a variable performance or a big win game than during a customer waiting demo performance, the player who has won the big win can be congratulated by many devices, giving the player a greater sense of satisfaction. On the other hand, by not emitting rainbow light on many devices during a customer waiting demo performance, a moderate customer waiting demo performance is possible, and it is possible to prevent the player from being encouraged to play more than necessary.

In addition, because the devices that emit rainbow light are different for the customer waiting demo performance, the variable performance, and the jackpot play, it is easier to tell whether or not the customer waiting demo performance is in progress compared to when they are exactly the same, and it is possible to prevent players from being put off playing due to the mistaken idea that the variable performance or jackpot play is in progress.

In addition, in the customer waiting demo performance, rainbow light emission will not start even if the performance button 17 is operated, so it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly thinking that they are in an advantageous position. In addition, when the performance button 17 is operated in the customer waiting demo performance, a menu screen is displayed, and while the menu screen is displayed, rainbow light emission will not be performed even if it is time to start rainbow light emission, so it is possible to prevent confusion for the player caused by rainbow light emission suddenly starting while the menu screen is displayed.

In addition, in the variable effects, when the effect button 17 is operated during a deciding effect or the like, it is possible to start rainbow light emission, so the player can feel as if they have won a jackpot through their own operation, giving them an even greater sense of satisfaction. Even if the effect button 17 is operated during rainbow light emission, the rainbow light emission will not end with that operation, so it is possible to prevent a player who is excited about winning a jackpot from being upset by accidentally operating the effect button 17 and ending the rainbow light emission. Even if a start win occurs during rainbow light emission, the rainbow light emission will not end with that start win, so it is possible to prevent a player who is excited about winning a jackpot from being upset.

In addition, when the effect button 17 is operated during the rainbow light emission in the customer waiting demo performance, the rainbow light emission is terminated and the menu screen light emission corresponding to the menu screen is started (the rainbow light emission is terminated by operating the effect button 17). This makes it easier to recognize that the menu screen has been opened by operating the effect button 17. In addition, when a start winning occurs during the rainbow light emission in the customer waiting demo performance, the rainbow light emission is terminated and the variable light emission corresponding to the variable performance is started. This prevents the execution of the variable performance and the rainbow light emission during the customer waiting demo performance from overlapping, and prevents the player from mistaking the started variable performance for a big win. In addition, the rainbow light emission during the customer waiting demo performance is not terminated by operating the launch handle 15 alone, so the player can be entertained with the rainbow light emission until the start winning occurs, eliminating the boredom felt until the start winning occurs.

Next, using Figure 211, we will explain the details of the rainbow light emission during the variable performance.
Fig. 211 shows another example of the presentation mode from timing T3 to timing T6 in Fig. 185. T3, T5, and T6 in Fig. 211 correspond to Fig. 185.

First, at the timing of T3, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, a success sound (e.g., a cue) corresponding to the judgment result is output, and the effect pattern 70a (e.g., "555") that displays only numbers is temporarily stopped. In addition, the frame effect lamp 10c, the board LED 5b, and the LED of the movable effect device 77 end SPSP reach illumination and start rainbow illumination. In addition, the button drive device 17b is driven to start vibrating the effect button 17.

More specifically, on the first image display device 70, a rainbow effect is displayed around the symbol combination "555" (for example, from one end to the other end of the first image display device 70), the frame effect lamp 10c, the board LED 5b, and the LED of the movable effect device 77 emit rainbow light, and the effect button 17 vibrates while its LED emits rainbow light. This state is then maintained for a predetermined period of time.

Next, at the timing of T3', the rainbow light emission and vibration of the effect button 17 ends. In other words, at the timing of T3, the first image display device 70, the frame effect lamp 10c, the board LED 5b, the LED of the movable effect device 77, and the effect button 17 each started their effects, but the effect of the effect button 17 (rainbow light emission and vibration) ends first. Note that the LED of the effect button emits white light when the rainbow light emission ends.

Next, at timing T5, the rainbow effect display on the first image display device 70 ends. In other words, the effect of the effect button 17 (rainbow light emission and vibration) ends first, and then the rainbow effect display on the first image display device 70 ends.

Then, at the timing of T6, the rainbow light emission of the frame effect lamps 10c and the board surface LEDs 5b ends, as in FIG. 185. The LEDs of the movable effect device 77 also stop emitting rainbow light at the same timing. Then, at the timing of T6, the symbol combination "555" is displayed.

In this way, when announcing a jackpot, the first image display device 70, the frame effect lamp 10c, the board LED 5b, the LED of the movable effect device 77, and the effect button 17 each execute the jackpot notification effect from timing T6, but the end timing of the effect differs depending on the device.

The order in which the effects are ended as shown in FIG. 211 is merely an example and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the effect by the effect button 17 may end last, or the effect by the effect button 17 and the effect by the first image display device 70 may end at the same time.

The end timing may be different for the board LED 5b and the LED of the movable performance device 77. The end timing may also be different for the board LED 5b depending on the area (for example, the area on the left side of the board and the area on the right side of the board).

The frame effect lamp 10c may also have different end timings depending on the area (e.g., the area on the left side of the frame and the area on the right side of the frame). Also, the effect button 17 is described as performing a vibration effect along with the rainbow light emission, but is not limited to a vibration effect and other effects (e.g., a protruding effect or a moving effect of the effect button 17) may also be applied.

The presentation mode shown in FIG. 185 and the presentation mode shown in FIG. 211 may be linked for each variable presentation pattern. For example, in the case of variable presentation pattern 13, the presentation mode shown in FIG. 185 may be executed, and in the case of variable presentation pattern 14, the presentation mode shown in FIG. 211 may be executed.

Also, at the timing of T3, the case where the performance pattern 70a (for example, "555") in a display mode of only numbers is temporarily stopped has been described, but for example, it is also assumed that the performance pattern 70a (left and right) is displayed in a small size during the SPSP reach, and at the timing of T3, the performance pattern 70a (middle) which is larger than the performance pattern 70a (left and right) is temporarily stopped. In such a case, when the left, center and right performance patterns 70a are temporarily stopped with different display sizes, the rainbow display by the first image display device 70 is restricted, and when the left, center and right performance patterns 70a are temporarily stopped with the same display size after that, the rainbow display by the first image display device 70 is enabled. As a result, the left, center and right performance patterns 70a are displayed in a rainbow with the same display size, which improves the appearance and increases the performance interest.

Note that if the win limit device is activated between T3 and T3' in Figure 211, the rainbow illumination of the first image display device 70, frame effect lamp 10c, board LED 5b, movable effect device 77LED, and effect button 17LED will end at the same or approximately the same timing. On the other hand, if an advance notification of the win limit device's activation is executed between T3 and T3', the rainbow illumination of each device will not end as a result of this execution. The same applies to the following periods between T3' and T5, and between T5 and T6.

Next, using Figure 212, we will explain the details of the rainbow light emission during a jackpot game.
FIG. 212 shows the start of a big win game, and is an excerpt from FIG.

First, the jackpot opening starts at timing T8. During the jackpot opening, the first image display device 70 displays, for example, "O△Bonus" indicating the type of jackpot game, and also displays a right-hit small image 70rs encouraging the player to hit to the right. In addition, the frame effect lamp 10c and the board LED 5b start emitting opening light (white).

When the jackpot opening ends, the first round of the jackpot game starts at the timing of T9, and with the start of the first round, the first image display device 70 displays a large right-hit image 70rb encouraging the player to make a right hit. The first image display device 70 also continues to display the small right-hit image 70rs, and displays another image, "1R," indicating that this is the first round. The large right-hit image 70rb is displayed for, for example, three seconds, and then disappears at the timing of T9'.

In addition, when the first round begins, the frame effect lamps 10c and board LEDs 5b stop their opening light emission (white) and start emitting light during the round (blue-white). Note that from timing T9 to timing T10, the frame effect lamps 10c, board LEDs 5b, and first image display device 70 are all restricted from emitting rainbow light.

The large right hit image 70rb has a larger display size than the small right hit image 70rs and is displayed in the center of the display area of the first image display device 70, making it an image that is more easily noticeable to the player than the small right hit image 70rs. This makes it easier for even players who are unfamiliar with the game to understand that it is a situation in which they should perform a right hit.

Note that, if an advance notification of the operation of the winning limit device is executed in the first image display device 70 between T9 and T9', the advance notification will be displayed in a layer higher (front side) than the large right-hit image 70rb. As a result, as shown in the figure, part of the large right-hit image 70rb becomes difficult to see due to the display of the advance notification, but since the advance notification is displayed so as not to overlap with the small right-hit image 70rs, the visibility of the small right-hit image 70rs is not reduced, and notification of the required operation (right hit) can be guaranteed even if an advance notification is issued.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the first round of the jackpot game ends, an interval (between 1R and 2R) is executed. During the interval, the right-hit small image 70rs continues to be displayed on the first image display device 70, and a rainbow effect is also displayed. The rainbow effect is not displayed overlapping the right-hit small image 70rs, so as not to reduce the visibility of the right-hit small image 70rs. In addition, rainbow illumination is executed on the frame effect lamp 10c and the board surface LED 5b.

In other words, in a scene where the large right-hit image 70rb is displayed to inform the player that he or she should make a right hit, the frame effect lamp 10c, the board LED 5b, and the first image display device 70 are all restricted from emitting rainbow light, preventing the player from being distracted by the rainbow light and missing the display of the large right-hit image 70rb. On the other hand, in a scene where the large right-hit image 70rb is not displayed, the frame effect lamp 10c, the board LED 5b, and the first image display device 70 are all allowed to emit rainbow light, further raising the spirits of the player who is already excited by the big win.

The large right-hit image 70rb may be displayed during the opening scene of a big win. In that case, it is advisable to limit the execution of rainbow light emission for the frame effect lamp 10c, the board surface LED 5b, and the first image display device 70.

In addition, in the scene where the large right-hit image 70rb is displayed, the execution of rainbow light emission is restricted from the frame effect lamp 10c, the board LED 5b, and the first image display device 70, but rainbow light emission may be restricted from the frame effect lamp 10c and the board LED 5b while being possible from the first image display device 70, or rainbow light emission may be possible from the frame effect lamp 10c and the board LED 5b while being restricted from the first image display device 70.

In addition, while FIG. 212 uses the large right-hit image 70rb as an example, it may be interpreted as "Aim for V," which encourages the game ball to pass through a specific area (the "V" winning area) provided inside the large winning opening. In other words, when "Aim for V" is being executed, the frame effect lamp 10c, the board LED 5b, and the first image display device 70 all restrict the execution of rainbow light emission.

In addition, during a jackpot game, if a left hit is made and the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, for example, a promotion image saying "Aim to the right" is displayed. In this case, the frame effect lamp 10c, the board surface LED 5b, and the first image display device 70 may all be configured to limit the execution of rainbow light emission. This makes it easier to recognize that a suboptimal game is being played. On the other hand, for example, if a promotion image saying "Aim to the right" is displayed in a situation where rainbow light emission is to be performed, such as during an interval, rainbow light emission may be performed. This makes it possible to eliminate the need for cumbersome processing such as interrupting rainbow light emission by hitting with the left, and simplifies the control processing.

According to Figures 211 and 212, the following features are distinguished.
(e) It is possible to notify the result of the judgment at a predetermined timing in the variable presentation (for example, a deciding presentation), and when notifying that a special game will be played at the predetermined timing, it is possible to execute a first rainbow emission (rainbow effect display) that causes a first light-emitting means (image display devices 70 to 73) to emit rainbow light (rainbow light), and a second rainbow emission (rainbow emission in each lighting device) that causes a second light-emitting means (frame presentation lamp 10c, board LED 5b, LED of movable presentation device 77, LED of presentation button 17) that is different from the first light-emitting means to emit rainbow light (rainbow light), and the timing at which the first rainbow emission ends is different from the timing at which the second rainbow emission ends.

(n) During the execution of a special game, it is possible to cause the light-emitting means to emit rainbow light (rainbow light emission), and during the execution of a special game, it is possible to execute a first instruction effect that instructs the operation of the operating means (image 70rs encouraging right hit and image 70rb encouraging right hit are both displayed) and a second instruction effect that instructs the operation of the operating means in a manner different from the first instruction effect (image 70rb encouraging right hit is not displayed, and only image 70rs encouraging right hit is displayed), and rainbow light emission in the specified light-emitting means (first image display device 70) is more likely to be executed when the second instruction effect is being executed than when the first instruction effect is being executed.

These features provide the following advantages.
By ending the rainbow light emission and vibration of the effect button 17 first, the player's line of sight can be directed toward the first image display device 70 as much as possible, and the big win notification effect being executed on the first image display device 70 can be visually confirmed.

In addition, for example, in the first image display device 70, after announcing that a special game will be played at a specified timing, a presentation to complete the SPSP reach (e.g., story reach) is executed, but by ending the rainbow effect at timing T5, it is possible to prevent the presentation to complete the SPSP reach (e.g., story reach) from becoming difficult to see due to the rainbow effect.

In addition, the frame effect lamps 10c, the board LEDs 5b, and the movable effect device LEDs are designed to continue emitting rainbow light until timing T6 (the timing when the stop display begins). This allows the game to transition to a jackpot game without reducing the decorativeness of the entire gaming machine, preventing a decrease in the player's satisfaction.

In addition, when the right-hit large image 70rb and the right-hit small image 70rs are displayed, the display of the rainbow effect on the first image display device 70 is limited, so it is possible to prevent a player from being distracted by the rainbow effect and missing a necessary operation, which can lead to a disadvantage. On the other hand, when the right-hit large image 70rb is not displayed and only the right-hit small image 70rs is displayed, it is possible to display the rainbow effect on the first image display device 70, so it is possible to prevent a decrease in decorativeness during a jackpot game.

Next, we will explain the details of the rainbow light emission during a jackpot game using Figure 213. Figure 213 shows a jackpot opening, and is another example of Figure 185.

First, FIG. 213(a) shows the opening of the jackpot for the jackpot corresponding to the special symbol 03. In the jackpot corresponding to the special symbol 03, "Circle △ Bonus" and a right-hit small image 70rs are displayed on the first image display device 70. In addition, the frame effect lamp 10c and the panel LED 5b start to emit opening light (white).

Figure 213 (b) shows the opening of the jackpot for the jackpot corresponding to special symbol 02. In the jackpot corresponding to special symbol 02, "Super 〇△ Bonus" and a right-hit small image 70rs are displayed on the first image display device 70. In addition, the frame effect lamp 10c and the panel LED 5b start to emit a special opening light (rainbow), which is the light emitted corresponding to "Super 〇△ Bonus".

"Super 〇△ Bonus" will also be displayed in rainbow colors. This rainbow display may be achieved by having the entire character be rainbow colored, part of the character be rainbow colored, the periphery of the character be rainbow colored, or the outer edge of the display area when the character is displayed be rainbow colored, etc.

In this way, in the jackpot opening for a jackpot corresponding to special pattern 03, the frame effect lamp 10c, the panel LED 5b, and the first image display device are all restricted from emitting rainbow light, but in the jackpot opening for a jackpot corresponding to special pattern 02, the frame effect lamp 10c, the panel LED 5b, and the first image display device are all allowed to emit rainbow light, making it easier to recognize that a more advantageous jackpot is about to begin.

As shown in FIG. 213(b), at the timing of T8', for example, when the increment counter reaches "90000/95000" due to the entry of a game ball into the general winning port 43, a pre-announcement image such as "90000/95000, 5000 remaining until the winning limit device is activated" is displayed, but the display of "Super 〇△ Bonus" does not end when the pre-announcement image is displayed, but ends when the jackpot opening time has elapsed. In addition, the rainbow light emitted by the frame performance lamp 10c and the board LED 5b does not end when the pre-announcement image is displayed, but ends when the jackpot opening time has elapsed. Note that although the display of the "Super 〇△ Bonus" becomes partially difficult to see (visibility is reduced) due to the display of the pre-announcement image, the visibility of the rainbow light emitted by the frame performance lamp 10c and the board LED 5b is not reduced, so that the decorativeness of celebrating the acquisition of the "Super 〇△ Bonus" is prevented from being reduced.

In the above example, the increment counter reaches "90000/95000" at the timing of T8' in FIG. 213(b) and an advance notification is issued; however, the advance notification may be interpreted as the operation of the acquisition limit device. In this case, the display of "Super XX Bonus" may be immediately ended and the acquisition limit device may be placed in standby for operation as described above, or the acquisition limit device may be placed in standby for operation after the opening time has elapsed without ending the display of "Super XX Bonus".

The "O△Bonus" in FIG. 213(a) may also be displayed in rainbow colors in the same manner as the "Super O△Bonus" in FIG. 213(b). For example, if a jackpot corresponding to special pattern 03 is won after a predetermined number of consecutive jackpot games (e.g., 10), the "O△Bonus" display may be displayed in rainbow colors. This can suggest that the player is in a so-called consecutive jackpot state, with the number of jackpot games being greater than the predetermined number.

In addition, the "Super O△ Bonus" in FIG. 213(b) may not be displayed in rainbow colors. For example, if the increment counter reaches "95000" during the period when the special jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, "Super O△ Bonus" will not be displayed in rainbow colors even if the jackpot that has been won corresponds to special pattern 02. In this case, for example, it is possible to display it in black text to suggest that the winning limit device will be activated after the jackpot game ends.

Next, using FIG. 214, we will explain an example of information related to gaming media displayed on the first image display device 70 that is displayed in a rainbow pattern and an example of information that is not displayed in a rainbow pattern.

First, FIG. 214(a) is an example of a rainbow display, and corresponds to another example of FIG. 213(b). Specifically, in addition to the notation "Super 〇△ Bonus," the big win opening is also notated as "1500pt," which corresponds to the value of the gaming media expected to be won in the big win game. In this case, as in the explanation of FIG. 213(b), the rainbow display will be such that the entire letters are rainbow colored, parts of the letters are rainbow colored, the edges of the letters are rainbow colored, the outer edges of the display area when the letters are displayed are rainbow colored, etc.

Next, Figure 214 (b) is an example of something that is not displayed as a rainbow, and (b-1) is the number of winnings per unit jackpot game. The number of winnings per unit jackpot game is the number of gaming media (denominator) that can be won (expected to be won) in one jackpot game, and the number (numerator) that is updated each time a winning (winning) game is won and indicates the winning status. In the example of (b-1), it shows that up to "600" (numerator) have been won out of the number of gaming media (1500) that can be won in one jackpot game.

The number of such unit jackpot wins is displayed each time a jackpot is won, but the display is based on black, for example, and rainbow colors are restricted. This is because it merely notifies the player of the expected and actual wins.

(b-2) is the number of winnings (cumulative number of winnings) when consecutive jackpots occur. When consecutive jackpots occur, it is, for example, a case where jackpot → high probability game state → jackpot → high probability game state. In such a case, during the high probability game state, the number of game media won is displayed on the first image display device 70. In the example of (b-2), "3500 pt" is displayed, which corresponds to the number of game media won from multiple jackpots.

When such big wins occur consecutively, the number of wins (cumulative number of wins) is displayed during the special mode, but the display is based on black, for example, and rainbow colors are restricted. This is because it merely notifies the number of wins (cumulative number of wins).

(b-3) is the milestone number. The milestone number is an image that is displayed for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) when the cumulative number of points acquired in (b-2) reaches a milestone number such as "10,000," "20,000," "30,000," etc. For example, when the cumulative number of points acquired reaches "10,000," an image such as "10,000pt OVER!" is displayed in the center of the display area of the first image display device 70, as shown in (b-3).

The number of milestones that have been achieved (cumulative number of milestones) is displayed when the milestone number is reached, but the display is, for example, based on black, and rainbow display is restricted. This is because it merely notifies the number of milestones that have been achieved (cumulative number of milestones).

(b-4) is a result display of the total number of winnings on the RUSH end screen (result). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, for example, when the special symbol 04 is won in the high probability game state and the time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends is ended, the RUSH end screen (result) is displayed. Here, the number of gaming media won (in a series of RUSHes) from the jackpot that triggered the transition to the high probability game state until the time-saving game state ends is displayed as the result. In the example of (b-4), "Total winning pts: 12000pts" is displayed, notifying that the number of gaming media won in a series of RUSHes is "12000".

The total number of wins displayed in this type of result is shown when the time-saving game mode ends, but the display is based on black, for example, and rainbow colors are limited. This is because it only notifies you of the milestone number of wins (cumulative number of wins).

Broadly speaking, as shown in Figure 214(a), a rainbow display is used for gaming media that are about to be given (gaming media that are almost certain to be given), while as shown in Figure 214(b), the track record is displayed, and rainbow display is not used for gaming media that are not about to be given (gaming media that are almost certain to be given).

Thus, we have described examples of information related to game media that is and is not rainbow displayed, but these can be changed as appropriate. For example, an image such as "10000pt OVER!" in (b-3) may be rainbow displayed. As described above, this is an image that is displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds), and the display time is shorter than (b-1) and (b-2), so it may be rainbow displayed to prevent oversight.

In addition, in the RUSH end screen (result) of (b-4), "Total points acquired: 12,000 points" may be displayed in a rainbow pattern. For example, if you want to make it look as if the RUSH (probability change game state) has ended even though it is still continuing, displaying "Total points acquired: 12,000 points" in a rainbow pattern can suggest that the RUSH (probability change game state) has not ended. Displaying the RUSH end screen (result) does not necessarily mean that the RUSH has ended, and by drawing attention to the "Total points acquired," interest in the game can be increased.

In other words, the difference in the ease of rainbow display between the first information shown in FIG. 214(a) and the second information shown in FIG. 214(b) is intended to mean a so-called "0:100" relationship in which the first information shown in FIG. 214(a) is always rainbow displayed and the second information shown in FIG. 214(b) is not rainbow displayed, and a relationship of, for example, "30:70" in which the second information shown in FIG. 214(b) may also be rainbow displayed, but is executed less frequently than the first information shown in FIG. 214(a). For example, when the number of milestone wins shown in (b-3) is rainbow displayed, it is highly likely that multiple jackpot games have been executed before reaching "10,000pt", and multiple "Super 〇△ Bonus" games have been executed, so in terms of ease of execution, it can be said that (a) is more likely to be executed than (b-3).

As shown in (b-2), the number of winnings (cumulative winnings) in the case of consecutive jackpots can be displayed up to the upper limit of "99999". In other words, even if a further winning occurs when the upper limit of "99999" is displayed, the number of winnings (cumulative winnings) will not be updated any further. Note that it is possible to have no rainbow display even when the upper limit of "99999" is reached, or to have a rainbow display when the upper limit of "99999" is reached. In the former case, when the upper limit of "99999" is reached and a rainbow display is displayed, there is a risk of misunderstanding that some further bonus will be awarded, but this can be prevented. On the other hand, in the latter case, it is possible to emphasize that the upper limit has been reached, giving the player a greater sense of satisfaction.

In addition, the information related to the gaming medium that is displayed in a rainbow pattern is not limited to the above. For example, when jackpot games occur consecutively (when a jackpot game is currently being played and the reserved judgment information corresponds to a jackpot), the number of wins per unit jackpot game may be displayed in a rainbow pattern, and when the number of wins is displayed at the jackpot ending, the number of wins may be displayed in a rainbow pattern.

When used in a slot machine, in cases where the number of games that can be played in a favorable state (AT, ART) is awarded to the player, if a certain number or more is awarded (for example, "+300"), the "+300" may be displayed as a rainbow.

According to Figures 213 and 214, the following features are present.
(R) The display means (image display devices 70 to 73) can display first information relating to the awarding of game value (the number of game values expected to be awarded in a special game) and second information relating to the awarding of game value which is different from the first information (the number of game values awarded during a special game, the cumulative number of game values awarded when special games occur consecutively, the cumulative number of awarded game values when the cumulative amount of awarded game value reaches a predetermined number and is displayed in the results), and the ease with which the first information and the second information are displayed in rainbow colors differs from the ease with which the first information and the second information are displayed.

(M) Equipped with a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping control of game progress (activating the acquisition upper limit device) depending on the amount of game value (MY = 95,000) granted to the player from the establishment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0), capable of executing an advance warning (an advance warning before the acquisition upper limit device is activated) that warns that the progress control of the game may be stopped by the progress stop means, capable of displaying first information (displaying "O△ Bonus") relating to a first special game and second information (displaying "Super O△ Bonus") relating to a second special game on the display means, capable of restricting the rainbow display of the first information, but capable of displaying the second information in rainbow colors, and in the case where an advance warning is executed during the rainbow display of the second information, the rainbow display of the second information does not end by the execution of the advance warning.

These features provide the following advantages.
When the second special game, which is advantageous to the player, is awarded, the "Super O△ Bonus" display is made, and a rainbow is displayed. On the other hand, when the first special game, which is less advantageous to the player than the second special game, is awarded, the "O△ Bonus" display is made, and the rainbow is not displayed. This makes it possible to recognize the degree of advantage by the presence or absence of the rainbow display, and therefore makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy to understand even for players who are unfamiliar with games.

In addition, information related to game media such as "Super 〇△ Bonus 1500pt" shown in Fig. 214(a) can be displayed in rainbow, but information related to game media shown in Fig. 214(b) is not displayed in rainbow. This makes it easier to distinguish between information that will award game media and information that shows the awarding record, providing a game machine that is easy to understand even for players who are unfamiliar with games.

In addition, even if an advance notification is executed while the "Super 〇△ Bonus" display (rainbow display) is on, the "Super 〇△ Bonus" display (rainbow display) will not end due to the advance notification being executed. This allows players to recognize that the activation of the winning limit device is approaching without significantly reducing the decorativeness of the "Super 〇△ Bonus" display (rainbow display).

Next, a display example in which an advance warning (FIG. 154) is given while a rainbow is displayed will be described with reference to FIG. 215. Note that in this example, a case in which an advance warning is displayed on the first image display device 70 will be described.

First, a description will be given of a state during which a pre-notification is most likely to be displayed during a big win game.
For example, in FIG. 215(a), during a jackpot game (interval), a rainbow effect display is executed from the left end to the right end of the lower part of the display area, decorating the fact that a jackpot game is being played. Then, when the value of the increment counter reaches "90000", mainly due to winning the big prize winning slot 50, a pre-notification (pre-operation notification) of the operation of the winning condition device is displayed. Specifically, an image such as "90000/95000" or "5000 remaining until the winning upper limit device is activated" is displayed at the lower left of the display area. At this time, the rainbow effect is partially difficult to see due to the display of the pre-notification (for example, the pre-notification is displayed in a layer higher than the rainbow effect). In this way, even if a rainbow display is displayed during a jackpot game, if a pre-notification with a high display priority is displayed, it will be displayed in a layer higher than the rainbow display.

Next, Figure 215 (b-1) is an example 1 in which an advance notice is displayed during a variable performance.
For example, in FIG. 215(b-1), a rainbow effect is displayed when a big win is announced, and when the value of the increment counter reaches "90000" due to a win in the general winning port 43 or the like at that time, a pre-notification (pre-operation notification) of the operation of the winning condition device is displayed. Specifically, an image such as "90000/95000" or "5000 remaining until the winning limit device is activated" is displayed in the lower left of the display area. At this time, the rainbow effect is partially difficult to see due to the display of the pre-notification (for example, the pre-notification is displayed in a layer higher than the rainbow effect). In this way, even if a rainbow display is displayed for the big win announcement, if a pre-notification with a high display priority is displayed, it will be displayed in a layer higher than the rainbow display.

On the other hand, FIG. 215(b-2) is an example 2 in which a pre-announcement is displayed during a variable performance, and is an example of a rainbow display in which the pre-announcement is not difficult to see even if it is displayed. Specifically, a rainbow icon is displayed in the icon display area 70c, suggesting that the variable performance currently being performed is a jackpot. Then, when the value of the increment counter reaches "90000" due to a win in the general winning port 43 or the like at that timing, a pre-announcement (pre-activation notification) of the activation of the winning condition device is displayed. Specifically, an image such as "90000/95000" or "5000 remaining until the winning limit device is activated" is displayed in the lower left of the display area. At this time, the rainbow icon displayed in the icon display area 70c is not covered in part or in whole by the pre-announcement display, and maintains the visibility before the pre-announcement display.

In addition, the advance notification display is displayed so as not to overlap the variable display area of the performance pattern 70a, the first hold number display area 70E, or the second hold number display area 70F, the first hold icon display area 70B, or the second hold icon display area 70D, and the variable display area of the special pattern TZ. This prevents various important information from becoming difficult to see for the player.

The advance notification display may be displayed so as to overlap the variable display area of the performance pattern 70a, but in this case, it is preferable that it is displayed so as not to overlap the variable display area of the special pattern TZ. The advance notification display may be displayed so as to overlap the variable display area of the special pattern TZ, but in this case, it is preferable that it is displayed so as not to overlap the variable display area of the performance pattern 70a. This ensures that even if the visibility of one pattern is reduced, the visibility of the other pattern is ensured, allowing the result of the variable performance to be recognized.

Similarly, the advance notification display may be displayed so as to overlap the first hold icon display area 70B or the second hold icon display area 70D, but in this case, it is preferable that it is displayed so as not to overlap the first hold number display area 70E or the second hold number display area 70F. Also, the advance notification display may be displayed so as to overlap the first hold number display area 70E or the second hold number display area 70F, but in this case, it is preferable that it is displayed so as not to overlap the first hold icon display area 70B or the second hold icon display area 70D. This makes it possible to recognize the current number of holds even if the visibility of one of the hold number information is reduced by ensuring the visibility of the other hold number information.

In this way, there are rainbow displays (for example, rainbow effects) that are affected by the advance notification display, and rainbow displays (for example, rainbow icons) that are not affected by the advance notification display. In particular, the rainbow icon displayed in the icon display area 70c is a valuable (hard to display) rainbow display for players, so by not being affected by the advance notification display, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the presentation. On the other hand, since the rainbow effect is not as valuable as the rainbow icon, by prioritizing the advance notification, it is possible to display appropriately according to the situation.

Note that in FIG. 215, a rainbow effect has been described as an example of a rainbow display that is affected by the advance warning display, but this is not limited to this. For example, when a cut-in (rainbow) is executed as a cut-in effect, part of the cut-in (rainbow) may be difficult to see due to the advance warning.

In addition, in FIG. 215, a rainbow icon is used as an example of a rainbow display that is not affected by the advance warning display, but this is not limited to this. For example, when executing the confirmed line (rainbow) in FIG. 117, it may be displayed so as not to overlap with the advance warning (so that visibility is maintained) and so as not to be affected by the advance warning display.

The rainbow light emitted by the frame effect lamps 10c, board LEDs 5b, movable effect device 77LED, and effect button 17LED is, of course, rainbow light that is not affected by the advance notification display, and visibility is not reduced by the advance notification display. For example, in the scenes of Figure 215(a) and Figure 215(b-1), rainbow light is also emitted by the frame effect lamps 10c, board LEDs 5b, etc., so even if the rainbow effect in the first image display device 70 is affected by the advance notification display, there is no risk of the overall decorativeness being reduced to that extent. This allows the player to recognize important information, such as advance notifications, without reducing decorativeness to that extent.

If the earning limit device is activated while the rainbow effect, cut-in (rainbow), confirmation dialogue (rainbow), or rainbow icon is being displayed, the display will end and an earning limit device activation notification will be executed. In other words, when a pre-notification is executed, it is possible for these rainbow displays to continue to be displayed, but when the earning limit device is activated, it becomes difficult to continue to display these rainbow displays.

Next, the light emitting areas and light emitting modes of each light emitting means of the gaming machine 1 will be explained using the simplified diagram in Figure 216 and Figure 217. Note that in Figure 216, it is assumed that one area is equipped with multiple LEDs.

As shown in FIG. 216, the glass frame 4 (left and right) is provided with areas 1 to 7 of the frame effect lamps 10c. The game board 5 (left and right) is provided with areas 1 to 4 of the board LEDs 5b. The center of the game board 5 is provided with areas 1 to 4 of the first image display device 70, and the upper part of the first image display device 70 is provided with areas 1 to 3 of the movable effect device 77. The glass frame 4 is also provided with area 1 of the effect button 17. Although not shown, in addition to these, the light-emitting area of the light guide plate described above and the light-emitting area of the launch handle 15 may also be included.

These light-emitting regions are then illuminated in the manner shown in FIG. 217. First, (a) the frame effect lamp 10c illuminates so that region 1 is visible as "purple," region 2 as "blue," region 3 as "indigo," region 4 as "green," region 5 as "yellow," region 6 as "orange," and region 7 as "red" during a predetermined illumination time (T1). After the predetermined illumination time (T1) has elapsed, region 1 is illuminated so that region 2 is visible as "red," region 3 as "blue," region 4 as "indigo," region 5 as "green," region 6 as "yellow," and region 7 as "orange" during the next predetermined illumination time (T2). From this point on, the colors of each region change from T3 to T7, and when T7 has elapsed, each region is illuminated again in the color shown in T1. In this way, the color of each area changes for each specified light emission time, and at each light emission time, areas 1 to 7 as a whole emit light that is visible in seven colors (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple).

Similarly, (b) panel LED 5b emits light so that area 1 is visible as "purple," area 2 as "blue," area 3 as "indigo," and area 4 as "green" during a specified light-emitting time (T1). Then, after the specified light-emitting time (T1) has elapsed, area 1 emits light so that area 2 is visible as "red," area 3 as "blue," and area 4 as "indigo" during the next specified light-emitting time (T2). From then on, the colors of each area change from T3 to T7, and after T7 has elapsed, each area emits light again in the color shown at T1. In this way, the color of each area changes at each specified light-emitting time, and at each light-emitting time, areas 1 to 4 as a whole emit light so that they are visible in four of the seven colors (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, purple).

Similarly, (c) the first image display device 70 emits light so that, during a predetermined emission time (T1), region 1 is visible as "purple," region 2 as "blue," region 3 as "indigo," and region 4 as "green." Then, after the predetermined emission time (T1) has elapsed, during the next predetermined emission time (T2), region 1 emits light so that it is visible as "red," region 2 as "purple," region 3 as "blue," and region 4 as "indigo." From this point on, the colors of each region change from T3 to T7, and after T7 has elapsed, each region emits light again in the color shown at T1. In this way, the color of each region changes at each predetermined emission time, and during each emission time, regions 1 to 4 as a whole emit light so that they are visible in four of the seven colors (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, purple).

Similarly, (d) the LED of the movable performance device 77 emits light so that areas 1 to 3 are visible in "yellow" during a specified light emission time (T1), and when the specified light emission time (T1) has elapsed, at the next specified light emission time (T2), areas 1 to 3 emit light so that they are visible in "green", and from then on, the color of each area changes from T3 to T7, and when T7 has elapsed, each area emits light again in the color shown in T1. The movable performance device 77 is made up of three movable bodies, each of which has a light emitting area, and at each light emission time, the light emitting area of each movable body emits light in the same color. Then, light is emitted so that it is visible in seven colors (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, purple) throughout T1 to T7.

Similarly, the LED of (e) effect button 17 emits light so that area 1 is visible as "green" during a specified light emission time (T1), and when the specified light emission time (T1) has elapsed, areas 1 to 3 emit light so that they are visible as "indigo" during the next specified light emission time (T2), and then from T3 to T7, the color of each area changes, and when T7 has elapsed, each area again emits light in the color shown in T1. The LED of effect button 17 emits light in the same color during each light emission time. Then, it emits light so that it is visible in seven colors (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, purple) throughout T1 to T7.

As for the predetermined light emission time, as will be described later in FIG. 221, T1 to T7 may all be configured as equal times, or may all be configured as different times, or T1, T3, T5, and T7 may be the same time (A), and T2, T4, and T6 may be the same time (B), with time (A) and time (B) being different times. Also, a time may be set for each device (for example, T1 of the frame performance lamp 10c and T1 of the board surface LED 5b are different times), or the time may be common to multiple devices (for example, T1 of the frame performance lamp 10c and T1 of the board surface LED 5b are the same time).

The regions are merely examples, and may have more regions than those shown, or may be configured with fewer regions than those shown. For example, each device may have at least seven regions, and regions 1 to 7 may be illuminated together to be visible in seven colors (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple).

Next, an example of a light emission mode will be described with reference to Figures 218 to 220.
First, Figure 218 is a simplified diagram of only the panel LED 5b extracted from Figure 216, and shows an emission mode (moving emission 1) in which the emission colors shown in Figure 217 move in the direction of the arrow (appearing to rotate).

In FIG. 218(a), the left region 1 is "red", the left region 2 is "orange", the left region 3 is "yellow", the left region 4 is "green", the right region 4 is "blue", the right region 3 is "indigo", the right region 2 is "purple", and the right region 1 is "red". Then, after a certain light emission time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 218(b), the left region 1 is "red", the left region 2 is "red", the left region 3 is "orange", the left region 4 is "yellow", the right region 4 is "green", the right region 3 is "blue", the right region 2 is "indigo", and the right region 1 is "purple". In other words, the colors of each region move clockwise. For example, the "yellow" of the left region 3 in FIG. 218(a) is emitted in the left region 4 in FIG. 218(b). Then, in Fig. 218(c) and Fig. 218(d), the colors of each region move clockwise. By repeating this, the light emission pattern that can be seen as rainbow colors can be made to appear to move and rotate clockwise.

Note that in FIG. 218, the board surface LED 5b is used as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a similar light emission mode may be achieved with other light emitting means. For example, a similar light emission mode may be achieved with a frame performance lamp 10c. In addition, moving light emission 1 may be performed with the board surface LED 5b + movable performance device 77LED. The rotation direction may also be counterclockwise.

Next, Figure 219 is a simplified diagram of only the frame effect lamp 10c extracted from Figure 216, and shows a light emission pattern (moving light emission 2) in which the light emission colors shown in Figure 217 move in the direction of the arrow (appearing to rise).

In FIG. 219(a), region 1 is "red", region 2 is "orange", region 3 is "yellow", region 4 is "green", region 5 is "blue", region 6 is "indigo", and region 7 is "purple". Then, after a certain light emission time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 219(b), region 1 is "purple", region 2 is "red", region 3 is "orange", region 4 is "yellow", region 5 is "green", region 6 is "blue", and region 7 is "indigo". In other words, each color in each region moves upward (moves downward from region 7 to region 1). For example, the "yellow" in region 3 in FIG. 219(a) is emitted in region 4 in FIG. 219(b). Then, in FIG. 219(c) and FIG. 219(d), each color in each region moves upward (moves downward from region 7 to region 1). By repeating this process, the visible rainbow-colored light appears to move upwards.

In FIG. 219, the frame effect lamp 10c is used as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a similar light emission mode may be achieved with other light emitting means. For example, a similar light emission mode may be achieved with the board surface LED 5b. Furthermore, moving light emission 2 may be performed with the frame effect lamp 10c + effect button 17 LED. Furthermore, the moving direction may be downward.

Next, FIG. 220 is an example of radiation emission that performs rainbow emission using multiple light-emitting means.
Specifically, area 1 of the first image display device 70 is displayed in "yellow," area 2 in "green," area 3 in "orange," and area 4 in "red," and area 2 of the movable effect device 77 emits light in "blue" and area 3 in "purple." Then, the colors move radially from the center of the game board 5 to the glass frame 4. For example, "yellow" is displayed in area 1 of the first image display device 70, and after a predetermined time has passed, area 3 to the left of the board LED 5b emits light in "yellow" (at this time, area 1 of the first image display device 70 is also "yellow"), and after a predetermined time has passed, area 5 to the left of the frame effect lamp 10c emits light in "yellow" (at this time, area 1 of the first image display device 70 and area 3 to the left of the board LED 5b are also "yellow"). Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, a different color (for example, green) is displayed in area 1 of the first image display device 70, and area 3 to the left of the board LED 5b and area 5 to the left of the frame performance lamp 10c also sequentially emit light in green.

In FIG. 220, the movable performance device 77 is positioned at the original position to clearly show the light emission state of the first image display device 70, but is positioned in front of the first image display device 77 when radiation emission begins. In other words, in a successful win performance, the movable performance device 77 is positioned in front of the first image display device 77 to notify of a big win, but radiation emission begins when the movable performance device 77 is positioned in front of the first image display device 77.

At the same time as the above-mentioned "yellow" change, area 2 of the first image display device 70, area 3 to the right of the board LED 5b, and area 5 to the right of the frame performance lamp 10c sequentially emit "green" light, area 3 of the first image display device 70, area 2 to the left of the board LED 5b, and area 1 to the left of the frame performance lamp 10c sequentially emit "orange" light, and area 4 of the first image display device 70, area 2 to the right of the board LED 5b, and area 1 to the right of the frame performance lamp 10c sequentially emit "red" light, and after a predetermined time has passed, each changes to the next emitted color.

At the same time as the above-mentioned "yellow" change, area 2 of the movable performance device 77, area 4 to the left of the board LED 5b, and area 6 to the left of the frame performance lamp 10c sequentially emit "blue" light, and area 3 of the movable performance device 77, area 4 to the right of the board LED 5b, and area 6 to the right of the frame performance lamp 10c sequentially emit "purple" light, and after a predetermined time has passed, each changes to the next emitted light color. By repeating the above-mentioned emission, it is possible to make it appear as if the light emission pattern, which can be seen as rainbow colors, spreads outward from the first image display device 70 and the movable performance device 77 as the starting point. Note that the radiating light emission is not limited to from the inside to the outside, but may also be from the outside to the inside.

Also, light emission modes other than those shown in Figs. 218 to 220 may be provided. For example, in each of the regions (region 1) shown in Fig. 216, a rainbow light emission mode (high-speed seven-color change) in which the seven colors change at high speed may be provided. For example, in region 1 of the panel LED 5b, light is emitted in the order of "red" (0.1 seconds) → "orange" (0.1 seconds) → "yellow" (0.1 seconds) → "green" (0.1 seconds) → "blue" (0.1 seconds) → "indigo" (0.1 seconds) → "purple" (0.1 seconds), and in the same period, light is emitted in the order of "orange" (0.1 seconds) → "yellow" (0.1 seconds) → "green" (0.1 seconds) → "blue" (0.1 seconds) → "indigo" (0.1 seconds) → "purple" (0.1 seconds) → "red" (0.1 seconds), and in the same period, regions 3 and 4 may also be made to emit seven colors at high speed from a color different from that of regions 1 and 2. In addition, it is preferable to execute this light emission mode during a variable performance or during a big win game, rather than during a customer waiting demo performance. For example, in a deciding performance in a variable performance, the light may be emitted so that the light gradually changes from a flashy light emission mode to a more subdued light emission mode, such as deciding performance → success → high-speed seven-color change → radiation light emission (0.2 seconds) → moving light emission 1 (0.2 seconds) → moving light emission 2 (0.5 seconds) → final stop.

Furthermore, in the case of the high-speed seven-color change, the light emission cycle is not limited to the above-mentioned (0.1 seconds), and may be, for example, 0.5 seconds. By varying the light emission cycle in this way, it is possible to provide light emission modes that are easily visually recognized as rainbow colors and light emission modes that are difficult to visually recognize as rainbow colors.

There may also be a rainbow light emission mode that moves from the left region to the right region (or from the right region to the left region). For example, first the left frame performance lamp 10c emits light in "red", then the left frame performance lamp 10c emits light in "orange", and the left board surface LED 5b emits light in "red", then the left frame performance lamp 10c emits light in "yellow", and the left board surface LED 5b emits light in "orange", and the first image display device 70 emits light in "red", and so on, executing a rainbow light emission mode that moves from the left region to the right region (or from the right region to the left region).

In addition to the seven colors (e.g., red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple) mentioned above, when performing rainbow emission with eight colors including "white," for example, a rainbow emission mode (rainbow flash) may be provided in which rainbow emission is performed by inserting white flashes in between (when switching between the seven colors), such as red → white (flash) → orange → white (flash) → yellow → white (flash) → green → white (flash) → blue → white (flash) → indigo → white (flash) → purple → white (flash) → red.

When performing moving light emission 1, moving light emission 1 may be performed in the area between board LED 5b and movable performance device 77LED, or moving light emission 1 may be performed in the area between frame performance lamp 10c and performance button 17LED. When performing moving light emission 2, moving light emission 2 may be performed in the area between board LED 5b and movable performance device 77LED, or moving light emission 2 may be performed in the area between frame performance lamp 10c and performance button 17LED. This allows for a unified decoration and enhances decorativeness.

Next, FIG. 221 is a summary diagram of the situations of moving light emission 1 (FIG. 218), moving light emission 2 (FIG. 219), and radiation light emission (FIG. 220).
First, FIG. 221(a) shows the rainbow light emission modes for each situation, and shows each light emission mode (FIG. 218 to FIG. 220) during customer waiting demo performance, during variable performance, and during big win game. "0.2 seconds" is the light emission time for each of T1, T2, T3, etc. in FIG. 217, and the same is true for "0.5 seconds." For example, for "0.2 seconds," the area 1 is illuminated in "red" for "0.2 seconds," then the area 1 is illuminated in "orange" for "0.2 seconds," then the area 1 is illuminated in "yellow" for "0.2 seconds," and so on. In other words, it is possible to illuminate each area with two light emission patterns: a short light emission time of "0.2 seconds" and a longer light emission time of "0.5 seconds."

During the customer waiting demo performance, for moving light emission 1 (Fig. 218), execution in a pattern performed in "0.2 seconds" is restricted. On the other hand, execution in a pattern performed in "0.5 seconds" is possible. Also, for moving light emission 2 (Fig. 219), execution in a pattern performed in "0.2 seconds" is restricted. On the other hand, execution in a pattern performed in "0.5 seconds" is possible. Also, for radiant light emission (Fig. 220), execution in both a pattern performed in "0.2 seconds" and a pattern performed in "0.5 seconds" is restricted.

During the customer waiting demo performance, for example, moving light emission 1 is executed by the board LED 5b + movable performance device 77LED (board area), and moving light emission 2 is executed by the frame performance lamp 10c + performance button 17LED (frame area). When customer waiting demo performance A starts, a character movie begins to be displayed on the first image display device 70, at which point the board area is unlit and the frame area is lit white. Then, as the character movie progresses, moving light emission 1 is executed in white and blue in the board area, and moving light emission 2 is executed in white and blue in the frame area.

During the variable performance, for moving light emission 1 (Fig. 218), it is possible to execute it in a pattern that is performed in "0.2 seconds" or in a pattern that is performed in "0.5 seconds", for moving light emission 2 (Fig. 219), it is possible to execute it in a pattern that is performed in "0.2 seconds" or in a pattern that is performed in "0.5 seconds", and for radiant light emission (Fig. 220), it is possible to execute it in a pattern that is performed in "0.2 seconds" or in a pattern that is performed in "0.5 seconds".

During a jackpot game, moving light emission 1 (Fig. 218) can be performed in both a "0.2 second" pattern and a "0.5 second" pattern, moving light emission 2 (Fig. 219) can be performed in both a "0.2 second" pattern and a "0.5 second" pattern, and radiation light emission (Fig. 220) is restricted from being performed in a "0.2 second" pattern, and only a "0.5 second" pattern is possible. However, radiation light emission during a jackpot game can only be performed when the promotion effect during the jackpot is successful (for example, when a transition to a certain probability game state is announced).

During the variable performance, whether or not moving light emission 1 (Fig. 218), moving light emission 2 (Fig. 219), and radiation light emission (Fig. 220) are executed may vary depending on the variable performance pattern. For example, there may be a variable performance pattern that executes all of moving light emission 1 (Fig. 218), moving light emission 2 (Fig. 219), and radiation light emission (Fig. 220), a variable performance pattern that executes two, or a variable performance pattern that executes one. Also, although there is no variable performance pattern for a jackpot that does not execute any of moving light emission 1 (Fig. 218), moving light emission 2 (Fig. 219), and radiation light emission (Fig. 220), such a variable performance pattern may exist.

Also, depending on the type of performance symbol 70a that indicates a jackpot, the presence or absence of moving light emission 1 (Fig. 218), moving light emission 2 (Fig. 219), or radial light emission (Fig. 220) may differ. For example, when the "777" performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, all light emission modes may be executed, when the "555" performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, any two light emission modes may be executed, and when the "222" performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, any one light emission mode may be executed. This makes it possible to recognize whether the performance symbol is advantageous or not based on the degree of the light emission mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, when a jackpot is determined to be a big hit, for example, a rainbow icon or a confirmation line (rainbow) may be displayed between the start of the variable performance and the final performance. However, if it is a jackpot variable performance pattern such as moving light emission 1 (Fig. 218), moving light emission 2 (Fig. 219), or radiating light emission (Fig. 220), it is not necessarily the case that one of these will be executed. Therefore, in terms of the likelihood of being executed when a jackpot is determined to be a big hit, the rainbow icon or confirmation line (rainbow) < moving light emission 1 (Fig. 218), moving light emission 2 (Fig. 219), or radiating light emission (Fig. 220).

In addition, when a jackpot is determined, the speed of color change between the areas may be gradually slowed down by executing a pattern of "0.2 seconds" from the deciding effect to the final stop, followed by a pattern of "0.5 seconds", or conversely, the speed of color change between the areas may be gradually increased by executing a pattern of "0.5 seconds" from the deciding effect to the final stop, followed by a pattern of "0.2 seconds", followed by a pattern of "0.2 seconds", followed by a pattern of "0.2 seconds", followed by a pattern of "0.2 seconds".

In addition, when the above-mentioned variable performance pattern of the revival performance is adopted, a rainbow light emission mode dedicated to the revival performance may be provided. For example, the rainbow light emission mode of the frame performance lamp 10c and the board surface LED 5b during the variable performance may be different between when the variable performance pattern 13 is executed and when the variable performance pattern of the revival performance is executed. Also, the rainbow light emission mode of the frame performance lamp 10c and the board surface LED 5b during the jackpot game may be different between when the variable performance pattern 13 is executed and a transition to the jackpot game is made and when the variable performance pattern of the revival performance is executed and a transition to the jackpot game is made. This makes it easier to recognize whether or not a jackpot has been reached through the revival performance, which can increase interest in the game.

In addition, during a jackpot game, the "O△Bonus" shown in FIG. 213 and the "Super O△Bonus" may differ in whether or not moving light emission 1 (FIG. 218), moving light emission 2 (FIG. 219), and radiation light emission (FIG. 220) are executed. For example, in the "Super O△Bonus", moving light emission 1 (FIG. 218), moving light emission 2 (FIG. 219), and radiation light emission (FIG. 220) are all executed, but in the "O△Bonus", moving light emission 1 (FIG. 218) and moving light emission 2 (FIG. 219) may be executed, but radiation light emission (FIG. 220) may not be executed.

The feature of Fig. 221(a) is that during the customer waiting demo performance, the radial light emission (Fig. 220) is not executed, and both the moving light emission 1 (Fig. 218) and the moving light emission 2 (Fig. 219) can only be executed in a pattern of "0.5 seconds". This limits the intensity of the rainbow light emission (movement speed, area used, etc.), preventing the customer waiting demo performance from becoming too flashy and encouraging excessive playing.

In addition, during a jackpot game, the execution of the radiation light emission (Fig. 220) pattern is limited to "0.2 seconds". This allows the intensity of the rainbow light emission (movement speed, area used, etc.) to be maintained at a moderate level, while preventing the jackpot game from becoming too flashy and causing the player to neglect the necessary operation (right hit).

On the other hand, during the variable performance, there are no particular restrictions, and rainbow illumination can be achieved in all patterns. This allows players who have worked hard to win a jackpot to be congratulated and lifts their spirits.

Note that FIG. 221(a) is merely an example, and the light emission time may include additional seconds, and the "Limited" and "Executable" sections may be adjusted as appropriate. Also, in addition to the light emission modes of FIG. 218 to FIG. 220, additional light emission modes may be included.

In addition, with regard to the execution during the variable effects of moving light emission 1, moving light emission 2, radiation light emission, and the high-speed seven-color change and rainbow flash described above, (A) between the deciding effect and the fixed stop, and (B) between the start of the variable effect and the deciding effect, the breakdown may be arbitrary, with those executed only in (A), those executed only in (B), and those executed in both (A) and (B).

Next, FIG. 221(b) shows the rainbow light emission patterns for each variable presentation pattern, and shows the cases where variable presentation patterns 13 to 25 and variable presentation patterns 44 to 56 are executed. In other words, the rainbow light emission patterns during variable presentation and jackpot play are shown for the case where, in normal play mode, a game ball enters the first start hole 45, resulting in a jackpot win, and one of variable presentation patterns 13 to 25 is executed, and for the case where, in time-saving play mode or probability-change play mode, a game ball enters the second start hole 47, resulting in a jackpot win, and variable presentation patterns 44 to 56 are executed.

In this case, although the radiation light emission (Fig. 220) during a jackpot play is limited to "0.2 seconds," other operations are possible, which increases the freedom of the rainbow light emission during the variable performance and the subsequent jackpot play, making it possible to execute highly decorative effects.

In the variable performance pattern shown in FIG. 221(b), rainbow light emission is possible both in (A) between the deciding performance and the fixed stop, and in (B) between the start of the variable performance and the deciding performance, but it is rarely performed in (B). For example, it is assumed that moving light emission 2 will be performed when the rainbow icon is displayed, or moving light emission 1 or moving light emission 2 will be performed during the execution of a full rotation reach, and radial light emission will not be performed (this is an effect that is only used when the deciding performance or promotion performance is successful).

(A) As an example of the rainbow light emission mode performed between the final performance and the fixed stop, the performance button 17 is pressed during the final performance to execute radiation light emission, and when the movable performance device 77 returns to its original position, moving light emission 2 is executed, and when the combination of patterns of the performance pattern 70a is derived (temporarily stopped), moving light emission 1 is executed, and then the final stop occurs and the rainbow light emission mode ends. Note that the order in which the rainbow light emission modes are executed and the combination of whether or not they are executed may be arbitrary.

On the other hand, FIG. 221(c) shows the cases where variable presentation pattern 28 and variable presentation pattern 33 are executed. In other words, in the normal game state, when a jackpot is won by placing a game ball in second start hole 47 and variable presentation pattern 28 is executed, and in the time-saving game state or the probability variation game state, when a jackpot is won by placing a game ball in first start hole 45 and variable presentation pattern 33 is executed, the rainbow light emission pattern is displayed during the variable presentation and during the jackpot game.

In this case, only "0.5 seconds" of moving light emission 2 (Fig. 219) can be executed, and execution in other light emission modes is restricted. In other words, if a jackpot is won as a result of playing in a manner that is not optimal for the player, such as letting the game ball enter the second start hole 47 in normal play mode, or letting the game ball enter the first start hole 45 in time-saving play mode or probability variation play mode, the degree of freedom of rainbow light emission during the variable performance and the subsequent jackpot play is reduced, and a less decorative performance is executed.

For example, in a normal game state, when a jackpot is won by causing a game ball to enter the first starting hole 45 and one of variable presentation patterns 13 to 25 is executed (situation 1), a comparison is made with a time-saving game state or a sure-win game state, when a jackpot is won by causing a game ball to enter the first starting hole 45 and one of variable presentation patterns 33 is executed (situation 2). In situation 1, the "0.2 seconds" and "0.5 seconds" of Moving Light 1 (Figure 218) and the "0.5 seconds" of Moving Light 2 (Figure 219) are compared. While both "0.2 seconds" and "0.5 seconds" and both "0.2 seconds" and "0.5 seconds" of radial light emission (Fig. 220) are possible, in situation 2 only "0.5 seconds" of moving light emission 2 (Fig. 219) is possible, so it can be said that there are more types of light emission patterns in the rainbow light emission when the first game presentation is executed in the normal game state than when the first game presentation is executed in a specific game state (time-saving game state, special game state).

In addition, situation 1 allows movement in multiple directions, such as moving light emission 1 (clockwise movement), moving light emission 2 (upward movement), and radial light emission (diagonal movement), but situation 2 only allows moving light emission 2 (upward movement), so it can be said that there are more types of movement directions of the colors that make up the rainbow light when the first game presentation is executed in the normal game state than when the first game presentation is executed in a specific game state (time-saving game state, special game state).

In addition, when variable performance pattern 28 is executed and when variable performance pattern 33 is executed, rainbow light emission may not be performed, and the comparison target for the large number of types of light emission modes described above and the large number of types of movement directions of the colors that make up the rainbow light emission may be "0."

In addition, because rainbow illumination is executed in a variable presentation pattern corresponding to a jackpot, for example, rainbow illumination is not executed in variable presentation patterns 26 and 27, which can be executed when a game ball enters second start hole 47 in a normal game state and results in a miss. Similarly, rainbow illumination is not executed in variable presentation patterns 31 and 32, which can be executed when a game ball enters first start hole 45 in a specific game state (time-saving game state, special probability game state), and results in a miss.

In addition, in the variable performance pattern shown in FIG. 221(c), (A) between the deciding performance and the final stop, "moving light emission 2" can emit light for "0.5 seconds", (B) rainbow light emission between the start of the variable performance and the deciding performance is restricted, and in particular (B) rainbow light emission between the start of the variable performance and the deciding performance is more difficult to execute than in the variable performance pattern shown in FIG. 221(b).

In addition, without being limited to this, rainbow illumination may be executed between the start of the (B) variable performance and the final performance in the variable performance pattern shown in FIG. 221(c). However, it is preferable to make this more difficult to execute than the variable performance pattern shown in FIG. 221(b). On the other hand, rainbow illumination may be executed easier between the start of the (B) variable performance and the final performance in the variable performance pattern shown in FIG. 221(c) than in the variable performance pattern shown in FIG. 221(b).

In other words, the second effect (between the start of the variable effect and the final effect) can be executed after the first effect, and it can be said that the rainbow glow in the first effect is more likely to occur when the first effect is executed in the normal game state than when the first effect is executed in a specific game state (time-saving game state, special game state).

In addition, in FIG. 221(c), only moving light emission 2 is executable, but only moving light emission 1 may be executable, or only radiation light emission may be executable, or if the number of executable types is smaller than in FIG. 221(b), two of moving light emission 1, moving light emission 2, and radiation light emission may be executable.

According to FIG. 221, the following features are provided.
(No) The game presentation includes a first game presentation (a variable presentation corresponding to a first special pattern) according to the result of a judgment of judgment information based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition, and a second game presentation (a variable presentation corresponding to a second special pattern) according to the result of a judgment of judgment information based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition, and it is possible to make the light-emitting means emit rainbow light when the first game presentation is executed in a normal game state and when the first game presentation is executed in a specific game state, and there are more types of light-emitting patterns in the rainbow light emission (for variable presentation patterns 13 to 25, all of moving light emission 1, moving light emission 2, and radial light emission are possible, and for variable presentation pattern 33, only moving light emission 2 is possible).

(E) The game presentation includes a first game presentation (variable presentation corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game presentation (variable presentation corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. The light-emitting means can emit rainbow light when the first game presentation is executed in the normal game state and when the first game presentation is executed in the specific game state. The number of types of movement directions of the colors that make up the rainbow light emission (moving light emission 1, moving light emission 2, and radial light emission can all be executed in variable presentation patterns 13 to 25, and only moving light emission 2 can be executed in variable presentation pattern 33) is greater when the first game presentation (e.g., variable presentation pattern 33) is executed in the normal game state than when the first game presentation (e.g., variable presentation pattern 33) is executed in the specific game state.

(c) The game presentation includes a first game presentation (variable presentation corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game presentation (variable presentation corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. The second presentation (between the decision presentation and the final stop) can be executed after the first presentation (between the start of the variable presentation and the final presentation). The light-emitting means can emit rainbow light when the first game presentation (e.g., variable presentation patterns 13-25) is executed in the normal game state and when the first game presentation (e.g., variable presentation pattern 33) is executed in the specific game state. The ease of executing rainbow light emission in the first presentation is different when the first game presentation is executed in the normal game state than when the first game presentation is executed in the specific game state (variable presentation pattern 33 has restrictions on rainbow light emission between the start of the variable presentation and the final presentation, whereas variable presentation patterns 13-25 have no such restrictions).

These features provide the following advantages.
Since there are more types of light emission patterns in the rainbow light emission (moving light emission 1, moving light emission 2, and radial light emission are all possible in variable presentation patterns 13 to 25, and only moving light emission 2 is possible in variable presentation pattern 33) when the first game presentation (e.g., variable presentation pattern 33) is executed in the normal game state than when the first game presentation (e.g., variable presentation pattern 33) is executed in the specific game state, the light emission pattern during the variable presentation and the light emission pattern during a jackpot game can suggest that the player is playing an unoptimal game, such as getting the game ball to enter first starting hole 45 in the specific game state, and the player can be encouraged to play the most optimal game (getting the game ball to enter second starting hole 47 during the specific game state).

In addition, the light emitting means can emit rainbow light when the first game presentation is executed in the specific game state, and the number of types of movement directions of the colors that make up the rainbow light emission is greater when the first game presentation (e.g., variable presentation patterns 13-25) is executed in the normal game state than when the first game presentation (e.g., variable presentation pattern 33) is executed in the specific game state (variable presentation patterns 13-25 can all be executed with moving light emission 1, moving light emission 2, and radial light emission, and variable presentation pattern 33 can only be executed with moving light emission 2). Therefore, the light emission mode during the variable presentation and the light emission mode during the big win game can suggest that the player is playing an inappropriate game, such as winning the game ball in the first starting hole 45 in the specific game state, and the player can be encouraged to play the optimal game (winning the game ball in the second starting hole 47 during the specific game state).

In addition, the ease of rainbow illumination in the first effect is different when the first game effect is executed in the normal game state compared to when the first game effect is executed in the specific game state (variable effect pattern 33 restricts rainbow illumination between the start of the variable effect and the deciding effect, whereas variable effect patterns 13 to 25 have no such restriction), so that the illumination state during the variable effect and the illumination state during the jackpot game can suggest that the player is playing an inappropriate game, such as winning the game ball in the first start hole 45 in the specific game state, and can encourage the player to play an optimal game (winning the game ball in the second start hole 47 during the specific game state).

(Content 1 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, in conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines in which a player plays using a gaming value owned by the player. Some of these gaming machines are equipped with a notification means for notifying the occurrence of a predetermined event when the predetermined event occurs (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2021-16405). However, in the gaming machines described in the above patent documents, there is room for improvement in appropriately notifying the occurrence of the predetermined event.

(A) A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using gaming value owned by the player, which includes a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and the first control means stores a predetermined area (e.g., main RAM 11 The second control means is capable of performing control to clear the predetermined information stored in the frame control RAM 120c (RWM clear processing), the second control means is capable of performing control to clear the game value (clearing the number of game balls), and the notification means is capable of performing a first notification (RWM clear notification) in response to the clearing of the predetermined information and a second notification (number of game balls clear notification) in response to the clearing of the game value, and the first notification and the second notification have different notification priorities. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a predetermined event can be performed in an optimal manner.

(B) A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using a gaming value owned by the player, which includes a first control means (main control board 110) that can restore the state before the power supply is stopped when the power supply is restored after the power supply is stopped, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, and a notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70 to 73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and the second control means is capable of performing control to clear the gaming value (clearing the number of gaming balls), and the notification means is capable of performing a first notification (power restoration notification) in response to the restoration and a second notification (number of gaming balls clear notification) in response to the clearing of the gaming value, and the first notification and the second notification have different priorities. Therefore, it is possible to preferably notify the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(C) A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a game value owned by a player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the game value owned by the player and controls the update of the game value, and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), wherein the first control means is capable of performing control related to settings (setting change processing, setting confirmation processing), the second control means is capable of performing control to clear the game value (clearing the number of game balls), and the alarm means is capable of performing a first alarm (setting change alarm, setting confirmation alarm) in response to the control related to the setting and a second alarm (number of game balls clear alarm) in response to the clearing of the game value, and the first alarm and the second alarm have different priorities. This allows for optimal notification of the occurrence of a specific event.

(D) A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a game value owned by a player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and controlling the update of the game value, a detection means (first magnetic detection sensor 53a, second magnetic detection sensor 53b) for detecting magnetism, and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), wherein the second control means is capable of controlling the clearing of the game value (clearing the number of game balls), and the alarm means is capable of issuing a first alarm (magnet detection error alarm) in response to detection by the detection means and a second alarm (number of game balls cleared alarm) in response to the clearing of the game value, and wherein the first alarm and the second alarm have different priorities. This allows for optimal notification of the occurrence of a specific event.

(E) A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a game value owned by a player, the machine comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and controlling the update of the game value, a detection means (radio wave detection sensor 54a) for detecting radio waves, and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), the second control means being capable of controlling the clearing of the game value (clearing the number of game balls), the alarm means being capable of issuing a first alarm (unauthorized radio wave detection error alarm) in response to detection by the detection means and a second alarm (number of game balls clear alarm) in response to the clearing of the game value, and the first alarm and the second alarm having different priorities. This allows for optimal notification of the occurrence of a specific event.

(F) A sixth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using game value owned by the player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and for controlling updates to the game value, and a detection means (general winning opening SW43a, first start opening SW45a, second start opening SW47a, large winning opening SW50a, out opening SW39) for detecting a gaming medium corresponding to the game value. a) and a notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), the second control means is capable of performing control to clear the game value (clearing the number of game balls), the notification means is capable of performing a first notification (winning ball number abnormality error notification) in response to detection by the detection means, and a second notification (game ball number clear notification) in response to the clearing of the game value, and is characterized in that the first notification and the second notification have different notification priorities. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a specified event can be performed in an optimal manner.

(G) A seventh configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a game value owned by a player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and for controlling the update of the game value, a detection means (subtraction port SW91C) for detecting the game medium corresponding to the game value being released into the game area, and an alarm means (sound The device is equipped with a voice output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, and board lighting device 76), the second control means is capable of performing control to clear the game value (clearing the number of game balls), and the notification means is capable of performing a first notification (anomaly error notification of the number of shot balls) in response to detection by the detection means and a second notification (a notification that the number of game balls has been cleared) in response to the clearing of the game value, and is characterized in that the first notification and the second notification have different notification priorities. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a specified event can be performed in an optimal manner.

(H) An eighth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using game value owned by a player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and for controlling the update of the game value, an openable and closable door body (inner frame 3, glass frame 4), detection means for detecting the state of the door body (glass frame open detection switch 31a, inner frame open detection switch 31b), and an alarm means (sound The device is equipped with a voice output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, and board lighting device 76), the second control means is capable of performing control to clear the game value (clearing the number of game balls), the notification means is capable of performing a first notification (glass frame opening error notification, inner frame opening error notification) in response to detection by the detection means, and a second notification (game ball count clear notification) in response to the clearing of the game value, and is characterized in that the first notification and the second notification have different notification priorities. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a specified event can be performed in an optimal manner.

(I) A ninth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using game value owned by a player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) capable of communicating with the first control means, storing the game value owned by the player, and controlling updates to the game value, and a detection means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) for detecting that communication between the first control means and the second control means is not possible. , and notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), the second control means is capable of performing control to clear the game value (clearing the number of game balls), the notification means is capable of performing a first notification (notification of an abnormal communication error within the gaming machine) in response to detection by the detection means, and a second notification (notification of the number of game balls cleared) in response to the clearing of the game value, and the first notification and the second notification have different notification priorities. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a specified event can be performed in an optimal manner.

(J) A tenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using a gaming value owned by the player, comprising a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, a detection means (frame control board 120) that detects that the gaming machine cannot communicate with the outside of the gaming machine (dedicated unit 170), and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), the control means being capable of performing control to clear the gaming value (clearing the number of gaming balls), the alarm means being capable of performing a first alarm (communication line abnormality error alarm) in response to detection by the detection means, and a second alarm (number of gaming balls clear alarm) in response to the clearing of the gaming value, and the first alarm and the second alarm have different priorities. Therefore, an alarm of the occurrence of a predetermined event can be preferably performed.

(K) An eleventh configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using a gaming value owned by the player, the gaming machine comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the gaming value owned by the player and controlling the update of the gaming value, and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), the second control means being capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) for discharging gaming media corresponding to the gaming value out of the gaming machine and control for clearing the gaming value (game ball count clearing), the alarm means being capable of performing a first alarm (ball removal operation in progress alarm) in response to the discharge control and a second alarm (game ball count clear alarm) in response to the clearing of the gaming value, the first alarm and the second alarm having different priorities. This allows for optimal notification of the occurrence of a specific event.

(L) A twelfth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a gaming value owned by a player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the gaming value owned by the player and for controlling the update of the gaming value, a detection means (main control board 110) for detecting specific information (e.g., a maximum increase number) that is counted when a counting condition is met, and an alarm means (audio output device). The device is equipped with a plurality of control means (9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, and board lighting device 76), the second control means is capable of performing control to clear the game value (clearing the number of game balls), the notification means is capable of performing a first notification (announcement that the acquisition limit device has been activated) in response to detection by the detection means, and a second notification (announcement that the number of game balls has been cleared) in response to the clearing of the game value, and the first notification and the second notification have different notification priorities. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a specified event can be performed in an optimal manner.

(M) A thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using game value owned by a player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and for controlling the update of the game value, an openable and closable door body (inner frame 3, glass frame 4), detection means for detecting the state of the door body (glass frame open detection switch 31a, inner frame open detection switch 31b), and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image The gaming machine is equipped with display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, and board lighting device 76, and the second control means is capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) for discharging gaming media corresponding to the gaming value from the gaming machine, and the notification means is capable of performing a first notification (glass frame opening error notification, inner frame opening error notification) in response to detection by the detection means and a second notification (ball removal operation in progress) in response to the discharge control, and is characterized in that the first notification and the second notification have different notification priorities. Therefore, it is possible to preferably notify the occurrence of a specified event.

(S) A fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a game value owned by a player, the gaming machine is equipped with a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the game value owned by the player and controls the update of the game value, and a notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and is capable of clearing the predetermined information stored in the first control means and the predetermined information stored in the second control means based on the fact that a specific operation (RWM clear operation) has been performed, and the notification means is capable of making a notification according to the specific operation when the specific operation is performed, without making a notification in a manner that distinguishes between the fact that the predetermined information stored in the first control means has been cleared and the fact that the predetermined information stored in the second control means has been cleared. Therefore, it is possible to preferably notify the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(a) A fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a gaming value owned by a player, comprising a control means (frame control board 120) for storing the gaming value owned by the player and controlling the update of the gaming value, an openable and closable door body (inner frame 3, glass frame 4), a detection means for detecting the state of the door body (glass frame open detection switch 31a, inner frame open detection switch 31b), and an alarm means (audio output device) capable of issuing an alarm (glass frame open error, inner frame open error) in response to detection by the detection means. The gaming machine is equipped with a control unit 9, image display units 70-73, frame lighting unit 10, and board lighting unit 76, the control unit being capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) for discharging gaming media corresponding to the gaming value from the gaming machine, and the notification unit being capable of issuing a notification in response to detection by the detection unit in both cases where the detection unit detects when the discharge control is being performed and where the detection unit detects when the discharge control is not being performed. Therefore, it is possible to preferably issue a notification of the occurrence of a specified event.

(b) A sixteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a gaming value owned by a player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) capable of communicating with the first control means, storing the gaming value owned by the player and controlling updates to the gaming value, a detection means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) for detecting that the first control means and the second control means are unable to communicate, and a detection means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) for detecting that the first control means and the second control means are unable to communicate, and The first control means is capable of controlling the settings (settings change processing, settings confirmation processing), and the notification means is characterized in that while the control related to the settings is being performed, the notification means does not provide a notification in response to the detection even if the detection means detects something, but can provide a notification in response to the detection when the control related to the settings is finished. Therefore, it is possible to preferably provide a notification of the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(h) A seventeenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using a gaming value owned by the player, and includes a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, and a notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and the notification means is capable of issuing a first notification (e.g., setting change notification, setting confirmation notification) in response to a first event that makes it impossible to control the progress of the game, and a second notification (e.g., game ball count clear notification, RWM clear notification) in response to a second event that makes it possible to control the progress of the game, and is characterized in that the first notification and the second notification have different priorities. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a predetermined event can be preferably issued.

(i) The eighteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using a gaming value owned by the player, and includes a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, and a notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and the notification means is capable of issuing a first notification (e.g., setting change notification, setting confirmation notification) in response to a first event that makes it impossible to control the progress of the game, and a second notification (e.g., winning limit device operation notification, ball removal operation notification) in response to a second event that makes it impossible to control the progress of the game, and is characterized in that the first notification and the second notification have different priorities. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a predetermined event can be preferably issued.

(j) A 19th configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using a gaming value owned by the player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, and a notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and the notification means is capable of issuing a first notification (e.g., a notification of the number of game balls cleared) in response to a first event that allows the progress of the game to be controlled, and a second notification (e.g., a notification of the RWM cleared, a notification of the power supply restored) in response to a second event that allows the progress of the game to be controlled, and the first notification and the second notification have different priorities. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a predetermined event can be preferably issued.

(k) A twentieth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a game value owned by a player, the machine comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and for controlling the update of the game value, and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), the alarm means issuing a first alarm in response to a first event (for example, an abnormal error in the number of winning balls) The device is capable of issuing a first notification in response to a second event different from the first event (e.g., notification of a cleared number of game balls, notification of a change in settings, notification of a confirmation of settings), and a second notification in response to a second event different from the first event (e.g., notification of the number of game balls cleared, notification of a change in settings, notification of a confirmation of settings), and the device is characterized in that the first notification can be made without resuming when the power supply is restored after the power supply is cut off while the first event is occurring, and the second notification can be made with the power supply being cut off while the second event is occurring and being resumed when the power supply is restored. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a specified event can be made in an ideal manner.

(l) A twenty-first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a game value owned by a player, the machine comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and for controlling the update of the game value, and a notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), the notification means being configured to issue a first notification ( For example, a notification that the number of game balls has been cleared) and a second notification in response to a second event different from the first event (for example, a setting change notification, a setting confirmation notification) can be made, and the first notification can be resumed when the power supply is restored after the power supply is cut off while the first event is occurring, and the second notification can be resumed when the power supply is restored after the power supply is cut off while the second event is occurring. Therefore, it is possible to preferably make a notification of the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(m) A 22nd configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a game value owned by a player, the machine comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and for controlling updates to the game value, and a notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), the notification means issuing a first notification in response to a first event (e.g., a winning ball It is possible to issue a first notification in response to a first event (e.g., a ball shot number abnormality error notification, RWM abnormality error notification) and a second notification in response to a second event different from the first event (e.g., a ball shot number abnormality error notification, RWM abnormality error notification), and the first notification can be made without resuming when the power supply is restored after the power supply is cut off while the first event is occurring, and the second notification can be made without resuming when the power supply is restored after the power supply is cut off while the second event is occurring. Therefore, it is possible to preferably issue a notification of the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(n) A 23rd configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a game value owned by a player, the machine comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and controlling the update of the game value, and a display means (frame control display 125), the display means displaying first information corresponding to a first event (for example, error code "H66" indicating an illegal radio wave detection error, error code "H68" indicating an abnormal error in the number of winning balls, error code "H69" indicating an abnormal error in the number of fired balls) and , and second information corresponding to a second event different from the first event (for example, error code "H68" indicating that the number of game balls has been cleared, error code "H64" indicating a glass frame opening error, error code "H65" indicating an inner frame opening error), and the display of the first information can be prevented from being resumed when the power supply is restored after the power supply is cut off while the first information is being displayed, and the display of the second information can be resumed when the power supply is restored after the power supply is cut off while the second information is being displayed. Therefore, it is possible to preferably notify the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(o) A 24th configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a game value owned by a player, the machine comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and for controlling the update of the game value, and a display means (frame control display 125), the display means displaying first information corresponding to a first event (for example, an error code "H68" indicating that the number of game balls has been cleared) and a second event different from the first event. The display device is characterized in that it is capable of displaying a second information corresponding to the event (for example, an error code "H64" indicating a glass frame open error, an error code "H65" indicating an inner frame open error), and that the display of the first information can be resumed when the power supply is restored after the power supply is cut off while the first information is being displayed, and that the display of the second information can be resumed when the power supply is restored after the power supply is cut off while the second information is being displayed. Therefore, it is possible to preferably notify the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(p) A twenty-fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a game value owned by a player, the machine comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and controlling updates to the game value, and a display means (frame control display 125), the display means displaying first information corresponding to a first event (for example, an error code "H66" indicating an illegal radio wave detection error) and a second event different from the first event. and second information corresponding to the error (for example, error code "H68" indicating an abnormal error in the number of winning balls, and error code "H69" indicating an abnormal error in the number of shot balls), and the display of the first information can be prevented from being resumed when the power supply is restored after the power supply is cut off while the first information is being displayed, and the display of the second information can be prevented from being resumed when the power supply is restored after the power supply is cut off while the second information is being displayed. This makes it possible to preferably notify the occurrence of a specified event.

(Content 2 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, in conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines in which a player plays using a gaming value owned by the player. Among such gaming machines, there are some that perform a gaming ball number clearing process to clear the gaming value when power is supplied to the gaming machine (for example, see JP 2021-104306 A). However, if the gaming ball number clearing process is performed when power is supplied, there is a risk that the control process of the control means will become complicated.

(N) A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that is equipped with a movable presentation means (movable presentation device 77) that can operate in a predetermined manner and that allows a player to play using game value owned by the player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) that can restore the state to the state before the power supply is stopped when the power supply is restored after the power supply is stopped, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the game value owned by the player and controls the update of the game value, a third control means (presentation control board 130) that controls the initial operation of the movable presentation means, and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display device The game machine includes a power supply unit 70-73, a frame lighting device 10, and a board lighting device 76, the second control means is capable of performing control to clear the game value (clearing the number of game balls), the notification means is capable of performing different notifications (different notifications for audio notification, screen notification, and illumination notification) for the notification in response to the restoration (power restoration notification) and the notification in response to the clearing of the game value (game ball count clear notification), and the third control means is capable of initializing the movable presentation means in the same manner when the restoration is performed and when the game value is cleared. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control process of the control means in a game machine in which the game ball count clear process is performed.

(Content 5 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, in conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines in which a player plays using a gaming value owned by the player. Some of these gaming machines are equipped with a ball removal switch for discharging gaming balls circulating in the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine (see, for example, JP 2020-39943 A). However, there is room for improvement in appropriately notifying that a gaming ball is being discharged.

(O) A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using gaming value owned by the player, comprising a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, and a specific display (gaming ball count display 135) that can display the value of the gaming value, the control means being capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) for discharging gaming media corresponding to the gaming value out of the gaming machine, and being capable of displaying specific information (error code "-") on the specific display when the discharge control is being performed. This makes it possible to appropriately notify the player that gaming balls are being discharged.

(P) A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using a gaming value owned by the player, comprising a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, a first display unit (frame control display 125) that can display the value of the gaming value, and a second display unit (game ball count display 135) that can display the value of the gaming value, the control means being capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) for discharging gaming media corresponding to the gaming value out of the gaming machine, and displaying specific information (error code "-") on the first display and the second display when the discharge control is being performed. This makes it possible to appropriately notify the player that game balls are being discharged.

(Q) A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a game using a game value owned by a player, which includes a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the game value owned by the player and executes update control of the game value, and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and the first control means controls a predetermined area (e.g., main RAM 110c, frame control RAM 12 ... 0c), the second control means is capable of executing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation process) for discharging gaming media corresponding to the gaming value from the gaming machine, the notification means is capable of executing a first notification (RWM clear notification) in response to the clearing of the predetermined information and a second notification (ball removal operation in progress notification) in response to the discharge control, and is characterized in that the execution of the first notification can be restricted while the second notification is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to preferably notify that gaming balls are being discharged.

(R) A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a game value owned by a player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) capable of restoring the game to the state before the power supply was stopped when the power supply is restored after it has been stopped, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the game value owned by the player and executes update control of the game value, and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), wherein the second control means is capable of executing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) for discharging game media corresponding to the game value outside the gaming machine, and the alarm means is capable of executing a first alarm (power restoration alarm) in response to the restoration and a second alarm (ball removal operation in progress alarm) in response to the discharge control, and wherein the execution of the first alarm can be restricted while the second alarm is being executed. This makes it possible to conveniently notify the player that a game ball is being dispensed.

(Content 3 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, in conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines in which a player plays using a gaming value owned by the player. Some of these gaming machines transmit information from the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine (for example, see JP 2021-104306 A, FIGS. 4 to 9, etc.). However, the amount of information transmitted from the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine is large, which causes a control load on the control means.

(T) A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a game value owned by a player, the gaming machine being provided with a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and controlling the update of the game value, the first control means being capable of performing a predetermined process (setting change process, setting confirmation process, RWM clear process) based on a first operation (setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, RWM clear operation) being performed, the second control means being capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation process) for discharging a gaming medium corresponding to the game value outside the gaming machine based on a second operation (ball removal operation), and when the discharge control is performed, no information is transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine (dedicated unit 170), and when the predetermined process is performed, information (information relating to Bit 0 to Bit 2 of the fraud detection state 1 in the HC/fraud monitoring information) can be transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine. This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the control means.

(U) A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a gaming value owned by a player, comprising a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, and the control means is capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) for discharging gaming media corresponding to the gaming value outside the gaming machine, and control for clearing the gaming value (clearing the number of gaming balls), and is characterized in that when the discharge control is performed, no information is sent to the outside of the gaming machine (dedicated unit 170), and when the gaming value is cleared, information can be sent to the outside of the gaming machine. This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the control means.

(q) A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a gaming value owned by a player, the gaming machine being equipped with a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, the control means being capable of transmitting information corresponding to the first event (for example, in the case of "setting change", "setting confirmation", "power on (RWM clear)", and "acquisition limit device operation", the corresponding bit of "fraud detection status 1 (main control)" in "HC/fraud monitoring information" is "1") to the outside of the gaming machine when a first event occurs, and being capable of not transmitting information corresponding to the second event (for example, in the case of "ball removal operation in progress", "ball removal lever operation error", "communication line abnormality error", and "communication no response error", the corresponding bit of "fraud detection status 2 (frame control)" in "HC/fraud monitoring information" is not "1" and no information is transmitted) to the outside of the gaming machine when a second event different from the first event occurs. This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the control means.

(r) A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using a gaming value owned by the player, which includes a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, and the control means is capable of not transmitting information corresponding to the first event to the outside of the gaming machine (dedicated unit 170) when a first event occurs (for example, in the case of "ball removal operation in progress" or "ball removal lever operation error", the corresponding bit of "fraud detection status 2 (frame control)" of "HC/fraud monitoring information" is not "1" and no information is transmitted), and is capable of not transmitting information corresponding to the second event (for example, in the case of "communication line abnormality error" or "communication no response error", the corresponding bit of "fraud detection status 2 (frame control)" of "HC/fraud monitoring information" is not "1" and no information is transmitted) when a second event different from the first event occurs to the outside of the gaming machine. This makes it possible to reduce the control load of the control means.

(s) A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using a gaming value owned by the player, and includes a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, and the control means is capable of transmitting information corresponding to the first event (for example, for "setting change" and "setting confirmation", the corresponding bit of "fraud detection status 1 (main control)" in "HC/fraud monitoring information" is "1") to the outside of the gaming machine (dedicated unit 170) when a first event occurs, and is capable of transmitting information corresponding to the second event (for example, for "power on (RWM clear)" and "acquisition limit device operation", the corresponding bit of "fraud detection status 1 (main control)" in "HC/fraud monitoring information" is "1") to the outside of the gaming machine when a second event different from the first event occurs. This makes it possible to reduce the control load of the control means.

(Content 4 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, in conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines in which a player plays using a gaming value owned by the player. Some of these gaming machines are equipped with a ball removal switch for discharging gaming balls circulating inside the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine (see, for example, JP 2020-39943 A). However, no consideration was given to the execution of other control processes during the discharge of the gaming balls, and there was a risk that the discharge of the gaming balls would be delayed.

(V) The first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using a gaming value owned by the player, and includes a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, and the first control means is capable of performing a predetermined process (setting change process, setting confirmation process, RWM clear process) based on the first operation (setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, RWM clear operation) being performed, and the second control means is capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation process) to discharge gaming media corresponding to the gaming value out of the gaming machine based on the second operation (ball removal operation), and the first control means is capable of not performing the predetermined process when the discharge control is being performed, and performing the predetermined process when the discharge control is not being performed. Therefore, it is possible to discharge game balls without delay.

(W) A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using a gaming value owned by the player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the gaming value owned by the player and controlling the update of the gaming value, the first control means being capable of performing a process (RWM clear process) for clearing predetermined information stored in a predetermined area, the second control means being capable of performing an ejection control (frame control board ball ejection operation process) for ejecting gaming media corresponding to the gaming value from the gaming machine, and the first control means being capable of not performing a process for clearing the predetermined information when the ejection control is being performed, and performing a process for clearing the predetermined information when the ejection control is not being performed. This makes it possible to eject game balls without delay.

(X) A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using a gaming value owned by the player, which includes a first control means (main control board 110) that can restore the state before the power supply was stopped when the power supply is restored after the power supply is stopped, and a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, the second control means being capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) to discharge gaming media corresponding to the gaming value out of the gaming machine, and the first control means being capable of not restoring the state before the power supply was stopped when the discharge control is being performed, and of restoring the state before the power supply was stopped when the discharge control is not being performed. Therefore, it is possible to discharge game balls without delay.

(Y) A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using a gaming value owned by the player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game when the game is in a playable state (for example, a state in which all interrupts are permitted in step S33 of the main control board main processing), and a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, the second control means being capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) to discharge gaming media corresponding to the gaming value out of the gaming machine, and the first control means being capable of not setting the game to the playable state when the discharge control is being performed, and setting the game to the playable state when the discharge control is not being performed. This makes it possible to discharge game balls without delay.

(Z) A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using a gaming value owned by the player, comprising a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, and a notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76) that can notify the occurrence of a specified event (for example, a magnet detection error, an unauthorized radio wave detection error), the control means being capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) for discharging gaming media corresponding to the gaming value out of the gaming machine, and the notification means being capable of notifying the occurrence of the specified event when the discharge control is being performed, and notifying the occurrence of the specified event when the discharge control is not being performed. This makes it possible to discharge game balls without delay.

(Content 5 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, in conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines in which a player plays using a gaming value owned by the player. Among such gaming machines, there are some in which a game is played using a gaming ball (enclosed gaming ball) circulating in the gaming machine (see, for example, JP 2020-39943 A). However, no consideration was given to holding the gaming balls circulating in the gaming machine, and there was a risk of a shortage of gaming balls reducing the interest in the game.

(c) A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using a gaming value owned by the player, the machine being equipped with a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, an openable and closable door body (inner frame 3, glass frame 4), a detection means (glass frame open detection switch 31a, inner frame open detection switch 31b) that detects the state of the door body, and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and the control means controls (touch sensor 1) to launch a gaming medium corresponding to the gaming value into a gaming area (gaming area 5a). 5a, when the launch volume 15b is input, the launch solenoid 92b is driven to operate the launch hammer, and the game value is cleared (the number of game balls is cleared). The notification means is capable of making a notification in response to the clearing of the game value (notification of the number of game balls being cleared). The control means is capable of firing the game medium into the game area if the detection means is not detecting when the notification is made, and is capable of restricting the firing of the game medium into the game area if the detection means is detecting when the notification is made. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to a shortage of game balls.

(Content 6 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, among conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines in which a player plays using a gaming value owned by the player. Some of these gaming machines are equipped with a forced termination means that forcibly terminates a game on the condition that the difference between the number of balls indicated by the ball information and the number of balls equivalent to the total loan amount reaches a predetermined upper limit (see, for example, Patent No. 6318340). Although the forced termination of a game can realize a healthy game, it does not take into consideration the player, and there is a risk of reducing the interest in the game.

(d) As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a gaming value owned by a player, the machine is provided with a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and when the value of the gaming value owned by the player (for example, the amount of gaming value owned by the player displayed on the gaming ball number display 135) reaches a first value (40,000), the control means outputs first gaming information (H C. When the gaming machine is in an error state in the fraud monitoring information, "H23 Number of Game Balls Exceeded" can be transmitted, and when the value of the specific information counted when the counting condition is met (for example, the value of the maximum increase) reaches a second value (95,000), second gaming information (information in which Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 in the HC fraud monitoring information is "1") can be transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine, and the notification means is characterized in that when the first value is met, it does not issue a specified caution promotion notification (be careful not to get addicted, be careful not to forget to remove cards), and when the second value is met, it is capable of issuing the specified caution promotion notification. This prevents a decline in interest in gaming.

(e) A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a gaming value owned by a player, the machine comprising a control means (frame control board 120) for storing the gaming value owned by the player and controlling the update of the gaming value, an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and a counting operation unit (counting button 20) for counting the gaming value owned by the player, the alarm means being When the value of the game value owned by the player (for example, the amount of game value owned by the player displayed on the game ball count display 135) reaches a first value (for example, 40,000), no notification is given to encourage the player to operate the counting operation unit (press the counting button to count), but when the value of the specific information counted when the counting condition is met (for example, the value of the maximum increase) reaches a second value (for example, 95,000), a notification can be given to encourage the player to operate the counting operation unit. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

(f) A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using gaming value owned by a player, the machine comprising: a first control means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (random number value for jackpot judgment) when an acquisition condition is met (winning at the first start port 45 or the second start port 47) and executes control to judge whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired judgment information; and a second control means (performance control board 130) that executes performance control in response to a command sent from the first control means, the first control means executing control to make a pre-judgment (e.g., a first pre-judgment process) of whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information prior to the judgment. The second control means is capable of executing a pre-performance (e.g., a reserved consecutive game performance) according to a command based on the pre-determination (e.g., a first look-ahead designation command), and the pre-performance can be executed before the value of the game value owned by the player (e.g., the amount of game value owned by the player displayed on the game ball count display 135) meets a first value (e.g., 40,000), but the execution of the pre-performance can be restricted before the value of the specific information counted by the establishment of the counting condition (e.g., the value of the maximum increase number) meets a second value (e.g., 95,000) and a predetermined condition for restricting the execution of the pre-performance is established (e.g., the value of the maximum increase number becomes "94,000"). Therefore, a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

(g) A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using game value owned by the player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) that performs control to determine whether or not to play a special game advantageous to the player, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the game value owned by the player and controls the update of the game value, and a presentation execution means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 20) that is capable of performing a game presentation related to the special game. The presentation execution means is characterized in that, when the value of the game value owned by the player (for example, the amount of game value owned by the player displayed on the game ball count display 135) reaches a first value (for example, 40,000), a specific game presentation (for example, a completion presentation) is not performed as a game presentation related to the special game, and when the value of specific information counted when the counting condition is met (for example, the value of the maximum increase) reaches a second value (for example, 95,000), the specific game presentation is performed. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

(Contents of the invention relating to the earning limit device described in this embodiment)
Here, among conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines in which a player plays using a gaming value owned by the player. Some of these gaming machines are equipped with a forced termination means that forcibly terminates a game on the condition that the difference between the number of balls indicated by the ball information and the number of balls equivalent to the total loan amount reaches a predetermined upper limit (see, for example, Patent No. 6318340). Although a sound game can be realized by forcibly terminating a game, no consideration is given to the player, and there is a risk of reducing the interest in the game.

(AA) A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using gaming value owned by a player, the machine comprising a first control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) for executing predetermined controls (e.g., input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, control related to the release of gaming media), and a second control means (performance control board 130) for executing controls in response to commands transmitted from the first control means, the first control means controlling the counting of specific information (e.g., the value of the maximum increase) at a predetermined timing (e.g., to each winning port) when the value of specific information counted due to the establishment of a counting condition (e.g., the value of the maximum increase) meets a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000). The execution of the predetermined control can be limited when a predetermined value is reached after winning or when a special game ends, and the second control means can execute a customer waiting performance (customer waiting standby performance, customer waiting demo performance) when a predetermined condition is met (for example, when no fluctuation has been performed for a predetermined time, or when a customer waiting designation command has been received), and the notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76) can notify the remaining number (for example, 5000 remaining) until the value of the specific information becomes a predetermined value, and the notification of the remaining number can be executed while the customer waiting performance is being executed. This prevents a decline in interest in the game.

(AB) A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using gaming value owned by a player, the machine comprising a first control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) for executing predetermined controls (e.g., input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, control related to the firing of gaming media), and a second control means (performance control board 130) for executing controls in response to commands transmitted from the first control means, the first control means being configured to detect when the value of specific information counted due to the establishment of a counting condition (e.g., the value of the maximum increase) has reached a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000). In this case, the execution of the predetermined control can be restricted at a predetermined timing (for example, when a predetermined value is met by winning at each winning slot, or when a special game ends), and the second control means can execute a customer waiting performance (customer waiting standby performance, customer waiting demo performance) when a predetermined condition is met (for example, when no fluctuation is performed for a predetermined time, or when a customer waiting designation command is received), and when the execution of the predetermined control is restricted, the notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70 to 73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76) can notify information related to the restriction (for example, the winning limit device is operating, today's game is over), and when the execution of the predetermined control is restricted during the execution of the customer waiting performance, the information related to the restriction can be notified. Therefore, a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

(AC) A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing advantageous games (jackpot games, small jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, which includes a control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that executes predetermined controls (e.g., input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, control related to the release of gaming media) and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and when the value of specific information counted due to the establishment of a counting condition (e.g., the value of the maximum increase number) meets a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000), the control means is capable of restricting the execution of the predetermined control at a predetermined timing (e.g., the timing when a predetermined value is met by winning at each winning port, or the timing when the advantageous game ends), and when the execution of the predetermined control is restricted, the alarm means displays information related to the restriction (e.g., a pre-notification message, for example, a message indicating that the winning limit device is in operation). The present invention is characterized in that, when the advantageous game is not being executed, if the value of the specific information meets a predetermined value and the execution of the predetermined control is restricted (for example, when a prize is won at the second start port 47 or the like during the execution of a time-saving game state, a predetermined value is satisfied and the acquisition upper limit device is activated), the information related to the restriction can be notified in a first notification mode (for example, after the symbols stop, the acquisition upper limit device is activated and the game ends. Please stop shooting → acquisition upper limit device is activated, the game ends). When the advantageous game is being executed, if the value of the specific information meets a predetermined value and the execution of the predetermined control is then restricted (for example, when a prize is won at the large prize port 50 or the like during the execution of a jackpot game, a predetermined value is satisfied and the acquisition upper limit device is activated after the jackpot ends), the information related to the restriction can be notified in a second notification mode different from the first notification mode (for example, a jackpot is in progress. Please continue playing. After the win, the acquisition upper limit device is activated and the game ends. → acquisition upper limit device is activated, the game ends). This helps prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

(AD) A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using game value owned by a player, the machine being equipped with a control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) for executing predetermined controls (e.g., input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, control related to the release of gaming media) and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), the control means being capable of restricting the execution of the predetermined control at a predetermined timing (e.g., the timing when a predetermined value is satisfied by winning at each winning slot or the timing when a special game is ended) when the value of specific information counted due to the establishment of a counting condition (e.g., the value of the maximum increase) meets a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000), and the alarm means being capable of restricting the execution of the predetermined control when the execution of the predetermined control is restricted, the alarm means being capable of notifying the user of information related to the restriction (e.g., when a winning limit device is in operation). The device is characterized in that it can notify the player that "play has ended for today" and, if the power is restored after the value of the specific information has met a predetermined value and the execution of the predetermined control has been restricted, it can notify the player of the information relating to the restriction at a first timing (e.g., immediately after the power is restored), and, if the power is restored after the value of the specific information has met a predetermined value and before the execution of the predetermined control has been restricted, it can notify the player of the information relating to the restriction at a second timing after the first timing (e.g., when the jackpot game ends). This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

(AE) A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using game value owned by a player, the machine comprising a control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) for executing predetermined controls (e.g., input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, control related to the release of gaming media) and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), the control means being capable of restricting the execution of the predetermined control at a predetermined timing (e.g., the timing when a predetermined value is satisfied by winning at each winning slot or the timing when a special game is ended) when the value of specific information counted due to the establishment of a counting condition (e.g., the value of the maximum increase) meets a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000), and the alarm means being capable of restricting the execution of the predetermined control at a predetermined timing (e.g., the timing when a predetermined value is satisfied by winning at each winning slot or the timing when a special game is ended) when the execution of the predetermined control is restricted, and the alarm means being capable of restricting the execution of the predetermined control at a first alarm mode (e.g., when the winning limit device is operating). The game ends today), and when the power is restored while the information related to the restriction is being notified in the first notification mode, the information related to the restriction is notified in a second notification mode different from the first notification mode (for example, the winning limit device is operating, please clear the RWM). This prevents a decline in interest in the game.

(AF) A sixth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using game value owned by a player, the machine being equipped with a control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) for executing predetermined controls (e.g., input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, control related to the release of gaming media) and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), the control means being capable of restricting the execution of the predetermined control at a predetermined timing (e.g., the timing when a predetermined value is satisfied by winning at each winning slot or the timing when a special game is ended) when the value of specific information counted due to the establishment of a counting condition (e.g., the value of the maximum increase) meets a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000), and the alarm means being capable of restricting the execution of the predetermined control at a predetermined timing (e.g., the timing when a predetermined value is satisfied by winning at each winning slot or the timing when a special game is ended) when the execution of the predetermined control is restricted, the alarm means being capable of restricting the execution of the predetermined control in a predetermined alarm manner (e.g., when the winning limit device is operating The game ends today), and even if the power is restored while the information related to the restriction is being notified in the predetermined notification manner, the information related to the restriction is still notified in the predetermined notification manner. This prevents a decline in interest in the game.

(AJ) A seventh configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using gaming value owned by a player, the machine comprising a first control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) for executing predetermined control (e.g., input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, control related to the firing of gaming media), and a second control means (performance control board 130) for executing control in response to commands transmitted from the first control means, the first control means being configured to execute a control process when the value of specific information counted due to the establishment of a counting condition (e.g., the value of the maximum increase) meets a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000). In this case, the execution of the predetermined control can be restricted at a predetermined timing (for example, when a predetermined value is satisfied by winning at each winning slot, or when a special game ends), and the second control means can execute a customer waiting effect (customer waiting standby effect, customer waiting demo effect) when a predetermined condition is met (for example, no fluctuation is performed for a predetermined time, a customer waiting designation command is received), and before the execution of the predetermined control is restricted, the customer waiting effect can be executed, but after the execution of the predetermined control is restricted, the execution of the customer waiting effect can be restricted. This prevents a decline in interest in the game.

(AK) The eighth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a game using gaming value owned by a player, comprising a control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) for executing predetermined controls (e.g., input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, control related to the release of gaming media), notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76, display unit 174), and a counting operation unit (counting and a number button 20), and the control means can restrict the execution of the predetermined control at a predetermined timing (for example, when each winning slot is won and a predetermined value is reached, or when a special game ends) when the value of the specific information counted due to the establishment of the counting condition (for example, the value of the maximum increase number) reaches a predetermined value (for example, 95,000), and the notification means can execute a notification that prompts the player to operate the counting operation unit (for example, press the counting button to count). This prevents a decline in interest in the game.

(AL) The ninth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the game value owned by the player, and includes a control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that executes predetermined controls (e.g., input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, control related to the release of game media) and a notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and the control means can restrict the execution of the predetermined control at a predetermined timing (e.g., the timing when a predetermined value is met by winning at each winning slot or the timing when the special game ends) when the value of the specific information counted by the establishment of the counting condition (e.g., the value of the maximum increase) meets a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000), and the notification means can execute a predetermined attention promotion notification (attention to addiction, attention to forgetting to take a card) in accordance with the restriction on the execution of the predetermined control. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

(AN) A tenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using game value owned by a player, comprising a control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that executes predetermined controls (e.g., input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, control related to the firing of gaming media) and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display device 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), wherein the control means is capable of restricting the execution of the predetermined control at a predetermined timing (e.g., the timing when a predetermined value is satisfied by winning each winning slot or the timing when a special game ends) when the value of specific information counted when a counting condition is satisfied (e.g., the value of the maximum increase) meets a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000), and the alarm means is capable of alarming that it has a function for restricting the execution of the predetermined control (e.g., this machine may stop playing when a predetermined number of points are won, this machine is equipped with a winning limit device). This helps prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

(AO) As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine in which a game can be played using gaming value owned by a player, the machine is provided with a control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that executes predetermined controls (e.g., input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, control related to the release of gaming media) and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and the control means is configured to notify the player that the value of specific information counted when a counting condition is met (e.g., the value of the maximum increase number) is a predetermined value. When a certain value (e.g. 95,000) is reached, the execution of the predetermined control can be restricted at a predetermined timing (e.g. when each winning slot is won and a predetermined value is reached, or when a special game ends), and the notification means can notify the player of predetermined game information related to the game value acquired by the player (e.g. information such as acquisition of xx shots, for example information indicating the value of specific information), and when the value of the specific information reaches a predetermined value, the predetermined game information can be notified in a specific manner (e.g. MAX acquisition). This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

(AP) A twelfth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that is capable of executing a game using a gaming value owned by a player and that is capable of executing a pre-determination (e.g., a first pre-determination process) prior to determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and is equipped with a first control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that executes a predetermined control (e.g., input control process, special chart special power control process, normal chart normal power control process, control related to the launch of gaming media), and a second control means (presentation control board 130) that executes control in response to a command transmitted from the first control means, The first control means can restrict the execution of the predetermined control at a predetermined timing (for example, when a predetermined value is reached by winning at each winning slot or when a special game ends) when the value of the specific information counted by the establishment of the counting condition (for example, the value of the maximum increase) reaches a predetermined value (for example, 95,000), and the second control means can execute a pre-performance (a look-ahead performance) based on the pre-determination, and can restrict the execution of the pre-performance when a predetermined condition for restricting the execution of the pre-performance is established before the value of the specific information reaches the predetermined value. This prevents a decline in interest in the game.

(Contents of the invention relating to gaming machine information of the winning limit device described in this embodiment)
Here, in conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines in which a player plays using a gaming value owned by the player. Among such gaming machines, there are some that transmit information from the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine (for example, see Figures 4 to 9 of JP 2021-104306 A). However, there is still room for improvement in transmitting information.

(AG) As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine in which a game can be played using gaming value owned by a player, the machine is provided with a control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) for executing predetermined controls (e.g., input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, control related to the firing of gaming media), and a gaming information transmission means (frame control board 120) for transmitting gaming information (e.g., HC/fraud monitoring information) to the outside of the gaming machine (dedicated unit 170), and the control means transmits the value of specific information (e.g., maximum increase When the value of the number of winnings reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000), the execution of the predetermined control can be restricted at a predetermined timing (e.g., when each winning slot is won and a predetermined value is reached, or when a special game ends), and when the execution of the predetermined control is restricted, the game information transmission means can transmit predetermined game information (information in which Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 is "1") to the outside of the gaming machine (dedicated unit 170), and when power is restored during the transmission of the predetermined game information, the predetermined game information can be retransmitted. This makes it possible to improve the accuracy of transmitting information from the gaming machine.

(AH) A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing advantageous games (jackpot games, small jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, which includes a control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that executes predetermined controls (e.g., input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, control related to the release of gaming media), and a gaming information transmission means (frame control board 120) that transmits gaming information (e.g., HC/fraud monitoring information) to the outside of the gaming machine (dedicated unit 170), and the control means is capable of restricting the execution of the predetermined control at a predetermined timing (e.g., the timing when a predetermined value is satisfied by winning at each winning port or the timing when a special game is ended) when the value of specific information (e.g., the value of the maximum increase) counted due to the establishment of a counting condition meets a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000), and the gaming information transmission means is capable of restricting the execution of the predetermined control at a predetermined timing (e.g., the timing when a predetermined value is satisfied by winning at each winning port, or the timing when a special game is ended), and When the execution of the predetermined control is restricted, it is possible to transmit predetermined game information (information in which Bit 6 of the fraud detection state 1 is "1") to the outside of the gaming machine (dedicated unit 170), and the period from when the value of the specific information meets the predetermined value to when the execution of the predetermined control is restricted when the advantageous game is not being played (for example, when a prize is won at the first start port 45 or the like during the execution of the normal game state, the predetermined value is reached and the winning limit device is activated) to when the value of the specific information meets the predetermined value while the advantageous game is being played and the execution of the predetermined control is then restricted (for example, when a prize is won at the big winning port 50 or the like during the execution of a big win game, the predetermined value is reached and the winning limit device is activated after the big win). This is characterized in that it is possible to make the period from when the value of the specific information meets the predetermined value to when the predetermined game information is transmitted different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the accuracy of transmitting information from the gaming machine.

(AI) A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a game using gaming value owned by a player and capable of controlling an ejection mode for ejecting gaming media used in the game outside the gaming machine, the gaming machine being equipped with a control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) for executing predetermined controls (e.g., input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, control related to the firing of gaming media), and a gaming information transmission means (frame control board 120) for transmitting gaming information (e.g., HC/fraud monitoring information) to the outside of the gaming machine (dedicated unit 170), and the control means, when the value of specific information counted due to the establishment of a counting condition (e.g., the value of the maximum increase number) meets a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000), transmits a predetermined timing. The execution of the predetermined control can be restricted (for example, when a prize is won at each winning slot and a predetermined value is satisfied, or when a special game ends), and when the execution of the predetermined control is restricted, the game information transmission means can transmit predetermined game information (information in which Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 is "1") to the outside of the gaming machine (dedicated unit 170), and if power is restored during the transmission of the predetermined game information and the ejection mode control is not being executed when the power is restored, the predetermined game information can be transmitted again, and if power is restored during the transmission of the predetermined game information and the ejection mode control is being executed when the power is restored, the retransmission of the predetermined game information can be restricted. This makes it possible to improve the accuracy of transmitting information from the gaming machine.

(Contents of the invention related to the acquisition limit device (security) described in this embodiment)
Here, among conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines in which a player plays using a gaming value owned by the player. Some of these gaming machines are equipped with a forced termination means that forcibly terminates a game on the condition that the difference between the number of balls indicated by the ball information and the number of balls equivalent to the total loan amount reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, see Patent No. 6318340). Although the forced termination of a game can realize a sound game, it does not take into consideration security performance, and improvement was necessary.

(AM) The first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using gaming value owned by a player, comprising a control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) for executing predetermined controls (e.g., input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, control related to the release of gaming media), a detection means (e.g., first magnetic detection sensor 53a, second magnetic detection sensor 53b, radio wave detection sensor 54a) for detecting predetermined abnormalities, and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display device 70). 73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), the control means can restrict the execution of the specified control at a specified timing (for example, when each winning slot is won and the specified value is reached, or when a special game ends) when the value of the specific information counted when the counting condition is met (for example, the value of the maximum increase) reaches a specified value (for example, 95,000), and the detection means is capable of detecting the specified abnormality even after the execution of the specified control is restricted. This makes it possible to prevent a deterioration in security performance.

(Contents of the invention related to the relationship between the processing order of various control contents and the implementation area)
Here, in conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines that use gaming media to play games. Among such gaming machines, there are those equipped with a first control means for controlling the progress of the game and a second control means for controlling the provision of gaming value (see, for example, JP 2021-083516 A). However, in the gaming machines described in the above patent documents, there was room for improvement in the efficiency of control for operating the gaming machines.

The first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) having a first control area (inner area ROM area) that stores a first control program (inner area program) for performing a first control (control of the progress of a game), a second control area (outer area ROM) that is an area different from the first control area and stores a second control program (outer area program) for performing a second control (complementary control of a game), a first RWM area (inner area RWM area) that stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the first control and is not updated in the second control, and a second RWM area (outer area RWM) that is an area different from the first RWM area and stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the second control and is not updated in the first control, The system can execute a value granting process (payout control process, game ball number update process) that grants a game value (a prize ball) based on the winning of a prize ball (a prize ball won by a player), a first information update process (increase counter update process, maximum increment update process) that updates the first game information (increase counter, maximum increment) using the information of the granted game value, a control stop process (acquisition upper limit device operation determination process) that stops the first control based on the first game information, a second information update process (display performance information calculation process, game machine performance information calculation process) that updates the second game information (display performance information, game machine performance information) using the information of the granted game value, and an information output process (display control process, game machine information notification process) that outputs the second game information to an output target (frame control display 125, dedicated unit 170). The first information update process and the second information update process are executed using the second control program (outside area program). Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of control for operating the game machine.

The second configuration for solving the above problem is a game in which a player can play using the game value (number of game balls) he owns, and includes a first control area (inside area ROM area) that stores a first control program (inside area program) for performing a first control related to the progress of the game (input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, acquisition upper limit device operation determination processing, etc.), a second control area (outside area ROM area) that is an area different from the first control area and stores a second control program (outside area program) for performing a second control different from the first control (increase number counter update processing, maximum increase number update processing, error control processing, etc.), a first RWM area (inside area RWM area) that stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the first control and is not updated in the second control, and a second RWM area (outside area RWM area) that is an area different from the first RWM area and stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the second control and is not updated in the first control. a third control area (inner area ROM area) storing a third control program (inner area program) for performing a third control related to updating the gaming value owned by a player (a gaming ball number update process, a gaming ball count process, a gaming ball lending process, etc.), a fourth control area (outer area ROM area) which is an area different from the third control area and stores a fourth control program (outer area program) for performing a fourth control different from the third control (various error notification control processes, a display performance information calculation process, a gaming machine performance information calculation process, etc.), a third RWM area (inner area RWM area) which stores variable data which is updated and referred to in the third control and is not updated in the fourth control, and a fourth RWM area (outer area RWM area) which is an area different from the third RWM area and stores variable data which is updated and referred to in the fourth control and is not updated in the third control. This makes it possible to improve the efficiency of control for operating the gaming machine.

A third configuration for solving the above problem is a device that allows a player to play using his/her own game value (number of game balls), and includes a launching means (launching device 92) for launching game media (game balls) using the game value owned by the player, a first control area (inner area ROM area) that stores a first control program (inner area program) for performing a first control related to the launch of the game media (starting and stopping output of the launch permission signal), a second control area (outer area ROM area) that is an area different from the first control area and stores a second control program (outer area program) for performing a second control different from the first control (increase counter update process, maximum increment update process, error control process, etc.), a first RWM area (inner area RWM area) that stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the first control and is not updated in the second control, and a third control area (inner area RWM area) that is an area different from the first RWM area and stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the second control and is not updated in the first control. A first control means (main control board 110) having a second RWM area (outside area RWM area), a third control area (inside area ROM area) storing a third control program (inside area program) for performing a third control related to updating the game value owned by a player (game ball number update processing, game ball count processing, game ball lending processing, etc.), and a fourth control area (inside area ROM area) which is an area different from the third control area and for performing a fourth control different from the third control (various error notification control processing, display performance information calculation processing, gaming machine performance information calculation processing, etc.). The second control means (frame control board 120) has a fourth control area (outside area ROM area) that stores a program (outside area program), a third RWM area (inside area RWM area) that stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the third control and not updated in the fourth control, and a fourth RWM area (outside area RWM area) that is an area different from the third RWM area and stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the fourth control and not updated in the third control. Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of control for operating the gaming machine.

As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, a first control means (main control board 110) capable of playing a game and having a first control area (inner area ROM area) storing a first control program (inner area program) for performing a first control related to the progress of the game (input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, acquisition upper limit device operation determination processing, etc.), a second control area (outer area ROM area) which is an area different from the first control area and stores a second control program (outer area program) for performing a second control different from the first control (increase number counter update processing, maximum increase number update processing, error control processing, etc.), a first RWM area (inner area RWM area) which stores variable data which is updated and referenced in the first control and is not updated in the second control, and a second RWM area (outer area RWM area) which is an area different from the first RWM area and stores variable data which is updated and referenced in the second control and is not updated in the first control, and a predetermined information (game machine setting a third control area (ROM area) for storing a third control program (in-area program) for performing a third control (game machine information notification process, game ball counting process, game ball lending process, etc.) for outputting information on the game machine, such as game machine position information, game machine performance information, hall control/fraud monitoring information, counting notification, loan receipt result response, etc.) to the outside of the game machine; and a fourth control program which is an area different from the third control area and is for performing a fourth control (various error notification control process, display performance information calculation process, game machine performance information calculation process, etc.) different from the third control. The second control means (frame control board 120) has a fourth control area (outside area ROM area) that stores a program (outside area program), a third RWM area (inside area RWM area) that stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the third control and not updated in the fourth control, and a fourth RWM area (outside area RWM area) that is an area different from the third RWM area and stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the fourth control and not updated in the third control. Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of control for operating the gaming machine.

As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, a first control area (ROM area) in which a first control program (inside area program) for performing a first control related to the progress of a game (input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, acquisition upper limit device operation determination processing, etc.) related to the progress of the game is stored, a second control area (ROM area outside area) which is an area different from the first control area and stores a second control program (outside area program) for performing a second control different from the first control (increase number counter update processing, maximum increase number update processing, error control processing, etc.), a first RWM area (inside area RWM area) which stores variable data which is updated and referenced in the first control and is not updated in the second control, and a second RWM area (outside area RWM area) which is an area different from the first RWM area and stores variable data which is updated and referenced in the second control and is not updated in the first control. A control means (main control board 110), a third control area (in-area ROM area) storing a third control program (in-area program) for performing a third control (display control process) for notifying a player of the game value owned by the player (displaying the game value on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135), and a fourth control program (in-area program) for performing a fourth control (various error notification control processes, display performance information calculation processes, gaming machine performance information calculation processes, etc.) different from the third control, which is an area different from the third control area. The second control means (frame control board 120) has a fourth control area (outside area ROM area) that stores a RAM (outside area program), a third RWM area (inside area RWM area) that stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the third control and not updated in the fourth control, and a fourth RWM area (outside area RWM area) that is an area different from the third RWM area and stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the fourth control and not updated in the third control. Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of control for operating the gaming machine.

As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, a player can play using the game value (number of game balls) he owns, and a first control area (ROM area) stores a first control program (intra-area program) for performing a first control related to the progress of the game (input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, acquisition upper limit device operation determination processing, etc.), and a second control (increase counter update processing, maximum increase update processing, error control processing, etc.) which is an area different from the first control area and different from the first control. a first control means (main control board 110) having a second control area (outside area ROM area) for storing a second control program (outside area program) for performing the first control, a first RWM area (inside area RWM area) for storing variable data which is updated and referenced in the first control and is not updated in the second control, and a second RWM area (outside area RWM area) which is an area different from the first RWM area and stores variable data which is updated and referenced in the second control and is not updated in the first control; a third control area (inner ROM area) for storing a third control program (inner program) for performing a third control related to the update of the game value (game ball number update process, game ball count process, game ball lending process, etc.); a fourth control area (outer ROM area) which is an area different from the third control area and stores a fourth control program (outer program) for performing a fourth control different from the third control; and a third RWM for storing variable data which is updated and referred to in the third control and is not updated in the fourth control. In a gaming machine equipped with a second control means (frame control board 120) having a fourth RWM area (inner area RWM area) that is different from the third RWM area and stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the fourth control and is not updated in the third control, communication between the first control means and the second control means is executed using a program (inner area program) stored in the first control area or a program (inner area program) stored in the third control area. This makes it possible to improve the efficiency of control for operating the gaming machine.

The seventh configuration for solving the above problem is a first control means (main control board 11) that allows a player to play using the game value (number of game balls) owned by the player, and has a first control area (inner area ROM area) that stores a first control program (inner area program) for performing a first control related to the progress of the game (input control processing, special chart special electric control processing, normal chart normal electric control processing, acquisition upper limit device operation determination processing, etc.), a second control area (outer area ROM area) that is an area different from the first control area and stores a second control program (outer area program) for performing a second control different from the first control (increase number counter update processing, maximum increase number update processing, error control processing, etc.), a first RWM area (inner area RWM area) that stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the first control and is not updated in the second control, and a second RWM area (outer area RWM area) that is an area different from the first RWM area and stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the second control and is not updated in the first control. 0), a third control area (in-area ROM area) storing a third control program (in-area program) for performing a third control (gaming machine information notification process) for outputting specific information (gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, hall control/fraud monitoring information, etc.) to the outside of the gaming machine, and a fourth control area (out-area ROM area) which is an area different from the third control area and stores a fourth control program (out-area program) for performing a fourth control (gaming machine installation information reception process, gaming machine performance information calculation process, etc.) for generating the specific information. In a gaming machine equipped with a second control means (frame control board 120) having a ROM area, a third RWM area (inner area RWM area) that stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the third control and not updated in the fourth control, and a fourth RWM area (outer area RWM area) that is an area different from the third RWM area and stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the fourth control and not updated in the third control, the specific information is a predetermined calculation result related to the gaming value. Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of control for operating the gaming machine.

As an eighth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a first control means (main control board 110) is provided for controlling the progress of the game (input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, acquisition upper limit device operation determination processing, etc.), and a second control means (frame control board 120) for controlling the awarding of gaming value (game ball count update processing, etc.), and the first control means performs first control (hall control/fraud monitoring information management processing, etc.) for generating first information (gaming machine installation information, hall control/fraud monitoring information, etc.) and second control means (frame control board 120) for transmitting the first information to the second control means. The second control means executes a third control (gaming machine installation information reception process, gaming machine performance information calculation process, gaming ball count process, gaming ball lending process, etc.) for generating second information (gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, hall control/fraud monitoring information, counting notification, loan receipt result response, etc.), a fourth control (gaming machine installation information reception process, gaming machine information reception process, etc.) for receiving the first information, and a fifth control (gaming machine information notification process, etc.) for transmitting the first information and the second information to the outside of the gaming machine (dedicated unit 170, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the control for operating the gaming machine.

As a ninth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a first control means (main control board 110) is provided for controlling the progress of the game (input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, acquisition upper limit device operation determination processing, etc.), and a second control means (frame control board 120) for controlling the provision of gaming value (game ball count update processing, etc.), the first control means executes a first control (hall control/fraud monitoring information management processing, etc.) for generating first information (gaming machine installation information, hall control/fraud monitoring information, etc.) and a second control (hall control/fraud monitoring information management processing, etc.) for transmitting the first information to the second control means, and the second control means executes a second control (hall control/fraud monitoring information management processing, etc.) for transmitting the second information to the second control means. The control unit executes a third control (gaming machine installation information reception process, gaming machine performance information calculation process, gaming ball counting process, gaming ball lending process, etc.) for generating information (gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, hall control/fraud monitoring information, counting notification, loan receipt result response, etc.), a fourth control (gaming machine installation information reception process, gaming machine information reception process, etc.) for receiving the first information, a fifth control (gaming machine information notification process, etc.) for transmitting the first information and the second information to the outside of the gaming machine (dedicated unit 170, etc.), and a sixth control (gaming ball counting process, gaming ball lending process, etc.) for transmitting the third information (counting notification, loan receipt result response, etc.) different from the second information generated by the second control unit to the outside of the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the control for operating the gaming machine.

The tenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of playing a game by launching a gaming medium (gaming ball) into a gaming area, which includes a launching means (launching device 92) for launching the gaming medium into the gaming area, a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game (input control processing, special chart special electric control processing, normal chart normal electric control processing, acquisition upper limit device operation judgment processing, etc.), and a second control means (frame control board 120) for controlling the granting of gaming value (prize balls) (game ball number update processing, etc.), and the first control means and the second control means are capable of permitting the launch of the gaming medium (outputting a launch permission signal), and when the launch is permitted by the first control means and the second control means, the launching means is capable of launching the gaming medium. Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of control for operating the gaming machine.

(Contents of the invention relating to an example of a performance in which the number of game balls owned by a player is counted)
Here, in conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines that use gaming media to play games. Among these gaming machines, there are those equipped with a first control means capable of updating and storing the gaming value owned by the player and executing a counting process to move the gaming value outside the gaming machine, and a second control means that controls the presentation related to the game (see, for example, JP 2021-083516 A). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there was room for improvement in the presentation when counting the gaming value.

The first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using a gaming value (number of gaming balls) owned by the player, and includes a first control means (frame control board 120) capable of executing a counting process (gaming ball counting process) that updates and stores the gaming value owned by the player and moves the gaming value outside the gaming machine, a second control means (performance control board 130) that controls the presentation related to the game, and an operation unit (counting button 20) for causing the first control means to perform the counting process, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a predetermined presentation (counting notification presentation, achievement presentation) while the counting process is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's satisfaction by the presentation when counting the gaming value.

(Contents of the invention relating to the relationship between the operation notification of the acquisition limit device and the output of a specific sound)
Here, among conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines that can provide a gaming value to a player depending on the result of the game. Among such gaming machines, there are some that can stop the progress control of the game depending on the value of the gaming value provided to the player (for example, see JP 2023-256671 A). However, in the gaming machines described in the above patent documents, there was a problem that interest in the game decreased due to the stop of the progress control of the game.

(i) A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of awarding gaming value (gaming media, gaming media data) to a player depending on the result of a game, comprising: a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player; a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping control of the progress of the game (activating an acquisition upper limit device) depending on the amount of the gaming value (MY = 95,000) awarded to the player from the establishment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0); and a presentation control means (presentation control means) capable of executing a variable presentation that displays multiple presentation patterns in a variable manner in a display area of a display means (image display device) depending on the judgment result of the judgment means. The device is equipped with a control board 130) and a sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting sound, and the presentation control means is capable of outputting a specific sound (temporary stop sound) when the presentation pattern becomes recognizable (temporary stop) in a predetermined display area (middle presentation pattern 70a display area) in the first variable presentation (variable presentation pattern 5), and is capable of not outputting the specific sound when the presentation pattern becomes recognizable (temporary stop) in the predetermined display area (middle presentation pattern 70a display area) in the second variable presentation (variable presentation pattern 8), and is capable of limiting the output of the specific sound if the game progress control stops during the execution of the first variable presentation. This prevents a decline in interest in the game.

(b) A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of awarding gaming value (gaming media, gaming media data) to a player depending on the result of the game, comprising: a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player; a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping control of the progress of the game (activating an acquisition upper limit device) depending on the amount of the gaming value (MY = 95,000) awarded to the player from the establishment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0); a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of executing a variable presentation that displays multiple presentation patterns in a variable manner in a display area of a display means (image display device) depending on the judgment result of the judgment means; and a sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting sound. The presentation control means is capable of outputting a specific sound (temporary stop sound) when the presentation pattern becomes recognizable (temporarily stopped) in a predetermined display area (presentation area of presentation pattern 70a in the middle) in the variable presentation, and the presentation pattern includes a normal presentation pattern (a pattern showing numbers from "1" to "9") and a specific presentation pattern (pseudo pattern) that is different from the normal presentation pattern and can suggest the execution of a specific presentation, and the specific sound includes a first specific sound that is output when the normal presentation pattern becomes recognizable (temporarily stopped) and a second specific sound that is output when the specific presentation pattern becomes recognizable (temporarily stopped), and is characterized in that the output of the first specific sound can be limited if the game progress control stops during the execution of the variable presentation. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game.

(c) A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of awarding gaming value (gaming media, gaming media data) to a player depending on the result of the game, comprising: a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player; a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping control of the progress of the game (activating an acquisition upper limit device) depending on the amount of the gaming value (MY = 95,000) awarded to the player from the establishment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0); a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of executing a variable presentation that displays multiple presentation patterns in a variable manner in a display area of a display means (image display device) depending on the judgment result of the judgment means; and a sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting sound. The presentation control means is capable of outputting a specific sound (temporary stop sound) when the presentation pattern becomes recognizable (temporarily stopped) in a predetermined display area (presentation area of presentation pattern 70a in the middle) in the variable presentation, and the presentation pattern includes a normal presentation pattern (a pattern showing numbers from "1" to "9") and a specific presentation pattern (pseudo pattern) that is different from the normal presentation pattern and can suggest the execution of a specific presentation, and the specific sound includes a first specific sound that is output when the normal presentation pattern becomes recognizable (temporarily stopped) and a second specific sound that is output when the specific presentation pattern becomes recognizable (temporarily stopped), and is characterized in that if the game progress control stops during the execution of the variable presentation, the output of the second specific sound can be limited. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game.

(ii) A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of granting a gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player according to the result of the game, comprising: a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player; a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping the progress control of the game (activating an acquisition upper limit device) according to the amount of the gaming value granted to the player from the establishment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0) (MY = 95,000); a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of executing a variable presentation that displays a plurality of presentation patterns in a display area of a display means (image display device) according to the judgment result of the judgment means; and a sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting sound, the presentation control means being configured to select a first presentation mode (presentation mode A) and a second presentation mode (presentation mode B) for the first presentation mode. The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to control a first presentation mode (presentation mode B) different from the first presentation mode, and when the presentation pattern becomes recognizable (temporarily stopped) in a predetermined display area (presentation pattern 70a display area) in the variable presentation, a specific sound (temporary stop sound) can be output, and different specific sounds can be output when the first variable presentation (variable presentation pattern 1) is executed in the first presentation mode and when the first variable presentation (variable presentation pattern 1) is executed in the second presentation mode, the same specific sound can be output when the second variable presentation (variable presentation pattern 6) is executed in the first presentation mode and when the second variable presentation (variable presentation pattern 6) is executed in the second presentation mode, and when the game progress control stops during the execution of the variable presentation that outputs the specific sound, the output of the specific sound can be limited. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game.

(e) A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of awarding gaming value (gaming media, gaming media data) to a player depending on the result of a game, the machine comprising: a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player; a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping control of the progress of the game (activating an acquisition upper limit device) depending on the amount of the gaming value (MY = 95,000) awarded to the player from the establishment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0); a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of executing a variable presentation that displays a plurality of presentation patterns in a display area of a display means (image display device) depending on the judgment result of the judgment means; and a sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting sound, the presentation control means being capable of controlling a first presentation mode (presentation mode A) and a second presentation mode (presentation mode B) different from the first presentation mode, and in the variable presentation In a predetermined display area (a display area of the performance pattern 70a), when the performance pattern becomes recognizable (temporarily stopped), a specific sound (temporarily stopped sound) can be output, and the performance pattern includes a normal performance pattern (a pattern showing the numbers "1" to "9") and a specific performance pattern (pseudo pattern) that is different from the normal performance pattern and can suggest the execution of a specific performance, different specific sounds can be output when the normal performance pattern becomes recognizable (temporarily stopped) in the first variable performance and when the specific performance pattern becomes recognizable (temporarily stopped) in the first variable performance, the same specific sound can be output when the second variable performance (variable performance pattern 6) is executed in the first performance mode and when the second variable performance (variable performance pattern 6) is executed in the second performance mode, and when the progress control of the game stops during the execution of the variable performance that outputs the specific sound, the output of the specific sound can be limited. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game.

(Contents of invention related to reach line production)
Here, in conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines that can execute reach effects during variable effects depending on the result of determining whether or not to execute a special game. Among such gaming machines, there are some that can execute reach line display effects when a reach is formed (see, for example, JP 2021-83746 A). However, in gaming machines such as those described in the above patent documents, further improvements are desired in order to improve the interest of the game.

(e) A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of awarding gaming value (gaming media, gaming media data) to a player depending on the result of a game, comprising a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of executing a variable presentation that variably displays multiple presentation patterns in a display area of a display means (image display device) depending on the judgment result of the judgment means, wherein the presentation control means is capable of controlling a first presentation mode (presentation mode A) and a second presentation mode (presentation mode B) different from the first presentation mode, and capable of displaying different background images (presentation mode A background image, presentation mode B background image) in the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode. In the variable presentation, the presentation symbols are displayed recognizably (temporarily stopped) in a plurality of display areas (the left presentation symbol 70a display area, the right presentation symbol 70a display area), so that a reach presentation that creates the expectation of the execution of the special game can be executed. In the reach presentation, a specific image (reach line image) can be displayed across the presentation symbols that are displayed recognizably. A common specific image (a "REACH" image) can be displayed when the reach presentation is executed during the execution of the first presentation mode and when the reach presentation is executed during the execution of the second presentation mode. When the specific image is displayed, an emphasis presentation (operation at the time of reaching) can be executed by the presentation symbols that are displayed recognizably. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

(G) A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of awarding gaming value (gaming media, gaming media data) to a player depending on the result of a game, comprising a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of executing a variable presentation that variably displays multiple presentation patterns in a display area of a display means (image display device) depending on the judgment result of the judgment means, wherein the presentation control means is capable of controlling a first presentation mode (presentation mode A) and a second presentation mode (presentation mode B) different from the first presentation mode, and is capable of displaying different background images (presentation mode A background image, presentation mode B background image) in the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode, In the variable presentation, the presentation symbols are displayed recognizably (temporarily stopped) in a plurality of display areas (the left presentation symbol 70a display area, the right presentation symbol 70a display area), so that a reach presentation that creates anticipation of the execution of the special game can be executed; in the reach presentation, a specific image (reach line image) can be displayed across the presentation symbols that are displayed recognizably; different specific images ("REACH" image, "CHANCE" image) can be displayed when the reach presentation is executed during execution of the first presentation mode and when the reach presentation is executed during execution of the second presentation mode; and when the specific image is displayed, an emphasis presentation (operation at the time of reach formation) can be executed by the presentation symbols that are displayed recognizably. This makes it possible to increase interest in the game.

(H) A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of awarding gaming value (gaming media, gaming media data) to a player depending on the result of a game, the machine comprising a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of executing a variable presentation that variably displays multiple presentation patterns in a display area of a display means (image display device) depending on the judgment result of the judgment means, and a sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting sound, the presentation control means being capable of controlling a first presentation mode (presentation mode A) and a second presentation mode (presentation mode B) different from the first presentation mode, and different presentation modes being displayed in the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode. It is possible to output variable BGM (variable BGM 1, variable BGM 2), and in the variable performance, the performance symbols are displayed recognizably (temporarily stopped) in multiple display areas (the left performance symbol 70a display area, the right performance symbol 70a display area) to execute a reach performance that gives the expectation of the execution of the special game, and when the reach performance is executed, a specific sound (the sound of "reach") different from the variable BGM can be output, and when the reach performance is executed in the first performance mode and when the reach performance is executed in the second performance mode, a common specific sound can be output, and when the specific sound is output, an emphasis performance (operation when a reach is formed) can be executed by the performance symbols that are displayed recognizably. This makes it possible to increase interest in the game.

(R) A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of awarding a gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player depending on the result of the game, comprising a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of executing a variable presentation that variably displays multiple presentation patterns in a display area of a display means (image display device) depending on the judgment result of the judgment means, and a sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting sound, the presentation control means being capable of controlling a first presentation mode (presentation mode A) and a second presentation mode (presentation mode B) different from the first presentation mode, and different variable background music (variable BGM) is provided between the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode. M1, variable BGM2), and in the variable performance, the performance symbols are recognizably displayed (temporarily stopped) in a plurality of display areas (left performance symbol 70a display area, right performance symbol 70a display area) to execute a reach performance that creates anticipation of the execution of the special game, and when the reach performance is executed, a specific sound (a "reach" sound) different from the variable BGM can be output, and when the reach performance is executed in the first performance mode and when the reach performance is executed in the second performance mode, different specific sounds (a "reach" sound, a "chance" sound) can be output, and when the specific sound is output, an emphasis performance (a reach formation operation) can be executed by the performance symbols that are recognizably displayed. This makes it possible to increase interest in the game.

(Contents of the invention relating to the relationship between the operation notification of the acquisition limit device and specific light emission)
Here, in conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines that can give a game value to a player depending on the result of the game. Among such gaming machines, there are some that can stop the progress control of the game depending on the value amount of the game value given to the player (for example, see JP 2023-256671 A). However, in the gaming machines described in the above patent documents, there was a problem that the motivation to play decreases due to the stop of the progress control of the game.

(J) The first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of awarding gaming value (gaming media, gaming media data) to a player depending on the result of the game, comprising: a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player; a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping control of the progress of the game (activating an acquisition upper limit device) depending on the amount of the gaming value (MY = 95,000) awarded to the player from the establishment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0); and a variable performance capable of executing a variable display of multiple performance patterns on a display means (image display device) depending on the judgment result of the judgment means. The device is equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) and a light-emitting means capable of emitting light (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and the performance control means is capable of causing the light-emitting means to emit specific light (rainbow light) during a predetermined period (jackpot ending period, customer waiting demo performance period), and when power is restored while the control of the game progress is not stopped, the light-emitting means can emit specific light (rainbow light), but when power is restored while the control of the game progress is stopped, the light-emitting means can be restricted from emitting specific light (rainbow light). This prevents a decline in motivation to play.

(k) A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of awarding gaming value (gaming media, gaming media data) to a player depending on the result of the game, comprising a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping control of the progress of the game (activating an acquisition upper limit device) depending on the amount of the gaming value (MY = 95,000) awarded to the player from the establishment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0), and a display means (image display device) that variably displays multiple performance patterns depending on the judgment result of the judgment means. The device is equipped with a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of executing a variable presentation that changes the appearance of the game, and a light-emitting means capable of emitting light (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and the presentation control means is capable of causing the light-emitting means to emit a specific light (rainbow light) during a specified period (jackpot ending period, customer waiting demo presentation period), and is capable of causing the light-emitting means to emit a specified light (abnormality notification light) when a specified abnormality occurs, and when the game progress control stops, the specific light emission is limited (T5' in FIG. 188), but the specified light emission can be executed (T6 in FIG. 189). This prevents a decline in motivation to play.

(L) A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of awarding gaming value (gaming media, gaming media data) to a player depending on the result of the game, which comprises a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping the progress control of the game (activating the acquisition upper limit device) depending on the amount of the gaming value (MY = 95,000) awarded to the player from the establishment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0), and a presentation control means (presentation control board 13) capable of executing a variable presentation that displays multiple presentation patterns on a display means (image display device) depending on the judgment result of the judgment means. 0) and light-emitting means capable of emitting light (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), the presentation control means is capable of causing the light-emitting means to emit a specific light (rainbow light) during a predetermined period (jackpot ending period, customer waiting demo presentation period), and is capable of causing the light-emitting means to emit a specific light (abnormality notification light) when a predetermined abnormality occurs, and is capable of ending the execution of the specific light emission when the game progress control stops during the execution of the specific light emission (T5' in FIG. 188), and is capable of continuing the execution of the specific light emission when the game progress control stops during the execution of the specific light emission (T6 in FIG. 189). This prevents a decline in motivation to play.

(Contents of the invention relating to the relationship between warning signs and specific light emission)
Here, in conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines that can issue a warning to a player by display means. Among such gaming machines, there are some that can issue a warning during the ending performance of a big win game and during a second waiting state in which no game is being played (see, for example, JP2017-189663A). However, in the gaming machines described in the above patent documents, there is a problem that the player's motivation to play decreases due to the warning being issued.

(Wa) A first configuration for solving the above problem includes, in a gaming machine capable of awarding gaming value (gaming media, gaming media data) to a player depending on the result of the game, a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping control of the progress of the game (activating an acquisition upper limit device) depending on the amount of the gaming value (MY = 95,000) awarded to the player from the establishment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0), and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of executing a variable presentation that causes a display means (image display device) to display multiple presentation patterns in a variable manner depending on the judgment result of the judgment means, The machine is equipped with a light-emitting means (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76) capable of emitting light, and the performance control means is capable of executing a warning display (addiction warning) to alert the player to a certain warning during a predetermined period (jackpot ending period, customer waiting demo performance period), and when the warning display is not being executed during the predetermined period (T5 to T6 in FIG. 186, T7 to T8 in FIG. 184), the light-emitting means can emit a specific light (rainbow light), and when the warning display is being executed during the predetermined period (T7 to T7 in FIG. 186, T8 to T8 in FIG. 184), the light-emitting means can be restricted from emitting a specific light (rainbow light). This prevents a decline in motivation to play.

(F) A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of awarding gaming value (gaming media, gaming media data) to a player depending on the result of the game, which comprises a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping control of the progress of the game (activating an acquisition upper limit device) depending on the amount of the gaming value (MY = 95,000) awarded to the player from the establishment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0), and a display means (image display device) for variably displaying multiple performance symbols depending on the judgment result of the judgment means. The device is equipped with a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of executing variable presentations, and a light-emitting means capable of emitting light (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and the presentation control means is capable of executing a warning display (addiction warning) that calls the player to a certain attention, and the warning display can be executed in a first period (jackpot ending period) and a second period (customer waiting demo presentation period) different from the first period, and when the warning display is being executed during the first period (T7 onwards in FIG. 186), it is possible to restrict the light-emitting means from emitting a specific light (rainbow light). This prevents players from losing their motivation to play.

(Contents of the invention relating to rainbow luminescence)
Here, among conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines that can perform so-called rainbow effects (rainbow light emission) more suitably (for example, see JP 2022-075900 A). However, in the gaming machines described in the above patent document, there is room for further improvement in terms of suitably performing rainbow light emission.

(No) The first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of awarding a gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player depending on the result of the game, comprising: an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the fulfillment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole); a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on the judgment information; a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific game state (probability change game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state; a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a game performance that changes and displays a performance pattern on a display means (image display device) depending on the judgment result of the judgment means; and a light-emitting means capable of emitting light (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 7). 6), the presentation control means is capable of causing the light-emitting means to emit rainbow light (rainbow light) during the execution of the game presentation (during the variable presentation), the game presentation includes a first game presentation (variable presentation corresponding to a first special symbol) according to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game presentation (variable presentation corresponding to a second special symbol) according to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, the light-emitting means can emit rainbow light when the first game presentation is executed in the normal game state and when the first game presentation is executed in the specific game state, and the number of types of light-emitting patterns in the rainbow light is greater when the first game presentation is executed in the normal game state than when the first game presentation is executed in the specific game state. This allows rainbow light to be preferably executed.

(O) A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of awarding a gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player depending on the result of a game, comprising: an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the fulfillment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole); a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on the judgment information; a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific game state (variable game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state; a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of executing a game presentation that changes and displays a presentation pattern on a display means (image display device) depending on the judgment result of the judgment means; and a light-emitting means capable of emitting light (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76). ), the presentation control means is capable of causing the light-emitting means to emit rainbow light (rainbow light) during the execution of the game presentation (during the variable presentation), the game presentation includes a first game presentation (variable presentation corresponding to a first special symbol) according to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game presentation (variable presentation corresponding to a second special symbol) according to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, the light-emitting means can emit rainbow light when the first game presentation is executed in the normal game state and when the first game presentation is executed in the specific game state, and the number of types of movement directions of the colors constituting the rainbow light is greater when the first game presentation is executed in the normal game state than when the first game presentation is executed in the specific game state. This allows the rainbow light to be preferably executed.

(Y) A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of awarding a gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player depending on the result of a game, comprising a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variable performance that changes the display of the performance pattern depending on the judgment result of the judgment means, a light-emitting means capable of emitting light (frame performance lamp 10c, board surface LED 5b, image display device 70-73, LED of movable performance device 77, LED of performance button 17), and an operation means (performance button 17) that can be operated by the player, and the performance control means is configured to execute a customer waiting performance (customer waiting demo performance) in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not executed. It is possible to execute the output A) and the light emitting means can emit rainbow light (rainbow light) during the execution of the variable performance and the execution of the customer waiting performance, and the rainbow light emission in the customer waiting performance is restricted from starting based on the operation of the operating means (rainbow light does not occur even if the performance button 17 is pressed during the execution of the customer waiting demo performance A), and the rainbow light emission in the variable performance can be started based on the operation of the operating means (rainbow light is emitted when the performance button 17 is pressed in the successful decision performance of the variable performance, a rainbow icon is displayed when the performance button 17 is pressed in the hold button performance, rainbow light is emitted when the performance button 17 is pressed when developing into an SP reach, rainbow light is emitted when the back button is pressed and held during an SP reach). This allows the rainbow light emission to be executed optimally.

(T) A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of awarding a gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player depending on the result of a game, comprising: a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player; a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variable performance that changes the display of a performance pattern depending on the determination result of the determination means; a light-emitting means capable of emitting light (frame performance lamp 10c, board surface LED 5b, image display devices 70 to 73, LED of movable performance device 77, LED of performance button 17); and an operation means (performance button 17) that can be operated by a player, the operation means comprising a first operation means and a second operation means (performance button 17). ), and the performance control means is capable of executing a customer waiting performance (customer waiting demo performance A) in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not executed, and is capable of making the light emitting means emit rainbow light (rainbow light) during the execution of the variable performance and during the execution of the customer waiting performance, and the rainbow light emission in the customer waiting performance can be ended when a start condition based on the operation of the second operation means is met (the rainbow light emission ends when a start winning occurs based on the operation of the launch handle 15), and the rainbow light emission in the variable performance is restricted from being ended based on the operation of the first operation means (the rainbow light emission in the variable performance does not end when the performance button 17 is pressed). This allows the rainbow light emission to be executed in an optimal manner.

(R) As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of providing a gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player according to a game result, the machine is provided with a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variable performance that changes the display of a performance pattern according to the determination result of the determination means, a light-emitting means capable of emitting light (frame performance lamp 10c, board surface LED 5b, image display devices 70 to 73, LED of movable performance device 77, LED of performance button 17), and an operation means (performance button 17) operable by a player, the operation means including a first operation means and a second operation means (launch handle) different from the first operation means (performance button 17), the performance control means being capable of executing a customer waiting performance (customer waiting demo performance A) in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not executed, and during the execution of the variable performance and during the execution of the customer waiting performance The light emitting means can be made to emit rainbow light (rainbow light), and the rainbow light emission in the customer waiting performance is restricted from starting based on the operation of the first operation means (rainbow light does not occur even if the performance button 17 is pressed during the customer waiting demo performance A), but can be ended when the start condition based on the operation of the second operation means is met (rainbow light emission ends when a start winning occurs based on the operation of the launch handle 15), and the rainbow light emission in the variable performance can be started based on the operation of the first operation means (rainbow light emission occurs when the performance button 17 is pressed in the successful decision performance of the variable performance, a rainbow icon is displayed when the performance button 17 is pressed in the hold button performance, rainbow light emission occurs when the performance button 17 is pressed during the development to SP reach, rainbow light emission occurs when the back button is pressed and held during SP reach), but is restricted from ending based on the operation of the first operation means (rainbow light emission in the variable performance does not end when the performance button 17 is pressed). This allows the rainbow light emission to be executed favorably.

(So) A sixth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of awarding a gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player depending on the result of the game, comprising a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variable performance that changes the display of the performance symbols depending on the judgment result of the judgment means, a light-emitting means capable of emitting light (frame performance lamp 10c, board surface LED 5b, image display device 70-73, LED of movable performance device 77, LED of performance button 17), and an operation means (performance button 17) that can be operated by the player, and the performance control means controls the light-emitting means to emit rainbow light. The rainbow light can be illuminated (rainbow light), and the rainbow light can be activated based on the operation of the operating means. The rainbow light can be activated based on the operation of the operating means. The rainbow light can be activated based on the operation of the operating means. The rainbow light can be activated based on the operation of the operating means. The rainbow light can be activated based on the operation of the operating means. The rainbow light can be activated based on the operation of the operating means. The rainbow light can be activated based on the operation of the operating means. The rainbow light can be activated based on the operation of the operating means. The rainbow light can be activated based on the operation of the operating means. The rainbow light can be activated based on the operation of the operating means. The rainbow light can be activated based on the operation of the operating means. The rainbow light can be activated based on the operation of the operating means. The rainbow light can be activated based on the operation of the operating means. The rainbow light can be activated based on the operation of the operating means.

(c) A seventh configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of awarding gaming value (gaming media, gaming media data) to a player depending on the result of the game, comprising an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), and a judgment means ( The game machine includes a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling a specific game state (probability game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state, a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a game performance that variably displays performance symbols on a display means (image display device) according to a judgment result of the judgment means, and a light emitting means (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76) capable of emitting light, and the performance control means is During the game (during the variable performance), the light-emitting means can be made to emit rainbow light (rainbow light), and the game performance includes a first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and a second performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) can be executed after the first performance (between the start of the variable performance and the deciding performance) and the light-emitting means can be made to emit rainbow light when the first game performance is executed in the normal game state and when the first game performance is executed in the specific game state, and the ease of executing the rainbow light in the first performance is different when the first game performance is executed in the normal game state than when the first game performance is executed in the specific game state. This allows rainbow light to be executed favorably.

(T) An eighth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of awarding a gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player depending on the result of the game, comprising a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variable performance that changes the display of the performance pattern depending on the judgment result of the judgment means, a light-emitting means capable of emitting light (frame performance lamp 10c, board surface LED 5b, image display devices 70-73, LED of movable performance device 77, LED of performance button 17), and an operation means (performance button 17) that can be operated by the player, and the performance control means is capable of causing the light-emitting means to emit rainbow light (rainbow light). The rainbow light emission includes a first rainbow light emission (rainbow light emission during a variable performance) in which a specific performance (vibration performance of the performance button 17) is executed using the operating means, and a second rainbow light emission (rainbow light emission during a customer waiting demo performance A) in which a specific performance (vibration performance of the performance button 17) is not executed using the operating means, and the first rainbow light emission has a greater number of light emission means capable of executing the rainbow light emission than the second rainbow light emission (rainbow light emission during a customer waiting demo performance A does not use the image display devices 70 to 73, the LEDs of the movable performance device 77, or the LEDs of the performance button 17, but rainbow light emission during a variable performance uses the image display devices 70 to 73, the LEDs of the movable performance device 77, the LEDs of the performance button 17, and the LEDs of the launch handle 15). This allows the rainbow light emission to be executed optimally.

(N) A ninth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of awarding a gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player depending on the result of a game, comprising: a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player; a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variable performance that changes and displays a performance pattern depending on the judgment result of the judgment means; and a light-emitting means capable of emitting light (frame performance lamp 10c, board surface LED 5b, image display devices 70 to 73, LED of movable performance device 77, LED of performance button 17), and the performance control means is configured to control a predetermined timing ( For example, it is possible to notify the result of the judgment in a deciding performance, and when notifying that the special game will be executed at the predetermined timing, it is possible to execute a first rainbow light emission (rainbow effect display) that causes a first light emitting means (image display devices 70-73) to emit rainbow light (rainbow light emission), and a second rainbow light emission (rainbow light emission in each lighting device) that causes a second light emitting means (frame performance lamp 10c, board surface LED 5b, LED of movable performance device 77, LED of performance button 17) different from the first light emitting means to emit rainbow light (rainbow light emission), and the timing at which the first rainbow light emission ends is different from the timing at which the second rainbow light emission ends. This allows the rainbow light emission to be executed in an optimal manner.

(n) A tenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of awarding gaming value (gaming media, gaming media data) to a player depending on the result of a game, comprising a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of executing a variable presentation that changes the display of presentation symbols depending on the judgment result of the judgment means, and a light-emitting means capable of emitting light (frame presentation lamp 10c, board surface LED 5b, image display devices 70-73, LED of movable presentation device 77, LED of presentation button 17), and the presentation control means, during the execution of the special game, The light-emitting means can be made to emit rainbow light (rainbow light), and during the execution of the special game, a first instruction performance instructing the operation of the operating means (image 70rs encouraging right hit and image 70rb encouraging right hit are both displayed) and a second instruction performance instructing the operation of the operating means in a manner different from the first instruction performance (image 70rb encouraging right hit is not displayed, and only image 70rs encouraging right hit is displayed) can be executed, and the rainbow light emission in the specified light-emitting means (first image display device 70) is more likely to be executed when the second instruction performance is executed than when the first instruction performance is executed. This allows rainbow light emission to be executed favorably.

(R) As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of awarding gaming value (gaming media, gaming media data) to a player depending on the result of a game, the machine is provided with a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of executing a variable presentation that changes the display of a presentation pattern depending on the judgment result of the judgment means, and the presentation control means is provided on a display means (image display devices 70 to 73). It is possible to display first information related to the granting of the game value (the number of game values expected to be granted in a special game) and second information related to the granting of the game value, which is information different from the first information (the number of game values granted during a special game, the cumulative number of granted game values when special games are played consecutively, the cumulative number of granted game values when the cumulative number of granted game values reaches a predetermined number and is displayed in the results), and the first information and the second information are characterized by different easiness of executing the rainbow display. This allows for suitable execution of rainbow light emission.

(m) A twelfth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of awarding gaming value (gaming media, gaming media data) to a player depending on the result of a game, the machine comprising: a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player; a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping control of the progress of the game (activating an acquisition upper limit device) depending on the amount of the gaming value (MY = 95,000) awarded to the player from the establishment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0); and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of executing a variable presentation on a display means (image display device) depending on the judgment result of the judgment means, the special game being a first special game (a four-round jackpot corresponding to special pattern 03) and the There is a second special game (a 10-round jackpot corresponding to special symbol 02) different from the first special game, and the presentation control means can execute a pre-notification (pre-operation notification of the winning limit device) that notifies that the progress control of the game may be stopped by the progress stopping means, and the display means can display first information (displaying "O△ Bonus") related to the first special game and second information (displaying "Super O△ Bonus") related to the second special game, and the first information can be restricted from being displayed in rainbow colors, but the second information can be displayed in rainbow colors, and when the pre-notification is executed during the rainbow display of the second information, the rainbow display of the second information does not end by the execution of the pre-notification. This allows rainbow light emission to be executed in an optimal manner.

(Contents of the invention for executing notification related to the operation of the acquisition limit device)
In the conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines capable of granting a gaming value to a player according to the result of the game. Among such gaming machines, there are some that can stop the progress control of the game according to the value amount of the gaming value granted to the player (for example, see JP 2023-256671 A). However, in the gaming machines described in the above patent documents, there is a problem that the interest in the game decreases due to the stop of the progress control of the game.

◆A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of awarding gaming value (gaming media, gaming media data) to a player depending on the result of a game, the machine comprising: a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player; a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping control of the progress of the game (activating an acquisition upper limit device) depending on the amount of the gaming value (MY = 95,000) awarded to the player from the establishment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0); and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of executing a variable presentation that displays a variable number of presentation patterns on a display means (image display device) depending on the judgment result of the judgment means, the presentation control means being It is possible to control between one presentation mode (e.g., presentation mode A) and a second presentation mode (e.g., presentation mode B), and is possible to execute a pre-notification (pre-operation notification of the acquisition upper limit device) that notifies that the progress control of the game may be stopped by the progress stopping means, and is possible to variably display the presentation pattern on a first variable path during the variable presentation of the first presentation mode, and is possible to variably display the presentation pattern on a second variable path during the variable presentation of the second presentation mode, and is possible to execute the pre-notification in the same manner (design, character arrangement, display position, sound, etc.) during the variable presentation of the first presentation mode and during the variable presentation of the second presentation mode. In this way, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of granting gaming value (gaming media, gaming media data) to a player depending on the result of a game, the gaming machine comprising: a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player; a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping control of the progress of the game (activating an acquisition upper limit device) depending on the amount of the gaming value granted to the player (MY = 95,000) from the establishment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0); and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of executing a variable presentation that variably displays multiple presentation patterns on a display means (image display device) depending on the judgment result of the determination means, the presentation control means being capable of selecting a first presentation mode (e.g., presentation mode A) and a second presentation mode (e.g., presentation Mode B), and the display means can display a pre-warning image (pre-warning image CZ of the pre-operation warning of the winning limit device) that notifies the player that the progress control of the game may be stopped by the progress stop means, and the performance pattern can be displayed variably on a first variable path during the variable performance of the first performance mode, and the performance pattern can be displayed variably on a second variable path during the variable performance of the second performance mode, and when the performance pattern switches from the first variable path to the second variable path, a switching performance (mode switching performance) that limits the visibility of the performance pattern can be executed, and even when the limit of the performance pattern is restricted by the execution of the switching performance, the pre-warning image can be continued to be displayed in a visible state. In this way, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of awarding gaming value (gaming media, gaming media data) to a player according to the result of a game, comprising: a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player; a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping control of the progress of the game (activating an acquisition upper limit device) according to the amount of the gaming value (MY = 95,000) awarded to the player from the establishment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0); and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of executing a variable presentation that displays a variable number of presentation symbols on a display means (image display device) according to the judgment result of the determination means, The first presentation mode can be controlled to a first presentation mode (e.g., presentation mode A) and a second presentation mode (e.g., presentation mode B), variable BGM can be output during the variable presentation, a pre-notification (pre-operation notification of the acquisition upper limit device) can be executed to notify that the progress control of the game may be stopped by the progress stopping means, different types of variable BGM can be output during the variable presentation in the first presentation mode and during the variable presentation in the second presentation mode, and the pre-notification can be executed in the same manner (design, character arrangement, display position, sound, etc. of the pre-notification image CZ) during the variable presentation in the first presentation mode and during the variable presentation in the second presentation mode. In this way, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of awarding gaming value (gaming media, gaming media data) to a player according to the result of a game, the gaming machine comprising: a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player; a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping control of the progress of the game (activating an acquisition upper limit device) according to the amount of the gaming value (MY = 95,000) awarded to the player from the establishment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0); and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of executing a variable presentation that displays a variable number of presentation patterns on a display means (image display device) according to the judgment result of the determination means, The stage can be controlled to a first presentation mode (e.g., presentation mode A) and a second presentation mode (e.g., presentation mode B), can display a background image while the variable presentation is being performed, can execute a pre-notification (pre-operation notification of the acquisition upper limit device) that notifies the player that the progress control of the game may be stopped by the progress stopping means, can display different types of background images during the variable presentation in the first presentation mode and during the variable presentation in the second presentation mode, and can execute the pre-notification in the same manner (design, character arrangement, display position, sound, etc.) during the variable presentation in the first presentation mode and during the variable presentation in the second presentation mode. In this way, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of awarding gaming value (gaming media, gaming media data) to a player according to the result of a game, the gaming machine comprising: a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player; a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping control of the progress of the game (activating an acquisition upper limit device) according to the amount of the gaming value (MY = 95,000) awarded to the player from the establishment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0); and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of executing a variable presentation that displays a plurality of presentation patterns on a display means (image display device) according to the judgment result of the determination means, the presentation control means being configured to operate in a first presentation mode (e.g., The first and second presentation modes (e.g., presentation mode A) and the second presentation mode (e.g., presentation mode B) can be controlled, and in the variable presentation, the presentation pattern can be made to perform a presentation action (pre-variation action) before the presentation pattern is variably displayed, and a pre-notification (pre-operation notification of the winning limit device) can be executed to notify that the progress control of the game may be stopped by the progress stopping means, different types of presentation actions can be executed during the variable presentation in the first presentation mode and during the variable presentation in the second presentation mode, and the pre-notification can be executed in the same manner (design, character arrangement, display position, etc.) during the variable presentation in the first presentation mode and during the variable presentation in the second presentation mode. In this way, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A sixth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of awarding gaming value (gaming media, gaming media data) to a player depending on the result of a game, the gaming machine comprising: a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player; a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping control of the progress of the game (activating an acquisition upper limit device) depending on the amount of the gaming value (MY = 95,000) awarded to the player from the establishment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0); and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of executing a variable presentation that displays a plurality of presentation patterns on a display means (image display device) depending on the judgment result of the determination means, the presentation control means being configured to select a first presentation mode (e.g., presentation mode A) and The first and second presentation modes (e.g., presentation mode B) can be controlled, and in the variable presentation, the presentation pattern can be made to perform a presentation action (pre-stop action, same-color chance eye effect) before the presentation pattern is stopped and displayed, and a pre-notification (pre-operation notification of the winning limit device) can be executed to notify that the progress control of the game may be stopped by the progress stop means, different types of presentation actions can be executed during the variable presentation in the first presentation mode and during the variable presentation in the second presentation mode, and the pre-notification can be executed in the same manner (design, character arrangement, display position, etc.) during the variable presentation in the first presentation mode and during the variable presentation in the second presentation mode. In this way, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A seventh configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of awarding gaming value (gaming media, gaming media data) to a player depending on the result of the game, comprising: a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player; a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping control of the progress of the game (activating an acquisition upper limit device) depending on the amount of the gaming value (MY = 95,000) awarded to the player from the establishment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0); and a display means (image display device) that displays multiple performance patterns depending on the determination result of the determination means. and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of executing a variable presentation that changes the display of the variable presentation, the presentation control means being capable of executing a specific presentation (mode switching presentation, development presentation, eye-catching presentation, etc.) that changes the form of the presentation while the variable presentation is being executed, and being capable of displaying on the display means an advance notification image (advance notification image CZ of a notification before the operation of the winning limit device) that notifies that the progress control of the game may be stopped by the progress stopping means, and while the specific presentation is being executed, visibility of the presentation pattern is restricted, but visibility of the advance notification image is possible. In this way, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆An eighth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of awarding gaming value (gaming media, gaming media data) to a player depending on the result of a game, comprising an operation means (effect button 17, etc.) operable by the player, a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a pre-judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game prior to the judgment means, a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping control of the progress of the game (activating an acquisition upper limit device) depending on the amount of the gaming value (MY = 95,000) awarded to the player from the establishment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0), and an effect control means capable of executing a variable effect that changes and displays multiple effect patterns on a display means (image display device) depending on the judgment result of the judgment means. The presentation control means is capable of executing a look-ahead presentation (continuous preview presentation, icon change presentation, etc.) across one or more of the variable presentations according to the result of the judgment by the advance judgment means, and is capable of executing an advance notification (an advance notification before the acquisition upper limit device is activated) that notifies the player that the progress control of the game may be stopped by the progress stop means, and is capable of switching the variation path of the presentation pattern between a first variation path (e.g., the variation path of presentation mode A) and a second variation path (e.g., the variation path of presentation mode B) without the operation of the operation means, and is capable of executing the advance notification while restricting the switching of the variation path of the presentation pattern from the first variation path to the second variation path during the execution of the look-ahead presentation across multiple variable presentations. In this way, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A ninth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of granting a gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player depending on the result of the game, comprising an operation means (effect button 17, etc.) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means (main control board 110) that can judge whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, a pre-judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game before the judgment means, and the gaming value granted to the player when a predetermined condition is met (MY = 0), The game is equipped with a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping the progress control of the game (activating the acquisition upper limit device) according to the value amount of the game value (MY = 95000), and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variable performance in which a display means (image display device) variably displays a plurality of performance patterns according to the judgment result of the judgment means, and the performance control means is capable of executing a pre-reading performance (continuous notice performance, icon change performance, etc.) covering one or a plurality of the variable performances according to the judgment result of the advance judgment means. and a notification image (pre-notification image CZ, an operation notification image of an acquisition upper limit device) relating to the stop of the progress control of the game by the progress stop means can be displayed on the display means, and the change path of the performance symbol can be switched between a first change path (e.g., a change path of a performance mode A) and a second change path (e.g., a change path of a performance mode B) without the operation of the operation means, and the notification image can be switched from a first mode display to a second mode display (e.g., from a pre-notification image CZ "about 5000 remaining" to "about 4500 remaining" to the first variation path, or from a pre-notification image CZ to an operation notification image, and during the execution of the pre-reading performance across multiple variation performances, switching the variation path of the performance symbol from the first variation path to the second variation path is restricted, but it is possible to switch the notification image from the first mode display to the second mode display (for example, switching from a pre-notification image CZ "Approximately 5000 remaining" to "Approximately 4500 remaining", switching from a pre-notification image CZ to an operation notification image, etc.). In this way, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆The tenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of awarding gaming value (gaming media, gaming media data) to a player depending on the result of the game, comprising an operation means (effect button 17, etc.) operable by the player, a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a pre-judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game prior to the judgment means, a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping control of the progress of the game (activating an acquisition upper limit device) depending on the amount of the gaming value (MY = 95,000) awarded to the player from the establishment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0), and a variable effect capable of executing a variable effect in which a plurality of effect patterns are displayed on a display means (image display device) depending on the judgment result of the judgment means. The game device includes a control means (performance control board 130), and the performance control means can execute a look-ahead performance (continuous preview performance, icon change performance, etc.) across one or more of the variable performances according to the judgment result of the advance judgment means, can execute a specific notification (notification that the acquisition upper limit device is operating) that notifies that the progress control of the game has been stopped by the progress stop means, and can switch the variable path of the performance pattern between a first variable path (e.g., the variable path of performance mode A) and a second variable path (e.g., the variable path of performance mode B) without operating the operating means, and during the execution of the look-ahead performance across multiple variable performances, switching the variable path of the performance pattern from the first variable path to the second variable path is restricted, but the specific notification can be executed. In this way, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆An eleventh configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of awarding gaming value (gaming media, gaming media data) to a player depending on the result of a game, the gaming machine comprising: movable members (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b, etc.) operable in a predetermined manner; a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player; a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping control of the progress of the game (activating an acquisition upper limit device) depending on the amount of the gaming value (MY = 95,000) awarded to the player from the establishment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0); and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of executing a variable presentation that causes a display means (image display device) to display multiple presentation patterns in a variable manner depending on the determination result of the determination means; The presentation control means can execute the first action presentation of the movable member (such as a pre-reading action presentation) and the second action presentation of the movable member (such as an action presentation during a pseudo consecutive win, an action presentation during a development performance, an action presentation during a successful win, etc.) in the variation presentation, can execute a pre-notification (pre-operation notification of the acquisition upper limit device) that notifies the player that the progress control of the game may be stopped by the progress stop means, and can switch the variation path of the presentation symbol between a first variation path (e.g., the variation path of presentation mode A) and a second variation path (e.g., the variation path of presentation mode B). During the execution of the first action presentation, the variation path of the presentation symbol can be restricted from being switched from the first variation path to the second variation path, but the pre-notification can be executed. In this way, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A twelfth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of granting gaming value (gaming media, gaming media data) to a player depending on the result of a game, which comprises movable members (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b, etc.) that can operate in a predetermined manner, a determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and a progress control for the game depending on the amount of the gaming value (MY = 95,000) granted to the player from the establishment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0). The present invention further comprises a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping the control (activating an acquisition upper limit device) and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variable performance in which a display means (image display device) variably displays a plurality of performance symbols according to the judgment result of the judgment means, and the performance control means is capable of executing a first action performance (pre-reading action performance, etc.) of the movable member and a second action performance (action performance during pseudo consecutive, action performance during development performance, action performance upon successful decision, etc.) of the movable member in the variable performance. The display means is capable of displaying a notification image (pre-notification image CZ, an operation notification image of an acquisition upper limit device) related to the stop of the progress control of the game by the progress stop means, the variation path of the performance symbol is switchable between a first variation path (e.g., a variation path of a performance mode A) and a second variation path (e.g., a variation path of a performance mode B), and the notification image is switched from a first mode display to a second mode display different from the first mode display (e.g., from a pre-notification image CZ "about 5000 remaining" to "about 5000 remaining"). During the execution of the first action presentation, it is possible to switch the movement path of the presentation pattern from the first movement path to the second movement path, but it is possible to switch the notification image from the first mode display to the second mode display (for example, switching from the advance notification image CZ "Approximately 5000 remaining" to "Approximately 4500 remaining", switching from the advance notification image CZ to an operation notification image, etc.). In this way, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of awarding gaming value (gaming media, gaming media data) to a player depending on the result of a game, comprising movable members (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b, etc.) operable in a predetermined manner, a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping control of the progress of the game (activating an acquisition upper limit device) depending on the amount of the gaming value (MY = 95,000) awarded to the player from the establishment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0), and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of executing a variable presentation that causes a display means (image display device) to display multiple presentation patterns in a variable manner depending on the judgment result of the judgment means. The presentation control means is capable of executing a first action presentation of the movable member (such as a pre-reading action presentation) and a second action presentation of the movable member (such as an action presentation during a pseudo consecutive win, an action presentation during a development performance, an action presentation during a successful win, etc.) in the variation presentation, and is capable of executing a specific notification (notification that the acquisition upper limit device is in operation) that notifies that the progress control of the game has been stopped by the progress stop means, and is capable of switching the variation path of the presentation pattern between a first variation path (for example, the variation path of presentation mode A) and a second variation path (for example, the variation path of presentation mode B), and while the first operation presentation is being performed, switching the variation path of the presentation pattern from the first variation path to the second variation path is restricted, but it is possible to execute the specific notification. In this way, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of awarding gaming value (gaming media, gaming media data) to a player depending on the result of a game, comprising an operating member (effect button 17, etc.) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means (main control board 110) that can judge whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, a progress stopping means (main control board 110) that can stop control of the progress of the game (activate an acquisition upper limit device) depending on the amount of the gaming value (MY = 95,000) awarded to the player from the establishment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0), and a display means (image display device) that displays an image depending on the judgment result of the judgment means. and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of executing a variable presentation in which a plurality of presentation symbols are displayed in a variable manner using a display device (a display control board 130), the presentation control means being capable of executing operation presentations (such as a dialogue preview presentation, a pseudo consecutive presentation, a development presentation, a cut-in presentation, and a deciding presentation) that perform predetermined presentations in response to operation of the operation means during an effective operation period that occurs in the variable presentation, and being capable of executing a pre-notification (pre-operation notification of the winning limit device) that notifies the player that the progress control of the game may be stopped by the progress stopping means, and being capable of executing the pre-notification during the effective operation period related to the operation presentation. In this way, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of granting a gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player according to the result of a game, the gaming machine comprising: an operation member (effect button 17, etc.) operable by the player; a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player; a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping control of the progress of the game (activating an acquisition upper limit device) according to the amount of the gaming value granted to the player (MY = 95,000) from the establishment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0); and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variable performance that causes a display means (image display device) to variably display multiple performance patterns according to the judgment result of the judgment means, the performance control means being capable of executing an operation performance (dialogue advancement performance, pseudo consecutive performance, development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, etc.) that performs a predetermined performance according to the operation of the operation means during the operation effective period that occurs in the variable performance, and the display means a notification image (pre-notification image CZ, an operation notification image of an acquisition upper limit device) relating to the stop of the control of the progress of the game by the progress stopping means, and the notification image can be switched from a first mode display to a second mode display different from the first mode display (for example, switching from the pre-notification image CZ "about 5000 remaining" to "about 4500 remaining", switching from the pre-notification image CZ to an operation notification image, etc.), and the operation effects (dialogue advancement effects, pseudo consecutive effects, development effects, cut-in effects, etc.) can be displayed. During the occurrence of the effective operation period related to the winning/determining performance, switching the variation path of the performance symbol from a first variation path (e.g., the variation path of performance mode A) to a second variation path (e.g., the variation path of performance mode B) is restricted, but it is possible to switch the notification image from the first mode display to the second mode display (e.g., switching from advance notification image CZ "Approximately 5000 remaining" to "Approximately 4500 remaining", switching from advance notification image CZ to an operation notification image, etc.). In this way, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A sixteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of awarding gaming value (gaming media, gaming media data) to a player depending on the result of a game, comprising an operating member (effect button 17, etc.) that can be operated by the player, a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, a progress stopping means (main control board 110) capable of stopping control of the progress of the game (activating an acquisition upper limit device) depending on the amount of the gaming value (MY = 95,000) awarded to the player from the establishment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0), and a display means (image and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of executing a variable presentation that displays a plurality of presentation symbols in a variable manner on a display device (a display device), the presentation control means being capable of executing operation presentations (such as dialogue preview presentations, pseudo consecutive presentations, development presentations, cut-in presentations, and deciding presentations) that perform predetermined presentations in response to operation of the operation means during an effective operation period that occurs in the variable presentation, and being capable of executing a specific notification (notification that the winning limit device is operating) that notifies that the progress control of the game has been stopped by the progress stopping means, and being capable of executing the specific notification during the effective operation period related to the operation presentation. In this way, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed simultaneously (in parallel), and the second special symbol is displayed preferentially. However, the gaming machine may be configured to display the first special symbol and the second special symbol simultaneously (in parallel), or the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be displayed in the order of the winning balls entering the first start hole 45 and the second start hole 47.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is controlled to a time-saving gaming state or a probability variable gaming state until the variable display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times after the end of the first jackpot game, and 10,000 times after the end of the second and third jackpot games), but it may also be controlled to a time-saving gaming state or a probability variable gaming state until the variable display of the normal symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times after the end of the first jackpot game, and 10,000 times after the end of the second and third jackpot games).

The gaming machine 1 of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine (managed gaming machine) that circulates gaming balls, but can also be used in a pachinko gaming machine (general pachinko machine) that does not circulate gaming balls. It can also be used in a reel type gaming machine (general slot machine) that awards a predetermined amount of medals to a player when a winning symbol is stopped and displayed on an active line by a game using medals. It can also be used in a reel type gaming machine (managed gaming machine) that awards a predetermined amount of gaming value (virtual medals) to a player when a winning symbol is stopped and displayed on an active line by a game using gaming value (virtual medals) (satisfying the awarding condition). It can also be used in a Janball gaming machine and an Arrange Ball gaming machine.

Furthermore, the embodiments disclosed herein should be considered to be illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

1 Gaming machine 5 Gaming board 17 Performance button 20 Counting button 43 General prize opening 44 General map gate 45 First start opening 47 Second start opening 50 Large prize opening 70 First image display device 71 Second image display device 72 Third image display device 73 Fourth image display device 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
120 Frame control board 120a Frame control CPU
121 Game ball count clear switch 122 Ball removal switch 123 Error release switch 125 Frame control display 130 Performance control board 130a Sub-CPU
135 Game ball number display 170 Dedicated unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of acquiring judgment information based on establishment of a start condition and awarding a gaming value based on the judgment information ,
a special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to a player;
A performance control means capable of variably displaying a plurality of columns of performance symbols according to the judgment information ;
A light emitting means capable of emitting light;
An operation means operable by a player,
The operation means includes:
a first operating means and a second operating means different from the first operating means;
The performance control means includes:
The presentation mode for executing the variable display can be executed by a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode,
In a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not executed , a customer waiting performance capable of displaying predetermined information can be executed,
During the execution of the variable display or the execution of the customer waiting performance, the light emitting means can be made to emit rainbow light,
While the predetermined information is being displayed,
The light emitting means may be restricted from emitting rainbow light,
The variation display includes:
A first variation display in which a path of variation of the performance pattern of a specific column in the first performance mode is a first path;
In the second performance mode, a path of the variation of the performance pattern of the specific column is a second path different from the first path, and a second variation display is provided.
The light emitting means is
a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means;
In the customer waiting performance, the start of rainbow light emission in the second light -emitting means can be limited based on the operation of the first operating means, but the rainbow light emission in the second light-emitting means can be ended when a start condition based on the operation of the second operating means is satisfied;
In the variable display , the start of rainbow light emission in the first light-emitting means can be executed based on the operation of the first operating means, but the end of the rainbow light emission in the first light-emitting means based on the operation of the first operating means is restricted ,
When the variable display is started, a start performance can be executed,
The start performance includes:
There is a first aspect and a second aspect different from the first aspect,
The start performance can be made different between the first and second variable displays,
A gaming machine characterized in that in the first variable display, a predetermined presentation that gives an expectation of the execution of the special game is more likely to be executed when the start presentation of the second mode is executed than when the start presentation of the first mode is executed .